CA08100014E 79035 Catalog

46416-Attachment 46416-Attachment 46416-Attachment 782113 Batch12 unilog cesco-content

46416-Attachment 46416-Attachment 46416-Attachment Batch12 unilog cesco-content

342951-Catalog 342951-Catalog 342951-Catalog 782113 Batch4 unilog cesco-content

342951-Catalog 342951-Catalog 342951-Catalog 782114 Batch4 unilog cesco-content

100577-Attachment 100577-Attachment 100577-Attachment 782113 Batch4 unilog cesco-content

2014-10-17

: Pdf 79035-Catalog 79035-Catalog Batch10 unilog

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 621

DownloadCA08100014E  79035-Catalog
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Electrical Sector Solutions
Volume 12: Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions

Eaton
1000 Eaton Boulevard
Cleveland, OH 44122
United States
Eaton.com
© 2013 Eaton
All Rights Reserved
Printed in USA
Publication No. CA08100014E / Z14331
October 2013

Eaton is a registered trademark.
All other trademarks are property
of their respective owners.

The power of fusion.
1833

1874

1886

1893

1897

1899

1906

1908

1911

1914

1934

1961

1962

1963

1967

1977

1983

1984

1989

There’s a certain energy at Eaton. It’s the power of uniting some of the
world’s most respected names to build a brand you can trust to meet
your every power management need.
Eaton is dedicated to ensuring that reliable, efficient and safe power
is available when it’s needed most. Building on over 100 years of
experience in electrical power management, the experts at Eaton
deliver customized, integrated solutions to solve your most critical
challenges. To learn more, visit Eaton.com/Electrical

All of the above are trademarks of Eaton or its affiliates. Eaton has a license to use the Westinghouse
brand name in Asia Pacific. ©2013 Eaton.

Contents
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Motor Control

Switchgear

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Loadcenters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Meter Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Dry-Type Distribution Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Busway (Low Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

IQ Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

Communication Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

Programmable Logic Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

Motor Control Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14

Distribution Switchboards (Low Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

High Resistance Grounding System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16

Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

Medium Voltage Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18

Network Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eaton’s Electrical Services & Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sales & Service Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions
Appendix 2—Alphabetical Product Index
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

19
20
21
22
23
24

1
2
3
4

Copyright
Dimensions, Weights and Ratings
Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not be used
for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available upon request.
All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without notice. Photographs
are representative of production units.

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Terms and Conditions
All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. When price changes occur,
they are published in Eaton’s Price and Availability Digest (PAD). All orders accepted by
Eaton’s Electrical Sector are subject to the general terms and conditions as set forth in
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions.

Technical and Descriptive Publications
This catalog contains brief technical data for proper selection of products. Further information
is available in the form of technical information publications and in illustrated brochures.
If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton Products Distributor,
call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our website at www.eaton.com.

Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21
Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application in facilities
or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission for atomic purposes,
under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of these products in a safety-related
application in any nuclear facility licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission.

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

WARNING
The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions of the
U.S. National Electrical Code® and/or other local codes or industry standards that are pertinent
to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these codes and standards
could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment.
These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise that are not covered
sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products
Distributor or Sales Office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any prior
or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire
obligation of Eaton’s Electrical Sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties
is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or
modify the existing warranty.

24
25

Copyright ©2013, Eaton, All Rights Reserved.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Introduction

Eaton is a global leader in power distribution, power quality,
control and automation, and monitoring products.
At Eaton, we believe a reliable, efficient and safe power system is the foundation of every
successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly
skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage.
In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining powerful customer relationships built
on a foundation of excellence. From the products we manufacture to our dedicated customer
service and support, we know what’s important to you.

Solutions
Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems management with a holistic and strategic
approach, leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions and services. We focus on
the following three areas in all we do:
●

Reliability—maintain the
appropriate level of power
continuity without
disruption or unexpected
downtime

●

Efficiency—minimize
energy usage, operating
costs, equipment footprint
and environmental impact

●

Safety—identify and
mitigate electrical hazards
to protect what you value
most

Using the Eaton Catalog Library
As we grow, it becomes increasingly difficult to include all products in one or two comprehensive
catalogs. Knowing that each user has their specific needs, we have created a library of catalogs for our
products that when complete, will contain 15 volumes. Since the volumes will continuously be a work
in progress and updated, each volume will stand alone. Refer to our volume directory, MZ08100001E,
for a quick glance of where to look for the products you need. The 15 volumes include:
●

●

●

●

●

●

Volume 1—Residential
and Light Commercial
(CA08100002E)
Volume 2—Commercial
Distribution (CA08100003E)
Volume 3—Power
Distribution and Control
Assemblies (CA08100004E)
Volume 4—Circuit
Protection (CA08100005E)
Volume 5—Motor Control
and Protection
(CA08100006E)
Volume 6—Solid-State
Motor Control
(CA08100007E)

●

●

●

●

●

Volume 7—Logic Control,
Operator Interface and
Connectivity Solutions
(CA08100008E)
Volume 8—Sensing
Solutions (CA08100010E)
Volume 9—Original
Equipment Manufacturer
(CA08100011E)
Volume 10—Enclosed
Control (CA08100012E)
Volume 11—Vehicle and
Commercial Controls
(CA08100013E)

●

●

●

●

Volume 12—Aftermarket,
Renewal Parts and Life
Extension Solutions
(CA08105001E)
Volume 13—Counters,
Timers and Tachometers
(CA08100015E)—Available
in electronic format only
Volume 14—Fuses
(CA08100016E)—Available
in electronic format only
Volume 15—Solar Inverters
and Electrical Balance of
System (CA08100018E)

These volumes are not all-inclusive of every product, but they are meant to be an overview
of our product lines. For our full range of product solutions and additional product information,
consult Eaton.com/electrical and other catalogs and product guides in our literature library.
These references include:
●

The Consulting Application
Guide (CA08104001E)

●

The Eaton Power Quality
Product Guide (COR01FYA)

If you don’t have the volume that contains the product or information that you are looking for,
not to worry. You can access every volume of the catalog library at Eaton.com/electrical in the
Literature Library.
By installing our Automatic Tab Updater (ATU), you can be sure you always have the most recent
version of each volume and tab.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions

CA08100014E—November 2013

www.eaton.com

i

Introduction

Icons
Green Leaf
Eaton Green Solutions are products, systems or solutions that represent Eaton
benchmarks for environmental performance. The green leaf symbol is our
promise that the solution has been reviewed and documented as offering
exceptional, industry-leading environmental benefits to customers, consumers
and our communities. Though all of Eaton’s products and solutions are
designed to meet or exceed applicable government standards related to
protecting the environment, our products with the Green Leaf designation
further provide “exceptional environmental benefit.”

Learn Online
When you see the Learn Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and search for
the product or training page. There you will find 100-level training courses,
podcasts, webcasts or games and puzzles to learn more.

Drawings Online
When you see the Drawings Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and find the
products page. There you will find a tab that includes helpful product drawings
and illustrations.

Contact Us
If you need additional help, you can find contact information
under the Customer Care heading of Eaton.com/electrical.

ii

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions

CA08100014E—November 2013

www.eaton.com

Introduction
Continuous Support for the
Installed Base

1

Introduction
Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logo History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eaton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Installed Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One Source for All Your Aftermarket Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What’s New? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Does the Shaded Area Mean? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eaton’s Electrical Business on the World Wide Web . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eaton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V12-T1-2
V12-T1-2
V12-T1-2
V12-T1-3
V12-T1-3
V12-T1-3
V12-T1-3
V12-T1-3
V12-T1-3
V12-T1-3
V12-T1-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T1-1

1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Introduction

Welcome
Welcome to the latest edition of Eaton’s Aftermarket, Renewal
Parts and Life Extension Solutions catalog (formerly YES catalog).
In this fifth expanded edition, you will find increased solutions to
extend the life, modernize and upgrade your installed base of
electrical distribution and industrial control equipment.

2009–Present

Logo History

2000–2009

The installed base of Westinghouse and Cutler-Hammer®
distribution and control equipment can be found everywhere.
Whether in an industrial facility such as paper, chemical,
pharmaceutical, auto and steel, or commercial installations
including universities, hospitals, airports and just about any
type of government building; you will find equipment that was
manufactured by Eaton or one of its acquired companies.
In some situations due to the age of the equipment, the original
nameplate information may be difficult to obtain. This is why the
logo history is provided. If all else fails, the logo on the front of
the equipment will help you identify when it was manufactured.
Knowing this, and the type of product, you can refer to the
applicable section of the catalog to find the solutions available
to support it.

Eaton
Eaton is backed by more than 100 years of history and experience.
This experience has resulted in many innovations in distribution
and industrial control products each incorporating leading-edge
technology to provide the highest value to our customers.
This same technology and engineering expertise is applied
to solutions to upgrade existing installed older equipment.
Our engineers and scientists are recognized throughout the
industry and around the world as experts in a wide range of
disciplines including: photoelectric optical technology, arc
interruption, vacuum technology, digital and analog electronics,
and communications technology.

1994–2000

1960–1994

1980–1994

1953–1960

1960–1980

1940–1953

1933–1960

1922–1940

1914–1933

1910–1922

1900–1914

1900–1910

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T1-2

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

Introduction

The Installed Base

Catalog Format

The installed base of electrical distribution and control
equipment is a product of the economic changes that have
occurred over the last 15 or 20 years.

Each section of the catalog includes the following elements:
●
●

They could:
●
●
●
●

●

Be operating beyond capacity
Have higher fault currents because of additions
Pose major safety issues
Cause increased unscheduled outages having a direct
impact on productivity

It has also been a witness to:
●
●
●

Reductions in budgets and people resources
Increases in maintenance intervals
Decreases in support from the original manufacturer

Where do you go for help?

One Source for All Your Aftermarket Needs
The Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions
catalog is a reference tool to help you identify existing electrical
distribution and control equipment and then provide a wide range
of solutions available from Eaton to support it. Regardless of the
vintage or the original manufacturer, we can provide solutions
that will extend the useful life of your existing equipment.

What’s New?
Our catalog has a new name to reflect our membership in the
family of electrical solutions catalogs—the Aftermarket, Renewal
Parts and Life Extension Solutions catalog replaces the former
YES (Your Electrical Solutions) catalog. It continues to offer
cutting-edge engineered life extension solutions—it just has
a new look and a new name.
Additionally, as the number of available solutions has grown, so
has the catalog. Incorporated in this latest edition are increased
capabilities that have been introduced since the last printing in
2003. For example, in order to address ongoing safety concerns,
Eaton has engineered the Arcflash Reduction Maintenance
System™ and the universal remote power racking system. Also,
there are new product offerings in the area of trip unit retrofit
kits, low voltage power breakers and medium voltage vacuum
replacement breakers, just to name a few. With changes to the
molded-case circuit breaker product line, this catalog is simpler
to use with an updated replacement breaker cross-reference
section. Additionally, automatic transfer switches and power
factor correction capacitors are included in brand-new tabs in
this edition.

Using the Catalog
You can find information in several ways. The Table of
Contents in the front and the detailed Alphabetical Product
Index in the back will refer you to the correct section. The
capabilities overview in Tab 2 highlights various capabilities,
and provides the tab number where that capability is listed.
Also included in this tab is a pictorial representation of a typical
distribution system illustrating the various products and where
they can be found.

●
●
●
●

Product Description
Product History
Product History Time Line
Replacement Capabilities
Technology Upgrades (where applicable)
Further Information
Pricing Information

1
2
3
4

Where relevant, Additional Information, Customer Required
Information, General Information and Support Services
are included.

What Does the Shaded Area Mean?
In some sections of the catalog, you will again see tables and
text that have been shaded. The shaded areas indicate obsolete
or discontinued product, and although the product is no longer
manufactured, it is still shown for historical reference. In the
molded-case circuit breaker section (Tab 3), many of the tables
have shaded areas. Although the product is no longer manufactured,
cross-reference tables have been developed to provide alternative
solutions using current manufactured molded-case circuit breakers.
The cross-reference tables begin on Page V12-T3-115 and are in
alphanumeric order, based on style or catalog number of the
obsolete or discontinued product.

Eaton’s Electrical Business on the World Wide Web
Our Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions
catalog is designed to be your everyday, at-your-fingertips, at-aglance reference for our wide range of products and services
that support your installed base. But it’s just the paper “tip” of
the electronic “iceberg” of continuously updated information that
you can access, online, anytime.
http://www.eaton.com

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Eaton
Eaton’s electrical business is a global leader with expertise
in power distribution and circuit protection; backup power
protection; control and automation; lighting and security;
structural solutions and wiring devices; solutions for harsh and
hazardous environments; and engineering services. Eaton is
positioned through its global solutions to answer today’s
most critical electrical power management challenges.
Eaton is a power management company providing energyefficient solutions that help our customers effectively manage
electrical, hydraulic and mechanical power. A global technology
leader, Eaton acquired Cooper Industries plc in November 2012.
The 2012 revenue of the combined companies was $21.8 billion
on a pro forma basis. Eaton has approximately 102,000
employees and sells products to customers in more than
175 countries. For more information, visit www.eaton.com.

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T1-3

Distribution System
Technology Upgrades
for the Installed Base

2

Distribution System
A Commitment to the Installed Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Components and Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Modernization and Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Products and Services Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V12-T2-2
V12-T2-2
V12-T2-2
V12-T2-4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T2-1

2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Distribution System
Capabilities Overview

Distribution System
A Commitment to the
Installed Base
Our employees are
committed to supporting
all Cutler-Hammer® and
Westinghouse® Distribution
and Control equipment, no
matter when it was
manufactured by Eaton’s
electrical business, or how
long it has been in service.
Our dedicated Aftermarket
Organization provides
products, services and
expertise through a focused
management team, sales
engineers and technicians
that work to keep customers’
equipment operating.
Eaton also offers multiple
solutions to extend the life
of other manufacturers’
equipment, including
modernization, technology
upgrades, reconditioning
and repair. Support for
other manufactures’
equipment include:
●
●
●
●
●
●

General Electric®
Square D®
Federal Pacific®
ITE®
Siemens®
Siemens-Allis™
Allen-Bradley®
Allis-Chalmers

15

●

16

Eaton’s innovative engineering
provides the highest level of
life extension to support the
industry’s installed base,
regardless of the original
manufacturer.

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

●

Replacement Components
and Renewal Parts
A full line of replacement
components and renewal
parts is available for the
existing installed base
of Cutler-Hammer and
Westinghouse equipment.
These replacement
components and renewal
parts are new, not used or
surplus material. The use
of original production tooling,
assembly fixtures, and
original specifications
and drawings guarantees
compatibility with existing
equipment.

V12-T2-2

Equipment Modernization
and Upgrades
Cutler-Hammer equipment
modernization and upgrades
can extend the life of your
existing equipment. They can
economically upgrade CutlerHammer and Westinghouse
products, as well as those of
other manufacturers. These
state-of-the-art upgrades are
engineered to provide:
●

●

●

●

●

Solutions for obsolete
electrical equipment
New technology for
aging equipment
Retrofit, repair and
remanufacturing processes
Monitoring, protection
and control capabilities
to your system
Genuine new replacement
components and renewal
parts

Switchgear Fluidized Epoxy Bus
Motor Control Center Bucket Retrofits

Freedom™ 2100, Advantage™
and IT. replacement starter
units can be used to increase
the capacity of a motor control
center without investing in a
completely new assembly.
Competitive retrofits and
new buckets are also available
for other manufacturers’
units, using current Eaton
technology. See Tab 14.

Existing switchgear bus can be
replaced or returned to our
factory, regardless of the
original manufacturer for
reinsulation, using the custom
fluidized epoxy bed process. It
is available from 600V to 15 kV
for switchgear, bus runs and
other equipment. See Tab 17.

Medium Voltage Starter Upgrades

Breaker Reconditioning and Trip
System Upgrades with Arcflash
Reduction Maintenance System™

Digitrip™ RMS trip unit
retrofit kits are available for
Eaton, Westinghouse and
other manufacturers of low
voltage power breakers.
These retrofits will improve
circuit protection while
increasing breaker and
electrical system reliability.
See Tab 17.

Power Breaker Replacement

New DB, DS, DSII,
Magnum™ DS and SPB
power breakers are available
for replacement, to fill existing
cells, or in a cell retrofit
package for upgrading existing
older low voltage switchgear.
These breakers are electrically
and mechanically identical to
the original vintages of DB,
DS, DSII, Magnum DS and
SPB breakers. See Tab 17.

Vacuum contactors can be
retrofitted or retrofilled into
existing medium voltage air
magnetic starters, achieving
the benefits of vacuum
technology without the
expense of a completely
new assembly. See Tab 13.

Replacement Vacuum Breakers

MVVR (Medium Voltage
Vacuum Replacement)
breakers provide a means to
cost-effectively modernize
existing air magnetic medium
voltage switchgear while
further increasing its effective
life. See Tab 17.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Distribution System
Capabilities Overview

2
1
2
3
4

SPD System Retrofits
PowerNet

Power Management Products

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer
PowerNet™ system is
designed to manage the
power distribution system.
This integrated power
management system is the
ideal tool to help manage
energy costs, to troubleshoot
power quality problems,
and to ensure the reliability
and integrity of the electrical
distribution system. See
Tab 11.

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer
IQ Metering and Protective
Relaying products are
multifunctional communicating
products based on microprocessor technology. They
are designed to replace
existing electromechanical
devices and can be applied
at low, medium and high
voltage points in the electrical
distribution system. These
devices offer communications
capabilities to link electrical
distribution equipment
to PowerNet Power
Management Software.
See Tab 10.

Protect solid-state devices
from the damaging effects
of transient overvoltages.
The Eaton SPD products can
be installed in low voltage
distribution gear or retrofitted
into existing switchboards,
panelboards and motor
control centers to eliminate
the effects of surges before it
reaches sensitive equipment.
See Tabs 4 and 17.

Circuit breaker replacements
and upgrades are designed
for use in panelboards,
switchboards, motor control
centers, control panels,
combination starters,
individual enclosures,
and bus duct plug-in units.
See Tabs 3, 4, 9 and 14.

6
7
8
9

Genuine LV Control Renewal Parts

Low Voltage High Resistance
Grounding Systems
Replacement Molded-Case
Breakers and Accessories

5

10

Submetering Retrofits

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ
Energy Sentinel submetering
device can be easily
retrofitted on Series C®
breakers, or those of other
manufacturers, in existing
equipment. When combined
with the PowerNet system,
the IQ Energy Sentinel can
now provide submetering
at numerous levels of
monitoring and energy
management. See Tabs 4
and 10.

Installation and Startup Services

Installation and startup
services can be provided for
Eaton equipment, as well as
equipment manufactured
by other organizations.
See Tab 23.

Genuine factory-warranted
low voltage control renewal
parts are available to support
the complete line of CutlerHammer and Westinghouse
design starters and
contactors. Renewal parts
include contact kits, coils,
overload relays and heaters,
to name a few. See Tab 13.

Type C-HRG provides service
continuity by providing a
ground path for ground
current via resistance that
limits current magnitude and
includes a means to trace the
fault source. See Tab 16.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T2-3

2
1
2
4
5
6
7
8

1
2

4
5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

9

14
15

10

16
17
18

11

Typical Distribution System

Product and Services for Life Extension and Equipment Upgrades Overview

3

3

Distribution System

19

Tab
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit Retrofit Kits . . . . . . . . . 17
Motor Control Center Bucket Retrofits . . . . . . 2
DHP-VR Vacuum
Replacement Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Switchgear Fluidized Epoxy Bus . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Retrofit/Replace with
Vacuum Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Cell Retrofit with DSII/SPB
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Low Voltage High Resistance
Grounding Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
PowerNet Communication
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Retrofit Front Panel
with IQ Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Retrofit with IQ Energy
Sentinel for Submetering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Retrofit with Surge Protective
Devices (SPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 9, 14, 15
Replacement Molded-Case
Breakers and Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Rebuilding/
Remanufacturing Service . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 13, 15
Renewal/Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALL
Service Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALL
Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . . 21
Automatic Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Remote Power Racking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

12

15

15

MEDIUM VOLTAGE
NON-SEGREGATED BUS

8
14
15

LOAD
INTERRUPTER
SWITCHGEAR

13

1 4 5 6 7 8 9 13
14 15 18 19
LOW VOLTAGE
SECONDARY UNIT
SUBSTATION

RECTIFIER
AND
EXCITER

LOW VOLTAGE
SWITCHBOARD
INDIVIDUAL/
GROUP MOUNTED

16
1
6
7
8
9
10

17
18

11
12
14
15
18
19

20
21

DRY-TYPE
DISTRIBUTION
TRANSFORMER

22

8 9 14 15 14 15

SAFETY
SWITCH

MEDIUM VOLTAGE
SWITCHGEAR

8 9
14 15
19

MEDIUM
VOLTAGE
STARTER

8 12 14 15 17

LOW VOLTAGE
DISTRIBUTION
PANELBOARD

LOW VOLTAGE
DISTRIBUTION
PANELBOARD

8 14 15

14 15

14 15

DC
DRIVE

PROCESS
RECTIFIER
SYSTEM

HIGH CURRENT
LOW VOLTAGE
PROCESS

SYNCHRONOUS
MOTOR

MAGNETIC SHOEBREAK

8 10 12 14 15

8
11
14
15

BUS PLUG

BUS PLUG

ADJUSTABLE
FREQUENCY CONTROL

8
14
15

REDUCED
VOLTAGE
STARTER

8
11
14
15

LOW
VOLTAGE
TRANSFER
SWITCH

14 15

POWER FACTOR
CORRECTION
CAPACITORS
UP TO 700 HP

UP TO 1500 HP

8
14
15 PROGRAMMABLE

8
14
15

LOGIC
CONTROLLER

8 10 11 12 14 15

14 15

14 15

ELECTRICAL
OPERATOR
INTERFACE

14 15

14 15
START

LIGHTING
SAFETY
CONTROL
SWITCH
PANELBOARD

25

OFFICE BUILDING

V12-T2-4

ENCLOSED
CONTROL

SAFETY
SWITCH

LIGHTING
LIGHTING
LIGHTING
LIGHTING
CONTROL
PANELBOARD PANELBOARD PANELBOARD
PANELBOARD

COUNT
CONTROL

PROXIMITY
SENSOR

SAFETY
SWITCH

UP TO 300 HP

23
24

ENCLOSED
CONTROL

16

8 9 10 11
12 14 15

14 15

TRANSFORMER

GENERATOR

8 9 10 11
12 14 15

8 14 15

LOAD
INTERRUPTER
SWITCHGEAR

5
8
13
14
15

SYNCHRONOUS
MOTOR FIELD
APPLICATION
PANEL

MOTOR
CONTROL
CENTER

14
15

14
15

3 4 5 8 9 13 14
15 19

14 15

2 8 9 10
11 12 14 15

POWER FACTOR
CORRECTION
CAPACITORS

UP TO 300 HP

15

MEDIUM VOLTAGE
TRANSFER EQUIPMENT
VACUUM BREAKERS
OR LOAD BREAK
FUSED SWITCHES

14 15

16

19

15 kV
SWITCHGEAR

ARC RESISTANT
SWITCHGEAR

TRANSFORMER

LOW VOLTAGE BUS

ON-SITE
GENERATION

POWER
TRANSFORMER

POWERNET
INTEGRATED
MONITORING
PROTECTION
AND CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM

14
15

SECONDARY SPOT NETWORK
WITH NETWORK PROTECTORS

15

14 15

9 14 15
4
8
9
14
15
19

8
12
13
14
15

14

EXCITATION
CONTROL

GROUNDING
RESISTOR

UTILITY SYSTEM

8 9 14 15
ADDITIONAL
UTILITY
SOURCES

15

34.5 kV
SWITCHGEAR

15

13
14
15

LIMIT
SWITCH

14 15

STOP

SELECTOR
SWITCH

MANUFACTURING FACILITY

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

PHOTOELECTRIC
SENSOR

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Family

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Product Description, History, Major Product Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nameplate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying Factory Original Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement and Upgrade Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Guides
Miniature Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Devices
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Molded-Case Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panelboard Replacement Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Control Center Replacement Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technology Upgrades for Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement and Service Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cross-Reference
Westinghouse, Challenger and Bryant Replacements . . . . . . . . . .
Breaker Replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mining Breaker Replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V12-T3-2
V12-T3-3
V12-T3-3
V12-T3-4

1
2

V12-T3-5

3

V12-T3-6

4

V12-T3-10

5

V12-T3-15

6

V12-T3-61
V12-T3-63
V12-T3-63
V12-T3-80
V12-T3-81
V12-T3-88
V12-T3-91
V12-T3-95

7
8
9

V12-T3-112

10

V12-T3-113

11

V12-T3-115
V12-T3-162
V12-T3-168

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-1

3
1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Family

Product Description

Product History
Originally a
Westinghouse Product
The need for molded-case
circuit breakers came about
in 1918 when numerous
applications for electrical
motors resulted in a demand
for a device that would
ensure safe operation and,
at the same time, protect
electrical circuits.

attempted to find a solution
to the problem. Meetings
with switch manufacturers
were initiated in an effort
to find a solution. Switch
manufacturers were asked to
develop a switching device
that would interrupt a circuit
under prolonged overload
conditions. The device would
have to be safe, reliable and
tamperproof. It should also
be resettable so as to be
reusable after an interruption
without replacing any parts.
This search for better circuit
protection resulted in many
different but unacceptable
approaches to the problem.
These early meetings and
subsequent efforts prepared
the groundwork for the
eventual development of the
molded-case circuit breaker.

Eaton’s molded-case circuit
breakers are designed to
provide circuit protection
for low voltage distribution
systems. They are described
by NEMA® as “. . . a device
for closing and interrupting
a circuit between separable
contacts under both normal
and abnormal conditions,”
and furthermore as “. . . a
breaker assembled as an
integral unit in supporting
an enclosed housing of
insulating material.” The
NEC® describes them as
“. . . a device designed to
open and close a circuit by
non-automatic means, and to
open the circuit automatically
on a predetermined overload
of current, without injury to
itself when properly applied
within its rating.”

During this period, individual
motors were used for the
first time in industrial plants
to operate machine tools and
in private homes to operate
appliances. Plant electricians
were constantly changing
fuses blown during motor
startups because of the lack
of properly designed fuses for
motor circuit protection.
Homes experienced similar
problems when electrical
circuits were overloaded.
Inspectors were concerned
about fire hazards because of
plug fuses being bridged with
pennies and the installation
of fuses with too high an
ampere rating.

Circuit breakers protect
against overloads in
conductors and protects
against short circuits in
connected apparatus such as
motors and motor starters.

Time Line—Major Product Introductions

Circuit breakers are designed
for use in panelboards,
switchboards, motor control
centers, control panels,
combination starters,
individual enclosures and
bus duct plug-in units.

Inspection authorities
became involved and

After intensive research and
development, Westinghouse
produced the DE-ION® arc
extinguisher for use in large
oil circuit breakers. Although
too large in its initial form to
be practical for small circuit
breakers, the arc extinguisher
was eventually modified
into a usable size. The first
compact, workable circuit
breaker was developed in

Year

Product

1923

First compact, workable circuit breaker developed by Westinghouse

1927

Westinghouse introduced the first complete circuit breaker line,
rated 10– 600A, 600V

1939

Along with ordering information and style numbers, the various
maximum current ratings came to be known by frame designations:
50A
100A
100A
225A
600A

Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) introduced—first sensitive, low
level protection designed specifically for motor circuits

1973

SELTRONIC™ introduced—first molded-case circuit breaker
with an electronic trip unit

1979

Current Limit-R circuit breaker introduced— first true current
limiting trip unit

1982

Series C® Family introduced—new world-class standard, meeting
increasing interrupting requirements without sacrificing compact size

21

1994

Westinghouse Distribution and Control Business Unit (DCBU)
acquired by Eaton, integrated with Cutler-Hammer
(the Cutler-Hammer line of molded case circuit breakers was
sold when merged with Westinghouse)

22

1995

OPTIM™ Family introduced—first truly programmable
molded-case circuit breaker

20

23

Since that initial introduction
in 1927, Westinghouse
continued to be at the forefront
of circuit breaker technology
with an unprecedented series
of circuit protective
enhancements and
introductions as chronicled
below. In 1994, Eaton, another
world-class technology leader,
acquired the Westinghouse
Distribution and Control
Business Unit (DCBU)
and integrated it with their
Cutler-Hammer business
unit forming a powerful, new
combination, poised to meet
the challenges of the next
100 years.

1950 1960 1970 1980 1990

1995

E-Frame
F-Frame (non-interchangeable trip)
G-Frame
K-Frame
L-Frame

1970

19

1920 1930 1940

1923 when the modified arc
extinguisher was coupled
with a thermal tripping
mechanism. It was not until
four years later, however,
that Westinghouse research
engineers found the ideal
combination of materials and
design that permitted circuit
breakers to interrupt fault
currents of 5000A at 120 Vac
or Vdc. One year later,
Westinghouse placed the
first circuit breaker on the
market. Its acceptance
was instantaneous.

2002

Next Generation E125, J250

2004

Series G® First Global Breaker Line

24
25
V12-T3-2

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

2000

2002 Present

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Breaker Identification

Accessories

Nameplate Data
A circuit breaker is identified by
data found on the nameplate.

Most circuit breaker
accessories are mounted
internally and are not visible
with a quick inspection.
However, because many
accessories rely on or supply
an external signal, there may
be electrical leads exiting the
circuit breaker case. Inspect
for these leads when
obtaining full descriptive
information for circuit breaker
replacement. Examples of
common accessories:

This includes:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●

Catalog number
Shop order number
Style number
Amperage
Number of poles
Voltage class
Temperature rating

In most instances, the
catalog number, style number
or shop order number will
supply enough information
to identify the circuit breaker.
However, it is always
advisable to obtain all
data from the nameplate
to facilitate identification.
A Catalog Number begins
with a series of letters
followed by numbers
that identify:
●
●
●
●

Circuit breaker type
Number of poles
Maximum amperage
Example: Catalog number
F3020 indicates a Type F
circuit breaker, three poles,
20A

A Shop Order Number
begins with one or two
numbers followed by a
single letter and four
additional numbers.
A shop order number is
listed in place of a catalog
number and indicates that the
circuit breaker was modified
at the factory, i.e., addition
of a shunt trip, special
calibration, etc. Every shop
order number must be
researched with the
factory to properly identify
modifications. Call your
Cutler-Hammer Field Sales
office for this information.
●

Shunt Trip
Used to remotely trip the
circuit breaker using an
electrical signal. Typically
two wires extend through
the case.

1
2
3
4
5
6
Pre-Series C Breaker with Original Label (Labels updated in 1997)

8
9

Undervoltage Release (UVR)
Trips the circuit breaker
when voltage drops below
a specified percentage of
coil voltage (typically 70%).
Typically two wires extend
through the case.
Auxiliary Switch
Provides remote indication
of the circuit breaker status
(open/closed). Typically
three wires extend through
the case in a single-pole
1A/1B application.

7

10
11
12

Series C Breaker with Original Label (Labels updated in 1997)

13
14

Alarm Lockout Switch
For remote indication of
an automatic trip operation.
Typically two or three wires
extend through the case.

15
16
17
Vintage Label for Typical SELTRONIC Molded-Case Circuit Breaker

19
20
21

Example: 70E2121

22

Note: Eaton does not
recommend replacing a circuit
breaker identified by a Shop
Order Number with a standard
“off-the-shelf” circuit breaker
without first identifying the
modifications. They may
be critical to safe and
reliable operation.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

18

23
24
25
V12-T3-3

3
1
2
3
4
5

Factory Original
Circuit Breakers
Why Insist on Only Genuine,
New MCCBs Purchased Through
Authorized Distributors?
Eaton defines “New” product
as that which has not yet been
installed in an electrical circuit,
purchased through authorized
channels in factory original
condition and packaged in
unopened Eaton cartons.
●

6
7
8
9
10
11
12

●

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

●

The only way to ensure
safe and reliable operation
of your system is to use
genuine, new, Eaton’s
Cutler-Hammer products
exclusively. Eaton does not
resell the component parts
for molded-case circuit
breakers, the only way
for third-party breaker
refurbishers to get parts
for the breakers that
they are rebuilding is
to cannibalize other
used breakers or to use
counterfeit components.
Neither is a very good
option for the end user
In some cases,
unauthorized resellers
of molded-case circuit
breakers have been found
to misrepresent used,
rebuilt or surplus products.
Only products purchased as
“new” through authorized
channels are covered under
the Eaton warranty policy
There have been
instances where third-party
refurbishers have rebuilt
breakers using the wrong
parts, with parts missing
or the factory lubrication
removed in the cleaning
process—any of which may
result in devices that may
not be depended upon to
function properly to protect
equipment and personnel

Identifying Genuine, Factory
Original Westinghouse Circuit
Breakers Manufactured by Eaton
The features on a molded-case
circuit breaker that identify it
as genuine or counterfeit
may or may not be readily
apparent. In fact, there may be
differences not detectable by
an external investigation.
A genuine Eaton brand
molded-case circuit breaker
manufactured by Eaton will
have a serialized bar code
unique to the breaker as well
as an unbroken seal where
the case comes together.
This barcode and seal were
placed at the factory and
ensures the internal integrity
of the breaker. If, for any
reason the barcode is
missing or the seal is
broken, do not accept the
breaker. (Seal does not
appear on interchangeable
trip breakers.)

Another way to tell if a
breaker has been tampered
with is to examine the sealant
used to cover the screws on
the top rear of the breaker. If
the sealant appears sloppy or
is missing, it indicates that the
unit may have been subjected
to tampering.

If front cover screw shows
marks from use, someone
has attempted to open the
breaker. The front covers
are either black or gray on
genuine Westinghouse
molded-case circuit breakers.

Front Cover Screws

Sealant Used to Cover Screws

A UL® label on a genuine
Westinghouse breaker is
either exactly as shown in
the photo or is stamped in
white ink onto the frame in
older pre-Series C breakers.
Anything other than this may
indicate fraud.

Westinghouse moldedcase circuit breakers
manufactured by Eaton
are packed individually and
shipped in Eaton labeled
cartons. Anything other than
this is not to be considered
new and should be suspect.

Unbroken Seal

There is a manufacturing date
code on the back of genuine
molded-case circuit breakers
stamped in silver and white. If
this coding is missing, it may
mean the breaker has been
subjected to tampering.
Frequently, this date code is
wiped off in an attempt to
represent the breaker as new.

XX-XXX-XXXX
Product Name
Product Series

UL Label

Adpiscing
elit sed
diamnon
euismod

xxxxxxxxx

Eaton Labeled Cartons

23
24
Manufacturing Date Code

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Amet Elit

Lorem Ipsum: dolor sit
amet, consectetuer adi
piscing elit, sed diam
nonummy nibh euismod

A
www.eaton.com

22

V12-T3-4

Dolor Sit

Made in U.S.A.

21

25

DOLOR SIT AMET
CONSECT ETUER ADI

Lorem ipsum: dolor sit amet,
consectetuter adipleiscing,
sed diam nonummy, nibheuis
mod tincidunt.

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Replacement Capabilities
Series C and Series G MoldedCase Circuit Breakers
When and Where to Use
●
Generally a first choice
wherever physically and
electrically practical
●
Where communications,
arc flash protection,
energy and power quality
monitoring are desired
●
As a direct replacement
or add-on to already
installed Series C or
Series G product, including
Westinghouse breakers
(see Page V12-T3-114)
●
For special applications
such as DC engine
generator
Advantages
●
The most current
molded-case circuit
breaker technology
●
Higher interrupting
capacities in each
frame size
●
Smaller and lighter for
a given frame size than
other options
●
Generally less expensive
than other replacement
breaker options
●
Readily available
throughout range, high
levels of stock
●
Available from stock
●
One-year warranty

Current Production Replacement
Circuit Breakers
When and Where to Use
●
As a direct, one-for-one
replacement of current
production pre-Series C
product
●
Where you know the
catalog/style number
but not the physical or
electrical specifics about
the application
Advantages
●
Ease of selection and
certainty of replacement
●
Guaranteed to be both a
physical and electrical
duplicate of original
●
Still in production
●
Newly manufactured
●
UL listed
●
Available from stock
●
One-year warranty
Replacement of Current
Panelboard Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers
When and Where to Use
●
When replacing Series C
circuit breakers in a current
design panelboard
Advantages
●
Newly manufactured
and tested to the latest
technology
●
UL Listed
●
Available from stock in
most frame sizes
●
One-year warranty. Refer
to Page V12-T3-91 for
Series C connector kits

Replacement of Out-ofProduction Panelboard
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
(Including Westinghouse)
When and Where to Use
●
When replacing out-ofproduction circuit breakers
in an existing panelboard
●
When replacing
Westinghouse breakers.
Refer to Pages V12-T3-81–
V12-T3-90 and
Page V12-T3-114
Advantages
Newly manufactured
and tested to the latest
applicable standards
●
Both physically and
electrically interchangeable
with the circuit breakers
that they are designed
to replace
●
UL Listed
●
Available from stock in
most frame sizes
●
One-year warranty
●

Replacement of Out-ofProduction Motor Control Center
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
and Upgrades
When and Where to Use
●
When replacing out-ofproduction circuit breakers
in an existing motor control
center: 5 Star, Type W and
F10 designs
●
When upgrading
Westinghouse breakers
with a Series C technology
upgrade breaker
Advantages
●
Newly manufactured
and tested to the latest
technology
●
Series C retrofit kits are
physically and electrically
interchangeable with the
circuit breakers that they
are designed to replace
●
UL Listed
●
Available from stock in
most frame sizes
●
One-year warranty.
Refer to Page V12-T3-91

Service for Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers
When and Where to Use
●
Where circuit breaker has
sustained minor physical
damage to a handle, lug,
etc., that otherwise would
be fully functional
●
Large frame circuit breaker
(600A and above) that has
experienced some normal
wear, but is in generally
good condition, as an
economically driven
alternative to new
●
When replacing
Westinghouse breakers.
Refer to Page V12-T3-114

1

Advantages
Prevents loss of circuit
breakers due to minor
damage
●
Reduces overall
breaker costs
●
Prevents use of potentially
unreliable third-party
refurbishers
●
Includes full one-year
Eaton Electrical Inc.
warranty
●
Ensures reliability through
dealing with the original
manufacturer with a long
and well-recognized
tradition of product safety,
integrity and quality
●
Provides a simple and
convenient solution

8

●

Contact Eaton’s
Breaker Service Center:
1-877-BRK-SRVC.

2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Contact: 1-800-OLD-UNIT.

23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-5

3
1
2
3
4

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG and Eaton Miniature Circuit Breaker Replacement Guide
QUICKLAG and Eaton Plug-In Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches
Maximum Amperes
Description

150A

125A

100A

30A

HQP

QPHW

QHPX

QHPW

Width: 1.00
Height: 2.94
Depth: 2.38

Width: 1.00
Height: 2.94
Depth: 2.38

Width: 1.00
Height: 2.94
Depth: 2.38

Width: 1.00
Height: 2.94
Depth: 2.38

No previous circuit
breaker existed

QHPL
QHP

Current Design
These circuit breakers replace the out-of-production
circuit breakers listed below.

5
6
7

Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers

8

These circuit breakers are no longer
manufactured. Recommended QUICKLAG circuit
breakers listed above.

9

QUICKLAG Bolt-On Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches

10
11

HQNPL, HQNPAL, HQNP,
QPH
HQNPA, QP, QPA, QPAH, QNPL,
QNPAL, QNP, Type P, PL

Maximum Amperes
Description

150A

125A

100A

30A

BAB

QBHW

HBAX

HBAW

Width: 1.00
Height: 2.94
Depth: 2.38

Width: 1.00
Height: 2.94
Depth: 2.38

Width: 1.00
Height: 2.94
Depth: 2.38

Width: 1.00
Height: 2.94
Depth: 2.38

QBH

No previous circuit
breaker existed

HBA

Current Design
These circuit breakers replace the out-of-production
circuit breakers listed below.

12
13
14
15
16

Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
These circuit breakers are no longer
manufactured. Recommended QUICKLAG circuit
breakers listed above.

HQNB, HQNBA, QB, BA,
QNBL, QNBAL

17

QUICKLAG and Eaton Cable-In/Cable-Out Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches

18

Description

19
20

Maximum Amperes
60A

100A

100A

100A

30A

40A

QC

QCHW

QHCX

QHCW

WMZ/FAZ

Width: 1.00
Height: 3.75
Depth: 2.44

Width: 1.00
Height: 3.75
Depth: 2.44

Width: 1.00
Height: 3.75
Depth: 2.44

Width: 1.00
Height: 3.75
Depth: 2.44

Width: 0.70
Height: 4.10
Depth: 2.60

HQCL, HQCAL, HQC,
HQCA, QCA

QCH

No previous circuit
breaker existed

QHCL, QHC

WMT

Current Design
These circuit breakers replace the
out-of-production circuit breakers
listed below.

QCR

QCF

21
22
23

Width: 0.50
Height: 3.94
Depth: 2.44
Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers

24

These circuit breakers are no
longer manufactured. Recommended
QUICKLAG circuit breakers listed above.

25

Note: For supplementary protectors, the Eaton WMZS and FAZ Series replace the WMS supplementary protectors that are no longer manufactured.

V12-T3-6

No previous circuit
breaker existed

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Miniature
Circuit Breakers
QUICKLAG is the largest and
most complete family of
industrial thermal-magnetic
miniature circuit breakers.
They provide the exclusive
features of steel frame
calibration and arc chutes
in every pole.

with larger Westinghouse/
Cutler-Hammer current
limiting circuit breakers.

QUICKLAG circuit breakers
are provided in ranges from
5 to 125A continuous in
single-, two- and three-pole
configurations with
interrupting capacities from
10,000 AIC to 65,000 AIC.
QUICKLAG circuit breakers
have been series rated up to
200,000 AIC in conjunction

Each QUICKLAG rating is
available for plug-in (Type P),
bolt-on (Type B) and cable-tocable connections (Type C)
for line/load feed applications.
They are also available with
one of the industry’s widest

selection of accessories,
including shunt trip, and
can be custom modified
to meet special application
requirements.

1
2
3
4
5

Circuit Breaker Selection Guide
Circuit
Breaker
Type

Circuit
Breaker
Type Code

Continuous
Ampere
Rating at 40°C

No.
of
Poles

Volts
AC

DC

Federal
Spec.
W-C-375b

HQP

P

5–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 80

10a, 11a, 12a

6

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes
DC 1

AC Ratings Volts
120

120/240

240

24

48

80

—

10,000

—

5000

5000

2000

HQP

P

10–125

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

10a, 12a

—

10,000

—

5000

5000

5000

HQP

P

10–100

2, 3

240

—

10b, 11b, 12b

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

QPHW

P

15–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 80

14a

—

22,000

—

5000

5000

2000

QPHW

P

15–125

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

14a

—

22,000

—

5000

5000

5000

QPHW

P

15–100

2, 3

240

—

14b

—

—

22,000

—

—

—

QHPX

P

15–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 80

—

—

42,000

—

5000

5000

2000

QHPX

P

15–100

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

—

—

42,000

—

5000

5000

5000

QHPX

P

15–100

3

240

—

—

—

—

42,000

—

—

—

QHPW

P

15–30

1

120/240

24, 48, 80

15a

—

65,000

—

5000

5000

2000

QHPW

P

15–30

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

15a

—

65,000

—

5000

5000

5000

QHPW

P

15–30

3

240

—

15b

—

—

65,000

—

—

—

QPGF

P, GF

15–30

1

120

—

10a, 11a, 12a

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

QPGF

P, GF

15–50

2

120/240

—

10a, 11a, 12a

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

QPHGF

P, GF

15–30

1

120

—

10a, 11a, 12a

22,000

—

—

—

—

—

QPHGF

P, GF

15–50

2

120/240

—

10a, 11a, 12a

—

22,000

—

—

—

—

QPGFEP

P, GFEP

15–30

1

120

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

QPGFEP

P, GFEP

15–50

2

120/240

—

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

QPHGFEP

P, GFEP

15–30

1

120

—

—

22,000

—

—

—

—

—

QPHGFEP

P, GFEP

15–30

2

120/240

—

—

22,000

—

—

—

—

—

BAB

B

5–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 80

10a, 11a, 12a

—

10,000

—

5000

5000

2000

BAB

B

10–125

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

10a, 12a

—

10,000

—

5000

5000

5000

BAB

B

10–100

2, 3

240

—

10b, 11b, 12b

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

QBHW

B

15–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 80

14a

—

22,000

—

5000

5000

2000

QBHW

B

15–125

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

14a

—

22,000

—

5000

5000

5000

QBHW

B

15–100

2, 3

240

—

14b

—

—

22,000

—

—

—

HBAX

B

15–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 80

—

—

42,000

—

5000

5000

2000

HBAX

B

15–100

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

—

—

42,000

—

5000

5000

5000

HBAX

B

15–100

3

240

—

—

—

—

42,000

—

—

—

HBAW

B

15–30

1

120/240

24, 48, 80

15a

—

65,000

—

5000

5000

2000

HBAW

B

15–30

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

15a

—

65,000

—

5000

5000

5000

HBAW

B

15–30

3

240

—

15b

—

—

65,000

—

—

—

QBGF

B, GF

15–30

1

120

—

10a, 11a, 12a

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

QBGF

B, GF

15–50

2

120/240

—

10a, 11a, 12a

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

Notes
1 Two-pole DC interrupting rating based on two poles connected in series.
Circuit breaker type codes: P Plug-in; B Bolt-on; C Cable-in/Cable-out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA.

7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-7

3
1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Selection Guide, continued
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes

Circuit
Breaker
Type

Circuit
Breaker
Type Code

Continuous
Ampere
Rating at 40°C

No.
of
Poles

Volts
AC

DC

Federal
Spec.
W-C-375b

120

120/240

240

24

48

QBHGF

B, GF

15–30

1

120

—

10a, 11a, 12a

22,000

—

—

—

—

—

3

QBHGF

B, GF

15–30

2

120/240

—

10a, 11a, 12a

—

22,000

—

—

—

—

QBGFEP

B, GFEP

15–30

1

120

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

4

QBGFEP

B, GFEP

15–50

2

120/240

—

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

QBHGFEP

B, GFEP

15–30

1

120

—

—

22,000

—

—

—

—

—

5

QBHGFEP

B, GFEP

15–30

2

120/240

—

—

22,000

—

—

—

—

—

QC

C

5–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 80

10a, 11a, 12a

—

10,000

—

5000

5000

2000
5000

2

6
7
8

DC 1

AC Ratings Volts

80

QC

C

10–100

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

10a, 12a

—

10,000

—

5000

5000

QC

C

10–100

2, 3

240

—

10b, 11b, 12b

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

QC

C

15–100

4

240

—

10b, 11b, 12b

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

QCF

C

10–60

1, 2

120/240

—

—

10,000

10,000

—

—

—

—

QCR

C

10–60

1, 2

120/240

—

—

10,000

10,000

—

—

—

—

QCHW

C

15–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 80

14a

—

22,000

—

5000

5000

2000

QCHW

C

15–100

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

14a

—

22,000

—

5000

5000

5000

QCHW

C

15–100

2, 3

240

—

14b

—

—

22,000

—

—

—

QHCX

C

15–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 80

—

—

42,000

—

5000

5000

2000

QHCX

C

15–100

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

—

—

42,000

—

5000

5000

5000

QHCX

C

15–100

3

240

—

—

—

—

42,000

—

—

—

QHCW

C

15–30

1

120/240

24, 48, 80

15a

—

65,000

—

5000

5000

2000

QHCW

C

15–30

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

15a

—

65,000

—

5000

5000

5000

QHCW

C

15–30

3

240

—

15b

—

—

65,000

—

—

—

QCGF

C, GF

15–30

1

120

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

QCGF

C, GF

15–50

2

120/240

—

—

10,000

10,000

—

—

—

—

QCHGF

C, GF

15–30

1

120

—

—

22,000

—

—

—

—

—

QCHGF

C, GF

15–30

2

120/240

—

—

22,000

22,000

—

—

—

—

QCGFEP

C, GFEP

15–30

1

120

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

15

QCGFEP

C, GFEP

15–30

2

120/240

—

—

10,000

10,000

—

—

—

—

QCHGFEP

C, GFEP

15–30

1

120

—

—

22,000

—

—

—

—

—

16

QCHGFEP

C, GFEP

15–30

2

120/240

—

—

22,000

22,000

—

—

—

—

9
10
11
12
13
14

17

Notes
1 Two-pole DC interrupting rating based on two poles connected in series.
Circuit breaker type codes: P Plug-in; B Bolt-on; C Cable-in/Cable-out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA.

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

CHB Circuit Breaker

CHB Mounting Bases

Originally a
Cutler-Hammer Product

Description

The CHB breaker continues
to be available as a
replacement breaker for
use in Cutler-Hammer
Type PB panelboards.

15–50A

When combined with the
mounting base, CHB
breakers were also used for
surface and DIN rail mount
cable-in/cable-out applications.
(See photo below.)
For “new” cable-in/
cable-out applications,
Eaton recommends the
use of our most current
product offering:
●

●

●

QUICKLAG Type QC
breakers (1.00-inch
per pole)
QCR breakers—rear
mount (0.50-inch per pole)
QCF breakers—front
mount (0.50-inch per pole)

3

Catalog Number

1

Single-pole

CHB9L1

2

15–50A

Two-pole

CHB9L250

15–50A

Three-pole

CHB9L350

3

25–50A

Single-pole

CHB9H1

4

25–125A

Two-pole

CHB9H2125

25–100A

Three-pole

CHB9H3100

Low Ampere

High Ampere

5
6

CHB Circuit Breaker Catalog Numbering System

CHB 3 100
Bolt-on
Circuit Breaker

Poles
1-, 2- or 3-

Ampere
Rating

7
8

Accessories
ST
SW
HID
HM
GF
EPD
H2

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Shunt-trip (requires extra pole space)
Switched neutral application
High intensity discharge lighting applications
High magnetic trip
Ground fault personnel protection
Ground fault equipment protection
22,000 AIC (40, 50, 60A obsolete)

9
10
11

Replacement Capabilities

QCR and QCF breakers
provide a 50% space savings
over 1.00-inch per pole
designs of the same rating.

12
13
14
15
Single-Pole
QUICKLAG Type QC Cable-In/
Cable-out Breaker—1.00 Inch per Pole

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Type QCF Cable-In/Cable-Out Breaker
—0.50 Inch per Pole (Front-Connected)

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Type QCR Cable-In/Cable-Out Breaker
—0.50 Inch per Pole (Rear-Connected)

16
17
18
19

CHB Breaker Mounting Base

20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-9

3
1
2
3
4
5

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Replacement Guide
Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker)
Maximum Amperes
Description

100A

8
9
10
11
12
13

225A

100A

100A

EG
GD

ED, EDH, EDC

EHD

FDB, FD, HFD, FDC

Width: 3.00
Height: 4.88
Depth: 2.94

Width: 3.00
Height: 4.88
Depth: 2.81

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38

EB 1

No previous circuit
breaker existed

EHB 1

FB 1, HFB

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38

FA, HFA

Series C circuit breakers are the current GHC
offering and, as such, are a logical first
choice when upgrading or retrofitting
equipment. All circuit breakers listed
in a column are ELECTRICALLY
INTERCHANGEABLE.

6
7

100A/125A

Current Design

Replacement Circuit Breakers
These new UL labeled circuit breakers
continue to be manufactured and are
primarily applied to achieve exact
physical and electrical replacement of
previously installed Cutler-Hammer/
Westinghouse circuit breakers of the
same style number and rating.

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38

Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
These circuit breakers are no
longer manufactured. *Indicates the
last date of manufacture. As an option,
any of these circuit breakers can be
reconditioned at the original factory.
For details, see Page V12-T3-5, or
contact your local Eaton Field
Sales office.

E, EA

QCC

EH

*1974

* 1968

* 1974

* 1974

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.50
Height: 7.00
Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.50
Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.50
Depth: 3.38

CA, CAH, HCA 1

F, HF

G

1974

1965

Width: 4.13
Height: 9.38
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 9.38
Depth: 4.06

14
15

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.50
Depth: 2.69

16
17

Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994
FS
EC, EHC

FS, FH,
FC, HFC

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.13
Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.13
Depth: 3.19

18
19
20

FL

21
22

Width: 4.13
Height: 9.31
Depth: 3.19

23
24

Note
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

25
V12-T3-10

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker), Continued

1

Maximum Amperes
150A

225A, 250A

400A

600A

2

Current Design
FDB, FD, HFD, FDC

JG
JD, HJD, JDC
250A

JDB
250A

DK 1

KD, HKD, KDC 1

KDB

LG
LD, HLD, LDB

3
4
5

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13
Height: 10.00
Depth: 4.06

Width: 4.13
Height: 10.00
Depth: 4.06

Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06

Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06

Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 4.06

KB 2, HKB 2

JB 2

DA 2

LB 2, HLB 1

LBB 2

LC 2, HLC

250A

250A

Width: 4.13
Height: 10.00
Depth: 4.06

Width: 4.13
Height: 10.00
Depth: 4.06

KA 2, HKA 2

JA 2

225A

225A

Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06

Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06

6
7

Replacement Circuit Breakers
FB 2, HFB

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38

8
Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06

Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06

Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 4.06

LA 2, HLA

LAB 2

LA 2, HLA

9
10
11

Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 4.06

12

Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 4.06

13

Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
FA, HFA

JK

J

225A

JKL

L, LM, HLM

14

225A

*1974

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.50
Depth: 3.38
*Indicates the last
date of manufacture.

*1967

*1967

*1967

Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 4.06

K, HK

15
16
*1967
Width: 8.25
Height: 22.00
Depth: 5.50

KL, HKL

225A

17

SPCB 600A,
SCB 600A
*1986 (Consult Eaton)
*1967

*1967

Width: 8.25
Height: 15.50
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 5.75
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 4.06

18
19
20

Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994
FS, FH, FC, HFC

JS, JH, JL

JS

KS-D, KS

KS-D, KH-D, KS, KH

KS-D, KH-D, KS, KH

LS(E), LH(E), LS(A), LH(A)

21
22

Width: 4.25
Height: 6.13
Depth: 3.19

Width: 4.25
Height: 12.00
Depth: 3.81

Width: 4.25
Height: 12.00
Depth: 3.81

Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 3.81

Notes
1 When upgrading a HLB, LBB to a Series C K-Frame in a panelboard application, also order
TAD3 spacer kit.

Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 3.81

2

Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 3.81

23

Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 3.81

24

These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions see the cross-reference on
Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-11

25

3
1
2
3
4

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker), Continued
Maximum Amperes
Description

1200A

1600A/2000A/2500A 1

NG
ND, HND, NDC

NG
ND, HND, NDC

RG
RD

Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 5.50

Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 5.50

Width: 15.50
Height: 16.00
Depth: 9.75

MA 2, HMA and MC 2, MCC 2
SELTRONIC™ 2

NC 2, HNC and NB 2, HNB

PC, PCC

PB

Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 5.50

Width: 12.06
Height: 22.06
Depth: 9.06

Width: 12.06
Height: 22.06
Depth: 9.06

LM, HLM and M

MA, HMA

800A

Current Design
Series C circuit breakers are the
MDL, HMDL
current offering and, as such,
are a logical first choice when
upgrading or retrofitting equipment.
All circuit breakers listed in
a column are ELECTRICALLY
INTERCHANGEABLE.

5
6
7
8
9
10

Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.06
Replacement Circuit Breakers
These new UL labeled circuit
MA 2, HMA, MD 2, MDS 2
and MC 2
breakers continue to be
manufactured and are primarily
applied to achieve exact physical
and electrical replacement of
previously installed Cutler-Hammer/
Westinghouse circuit breakers of
the same style number and rating.

11
12
13
14
15

Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.06
Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
These circuit breakers are
LM, HLM and M
no longer manufactured.
*Indicates the last date of
manufacture. As an option, any
of these circuit breakers can be
reconditioned at the original factory.
For details, see Page V12-T3-5,
or contact your local Eaton Field
Sales office.

MA, HLM

PA

1200A

16

*1967

*1967

*1968

*1967

*1974

17

Width: 8.25
Height: 22.00
Depth: 5.50

Width: 8.25
Height: 22.00
Depth: 5.50

Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 5.50

Width: 8.25
Height: 22.00
Depth: 5.50

Width: 12.00
Height: 22.00
Depth: 9.06

18
19

SPCB 1200A,
SCB 1200A
*1986 (Consult Eaton)
Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 5.50

SPCB 2000–3000A,
SCB 2000–3000A
*1986 (Consult Eaton)
Width: 12.06 Height: 22.06 Depth: 9.06

Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994

20

MS, MH

NS, NH

Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 5.50

No equivalent Cutler-Hammer brand
frame size existed

No equivalent Cutler-Hammer brand frame
size existed

21
22
23
24
25

Notes
1 RD breaker replaces PC, PCC and PB breakers for 2000 and 2500A only.

V12-T3-12

2

These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on
Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Current Limiting Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker)

1

Maximum Amperes
Description

100A

250A

400A

100A

225A

FCL
Current Limit-R
(non-fused)

LCL
Current Limit-R
(non-fused)

LCL
Current Limit-R
(non-fused)

FB
TRI-PAC®
(fused)

LA
TRI-PAC
(fused)

2

Current Design
All circuit breakers listed in a
column are ELECTRICALLY
INTERCHANGEABLE.

3
4
5
6

Width: 4.13
Height: 8.75
Depth: 3.38

Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.06

Width: 4.13
Height: 8.75
Depth: 3.50

7

Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.75

8

Replacement Circuit Breakers

9

These new UL labeled circuit breakers
continue to be manufactured and are
primarily applied to achieve exact
physical and electrical replacement of
previously installed Cutler-Hammer/
Westinghouse circuit breakers of the
same style number and rating.

10
11

Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
These circuit breakers are no
longer manufactured.
*Indicates the last date of manufacture.
As an option, any of these circuit breakers
can be reconditioned at the original
factory. For details, see Page V12-T3-5,
or contact your local Eaton Field
Sales office.

FA
TRI-PAC

F
TRI-PAC

K
TRI-PAC

12
13
14
15

*1968

*1968

Width: 4.13
Height: 9.38
Depth: 3.19

Width: 4.63 Width: 8.25
Height: 11.81 Height: 19.63
Depth: 3.81
Depth: 4.06

*1968

16
17

Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994
No Equivalent Cutler-Hammer Brand Frame Sizes Existed

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-13

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

1

Current Limiting Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker)

2

Description

3

All circuit breakers listed in a column are
ELECTRICALLY INTERCHANGEABLE.

Maximum Amperes
400A

800A

1600A

LA
TRI-PAC®
(Fused)

NB
TRI-PAC
(Fused)

PB
TRI-PAC
(Fused)

Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.75

Width: 8.25
Height: 22.00
Depth: 5.50

Width: 12.06
Height: 22.13
Depth: 9.06

L
TRI-PAC

MA
TRI-PAC

PA
TRI-PAC

*1968

*1968

*1968

*1968

Width: 8.25
Height: 19.63
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 26.91
Depth: 5.50

Width: 8.25
Height: 22.00
Depth: 5.50

Width: 12.00
Height: 22.00
Depth: 9.06

Current Design

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Replacement Circuit Breakers
These new UL labeled circuit breakers continue to be
manufactured and are primarily applied to achieve exact
physical and electrical replacement of previously installed
Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse circuit breakers of the same
style number and rating.
Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
These circuit breakers are no longer manufactured.
KL
*Indicates the last date of manufacture. As an option, any
TRI-PAC
of these circuit breakers can be reconditioned at the original
factory. For details, see Page V12-T3-5, or contact your local
Eaton Field Sales office.

14
15
16
17
18

Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994
No equivalent Cutler-Hammer brand frame sizes existed

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-14

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

■ Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type EB Single-, Two-, Three-Pole; 240 Vac Maximum; Thermal-Magnetic and Saf-T-Vue® 2
EB: 120, 240 Vac;
125/250 Vdc

Two-Pole, 240 Vac, 125/250 Vdc 3

Three-Pole, 240 Vac, 125/250 Vdc 3

Standard

Standard

Standard

Saf-T-Vue 4

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

EB1015 5

EB2015

EB3015

EB3015S

20

EB1020 5

EB2020

EB3020

EB3020S

25

EB1025

EB2025

EB3025

EB3025S

30

EB1030

EB2030

EB3030

EB3030S

35

EB1035

EB2035

EB3035

EB3035S

40

EB1040

EB2040

EB3040

EB3040S

45

EB1045

EB2045

EB3045

EB3045S

50

EB1050

EB2050

EB3050

EB3050S

60

EB1060

EB2060

EB3060

EB3060S

70

EB1070

EB2070

EB3070

EB3070S

80

EB1080

EB2080

EB3080

EB3080S

90

EB1090

EB2090

EB3090

EB3090S

100

EB1100

EB2100

EB3100

EB3100S

Approximate shipping weight is 2 lbs

Approximate shipping weight is 3 lbs

Approximate shipping weight is 4.5 lbs

Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40°C

EHB: 277, 480 Vac;
250 Vdc

1

Single-Pole, 120 Vac, 125 Vdc 3

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Type EHB Single-, Two-, Three-Pole; 480 Vac Maximum; Thermal-Magnetic and Saf-T-Vue 2
Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40°C

Single-Pole, 277 Vac, 125 Vdc 3

Two-Pole, 480 Vac, 250 Vdc 3

Three-Pole, 480 Vac

Standard

Standard

Standard

Saf-T-Vue 4

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

EHB1015 6

EHB2015

EHB3015

EHB3015S

20

EHB1020 6

EHB2020

EHB3020

EHB3020S

25

EHB1025

EHB2025

EHB3025

EHB3025S

30

EHB1030

EHB2030

EHB3030

EHB3030S

35

EHB1035

EHB2035

EHB3035

EHB3035S

40

EHB1040

EHB2040

EHB3040

EHB3040S

45

EHB1045

EHB2045

EHB3045

EHB3045S

50

EHB1050

EHB2050

EHB3050

EHB3050S

60

EHB1060

EHB2060

EHB3060

EHB3060S

70

EHB1070

EHB2070

EHB3070

EHB3070S

80

EHB1080

EHB2080

EHB3080

EHB3080S

90

EHB1090

EHB2090

EHB3090

EHB3090S

100

EHB1100

EHB2100

EHB3100

EHB3100S

Approximate shipping weight is 2 lbs

Approximate shipping weight is 3 lbs

Approximate shipping weight is 4.5 lbs

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Amperes

18

120 and 240 AC

10,000 asymmetrical, symmetrical

19

125/250 DC

5000 3

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 7
Maximum Volts
EB Breakers

20

EHB, FB Breakers
240 AC

20,000 asymmetrical, 18,000 symmetrical

277 AC (EHB)

15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical

480 AC

15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical

600 AC (FB)

15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical

250 DC

10,000 3

21
22

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Includes load terminals only.
3 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
4 Not UL Listed.
5 Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications only.
6 Switching duty rated for 277 Vac fluorescent light applications only.
7 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

23
24
25
V12-T3-15

3
1
2

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

■ Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type FB, HFB Single-, Two-, Three-, Four-Pole; 480V Max.; Thermal-Magnetic MARK 75® Saf-T-Vue
FB, HFB: 600 Vac;
250 Vdc
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C

Single-Pole
277 Vac; 125 Vdc 2

Two-Pole
600 Vac; 250 Vdc 2

Four-Pole 34
600 Vac

Three-Pole
600 Vac

MARK 75 5

Standard

MARK 75 6

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

Catalog Number Catalog Number

15

HFB1015 8

FB2015

HFB2015

FB3015

FB3015S

HFB3015L

FB4015

20

HFB1020 8

FB2020

HFB2020

FB3020

FB3020S

HFB3020L

FB4020

25

HFB1025

FB2025

HFB2025

FB3025

FB3025S

HFB3025L

FB4025

30

HFB1030

FB2030

HFB2030

FB3030

FB3030S

HFB3030L

FB4030

35

HFB1035

FB2035

HFB2035

FB3035

FB3035S

HFB3035L

FB4035

40

HFB1040

FB2040

HFB2040

FB3040

FB3040S

HFB3040L

FB4040

6

45

HFB1045

FB2045

HFB2045

FB3045

FB3045S

HFB3045L

FB4045

50

HFB1050

FB2050

HFB2050

FB3050

FB3050S

HFB3050L

FB4050

7

60

HFB1060

FB2060

HFB2060

FB3060

FB3060S

HFB3060L

FB4060

70

HFB1070

FB2070

HFB2070

FB3070

FB3070S

HFB3070L

FB4070

8

80

HFB1080

FB2080

HFB2080

FB3080

FB3080S

HFB3080L

FB4080

90

HFB1090

FB2090

HFB2090

FB3090

FB3090S

HFB3090L

FB4090

100

HFB1100

FB2100

HFB2100

FB3100

FB3100S

HFB3100L

FB4100

110

—

—

—

FB3110

FB3110S

HFB3110

—

125

—

—

—

FB3125

FB3125S

HFB3125

—

150

—

—

—

FB3150

FB3150S

HFB3150

—

3
4
5

9
10

Standard

Saf-T-Vue 6

MARK 75 7

Standard

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 9

11

Maximum Volts

Amperes

MARK 75 Type HFB

12
13
14

240 AC

75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical

277 AC 6

75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical

480 AC

30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

250 DC (two-pole)

20,000 2j

Special Breakers Type FB, Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable

15

Continuous
Ampere
Rating

Two-Pole, 600 Vac

Three-Pole, 600 Vac

Magnetic
Trip Range
Amperes

Catalog/Style Number Catalog/Style Number Catalog/Style Number Catalog/Style Number

Catalog/Style Number

3

7–22

FB2022MRL

HFB2022ML

FB3022MRL

FB3022SMRL

HFB3022ML

5

15–45

FB2045MRL

HFB2045ML

FB3045MRL

FB3045SMRL

HFB3045ML

10

35–110

FB2110MRL

HFB2110ML

FB3110MRL

FB3110SMRL

HFB3110ML

25

32–80

2610D53G12

4994D96G12

2610D53G30

4998D89G30

2610D57G30

18

25

66–190

FB2190MRL

HFB2190ML

FB3190MRL

FB3190SMRL

HFB3190ML

30

50–150

1268C14G05

—

1268C14G06

—

—

19

30

90–270

FB2270MRL

HFB2270ML

FB3270MRL

FB3270SMRL

HFB3270ML

50

66–190

1268C14G01

—

1268C14G02

—

—

50

160–480

FB2480MRL

HFB2480ML

FB3480MRL

FB3480SMRL

HFB3480ML

70

100–270

2610D53G13

4994D96G13

2610D53G31

2610D58G31

4994D96G31

100

150–480

1268C14G03

—

1268C14G04

81E4647

65E4667

100

450–1550

FB21550MRL

HFB21550ML

FB31550MRL

FB31550SMRL

HFB31550ML

16
17

20
21

Standard

MARK 75

Standard

Saf-T-Vue

MARK 75 7

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
3 Not UL Listed.
4 All four poles have thermal-magnetic trip elements. Can be supplied with three protected poles and one unprotected, non-automatic pole if required.
Order by description with no price or dimensional differences.
5 15–30A rated 75,000 AIC. 40–100A rated 30,000A asymmetrical, 25,000A symmetrical.
6 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
7 Includes line and load terminals. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.
8 Switching duty rated for 277 Vac fluorescent light applications only.
9 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.
j Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.

22
23
24
25
V12-T3-16

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Accessories and Modifications
Terminals
Breakers include load
terminals only. Terminals are
UL Listed as suitable for wire
type and size. When used with
aluminum conductors, use
joint compound. When line
terminals are required, order
by style number from the table
at no charge with the breaker.

Note: Magnetic only breakers
include both line and
load terminals.
Note: Suffix “L” on catalog number
indicates line and load terminals
included. If factory installation is
required, specify on order.

Terminals
Maximum
Amperes

Wire
Type

Wire
Range

Package of Three Line Terminals 1
Style Number

Standard Pressure Type Terminals
20 (EB, EHB)

Al/Cu

#14–#10

624B100G14

100

Al/Cu

#14–1/0

624B100G02

150

Al/Cu

# 4–4/0

624B100G17

Al/Cu

#14–#4

624B100G10

100

Al/Cu

# 4–4/0

624B100G17

Terminal Style 624B100G02

Terminal Style 624B100G17
Collar

Collar
Nut

Clip
Conductor

Insert collar enclosing
conductor as shown. Locate
nut on top of conductor and
tighten securely with screw
and washer. Caution: Collar
must surround conductor.
Terminal Style 624B100G10

Conductor

LFB3070R 4

80–150

LFB3150R 5

Terminal Style 624B100G14

Collar

Conductor

Screw

Washer
Screw

Assemble collar on top
of conductor as shown.
Tighten securely with
screw and washer.

Conductor
Wire Clamp

Assemble wire clamp
to bottom of conductor
as shown.

For Magnetic Only Breakers 36
3

LFB3003MR

5

LFB3005MR

10

LFB3010MR

25

LFB3025MR

30

LFB3030MR
LFB3050MR

70

LFB3070MR

Federal Specification
Classifications
EB, EHB, FB and HFB
breakers meet requirements
of Federal Specification
W-C-375b as follows:

100

LFB3100MR

150

LFB3150MR

Notes
1 Style listed is for package of
three terminals.
2 These frames are obsolete. For
replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114–
V12-T3-167.
3 Ratings through 70A can be supplied
with terminals for Cu cable only
(#14–#2). Order by description.
4 Superseded by LFD3070R.
5 Superseded by LFD3150R.
6 Replace with Series C HMCP and ELC
current limiters or replace with MCP
and EL current limiters

●

●

●

2
3
4
5
7
8
9

Note: Not UL Listed.

●

50

6

Available in all standard
ratings of EB, EHB, FB
and HFB breakers up to
ratings of 100A. Factory
adder 20%.

Limiter
Catalog Number

15–70

Note: Not UL Listed.

Ambient Compensating
Breakers
To order, add suffix letter
“A” to standard thermalmagnetic breaker
catalog number.

LFB Current Limiter
Attachment 2

Insert collar enclosing
conductor and center on
extrusion on collar. Install clip
with legs on top of conductor
and snap end around bottom
of collar.

1

Note: Not UL Listed.

For Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 3

Extrusion

Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as
standard or for ambients
other than 40°C or 50°C.
For frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for information regarding
special conditions.
Maximum calibration for
400 Hz is 135A.

50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete breaker,
listed above, when ordering
breakers to be used in 50°C
ambients.

Note: Cannot be used with
plug-in adapters. Ratings
through 70A can be supplied
with terminals for Cu cable only
(#14–#2). Order by description.

Breaker Rating,
Amperes

Washer
Screw

LFB Current Limiter Attachment
The LFB current limiter is
an attachment that bolts to
the load end of a standard
FB thermal-magnetic or
magnetic only breaker,
providing 200,000A
interrupting capacity (AIC) at
up to 600 Vac. Limiters for
thermal-magnetic breakers
are UL Listed. Current
limiters must be applied
as indicated in the table
on Page V12-T3-16.
Standard LFB terminals
are suitable for Cu/AI cable.
Ratings through 70A accept
(1) #14–#2, and 100 and
150A accept (1) #1–4/0.

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
50

■ Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.

EB: single-pole, Class 11a;
two-, three-pole, Classes
10b, 11b, 12b
EHB: single-pole,
Class 13a; two-,
three-pole, Class 13b
FB: two-, three-pole,
Class 18a
HFB: single-pole,
Class 13a; two-, three-pole,
Class 22a

For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC,
Technical Resource Center
at 1-800-356-1243.

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-17

3
1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Type CCV 120/240V Tenant Main Circuit Breaker
10,000A and 25,000A Interrupting Capacity, 100–225A
Interrupting Capacity
at 120/240 Vac
●
Type CCV—10,000A rms
symmetrical
●
Type CCVH—25,000A rms
symmetrical

2
3
4

Handles
●
Trip-free with “ONTRIPPED-OFF” positions.
Reset past “OFF” is
required to latch breaker
contacts after tripping

5
6
Type CCV Two-Pole
120/240V Tenant
Main Circuit Breaker

7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Product Description

Terminals
●
Standard lugs (wire
connectors) suitable for
either CU or AL wire

Ratings
●
120/240 Vac, two-pole,
through 225 continuous
amperes, calibrated
at 40ºC

Standards
●
Complies with UL Standard
489, breakers are listed
under UL File #E781

Tripping Characteristics
●
Thermal-magnetic trip,
calibrated and sealed
after assembly. Indirectly
heated thermal tripping
bimetal elements

Backward Compatibility
●
CCV and CCVH retains
same profile and footprint
of the CC and CCH breaker
allowing use in the
same applications

Product Selection
Ampere
Rating

Two-Pole Breaker
Wire Size Range, Al/Cu

10,000 AIC

25,000 AIC

100

#2/0–300 kcmil

CCV2100

CCVH2100

125

#2/0–300 kcmil

CCV2125

CCVH2125

150

#2/0–300 kcmil

CCV2150

CCVH2150

16

175

#2/0–300 kcmil

CCV2175

CCVH2175

200

#2/0–300 kcmil

CCV2200

CCVH2200

17

225

#2/0–300 kcmil

CCV2225

CCVH2225

15

Terminal Options
Terminal configurations available by adding the following
designator on the suffix:
W = No terminals
X = Load side terminals only
Y = Line side terminals only
CCV as tenant main breaker with CC as aftermarket option.
Cross-Reference
CCV Catalog
Number

CC Catalog
Number

CCV Catalog
Number

CC Catalog
Number

CCV2100

CC2100

CCVH2100

CCH2100

CCV2100W

CC2100W

CCVH2100W

CCH2100W

CCV2100X

CC2100X

CCVH2100X

CCH2100X

CCV2100Y

CC2100Y

CCVH2100Y

CCH2100Y

CCV2125

CC2125

CCVH2125

CCH2125

CCV2125W

CC2125W

CCVH2125W

CCH2125W

CCV2125X

CC2125X

CCVH2125X

CCH2125X

CCV2125Y

CC2125Y

CCVH2125Y

CCH2125Y

CCV2150

CC2150

CCVH2150

CCH2150

CCV2150W

CC2150W

CCVH2150W

CCH2150W

CCV2150X

CC2150X

CCVH2150X

CCH2150X

CCV2150Y

CC2150Y

CCVH2150Y

CCH2150Y

CCV2175

CC2175

CCVH2175

CCH2175

CCV2175W

CC2175W

CCVH2175W

CCH2175W

CCV2175X

CC2175X

CCVH2175X

CCH2175X

CCV2175Y

CC2175Y

CCVH2175Y

CCH2175Y

CCV2200

CC2200

CCVH2200

CCH2200

CCV2200W

CC2200W

CCVH2200W

CCH2200W

CCV2200X

CC2200X

CCVH2200X

CCH2200X

CCV2200Y

CC2200Y

CCVH2200Y

CCH2200Y

CCV2225

CC2225

CCVH2225

CCH2225

CCV2225W

CC2225W

CCVH2225W

CCH2225W

CCV2225X

CC2225X

CCVH2225X

CCH2225X

CCV2225Y

CC2225Y

CCVH2225Y

CCH2225Y

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-18

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Type JB

1

■ Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type JB 90–250A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue
JB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
(Suitable for Reverse-Feed)

Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40°C

Complete Breaker Includes
Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 2

2

Magnetic Trip Setting,
Amperes (Set on High Side,
Adjustable to Lower Limits)

Standard

Saf-T-Vue 3

Standard

Saf-T-Vue 3

Low

High

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc

Breaker Without Terminals

4

70

350

700

JB2070

JB2070S

JB2070W

JB2070SW

90

450

900

JB2090

JB2090S

JB2090W

JB2090SW

100

500

1000

JB2100

JB2100S

JB2100W

JB2100SW

125

625

1250

JB2125

JB2125S

JB2125W

JB2125SW

150

750

1500

JB2150

JB2150S

JB2150W

JB2150SW

175

875

1750

JB2175

JB2175S

JB2175W

JB2175SW

200

1000

2000

JB2200

JB2200S

JB2200W

JB2200SW

225

1125

2250

JB2225

JB2225S

JB2225W

JB2225SW

250

1250

2500

JB2250

JB2250S

JB2250W

JB2250SW

Approx. shipping weight. 12 lbs

Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs

70

350

700

JB3070

JB3070S

JB3070W

JB3070SW

90

450

900

JB3090

JB3090S

JB3090W

JB3090SW

100

500

1000

JB3100

JB3100S

JB3100W

JB3100SW

125

625

1250

JB3125

JB3125S

JB3125W

JB3125SW

150

750

1500

JB3150

JB3150S

JB3150W

JB3150SW

175

875

1750

JB3175

JB3175S

JB3175W

JB3175SW

200

1000

2000

JB3200

JB3200S

JB3200W

JB3200SW

225

1125

2250

JB3225

JB3225S

JB3225W

JB3225SW

250

1250

2500

JB3250

JB3250S

JB3250W

JB3250SW

Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs

5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15

Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable 3

Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C

4

9

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

Approx. shipping weight 14 lbs

3

Breaker Only, No Terminals 5

Magnetic Trip Setting,
Amperes (Set on High Side,
Adjustable to Lower Limits)

Two-Pole 4
Standard

Saf-T-Vue

Standard

Saf-T-Vue

16

Three-Pole

Low

High

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

250

350

700

JB2700MW

JB2700SMW

JB3700MW

JB3700SMW

250

625

1250

JB21250MW

JB21250SMW

JB31250MW

JB31250SMW

250

750

1500

JB21500MW

JB21500SMW

JB31500MW

JB31500SMW

250

875

1750

JB21750MW

JB21750SMW

JB31750MW

JB31750SMW

250

1125

2250

JB22250MW

JB22250SMW

JB32250MW

JB32250SMW

250

1250

2500

JB22500MW

JB22500SMW

JB32500MW

JB32500SMW

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker frame.
3 Not UL Listed.
4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
5 Select desired terminal from table and order as separate item.

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-19

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

1

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 1

Accessories and Modifications

Maximum Volts

Amperes

■

2

240 AC

30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

480 AC

25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical

3

600 AC

15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical

250 DC

10,000

4
5

Terminals
Maximum
Amperes

Catalog
Number

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

6

250

7

250

8

Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type

(1) #4–350 kcmil Al/Cu

TA250KB

Optional Pressure Terminals
(1) #4–350 kcmil Cu

Note
1 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.

9
10

T250KB

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as
standard or for ambients
other than 40°C or 50°C.
For frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.
Note: Not UL Listed.

50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete
breaker when ordering
breakers to be used in 50°C
ambients. Same price as
standard 40°C breakers.
For CSA®, see
Page V12-T3-48.
Type JB breakers meet
requirements of Class 19a
circuit breakers as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.

11
12

Note: Not UL Listed.

UL Listed Interrupting
Rating (see table)
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
Terminals (see table)
Two terminals are required
per pole.
Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed left.
When used with aluminum
conductors, use joint
compound. To order optional
copper only terminals, add
suffix “C” to complete
breaker catalog number.
Note: Terminals are shipped
separately from breaker frame.

Magnetic Only Breakers
For description, refer to
Application Data 29-160.
Additional Accessories
and Modifications
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-20

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types KB and HKB
■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type KB and MARK 75 Type HKB 90–250A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip
KB/MARK 75/HKB:
Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue
600 Vac; 250 Vdc
Magnetic Trip
Setting Amperes 3

Continuous
Ampere
Rating at 40°C

Low

High

Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 2

Complete Breaker Includes
Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3

Frame Only

Trip Unit Only

Standard
Catalog
Number

Saf-T-Vue 3
Catalog
Number

MARK 75
Catalog
Number

Standard
Catalog
Number

Saf-T-Vue 4
Catalog
Number

MARK 75
Catalog
Number

Standard
Saf-T-Vue
MARK 75
Catalog
Number

2
3
4
5

Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 3
70

350

700

KB2070

KB2070S

HKB2070

KB2250F

KB2250FS

HKB2250F

HKB2070T

90

450

900

KB2090

KB2090S

HKB2090

KB2250F

KB2250FS

HKB2250F

HKB2090T

100

500

1000

KB2100

KB2100S

HKB2100

KB2250F

KB2250FS

HKB2250F

HKB2100T

125

625

1250

KB2125

KB2125S

HKB2125

KB2250F

KB2250FS

HKB2250F

HKB2125T

150

750

1500

KB2150

KB2150S

HKB2150

KB2250F

KB2250FS

HKB2250F

HKB2150T

175

875

1750

KB2175

KB2175S

HKB2175

KB2250F

KB2250FS

HKB2250F

HKB2175T

200

1000

2000

KB2200

KB2200S

HKB2200

KB2250F

KB2250FS

HKB2250F

HKB2200T

225

1125

2250

KB2225

KB2225S

HKB2225

KB2250F

KB2250FS

HKB2250

HKB2225T

250

1250

2500

KB2250

KB2250S

HKB2250

KB2250F

KB2250FS

HKB2250F

HKB2250T

Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs

Approx. shipping weight 9 lbs

700

KB3070

KB3070S

HKB3070

KB3250F

KB3250FS

HKB3250F

HKB3070T

450

900

KB3090

KB3090S

HKB3090

KB3250F

KB3250FS

HKB3250F

HKB3090T

100

500

1000

KB3100

KB3100S

HKB3100

KB3250F

KB3250FS

HKB3250F

HKB3100T

125

625

1250

KB3125

KB3125S

HKB3125

KB3250F

KB3250FS

HKB3250F

HKB3125T

150

750

1500

KB3150

KB3150S

HKB3150

KB3250F

KB3250FS

HKB3250F

HKB3150T

175

875

1750

KB3175

KB3175S

HKB3175

KB3250F

KB3250FS

HKB3250F

HKB3175T

200

1000

2000

KB3200

KB3200S

HKB3200

KB3250F

KB3250FS

HKB3250F

HKB3200T

225

1125

2250

KB3225

KB3225S

HKB3225

KB3250F

KB3250FS

HKB3250F

HKB3225T

250

1250

2500

KB3250

KB3250S

HKB3250

KB3250F

KB3250FS

HKB3250F

HKB3250T
Approx. shipping
weight 2 lbs

Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable Breakers 4
Two-Pole 4

Three-Pole

Low

High

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

250

350

700

HKB2700TM

HKB3700TM

250

500

1000

HKB21000TM

HKB31000TM

250

625

1250

HKB21250TM

HKB31250TM

250

750

1500

HKB21500TM

HKB31500TM

250

875

1750

HKB21750TM

HKB31750TM

250

1125

2250

HKB22250TM

HKB32250TM

250

1250

2500

HKB22500TM

HKB32500TM

9

12
13
14
15
16
17

Trip Units Only
Magnetic Trip Setting Amperes 5

8

11

350

90

Approx. shipping weight 11 lbs

7

10

70

Approx. shipping weight 14 lbs

6

Approx. shipping
weight 2 lbs

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

Continuous
Ampere Rating

1

18
19
20
21
22

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Terminals shipped separately from breaker frame.
3 Not UL Listed.
4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
5 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limit.

23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-21

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

1

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings

Accessories and Modifications

Maximum Volts

■

2

Standard Breakers
240 AC

30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

3

480 AC

25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.

Amperes

600 AC

15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical

250 DC

10,000

MARK 75 Breakers
240 AC

75,000 asymmetrical., 65,000 symmetrical.

480 AC

30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

600 AC

20,000 asymmetrical, 18,000 symmetrical

250 DC

20,000 1

Terminals 2
Maximum
Amperes

Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type

Catalog
Number

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
250

(1) #4–350 kcmil Al/Cu

TA250KB

Optional Pressure Terminals
250

(1) #4–350 kcmil Cu

Notes
1 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.
2 Terminals shipped separately from breaker frame.

12

T250KB

Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable
Breakers (see table on
Page V12-T3-21)

Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as standard
or for ambients other than
40°C or 50°C. For frequencies
other than 0–60 Hz AC, refer
to Eaton.
Note: Two-pole breakers are
supplied in three-pole frames
with current carrying parts
omitted from center pole.

50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete
breaker, listed on
Page V12-T3-21, when
ordering breakers to be
used in 50°C ambients.
For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.

13

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings
(see table)
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
Terminals (see table)
Two terminals are required
per pole.
Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed
below. When used with
aluminum conductors, use
joint compound. To order
optional copper only terminals,
add suffix “C” to complete
breaker catalog number.
Magnetic Only Breakers
For description, refer to
Application Data 29-160. To
order these breakers, select
frame, trip unit and terminals.
Additional Accessories
and Modifications
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.

Note: Two-pole breakers are
supplied in three-pole frames
with current carrying parts
omitted from center pole.

14

Type KB breakers meet
requirements for Class 19a,
as defined by Federal
Specification W-C-375b.
Type HKB breakers not
defined in W-C-375b.

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-22

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Type JA

1

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type JA 70–225A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue
JA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
(Suitable for Reverse-Feed)
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C

2

Magnetic Trip Setting,
Amperes (Set on High Side,
Adjustable to Lower Limits)

Complete Breaker Includes
Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 2

Breaker Without Terminals

Standard

Saf-T-Vue

Standard

Saf-T-Vue

Low

High

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

3

Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 3
70

350

700

JA2070

JA2070S

JA2070W

JA2070SW

90

450

900

JA2090

JA2090S

JA2090W

JA2090SW

100

500

1000

JA2100

JA2100S

JA2100W

JA2100SW

125

625

1250

JA2125

JA2125S

JA2125W

JA2125SW

150

750

1500

JA2150

JA2150S

JA2150W

JA2150SW

175

875

1750

JA2175

JA2175S

JA2175W

JA2175SW

200

1000

2000

JA2200

JA2200S

JA2200W

JA2200SW

225

1125

2250

JA2225

JA2225S

JA2225W

JA2225SW

Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs

Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
70

350

700

JA3070

JA3070S

JA3070W

JA3070SW

90

450

900

JA3090

JA3090S

JA3090W

JA3090SW

100

500

1000

JA3100

JA3100S

JA3100W

JA3100SW

125

625

1250

JA3125

JA3125S

JA3125W

JA3125SW

150

750

1500

JA3150

JA3150S

JA3150W

JA3150SW

175

875

1750

JA3175

JA3175S

JA3175W

JA3175SW

200

1000

2000

JA3200

JA3200S

JA3200W

JA3200SW

225

1125

2250

JA3225

JA3225S

JA3225W

JA3225SW

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Approx. shipping weight 14 lbs

Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs

Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes (Set on
High Side, Adjustable to Lower Limits)

Two-Pole 4

Three-Pole

Standard

Saf-T-Vue

Standard

Saf-T-Vue

Low

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15
16

14

Special Breakers 4
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C

4

High

Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable—Without Terminals 5
225

350

700

JA2700MW

JA2700SMW

JA3700MW

JA3700SMW

225

625

1250

JA21250MW

JA21250SMW

JA31250MW

JA31250SMW

225

750

1500

JA21500MW

JA21500SMW

JA31500MW

JA31500SMW

225

875

1750

JA21750MW

JA21750SMW

JA31750MW

JA31750SMW

225

1125

2250

JA22250MW

JA22250SMW

JA32250MW

JA32250SMW

18
19

Ambient Compensating Breakers
70

350

700

JA2070A

—

JA3070A

—

100

500

1000

JA2100A

—

JA3100A

—

125

625

1250

JA2125A

—

JA3125A

—

150

750

1500

JA2150A

—

JA3150A

—

175

875

1750

JA2175A

—

JA3175A

—

200

1000

2000

JA2200A

—

JA3200A

—

225

1125

2250

JA2225A

—

JA3225A

—

17

20
21
22

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker frame.
3 Not UL Listed.
4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
5 Select desired terminal from table and order as separate item.

23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-23

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

1

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings

Accessories and Modifications

Maximum Volts

Amperes

■

2

240 AC

30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

480 AC

25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical

3

600 AC

25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical

250 DC

10,000

4

Terminals
Maximum
Amperes

Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type

5

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

6

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

7
8

70–225

(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al

70–225
70–225

1

Note
1 Optional terminal.

9
10

Catalog
Number

TA225LA1

(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu

T225LA

(1) #6–250 kcmil Cu

T225LBF

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations (see table
on Page V12-T3-23)
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as
standard or for ambients
other than 40°C or 50°C.
For frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for information regarding
special conditions.
Note: Not UL Listed.

50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete
breaker when ordering
breakers to be used in
50°C ambients.

11

For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.

12

Type JA breakers meet
requirements of Class 19a
and 20a circuit breakers
as defined by Federal
Specification W-C-375b.

13

Terminals (see table)
Two terminals are required
per pole.
Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed left.
When used with aluminum
conductors, use joint
compound. To order optional
copper only terminals, add
suffix “C” to complete
breaker catalog number.
Note: Terminals are shipped
separately from breaker frame.
Note: If upgrading a JA breaker
to a Series C K-Frame in a
panelboard application, order
TAD3 spacer kit.

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings
(see table)

Magnetic Only and Ambient
Compensating Breakers
For description, refer to
Application Data 29-160.
To order, select catalog
number from table on
Page V12-T3-23.

For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact Avery
Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-24

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types KA and HKA

1

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type KA 70–225A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip, Thermal-Magnetic,
KA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
Saf-T-Vue and MARK 75 Type HKA

Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C

Magnetic
Trip Setting
Amperes 2

Low

High

Complete Breaker

Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals

Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3

Frame Only

Standard
Catalog
Number

2

Trip Unit Only

Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number

MARK 75
Catalog
Number

Standard
Catalog
Number

Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number

MARK 75
Catalog
Number

Standard MARK 75
or Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number

Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 4
70

350

700

KA2070

KA2070S

HKA2070

KA2225F

KA2225FS

HKA2225F

HKA2070T

90

450

900

KA2090

KA2090S

HKA2090

KA2225F

KA2225FS

HKA2225F

HKA2090T

100

500

1000

KA2100

KA2100S

HKA2100

KA2225F

KA2225FS

HKA2225F

HKA2100T

125

625

1250

KA2125

KA2125S

HKA2125

KA2225F

KA2225FS

HKA2225F

HKA2125T

150

750

1500

KA2150

KA2150S

HKA2150

KA2225F

KA2225FS

HKA2225F

HKA2150T

175

875

1750

KA2175

KA2175S

HKA2175

KA2225F

KA2225FS

HKA2225F

HKA2175T

200

1000

2000

KA2200

KA2200S

HKA2200

KA2225F

KA2225FS

HKA2225F

HKA2200T

225

1125

2250

KA2225

KA2225S

HKA2225

KA2225F

KA2225FS

HKA2225F

HKA2225T

Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs

3
4
5
6
7
8

Approx. shipping weight 9.5 lbs

Approx. shipping weight 2 lbs

9

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
70

350

700

KA3070

KA3070S

HKA3070

KA3225F

KA3225FS

HKA3225F

HKA3070T

90

450

900

KA3090

KA3090S

HKA3090

KA3225F

KA3225FS

HKA3225F

HKA3090T

100

500

1000

KA3100

KA3100S

HKA3100

KA3225F

KA3225FS

HKA3225F

HKA3100T

125

625

1250

KA3125

KA3125S

HKA3125

KA3225F

KA3225FS

HKA3225F

HKA3125T

150

750

1500

KA3150

KA3150S

HKA3150

KA3225F

KA3225FS

HKA3225F

HKA3150T

175

875

1750

KA3175

KA3175S

HKA3175

KA3225F

KA3225FS

HKA3225F

HKA3175T

200

1000

2000

KA3200

KA3200S

HKA3200

KA3225F

KA3225FS

HKA3225F

HKA3200T

225

1125

2250

KA3225

KA3225S

HKA3225

KA3225F

KA3225FS

HKA3225F

HKA3225T

Approx. shipping weight 14 lbs

Approx. shipping weight 11 lbs

10
11
12
13

Approx. shipping weight 2.5 lb.

Trip Units Only for Magnetic Only and Ambient Compensating Breakers 5
Continuous
Ampere Rating

Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 2
Low

15

Two-Pole 4

Three-Pole

High

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable Breakers
225

350

700

HKA2700TM

HKA3700TM

225

625

1250

HKA21250TM

HKA31250TM

225

750

1500

HKA21500TM

HKA31500TM

225

875

1750

HKA21750TM

HKA31750TM

225

1125

2250

HKA22250TM

HKA32250TM

350

700

HKA2070TA

HKA3070TA

100

500

1000

HKA2100TA

HKA3100TA

125

625

1250

HKA2125TA

HKA3125TA

150

750

1500

HKA2150TA

HKA3150TA

175

875

1750

HKA2175TA

HKA3175TA

200

1000

2000

HKA2200TA

HKA3200TA

225

1125

2250

HKA2225TA

HKA3225TA

17
18
20
21
22
23

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limit.
3 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker frame.
4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
5 Not UL Listed.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

16

19

Ambient Compensating Breakers
70

14

24
25
V12-T3-25

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

1

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings

Accessories and Modifications

Maximum Volts

■

2

Standard Breakers
240 AC

30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

3

480 AC

25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical

600 AC

25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical

250 DC

10,000

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.

Amperes

MARK 75 Breakers
240 AC

75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical

480 AC

40,000 asymmetrical, 35,000 symmetrical

600 AC

30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

250 DC

20,000 1

Terminals
Maximum
Amperes

Note: Not UL Listed.
Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type

Catalog
Numbers

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
225

(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or
(1) #4–350 kcmil Al

TA225LA1

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals
225

(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu

T225LA

225 2

(1) #6–250 kcmil Cu

T225LBF

Notes
1 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.
2 Optional terminal.

13

Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as
standard or for ambients
other than 40°C or 50°C.
For frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for information regarding
special conditions.

50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete breaker
when ordering breakers to be
used in 50°C ambients.
Note: Not UL Listed.

Terminals (see table)
Two terminals are required
per pole.
Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed
below. When used with
aluminum conductors, use
joint compound. To order
optional copper only terminals,
add suffix “C” to complete
breaker catalog number.
Type KA breakers meet
requirements for Class 19a
and 20a circuit breakers, and
Type HKA meet requirements
for Class 23a as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact Avery
Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
Note: Terminals are shipped
separately from breaker frame.
Note: If upgrading a KA, HKA
breaker to a Series C K-Frame in a
panelboard application, also order
TAD3 spacer kit.

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings
(see table)
Magnetic Only Breakers
For description, refer to
Application Data 29-160. To
order these breakers, select
frame, trip unit and terminals.

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-26

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Type LBB
■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type LBB 125–400A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue
LBB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
(Suitable for Reverse-Feed)
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C

Magnetic Trip Setting,
Amperes 2
Low

Complete Breaker Includes Pressure Type
Aluminum Terminals 3
Breaker Without Terminals
Saf-T-Vue

Standard

Saf-T-Vue

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Two-Pole, 600 Vdc, 250 Vdc 4
125

625

1250

LBB2125

LBB2125S

LBB2125W

LBB2125SW

150

750

1500

LBB2150

LBB2150S

LBB2150W

LBB2150SW

175

875

1750

LBB2175

LBB2175S

LBB2175W

LBB2175SW

200

1000

2000

LBB2200

LBB2200S

LBB2200W

LBB2200SW

225

1125

2250

LBB2225

LBB2225S

LBB2225W

LBB2225SW

250

1250

2500

LBB2250

LBB2250S

LBB2250W

LBB2250SW

300

1500

3000

LBB2300

LBB2300S

LBB2300W

LBB2300SW

350

1750

3500

LBB2350

LBB2350S

LBB2350W

LBB2350SW

400

2000

4000

LBB2400

LBB2400S

LBB2400W

LBB2400SW

Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs

4
5
6
7
8
9

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
125

625

1250

LBB3125

LBB3125S

LBB3125W

LBB3125SW

150

750

1500

LBB3150

LBB3150S

LBB3150W

LBB3150SW

175

875

1750

LBB3175

LBB3175S

LBB3175W

LBB3175SW

200

1000

2000

LBB3200

LBB3200S

LBB3200W

LBB3200SW

225

1125

2250

LBB3225

LBB3225S

LBB3225W

LBB3225SW

250

1250

2500

LBB3250

LBB3250S

LBB3250W

LBB3250SW

300

1500

3000

LBB3300

LBB3300S

LBB3300W

LBB3300SW

350

1750

3500

LBB3350

LBB3350S

LBB3350W

LBB3350SW

400

2000

4000

LBB3400

LBB3400S

LBB3400W

LBB3400SW

Approx. shipping weight 15 lbs

2
3

Standard

High

Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs

1

Approx. shipping weight 15 lbs

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
3 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker.
4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-27

3
1
2
3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Magnetic Only, Ambient Compensating Breakers 2
Two-Pole Breakers 4
Continuous
Ampere Rating

Three-Pole Breakers

Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 3

Standard

Saf-T-Vue

Standard

Saf-T-Vue

Low

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

High

Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable—Without Terminals 5
400

350

700

LBB2700MW

LBB2700SMW

LBB3700MW

LBB3700SMW

4

400

625

1250

LBB21250MW

LBB21250SMW

LBB31250MW

LBB31250SMW

400

750

1500

LBB21500MW

LBB21500SMW

LBB31500MW

LBB31500SMW

5

400

875

1750

LBB21750MW

LBB21750SMW

LBB31750MW

LBB31750SMW

400

1125

2250

LBB22250MW

LBB22250SMW

LBB32250MW

LBB32250SMW

6

400

1500

3000

LBB23000MW

LBB23000SMW

LBB33000MW

LBB33000SMW

400

2000

4000

LBB24000MW

LBB24000SMW

LBB34000MW

LBB34000SMW

7

Ambient Compensating Breakers—Includes Terminals
125

625

1250

LBB2125A

LBB2125SA

LBB3125A

LBB3125SA

8

150

750

1500

LBB2150A

LBB2150SA

LBB3150A

LBB3150SA

175

875

1750

LBB2175A

LBB2175SA

LBB3175A

LBB3175SA

9

200

1000

2000

LBB2200A

LBB2200SA

LBB3200A

LBB3200SA

225

1125

2250

LBB2225A

LBB2225SA

LBB3225A

LBB3225SA

10

250

1250

2500

LBB2250A

LBB2250SA

LBB3250A

LBB3250SA

300

1500

3000

LBB2300A

LBB2300SA

LBB3300A

LBB3300SA

350

1750

3500

LBB2350A

LBB2350SA

LBB3350A

LBB3350SA

400

2000

4000

LBB2400A

LBB2400SA

LBB3400A

LBB3400SA

11
12

UL Listed
Interrupting Ratings

Accessories and
Modifications

13

Maximum
Volts

■

14
15
16

Amperes

240 AC

50,000 asymmetrical,
42,000 symmetrical

480 AC

35,000 asymmetrical,
30,000 symmetrical

600 AC

25,000 asymmetrical,
22,000 symmetrical

250 DC

20,000 6

17
18
19

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as
standard or for ambients
other than 40°C or 50°C.
For frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for information regarding
special conditions.
Maximum calibration for
400 Hz is 300A.
Note: Not UL Listed.

20

50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete
breaker when ordering
breakers to be used in
50°C ambients.

21
22

Terminals
Two terminals required
per pole.
Select from Page V12-T3-35.
Note: Terminals are shipped
separately from breaker.
Note: If upgrading an LBB
breaker to a Series C K-Frame in a
panelboard application, also order
TAD3 spacer kit.

For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.
Type LBB breakers meet
requirements for Class 21a
circuit breakers, as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings
(see table)
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact Avery
Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
Magnetic Only Breakers
For description, refer to
Application Data 29-160.
To order, select catalog
number from table above.
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For
replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114–
V12-T3-167.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to
lower limits.
4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied
in three-pole frames with current
carrying parts omitted from center pole.
5 Select desired terminals from
V12-T3-30, and order as separate item.
6 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.

Note: Not UL Listed.

23
24
25
V12-T3-28

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types LB and HLB
■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type LB and MARK 75 Type HLB 70–400A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip,
LB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue and MARK 75
Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 3

Complete Breaker
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C

1
2

Magnetic Trip Setting
Amperes 2

Includes Pressure Type
Aluminum Terminals 3

Trip Unit Only

3

Low

Standard
Catalog
Number

Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number

MARK 75
Catalog
Number

Standard
Catalog
Number

Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number

MARK 75
Catalog
Number

Standard Saf-T-Vue,
MARK 75
Catalog Number

4
5

Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc

High

Frame Only

4

70

350

700

LB2070

LB2070S

—

LB2400F

LB2400FS

HLB2400F

HLB2070T

90

450

900

LB2090

LB2090S

—

LB2400F

LB2400FS

HLB2400F

HLB2090T

100

500

1000

LB2100

LB2100S

—

LB2400F

LB2400FS

HLB2400F

HLB2100T

125

625

1250

LB2125

LB2125S

HLB2125

LB2400F

LB2400FS

HLB2400F

HLB2125T

150

750

1500

LB2150

LB2150S

HLB2150

LB2400F

LB2400FS

HLB2400F

HLB2150T

175

875

1750

LB2175

LB2175S

HLB2175

LB2400F

LB2400FS

HLB2400F

HLB2175T

200

1000

2000

LB2200

LB2200S

HLB2200

LB2400F

LB2400FS

HLB2400F

HLB2200T

225

1125

2250

LB2225

LB2225S

HLB2225

LB2400F

LB2400FS

HLB2400F

HLB2225T

250

1250

2500

LB2250

LB2250S

HLB2250

LB2400F

LB2400FS

HLB2400F

HLB2250T

300

1500

3000

LB2300

LB2300S

HLB2300

LB2400F

LB2400FS

HLB2400F

HLB2300T

350

1750

3500

LB2350

LB2350S

HLB2350

LB2400F

LB2400FS

HLB2400F

HLB2350T

400

2000

4000

LB2400

LB2400S

HLB2400

LB2400F

LB2400FS

HLB2400F

HLB2400T

6
7
8
9
10

Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs

Approx. shipping weight 10 lbs

Approx. shipping
weight 2 lbs

11
12

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
70

350

700

LB3070

LB3070S

—

LB3400F

LB3400FS

HLB3400F

HLB3070T

90

450

900

LB3090

LB3090S

—

LB3400F

LB3400FS

HLB3400F

HLB3090T

100

500

1000

LB3100

LB3100S

—

LB3400F

LB3400FS

HLB3400F

HLB3100T

125

625

1250

LB3125

LB3125S

HLB3125

LB3400F

LB3400FS

HLB3400F

HLB3125T

150

750

1500

LB3150

LB3150S

HLB3150

LB3400F

LB3400FS

HLB3400F

HLB3150T

175

875

1750

LB3175

LB3175S

HLB3175

LB3400F

LB3400FS

HLB3400F

HLB3175T

200

1000

2000

LB3200

LB3200S

HLB3200

LB3400F

LB3400FS

HLB3400F

HLB3200T

225

1125

2250

LB3225

LB3225S

HLB3225

LB3400F

LB3400FS

HLB3400F

HLB3225T

250

1250

2500

LB3250

LB3250S

HLB3250

LB3400F

LB3400FS

HLB3400F

HLB3250T

300

1500

3000

LB3300

LB3300S

HLB3300

LB3400F

LB3400FS

HLB3400F

HLB3300T

350

1750

3500

LB3350

LB3350S

HLB3350

LB3400F

LB3400FS

HLB3400F

HLB3350T

400

2000

4000

LB3400

LB3400S

HLB3400

LB3400F

LB3400FS

HLB3400F

HLB3400T

Approx. shipping weight 15 lbs

Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs

13
14
15
16
17

Approx. shipping
weight 2.5 lbs

18
19

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-126–V12-T3-167.
2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
3 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker.
4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-29

3
1
2
3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products
and services. 1
Special Breakers—Trip Units Only 2
Continuous
Ampere
Rating

UL Listed
Interrupting Ratings
Maximum
Volts

Amperes

Magnetic Trip Setting,
Amperes 3

Trip Unit Only
Two-Pole 4

Three-Pole

Standard Breakers

Low

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

240 AC

50,000 asymmetrical,
42,000 symmetrical

480 AC

35,000 asymmetrical,
30,000 symmetrical

600 AC

25,000 asymmetrical,
22,000 symmetrical
20,000 5

High

Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable

4

400

350

700

HLB2700TM

HLB3700TM

400

625

1250

HLB21250TM

HLB31250TM

5

400

750

1500

HLB21500TM

HLB31500TM

400

875

1750

HLB21750TM

HLB31750TM

250 DC

6

400

1125

2250

HLB22250TM

HLB32250TM

MARK 75 Breakers

400

1125

2250

HLB22250TM

HLB32250TM

240 AC

75,000 asymmetrical,
65,000 symmetrical

7

400

1500

3000

HLB23000TM

HLB33000TM

480 AC

400

2000

4000

HLB24000TM

HLB34000TM

40,000 asymmetrical,
35,000 symmetrical

600 AC

30,000 asymmetrical,
25,000 symmetrical

250 DC

20,000 5

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Ambient Compensating Breakers

For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact Avery
Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
Terminals
Two terminals are required
per pole.
Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed
below. When used with
aluminum cable, use joint
compound. To order optional
copper only terminals, add
suffix “C” to complete
breaker catalog number.
Note: Terminals are shipped
separately from breaker. If
upgrading an LB, HLB breaker
to a Series C K-Frame in a
panelboard application, also
order TAD3 spacer kit.

70

350

700

HLB2070TA

HLB3070TA

90

450

900

HLB2090TA

HLB3090TA

100

500

1000

HLB2100TA

HLB3100TA

125

625

1250

HLB2125TA

HLB3125TA

150

750

1500

HLB2150TA

HLB3150TA

Terminals

175

875

1750

HLB2175TA

HLB3175TA

200

1000

2000

HLB2200TA

HLB3200TA

Maximum
Amperes

225

1125

2250

HLB2225TA

HLB3225TA

Standard Pressure Terminals

250

1250

2500

HLB2250TA

HLB3250TA

225

(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al

TA225LA1

HLB3300TA

350

(1) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu

TA350DA

HLB3350TA

400

(2) 3/0–250 kcmil Cu only

T400DA2

HLB3400TA

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

300
350
400

1500

3000

1750

3500

2000

4000

HLB2300TA
HLB2350TA
HLB2400TA

225

Accessories and
Modifications
■

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as standard
or for ambients other
than 40°C or 50°C. For
frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC circuits, refer
to Eaton. See Application
Data 29-160 for information
regarding special conditions.
Maximum calibration for
400 Hz is 300A.
Note: Not UL Listed.

23

50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete breaker
or trip unit only, when
ordering breakers to be
used in 50°C ambients.
Note: Not UL Listed.

Magnetic Only Breakers
For description, refer to
Application Data 29-160.
To order, select trip unit
from table above, frame
and terminals.

225
350

6

Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type

(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu

T225LA

(1) #6–250 kcmil Cu

T225LBF

(1) 250–500 kcmil Cu

T350DA

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on
Pages V12-T3-126–V12-T3-167.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts
omitted from center pole.
5 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.
6 Optional terminal.

Note: Not UL Listed.

For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.
Type LB breakers meet
requirements for Class 21a
circuit breakers, and Type HLB
meet requirements for Class
23a, as defined by Federal
Specification W-C-375b.

24
25
V12-T3-30

Catalog
Number

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Type DA

1

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type DA Breakers 250–400A, 240 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic
DA: 240 Vac; 250 Vdc
(Suitable for Reverse-Feed)
Breakers With Line and Load Terminals

Two-Pole 2
Catalog Number

Three-Pole
Catalog Number

Two-Pole 2
Catalog Number

Three-Pole
Catalog Number

3

250

DA2250Y

DA3250Y

DA2250

DA3250

300

DA2300Y

DA3300Y

DA2300

DA3300

4

350

DA2350Y

DA3350Y

DA2350

DA3350

400

DA2400Y

DA3400Y

DA2400

DA3400

Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs

Approx. shipping weight 15 lbs

Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs

Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs

Accessories and
Modifications
■

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services
Type DA breakers meet
requirements of Federal
Specification W-C-375b.,
Class 14b.
UL Listed
Interrupting Ratings

Maximum
Volts
240 AC
250 DC

2

Breakers With Line Terminals Only

Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C

Terminals
Terminals are UL Listed for
the wire type and size listed
below. When used with
aluminum conductors,
use joint compound.
Terminals
Number
of Cables,
Maximum Wire Range,
Amperes Type

Catalog
Number

Standard Pressure Terminals

Amperes

350

(1) 250–500 kcmil TA350DA
Al/Cu

25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000
symmetrical

400

(2) 3/0–250 kcmil
Cu only

10,000

For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.

T400DA2

Optional Terminals
(for Copper Cable)
350

(1) 250–500 kcmil T350DA
Cu

Note: If upgrading a DA breaker
to a Series C K-Frame in a
panelboard application, also
order TAD3 spacer kit.

For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as standard
or for ambients other
than 40°C or 50°C. For
frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC circuits, refer
to Eaton. See Application
Data 29-160 for information
regarding special conditions.
Maximum 400 Hz
calibrations: Type DA, 300A.

5

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For
replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114–
V12-T3-167.
2 Two-pole breakers are supplied in
three-pole frames.

6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Note: Not UL Listed.

13

50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete
breaker when ordering
breakers to be used in 50°C
ambients. Same price as
standard 40°C breakers.

14
15
16

Note: Not UL Listed.

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-31

3
1
2

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Type LAB
■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type LAB 125–400A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue
LAB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
(Suitable for Reverse-Feed)

3

Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C

4

Complete Breaker Includes Pressure Type
Aluminum Terminals 3

Breaker Without Terminals

Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 2

Standard

Saf-T-Vue

Standard

Saf-T-Vue

Low

High

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 4
125

625

1250

LAB2125

LAB2125S

LAB2125W

LAB2125SW

150

750

1500

LAB2150

LAB2150S

LAB2150W

LAB2150SW

175

875

1750

LAB2175

LAB2175S

LAB2175W

LAB2175SW

200

1000

2000

LAB2200

LAB2200S

LAB2200W

LAB2200SW

225

1125

2250

LAB2225

LAB2225S

LAB2225W

LAB2225SW

7

250

1250

2500

LAB2250

LAB2250S

LAB2250W

LAB2250SW

300

1500

3000

LAB2300

LAB2300S

LAB2300W

LAB2300SW

8

350

1750

3500

LAB2350

LAB2350S

LAB2350W

LAB2350SW

400

2000

4000

LAB2400

LAB2400S

LAB2400W

LAB2400SW

5
6

9

Approx. shipping weight 22 lbs

Approx. shipping weight 22 lbs

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

10

125

625

1250

LAB3125

LAB3125S

LAB3125W

LAB3125SW

150

750

1500

LAB3150

LAB3150S

LAB3150W

LAB3150SW

11

175

875

1750

LAB3175

LAB3175S

LAB3175W

LAB3175SW

200

1000

2000

LAB3200

LAB3200S

LAB3200W

LAB3200SW

12

225

1125

2250

LAB3225

LAB3225S

LAB3225W

LAB3225SW

250

1250

2500

LAB3250

LAB3250S

LAB3250W

LAB3250SW

13

300

1500

3000

LAB3300

LAB3300S

LAB3300W

LAB3300SW

350

1750

3500

LAB3350

LAB3350S

LAB3350W

LAB3350SW

14

400

2000

4000

LAB3400

LAB3400S

LAB3400W

LAB3400SW

Approx. shipping weight 24.5 lbs

Approx. shipping weight 24.5 lbs

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
3 Terminals shipped separately from breaker.
4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-32

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

■ Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Special Breakers 2

1

Breaker Catalog Number
Two-Pole 4
Continuous
Ampere Rating

Magnetic Trip Setting,
Low

Amperes 3
High

Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable—Without

2

Three-Pole

Standard

Saf-T-Vue

Standard

Saf-T-Vue

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

3
4

Terminals 5

400

350

700

LAB2700MW

LAB2700SMW

LAB3700MW

LAB3700SMW

400

625

1250

LAB21250MW

LAB21250SMW

LAB31250MW

LAB31250SMW

400

750

1500

LAB21500MW

LAB21500SMW

LAB31500MW

LAB31500SMW

400

875

1750

LAB21750MW

LAB21750SMW

LAB31750MW

LAB31750SMW

400

1125

2250

LAB22250MW

LAB22250SMW

LAB32250MW

LAB32250SMW

400

1500

3000

LAB23000MW

LAB23000SMW

LAB33000MW

LAB33000SMW

400

2000

4000

LAB24000MW

LAB24000SMW

LAB34000MW

LAB34000SMW

7
8

5
6

Ambient Compensating Breakers—Includes Terminals
125

625

1250

LAB2125A

—

LAB3125A

—

150

750

1500

LAB2150A

—

LAB3150A

—

175

875

1750

LAB2175A

—

LAB3175A

—

200

1000

2000

LAB2200A

—

LAB3200A

—

225

1125

2250

LAB2225A

—

LAB3225A

—

250

1250

2500

LAB2250A

—

LAB3250A

—

300

1500

3000

LAB2300A

—

LAB3300A

—

350

1750

3500

LAB2350A

—

LAB3350A

—

400

2000

4000

LAB2400A

—

LAB3400A

—

Accessories and
Modifications
■

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as
standard or for ambients
other than 40°C or 50°C.
For frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC circuits, refer
to Eaton. See Application
Data 29-160 for information
regarding special conditions.
Maximum calibration for
400 Hz is 300A.
Note: Not UL Listed.

50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete
breaker when ordering
breakers to be used in 50°C
ambients. For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.

Type LAB breakers meet
requirements for Class 21a
circuit breakers, as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.

Terminals
Two terminals required
per pole.

UL Listed
Interrupting Ratings 6

Note: Terminals shipped
separately from breaker.

Maximum
Volts

Amperes

240 AC

50,000 asymmetrical,
42,000 symmetrical

480 AC

35,000 asymmetrical,
30,000 symmetrical

600 AC

25,000 asymmetrical,
22,000 symmetrical

250 DC

20,000 7

Select from the table on
Page V12-T3-36.

Magnetic Only and Ambient
Compensating Breakers
To order, select catalog
number from “Special
Breakers” table above.
Additional Accessories and
Modifications
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.

9
10
11

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For
replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114–
V12-T3-167.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to
lower limits.
4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in
three-pole frames with current carrying
parts omitted from center pole.
5 Select desired terminals from
Page V12-T3-39 and order as
separate item.
6 Interrupting capacities shown do not
apply to molded-case switches.
7 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.

20
21
22
23

Note: Not UL Listed.

24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-33

3
1
2

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types LA and HLA
■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type LA and MARK 75 Type HLA 70–400A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip
LA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc

3

Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C

4

Magnetic
Trip Setting
Amperes 2

Low

400A Frame Breakers
6

High

Complete Breaker

Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals

Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3

Frame Only

Standard
Catalog
Number

MARK 75
Catalog
Number

Standard
Catalog
Number

4—Two-Pole,

Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number

Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number

MARK 75
Catalog
Number

Trip Unit Only
Standard,
MARK 75,
Saf-T-Vue
Catalog Number

600 Vac, 250 Vdc 5

5

70

350

700

LA2070

LA2070S

HLA2070

LA2400F

LA2400FS

HLA2400F

HLA2070T

90 6

450

900

LA2090

LA2090S

HLA2090

LA2400F

LA2400FS

HLA2400F

HLA2090T

6

100 6

500

1000

LA2100

LA2100S

HLA2100

LA2400F

LA2400FS

HLA2400F

HLA2100T

125

625

1250

LA2125

LA2125S

HLA2125

LA2400F

LA2400FS

HLA2400F

HLA2125T

7

150

750

1500

LA2150

LA2150S

HLA2150

LA2400F

LA2400FS

HLA2400F

HLA2150T

175

875

1750

LA2175

LA2175S

HLA2175

LA2400F

LA2400FS

HLA2400F

HLA2175T

200

1000

2000

LA2200

LA2200S

HLA2200

LA2400F

LA2400FS

HLA2400F

HLA2200T

225

1125

2250

LA2225

LA2225S

HLA2225

LA2400F

LA2400FS

HLA2400F

HLA2225T

250

1250

2500

LA2250

LA2250S

HLA2250

LA2400F

LA2400FS

HLA2400F

HLA2250T

300

1500

3000

LA2300

LA2300S

HLA2300

LA2400F

LA2400FS

HLA2400F

HLA2300T

350

1750

3500

LA2350

LA2350S

HLA2350

LA2400F

LA2400FS

HLA2400F

HLA2350T

400

2000

4000

LA2400

LA2400S

HLA2400

LA2400F

LA2400FS

HLA2400F

HLA2400T

8
9
10

Approx. shipping weight 21.75 lbs

11

Approx. shipping weight 17.5 lbs

Approx.shipping
weight 2.25 lbs

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

12

70 6

350

700

LA3070

LA3070S

HLA3070

LA3400F

LA3400FS

HLA3400F

HLA3070T

6

450

900

LA3090

LA3090S

HLA3090

LA3400F

LA3400FS

HLA3400F

HLA3090T

13

100 6

500

1000

LA3100

LA3100S

HLA3100

LA3400F

LA3400FS

HLA3400F

HLA3100T

125

625

1250

LA3125

LA3125S

HLA3125

LA3400F

LA3400FS

HLA3400F

HLA3125T

14

150

750

1500

LA3150

LA3150S

HLA3150

LA3400F

LA3400FS

HLA3400F

HLA3150T

175

875

1750

LA3175

LA3175S

HLA3175

LA3400F

LA3400FS

HLA3400F

HLA3175T

15

200

1000

2000

LA3200

LA3200S

HLA3200

LA3400F

LA3400FS

HLA3400F

HLA3200T

225

1125

2250

LA3225

LA3225S

HLA3225

LA3400F

LA3400FS

HLA3400F

HLA3225T

250

1250

2500

LA3250

LA3250S

HLA3250

LA3400F

LA3400FS

HLA3400F

HLA3250T

300

1500

3000

LA3300

LA3300S

HLA3300

LA3400F

LA3400FS

HLA3400F

HLA3300T

350

1750

3500

LA3350

LA3350S

HLA3350

LA3400F

LA3400FS

HLA3400F

HLA3350T

400

2000

4000

LA3400

LA3400S

HLA3400

LA3400F

LA3400FS

HLA3400F

HLA3400T

90

16
17

Approx. shipping weight 24.5 lbs

18

Approx. shipping weight 19 lbs

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
3 Terminals shipped separately from breaker.
4 Terminals, trip units and accessories are not interchangeable between 400 and 600A frames.
5 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
6 These ratings have interrupting capacities reduced to 25,000A symmetrical at 240V, 20,000A symmetrical at 480V, and 15,000A symmetrical at 600V.

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-34

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Approx. shipping
weight 3 lbs

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.
Special Breakers 2—Trip Units Only
Continuous
Ampere Rating

Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 3
Low

High

3

1

1

Two-Pole 4

Three-Pole

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2
3

Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable—400A Frame Breakers 5
400

350

700

HLA2700TM

HLA3700TM

400

625

1250

HLA21250TM

HLA31250TM

400

750

1500

HLA21500TM

HLA31500TM

400

875

1750

HLA21750TM

HLA31750TM

400

1125

2250

HLA22250TM

HLA32250TM

400

1500

3000

HLA23000TM

HLA33000TM

400

2000

4000

HLA24000TM

HLA34000TM

6
7

4
5

Ambient Compensating Breakers—400A Frame Breakers Only 5
70 6

350

700

HLA2070TA

HLA3070TA

6

450

900

HLA2090TA

HLA3090TA

100 6

500

1000

HLA2100TA

HLA3100TA

125

625

1250

HLA2125TA

HLA3125TA

150

750

1500

HLA2150TA

HLA3150TA

175

875

1750

HLA2175TA

HLA3175TA

200

1000

2000

HLA2200TA

HLA3200TA

225

1125

2250

HLA2225TA

HLA3225TA

250

1250

2500

HLA2250TA

HLA3250TA

300

1500

3000

HLA2300TA

HLA3300TA

350

1750

3500

HLA2350TA

HLA3350TA

400

2000

4000

HLA2400TA

HLA3400TA

90

8
9
10
11
12

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
5 Terminals, trip units and accessories are not interchangeable between 400 and 600A frames.
6 These ratings have interrupting capacities reduced to 25,000A symmetrical at 240V, 20,000A symmetrical at 480V, and 15,000A symmetrical at 600V.

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-35

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Accessories and
Modifications
■

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as standard
or for ambients other
than 40°C or 50°C. For
frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for information regarding
special conditions. Maximum
400 Hz calibration: 400A
frame, 300A.
Note: Not UL Listed.

50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete breaker
or trip unit only, when
ordering breakers to be
used in 50°C ambients.
Note: Not UL Listed.

Terminals
Two terminals required
per pole.
Select from table at right.
Note: Terminals shipped
separately from breaker.

15
16

Magnetic Only Breakers
To order, select trip unit from
the table on Page V12-T3-35,
frame and terminals from
table at right.
Note: Not UL Listed. MARK 75
frame color changed from gray
to black in mid-2002.

UL Listed Except as Noted
Type LA breakers meet
requirements for Class 21a
circuit breakers, and Type
HLA meet requirements
for Class 23a as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.

Terminals
Two terminals are required
per pole.

copper only terminals, add
suffix “C” to complete
breaker catalog number.

Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed
below. When used with
aluminum cable, use joint
compound. To order optional

Note: Terminals shipped
separately from breaker.
Terminals, trip units and
accessories are not
interchangeable between
400 and 600A frames.

Terminals
Maximum
Amperes

Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
225 3

(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al

TA225LA1

400 3

(1) #4–250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Al/Cu

TA400LA1

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

UL Listed
Interrupting Ratings 1

225 3

(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu

T225LA

225 34

(1) #6–250 kcmil Cu

T225LBF

Maximum
Volts

400 3

(1) #4–250 kcmil Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Cu

T401LA

Amperes

Standard Breakers
240 AC

50,000 asymmetrical,
42,000 symmetrical

480 AC

35,000 asymmetrical,
30,000 symmetrical

600 AC

25,000 asymmetrical,
22,000 symmetrical

250 DC

20,000 2

Notes
1 Interrupting capacities do not apply to molded-case switches.
2 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.
3 400A frame only.
4 Optional terminal.

MARK 75 Breakers
240 AC

75,000 asymmetrical,
65,000 symmetrical

480 AC

40,000 asymmetrical,
35,000 symmetrical

600 AC

30,000 asymmetrical,
25,000 symmetrical

250 DC

20,000 2

For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-36

Catalog
Number

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types LA and HLA
■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type LA and MARK 75 Type HLA 250–600A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two-, Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip
LA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue and MARK 75 Breakers
Magnetic Trip
Setting, Amperes 2
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C

Low

High

Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 3

Complete Breaker
Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3

Frame Only

Standard
Catalog
Number

MARK 75
Catalog
Number

Standard
Catalog
Number

Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number

MARK 75
Catalog
Number

Standard Saf-T-Vue,
MARK 75
Catalog
Number

Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number

Trip Unit Only

600A Frame Breakers 4—Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 5

1
2
3
4
5

250

1250

2500

2603D50G01

2603D50G13

1256C10G02

LA2600F

LA2600FS

HLA2600F

2603D46G07

300

1500

3000

2603D50G02

2603D50G14

1256C10G03

LA2600F

LA2600FS

HLA2600F

2603D46G08

350

1750

3500

2603D50G03

2603D50G15

1256C10G04

LA2600F

LA2600FS

HLA2600F

2603D46G09

350

1750

3500

2603D50G03

2603D50G15

1256C10G04

LA2600F

LA2600FS

HLA2600F

2603D46G09

400

2000

4000

2603D50G04

2603D50G16

1256C10G05

LA2600F

LA2600FS

HLA2600F

2603D46G10

500

2500

5000

LA2500

LA2500S

HLA2500

LA2600F

LA2600FS

HLA2600F

HLA2500T

600

3000

6000

LA2600

LA2600S

HLA2600

LA2600F

LA2600FS

HLA2600F

HLA2600T

8
9

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
250

1250

2500

2603D50G07

2603D50G019

1256C10G12

LA3600F

LA3600FS

HLA3600F

2603D46G26

300

1500

3000

2603D50G08

2603D50G020

1256C10G13

LA3600F

LA3600FS

HLA3600F

2603D46G27

350

1750

3500

2603D50G09

2603D50G021

1256C10G14

LA3600F

LA3600FS

HLA3600F

2603D46G28

400

2000

4000

2603D50G10

2603D50G022

1256C10G15

LA3600F

LA3600FS

HLA3600F

2603D46G29

500

2500

5000

LA3500

LA3500S

HLA500

LA3600F

LA3600FS

HLA3600F

HLA3500T

600

3000

6000

LA3600

LA3600S

HLA3600

LA3600F

LA3600FS

HLA3600F

HLA3600T

600A Frame Breakers

Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes
Low
4—Magnetic

7

10
11
12

Type Special Breakers 6—Trip Units Only
Continuous
Ampere Rating

6

High

Two-Pole 5
Catalog Number

Three-Pole
Catalog Number

13
14

Only Breakers, Front Adjustable

600

1125

2250

2603D47G07

2603D47G26

600

1500

3000

2603D47G08

2603D47G27

600

2000

4000

2603D47G10

2603D47G29

600

2500

5000

HLA25000TM

HLA35000TM

600

3000

6000

HLA26000TM

HLA36000TM

16
17

15

600A Frame Breakers—Ambient Compensating Breakers
250

1250

2500

5683D88G07

5683D88G26

300

1500

3000

5683D88G08

5683D88G27

350

1750

3500

5683D88G09

5683D88G28

400

2000

4000

5683D88G10

5683D88G29

500

2500

5000

HLA2500TA

HLA3500TA

600

3000

6000

HLA2600TA

HLA3600TA

18
19
20

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2

Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.

3

Terminals shipped separately from breakers.
Terminals, trip units and accessories are not interchangeable between 400 and 600A frames.
Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
Not UL Listed.

4
5
6

21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-37

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Accessories and
Modifications

UL Listed Interrupting
Ratings 1

■

Maximum
Volts

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as standard
or for ambients other
than 40°C or 50°C. For
frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for information regarding
special conditions.
Maximum 400 Hz calibration:
600A frame, 450A.

240 AC

50,000 asymmetrical,
42,000 symmetrical

480 AC

35,000 asymmetrical,
30,000 symmetrical

600 AC

25,000 asymmetrical,
22,000 symmetrical

250 DC

20,000 2

MARK 75 Breakers
240 AC

75,000 asymmetrical,
65,000 symmetrical

480 AC

40,000 asymmetrical,
35,000 symmetrical

600 AC

30,000 asymmetrical,
25,000 symmetrical

250 DC

20,000 2

Note: Not UL Listed.

50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete breaker
or trip unit only, when
ordering breakers to be used
in 50°C ambients. Same price
as standard 40°C breakers.
For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.

Amperes

Standard Breakers

For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.

Terminals
Two terminals are required
per pole. Terminals are UL
Listed for wire type and range
listed below. When used with
aluminum cable, use joint
compound. To order optional
copper only terminals, add
suffix “C” to complete
breaker catalog number.

Magnetic Only Breakers
To order, select frame, trip
unit and terminals from tables
on this page.

Accessories and
Modifications
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.

Note: Terminals shipped
separately from breakers.
Terminals, trip units and
accessories are not
interchangeable between
400 and 600A frames.

Terminals
Maximum
Amperes

Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type

Catalog
Number

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
600 3

(2) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu

TA600LA

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals
600 3

(2) 250–500 kcmil Cu

T600LA

Notes
1 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded case switches.
2 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.
3 For 600A frame breakers only.

Type LA breakers meet
requirements for Class 21a
circuit breakers, and type
HLA meet requirements
for Class 23a as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.
Note: Not UL Listed. MARK 75
frame color changed from gray
to black in mid-2002.

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-38

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Type LAY

1

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type LAY 250–600A, 240 Vac, Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip Thermal-Magnetic, 600A Frame 2
LAY: 240 Vac
Complete Breaker

Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 5

Magnetic Trip Setting Amperes 3

Includes Pressure Type
Aluminum Terminals 4 Frame Only

Low

High

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

250

1250

2500

LAY3250

LAY3600F

2603D46G26

300

1500

3000

LAY3300

LAY3600F

2603D46G27

350

1750

3500

LAY3350

LAY3600F

2603D46G28

400

2000

4000

LAY3400

LAY3600F

2603D46G29

500

2500

5000

LAY3500

LAY3600F

HLA3500T

600

3000

6000

LAY3600

LAY3600F

HLA3600T

Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C

Accessories and
Modifications
■

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as standard
or for ambients other
than 40°C or 50°C. For
frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to
Eaton. See Application
Data 29-160 for information
regarding special conditions.
Maximum 400 Hz calibration:
600A frame, 450A.
Note: Not UL Listed.

50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete breaker
or trip unit only, when
ordering breakers to be used
in 50°C ambients. Same price
as standard 40°C breakers.
For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.
Type LAY breakers are
not defined by Federal
Specification W-C-375b.
Note: Not UL Listed.

For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.

Trip Unit Only

5
6
7

UL Listed
Interrupting Ratings
Maximum
Volts
Amperes

8

240 AC

9

115,000 asymmetrical,
100,000 symmetrical

Terminals
Two terminals are required
per pole.

10
11

Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed
below. When used with
aluminum cable, use joint
compound.

12
13

Note: Terminals shipped
separately from breaker.

14

Additional Accessories
and Modifications

15

Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.

16

Maximum Amperes

Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type

Catalog Number

17

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
500 5

(2) 3/0–250 kcmil Al/Cu

TA602LD

600 5

(2) 400–500 kcmil Al/Cu

TA603LA

5

(2) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu

TA600LA

18
19

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals
600 6

3
4

Terminals

600

2

(2) 250–500 kcmil Cu

T600LA

20

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Optional terminal.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
4 Terminals shipped separately from breaker.
5 For 600A frame breakers only.
6 Not UL Listed.

21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-39

3
1
2

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types MA and HMA
■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type MA 125–800A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 2, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip
MA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
Magnetic Trip
Setting Amperes 3

3

Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C

4

Low

High

Complete Breaker

Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 4

Includes Pressure Type Copper Terminals 4

Frame Only

Standard
Catalog
Number

Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number

MARK 75
Catalog
Number

Standard
Catalog
Number

Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number

MARK 75
Catalog
Number

Standard
Saf-T-Vue,
MARK 75
Catalog Number

Trip Unit Only

Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 25

5

125

625

1250

MA2125

MA2125S

HMA2125

MA2800F

MA2800FS

HMA2800F

HMA2125T

150

750

1500

MA2150

MA2150S

HMA2150

MA2800F

MA2800FS

HMA2800F

HMA2150T

6

175

875

1750

MA2175

MA2175S

HMA2175

MA2800F

MA2800FS

HMA2800F

HMA2175T

200

1000

2000

MA2200

MA2200S

HMA2200

MA2800F

MA2800FS

HMA2800F

HMA2200T

7

225

1125

2250

MA2225

MA2225S

HMA2225

MA2800F

MA2800FS

HMA2800F

HMA2225T

250

1250

2500

MA2250

MA2250S

HMA2250

MA2800F

MA2800FS

HMA2800F

HMA2250T

8

300

1500

3000

MA2300

MA2300S

HMA2300

MA2800F

MA2800FS

HMA2800F

HMA2300T

350

1750

3500

MA2350

MA2350S

HMA2350

MA2800F

MA2800FS

HMA2800F

HMA2350T

9

400

2000

4000

MA2400

MA2400S

HMA2400

MA2800F

MA2800FS

HMA2800F

HMA2400T

500

2500

5000

MA2500

MA2500S

HMA2500

MA2800F

MA2800FS

HMA2800F

HMA2500T

10

600

3000

6000

MA2600

MA2600S

HMA2600

MA2800F

MA2800FS

HMA2800F

HMA2600T

700

3000

6000

MA2700 6

MA2700S

HMA2700

MA2800F

MA2800FS

HMA2800F

HMA2700T 6

6

MA2800S

HMA2800

MA2800F

MA2800FS

HMA2800F

HMA2800T 6

MA2800WSK

—

—

—

—

Incl. in Frame

11

800

3000

6000

MA2800

800

MCS 7

—

MA2800WK

Approx. shipping weight 37 lbs

12

Approx. shipping weight 24 lbs

Approx. shipping
weight 3.5 lbs

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

13

125

625

1250

MA3125

MA3125S

HMA3125

MA3800F

MA3800FS

HMA3800F

HMA3125T

150

750

1500

MA3150

MA3150S

HMA3150

MA3800F

MA3800FS

HMA3800F

HMA3150T

14

175

875

1750

MA3175

MA3175S

HMA3175

MA3800F

MA3800FS

HMA3800F

HMA3175T

200

1000

2000

MA3200

MA3200S

HMA3200

MA3800F

MA3800FS

HMA3800F

HMA3200T

15

225

1125 7

2250

MA3225

MA3225S

HMA3225

MA3800F

MA3800FS

HMA3800F

HMA3225T

250

1250

2500

MA3250

MA3250S

HMA3250

MA3800F

MA3800FS

HMA3800F

HMA3250T

16

300

1500

3000

MA3300

MA3300S

HMA3300

MA3800F

MA3800FS

HMA3800F

HMA3300T

350

1750

3500

MA3350

MA3350S

HMA3350

MA3800F

MA3800FS

HMA3800F

HMA3350T

17

400

2000

4000

MA3400

MA3400S

HMA3400

MA3800F

MA3800FS

HMA3800F

HMA3400T

500

2500

5000

MA3500

MA3500S

HMA3500

MA3800F

MA3800FS

HMA3800F

HMA3500T

600

3000

6000

MA3600

MA3600S

HMA3600

MA3800F

MA3800FS

HMA3800F

HMA3600T

700

3000

6000

MA3700 6

MA3700S

HMA3700

MA3800F

MA3800FS

HMA3800F

HMA3700T 6

800

3000

6000

MA3800 6

MA3800S

HMA3800

MA3800F

MA3800FS

HMA3800F

HMA3800T 6

800

MCS 7

—

MA3800WK

MA3800WSK

—

—

—

—

Incl. in Frame

18
19

Approx. shipping weight 44 lbs

20

Approx. shipping weight 28 lbs

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Above 600A, DC rating applies to magnetic only breakers.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
4 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker.
5 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
6 60 Hz AC only.
7 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to high magnetic molded-case switches.

21
22
23

MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002. Also magnetic only trip units available: HMA8000TM 4000–8000A.

24
25
V12-T3-40

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Approx. shipping
weight 4 lbs

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products
and services. 1

Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable 2
Magnetic
Trip Range 4

Trip Unit Only
Two-Pole 4

Three-Pole

Low

High

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

800

625

1250

HMA21250TM

HMA31250TM

800

1000

2000

HMA22000TM

HMA32000TM

800

1500

3000

HMA23000TM

HMA33000TM

800

2000

4000

HMA24000TM

HMA34000TM

800

3000

6000

HMA26000TM

HMA36000TM

800

4000

8000

HMA28000TM

HMA38000TM

Continuous
Ampere
Rating

Ambient Compensating Breakers 2
Magnetic
Trip Range 3

Type MA Accessories
and Modifications
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as standard
or for ambients other
than 40°C or 50°C. For
frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC (50 Hz AC
minimum, 60 Hz AC
maximum, refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for additional information
regarding special conditions.

3

For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.

1

Type MA breakers meet
requirements for Class 21a
circuit breakers, and Type
HMA meet requirements
for Class 23a, as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.

Note: Not UL Listed.

Trip Unit Only

2
3
4
5
6
7

Low

High

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

125

625

1250

HMA2125TA

HMA3125TA

150

750

1500

HMA2150TA

HMA3150TA

175

875

1750

HMA2175TA

HMA3175TA

50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete
breaker or trip unit only,
when ordering breakers to
be used in 50°C ambients.

200

1000

2000

HMA2200TA

HMA3200TA

Note: Not UL Listed.

220

1125

2250

HMA2225TA

HMA3225TA

10

250

1250

2500

HMA2250TA

HMA3250TA

Type MA UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 5

300

1500

3000

HMA2300TA

HMA3300TA

1750

3500

HMA2350TA

HMA3350TA

Maximum
Volts

11

350
400

2000

4000

HMA2400TA

HMA3400TA

Standard Breakers

500

2500

5000

HMA2500TA

HMA3500TA

240 AC

50,000 asymmetrical, 42,000 symmetrical

600

3000

6000

HMA2600TA

HMA3600TA

480 AC

35,000 asymmetrical, 30,000 symmetrical

700

3000

6000

HMA2700TA

HMA3700TA

600 AC

25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical

800

3000

6000

HMA2800TA

HMA3800TA

250 DC 6

20,000 7

14

240 AC

75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical

480 AC

40,000 asymmetrical, 35,000 symmetrical

15

Continuous
Ampere
Rating

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

8
9

Amperes

12
13

MARK 75 Breakers

600 AC

30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

250 DC 6

20,000 7

16

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on
Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from
center pole.
5 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to high magnetic molded-case switches.
6 Above 600A, DC rating applies to magnetic only breakers.
7 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-41

3
1
2
3
4
5
6

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products
and services.

Type MAY Accessories and Modifications

Terminals
Two terminals are required
per pole.

Type MAY 600–800A, 240 Vac, Three-Pole,
Interchangeable Trip 1

■

Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed
below. When used with
aluminum conductors, use
joint compound.

Note: Terminals are shipped
separately from breaker.

Magnetic Only and Ambient
Compensating Breakers
To order a complete breaker,
select trip unit plus frame
and terminals.

Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C

Magnetic Trip
Setting, Amperes 3

Complete
Breaker

Shipped as Frame,
Trip Unit and Terminals 4

Low

Includes Pressure
Type Aluminum
Terminals 4
Catalog Number

Frame
Only
Catalog
Number

Trip Unit
Only
Catalog
Number

High

Three-Pole, 240 Vac Only

Terminals 1

600

3000

6000

MAY3600

MAY3800F

HMA3600T

Maximum
Amperes

700 e

3000

6000

MAY3700

MAY3800F

HMA3700T

e

3000

6000

MAY3800

MAY3800F

HMA3800T

Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type

Catalog
Number

800

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

7

600

(2) #1–500 kcmil Al/Cu

TA700MA1

800 (Std.)

(3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu

TA800MA2

8

800 2

(2) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu

TA801MA

Type MAY breakers are
not defined by Federal
Specification W-C-375b.
Note: Not UL listed.

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

9

350

(1) #1–600 kcmil Cu

T350MA

600

(2) 2/0–500 kcmil Cu

T600MA1

10

800

(3) 3/0–300 kcmil Cu

T800MA1

Type MAY UL Listed
Interrupting Ratings
Maximum
Volts
240 Vac

11

Amperes
115,000 asymmetrical,
100,000 symmetrical

For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.

12
13

Additional Accessories
and Modifications
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For
replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114–
V12-T3-167.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to
lower limits.
4 Terminals are shipped separately
from breaker.
e 60 Hz AC only.

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-42

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types NB and NHB

1

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type NB 700–1200A, 600V, 60 Hz AC 2, 250 Vdc 3, Two- and Three-Pole Interchangeable Trip
NB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C

Magnetic Trip
Setting, Amperes 4

Low

High

2

Complete Breaker

Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 5

Includes Pressure Type Copper Terminals 5

Frame Only

Standard
Catalog
Number

Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number

MARK 75
Catalog
Number

Standard
Catalog
Number

Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number

MARK 75
Catalog
Number

Standard Saf-T-Vue,
MARK 75
Catalog Number

Trip Unit Only

Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250V DC 36
700

3000

6000

NB2700

NB2700S

HNB2700

NB21200F

NB21200FS

HNB21200F

HNB2700T

800

3000

6000

NB2800

NB2800S

HNB2800

NB21200F

NB21200FS

HNB21200F

HNB2800T

900

4000

8000

NB2900

NB2900S

HNB2900

NB21200F

NB21200FS

HNB21200F

HNB2900T

1000

4000

8000

NB21000

NB21000S

HNB21000

NB21200F

NB21200FS

HNB21200F

HNB21000T

1200

4000

8000

NB21200

NB21200S

HNB21200

NB21200F

NB21200FS

HNB21200F

HNB21200T

600

3000

6000

—

HNB31200F

—

—

—

Approx. shipping weight 43 lbs

—

Approx. shipping weight 29 lbs

HNB3600T
Approx. shipping
weight 3.5 lbs

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
700

3000

6000

NB3700

NB3700S

HNB3700

NB31200F

NB31200FS

HNB31200F

HNB3700T

800

3000

6000

NB3800

NB3800S

HNB3800

NB31200F

NB31200FS

HNB31200F

HNB3800T

900

4000

8000

NB3900

NB3900S

HNB3900

NB31200F

NB31200FS

HNB31200F

HNB3900T

1000

4000

8000

NB31000

NB31000S

HNB31000

NB31200F

NB31200FS

HNB31200F

HNB31000T

1200

4000

8000

NB31200

NB31200S

HNB31200

NB31200F

NB31200FS

HNB31200F

Approx. shipping weight 51 lbs

Approx. shipping weight 32 lbs

HNB31200T
Approx. shipping
weight 4 lbs

Trip Unit Only
Magnetic Trip Range 4

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable 78
Two-Pole 6

Three-Pole

Low

High

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1200

3000

6000

HNB26000TM

HNB36000TM

1200

4000

8000

HNB28000TM

HNB38000TM

1200

5000

10000

HNB210000TM

HNB310000TM

1200

6000

12000

HNB212000TM

HNB312000TM

Continuous
Ampere Rating

3

13
14
15
16

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Higher frequency calibration not available. Minimum of 50 Hz calibration available on special order.
3 250 Vdc rating applied only to magnetic only type breakers.
4 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
5 Terminals shipped separately from breaker.
6 Two-pole breakers supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
7 Frames, terminals, studs, mounting hardware, dimensions and shipping weights are same as standard thermal-magnetic breakers.
8 Not UL Listed.

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-43

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Accessories and
Modifications

1

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings

2

Standard Breakers
240 AC

50,000 asymmetrical, 42,000 symmetrical

3

480 AC

35,000 asymmetrical, 30,000 symmetrical

600 AC

25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical

250 DC 12

20,000 3

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Maximum Volts

Amperes

■

MARK 75 Breakers
240 AC

75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical

480 AC

40,000 asymmetrical, 35,000 symmetrical

600 AC

30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical

250 DC 12

20,000 3

Terminals 4
Maximum
Amperes

Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type,

Catalog
Number

Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
1000

(3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu

TA1000NB1

1200

(4) 4/0–500 kcmil Al/Cu

TA1200NB1

Optional Copper or Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
(3) 3/0–500 kcmil Cu

T1000NB1

1200

(4) 3/0–400 kcmil Cu

T1200NB1

1200

(3) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu

TA1201NB1

13

Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as standard
or for ambients other
than 40°C or 50°C. For
frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC (50 Hz AC
minimum, 60 Hz AC
maximum for ratings of
700A and above), refer
to Eaton. See Application
Data 29-160 for additional
information regarding
special conditions.
Maximum 400 Hz
calibration for type MA
is 475A.
Note: Not UL Listed.

1000

12

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.

50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete breaker
or trip unit only, when
ordering breakers to be used
in 50°C ambients. For CSA,
see Page V12-T3-48.
Note: Not UL Listed.

14

Type NB breakers meet
requirements for Class 21a
circuit breakers, and Type
HNB meet requirements
for Class 23a, as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.

15
16
17

Terminals
Two terminals are required
per pole.
Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed
below. When used with
aluminum conductors, use
joint compound. To order
optional copper terminals,
add suffix “C” to complete
breaker catalog number.
Note: Frames, terminals, studs,
mounting hardware, dimensions
and shipping weights are same
as standard thermal magnetic
breakers.

Magnetic Only Breakers
To order a complete breaker,
select trip unit, plus frame
and terminals.
Note: Not UL Listed.

Additional Accessories
and Modifications
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.
Notes
1 250 Vdc rating applied only to magnetic
only type breakers.
2 Terminals shipped separately from
breaker.
3 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.
4 MARK 75 frame color changed from gray
to black in mid-2002.

For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-44

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Type NBY

1

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type NBY 700–1200A, 240V, 60 Hz AC 2, Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip
NBY: 240 Vac
Complete Breaker
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C

Magnetic Trip Setting
Amperes 3
Low

Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals

4

Frame Only

Trip Unit Only

High

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

3
4

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
700

3000

6000

NBY3700

NBY31200F

HNB3700T

800

3000

6000

NBY3800

NBY31200F

HNB3800T

900

4000

8000

NBY3900

NBY31200F

HNB3900T

1200

4000

8000

NBY31200

NBY31200F

HNB31200T

UL Listed
Interrupting Ratings
Maximum
Volts
Amperes
240 AC

115,000 asymmetrical,
100,000 symmetrical

For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.

Terminals
Two terminals are required
per pole.
Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed
below. When used with
aluminum conductors, use
joint compound.
Note: Terminals shipped
separately from breaker.

Terminals
Number
of Cables,
Max.
Wire Range,
Amperes Type,

Catalog
Number

Standard Al/Cu
Pressure Terminals
1000

2

Includes Pressure Type
Aluminum Terminals 4

(3) 3/0–400 kcmil
Al/Cu

TA1000NB1

1200

(4) 4/0–500 kcmil
Al/Cu

TA1200NB1

1200

(3) 500–750 kcmil TA1201NB1
Al/Cu

Accessories
and Modifications
■

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as
standard or for ambients
other than 40°C or 50°C.
For frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC (50 Hz AC
minimum, 60 Hz AC
maximum), refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for additional information
regarding special
conditions.
Note: Not UL Listed.

Alternate Copper
Pressure Terminals
1000

(3) 3/0–500 kcmil
Cu

T1000NB1

1200

(4) 3/0–400 kcmil
Cu

T1200NB1

5
6

50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete breaker
or trip unit only, when
ordering for breakers to be
used in 50°C ambients.
Note: Not UL Listed.

7
8
9
10

For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.
Type NBY breakers are
not defined by Federal
Specification W-C-375b.
Additional Accessories
and Modifications
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For
replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114–
V12-T3-167.
2 Higher frequency calibration not
available. Minimum of 50 Hz calibration
available on special order.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to
lower limits.
4 Terminals shipped separately
from breaker.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-45

3
1
2

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Type PB
■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type PB 600–25s00A, 600V, 60 Cycle AC 2, 250 Vdc 3, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip
Rear Connected PB
Breaker: 600 Vac
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C

3

Magnetic Trip Setting,
Amperes 45

Complete Breaker

Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Rear Connectors

Includes Busbar Connectors 6

Frame Only

Trip Unit Only

Low

High

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Two-Pole, 600 Vac Only 7

4

600

1500

5000

PB2600

PB22500F

PB2600T

700

1500

5000

PB2700

PB22500F

PB2700T

5

800

1500

5000

PB2800

PB22500F

PB2800T

900

1500

5000

PB2900

PB22500F

PB2900T

6

1000

1500

5000

PB21000

PB22500F

PB21000T

1200

2000

6000

PB21200

PB22500F

PB21200T

7

1400

2500

7000

PB21400

PB22500F

PB21400T

1600

3000

8000

PB21600

PB22500F

PB21600T

8

1800

3000

8000

PB21800

PB22500F

PB21800T

2000

3000

8000

PB22000

PB22500F

PB22000T

Approx. shipping weight

132 lbs

98 lbs

18 lbs

3000

PB22500

PB22500F

PB22500T

144 lbs

98 lbs

18 lbs

9

2500

8000

Approx. shipping weight

10

Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only

11

600

1500

5000

PB3600

PB32500F

PB3600T

700

1500

5000

PB3700

PB32500F

PB3700T

12

800

1500

5000

PB3800

PB32500F

PB3800T

900

1500

5000

PB3900

PB32500F

PB3900T

13

1000

1500

5000

PB31000

PB32500F

PB31000T

1200

2000

6000

PB31200

PB32500F

PB31200T

1400

2500

7000

PB31400

PB32500F

PB31400T

14

1600

3000

8000

PB31600

PB32500F

PB31600T

1800

3000

8000

PB31800

PB32500F

PB31800T

15

2000

3000

8000

PB32000

PB32500F

PB32000T

Approx. shipping weight

155 lbs

108 lbs

23 lbs

16

2500

3000

PB32500

PB32500F

PB32500T

173 lbs

108 lbs

23 lbs

8000

Approx. shipping weight

17

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Higher frequency calibration not available. Minimum of 50 Hz calibration available on special order.
3 Available only on magnetic only breakers.
4 Higher magnetic trip settings are available as special calibration. Refer to magnetic only breakers for specific trip ranges.
5 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
6 Shipped separately from breaker.
7 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-46

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Type PBF

1

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type PBF Front-Connected 600–2000A, 600V, 60 Cycle AC 2, 250 Vdc 3, Two- and Three-Pole,
PBF Front Connected:
Interchangeable Trip
600 Vac
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C

2
3

Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes
(Set on High Side, Adjustable
to Lower Limits)

Complete Breaker

Shipped As:

Includes Busbar
Connectors 4

Frame Only Includes
Busbar Connectors 4

Trip Unit
Only

Low

High

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

4
5

Two-Pole, 600 Vac 5
600

1500

5000

PBF2600

PBF22000F

PBF2600T

700

1500

5000

PBF2700

PBF22000F

PBF2700T

800

1500

5000

PBF2800

PBF22000F

PBF2800T

900

1500

5000

PBF2900

PBF22000F

PBF2900T

1000

1500

5000

PBF21000

PBF22000F

PBF21000T

1200

2000

6000

PBF21200

PBF22000F

PBF21200T

1400

2500

7000

PBF21400

PBF22000F

PBF21400T

1600

3000

8000

PBF21600

PBF22000F

PBF21600T

1800

3000

8000

PBF21800

PBF22000F

PBF21800T

2000

3000

8000

PBF22000

PBF22000F

PBF22000T

9
10

Three-Pole, 600 Vac
600

1500

5000

PBF3600

PBF32000F

PBF3600T

700

1500

5000

PBF3700

PBF32000F

PBF3700T

800

1500

5000

PBF3800

PBF32000F

PBF3800T

900

1500

5000

PBF3900

PBF32000F

PBF3900T

1000

1500

5000

PBF31000

PBF32000F

PBF31000T

1200

2000

6000

PBF31200

PBF32000F

PBF31200T

1400

2500

7000

PBF31400

PBF32000F

PBF31400T

1600

3000

8000

PBF31600

PBF32000F

PBF31600T

1800

3000

8000

PBF31800

PBF32000F

PBF31800T

2000

3000

8000

PBF32000

PBF32000F

PBF32000T

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Higher frequency calibration not available. Minimum of 50 Hz calibration available on special order.
3 Available only on magnetic only breakers.
4 Included with frame.
5 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.

6
7
8

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-47

3
1
2
3
4

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types PB and PBF Accessories and Modifications

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings

■

Maximum Volts

Amperes

240 AC

150,000 asymmetrical, 125,000 symmetrical

480 AC

115,000 asymmetrical, 100,000 symmetrical

600 AC

115,000 asymmetrical, 100,000 symmetrical

250 DC 2

75,000A 6

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products
and services. 1
Special Breakers 2 Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable 3
Trip Unit Only
Continuous
Ampere
Rating

Magnetic Trip Range,
Amperes 4

Two-Pole 5

Three-Pole

Low

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

High

For Rear-Connected Type PB Breakers
2000

1500

5000

PB25000TM

PB35000TM

2000

2000

6000

PB26000TM

PB36000TM

For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243.

2000

2500

7000

PB27000TM

PB37000TM

6

Magnetic Only Breakers
To order a complete breaker, select trip unit, plus frame
and connectors.

2000

3000

8000

PB28000TM

PB38000TM

Note: Not UL Listed.

2000

3500

10,000

PB210000TM

PB310000TM

7

2000

4000

12,000

PB212000TM

PB312000TM

2500

4000

12,000

373D488G08

373D488G09

5

8

“T” Connector

For Front-Connected Type PBF Breakers
2000

1500

5000

PBF25000TM

PBF35000TM

9

2000

2000

6000

PBF26000TM

PBF36000TM

2000

2500

7000

PBF27000TM

PBF37000TM

10

2000

3000

8000

PBF28000TM

PBF38000TM

2000

3500

10,000

PBF210000TM

PBF310000TM

11

2000

4000

12,000

PBF212000TM

PBF312000TM

12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Accessories
and Modifications
■

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as
standard, or for ambients
other than 40°C or 50°C.
For frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for information regarding
special conditions.
Note: Not UL Listed.

19
20

50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete
breaker or trip unit only,
when ordering breakers to
be used in 50°C ambients.

22
23

Busbar Connections—“T” Connector
(For Cu/AI Bus)
Catalog Number
BA2000PB

Two required per pole. For rear bus connection of breakers
through 2000A. Accepts up to four bus bolts. May be rotated 90°.
Note: Shipped separately from breaker.
“C” Connector

“C” Connector (For Cu/AI Bus)
Breaker Amperes

Catalog Number

2500

BA2500PB

Note: Not UL Listed. 50°C or
higher calibration not available
for 2500A trip units.

For CSA, see information
below.
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA) Listing
Most standard thermalmagnetic molded-case
circuit breakers listed with
Underwriters Laboratories
and having a UL label are
also listed with CSA and
may be marked with the
CSA monogram.
Type PB breakers meet the
requirements for Class 25a
circuit breakers as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.

21

Busbar Connections

Two required per pole. For rear bus connection of
2500A breakers.
Cable Connector

Cable Connector
Catalog Number
505C706G04

Fits “T” Connector and 2000A front-connected breakers.
Accepts four 400–600 kcmil copper cables.
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference
on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Frames, connectors, dimensions and shipping weights are same as thermal-magnetic
breakers.
4 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
5 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted
from center pole.
6 Based on NEMA test procedure.

24
25
V12-T3-48

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types LC, LCC, LCA, LCCA, MARK 75 Types HLC, HLCC, HLCA, HLCCA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table and terminals on Page V12-T3-60. Extra current transformer included
for neutral. See accessories on Page V12-T3-65 for remote ground fault trip indicator.
■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Breakers for Standard Applications—Frame Only
LCA: 600 Vac
Number
of Poles 2

1
2
3

Standard
(Long Delay and Short Time)

Short Time Only 3

Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable
Short Delay Time (0.06–0.22 sec.)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

4

Types LC 150 and LCA 150 (75–150A)
2

LC2150F

LC2150FM

LCA2150F

3

LC3150F

LC3150FM

LCA3150F

5
6

MARK 75 Types HLC 150 and HLCA 150 (75–150A)
2

HLC2150F

HLC2150FM

HLCA2150F

3

HLC3150F

HLC3150FM

HLCA3150F

7

Types LC 300 and LCA 300 (150–300A)
2

LC2300F

LC2300FM

LCA2300F

3

LC3300F

LC3300FM

LCA3300F

8
9

MARK 75 Types HLC 300 and HLCA 300 (150–300A)
2

HLC2300F

HLC2300FM

HLCA2300F

3

HLC3300F

HLC3300FM

HLCA3300F

10

Types LC 400 and LCA 400 (200–400A)
2

LC2400F

LC2400FM

LCA2400F

3

LC3400F

LC3400FM

LCA3400F

11
12

MARK 75 Types HLC 400 and HLCA 400 (200–400A)
2

HLC2400F

HLC2400FM

HLCA2400F

3

HLC3400F

HLC3400FM

HLCA3400F

13

Types LC 600 and LCA 600 (300–600A)
2

LC2600F

LC2600FM

LCA2600F

3

LC3600F

LC3600FM

LCA3600F

14
15

MARK 75 Types HLC 600 and HLCA 600 (300–600A)
2

HLC2600F

HLC2600FM

HLCA2600F

3

HLC3600F

HLC3600FM

HLCA3600F

16

Breakers for Applications at 100% Rating—Frame Only
Number of
Poles 2

Standard
(Long Delay and Short Time)

Short Time Only 3

Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable
Short Delay Time (0.06–0.22 sec.)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

—

LCCA3600F

18

Types LCC 600 and LCCA 600 (300–600A)
3

LCC3600F

19

MARK 75 Types HLCC 600 and HLCCA 600 (300–600A)
3

HLCC3600F

—

17

HLCCA3600F

20

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
3 UL Recognized component.

21

MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.

22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-49

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types LCG, LCCG, LCGA,
LCCGA, MARK 75 HLCG,
HLCCG, HLCGA, HLCCGA
SELTRONIC with Built-In
Ground Fault Protection

■

Complete breaker requires
frame and rating plug. See
the table and terminals on
Page V12-T3-60. Extra current
transformer included for
neutral. See accessories on
Page V12-T3-65 for remote
ground fault trip indicator.

Types LCG 150 and LCGA 150 (75–150A) 3

■

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Note: Available without extra
CT for neutral. Order by
description as similar to above
except without neutral CT or
external CT terminal
connections at same price.
Note the standard ground fault
unit can also be used without
the neutral CT.

Note: These breakers use
LC terminals. The fourth
CT uses MC breaker terminals,
Page V12-T3-53.

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.
Breakers for Standard Application—Frame Only
Number
of Poles 2

3

Standard (Long Delay,
Short Time) and Ground Fault Trip

Long Delay, Short Time, Adjustable
Short Delay Time and Ground Fault Trip

Ground Fault Characteristics
Pickup Setting
Amperes

Time
Setting

LCGA3150F

50–150

3.5–30 Cy

HLCGA3150F

50–150

3.5–30 Cy

LCGA3300F

60–300

3.5–30 Cy

HLCGA3300F

60–300

3.5–30 Cy

LCGA3400F

0–400

3.5–30 Cy

80–400

3.5–30 Cy

120–600

3.5–30 Cy

120–600

3.5–30 Cy

Catalog Number

LCG3150F

MARK 75 Types HLCG 150 and HLCGA 150 (75–150A)
3

HLCG3150F

1

3

Types LCG 300 and LCGA 300 (150–300A) 3
3

LCG3300F

MARK 75 Types HLCG 300 and HLCGA 300 (150–300A) 3
3

HLCG3300F

Types LCG 400 and LCGA 400 (200–400A) 3
3

LCG3400F

MARK 75 Types HLCG 400 and HLCGA 400 (200–400A)
3

HLCG3400F

3

HLCGA3400F

Types LCG 600 and LCGA 600 (300–600 Amperes) 3
3

LCG3600F

LCGA3600F

MARK 75 Types HLCG 600 and HLCGA 600 (300–600A) 3
3

HLCG3600F

HLCGA3600F

Breakers for Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only
Number
of Poles 2

Standard (Long Delay,
Short Time) and Ground Fault Trip

Long Delay, Short Time, Adjustable
Short Delay Time and Ground Fault Trip

Catalog Number

Ground Fault Characteristics
Pickup Setting
Amperes

Time
Setting

120–600

3.5–30 Cy

120–600

3.5–30 Cy

Types LCCG 600 and LCCGA 600 (300–600A) 3

13

3

LCCG3600F

LCCGA3600F

MARK 75 Types HLCCG 600 and HLCCGA 600 (300–600A) 3

14

3

HLCCG3600F

HLCCGA3600F

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Two-pole breakers supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
3 For applications other than standard residual scheme, see Application Data 29-160.

15
16

MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-50

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types LCG, LCCG, LCGA, LCCGA, MARK 75 HLCG, HLCCG, HLCGA,
HLCCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground Fault Protection
Accessories and Modifications
Field-Mountable Attachments

Additional Accessories and Modifications

1

Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–V12-T3-79.
Terminals

2

Note: Order separately.

12345

Description

Style Number

Two terminals are required per pole.

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source
32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 6

1371D11G22

Terminals are UL Listed for wire type and range listed below.
When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound.

240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 7

1371D11G32

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source,
plus a 1A-1B auxiliary switch
32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 6

1371D11G15

240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz

7

150, 300 and 400A Frames Only
Maximum
Amperes

Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type

Catalog
Number

1371D11G25

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from 24 Vdc source

1371D93G01

1A-1B auxiliary switch

1371D11G03

24 Vdc shunt trip and 1A-1B auxiliary switch

1371D94G08

Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
225

(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al

TA225LA1

400

(1) #4–250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Al/Cu

TA400LA1

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48.
Type LC breakers meet requirements for Class 21a circuit
breakers, and Type HLC meet requirements for Class 23a as
defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b.
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 8
Maximum Volts

Amperes

Standard Breakers

225

(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu

T225LA

225

(1) #6–250 kcmil Cu

T225LBF

400

(1) #4–250 kcmil Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Cu

T401LA

600A Frame Only
Maximum
Amperes

Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type

Catalog
Number

Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

240 AC

50,000 Asymmetrical, 42,000 Symmetrical

500

(2) 250–350 kcmil Al/Cu

TA602LD

480 AC

35,000 Asymmetrical, 30,000 Symmetrical

600

(2) 400–500 kcmil Al/Cu

TA603LA

600 AC

25,000 Asymmetrical, 22,000 Symmetrical

600 (std.)

(2) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu

TA600LA

MARK 75 Breakers

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

240 AC

75,000 Asymmetrical, 65,000 Symmetrical

480 AC

40,000 Asymmetrical, 35,000 Symmetrical

600 AC

30,000 Asymmetrical, 25,000 Symmetrical

For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243.

600

(2) 250–500 kcmil Cu

T600LA

Notes
1 Only one attachment may be mounted per breaker.
2 Contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center for other combinations.
3 Molded-case switches do not use standard SELTRONIC attachments, and should be ordered
by description for factory mounting.
4 Does not void listing of UL Listed breakers.
5 Left pole mounting.
6 Rated 48 volts minimum for ground fault applications requiring tripping at 55% of voltage.
7 Not for use on ground fault applications.
8 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-51

3
1
2

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types MC, MCC, MCA, MCCA, MARK 75 Types HMC, HMCC, HMCA, HMCCA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Breakers for Standard Applications—Frame Only
MCA: 600 Vac
Number
of Poles 2

3

Standard
(Long Delay and Short Time)

Short Time Only 3

Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable
Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 seconds)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Types MC and MCA (400–800A)

4

2

MC2800F

MC2800FM

MCA2800F

3

MC3800F

MC3800FM

MCA3800F

5

MARK 75 Types HMC and HMCA (400–800A)
2

HMC2800F

HMC2800FM

HMCA2800F

6

3

HMC3800F

HMC3800FM

HMCA3800F

Breakers for Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only 1

7

Number
of Poles 2

8

Standard
(Long Delay and Short Time)

Short Time Only 3

Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable
Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 seconds)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

—

MCCA3800F

—

HMCCA3800F

Types MCC and MCCA (400–800A)

9

3

10

3

MCC3800F

MARK 75 Types HMCC and HMCCA (400–800A)
HMCC3800F

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. Effective 2/1/02, only the MARK 75 version is available. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on
Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current-carrying parts omitted from center pole.
3 UL Recognized component.

11
12

Type MC800 molded-case switch; refer to Page V12-T3-62. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-52

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types MCG, MCCG, MCGA, MCCGA and MARK 75 Types HMCG,
HMCCG, HMCGA, HMCCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground
Fault Protection

Accessories and Modifications

Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table
and terminals on Page V12-T3-60. Extra current transformer
included for neutral. See accessories on Page V12-T3-65 for
remote ground fault trip indicator.

Description

Style Number

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source
32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 7

1371D72G22

240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 8

1371D72G32

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source,
plus 1a-1b auxiliary switch
32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 7

1371D72G15

4

240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 8

1371D72G25

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external 24 Vdc source

1370D85G01

5

1A-1B auxiliary switch

1371D72G03

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products
and services. 1
Note: Available without extra CT for neutral. Order by description as
similar to above except without neutral CT or external CT terminal
connections at same price.

Note: Order two of the desired terminals for each pole of the breaker and
two for the neutral CT. The standard ground fault unit can also be used
without the neutral CT. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black
in mid-2002.

1

Field-Mountable Attachments 3456

Number
of Poles

Standard
(Long Delay,
Short Time and
Ground Fault Trip)

Long Delay,
Short Time, Adjustable
Short Delay Time and
Ground Fault Trip

Catalog Number

Ground Fault
Characteristics
Time
Setting

80–800

3.5–30 Cy

80–800

3.5-30 Cy

Types MCG and MCGA (400–800A) 2
3

MCG3800F

MCGA3800F

MARK 75 Types HMCG and HMCGA (400–800A) 2
3

HMCG3800F

HMCGA3800F

Breakers for Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only

Number
of Poles

Standard
(Long Delay,
Short Time and
Ground Fault Trip)
Catalog Number

Long Delay,
Short Time, Adjustable
Short Delay Time and
Ground Fault Trip
Catalog Number

Types MCCG and MCCGA (400–800A)
3

MCCG3800F

Ground Fault
Characteristics
Pickup
Setting
Amperes

Time
Setting

80–800

3.5–30 Cy

80–800

3.5–30 Cy

2

MCCGA3800F

HMCCG3800F

HMCCGA3800F

9

Type MC SELTRONIC breakers meet requirements for Class 21a,
and MARK 75. Type HMC meet Class 23a as defined by
Federal Spec. W-C-375b.

10

UL Listed Interrupting Capacity, rms Symmetrical Amperes 9

11

AC Volts
Breaker

240

480

600

MC, MCG

42,000

30,000

22,000

HMC, HMCG

65,000

50,000

25,000

12
13
14

Terminals
Terminals—Two Terminals Required Per Pole

MARK 75 Types HMCCG and HMCCGA (400–800A) 2
3

6
8

Rating Plugs
Select from the table on Page V12-T3-60.
For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48.

Pickup
Setting
Amperes

3

7

Additional Accessories and Modifications
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–V12-T3-79.

Breakers for Standard Applications—Frame Only

2

Maximum Amperes

Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type

Catalog Number

Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

15
16

600

(2) #1–500 kcmil

TA700MA1 j

800 (std.)

(3) 3/0–400 kcmil

TA800MA2 j

800

(2) 500–750 kcmil

TA801MA j

17
18

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals
600

(2) 2/0–500 kcmil

T600MA1

800

(3) 3/0–300 kcmil

T800MA1

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. Effective 2/1/02, only the MARK 75 version is available. For
replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 For applications other than standard residual scheme, see Application Data 29-160.
3 Does not void listing of UL Listed breakers.
4 Only one of the attachments may be mounted per breaker.
5 For other possible combinations, refer to factory.
6 Molded-case switches do not use standard SELTRONIC attachments and should be ordered
by description.
7 Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications requiring tripping at 55% of voltage.
8 Not for ground fault applications.
9 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.
j Type Al/Cu pressure terminal.
Also used on breakers with ground fault and on separately mounted neutral current
transformers. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.

19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-53

3
1
2
3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types NC, NCA, NCG, NCGA, MARK 75 Type HNC, HNCA, HNCG, HNCGA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units, 600 Vac
Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table and terminals on Page V12-T3-60. Extra current transformer included
for neutral. See accessories on Page V12-T3-65 for remote ground fault trip indicator.
■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type NC, NCA, MARK 75 Type HNC, HNCA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units, 600 Vac—Frame Only 2
NC: 600 Vac
Number
of Poles 3

4

Standard (Long Delay and Short Time)

Short Time Only 4

Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable
Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 Seconds)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Types NC and NCA (800–1200A)

5

2

NC21200F

NC21200FM

NCA21200F

3

NC31200F

NC31200FM

NCA31200F

6

Mark 75 Types HNC and HNCA (800–1200A)
2

HNC21200F

HNC21200FM

HNCA21200F

7

3

HNC31200F

HNC31200FM

HNCA31200F

8
9
10

Types NCG, NCGA, and MARK 75 Types HNCG, HNCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground Fault Protection
Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table and terminals on Page V12-T3-60. Extra current transformer included
for neutral. See accessories on Page V12-T3-65 for remote ground fault trip indicator.
Note: The standard ground fault unit above can also be used without the neutral CT. Order two of the desired terminals for each pole of the breaker and
two for the neutral CT.

Types NCG, NCGA and MARK 75 Type HNCG, HNCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground Fault Protection—
Frame Only

11

Number
of Poles

12

Standard (Long Delay, Short Time
and Ground Fault Trip)

Long Delay, Short Time, Adjustable
Short Delay Time, and Ground Fault Trip

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Pickup Setting
Amperes

Time Setting

NCGA31200F

120–1200

3.5–30 Cy

HNCGA31200F

120–1200

3.5–30 Cy

Types NCG and NCGA (800–1200A)

13

3

Ground Fault Characteristics

5

NCG31200F

MARK 75 Types HNCG and HNCGA (800–1200A) 5

14

3

HNCG31200F

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. Effective 2/1/02, only the MARK 75 version is available. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on
Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table on Page V12-T3-60. For terminals, see the table on Page V12-T3-55.
3 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current-carrying parts omitted from center pole.
4 UL Recognized component.
5 For applications other than standard residual scheme, see Application Data 29-160.

15
16
17

Type NC 1200A molded-case switch; refer to Page V12-T3-62. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-54

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types NC, NCA, NCG, NCGA, MARK 75 Type HNC, HNCA, HNCG,
HNCGA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units, 600 Vac
Accessories and Modifications
Field-Mountable Attachments—Left Handed

12345

Rating Plugs
Select from the table on Page V12-T3-60.

1

Terminals

2

Note: Two terminals required per pole.

Description

Style Number

Terminals 9

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source
32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 6

1372D39G13

Maximum
Amperes

240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 7

1372D39G23

Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source,
plus a 1A-1B auxiliary switch
32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 6

1372D39G16

Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type

Catalog
Number

1000

(3) 3/0–400 kcmil

TA1000NB1 j

1200 (std.)

(4) 4/0–500 kcmil

TA1200NB1 j

(3) 500–750 kcmil

TA1201NB1 j

1372D39G26

1200

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external 24 Vdc source

1371D94G05

Optional Copper Pressure Terminals

1A-1B auxiliary switch

1371D39G03

1000

(3) 3/0–500 kcmil

T1000NB1

24 Vdc shunt trip and 1A-1B auxiliary switch

1371D94G08

1200

(4) 3/0–400 kcmil

T1200NB1

240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz

7

For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48.

UL Listed Interrupting Capacity, rms Symmetrical Amperes 8
AC Volts
Breaker

240

480

600

NC, NCG

42,000

30,000

22,000

HNC, HNCG

65,000

50,000

25,000

4
5
6
7
8

Additional Accessories and Modifications

Type NC SELTRONIC breakers meet requirements for Class 21a,
and MARK 75. Type HNC meet Class 23a as defined by Federal
Spec. W-C-375b.

3

Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–V12-T3-79.
Note: MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.
Notes
1 For other possible combinations, refer to factory.
2 Molded-case switches do not use standard SELTRONIC attachments and should be ordered
by description.
3 Does not void listing of UL Listed breakers.
4 Only one of the attachments may be mounted per breaker.
5 Left pole mounting.
6 Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications requiring tripping at 55% of voltage.
7 Not for ground fault applications.
8 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.
9 Also used on breakers with ground fault and on separately mounted neutral
current transformers.
j Type Al/Cu pressure terminal.

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-55

3
1
2
3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types PC, PCA, PCC, PCCA 2000, 2500 and 3000A SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units, 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table on Page V12-T3-60 and rear connectors (connectors are included in
3000A and all front-connected frames.) Suitable for reverse-feed applications.
■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Breakers for Standard Applications—Frame Only
PC: 600 Vac
Number
of Poles 2

4

Standard (Long Delay and Short Time)

Short Time Only 3

Long Delay, Short Time Trip, and Adjustable
Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 seconds)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Type PC 2000, 1000 to 2000A
Rear-Connected Breakers

5
6

4

Type PCA 2000 4
Rear-Connected Breakers

2

PC22000F

PC22000FM

PCA22000F

3

PC32000F

PC32000FM

PCA32000F

Front-Connected Breakers

7

Front-Connected Breakers

2

PCF22000F

PCF22000FM

PCFA22000F

3

PCF32000F

PCF32000FM

PCFA32000F

Type PC 2500, 1400 to 2500A 4
Rear-Connected Breakers

8
9

Type PCA 2500 4
Rear-Connected Breakers

2

PC22500F

PC22500FM

PCA22500F

3

PC32500F

PC32500FM

PCA32500F

Front-Connected Breakers

10

Front-Connected Breakers

2

PCF22500F

PCF22500FM

PCFA22500F

3

PCF32500F

PCF32500FM

PCFA32500F

Type PC 3000, 1600 to 3000A 4

11
12

Type PCA 3000 4

2

PC23000F

PC23000FM

PCA23000F

3

PC33000F

PC33000FM

PCA33000F

Breakers for Standard Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only

13

Number
of Poles 2

14

Standard (Long Delay and Short Time)

Short Time Only 3

Long Delay, Short Time Trip, and Adjustable
Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 seconds)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Type PCC 2000, 1000 to 2000A

15

5—Rear-Connected

Breakers

2

PCC22000F

PCC22000FM

PCCA22000F

3

PCC32000F

PCC32000FM

PCCA32000F

Front Connected Breakers

16
17

2

PCCF22000F

PCCF22000FM

PCCFA22000F

3

PCCF32000F

PCCF32000FM

PCCFA32000F

Type PCC 2500, 1400 to 2500A 5—Rear-Connected Breakers

18

2

PCC22500F

PCC22500FM

PCCA22500F

3

PCC32500F

PCC32500FM

PCCA32500F

Front-Connected Breakers

19

2

PCCF22500F

PCCF22500FM

PCCFA22500F

3

PCCF32500F

PCCF32500FM

PCCFA32500F

20

Type PC 3000, 1600 to 3000A 5
2

PCC23000F

PCC23000FM

PCCA23000F

21

3

PCC33000F

PCC33000FM

PCCA33000F

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
3 UL Recognized component.
4 UL Listed for standard applications.
5 These breakers are UL Listed for application at 100% of rating per NEC exceptions when used in a properly ventilated and listed enclosure.

22
23
24
25
V12-T3-56

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Accessories and
Modifications
Drawout Mounting Breakers,
Three-Pole Only
Breaker frame and complete
drawout frame with safety
tripping interlock.
Order by description.
Secondary contacts supplied
as required at no extra
charge. Order required rating
plug separately. Refer to
Page V12-T3-79.
Note: Includes breakers without
adjustable short delay time.

Rating Plugs
Select from the table on
Page V12-T3-60.
Stationary portion of drawout
frame only for future breaker
installations, three-pole only.
Refer to Page V12-T3-79.

Special Type PCC Breakers for
SCR Power Supplies
These drawout mounting
breakers are designed with
a 2 to 4 times magnetic trip
adjustment and special time
delay trip characteristics to
provide maximum protection
and coordination with SCR
power supplies on offshore
drilling rigs. Suitable for
application at 100% of rating.
Order by description.
Secondary contacts supplied
as required. Order standard
rating plugs separately.

UL Listed Interrupting Capacity rms Symmetrical Amperes
(Standard and Ground Fault Breakers) 1

1

AC Volts
Breaker

240

480

600

PC, PCC

125,000

100,000

100,000

2
3

Note
1 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.

4

Additional Accessories
and Modifications

5

Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.

6
7

Availability: PCC2000,
PCC2500 drawout-mounting
breakers.

8

Type PC and PCC meet
requirements of Class 25a
as defined in Federal Spec.
W-C-375b.

9
10

For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-57

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types PCG, PCGA, PCCG,
PCCGA SELTRONIC with
Built-In Ground Fault
Protection Includes Extra
Current Transformer for
Neutral (Optional Remote
Ground Fault Trip Indicator
Kit, Page V12-T3-65)
Complete breaker requires
frame and rating plug. See the
table on Page V12-T3-60 and
rear connectors (except frontconnected frames and 3000A
frames include connectors).
■

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Note: Available without
extra CT for neutral. Order
by description as similar to
above except without neutral
CT or external CT terminal
connections at same price.
Older catalog numbers:
PCFGX—”X” means without
fourth CT.

Note: The standard ground fault
unit listed can also be used
without the neutral CT.

Breakers for Standard Application—Frame Only

Number
of Poles

Standard (Long Delay,
Short Time and Ground Fault Trip)

Long Delay, Short Time, Ground Fault
Trip, and Adjustable Short Delay Time
(0.08 –0.30 Seconds)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Ground Fault Characteristics
Pickup
Setting

Time
Setting

Type PCG 2000 12—Rear-Connected Breakers

Type PCGA 2000 12 1000 to 2000A 2—Rear-Connected Breakers

3

PCGA32000F

200–1200

3.5–30 cycles

PCFGA32000F

200–1200

3.5–30 cycles

PCG32000F

Front-Connected Breakers
3

PCFG32000F

Type PCG 2500 12—Rear-Connected Breakers

Type PCGA 2500 12 1400 to 2500A 2—Rear-Connected Breakers

3

PCGA32500F

240–1200

3.5–30 cycles

PCFGA32500F

240–1200

3.5–30 cycles

300–1200

3.5–30 cycles

PCG32500F

Front-Connected Breakers
3

PCFG32500F

Type PCG 3000 12

Type PCGA 3000 12 1600 to 3000A 2

3

PCGA33000F

PCG33000F

Breakers for Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only

Number
of Poles

Standard (Long Delay,
Short Time and Ground Fault Trip)

Long Delay, Short Time, Ground Fault
Trip, and Adjustable Short Delay Time
(0.08 –0.30 Seconds)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Ground Fault
Characteristics
Pickup
Setting

Time
Setting

Type PCCG 2000 3—Rear-Connected Breakers

Type PCCGA 2000 3 1000 to 2000A 2—Rear-Connected Breakers

3

PCCGA32000F

200–1200

3.5–30 cycles

PCCFGA32000F

200–1200

3.5–30 cycles

PCCG32000F

Front-Connected Breakers
3

PCCFG32000F

Type PCCG 2500 3—Rear-Connected Breakers

Type PCCGA 2500 3 1400 to 2500A 2—Rear-Connected Breakers

3

PCCGA32500F

240–1200

3.5–30 cycles

PCCFGA32500F

240–1200

3.5–30 cycles

300–1200

3.5–30 cycles

PCCG32500F

13

Front-Connected Breakers

14

Type PCCG 3000 3

Type PCCGA 3000 3 1600 to 3000A 2

3

PCCGA33000F

15

Notes
1 UL Listed for standard applications.
2 For application other than standard residual schemes, refer to Application Data 29-160.
3 These breakers are UL Listed for application at 100% of rating per NEC exceptions when used in a properly ventilated and listed enclosure.

3

16

PCCFG32500F

PCCG33000F

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-58

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Types PCG, PCGA, PCCG, PCCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In
Ground Fault Protection Accessories and Modifications

Busbar Connections
“T” Connector

Field-Mountable Attachments 1234
Description

Style Number

Catalog Number

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source
32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 5

1372D35G22

BA2000PB

240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz

6

1

Busbar Connections—“T” Connector
(For Cu/AI Bus)

3

1372D35G32

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source
plus 1A-1B auxiliary switch
32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 5

1372D35G15

240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 6

1372D35G25

2A-2B auxiliary switch

1372D35G18

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external 24 Vdc source

1371D95G01

1A-1B auxiliary switch

1372D35G03

1A-1B auxiliary switch and 24 Vdc shunt trip

1371D95G04

2A-2B auxiliary switch and 24 Vdc shunt trip

1371D95G07

3A-3B auxiliary switch and 24 Vdc shunt trip

1371D95G10

4
Two required per pole. For rear bus connection of breakers
through 2000A. Accepts up to four bus bolts. May be rotated 90°.

5

Note: Shipped separately from breaker.

6

“C” Connector

“C” Connector (For Cu/AI Bus)
Breaker Amperes

Catalog Number

2500

BA2500PB

Two required per pole. For rear bus connection of
2500A breakers.

Rear Bus Connectors

Cable Connector
Connector Style/Catalog Number

Catalog Number

PC2000 8, PCC2000 8

BA2000PB

505C706G04

PC2500 8, PCC2500 8

BA2500PB

PC3000, PCC3000

Included in frame

Style Number

9
10

Cable Connector

Breaker Frame 7

Racking Crank

7
8

Rear Bus Connectors
Two required per pole. Fixed mounting breakers.

Racking Crank for
Drawout Frames
To engage or withdraw
the moving portion of
the drawout. A standard
0.50-inch hex socket with
extension can be used for
this purpose.

2

11
12

Cell Switches Mounted on
Drawout Frames, All Ratings
A maximum of four switches
can be provided. Order by
description. Each switch
provides a NO and NC
contact that transfers before
reaching the test position
when being withdrawn, and
after the test position when
being racked in.

Fits “T” Connector and 2000A front-connected breakers.
Accepts four 400–600 kcmil copper cables.

13

Notes
1 For other possible combinations, contact your local Eaton Field Sales office.
2 Does not void listing of UL Listed breakers.
3 Only one of these attachments may be mounted per breaker.
4 Left pole mounting.
5 Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications.
6 Not for ground fault applications.
7 Also apply to equivalent ratings of PCG and PCCG ground fault breakers.
8 Not required for front-connected frames.

14
15
16
17

765A767G01

18
Approximate Shipping Weights, PC and PCC Breakers
(Three-Pole)

19

Breaker
Rating

PC, PCC

PCF, PCCF

PCG, PCCG

PCFG, PCCFG

2000

136 lbs

163 lbs

160 lbs

185 lbs

2500

145 lbs

175 lbs

170 lbs

200 lbs

3000

220 lbs

—

245 lbs

—

20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-59

3
1
2

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

SELTRONIC Rating Plug Selection Data
Rating plugs listed below are for both standard breakers and breakers with built-in ground fault protection.
Rating Plug Selection Data
Rating Plugs Only (For Two- or Three-Pole Frames)

Rating Plugs Only (For Two- or Three-Pole Frames)

3
4
5
6

Continuous
Ampere
Rating 1

Magnetic Trip
Setting, Amperes

Fixed
Rating Plugs

Adjustable
Rating Plugs 23

Low

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

High

Continuous
Ampere
Rating 1

Magnetic Trip
Setting, Amperes

Fixed
Rating Plugs

Adjustable
Rating Plugs 23

Low

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

High

For 150A Frames: LC, LCA, LCG, LCGA, HLC, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA

For 1200A Frames: NC, NCA, NCG, NCGA, HNC, HNCA, HNCG, HNCGA

75

225

750

1LC75

—

800

1600

6400

12NC800

A12NC800 4

90

270

900

1LC90

—

900

1800

7200

12NC900

A12NC900

100

300

1000

1LC100

A1LC100 4

1000

2000

8000

12NC1000

A12NC1000

125

375

1250

1LC125

A1LC125

1200

2400

9600

12NC1200

A12NC1200 5

150

450

1500

1LC150

A1LC150 5

For 2000A Frames: PC, PCA, PCC, PCCA, PCG, PCGA, PCCG, PCCGA

7

For 300A Frames: LC, LCA, LCG, LCGA, HLC, HLCA, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA

1000

2000

8000

20PC1000

—

150

450

1500

3LC150

—

1200

2400

9600

20PC1200

—

8

175

525

1750

3LC175

—

1400

2800

11,200

20PC1400

—

200

600

2000

3LC200

—

1600

3200

12,800

20PC1600

A20PC1600

9

225

675

2250

3LC225

A3LC225

1800

3600

14,400

20PC1800

A20PC1800

250

750

2500

3LC250

A3LC250

2000

4000

16,000

20PC2000

A20PC2000 5

10

275

825

2750

3LC275

A3LC275

For 2500A Frames: PC, PCA, PCC, PCCA, PCG, PCGA, PCCG, PCCGA

300

900

3000

3LC300

A3LC300 5

1400

2800

11,200

25PC1400

—

11

For 400A Frames: LC, LCA, LCG, LCGA, HLC, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA

1600

3200

12,800

25PC1600

—

200

600

2000

4LC200

—

1800

3600

14,400

25PC1800

A25PC1800

12

225

675

2250

4LC225

—

2000

4000

16,000

25PC2000

A25PC2000

250

750

2500

4LC250

—

2500

5000

20,000

25PC2500

A25PC2500 5

13

300

900

3000

4LC300

A4LC300

For 3000A Frames: PC, PCA, PCC, PCCA, PCG, PCGA, PCCG, PCCGA

350

1050

3500

4LC350

A4LC350

1600

3200

12,800

30PC1600

—

400

1200

4000

4LC400

A4LC400 5

1800

3600

14,400

30PC1800

—

2000

4000

16,000

30PC2000

—

2500

5000

20,000

30PC2500

A30PC2500

3000

6000

24,000

30PC3000

A30PC3000 5

14
15

For 600A Frames: LC, LCA, LCG, LCGA, HLC, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA, LCC,
LCCA, HLCC, HLCCA, LCCG, LCCGA, HLCCG, HLCCGA
300

900

3000

6LC300

—

350

1050

3500

6LC350

—

16

400

1200

4000

6LC400

A6LC400 4

450

1350

4500

6LC450

A6LC450

17

500

1500

5000

6LC500

A6LC500

600

1800

6000

6LC600

A6LC600 5

18
19
20

For 800A Frames: MC, MCA, MCG, MCGA, HMC, HMCA, HMCG, HMCGA,
MCC, MCCA, HMCC, HMCCA, MCCG, MCCGA, HMCCG, HMCCGA, MDS
400

1200

4000

8MC400

—

500

1500

5000

8MC500

A8MC500 6

600

1800

6000

8MC600

A8MC600

700

2100

7000

8MC700

A8MC700

800

2400

8000

8MC800

A8MC800 5

21

Notes
1 Ampere rating when used in short time only frames:
LC-150: 150A
MC-800: 800A
PC-3000: 3000A
LC-300: 300A
NC-1200: 1200A
LCL-250: 250A
LC-400: 400A
PC-2000: 2000A
LCL-400: 400A
LC-600: 600A
PC-2500: 2500A
2 Magnetic trip range of adjustable rating plugs:
LC, HLC, MC, HMC:
3 to 10 times ampere setting
NC, HNC, PC, PCC, LCL-400: 2 to 8 times ampere setting
LCL-250:
3 to 9 times ampere setting
3 Adjustable 70 to 100% except as noted.
4 Adjustable 75 to 100%.
5 Adjustable 50 to 100%.
6 Adjustable 80 to 100%.
Contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center for old style (three prong) ground fault
rating plugs.

22
23
24
25
V12-T3-60

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Molded-Case Switches

1

Molded-case switches are UL Listed devices and are available
only as high magnetic trip type with fixed trip setting.

2

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued
products and services. 1
Molded-Case Switches with High Magnetic Trip
(Fixed Trip Setting)
Number
of Poles

Maximum
Volts

Maximum
Amperes

Molded-Case Switch Terminal Data

Switch
Catalog Number 23

MCS
Type

Maximum
Switch
Amperes

Wire
Type

Number
of Wires

Wire
Range

Terminal Type
or Catalog
Number

2

240

400

DA2400WK

Standard Terminals

3

240

400

DA3400WK

DA, LB, LBB

400

Cu only

2

3/0–250 kcmil

T400DA2

1

120

100

EB1100LK

EB, EHB, FB

100

Cu

1

#14–1/0

Pressure

2

240

100

EB2100LK

FB

150

Cu/Al

1

#4–4/0

Pressure

3

240

100

EB3100LK

JA, KA

225

Cu/Al

1

#4–350 kcmil

TA225LA1

3

240

100

EB3100SLK

JB, KB

Cu/Al

1

#4–350 kcmil

TA250KB

1

277

100

EHB1100LK

2

480

100

EHB2100LK

3

480

100

EHB3100LK

3

480

100

EHB3100SLK

2

600

100

FB2100LK

2

600

150

FB2150LK

250
Optional Terminals

3
4
5
6
7
8

DA, LB, LBB

400

—

—

—

—

EB, EHB, FB

100

Cu/Al

1

#4–4/0

Pressure

FB

150

—

—

—

—

JA, KA

225

Cu

1

#6–350 kcmil

T225LA

JB, KB

250

Cu

1

#4–350 kcmil

T250KB

9
10

3

600

100

FB3100LK

3

600

150

FB3150LK

3

600

150

FB3150SLK

4

277/480

100

FB4100LK

4

277/480

150

FB4150LK

Frame

Rating

Trip Setting
(Amperes)

Tolerance
(%)

12

100

1000

±20

13

11

Molded-Case Switches with High Magnetic Trip—
Trip Setting and Tolerance

2

600

225

JA2225WK

EB

2

600

225

JA2225WSK

EHB/FB

100

1200

±20

150

1500

±20

3

600

225

JA3225WK

FB

3

600

225

JA3225WSK

DA/LB/LBB

400

4000

+10
–0

2

600

250

JB2250WK

JA/KA

225

2250

2

600

250

JB2250WSK

+10
–0

15

3

600

250

JB3250WK

JB/KB

250

2500

3

600

250

JB3250WSK

+10
–0

16

2

600

225

KA2225WK

2

600

225

KA2225WSK

3

600

225

KA3225WK

3

600

225

KA3225WSK

2

600

250

KB2250WK

2

600

250

KB2250WSK

3

600

250

KB3250WK

3

600

250

KB3250WSK

2

600

400

LB2400WK

2

600

400

LB2400WSK

3

600

400

LB3400WK

3

600

400

LB3400WSK

2

600

400

LBB2400WK

2

600

400

LBB2400WSK

3

600

400

LBB3400WK

3

600

400

LBB3400WSK

14

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference
on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Catalog number suffix identification:
K = Molded-case switch with high magnetic trip (fixed trip setting)
S = Saf-T-Vue cover
L = With line and load terminals
W = No terminals
3 Molded-case switch dimensions are the same as the equivalent thermal-magnetic breaker.
Refer to Dimension Sheet 29-171.

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-61

3
1
2

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Molded-Case Switches with High Magnetic Trip
Molded-Case Switch Terminal Data
(Fixed Trip Setting)
Number
of Poles

Maximum
Volts

Maximum
Amperes

Switch
Catalog Number 23
CA2225KW

MCS
Type

Maximum
Switch
Amperes

Wire
Range

Terminal
Type or
Wire Number Catalog
Type of Wires Number

3

2

240

225

3

240

225

CA3225KW

Standard Terminals (Aluminum Body)

4

2

600

400

LA2400WK

CA

225

#1–300 kcmil

Cu/Al 1

TA225CA2

2

600

400

LA2400WSK

LA400, LAB

400

Cu/Al 1

TA400LA1

2

600

600

LA2600WK

#4–250 kcmil,
plus 3/0–600 kcmil

2

600

600

LA2600WSK

LA600, LC600

600

250/500 kcmil

Cu/Al 2

TA600LA

3

600

400

LA3400WK

MC, MA

800

3/0–400 kcmil

Cu/Al 3

TA800MA2

3

600

400

LA3400WSK

NC, NB

1200

4/0–500 kcmil

Cu/Al 4

TA1200NB1

3

600

400

LA3600WK

—

—

3

600

400

LA3600WSK

2

600

400

LAB2400WK

2

600

400

LAB2400WSK

5
6
7

NC, NB

1200

—

PC2000, PCC2000

2000

BA2000PB rear bus connector

—

PC2500, PCC2500

2500

BA2500PB rear bus connector

PC3000, PCC3000

3000

Rear bus connector included in frame

8

3
3

600

400

LAB3400WSK

Optional Terminals

9

2

600

600

LC2600WK 4

CA

225

—

—

—

—

3

600

600

LC3600WK 4

LA400, LAB

400

Cu

1

T401LA

2

600

600

LCC2600WK 4

#4–250 kcmil,
plus 3/0–600 kcmil

3

600

600

LCC3600WK 4

LA600, LC600

600

250/500 kcmil

Cu

2

T600LA

2

600

800

MA2800WK

MC, MA

800

3/0–300 kcmil

Cu

3

T800MA1

11

2

600

800

MA2800WSK

NC, NB

1200

3/0–400 kcmil

Cu

4

T1200NB1

3

600

800

MA3800WK

NC, NB

1200

500–750 kcmil

Cu/Al 3

12

3

600

800

MA3800WSK

2

600

800

MC2800WK 4

PC2000, PCC2000

2000

BA2000PB rear bus connector

3

600

800

MC3800WK 4

PC2500, PCC2500

2500

BA2500PB rear bus connector

PC3000, PCC3000

3000

Rear bus connector included in frame

10

13

2

600

600

400

800

LAB3400WK

MCC2800WK

4
4

3

600

800

MCC3800WK

2

600

1200

NB21200WK

2

600

1200

NB21200WSK

3

600

1200

NB31200WK

3

600

1200

NB31200WSK

2

600

1200

NC21200WK 4

16

3

600

1200

NC31200WK 4

2

600

2000

PB22000WK

17

2

600

2500

PB22500WK

3

600

2000

PB32000WK

14
15

18

3

600

2500

PB32500WK

2

600

2000

PBF22000K

3

600

2000

PBF32000WK

19

25

600

2000

PC22000WK

25

600

2500

PC22500WK

20

25

600

3000

PC23000K

35

600

2000

PC32000WK

35

600

2500

PC32500WK

21
22
23
24

35

600

3000

PC33000K

25

600

2000

PCC22000WK

25

600

2500

PCC22500WK

25

600

3000

PCC23000K

35

600

2000

PCC32000WK

35

600

2500

PCC32500WK

35

600

3000

PCC33000K

25

600

2000

PCF22000K

35

600

2000

PCF32000K

TA1201NB1

Molded-Case Switches With High Magnetic Trip—
Trip Setting and Tolerance
Frame

Rating

Trip Setting
(Amperes)

Tolerance
(%)

CA

225

2250

+20
–10

LA (400)

400

4000

+10
–0

LA/LC

600

6000

+10
–0

MA/MC

800

8000

+10
–0

NB/NC

1200

12,000

+10
–0

PB/PC

2000–3000

12,000

+10
–0

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference
on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Catalog number suffix identification:
K = Molded-case switch with high magnetic trip (fixed trip setting)
S = Saf-T-Vue cover
W = No terminals
3 Molded-case switch dimensions are the same as the equivalent thermal-magnetic breaker.
Refer to Dimension Sheet 29-171.
4 For molded-case switch types LC, LCC—use LA attachments;
MC and MCC—use MA attachments; NC—use NB attachments.
5 For molded-case switch types PC, PCC and PCF, rating plug is included and use SELTRONIC
PC attachments.

25
V12-T3-62

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Type MCP Motor
Circuit Protector
The motor circuit protector
(MCP) is designed specifically
for the protection of motor
circuits. It operates on the
magnetic principle with a
current sensing coil in each of
the three poles, with the trippoint adjustable from the front.
MCPs are the fastest devices
available for clearing low level
faults and offer circuit breaker
features and convenience—
resettable, quick-make
quick-break, deadfront
and protection against
single phasing.

Terminals

Sizes 0–4 MCP with
Current Limiter

Note: Sizes 0–4 only.

Terminals
Terminals are included
with both the MCP and the
current limiter. Standard
terminals are aluminum alloy,
with non-aluminum terminals
optional for use with only
the MCP. Both standard
and optional terminals will
accommodate aluminum
or copper conductors.
Note: Except 400A Size 5.
Non-aluminum terminal suitable
for copper only.

When using aluminum
conductors, use of joint
compound is recommended.
Wire ranges are listed in the
terminal table above.

Standard Aluminum

Optional Non-Aluminum

Size 0, 1, 2

#14–#4

#14–1/0

Size 3

#6–3/0

#14–1/0

Size 4

#4–4/0

#4–4/0

Size 5 (250)

#4–350 kcmil

#4–350 kcmil

Size 5 (400)

—

(2) 3/0–250 kcmil

Limiters to 50

#14–#2

—

Limiters to 100

#1–4/0

—

Limiters to 150

#1–4/0

—

2
3
4
5
6

Motor Circuit Protectors
■ Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products
and services. 1

Size 5 MCP 532500

MCPs are rated to correspond
to NEMA starter size.
Current Limiter Attachment
The EL current limiter is an
attachment that bolts to
the load end of the MCP to
provide increased interrupting
capacity. The combination is
UL Listed as a recognized
component for application at
up to 200,000A symmetrical
at 600 Vac. It is coordinated
with the MCP so that normal
short circuits will be cleared
automatically by the MCP,
opening all three poles, and
only the rare high fault will
cause the limiter to function.
Current limiters must be
applied as shown in the
terminal table above.

1

Terminals

MCP or Limiter
(Amperes)

7

Starter
Size

Trip
Range,
Amperes

Continuous
Ampere
Rating

With Standard Aluminum
Alloy Terminals
Catalog Number

With Optional
Non-Aluminum Terminals 2
Catalog Number

0

7–22

3

MCP0322R

MCP0322CR

0

18–58

7

MCP0358R

MCP0358CR

0

50–150

15

MCP03150R

MCP03150CR

1

100–300

30

MCP13300R

MCP13300CR

2

160–480

50

MCP23480R

MCP23480CR

3

275–1000

100

MCP331000R

MCP331000CR

4

450–1550

150

MCP431550R

MCP431550CR

4

575–1800

150

MCP431800R

MCP431800CR

5

1250–2500

250

MCP532500

MCP532500C

5

2000–4000

400

—

MCP534000C

UL Listed
The MCP is UL Listed as a
recognized component and
requires additional listing by
the control manufacturer in
combination with a contactor
and overload relay.

Accessories for MCP
For
MCP Size

Use
Accessories For

Sizes 0–4

FB

5 (250A)

KB

5 (400A)

LB

9
10
11
12
13

Base Mounting Hardware
No charge when ordered
with MCP. Order separately
when required.

14

Base Mounting Hardware

16

Description

Style Number

Current Limiters

Sizes 0–4

21C6782G18

Limiter Catalog
Numbers

For MCP Catalog
Numbers 7

Size 5 (250A)

673B125G12

Size 5 (400A)

21C6782G22

EL3003R

MCP0322R

Modifications for MCP 3

EL3007R

MCP0358R

Description

EL3015R

MCP03150R

EL3030R

MCP13300R

EL3050R

MCP23480R

EL3100R

MCP331000R

EL3150R

MCP431550R

EL3150R

MCP431800R

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For
replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114–
V12-T3-167.
2 Catalog numbers ending in CR were
previously listed ending in RC. This
is a catalog number change only, not
a material change.
3 Not UL Listed.
4 Mounts only in right pole; only one
Modification marked can be used in
MCP (Sizes 0–4).
5 On 400A Size 5, an external resistor is
supplied for voltages above 240 Vac
and 24 Vdc.
6 On Sizes 0–4 and 250A Size 5, an
external resistor is supplied for customer
mounting, except for 120 Vac, 12, 24,
125 Vdc.
7 Also applicable to MCPs with
optional terminals.

Modifications for MCP
These modifications must be
factory installed. Consult
factory for pricing.

Auxiliary switches
2As and 2Bs

4—1A

and 1B,

Shunt trip 4
Undervoltage release 456
Moisture-fungus treatment

Accessories for MCP
For handle mechanisms
refer to Pages V12-T3-95–
V12-T3-112.
Note: On 400A Size 5, an external
resistor is supplied for voltages,
above 240 Vac and 24 Vdc.

Interrupting Ratings
Maximum application current
shall be determined by testing
the MCP in combination with
a contactor and overload relay.
Additional capacity can be
obtained by using the current
limiter attachment.

8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-63

15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

3
1
2
3
4
5

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Series C 30 mA Ground Fault
(Earth Leakage)

Series C 30 mA Ground
Fault (Earth Leakage)

Earth Leakage

The Series C units (prefix only
listed below) that included a
breaker and integral Earth
Leakage module have been
replaced by the Series G
solution that has the flexibility
to add the Earth Leakage
module in the field. The
Series G solution has an
extended range of 15–630A.

Ampere Range—15–400A

Ampere
Rating

Series C
Four-Pole

Series G
MCCB

Series G
MCCB
Alt

Series G Earth
Leakage Module

15

EL4FD3015L

EGS4015FFG

EGC4015FFG

ELEBN4125G

20

EL4FD3020L

EGS4020FFG

EGC4020FFG

ELEBN4125G

25

EL4FD3025L

EGS4025FFG

EGC4025FFG

ELEBN4125G

EL4HFD

30

EL4FD3030L

EGS4030FFG

EGC4030FFG

ELEBN4125G

ELHFD

EL4HFW

35

EL4FD3035L

EGS4035FFG

EGC4035FFG

ELEBN4125G

ELHFW

EL4HJW

40

EL4FD3040L

EGS4040FFG

EGC4040FFG

ELEBN4125G

EL4HKW

45

EL4FD3045L

EGS4045FFG

EGC4045FFG

ELEBN4125G

EL4JW

50

EL4FD3050L

EGS4050FFG

EGC4050FFG

ELEBN4125G

Catalog Prefix
Three-Pole
ELFD
ELFW
ELHMCP

ELHJD

Four-Pole
EL4FD
EL4FW

6

ELHJW
ELHKD

EL4KW

60

EL4FD3060L

EGS4060FFG

EGC4060FFG

ELEBN4125G

7

ELHKW

—

70

EL4FD3070L

EGS4070FFG

EGC4070FFG

ELEBN4125G

ELJD

—

80

EL4FD3080L

EGS4080FFG

EGC4080FFG

ELEBN4125G

8

ELJW

—

90

EL4FD3090L

EGS4090FFG

EGC4090FFG

ELEBN4125G

ELKD

—

100

EL4FD3100L

EGS4100FFG

EGC4100FFG

ELEBN4125G

9

ELKW

—

110

EL4FD3110L

EGS4110FFG

EGC4110FFG

ELEBN4125G

125

EL4FD3125L

EGS4125FFG

EGC4125FFG

ELEBN4125G

150

EL4FD3150L

JGE4150FAG

JGC4150FAG

ELJBN4150W

50

EL4FW3050JL

GES4050AFM

—

ELEBE4125G

11

50

EL4FWC3050JL

GEC4050AFM

—

ELEBE4125G

15

EL4HFD3015L

EGH4015FFG

—

ELEBN4125G

12

20

EL4HFD3020L

EGH4020FFG

—

ELEBN4125G

25

EL4HFD3025L

EGH4025FFG

—

ELEBN4125G

13

30

EL4HFD3030L

EGH4030FFG

—

ELEBN4125G

35

EL4HFD3035L

EGH4035FFG

—

ELEBN4125G

14

40

EL4HFD3040L

EGH4040FFG

—

ELEBN4125G

45

EL4HFD3045L

EGH4045FFG

—

ELEBN4125G

15

50

EL4HFD3050L

EGH4050FFG

—

ELEBN4125G

60

EL4HFD3060L

EGH4060FFG

—

ELEBN4125G

16

70

EL4HFD3070L

EGH4070FFG

—

ELEBN4125G

80

EL4HFD3080L

EGH4080FFG

—

ELEBN4125G

17

90

EL4HFD3090L

EGH4090FFG

—

ELEBN4125G

100

EL4HFD3100L

EGH4100FFG

—

ELEBN4125G

18

110

EL4HFD3110L

EGH4110FFG

—

ELEBN4125G

125

EL4HFD3125L

EGH4125FFG

—

ELEBN4125G

19

150

EL4HFD3150L

JGH3150FAG

—

ELJBN4150W

Note: Please contact Eaton
customer service for assistance
with crossing from the obsolete
product to the new Series G.

10

20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-64

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Portable Test Kit and Remote
Ground Fault Trip Indicator

Remote Ground Fault
Trip Indicator

3

Face Mounting Bracket

1

Portable Test Kit

2
3
4

Provides verification of
performance of all frame
sizes of SELTRONIC breakers
while devices are still in
service under varying load
and/or phase unbalance.
The tester operates on
120V, 50/60 Hz, and includes
complete instructions and
test times for testing the long
time, instantaneous operation
and optional ground fault
operation of the breaker.
Portable Test Kit
Style Number
STK2

For use only with SELTRONIC
circuit breakers (LCG, HLCG,
MCG, HMCG, NCG, HNCG,
PCG and PCCG) with built-in
ground fault protection.

Face Mounting Bracket for
Ground Fault Indicator

5

Style Number

6

1264C67G01

Note: UL Listed as a recognized
component.

7

The SELTRONIC ground fault
indicator is a remotely
mounted device with a
combination indicating light/
reset/test button that will
light when the breaker trips
on a ground fault. Tripping
from overloads or short
circuits will not activate the
device. A separate 120V,
50/60 Hz power source is
required to power the light
and internal relay, which
has 1NO/1NC contacts
for customer connected
alarm, etc. Designed for
panel mounting, it can be
face-mounted by ordering
the optional mounting
bracket below.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Remote Ground
Fault Indicator
Style Number

Catalog Number

1259C14G01

GFAU

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-65

3
1
2
3
4

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Accessories
Rear-Connected Studs
For complete stud assembly,
order a stud and an
appropriate tube based on
thickness of customer’s
Rear Connected Stud

mounting panel. A short stud
must be assembled adjacent
to a long stud to maintain
clearances required by
Underwriters Laboratories.

400A LA studs of the
same length have sufficient
clearance; however, customer
connections may make it
necessary to use a short stud

adjacent to a long stud. Two
studs are required per pole.
Refer to DS29171 Dimension
Sheets for stud sizes and
extensions behind breaker.

For DA, EB, EHB, FB, JA, KA, JB, KB, LB, LBB, HFB, HKA, HKB and HLB Breakers 1
Mounting Panel
Thickness, Inches

Stud 2
Length

Tube 3
Style Number

Length

Style Number

5

DA, LB, LBB and HLB Breakers
3/4–1

Short

656D565G03

27/32

313C909H17

6

3/4–1

Long

656D565G04

3-25/32

313C909H20

1/2–3/4

Short

656D565G03

1-3/32

313C909H18

7

1/2–3/4

Long

656D565G04

4-1/32

313C909H21

1/4–1/2

Short

656D565G03

1-11/32

313C909H19

1/4–1/2

Long

656D565G04

4-9/32

313C909H22

8

EB, EHB, FB and HFB (100A Maximum)

9

1

Short

451D874G01

1-1/16

32B9446H20

1

Long

451D874G02

3-7/16

32B9446H24

10

1-1/16–15/16

Short

451D874G01

1-3/8

32B9446H21

1-1/16–15/16

Long

451D874G02

3-3/4

32B9446H25

11

3/8–5/8

Short

451D874G01

1-11/16

32B9446H22

3/8–5/8

Long

451D874G02

4-1/16

32B9446H26

12

1/4–5/16

Short

451D874G01

2

32B9446H23

1/4–5/16

Long

451D874G02

4-3/8

32B9446H27

FB, HFB 150 Ampere Breakers

13

1

Short

374D883G01

1-1/16

374D883H06

14

1

Long

374D883G02

4-5/16

374D883H10

11/16–15/16

Short

374D883G01

1-3/8

374D883H07

15

11/16–15/16

Long

374D883G02

4-5/8

374D883H11

3/8–5/8

Short

374D883G01

1-11/16

374D883H08

3/8–5/8

Long

374D883G02

4-15/16

374D883H12

16

1/4–5/16

Short

374D883G01

2

374D883H09

1/4–5/16

Long

374D883G02

5-1/4

374D883H13

17

JA, KA and HKA Breakers
3/4–1

Short

656D565G01

27/32

456D983H05

18

3/4–1

Long

656D565G02

3-25/32

456D983H08

1/2–3/4

Short

656D565G01

1-3/32

456D983H06

19

1/2–3/4

Long

656D565G02

4-1/32

456D983H09

1/4 –1/2

Short

656D565G01

1-11/32

456D983H07

20

1/4 –1/2

Long

656D565G02

4-9/32

456D983H10

JB, KB and HKB Breakers

21

3/4–1

Short

5010D23G01

27/32

456D983H05

3/4–1

Long

5010D23G02

3-7/8

5010D23H05

1/2–3/4

Short

5010D23G01

1-3/32

456D983H06

22
23

1/2–3/4

Long

5010D23G02

4-1/8

5010D23H06

1/4 –1/2

Short

5010D23G01

1-11/32

456D983H07

1/4 –1/2

Long

5010D23G02

4-3/8

5010D23H07

Notes
1 For insulated panels only; two required per pole.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Included at no charge when ordered with stud.

24
25
V12-T3-66

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

3

For LAB, LA, MA, HLA, HMA and HNB Breakers 1
Stud Ampere
Rating

Diameter, Inches
and Thread

Extension Back
of Breaker, Inches

Stud
Style Number

3-7/32

1241 345

1
2

LAB, LA, HLA, LC and HLC Breakers
225 2

1/2–13

225 2

1/2–13

6-9/32

1241 346

225 23

1/2–13

4-31/32

1241 392

400 2

3/4–16

5-15/32

5B7383G15

400 2

3/4–16

7-31/32

5B7383G16

400 2

3/4–16

10-15/32

5B7383G17

600 4

1–12

5-29/32

314C960G07

600 4

1–12

5-13/32

314C960G08

600 4

1–12

5-29/32

314C960G09

6
7

3
4
5

MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD and MDS Breakers
225

1/2–13

3-21/32

314C960G01

400

3/4–16

5-29/32

314C960G04

400

3/4–16

8-13/32

314C960G05

400

3/4–16

10-29/32

314C960G06

600

1–12

5-29/32

314C960G07

600

1–12

8-13/32

314C960G08

600

1–12

10-29/32

314C960G09

800

1-1/8–12

5-29/32

314C960G10

800

1-1/8–12

8-13/32

314C960G11

800

1-1/8–12

10-29/32

314C960G12

8
9
10
11
12

NB, HNB, NC and HNC Breakers
800

1-1/8–12

5-1/2

623B222G01

800

1-1/8–12

8

623B222G02

800

1-1/8–12

10-1/2

623B222G03

1200

1-1/4–12

5-1/2

373B375G04

1200

1-1/4–12

10-1/2

373B375G03

13
14
15

Notes
1 For insulated panels only; two required per pole.
2 150, 250, 300 and 400A frames only.
3 This is a special stud that includes six contact nuts for use where bus contact nuts
must be used.
4 600A frames only.

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-67

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

1

Panelboard Connecting Straps
For connecting line end of breakers to panelboard bus.

2

Panelboard
Connecting Strap

3

For DA, EB, EHB, FB, JA, KA, JB, KB, LB,
LBB, HFB, HKB and HLB Breakers
Ampere Rating

Connector Type 1

Style Number

EB, EHB, FB and HFB Breakers
Narrow Distribution Panelboards 2

4

50
50

5

100

6

673B142G02

Outside
Center

624B624H01
624B624H02

LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC 150, 300 and 400A Frames

3

150

Center

673B142G04

400

Center

32B4570G02

673B142G03

400

Outside

314C541G01

Outside

Mounting bracket (two required)

3

208B297H01

50

Center

1253C72G01

LA, HLA, LC and HLC 600A Frames 3

50

Outside

1253C72G03

600

Center

624B609G01

600

Outside

506C052G01

Center

1253C73G03

1253C73G01

10

150

Outside

1253C73G05

Outside

1253C73G06

Three-pole mounting bracket
Two-pole mounting bracket
DA, LB, LBB and HLB Breakers

Mounting bracket (two required)
MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD and MDS Breakers

208B297H01
3

800

Short

314C996G01

624B600H01

800

Medium

314C996G02

624B600H02

800

Long

314C996G03

Mounting bracket (four required)

3

315C270H01

400

Center

314C940G04

NB, HNB, NC and HNC Breakers 3

400

Outside

505C680G01

1200

Short

505C606G04

1200

Medium

505C606G05

JA, KA and HKA Breakers 3

1200

Long

505C606G06

225

Center

314C940G03

Mounting bracket (four required)

225

Outside

180C074G01

Notes
1 Not UL Listed.
2 Bus spacing 2.75 inches in box 5.75 inches deep (600V maximum).
3 Bus spacing 3.50 inches.

Mounting bracket (one required)

Mounting bracket (one required)

208B264H01

208B264H01

JB, KB and HKB Breakers 3

16

1253C74G02

673B142G02

Center

15

1253C74G01

Outside

Two-pole mounting bracket

150

14

Center

225

673B142G09

100

13

225

Three-pole mounting bracket

9

12

Style Number

CA Breaker Power Panelboards (Convertible) 3

673B142G10

100

11

Connector Type 1

Outside

Power Panelboards (Convertible)

8

Ampere Rating

100

150

7

Center

For CA, LAB, LA, MA, HLA, HMA and HNB Breakers

250

Center

2600D26G01

250

Outside

2600D26G02

Mounting bracket (one required)

315C270H01

1576707

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-68

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Plug-In Adapter Kits
For rear-connected applications such as switchboards.
Facilitates ease of installation and front removal of breaker.
Includes conductor for mounting on breaker, plug-in mounting
blocks with matching conductor, rear studs and mounting
hardware. Order two mounting blocks style number when line
and load are required; order one mounting block style number
when either line or load is required.
■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products
and services. 1
Flat Bus Type
Flat Bus Type
Description

Style Number

EB, EHB, FB Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 2
Flat Bus Type—One Mounting Block, Line or Load
Two-pole, 100A

1480D13G05

Two-pole, 150A

1480D13G05

Three-pole, 100A

1480D13G06

Three-pole, 150A

1480D13G06

FB and HFB Magnetic Only, HFB Thermal-Magnetic 2
Flat Bus Type—One Mounting Block, Line or Load
Two-pole, 100A

1480D13G05

Two-pole, 150A

1480D13G05

Three-pole, 100A

1480D13G06

Three-pole, 150A

1480D13G06

JB, KB, HKB Breakers 1 Flat Bus Type—
Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load
Two-pole

506C144G17

Three-pole

506C144G18

One Mounting Block, Line Only
Two-pole

1260C86G01

Three-pole

1260C86G02

Two-pole

1260C86G03

Three-pole

1260C86G04

Threaded Stud Type

Threaded Studs Type
Description

Style Number
4

JA, KA and HKA Breakers (Threaded Studs
Type)—Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load
313C644G29

Three-pole

313C644G30

3

Two-pole

314C932G01

Three-pole

314C932G02

4

One Mounting Block, Line or Load

LA, HLA, LC and HLC (600A Frames) 2 (Threaded
Studs)—Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load
313C644G50

Three-pole

313C644G51

6

Two-pole

506C059G03

7

Three-pole

506C059G04

One Mounting Block, Line or Load

One Mounting Block, Line or Load Flat Bus Type
Two-pole

1288C19G01

Three-pole

1288C19G02

MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS, NB, HNB, NC, HNC
and NB TRI-PAC Breakers 4 (Flat Bus Type)—
One Mounting Block, Line or Load
MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS two-pole

2614D53G05

MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS three-pole

2614D53G06

NB, HNB, NC, HNC, NB TRI-PAC two-pole

2614D53G03

NB, HNB, NC, HNC, NB TRI-PAC three-pole

2614D53G04

Mounting Plates
Description

Two-pole

313C644G25

JA, KA

504C823H01

Three-pole

313C644G26

DA, LB, LBB, ALB

178C781H01

LA, LAB, HLA, LC, HLC

504C824H01

MA, HMA, MC, MMC, NB, HNB, NC, HNC

1290C73H01

450D010G16

Two-pole

313C644G45

Three-pole

313C644G46

One Mounting Block, Line or Load
Two-pole

314C932G03

Three-pole

314C932G04

Notes
1 These accessories are no longer available.
2 These plug-in adapter kits are UL Listed as recognized
components.
3 700–1200A adapter kit is front removable, bolt-on design—
not plug-in type.
4 Not UL Listed.

313C644G27

Two-pole, 700–800A

176C544G01 3

Three-pole, 125–600A

313C644G28

Three-pole, 700–800A

176C544G02 3
313C370G03

Two-pole, 700–800A

507C049G01 3

Three-pole, 125–600A

313C370G04

Three-pole, 700–800A

507C049G02 3

12

15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23

One Mounting Block, Line or Load
Two-pole, 125–600A

11

20

MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD and MDS Breakers 3
Threaded Studs—Two Mounting Blocks,
Line and Load
Two-pole, 125–600A

10

14

Predrilled panels for:

179C207H01

DA, LB, LBB, HLB Breakers 2 Flat Bus Type—
Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load

9

13

507C047H01

Three-pole

8

Style Number

JB, KB

450D010G15

5

Two-pole

EB, EHB, FB, HFB

Two-pole

2

Two-pole

LAB, LA, HLA, LC and HLC (150, 250, 300 and
400A Frame) (Threaded Studs Type)—
Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load

One Mounting Block, Line or Load

1

24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-69

3
1
2

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Extended Line Terminal Shields
For shielding line side terminal connections. One shield required
per breaker. Order separately when needed. Sold only in lots of
10, including hardware.

For complete installation, order:
1. Front-connected, non-automatic PB breaker.
(Order similar to standard front connected, except
omit load conductor extensions.)

Extended Line Terminal Shields 1

2. Fuse mounting base.

Breaker Frame

Style Number

3. Fuses (from distributor).

4

JB, KB, HKB

1266C07G01

MA, HMA, MC, HMC

208B966G01

5

NB, HNB, NC, HNC

208B966G02

LAB, LA, (Saf-T-Vue)

314C420G02

JA, KA, LB, LBB (Saf-T-Vue)

314C420G04

LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC

314C420G05

DA

314C420G06

JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB (standard breaker)

314C420G06

EB, EHB, FB, HFB

625B229G08 2

3

Line Terminal Shield

6
7
8
9
10

Handle Locks
Non-Padlockable
For prevention of unintentional operation of breaker. Fits over
breaker handle and may be removed.
Padlockable
For prevention of unauthorized operation of breaker. Is nonremovable once installed on breaker. Meets Underwriters
Laboratories and California Code requirements.
Handle Locks

Base Mounting Hardware
No charge when ordered with breaker. Order separately
when needed.
Line Terminal Shield

Breaker Frame

Style Number

Non-Padlockable
FA, EA, CA, EB, EHB, FB, HFB

29B2721H01

LAB, LA, LC, HLC, MA, NB, HLA, HMA, HNB, 28B4596G01
MC, HMC, NC, HNC

Base Mounting Hardware
Description

Handle Locks 15

Style Number

GB, GC, GHB, GHC

1294C01H01

DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB

29B2721H04

11

Single-Pole Breakers
EB, EHB, HFB 3

624B375G01

Padlockable

12

EB, EHB, HFB 4

624B375G02

CA

506C438G01

Two- and Three-Pole Breakers

FA, EA, EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP150

765A754G01

13

LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC, MA, NB, HMA, HNB, MC 21C6782G05

DA, JA, KA, LB, LBB, HKA, HLB, MCP400

673B796G02

HMC, NC, HNC

1091716

JB, KB, HKB, MCP250

673B796G01

14

PB, PC, PCC

624B375G22

LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC

373B591G02

DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB

21C6782G22

MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS

6591C30G02–OFF

EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP

21C6782G18

JB, KB, HKB

673B125G12

MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS

6591C30G05–ON/OFF

NB, HNB, NC, HNC

6591C30G01–OFF

NB, HNB, NC, HNC

6591C30G04–ON/OFF

PA, SPCB, PB, Tri-Pac PB, PC

6591C30G03–OFF

15

CA two-pole

16
17

CA three-pole

21C6782G28
21C6782G29

Fuse Mounting Base for PB Breakers

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Notes
1 Not UL Listed.
2 One of style 625B229G08 is one package of 10.
3 Individually mounted.
4 Group mounted.
5 All breakers are trip free and will trip with handle locks attached.
Cannot be used when handle extension is used.

For 2000A non-automatic breakers only.
Fuse Mounting Base for PB Breakers
Style Number
6635C78G02 1

For use with non-automatic, three-pole circuit breaker. Includes
fuse mounting base and hardware to mount standard Class L
current limiting fuses, 801–2000A (fuses not included).
Note: Interrupters used with fuse mounting base will accept all standard
PB accessories. See Dimension Sheet 29-171 for mounting details.

V12-T3-70

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Cable Connectors
The fuse mounting base will accept the following terminals
for front cable connection (omit “T” connectors from rear
connected breakers).
Cable Connectors
Wire Range, Type Number of Cables

Style Number

(3) 3/0–400 kcmil Cu

672B655G01

(4) 400–500 kcmil Cu

180C046G03

Molded Type Handle Extension
For LAB, LA and HLA Breakers 1
Style Number
372B399G01

For MA, HMA, MC, HMC, NB, HNB, NC and HNC Breakers 1
Style Number
1251C65G01 2

For PB, PC, PCC and PA/RD Breakers 1
Style Number
6635C78G02 2

Modifications
Only two internally mounted
modifications—shunt trip,
undervoltage release,
auxiliary switch, alarm
switch—may be mounted
in EB through PB. Only one
of these modifications may
be mounted in FB, HFB
magnetic only, two-pole EB,
EHB, FB and SELTRONIC
breakers. None are available
in single-pole breakers except
alarm switch in EB, EHB and
HFB. Contact Avery Creek,
NC, Technical Resource
Center for possible special
combinations of the following
modifications not in
tabulations. Contact factory
for pricing if accessories
are factory installed.

Factory-Mounted Shunt Trips
Factory-mounted shunt trips
only can be supplied for the
following breakers: CA, HCA,
CAH, HFB magnetic only
and PB/PBF non-automatic
breakers (molded-case
switches). They are 120 Vac
rated, suitable for 55% pickup
for ground fault application.
Right hand mounting is
standard and they are not
UL Listed.

1

Notes
1 Not UL listed.
2 Included with frame at no charge.

6

2
3
4
5
7
8
9

Shunt Trip
For tripping breaker from
a remote point. A solenoid
device mounts within breaker
case. Breaker trips when
coil is energized.

10

Shunt trips should not be
used as circuit interlocks
using maintained contact
pilot devices.

12

11
13

A cutoff switch breaks the
circuit to the momentary rated
coil when the breaker opens.
Available for control voltages
up to 250 Vdc or 600 Vac.
Voltage and frequency must
be specified. Standard leads
extend 18.00 inches outside
the breaker. Longer leads may
be specified.

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-71

3
1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.
Shunt Trip for Field Mounting 123
Shunt Trip

4

Breaker Type Catalog Number

2

Voltage/Hz

EB, EHB, FB, HFB 5
(Thermal-Magnetic Only)

JB, KB, HKB

JA, KA, HKA, DA,
LB, LBB, HLB

LA, LAB, HLA

MA, HMA

NB, HNB

PB TRI-PAC
and PA

3

Right-Hand Mounting
600/50–60 Hz

2609D39G15

2609D42G15

2605D15G15

2606D56G15

2606D57G15

2606D58G15

2606D59G15

4

480/50–60 Hz

2609D39G16

2609D42G16

2605D15G16

2606D56G16

2606D57G16

2606D58G16

2606D59G16

240/50–60 Hz

2609D39G17

2609D42G17

2605D15G17

2606D56G17

2606D57G17

2606D58G17

2606D59G17

5

208/50–60 Hz

2609D39G18

2609D42G18

2605D15G18

2606D56G18

2606D57G18

2606D58G18

2606D59G18

120/50–60 Hz

2609D39G19

2609D42G19

2605D15G19

2606D56G19

2606D57G19

2606D58G19

2606D59G19

6

60/50–60 Hz

2609D39G20

2609D42G20

2605D15G20

2606D56G20

2606D57G20

2606D58G20

2606D59G20

48/50–60 Hz

2609D39G21

2609D42G21

2605D15G21

2606D56G21

2606D57G21

2606D58G21

2606D59G21

7

24/50–60 Hz

2609D39G22

2609D42G22

2605D15G22

2606D56G22

2606D57G22

2606D58G22

2606D59G22

250 DC

2609D39G23

2609D42G23

2605D15G23

2606D56G23

2606D57G23

2606D58G23

2606D59G23

8

125 DC

2609D39G24

2609D42G24

2605D15G24

2606D56G24

2606D57G24

2606D58G24

2606D59G24

60 DC

2609D39G25

2609D42G25

2605D15G25

2606D56G25

2606D57G25

2606D58G25

2606D59G25

48 DC

2609D39G26

2609D42G26

2605D15G26

2606D56G26

2606D57G26

2606D58G26

2606D59G26

24 DC

2609D39G27

2609D42G27

2605D15G27

2606D56G27

2606D57G27

2606D58G27

2606D59G27

12 DC

2609D39G28

2609D42G28

2605D15G28

2606D56G28

2606D57G28

2606D58G28

2606D59G28

9
10

Left-Hand Mounting
600/50–60 Hz

2609D39G01

2609D42G01

2605D15G01

2606D56G01

2606D57G01

2606D58G01

2606D59G01

480/50–60 Hz

2609D39G02

2609D42G02

2605D15G02

2606D56G02

2606D57G02

2606D58G02

2606D59G02

240/50–60 Hz

2609D39G03

2609D42G03

2605D15G03

2606D56G03

2606D57G03

2606D58G03

2606D59G03

12

208/50–60 Hz

2609D39G04

2609D42G04

2605D15G04

2606D56G04

2606D57G04

2606D58G04

2606D59G04

120/50–60 Hz

2609D39G05

2609D42G05

2605D15G05

2606D56G05

2606D57G05

2606D58G05

2606D59G05

13

60/50–60 Hz

2609D39G06

2609D42G06

2605D15G06

2606D56G06

2606D57G06

2606D58G06

2606D59G06

48/50–60 Hz

2609D39G07

2609D42G07

2605D15G07

2606D56G07

2606D57G07

2606D58G07

2606D59G07

14

24/50–60 Hz

2609D39G08

2609D42G08

2605D15G08

2606D56G08

2606D57G08

2606D58G08

2606D59G08

250 DC

2609D39G09

2609D42G09

2605D15G09

2606D56G09

2606D57G09

2606D58G09

2606D59G09

15

125 DC

2609D39G10

2609D42G10

2605D15G10

2606D56G10

2606D57G10

2606D58G10

2606D59G10

60 DC

2609D39G11

2609D42G11

2605D15G11

2606D56G11

2606D57G11

2606D58G11

2606D59G11

16

48 DC

2609D39G12

2609D42G12

2605D15G12

2606D56G12

2606D57G12

2606D58G12

2606D59G12

24 DC

2609D39G13

2609D42G13

2605D15G13

2606D56G13

2606D57G13

2606D58G13

2606D59G13

17

12 DC

2609D39G14

2609D42G14

2605D15G14

2606D56G14

2606D57G14

2606D58G14

2606D59G14

11

Notes
1 120 Vac ratings suitable for 55% pickup for ground fault applications.
2 Not field mountable on non-automatic breakers (molded-case switches).
3 Field mounting voids breakers’ UL listing except on LA, HLA, MA, HMA, NB, HNB, PB, KB, HKB, KA, HKA, LB, HLB and SELTRONIC breakers.
4 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-168.
5 Available similar to this except “Leads out the load end—(not UL Listed).” Order by description.

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-72

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Left-Hand Mounting Kits for SELTRONIC Breakers

Shunt Trip Coil Data

Left-Hand Mounting Kits for SELTRONIC Breakers
Breaker
Type

Description
Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from
external 32 to 120 Vdc and Vac to 60 Hz source 12

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from
external 240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz source 23

Style
Number

MC, HMC

1371D72G22

NC, HNC

1372D39G13

PC, PCC

1372D35G22

LC, HLC

1371D11G22

MC, HMC

1371D72G32

NC, HNC

1372D39G23

PC, PCC

1372D35G32

LC, HLC

1371D11G32

Shunt Trip
Voltage
Rating

For All Breakers Listed in Previous
Table and on Previous Page
Except CA and SELTRONIC
Coil Inrush

1
2

SELTRONIC
Coil Inrush

Amperes

Volt-Amperes

Amperes

Volt-Amperes

600 AC

0.105

63.0

—

—

480 AC

0.085

40.8

—

—

240 AC

1.7

408.0

—

—

208 AC

1.4

291.2

—

—

120 AC

0.88

105.6

15

18

60 AC

9.10

546.0

—

—

48 AC

7.50

360.0

—

—

24 AC

3.95

94.8

—

—

250 DC

2.5

625.0

—

—

125 DC

0.975

121.9

—

—

60 DC

0.525

31.5

—

—

48 DC

1.3

62.4

—

—

24 DC (FB)

6

144.0

—

—

24 DC (KB)

3.8

91.2

—

—

24 DC (others)

8

192

—

—

12 DC

6

72

—

—

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Notes
1 Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications.
2 Also available for 24 Vdc. Order by description.
3 Not for ground fault.

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-73

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

21

Note: Undervoltage release
attachments are not designed
for, and should not be used as,
circuit interlocks. For further
information, Contact Avery
Creek, NC, Technical Resource
Center at 1-800-356-1243.

Factory-Mounted
Undervoltage Releases
All of the above undervoltage
releases can be specified for
factory mounting. Contact
factory for pricing. These
attachments have the leads
out the side and are UL
Listed when factory mounted
unless other non-UL Listed
modifications are used.
Note: Right-hand mounting
is considered standard unless
specified otherwise except JA,
KA, DA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB
and SELTRONIC available
for left-hand only. JB, KB, HKB
are obsolete.

Factory-mounted
undervoltage releases
only can be supplied for
the following breakers:
●

●

●

22
23

Replacement Capabilities

Standard Undervoltage Release
For undervoltage protection.
A solenoid device mounts
within a breaker case. Coil
must be energized before
closing breaker. Trips breaker
when voltage drops below 35
to 70% of coil rating. Picks
up and seals in at 85% of coil
rating. For line voltages
up to 250 Vdc or 600 Vac.
Externally mounted resistors
are supplied for certain
ratings. Standard leads
extend 18.00 inches outside
of breaker. Longer leads may
be specified.

19
20

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

●

SELTRONIC breakers
(120 Vac, 60 Hz only
standard), MC, HMC, NC,
HNC, PC, PCC, LC, HLC
SELTRONIC breakers with
remote trip provisions,
MC, HMC 2 , NC, HNC 2 ,
PC, PCC 2 , LC, HLC 2
EB 3 , EHB 3 , FB 3 , HFB 3 ,
FB 45 and HFB magnetic
only 45
No UVR available for CA,
CAH and HCA

Standard Undervoltage
Release

Undervoltage Release Attachment Kits for Field Mounting 67
Breaker Type
Attachment
Voltage, Hz

JA, KA, DA, HKA,
LB, LBB, HLB

LA, LAB, HLA

MA, HMA

NB, HNB

PB, PA

For Right-Hand Mounting
24, 60

—

60A9355G17

—

—

—

48, 60

—

60A9355G08

—

—

5674D29G16

120, 60

—

60A9355G01

457D727G01

373D632G01

5674D29G09

208, 60

—

60A9355G02

457D727G19

373D632G19

5674D29G10

240, 60

—

60A9355G03

457D727G02

373D632G02

5674D29G11

480, 60

—

60A9355G05

457D727G03

373D632G03

5674D29G13

600, 60

—

60A9355G06

457D727G04

373D632G04

5674D29G14

12 DC

—

458D020G01

457D727G09

372D032G01

4976D85G01

24 DC

—

458D020G02

457D727G10

372D032G02

4976D85G02

48 DC

—

458D020G03

457D727G11

372D032G03

4976D85G03

60 DC

—

458D020G04

457D727G21

—

4976D85G04

125 DC

—

458D020G07

457D727G12

372D032G04

4976D85G07

250 DC

—

458D020G08

457D727G13

372D032G05

4976D85G08

For Left-Hand Mounting
48, 60

—

60A9355G16

—

—

5674D29G08

120, 60

458D070G01

60A9355G09

457D727G05

373D632G05

5674D29G01

208, 60

458D070G05

60A9355G10

457D727G20

373D632G20

5674D29G02

240, 60

458D070G02

60A9355G11

457D727G06

373D632G06

5674D29G03

480, 60

458D070G03

60A9355G13

457D727G07

373D632G07

5674D29G05

600, 60

458D070G04

60A9355G14

457D727G08

373D632G08

5674D29G06

12 DC

458D070G09

458D020G11

457D727G14

372D032G06

4976D85G11

24 DC

458D070G10

458D020G12

457D727G15

372D032G07

4976D85G12

48 DC

458D070G11

458D020G13

457D727G16

372D032G08

4976D85G13

60 DC

—

458D020G14

457D727G22

—

4976D85G14

125 DC

458D070G12

458D020G17

457D727G17

372D032G09

4976D85G17

250 DC

458D070G13

458D020G18

457D727G18

372D032G10

4976D85G18

Notes
1 Cannot be used with other attachments except a small 1A-1B auxiliary switch rated 250V can be supplied in
right-hand pole.
2 Provided with two leads (total of four) for use with a remote normally open contact (pushbutton, etc.) to trip the
breaker. No external power required.
3 Not available on ambient compensating breakers.
4 Not UL Listed.
5 Right-hand mounting only.
6 Not field mountable on non-automatic breakers (molded-case switches).
7 Field mounting voids UL listing of breaker except on LA, HLA, MA, HMA, NB, HNB, PB, KA, HKA, LB and HLB.

24
25
V12-T3-74

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Undervoltage Release Coil Data

1

Breaker Type
JA, KA, HKA, DA, LB, LBB and HLB

EB, EHB, FB, HFB, JB, KB and HKB
Voltage
Rating Hz

Coil
Amperes

External Series
Resistance (Ohms)

Total
VA

Coil
Amperes

External Series
Resistance (Ohms)

LA, LAB, HLA and PB
Total
VA

Coil
Amperes

External Series
Resistance (Ohms)

Total
VA

600 AC

0.020

25,000

12.0

0.012

50,000

7.2

0.029

20,000

17.4

480 AC

0.016

20,000

7.7

0.013

30,000

6.3

0.014

—

6.8

240 AC

0.021

6000

5.1

0.013

—

3.2

0.036

—

8.7

208 AC

0.019

6000

4.0

0.018

—

3.8

0.036

—

7.5

120 AC

0.023

—

2.8

0.023

—

2.8

0.073

—

8.8

60 AC

0.203

250

12.2

—

—

—

—

—

—

48 AC

0.245

150

11.8

—

—

—

0.152

—

7.3

24 AC

0.250

50

6.0

—

—

—

—

—

—

250 DC

0.026

5000

6.5

0.013

16,500

3.3

0.035

5000

8.8

125 DC

0.026

—

3.3

0.013

6500

1.7

0.039

1500

4.9

60 DC

0.248

200

14.9

0.013

1500

0.8

0.034

—

2.1

48 DC

0.260

150

12.5

0.012

600

0.6

0.040

—

2.0

24 DC

0.141

—

3.4

0.023

—

0.6

0.069

—

1.7

12 DC

0.286

—

3.5

0.048

—

0.6

0.136

—

1.7

MA and HMA

NB and HNB

MC, HMC, NC, HNC, PC, PCC, LC and HLC

Coil
Amperes

External Series
Resistance (Ohms)

Total
VA

Coil
Amperes

External Series
Resistance (Ohms)

Total
VA

Coil
Amperes

External Series
Resistance (Ohms)

Total
VA

600 AC

0.012

50,000

7.2

0.016

35,000

9.6

—

—

—

480 AC

0.013

30,000

6.3

0.013

30,000

6.3

—

—

—

240 AC

0.013

—

3.2

0.013

—

3.2

—

—

—

208 AC

0.018

—

3.8

0.018

—

3.8

—

—

—

120 AC

0.023

—

2.8

0.023

—

2.8

0.5

—

6

60 AC

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

48 AC

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

24 AC

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

250 DC

0.013

16,500

3.3

0.013

16,500

3.3

—

—

—

125 DC

0.013

6500

1.7

0.013

6500

1.7

—

—

—

60 DC

0.013

1500

0.8

—

—

—

—

—

—

48 DC

0.012

600

0.6

0.012

600

0.6

—

—

—

24 DC

0.02

—

0.6

0.023

—

0.6

—

—

—

12 DC

0.048

—

0.6

0.048

—

0.6

—

—

—

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-75

3
1
2
3
4
5
6

Alarm Switch Contact
Rating (Non-Inductive)
●

●

9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Replacement Capabilities

Alarm Switch
Availability: EB through PC.
For light or alarm indication
when breaker trips. Does
not function with manual
operation. Automatically
resets when breaker is
relatched. Standard leads
extend 18.00 inches outside
of breaker. Longer leads
may be specified. Not
field mountable.

7
8

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

●

MC, HMC, LA, LAB, HLA,
LC, HLC: 10A, 120 Vac;
5A, 240 Vac
EB, EHB, FB, HFB:
5A, 120 Vac
All other breakers:
10A, 120–240 Vac

Auxiliary Switch
For auxiliary control circuits.
Miniature switches mount
within breaker. Commonly
used for remote indication
of open or closed breaker
and electrically interlocking
component control circuits.
“A” contacts are closed
when breaker is closed.
“B” contacts are open when
breaker is closed. Standard
leads extend 18.00 inches
outside of breaker. Longer
leads may be specified.

Factory-Mounted
Auxiliary Switches
All of the above auxiliary
switches can be specified
for factory mounting at the
same price as listed for the
kit. These attachments have
the leads out the side of the
breaker and are UL Listed
when factory mounted
unless other non-UL Listed
modifications are used
(except as noted).
Switch with 2A-2B
Contacts

Switch Schematic

Note: Right-hand mounting
standard for EB, EHB, FB, HFB,
JB, KB and HKB. All others are
left-hand mounting as standard
unless otherwise specified.

Red Lead

Factory-mounted switches
only can be supplied for the
following breaker:
●

Black Lead

JB, LBB, LAB, JA, DA, FB l
magnetic only 2m and HFB
magnetic only 2m

Blue Lead

Alarm Switch
Breaker
Frame

Normal
Pole Mounting

Contact Operation
(Specify Type Desired)

DA 1

Left

Make or break

EB 1, EHB 1, FB 1, HFB 23

Mechanism

Make or break

JA 1, KA 1, LB 1, LBB 1, HKA, HLB

Left

Make or break

JB 1, KB 1, HKB 1

Left

Make or break

LAB 1, LA 1, MA 1, NB 1, HLA, HMA, HNB

Left

Make or break

LC 1, HLC

Left 4

Make or break

MC 1, HMC

Left only 4

NC

1,

HNC

Left only

Make or break

4

Make or break

PB

Left

Make or break

PC, PCC

Left 45

Make or break

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.
Auxiliary Switch Attachment Kits for Field Mounting 678
Maximum
Breaker
Type
k

9

For Left-Hand Mounting

For Right-Hand Mounting

AC Voltage
Rating j

Non-inductive
Amperes

1A-1B

2A-2B

1A-1B

2A-2B

240

5

4979D06G03

4979D06G09

4979D06G03

4979D06G08

JA, KA, DA, HKA, LB

480

10

458D067G03

—

458D067G08

—

LBB, HLB

240

5

—

656D527G01 2

—

656D527G09 2

JB, KB, HKB

480

10

2600D97G03

—

2600D97G08

—

17

JB, KB, HKB

240

5

—

2609D45G03 9

—

2609D45G08 9

LA, LAB, HLA

480

10

655D555G12

655D555G13

655D555G05

655D555G06

18

MA, HMA

480

10

458D013G12

458D013G13

458D013G05

458D013G06

NB, HNB

480

10

4980D16G12

4980D16G13

4980D16G05

4980D16G06

19

PB, PA

480

10

2602D32G11

2602D32G12

2602D32G14

2602D32G15

MC, HMC, MCG, HMCG

480

6 (10 at 24)

1371D72G03

1371D72G06

—

—

20

NC, HNC, NCG, HNCG

480

6 (10 at 24)

1372D39G03

1372D39G06

—

—

PC, PCC, PCG, PCCG

480

6 (10 at 24)

1372D35G03

1372D35G06

—

—

LC, HLC, LCG, HLCG

480

6 (10 at 24)

1371D11G03

1371D11G06

—

—

16

Note: Right-hand mounting
standard for EB, EHB, FB, HFB,
JB, KB and HKB. All others are
left-hand mounting as standard
unless otherwise specified.

21

EB, EHB, FB, HFB

Notes
1 Alarm switches are no longer available
for these frames.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Not available for magnetic only,
ambient compensating, or breakers
with undervoltage release.
4 When alarm switch is used in
conjunction with auxiliary switch,
the auxiliary switch is rated 250 Vac,
5A maximum.

22
23
24

5

6
7

8

Except when other attachments are
used, must be mounted in right pole.
Not for use on molded-case switches.
All switches are multiples of 1A-1B with
a common electrical connection (see
diagram above right).
Field mounting voids UL listing of breaker
except on LA, HLA, MA, HMA, NB,
HNB, KB, HKB, KA, HKA, LB, HLB and
SELTRONIC breakers.

9

j
k
l

m

These accessories are no
longer available.
For DC applications, refer to factory.
Thermal-magnetic only.
Auxiliary switches are no longer
available for these frames.
Right-hand mounting only.

25
V12-T3-76

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.

A. Walking Beam Type

B. Sliding Bar Type
(Field Mountable)

Center Studs

1
2

Moisture-Fungus-Corrosion
Treatment
Availability: EB through PC.
Treatment can be provided
to meet customer’s
specific atmospheric
conditions. Moisturefungus treating material
used meets JAN-T-152;
treatment meets
MIL-V-173a. Requests
and orders should specify
government specifications
or conditions to be met.
Note: Not UL Listed.

Mechanical Interlocks (A-C)
For mechanically interlocking
a pair of breakers so that only
one may be closed at one
time, but both may be open
simultaneously.
Note: Not UL Listed.

3
Sliding Bar Type

4

Availability: HFB through PC.
Walking Beam

Availability: EB through PC.
Mounts on panel (not
included) at rear of breaker.
Standard breaker spacing:
center to center; LAB, LA,
LC, HLC, MA, MC, NB, NC,
HLA, HMA, HMC, HNB and
HNC 8.50-inch center to
center; PB, PC and PCC
12.25-inch center to center;
DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB
and HLB 5.75 inch center
to center; EB, EHB, FB,
JB, KB, HFB and HKB
4.375 inch center to center.
Order as a set of two
special factory drilled
breakers and one walking
beam interlock. Specify
breaker type, panel
thickness and center
to center dimension
of breakers.
Note: Not UL Listed. 2000A
maximum for PB breaker. Not
available on drawout breakers.

Mounts on panel (not included)
fitting over front of breakers.
Standard breaker spacing:
HLC, HLA, HMA, HMC, HNB
and HNC 8.50-inch center
to center; HKA and HLB
5.75-inch center to center;
HFB 4.1875-inch center
to center.
C. Kirk Key Interlock

Kirk Key Interlock

Availability: EB through PC.
Permits interlocking of two
breakers or one breaker
with other devices. Before
breaker can be closed,
key must be inserted and
turned in breaker interlock.
Breaker must be opened
before key can be
removed. It can then be
inserted in interlock or
other devices to permit
their closure. Requests and
orders should completely
outline interlocking
scheme, ultimate user
and address.

5

Center Studs

Availability: 600A frames
(LA) through (NB) 1200A
frames except SELTRONIC
and current limiting
breakers.

6

Provides connections for
dual voltage generators, so
that same trip unit can be
used for protection at both
voltages. At higher voltage,
the trip unit carries full load
current. At lower voltage,
half the current bypasses
the trip unit through the
center studs. Trip rating
cannot exceed 50% of
frame rating.

8

Field Discharge Switch
Availability: 400, 600A
frame (LA).
Breaker is used exclusively
to discharge the field of
a DC motor or generator,
usually through a resistor.
When the two outer
poles open, the center
pole closes.
Note: Not UL Listed.

7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Note: Not available on motor
operated breakers. (No CA,
LCL, FCL breakers.)

20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-77

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Motor Operators
Motor operators provide
complete remote control by
means of a pushbutton or a
similar pilot device.
Note: The pilot device must be
maintained contact type for EB,
EHB, FB, HFB, DA, JA, KA, JB,
KB, HKB and LB mechanisms,
momentary contact type for
all others.

Positive switching action is
accomplished by use of an
operating arm engaging the
breaker handle. The unit is
energized momentarily to
actuate the lever arm moving
it to either the ON or OFF
position. The control is broken
by an internal cutoff switch.
Means for emergency manual
operations is provided.

For LAB, LA, HLA Breakers

For EB, EHB, FB
and HFB

Motor operations are
available with motors
rated 120 Vac, 208 Vac
and 240 Vac.
Note: LA and larger available for
125 Vdc.

The 480V operators use a
120 Vac motor in conjunction
with a 480/240V to 120V
dual voltage transformer.
(On LA and larger operators,
the transformer is supplied
for separate mounting by
the customer.)
Note: The motor operator is
intended only for infrequent
operation in line with Underwriters
Laboratories endurance standards
for molded-case breakers.
Minimum 1 kVA transformer
is required for use with all
motor operations.

Back Mounting Plates
Breaker
Type

120, 208, 240,
480 Vac
Style Number

For DA, JA, KA, JB,
LB, LBB, HKA, HKB
and HLB Breakers

For MA, HMA, NB, HNB Breakers

For PB Breakers

Motor Operator Selection 12
Breaker
Type

Style Number—AC Voltage

EB, EHB, FB, HFB

656D148G11 656D148G04 656D148G02 656D148G13 —

—

DA, JA, KA, HKA

657D819G23 657D819G10 657D819G08 657D819G24 —

—

LB, LBB, HLB

657D819G25 657D819G16 657D819G14 657D819G26 —

—

LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC

2607D97G37 2607D97G40 2607D97G38 2607D97G39 2607D97G51

2607D97G42

MA, HMA, MC, HMC

5664D54G75 5664D54G78 5664D54G76 5664D54G77 5664D54G96

5664D54G81

NB, HNB, NC, HNC.
SPCB1200

1494D60G31 1494D60G32 1494D60G33 1494D60G34 1494D60G35

1494D60G36

PB, PC, PCC, PA,
SPCB2000

5661D52G01 5661D52G04 5661D52G02 5661D52G03 5661D52G17

—

120

208

Style Number—DC Voltage
240

480

125

24

Motor Data
Inrush Current,
Ampere (Peak)

Continuous
Current (rms)

Breaker
Type

Motor
Type

Hp

120V

208V

240V

120V

208V

240V

Operating
Time, Open
or Close

EB, EHB,
FB, HFB

Split-phase

1/75

10

4

5

2.3

1.17

1.65

1.5 seconds

DA, JA, KA,
JB, KB, LB, LBB,
HKB, HLB

Split-phase

1/50

14

6

7

3.5

1.6

1.75

1.5 seconds

LAB, LA, HLA

Reversing

—

8

5

4

—

—

—

12 cycles

MA, HMA, NB,
HNB, SPCB1200

Reversing

—

11

7

6

—

—

—

12 cycles

PB, PA,
SPCB2000

Reversing

—

20

12

11

—

—

—

10 cycles

Notes
1 AC voltage rated operators are UL Listed as recognized components.
2 See Dimension Sheet 29-170.

EB, EHB, FB, HFB

503C707G01

DA, JA, KA, LB, HLB

503C981G01

V12-T3-78

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

21
22
23
24
25

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Drawout Frame
These drawout frames are
for use with standard threepole Cutler-Hammer moldedcase circuit breakers. They
consist of two separate
parts: stationary mounting
frame and movable carrier
frame. Slide rails are
drawer-type, and a screw
mechanism is used to
engage or withdraw the
movable carrier frame.
The drawout frames have three
positions: connected, test and
disconnected. The frames do
not include a safety tripping
interlock or secondary
contacts. These are optional
items and may be ordered at
additional cost.
Breakers mounted in the
drawout frames can be
equipped with standard
breaker accessories including
shunt trip, undervoltage
release, auxiliary switch,
alarm switch and motor
operator.
Optional Features
Safety Interlock
This feature trips the breaker
as the movable carrier frame
is withdrawn, and must be
factory installed. Order
as follows.
Note: Safety interlock not
available on MC, NC, HMC,
HNC, LC and HLC.

For LA, MA and
NB Breakers
Order standard stationary
mounting frame. Order
breaker and movable carrier
frame assembled with
safety interlock.

Drawout Frame

Selection Data 123
Stationary Mounting Frame
Style Number

Movable Carrier Frame
Style Number

HLA600, HLC600, LA600, LD, HLD

2603D84G01

2608D35G06

HMA, HMC, MDL, HMDL

2603D85G01

2608D34G10

HNB, HNC, ND, HND

2603D85G01

2608D34G08

PB, PC, PCC 2000A

2601D18G04

Order by description 4

PB 2500A, PC, PCC 2500A and 3000A

2601D18G05

Order by description 4

4

Notes
1 These units are UL Listed.
2 Safety interlock not available on MC, NC,
HMC, HNC, LC and HLC.
3 SELTRONIC circuit breakers with built-in
ground fault require a special breaker
frame with leads out the side in place
of standard terminal block. Order by
description the breaker frame and carrier
as one assembly.
4 Factory installed only.

5

Ordering Information
Note: SELTRONIC circuit
breakers with built-in ground fault
require a special breaker frame
with leads out the side in place of
standard terminal block. Order by
description the breaker frame and
carrier as one assembly.

Standard Installation
Order one stationary
mounting frame and one
movable carrier frame.
Order breakers without
terminals or rear connectors.
Order any attachments
desired (shunt trip,
undervoltage release, etc.)
Order secondary contacts
as required:
●

●

●

●

1

Breaker
Type

A shunt trip, an undervoltage release or an
alarm switch requires
two contacts
A 1A-1B auxiliary switch
requires three contacts
A motor operator requires
a maximum of four
contacts
Others as required

With Safety Interlock
Order stationary mounting
frame and movable carrier
frame as directed under
optional features.
Racking Crank
A special crank to engage or
withdraw the moving portion
of the drawout. A standard
0.50-inch hex socket with
extension can be used for
this purpose.

2
3

6
7
8
9

Racking Crank

10

Style Number

11

765A767G01

Cell Switches Mounted
on Drawout Frames,
All Ratings
Up to four switches can be
provided. Order by description.

12
13

Each switch provides
NO and NC contact that
transfers before reaching
the test position when being
withdrawn, and after the test
position when being racked
in. Contact factory for pricing.

14
15
16
17
18
19

Secondary Contacts
These are used to disconnect
auxiliary circuits when
attachments such as shunt
trip or motor operator are
used. Available in multiples
of four contacts with a
maximum of 24 contacts for
the LA 600 or 32 contacts for
the MA and NB. They must
be factory mounted. Order
by description as similar to
stationary or moving frame
and specify number of
contacts required.

20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-79

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Panelboard “Only”
Replacement Breaker
Selection Guide

■

Panelboard “Only”
replacement breakers
are generally for use as
replacement for out-ofproduction panelboard
branch circuit breakers
where both physical and
electrical interchangeability
is required. Where possible,
consideration should be
given to application of either
current Series C or Series G
circuit breakers.

120 Vac
240 Vac
Breaker
Type
Amperes Sym. Asym. Sym.
Asym.

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.
Panelboard “Only” Replacement Breaker Selection Guide
Panelboard Replacement Breaker Interrupting Ampere Rating

For additional information,
consult the charts on
Pages V12-T3-84 and
V12-T3-85 or contact your
local Eaton Field Sales
office or the Breaker
Service Centers.
Replacement Chart 1
Current
Panelboard
Circuit
Breaker
Type

Out-ofVac
Production (50/60 Hz)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
240 480 600

REA 1

EA 1

■

RE

E1

■

REH

EH 1

RFA 1

FA 1

RHFA

HFA

1

F1

RF

J2

■

RK 1

K2

■

RHK

HK 2

■

RKL 1

KL 2

■

RHKL

HKL 2

■

18

RLM

RHLM

HLM

19

HLA

JK 2

■

HLA 1

JKL 2

■

20

LM

2

RE

15–100

REA

■

23
24

480 Vac

Sym.

Asym.

Sym.

Asym.

Sym.

600 Vac
Asym.

125
(Single-Pole)

250 Vdc

—

10,000

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

—

7500 7500

7500

7500

—

—

—

—

—

—

5000

5000

15–20

—

—

—

10,000

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

—

REA

15–100

7500 7500

7500

7500

—

—

—

—

—

—

5000

5000

REH

15–100

—

—

18,000

20,000

10,000

10,000

14,000

15,000

—

—

—

10,000

RF

15–100

—

—

18,000

20,000

—

—

14,000

15,000

14,000

15,000

—

10,000

RFA

15–150

—

—

18,000

20,000

—

—

14,000

15,000

14,000

15,000

—

10,000

RHF

15–100

—

—

65,000

75,000

—

—

25,000

30,000

18,000

20,000

—

20,000

RHFA

15–100

—

—

65,000

75,000

—

—

25,000

30,000

18,000

20,000

—

20,000

RJ

70–225

—

—

22,000

25,000

—

—

18,000

20,000

14,000

15,000

—

10,000

HLA

70–225

—

—

42,000

50,000

—

—

30,000

35,000

22,000

25,000

—

20,000

HLA

125–400

—

—

42,000

50,000

—

—

30,000

35,000

22,000

25,000

—

20,000

RK

70–225

—

—

42,000

50,000

—

—

22,000

25,000

22,000

25,000

—

10,000

RKL

125–400

—

—

42,000

50,000

—

—

30,000

35,000

22,000

25,000

—

20,000

RLM

125–800

—

—

42,000

50,000

—

—

30,000

35,000

22,000

25,000

—

20,000

RHK

70–225

—

—

65,000

75,000

—

—

35,000

40,000

25,000

30,000

—

20,000

RHKL

125–400

—

—

65,000

75,000

—

—

35,000

40,000

25,000

30,000

—

20,000

RHLM

125–800

—

—

65,000

75,000

—

—

35,000

40,000

25,000

30,000

—

20,000

—

RHF3100 is a newly
manufactured, three-pole,
100A trip panelboard
replacement breaker for an
out-of-production HF3100.
R

■

Designates new
panelboard “only”
replacement breaker.

HF Identifies the out-ofproduction circuit
breaker frame.
Number of poles.

100 Trip ampere rating.

22

277 (Single-Pole)

—

3

21

—

An Example:

HF

RJ

2

—

■

■

RHF

1

15–20

■

■

1

RE

Replacement of all out-ofproduction panelboard circuit
breakers are designated by
the easily identifiable addition
of an ”R“ prefix to the
out-of-production circuit
breaker catalog number
that they replace.

■

1

3

Notes:
1. Panelboard “only”
replacement circuit
breakers have noninterchangeable trip
units and the same
interrupting capacity
as the out-of-production
circuit breakers that
they replace.
2. The RE breaker has
off-center terminals
just like the E breaker
it is replacing.
3. For out-of-production
breakers, the “B” suffix
denotes 277 Vac rating
for the panelboard
replacement breaker.
(Example: RE3020B)
4. Some panelboard “only”
replacement breakers do
not have the same
physical dimensions or
mounting holes as the
breakers that they
replace. For example, the
types REH and RHFA are
6.00 inches in length
and the breakers that
they replace, EH and HFA,
are 6.50 inches in length.

Mounting hardware
is provided with each
breaker to resolve these
differences, and must be
installed to ensure a
proper fit.
5. Panelboard “only”
replacement breakers
can be installed in the
following styles of out-ofproduction Westinghouse
panelboards:
6. ABH
A2B
NHEB
NA1B
NA1B-LX
NDP

NEB
NHDP
NH1B
NLAB-AB
NLAB-ABH

Notes
1 Last manufacture date—1974.
2 Last manufacture date—1967.
3 These frames are obsolete. For
replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114–
V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for
other panelboard solutions.

25
V12-T3-80

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

3

Panelboard “Only” Replacement Circuit Breaker Guide—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker)

1

Maximum Amperes
Description

100A

225A

2

Current Design
Panelboard ”only“
replacement circuit breakers
These circuit breakers, when used in a
panelboard, are direct replacements for
the circuit breakers listed below both
electrically and physically.

RE 1, REA 2

REH

RFA 3, RHFA

RF 4, RHF

3
4
5
6
7

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13
Height: 9.38
Depth: 3.81

EH

FA, HFA

F, HF

8
9

Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
These circuit breakers
are no longer manufactured
These circuit breakers, when used
in a panelboard, are directly replaced
by the circuit breakers listed above.
*Indicates last date of manufacture.

E, EA

10
11
*1974

*1974

*1974

*1974

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.50
Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13
Height: 6.50
Depth: 3.38

Width: 4.13
Height: 9.38
Depth: 3.81

12
13

Notes
1 Obsolete—no replacement.
2 Obsolete—use REH (available in three-pole only).
3 Obsolete—use RHFA (available in three-pole only).
4 Obsolete—use RHF (available in three-pole only).

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-81

3
1
2
3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Panelboard “Only” Replacement Circuit Breaker Guide—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker), continued
Maximum Amperes
225A

400A

400A

800A

RJ

RK 1, RHK

RKL 2, RHKL

RLM 3, RHLM

Width: 8.25
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 15.50
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 22.00
Depth: 5.50

KL, HKL

LM, HLM

Current Design

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
J

K, HK

13
14
15
16
17
18

*1967

*1967

*1967

*1967

Width: 8.25
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 15.50
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.06

Width: 8.25
Height: 22.00
Depth: 5.50

19

Further Information
Publication Number

Description

20

IL 15558

Mounting information for the RE, REA breakers

IL 15559

Mounting information for the RF, RHF breakers

21

IL 15562

Mounting information for the REH, RFA, RHFA breakers

IL 15563

Mounting information for the RJ breaker

22

IL 15564

Mounting information for the RK, RHK breakers

IL 15565

Mounting information for the RKL, RHKL breakers

23

IL 15566

Mounting information for the RLM, RHLM breakers

24

Notes
1 Obsolete—use RHK (available in three-pole only).
2 Obsolete—use RHKL (available in three-pole only).
3 Obsolete—use RHLM (available in three-pole only).

25
V12-T3-82

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products
and services. 1
Type REA, Single-, Two- and Three-Pole,
Type REA
240 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
Continuous
Ampere
Rating at 40°C

Type REH

Single-Pole,
120 Vac

Two-Pole,
240 Vac

Three-Pole,
240 Vac

Maximum Amperes

Wire Type

Wire Range

Style Number 2

1
2

Standard Pressure Type Terminals
20 (EB, EHB)

Al/Cu

#14–#10

624B100G14

100

Al/Cu

#14–1/0

624B100G02

150

Al/Cu

#4–4/0

624B100G17

10

REA1010

—

—

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

15

REA1015

REA2015

REA3015

50

Al/Cu

#14–#4

624B100G10

20

REA1020

REA2020

REA3020

100

Al/Cu

#4–4/0

624B100G17

25

REA1025

REA2025

REA3025

30

REA1030

REA2030

REA3030

40

REA1040

REA2040

REA3040

50

REA1050

REA2050

REA3050

60

REA1060

REA2060

REA3060

70

REA1070

REA2070

REA3070

80

REA1080

REA2080

REA3080

90

REA1090

REA2090

REA3090

100

REA1100

REA2100

REA3100

Type REH, Single-, Two- and Three-Pole,
480 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
Continuous
Ampere
Rating at 40°C

Type RE

Catalog Number

Terminals

Catalog Number
Single-Pole,
277 Vac

Two-Pole,
480 Vac

Three-Pole,
480 Vac

10

REH1010

—

—

5

REH1015

REH2015

REH3015

20

REH1020

REH2020

REH3020

25

REH1025

REH2025

REH3025

30

REH1030

REH2030

REH3030

40

REH1040

REH2040

REH3040

50

REH1050

REH2050

REH3050

60

REH1060

REH2060

REH3060

70

REH1070

REH2070

REH3070

80

REH1080

REH2080

REH3080

90

REH1090

REH2090

REH3090

100

REH1100

REH2100

REH3100

5

All accessories and modifications available for Replacement
Breakers Types EB, EHB and FB are also available for
Panelboard Replacement Breakers Types RE, REH, RFA,
RF, RHF, REA and RHFA.

6

For accessories and modifications, refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.
Terminals
See table on Page V12-T3-83.
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog number for breakers to be used in
50°C ambients. Same price as standard 40°C breakers.
Note: Not UL Listed.
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on
Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for other panelboard solutions.
2 Package of three.

Two-Pole,
240 Vac

Three-Pole,
240 Vac

10

RE1010

—

—

15

RE1015

RE2015

RE3015

20

RE1020

RE2020

RE3020

25

RE1025

RE2025

RE3025

30

RE1030

RE2030

RE3030

40

RE1040

RE2040

RE3040

50

RE1050

RE2050

RE3050

60

RE1060

RE2060

RE3060

70

RE1070

RE2070

RE3070

80

RE1080

RE2080

RE3080

90

RE1090

RE2090

RE3090

100

RE1100

RE2100

RE3100

7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Catalog Number
Single-Pole,
120 Vac

4

Accessories and Modifications

Type RE, Single-, Two- and Three-Pole,
240 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
Continuous
Ampere
Rating at 40°C

3

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-83

3
1

■

Replacement Capabilities

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Panelboard Replacement Circuit Breakers (Includes Terminals on Load Side Only)
Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40°C

2
3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Catalog Number
Two-Pole, 600 Vac

Three-Pole, 600 Vac

Type RFA Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
Type RFA

15

RFA2015

RFA3015

20

RFA2020

RFA3020

25

RFA2025

RFA3025

30

RFA2030

RFA3030

5

35

RFA2035

RFA3035

40

RFA2040

RFA3040

6

50

RFA2050

RFA3050

60

RFA2060

RFA3060

7

70

RFA2070

RFA3070

80

RFA2080

RFA3080

8

90

RFA2090

RFA3090

100

RFA2100

RFA3100

9

125

RFA2125

RFA3125

150

RFA2150

RFA3150

4

10

Type RF

Type RF Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
15

RF2015

RF3015

11

20

RF2020

RF3020

25

RF2025

RF3025

12

30

RF2030

RF3030

35

RF2035

RF3035

40

RF2040

RF3040

50

RF2050

RF3050

60

RF2060

RF3060

70

RF2070

RF3070

80

RF2080

RF3080

90

RF2090

RF3090

100

RF2100

RF3100

13
14
15
16

Type RHFA

Type RHFA Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
15

RHFA2015

RHFA3015

17

20

RHFA2020

RHFA3020

25

RHFA2025

RHFA3025

18

30

RHFA2030

RHFA3030

35

RHFA2035

RHFA3035

19

40

RHFA2040

RHFA3040

50

RHFA2050

RHFA3050

20

60

RHFA2060

RHFA3060

70

RHFA2070

RHFA3070

21

80

RHFA2080

RHFA3080

90

RHFA2090

RHFA3090

22

100

RHFA2100

RHFA3100

125

RHFA2125

RHFA3125

23

150

RHFA2150

RHFA3150

Note
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for other panelboard solutions.

24
25
V12-T3-84

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

■

3

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Panelboard Replacement Circuit Breakers (Includes Terminals on Load Side Only)
Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40°C

1

Catalog Number
Two-Pole, 600 Vac

Three-Pole, 600 Vac

2
3

Type RHF Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
Type RHF

Type RJ

Type RK

Type RKL

15

RHF2015

RHF3015

20

RHF2020

RHF3020

25

RHF2025

RHF3025

30

RHF2030

RHF3030

40

RHF2040

RHF3040

50

RHF2050

RHF3050

60

RHF2060

RHF3060

70

RHF2070

RHF3070

80

RHF2080

RHF3080

90

RHF2090

RHF3090

100

RHF2100

RHF3100

8
9

4
5
6
7

Type RJ Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
70

RJ2070

RJ3070

90

RJ2090

RJ3090

100

RJ2100

RJ3100

125

RJ2125

RJ3125

150

RJ2150

RJ3150

175

RJ2175

RJ3175

200

RJ2200

RJ3200

225

RJ2225

RJ3225

225 MCS

RJ2225K

RJ3225K

10
11
12
13

Type RK Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
70

RK2070

RK3070

90

RK2090

RK3090

100

RK2100

RK3100

125

RK2125

RK3125

150

RK2150

RK3150

175

RK2175

RK3175

200

RK2200

RK3200

225

RK2225

RK3225

225 MCS

RK2225K

RK3225K

14
15
16
17
18

Type RKL Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
125

RKL2125

RKL3125

150

RKL2150

RKL3150

175

RKL2175

RKL3175

200

RKL2200

RKL3200

225

RKL2225

RKL3225

250

RKL2250

RKL3250

300

RKL2300

RKL3300

350

RKL2350

RKL3350

400

RKL2400

RKL3400

400 MCS

RKL2400K

RKL3400K

19
20
21
22

Note
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for other panelboard solutions.

23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-85

3
1

■

Replacement Capabilities

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Panelboard Replacement Circuit Breakers (Includes Terminals on Load Side Only)
Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40°C

2
3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Catalog Number
Two-Pole, 600 Vac

Three-Pole, 600 Vac

Type RLM Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
Type RLM

125

RLM2125

RLM3125

150

RLM2150

RLM3150

175

RLM2175

RLM3175

200

RLM2200

RLM3200

5

225

RLM2225

RLM3225

250

RLM2250

RLM3250

6

275

RLM2275

RLM3275

300

RLM2300

RLM3300

7

350

RLM2350

RLM3350

400

RLM2400

RLM3400

8

500

RLM2500

RLM3500

600

RLM2600

RLM3600

9

600 MCS

RLM2600K

RLM3600K

700

RLM2700

RLM3700

800

RLM2800

RLM3800

4

10

Type RHK

Type RHK Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic

11

70

RHK2070

RHK3070

90

RHK2090

RHK3090

12

100

RHK2100

RHK3100

125

RHK2125

RHK3125

150

RHK2150

RHK3150

175

RHK2175

RHK3175

200

RHK2200

RHK3200

225

RHK2225

RHK3225

225 MCS

RHK2225K

RHK3225K

13
14
15

Type RHKL

Type RHKL Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
125

RHKL2125

RHKL3125

16

150

RHKL2150

RHKL3150

175

RHKL2175

RHKL3175

17

200

RHKL2200

RHKL3200

225

RHKL2225

RHKL3225

18

250

RHKL2250

RHKL3250

300

RHKL2300

RHKL3300

19

350

RHKL2350

RHKL3350

400

RHKL2400

RHKL3400

20

400 MCS

RHKL2400K

RHKL3400K

Note
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for other panelboard solutions.

21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-86

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Panelboard Replacement Circuit Breakers (Includes Terminals on Load Side Only)
Type RHLM

1

Catalog Number

Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40°C

Two-Pole, 600 Vac

Three-Pole, 600 Vac

2
3

Type RHLM Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
125

RHLM2125

RHLM3125

150

RHLM2150

RHLM3150

175

RHLM2175

RHLM3175

200

RHLM2200

RHLM3200

225

RHLM2225

RHLM3225

250

RHLM2250

RHLM3250

275

RHLM2275

RHLM3275

300

RHLM2300

RHLM3300

325

RHLM2325

RHLM3325

350

RHLM2350

RHLM3350

400

RHLM2400

RHLM3400

450

RHLM2450

RHLM3450

500

RHLM2500

RHLM3500

550

RHLM2550

RHLM3550

600

RHLM2600

RHLM3600

600 MCS

RHLM2600K

RHLM3600K

700

RHLM2700

RHLM3700

800

RHLM2800

RHLM3800

Accessories and
Modifications
All accessories and
modifications available for
replacement breakers types
KA, LA and MA are also
available for panelboard
replacement breakers types
RJ, RK, RKL, RLM, RHK,
RHKL and RHLM.
For additional accessories
and modifications, refer to
Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.
Terminals

50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for breakers to be
used in 50°C ambients.
Same price as standard
40°C breakers.
Note: Not UL Listed.

Special Breakers
Magnetic only (includes
load terminals). Available
for all ampere ratings for
two- and three-pole RJ,
RK, RKL, RLM, RHK, RHKL
and RHLM.

RJ

TA225LA1

High magnetic moldedcase switches (K suffix) are
available to replace out-ofproduction non-automatic
breakers (N suffix).

RK

TA225LA1

Note: Not UL Listed.

RHK

TA225LA1

RKL

TA400LA1

Panelboard
Circuit
Breakers

RHKL

Terminals 2

RLM

TA700MA1 (for <600A)
TA800MA1 (for 700–800A)

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Panelboard and Switchboard
Replacement Breaker
Ordering Instructions

13

1. Choose the breaker
frame and amperage.

15

3. Call your local distributor
with catalog numbers
and request Eaton’s Free
Express Service.
Compatible with Panelboards
and Switchboards from:
Westinghouse Distribution
and Control Business Unit
1987–1998

1991–1998

1994–2000

14

2000–2009

2. Select the proper
connector kit (if needed).

TA400LA1

RHLM

4

16

2009–Present

Connector Kits for Pow-RLine 4 Panelboards and
Pow-R-Line C Switchboards
Breaker
Type

Catalog Number
Single
Twin

F-Frame

—

KPRL4FD

J-Frame

KPRL4JDS

KPRL4JDT

K-Frame

KPRL4KDS

KPRL4KDT

L-Frame

KPRL4LD

—

M-Frame

KPRL4MC

—

N-Frame

KPRL4ND

—

For further information,
reference Page V12-T3-168
in this catalog.
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For
replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114–
V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for
other panelboard solutions.
2 Packaged individually.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-87

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

■

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.

Replacement Capabilities
Cutler-Hammer motor
control center replacement
circuit breakers are newly
manufactured and tested
to the latest applicable
standards at the Eaton
molded-case circuit breaker
plant in Beaver, PA. This
plant has a long and wellrecognized tradition of
product safety, integrity
and quality.
The motor control center
replacement circuit breaker
solution eliminates the
need to consider alternative
approaches. Eaton
customers are ensured
that the high standards
of product quality and
reliability do not have to be
sacrificed when replacing
Westinghouse out-ofproduction circuit breakers.
All motor control center
replacement circuit breakers
are easily identified by the
prefix “RMC” added to the
out-of-production type
circuit breaker catalog
number they replace.

Replacement Motor Control Center Breakers

Motor Control Center Replacement Breaker Interrupting Ampere Ratings
Breaker Type
23

Amperes

240 Vac

480 Vac

600 Vac

250 Vac

Replacement Chart

RMCF

15–100

18,000

14,000

14,000

10,000

Current
MCC
Circuit
Breaker
Type

Out-ofProduction
Circuit
Breaker
Type 1

RMCFA 234

15–150

18,000

14,000

14,000

10,000

RMCHF 23

15–100

65,000

25,000

18,000

20,000

Volts AC
(50/60 Hz)
600

RMCHFA 234

15–150

65,000

25,000

18,000

20,000

RMCFA

FA

■

Example:

Example:

An RMCF3100 is a newly
manufactured, three-pole,
100A trip panelboard
replacement circuit breaker.
It replaces an out-ofproduction F circuit breaker.

RMC Designates new
motor control
center replacement
circuit breaker.

17

RMCHFA

HFA

■

RMCF

F

■

18

RMCHF

HF

■

19
20
21

F

Identifies the out-ofproduction circuit
breaker frame.

3

Number of poles.

100

Trip unit
ampere rating.

Contact 1-800-OLD-UNIT
for replacement or
Page V12-T3-91 for
Series C retrofit kits.

22
23
24

Notes
1 Last manufacture date—1974.
2 Motor control center replacement
breakers do not have the same
physical dimensions or mounting holes
as the breakers they replace. Types
RMCFA and RMCHFA are 6.00
inches long and the breakers they
replace, FA and HFA, are 6.50 inches
long. Types RMCF and RMCHF
are 6.00 inches long and the breakers
they replace, F and HF, are 9.375
inches long. A mounting plate is
provided with each breaker to resolve
these differences, and must be
installed to ensure a proper fit.
3 Motor control center replacement
circuit breakers have noninterchangeable trip units and the
same interrupting capacity as the
out-of-production circuit breakers
they replace.
4 RMCFA and RMCHFA two-pole
breakers are supplied in a three-pole
frame with current carrying parts
omitted from the center pole.

25
V12-T3-88

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

3

Types RMCFA, RMCF, RMCHFA and RMCHF—Motor Control Center Replacement
■

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.
Motor Control Center Replacement Circuit Breakers
Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40°C

Type RMCFA

Type RMCF

1

1

2

Catalog Number
Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

3

Type RMCFA—15–100A Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
15

—

RMCFA2015

RMCFA3015

20

—

RMCFA2020

RMCFA3020

25

—

RMCFA2025

RMCFA3025

30

—

RMCFA2030

RMCFA3030

35

—

RMCFA2035

RMCFA3035

40

—

RMCFA2040

RMCFA3040

50

—

RMCFA2050

RMCFA3050

60

—

RMCFA2060

RMCFA3060

70

—

RMCFA2070

RMCFA3070

80

—

RMCFA2080

RMCFA3080

90

—

RMCFA2090

RMCFA3090

100

—

RMCFA2100

RMCFA3100

9
10

4
5
6
7
8

Type RMCF—15–150A Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
15

—

RMCHF2015

RMCHF3015

20

—

RMCHF2020

RMCHF3020

25

—

RMCHF2025

RMCHF3025

30

—

RMCHF2030

RMCHF3030

35

—

RMCHF2035

RMCHF3035

40

—

RMCHF2040

RMCHF3040

50

—

RMCHF2050

RMCHF3050

60

—

RMCHF2060

RMCHF3060

70

—

RMCHF2070

RMCHF3070

80

—

RMCHF2080

RMCHF3080

90

—

RMCHF2090

RMCHF3090

100

—

RMCHF2100

RMCHF3100

125

—

RMCHF2125

RMCHF3125

150

—

RMCHF2150

RMCHF3150

11
12
13
14
15
16

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For more information, call 1-800-OLD-UNIT for Cutler-Hammer motor control solutions.

17

See Page V12-T3-91 for Series C retrofit kits.

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-89

3
1

■

Replacement Capabilities

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.
Motor Control Center Replacement Circuit Breakers
Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40°C

2
3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

1

Catalog Number
Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Type RMCHFA—15–100A Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
Type RMCHFA

15

—

RMCHFA2015

RMCHFA3015

20

—

RMCHFA2020

RMCHFA3020

25

—

RMCHFA2025

RMCHFA3025

30

—

RMCHFA2030

RMCHFA3030

5

35

—

RMCHFA2035

RMCHFA3035

40

—

RMCHFA2040

RMCHFA3040

6

50

—

RMCHFA2050

RMCHFA3050

60

—

RMCHFA2060

RMCHFA3060

7

70

—

RMCHFA2070

RMCHFA3070

80

—

RMCHFA2080

RMCHFA3080

8

90

—

RMCHFA2090

RMCHFA3090

100

—

RMCHFA2100

RMCHFA3100

9

125

—

RMCHFA2125

RMCHFA3125

150

—

RMCHFA2150

RMCHFA3150

4

10

Type RMCHF—15–100A Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
Type RMCHF

15

—

RMCHF2015

RMCHF3015

11

20

—

RMCHF2020

RMCHF3020

25

—

RMCHF2025

RMCHF3025

12

30

—

RMCHF2030

RMCHF3030

35

—

RMCHF2035

RMCHF3035

40

—

RMCHF2040

RMCHF3040

50

—

RMCHF2050

RMCHF3050

60

—

RMCHF2060

RMCHF3060

70

—

RMCHF2070

RMCHF3070

80

—

RMCHF2080

RMCHF3080

90

—

RMCHF2090

RMCHF3090

100

—

RMCHF2100

RMCHF3100

13
14
15
16

Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For more information, call 1-800-OLD-UNIT for Cutler-Hammer motor control solutions.

17

See Page V12-T3-91 for Series C retrofit kits.

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-90

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Technology Upgrades

Type W Series C Retrofit Kit

Series C Retrofit Kits
Series C Retrofit Kits are to
be used to upgrade existing
Type W and 5 Star motor
control center units by
changing out the old breakers
with new Series C models.
These kits can be applied to
both starter and feeder units.
Some of the breakers that
these kits will upgrade
include:
●

MCP, F, FA, FB, HFB, K, KA,
KB, HKB, L, LA, LB and
HLB breakers

●

●

Type W Series C Retrofit Kit

●

●

●

●

5 Star Series C Retrofit Kit

●

●

●

●

●

Series C device, 65 kA
(either HMCP or thermalmagnetic breaker)
Operating handle, including
tripped indication and
push-to-trip mechanism
Label stating that the MCC
unit has been retrofitted
with Series C device
suitable for 65 kA (similar
to UL quality label)
Templates for desired
frame size
Assembly instructions

Customer benefits:
●

●

●

Ease of ordering—one
catalog number for all
required parts
Series C technology—
higher AIC rating
All new components
associated with the
breaker, including new
stab assembly, operating
mechanism and door,
if required

●

The Type W Series C retrofit
kit includes:

5 Star Series C Retrofit Kit

The 5 Star Series C retrofit kit
includes:

310+ Electronic Trip Unit
The 310+ electronic trip unit
has advantages and upgraded
features over the Series C
310 electronic trip unit
as follows:

●

●
●
●

Series C device, 65 kA
(either HMCP or thermalmagnetic breaker)
Operating handle, including
tripped indication and
push-to-trip mechanism
Label stating that the MCC
unit has been retrofitted
with Series C device
suitable for 65 kA (similar
to UL quality label)
Templates for proper hole
placement for desired
frame size
Series C breaker mounting
hardware
New door and hardware
New stab assembly
Assembly instructions

●

●

Adjustable Ir continuous
current setting eliminates
the need for rating plugs
Cause of trip information
can be extracted from
the breaker
Zone selective interlocking
option for breaker
coordination
Ground fault alarm only
option to keep critical
equipment on-line when
a ground fault is present
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System™ to
improve worker safety

Note: Available only for the LG,
NG, RG/RD 310+ models.

The 310+ electronic trip unit
is available for the following
MCCB breakers:
●
●
●
●
●
●

Series C FDE
Series G JG
Series G LG
Series G NG
Series G RG
Series C RD (available
as a field retrofit kit)

Series C to Series G
Upgrades
The Series C 250A JD and
600A LD breakers are being
replaced by Series G 250A
JG and 600A LG breakers
respectively. There are
several advantages in
moving from these Series C
to Series G breakers.

3

Series G 250A JG Molded-Case
Circuit Breaker
●
Smaller breaker footprint
than Series C JD
●
Breaker is duel rated,
UL and IEC
●
Interruption ratings up to
200 kAIC at 480 Vac
●
Accessories are field
installable thru-cover
●
Now available with an
electronic, 310+ trip unit
●
Can accommodate the
ANSI C12.1 Power
Monitoring/Metering
Module (PM3)
Series G 600A LG Molded-Case
Circuit Breaker:
●
Smaller breaker footprint
Series C LD
●
Breaker is duel rated,
UL and IEC
●
Interruption ratings up
to 200 kAIC at 480 Vac
●
Accessories are field
installable thru-cover
●
Upgraded from 310
electronic trip unit to a
310+ electronic trip unit
●
Can accommodate the
ANSI C12.1 Power
Monitoring Metering
Module (PM3)
Advantages of 310+ Electronic
Trip Unit Technology Versus
the 310 Electronic Trip Unit:
●
Adjustable Ir continuous
current setting eliminates
the need for rating plugs
●
Cause of trip information
can be extracted from
the breaker
●
Zone selective interlocking
option for breaker
coordination
●
Ground fault alarm only
option to keep critical
equipment on-line when
a ground fault is present
●
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System to
improve worker safety
(not available in the JG
310+ electronic trip unit)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-91

3
1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

F10 Series C Retrofit Kit

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

F10 Series C Retrofit Kit

The F10 Series C retrofit
kit includes:
●

●

9
●

10
11
12

●

●

Series C device, 65 kA
(either HMCP or thermalmagnetic breaker)
Operating handle
mechanism, including
tripped indication
push-to-trip
Label stating that the MCC
unit has been retrofitted
with Series C device
suitable for 65 kA (similar
to UL quality label)
Templates for desired
frame size
Assembly instructions

13

Series C Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Interrupting Rating (kAIC)

Frame
Type

240V

480V

600V

Trip Rating
Amperes

Catalog
Number

HFD

100

65

25

15

HFD3015

HFD

100

65

25

20

HFD3020

HFD

100

65

25

25

HFD3025

HFD

100

65

25

30

HFD3030

HFD

100

65

25

40

HFD3040

HFD

100

65

25

50

HFD3050

HFD

100

65

25

60

HFD3060

HFD

100

65

25

70

HFD3070

HFD

100

65

25

80

HFD3080

HFD

100

65

25

90

HFD3090

HFD

100

65

25

100

HFD3100

HFD

100

65

25

125

HFD3125

HFD

100

65

25

150

HFD3150

FDC

200

100

35

15

FDC3015

FDC

200

100

35

20

FDC3020

FDC

200

100

35

25

FDC3025

FDC

200

100

35

30

FDC3030

FDC

200

100

35

40

FDC3040

FDC

200

100

35

50

FDC3050

FDC

200

100

35

60

FDC3060

FDC

200

100

35

70

FDC3070

FDC

200

100

35

80

FDC3080

FDC

200

100

35

90

FDC3090

FDC

200

100

35

100

FDC3100

FDC

200

100

35

125

FDC3125

FDC

200

100

35

150

FDC3150

HJD

100

65

25

175

HJD3175

HJD

100

65

25

200

HJD3200

HJD

100

65

25

225

HJD3225

16

HJD

100

65

25

250

HJD3250

JDC

200

100

35

175

JDC3175

17

JDC

200

100

35

200

JDC3200

JDC

200

100

35

225

JDC3225

18

JDC

200

100

35

250

JDC3250

HKD

100

65

35

300

HKD3300

19

HKD

100

65

35

350

HKD3350

14
15

20
21

HKD

100

65

35

400

HKD3400

KDC

200

100

50

300

KDC3300

KDC

200

100

50

350

KDC3350

KDC

200

100

50

400

KDC3400

22
23
24
25
V12-T3-92

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Series C Motor Circuit Protectors
Starter
Size

Series C Retrofit Kit Catalog Numbering System

Magnetic Trip
Range Amperes

Continuous
Rating Amperes

Catalog
Number

0

9–30

3

HMCP003A0

0

21–70

7

HMCP007C0

0

45–150

15

HMCP015E0

0

40–60

25

HMCP025D0

1

90–300

30

HMCP030H1

2

80–120

50

HMCP050G2

2

150–500

50

HMCP050K2

2

115–170

70

HMCP070J2

2

210–700

70

HMCP070M2

3

160–240

100

HMCP100L3

3

300–1000

100

HMCP100R3

4

450–1500

150

HMCP150T4

4

750–2500

150

HMCP150U4

4, 5

350–700

250

HMCP250A5

5

450–900

250

HMCP250C5

5

500–1000

250

HMCP250D5

5

625–1250

250

HMCP250F5

5

750–1500

250

HMCP250G5

5

875–1750

250

HMCP250J5

5

1000–2000

250

HMCP250K5

5

1125–2250

250

HMCP250L5

5

1250–2500

250

HMCP250W5

5

500–1000

400

HMCP400D5

5

625–1250

400

HMCP400F5

5

750–1500

400

HMCP400G5

5

875–1750

400

HMCP400J5

5

1000–2000

400

HMCP400K5

5

1125–2250

400

HMCP400L5

5

1250–2500

400

HMCP400M5

5

1500–3000

400

HMCP400N5

5

1750–3500

400

HMCP400R5

5, 6

2000–4000

400

HMCP400X5

1

FT HMCP030H1 C 12 N
MCC Type
FT = Type W
FS = 5 Star
FR = F10
Device Catalog
Number

2
Device Panel
Modifications

D = With device
panel
N = No device panel

C = Copper lugs
for HMCP
L = Lugs for moldedcase breaker

Use tables.

Door Size
Height of door in inches,
6.00-inch increments

How to Order
Step 1: Select the correct Series C molded-case circuit breaker
from the table on Page V12-T3-92 or the Series C motor circuit
protector from the table on this page.
Step 2: Create a catalog number based on the MCC type,
device selected, modifications, door size and device panel.
Step 3: Select price from PL04304002E.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-93

3
1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

OPTIM 550 Trip Units for Upgrading Thermal/Magnetic Trips

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet™ and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 550 Only)
K-, L- and N-Frames
PowerNet
Communication Kit

2

The Cutler-Hammer
PowerNet communications
kit can be ordered to add
PowerNet communications
to an existing OPTIM 550
breaker in the field. An
18.00-inch wiring pigtail is
routed to the rear of the
breaker: two wires for
PowerNet and two wires
for 24 Vdc (45 mA load).
It is recommended that the
power supply be an “isolated
high quality” unit.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Digitrip OPTIM 550

Replacement of the
OPTIM 550 trip units and
the associated accessories
allows a customer to easily
upgrade an existing Series C,
K- or L-Frame molded-case
circuit breaker equipped
with a standard thermalmagnetic trip unit, without
the need to purchase a new
circuit breaker.

●

●

●

●

●

Key features and benefits
of the OPTIM 550 trip
unit include:

10 set points providing for
premium protection and
coordination
Cause-of-Trip indication
(LEDs and digital memory)
Load monitoring to provide
information for energy
management
Diagnostics to assist in
system troubleshooting
Communications and zone
interlocking options—field
or factory installed

OPTIM 550 Trip Units for Upgrading Thermal/Magnetic Trips
Maximum
Ampere Rating
(Sensor)

Catalog Number
Type of OPTIM 550 Trip Unit
LSI

LSIA

LSIG

KD, HKD, KDC, CKD and CHKD Breaker Frames

13

125

KEP3125T52

KEP3125T57

KEP3125T56

250

KEP3250T52

KEP3250T57

KEP3250T56

14

400

KEP3400T52

KEP3400T57

KEP3400T56

15

125

LEP3125T52

LEP3125T57

LEP3125T56

250

LEP3250T52

LEP3250T57

LEP3250T56

16

400

LEP3400T52

LEP3400T57

LEP3400T56

600

LEP3600T52

LEP3600T57

LEP3600T56

PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits
PowerNet

Zone Interlocking/
Ground 1

PowerNet and Zone
Interlocking/Ground 1

Factory
Install
Suffix

Catalog
Number

Factory
Install
Suffix

Catalog
Number

Factory
Install
Suffix

Catalog
Number

K-Frame

PN

ICK550K

ZG

ZGK550K

ZGP

ZGPK550K

L-Frame

PN

ICK550L

ZG

ZGK550L

ZGP

ZGPK550L

N-Frame

PN

ICK550N

ZG

ZGK550N

ZGP

ZGPK550N

Circuit
Breaker

Notes
1 Includes a ground fault alarm signal that can drive the ground fault alarm unit
(catalog number GFAU).
Instruction leaflet numbers (K) 29C506, (L) 29C897, (N) 29C898.

LD, HLD, LDC, CLD, CHLD and CLDC Breaker Frames

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-94

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Handle Mechanisms

1

■

Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
MCCB Handle Mechanism
Introduction
Eaton offers a broad range
of handle mechanisms for
molded-case circuit breakers.
Each of these has been
designed specifically for
safe, dependable operation
and ease of installation.

2
3
Vari-Depth Type—Page V12-T3-105
Flex-Shaft Type—Page V12-T3-107

5

Slide Plate Type—Page V12-T3-99

6

Handle mechanisms are
used in a wide variety of
applications including
enclosed molded-case circuit
breakers, control panels and
motor control centers.
Whether replacing a damaged
handle mechanism with a like
unit, switching from fuses
to circuit breakers in order to
limit downtime, or upgrading
to take advantage of the
many benefits associated
with applying communicating,
programmable molded-case
circuit breaker technology,
Eaton has the handle
mechanism solution
that is right for you.

4

7
8
9

Universal Rotary Type—
Page V12-T3-110
Type MC Motor Control—
Page V12-T3-103
Type SM Safety Handle—
Page V12-T3-101

10
11
12

Series C Rotary Type— Page V12-T3-109

13
14

G-Frame Vari-Depth

15

Type AMT Vari-Depth—
Page V12-T3-104

16
17
Universal Direct—Page V12-T3-111
G Direct—Page V12-T3-111

18
19
20

Euro IEC Direct—Page V12-T3-111

21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-95

3
1
2

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Handle Mechanism Selection and Availability Guide
Door Mounted
Circuit Breaker and
Switch Type

Flange Mounted

VariDepth

Series C 1
Rotary

Slide
Plate

MC

Series C 1
Flex Shaft

SM

AMT
Fixed Width

AMT
Vari-Depth

Series C Breakers

3

F-Frame/F HMCP 2

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

J-Frame/J HMCP

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

4

K-Frame/K HMCP

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

L-Frame/L HMCP

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

5

M-Frame

■

■

■

■

■

■

6

R-Frame

7

GB/GHB/GC/GHC/GD/GMCP

■

LA/LAB/HLA

■

■

■

■

■

■

8

LC/HLC/LCG

■

■

■

■

■

■

MA/HMA

■

■

■

■

■

MC/HMC

■

■

■

■

■

NB/HNB

■

■

■

■

■

NC/HNC

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

9
10
11

■

N-Frame

■
■

■
■

■

Other Industrial Breakers

■

PB

■

PC/PCC
FB TRI-PAC

■

■

LA TRI-PAC

■

■

■

■

12

NB TRI-PAC

■

■

■

■

13

FCL

■

■

■

LCL

■

■

■

14

EB/EHB/FB/HFB

■

■

■

■

■

■

JA/KA/HKA/DA/LB/LBB/HLB

■

■

■

■

■

■

15

Disconnect Switches
DE-ION® 30, 60, 100

■

■

16

DS 30, 60, 100, 200

■

■

■

■

■

■

DS 400, 600

■

17

Visi-Flex Model “T” 30, 60, 100

■

18

■

PB TRI-PAC

■

Notes
1 For application only with Series C molded-case circuit breakers and HMCPs.
2 Series C F-Frame includes EHD, ED, FDB, FD, HFD and FDC designations.

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-96

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Vari-Depth Type
General purpose vari-depth
handle mechanisms are
suitable for use with Type 1
fabricated enclosures. They
are designed for use with
breakers or disconnect
switches when used in deep
enclosures.

table are from the mounting
surface of the breaker or the
disconnect to the inside of
the enclosure cover.
Standard mechanisms do
not include an internal lockoff
device. Mechanisms with this
feature are, however, offered
as an optional item. The
internal lockoff provides a
means of padlocking the
breaker or the switch in
the OFF position while the
enclosure door is open.

Required for a standard
application are a padlockable
operating handle, a shaft and
a mechanism. Two variable
depth shafts are offered
to better cover the wide
range of depths of various
enclosures...these are
referred to in the table as the
standard and the long shaft.
The dimensions for panel
depth given in the following

ordered in place of the
standard handle.

1

The adapter bushing, a
component of the special
handle kit, may be ordered
separately.

2
Handle

3

6.5

4
Standard Shaft

5

10.0

6

These mechanisms may
also be used in conjunction
with Type 4, 7 and 9 cast
enclosures. When used
with these enclosures, the
special handle kits shown
as accessory items must be

Long Shaft

7

Mechanism

8
9

Vari-Depth Type

Vari-Depth Type Catalog Numbers
Mechanism 12

For Complete Applications,
Order Mechanism,
Handle and Shaft

10

Handle 3

Shaft

Standard–
(No Internal
Lockoff)
Style
Number

Special–
(With Internal
Lockoff)
Style
Number

Type 1, 3R, 12
(With
Hardware)
Style
Number

Standard
Panel
Depth

Standard
Style
Number

Long
Panel
Depth

Long
Style
Number

Circuit Breakers
F4

11
12

373D958G22

373D958G23

504C323G07

5–10-1/4

47A4446G36

10-1/2–14

47A4446G37

EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP

373D958G05

373D958G06

504C323G07

5–10-1/4

47A4446G36

10-1/2–14

47A4446G37

CA

458D493G20

458D493G21

504C323G07

4-3/4–9-3/4

47A4446G36

9-3/4–13-1/2

47A4446G37

Series C J-Frame and HMCP J

5092A62G03

5092A62G04

504C323G07

5-7/8–11-1/8

47A4446G36

11-1/8–14-7/8

47A4446G37

Series C K-Frame and HMCP K

5092A62G01

5092A62G02

504C323G07

5-7/8–11-1/8

47A4446G36

11-1/8–14-7/8

47A4446G37

Series C L-Frame and HMCP L

5092A62G05

5092A62G06

504C323G07

6-1/8–11-1/4

47A4446G36

11-1/4–15

47A4446G37

JA, KA, HKA, DA, LB, LBB, HLB

458D493G03

458D493G11

504C323G07

5-7/8–11-1/8

47A4446G36

11-1/8–14-7/8

47A4446G37

LA, HLA, LC, HLC

458D493G04

458D493G12

504C323G07

6-1/8–11-1/4

47A4446G36

11-1/4–15

47A4446G37

TRI-PAC FB

373D958G10

373D958G11

504C323G07

5–10-1/4

47A4446G36

10-1/4–14

47A4446G37

FCL

373D958G16

373D958G17

504C323G07

5–10-1/4

47A4446G36

10-1/4–14

47A4446G37

MA, HMA, MC, HMC, Series C
MD, MDS Frame (not MDL)

458D493G05

458D493G13

504C323G07

6-11/16–11-13/16

47A4446G36

11-13/16–15-9/16

47A4446G37

NB, HNB, NC, HNC

373D958G07

373D958G08

504C323G07

7-15/16–13-1/4

47A4446G36

12-15/16–16-15/16

47A4446G37

TRI-PAC LA

374D075G02

374D075G01

504C323G07

6-1/8–11-1/4

47A4446G36

11-1/4–15

47A4446G37

TRI-PAC NB

373D958G12

373D958G13

504C323G07

7-15/16–13-1/4

47A4446G36

12-15/16–16-15/16

47A4446G37

LCL

458D493G22

458D493G23

504C323G07

6-11/16–11-13/16

47A4446G36

11-13/16–15-9/16

47A4446G37

20
21

Series C F-Frame and HMCP

Circuit Breakers
47A4446G34

—

5

5-3/4–11

5

11–14-3/4

47A4446G37

Type DS 30, 60, 100A

4987D14G02

—

504C323G07

5-3/8–10-5/8

47A4446G36

10-3⁄/8–14-5/16

47A4446G37

Type DS 200A

4987D14G01

—

504C323G07

6-11/16–11-3/16

47A4446G36

10-7/8–14-7/8

47A4446G37

200A DE-ION

458D493G04

458D493G12

504C323G07

6-1/8–11-1/4

47A4446G36

11-1/4–15

47A4446G37

30, 60, 100A DE-ION

5

Notes
1 Includes hardware.
2 When used with plug-in adapter kits or rear-connected studs, special mounting hardware is required. Refer to Eaton.
3 UL File No. E56845 Vol. 1 Section 4.
4 Extra long shaft includes support bracket for Series C F-Frame with no internal lockoff. Order 373D958G24, which includes the mechanism, shaft and bracket. Order
handle separately. Panel depth 16-3/8–24-1/4.
5 Mechanism style includes a handle and a standard shaft. A long shaft may be ordered separately if required.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-97

13
14
15
16
17
18
19

22
23
24
25

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

1

Vari-Depth Type
Special Handles

2

Meet Type 4 sheet steel
requirements. These handles
are similar to standard
handles, except they include
an internal neoprene gasket.
Due to gasketing effect
between handle and housing,
handle will not indicate a
tripped position when used
with circuit breakers.

3
4
5
6
7

Handle Kits

UL File No. E56845 Vol. 1
Section 4.

Handle Kits

These kits are for use
with Type 4, 7 and 9 cast
enclosures. They include
a special operating handle,
mounting bolts and an adapter
bushing (bushing may be
purchased separately). Kits
may be used with standard
mechanisms and shafts.
Instruction drawing 314C809
applies for assembly.

Handle Kits

8

Description

Style Number

Standard finish

504C323G08

9

For Type 4, 9 enclosure

314C794G10

For Type 7 enclosure

314C794G09

Adapter bushing only

314C794G04

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-98

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Slide Plate Type
These compact slide plate
handle mechanisms are
especially designed for use
with AB DE-ION circuit
breakers and disconnect
switches when they are
mounted in a shallow
enclosure. They are
suitable for use on
Type 1 applications.
Because of the mechanisms’
simplified installation—
three mounting holes—and
preassembled construction,
these units are commonly
used where high volume,
standardized enclosures are
being fabricated.
The mechanism styles listed
on this page are for use on
enclosures that have covers
hinged on the right side. If
these mechanisms are used
on enclosures that have
covers hinged on the left
side, the door interlock will
not function.

Vertical and
Horizontal Mounting

Standard Slide Plate Mechanism Catalog Numbers
Vertical Mounting

Horizontal Mounting

1

Padlocks in
OFF Position
Style Number

Padlocks in
ON or OFF Position
Style Number

Padlocks in
OFF Position
Style Number

2

KL and HKL frame
MA, HMA, MC and HMC breaker
LA, HLA, LC and HLC breaker
JA, KA, HKA, DA, LB, LBB and HLB breaker
NB, HNB, NC and HNC breaker
JB, KB and HKB breaker
LCL breaker

314C386G01

314C386G08

314C386G04

3

EH breaker 2P with long handle
EH breaker 3P with long handle
F-Frame 2P
F- and HF-Frame 3P
Type AQB and NQB 100A frames and
Type PF 15–100A frame

314C386G02

Enclosure Cover
Hinged on Right
Circuit Breakers

4
5
314C386G09

314C386G05

6
7

EH standard 2P
314C386G03
EH standard 3P and FA magnetic only 2 and 3P
FA 2 and 3P thermal-magnetic
EB, EHB, FB, HFB 3P MCP, HMCP (0-4) 2P
FCL breaker

314C386G10

PB, TRI-PAC PB, PC, PCC, PCF

505C294G03

—

—

F-Frame Series C + HMCP-F

314C386G03

314C386G10

314C386G06

J-Frame Series C + HMCP-J
K-Frame Series C + HMCP-K

314C386G02

314C386G09

314C386G05

L-Frame Series C + HMCP-L, MDL

314C386G18

314C386G08

314C386G04

M-Frame Series C

314C386G01

314C386G08

314C386G04

R-Frame 1

505C294G03

—

—

225A TRI-PAC Type K
400A TRI-PAC Type KL
LA TRI-PAC
NB TRI-PAC

314C386G01

314C386G08

314C386G04

100A TRI-PAC

314C386G02

314C386G09

314C386G05

FB TRI-PAC

314C386G03

314C386G10

314C386G06

15

60–100A Visi-Flex

314C386G01

314C386G08

314C386G04

16

30A and Special 60A Visi-Flex

314C386G02

314C386G09

314C386G05

314C386G06

8
9

Series C Circuit Breakers

TRI-PAC switches

10
11
12
13
14

Visi-Flex Switches (Model T) 2

DE-ION Switches and Disconnect Switches
30–60A (long handle) DE-ION
100A (long handle) DE-ION
200A disconnect switch
200 DS switch

314C386G01

314C386G08

314C386G04

30–60A disconnect switch
100A disconnect switch

314C386G02

314C386G09

314C386G05

30, 60, 100A DS switch

314C386G03

314C386G10

314C386G06

400 and 60A DS switch

314C386G15

—

—

Notes
1 Does not padlock in OFF position. Type 3R version available as special. Contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center.
2 Handle mechanisms cannot be used on Visi-Flex switches with 200A fuse kits.

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-99

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Outdoor or Hazardous Type
This handle mechanism is
designed for use with
fabricated or cast, Type 3, 4
or 5 enclosures. A butterfly
cam type mechanism may
be used on enclosures with
either right- or left-hand
hinged covers or on
enclosures with bolted
covers. The mechanism
has a provision for padlocking.
Will accept up to three locks.
Assembly of this mechanism
is accomplished by welding
it to the enclosure door or
the cover. Refer to IL29C287
for drilling plan. For PB,
PC and RD, refer to
drawing 372D690.

9

Outdoor or Hazardous
Location Type

Mechanisms for Outdoor or Hazardous Locations
Complete Handle Mechanisms Type 3, 4, 5
Drilling Plan
Reference

Padlocks in
OFF Position
Style Number

Padlocks in ON or
OFF Position
Style Number

Series C F-Frame EB, EHB, FB, HFB

48A3656

48A3656G03

48A3656G04

JA, KA, LA, MA, HKA, HLA, HMA, LB, HLB

452D028

452D028G01

—

48A3656

48A3656G03

48A3656G04

Description
Circuit Breakers

DE-ION Switches
30, 60, 100A

Accessories
Door Interlock Kits
Description

Drilling Plan
Reference

Style
Number

3 point—for mechanisms, style numbers: 314C386G01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 08, 09, 10

208B624

28A2656G08

2 point—for PB mechanism, style number 505C294G03

372D690

1532990

Note: For use with slide plate mechanisms used in larger panels where regular interlock is not adequate.

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-100

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Type SM Safety Handle

Type SM Safety Handle Mechanism Catalog Numbers
Catalog Number

1

1

Right-Hand
Mounting
Enclosure
Cover Hinged
On Left

Left-Hand
Mounting
Enclosure
Cover Hinged
On Right

Series C—F-Frame, MCP, HMCP F, EB, EHB, FB, HFB breakers,
and Type DS 30, 60, 100A non-fusible switches

SM150R

SM150L

3

Type DS 30, 60, 100A fusible switches

SM100SFR

SM100SFL

4

FB TRI-PAC, FB breaker with current limiter, or Type FCL

SM101PR

SM101PL

30, 60, 100A DE-ION switches

SM100R

SM100L

DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB breakers

SM225R

SM225L

Series C—J-Frame, HMCP J

SM250JR

SM250JL

Series C—K-Frame, HMCP K

SM400KR

SM400KL

LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC breakers (400 and 600A)

SM400R

SM400L

Type SM safety handle
mechanism is designed
to prevent tampering by
unauthorized individuals
and provides the optimum
in personnel safety. When
properly applied, these
mechanisms conform
to Type 12 and J.I.C.
requirements, and are
well-suited for use by the
automotive and machine
tool industries.

Series C—L-Frame, HMCP L, MDL

SM600R

SM600L

Series C—M-Frame, MD, MDS

SM800R

SM800L

MA, HMA, MC, HMC breakers

SM800R

SM800L

TRI-PAC LA breaker

SM400PR

SM400PL

TRI-PAC NB

SM800PR

SM800PL

NB, HNB, NC, HNC breakers

SM1200R

SM1200L

Type DS 200A non-fusible switch

SM200SR

SM200SL

Type DS 200A fusible switch

SM200SFR

SM200SFL

Type LCL

SM400LCLR

SM400LCLL

Completely preassembled
in a rugged cast housing,
the Type SM safety handle
mechanism includes a
predrilled mounting plate
for simplified customer
installation. Standard handles
are 5.125 inches long and
can be padlocked in the OFF
position with as many as
three padlocks. A shorter
handle 3.875 inches long
can be supplied on SM100,
SM101 or SM150
mechanisms when specified.

Further Information

IL 13322

DH3R door hardware

All Type SM safety handle
mechanisms can be used on
any size enclosure. Order
handle mechanism from the
table at right, plus desired
door hardware for complete
application. Dress nameplate
required to meet automotive
specifications is available
from accessories section.

IL 13287

Electrical interlock

Handle Mechanism for Use With:

Enclosed Breaker with SM Handle

2

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Publication
Number

Description

IL 14439

F-Frame, EB, EHB, FB, FCL, HFB, MCP, FB-P, 30–100A DS switch

IL 29C274

J- and K-Frame

IL 29C284

L-Frame

IL 13282

JA, KA, JB, KB, LAB, LA, MA, NB, HLA, NB-P, 200A DS switch

IL 13327

DH1L door hardware

IL 13326

DH1R door hardware

IL 13325

DH2R door hardware

IL 13324

DH3L door hardware

13
14
15
16
17
18

Notes
1 Must be ordered with door hardware; if not, door-operated defeater kit is required.

19

Mechanisms for Type 4 Applications—Mechanisms with stainless steel parts and special gasketing can
be supplied. Order by description. 30% adder.

20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-101

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

1

Type SM Safety Handle
Door Hardware

2

Three choices of door hardware and an auxiliary handle are
offered to provide the best latching scheme for individual needs.
The door hardware is designed with a provision for padlocking,
and a coin-proof slot that requires the use of a tool to open the
door, for maximum security.

3
4

Auxiliary Latch Kits

Door Hardware

7

Description

Right Hand

Left Hand

With sliding latches for smaller
panels up to approximately
30.00 inches high

DH1R 1

DH1L 2

Style Number

Door hardware using sliding latches,
right- or left-hand mounting

656D669G01

Door hardware using roller latches,
right-hand mounting

370D801G04

Left-hand mounting

370D802G04

Electrical Interlock Kit

8
With 2-roller latches for
intermediate panels up to
approximately 40.00 inches high

9

DH2R 1

DH2L 2

Provides 1NC and 1NO contacts (SPDT switch) for use with
auxiliary circuits. Mounts to end of mechanism housing as shown.
Electrical Interlock Kit

10

Electrical Interlock Kit
Style Number
622B747G01

11

With 3-roller latches for larger
panels, approximately
40.00 inches and higher

12

DH3R 1

DH3L 2

Door Operated Interlock Defeater Kit

13

Auxiliary handle for
larger panels

14

DH4R 1

DH4L 2

Required when door hardware is not used; operates as door
closes. Additional method of securing door such as screw latch,
also required (to be supplied by box manufacturer).
Door Operated Interlock Defeater Kit

15

18

Auxiliary Latch Kits
Description

Catalog Number

6

17

Slide and
Roller Latches

Select desired hardware from the table below. Additional latches
can be ordered from accessories section if desired. Type 1, 12 only.

5

16

Provide an additional latch for use with applications where
2-point latching may not be adequate.

Style Number
623B214G02

Dress Nameplates
Required to meet automotive specifications. Mounts from inside
enclosure and covers operating mechanism mounting bolts,
making mechanism non-removable when enclosure door is closed.
Dress Nameplate

Notes
1 Enclosure cover hinged on left.
2 Enclosure cover hinged on right.

Dress Nameplate

19

Description

Style Number

For SM100, SM150 mechanisms

373D260G05

20

For SM200, and larger mechanisms

373D260G05

21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-102

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Type MC Motor Control

Type MC Motor Control Catalog Numbers

1

Catalog Number 23
Handle Mechanism 1
For Use With

Type 1
Enclosure

Type 12
Enclosure

Series C F-Frame HMCP F

SMCU150FD

CMCU150FD

EB, EHB, FB, HFB breakers and MCP (Size 0–4)

SMCU150FD

CMCU150FD

FB TRI-PAC

SMCU100FBP

CMCU100FBP

FCL breakers

SMCU100FCL

CMCU100FCL

30, 60,100A DS switch fusible, non-fusible

SMCU100DS

CMCU100DS

200A DS switch fusible, non-fusible

SMCU200DS

CMCU200DS

Mounting directly to the
front of the disconnect,
these mechanisms provide
positive operation and handle
indication. Both disconnect
and mechanism mount
simultaneously with
mounting hardware supplied
with the mechanism.
For security, the handle can
be padlocked in the OFF
position with up to three
0.375-inch hasp padlocks.
Also, the mechanism is
interlocked with the enclosure
door so that the disconnect
must be OFF before the
door can be opened. A
defeater is provided to
bypass this interlock.
Catalog numbers listed
include the mechanism,
mounting hardware and
door interlock clip.

3
4
5
6

225A Mechanism

Type MC handle mechanisms
are linear drive, fixed depth
mechanisms designed for
through-door mounting in
standardized or shallow depth
enclosures such as motor
control centers or enclosed
circuit breakers.

2

Series C J-Frame HMCP J

SMCU250JD

CMCU250JD

Series C K-Frame HMCP K, DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB

SMCU400KD

CMCU400KD

Breakers, Size 5 MCP (400A)

SMCU225KA

CMCU225KA

Series C L-Frame HMCP L, MDL

SMCU600LD

CMCU600LD

Series C M-Frame not MDL

SMCU800MA

CMCU800MA

LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC breakers (400 and 600A frame)

SMCU400LA

SMCU400LA

LA TRI-PAC

SMCU400LAP

SMCU400LAP

MA, HMA, MC, HMC Breakers (800A frame)

SMCU800MA

SMCU800MA

NB, HNB, NC, HNC Breakers (1200A frame)

SMCU1200NB

SMCU1200NB

LCL225 and 400

SMCU400LCL

SMCU400LCL

Series C L-Frame HMCP L

SMCU600LD

SMCU600LD

7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Further Information
Publication
Number

Description

IL 14572

F-Frame, EB, EHB, FB, MCP, HFB

IL 29C273

J- and K-Frame

IL 29C283

L-Frame

IL 14571

FB-P

IL 14938

JB, KB

IL 14573

30, 60, 100A DS switch

IL 14574

200A DS switch

14
15
16
17
18

Notes
1 Mechanisms are shown mounted on breaker for illustration purposes only. Breakers are not included.
2 These mechanisms are recognized under the component program of Underwriters Laboratories.
3 Selection data for handle mechanism only; circuit breaker not included.

19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-103

3
1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

AMT Vari-Depth
Fixed Width Type—Type AMT for Below Handle Mounting

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Complete
Assembly 12
Catalog Number

Breaker or
Switch Type

Backplate and
Yoke Assembly
Catalog Number

Rod and Brace
Assembly
Catalog Number

Pivot Mechanism
Assembly
Catalog Number

Operating Handle
Assembly
Catalog Number

Below the Handle—Fixed Width—with Short Brace and/or Rod as Listed (For all enclosures including Hoffman A-25 Enclosures)
Series C F-Frame HMCP F 3

AMTFDBSFH

AMTFD-B

AMTR

AMTPM-FH

Series C J-Frame HMCP J 3

AMTJDBSFH

AMTKB-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-FSH

AMTOP

Series C K-Frame HMCP K 3

AMTKDBSFH

AMTLB-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-FSH

AMTOP

AMTOP

Series C L-Frame HMCP L 3

AMTLDBSFH

AMTLD-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-FS

AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 unfused

AMTDSBSFH

AMTDS100-B

AMTR

AMTPM-FH

AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 4

AMTDSFBSFH

AMTDS100F-B

AMTR

AMTPM-FH

AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 5

AMTDSF1BSFH

AMTDS100F1-B

AMTR

AMTPM-FH

AMTOP

DS-200 unfused

AMTDS2BSFH

AMTDS200-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-FSH

AMTOP

DS-200 fused

AMTDS2FBSFH

AMTDS200F-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-FSH

AMTOP

12

Below the Handle—Fixed Width—with Short Brace and/or Rod as Listed (Not for use with Hoffman A-25 Enclosures)
EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP (0-4)

AMTFBBSF

AMTFD-B

AMTR

AMTPM-F

AMTOP

13

JB, KB, MCP (250A)

AMTKBBSF

AMTKB-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-FS

AMTOP

14

JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB, DA MCP (400A)

AMTLBBSF

AMTLB-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-FS

AMTOP

FB TRI-PAC, FCL

AMTFBPBSF

AMTFBP-B

AMTR

AMTPM-F

AMTOP

Optional rod and brace 6

15
16

AMTRB2 long rod and brace
AMTRB3 extended rod and brace

Standard Door Hardware 78
Catalog Number

17

DH1R
DH2R

18

DH3R

19

Door Hardware
Adapter Kit 9

20

Catalog Number
AMTDHA

21

Door Hardware Kit for
Hoffman A-25 Enclosure jk
Catalog Number
HDH-2R l
HDH-3R m

Further Information
Publication
Number
IL 29C277

Description
AMT Vari-Depth
Handle Mechanism

Notes
1 AMTR is rod only; AMTRI is rod and
brace assembly.
2 Complete assembly not available,
order components parts listed above.
3 Also for use with equivalent
HMCP Frame.
4 For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 600V
NEC Class H, R or J fuses.
5 For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 250V
NEC Class H or R fuses.
6 AMTR and AMTRB1 for use with
enclosure depth of 6.50–14.25 inches.
For 12.25–18.25 inch depth, use optional
AMTRB2. For 18.00–24.00 inch depth,
use optional AMTRB3.

7

8

9

j

k

l

m

Requires adapter kit shown in Door
Hardware Adapter Kit table.
For standard door hardware description,
see Page V12-T3-102.
Required on standard door hardware
only when used with any AMT handle
mechanisms.
Kit consists of special door hardware and
door interlock pin. Available for righthand flange mounting only.
For use with AMT fixed width
mechanisms only.
2-point latch for use with panels up to
approximately 40.00 inches high.
3-point latch for use with panels
approximately 40.00 inches and higher.

22
23
24
25
V12-T3-104

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

AMT Vari-Depth
Vari-Width Type—
Type AMT for Above
Handle Mounting
The Type AMT is an
extra heavy-duty handle
mechanism designed for
mounting in flange-type
enclosures, and has
provisions for mounting in
various depth enclosures
and for varying the width
relationship between the
disconnect device and the
external handle.
A door interlock is provided
to prevent opening the
enclosure door with the
disconnect in the ON position
or to close the disconnect
with the enclosure door
open. The external handle
can be locked in the OFF
position with up to three
padlocks. The AMT
mechanism is supplied
for mounting in right-hand
flange enclosures but can
be easily converted for
left-hand mounting.
AMT mechanisms are
available for above the
handle mounting or below
the handle mounting.
Mechanisms for below the
handle mounting are also
available as fixed width
units. When door hardware
is used with an AMT handle
mechanism, a door hardware
adapter kit is required.

MD, MSMVari-Width Type—Type AMT for Above Handle Mounting

1
2
3

Complete
Assembly 12
Catalog Number

Breaker or
Switch Type

4

Backplate
and Yoke
Assembly
Catalog
Number

Operating
Rod and
Brace
Assembly
Catalog
Number

Flange
Mounted
Pivot
Mechanism
Assembly 34
Catalog Number

External
Operating
Handle
Catalog Number

Above the Handle Mounting with Short Rod and Brace
Series C F-Frame 5 EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP (0–4)

AMTFDASV

AMTFB

AMTRB1

AMTPM

AMTOP

Series C J-Frame 5

AMTJDASV

AMTJD

AMTRB1

AMTPM

AMTOP

Series C K-Frame 5

AMTKDASV

AMTKD

AMTRB1

AMTPM

AMTOP

Series C L-Frame, MDL 5

AMTLDASV

AMTLD

AMTRB1

AMTPM

AMTOP

JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB, DA, MCP (400A)

AMTLBASV

AMTLB

AMTRB1

AMTPM

AMTOP

LA, HLA, LC, HLC

AMTLAASV

AMTLA

AMTRB1

AMTPM

AMTOP

MD, MDS, MA, HMA, MC, HMC, Series C
M-Frame, LCL

AMTMAASV

AMTMA

AMTRB1

AMTPM

AMTOP

NB, HNB, NC, HNC

AMTNBASV

AMTNB

AMTRB1

AMTPMNB

AMTOP

FB TRI-PAC, FCL

AMTFBASV

AMTFB

AMTRB1

AMTPM

AMTOP

LA TRI-PAC

AMTLAPASV

AMTLAP

AMTRB1

AMTPM

AMTOP

NB TRI-PAC

AMTNBPASV

AMTNBP

AMTRB1

AMTPMNB

AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 unfused

AMTDSASV

AMTDS100

AMTRB1

AMTPM

AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 6

AMTDSFASV

AMTDS100F

AMTRB1

AMTPM

AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 7

AMTDSF1ASV

AMTDS100F1 AMTRB1

AMTPM

AMTOP

DS-200 unfused

AMTDS2ASV

AMTDS200

AMTRB1

AMTPM

AMTOP

DS-200 fused

AMTDS2FASV

AMTDS200F

AMTRB1

AMTPM

AMTOP

AMTFB

AMTRB2

AMTPM

AMTOP

Above the Handle Mounting with Long Rod and Brace
Series C F-Frame 5 EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP (0–4)

AMTFDALV

5

AMTJDALV

AMTJD

AMTRB2

AMTPM

AMTOP

Series C K-Frame 5

AMTKDALV

AMTKD

AMTRB2

AMTPM

AMTOP

Series C J-Frame

Series C L-Frame, MDL

5

AMTLDALV

AMTLD

AMTRB2

AMTPM

AMTOP

JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB, DA, MCP (400A)

AMTLBALV

AMTLB

AMTRB2

AMTPM

AMTOP

Accessories

LA, HLA, LC, HLC

AMTLAALV

AMTLA

AMTRB2

AMTPM

AMTOP

Spacer kit to Vari-Width
(not for use with fixed
mechanisms) catalog
number AMTSK1 for up
to 1.00-inch variation.

MD, MDS, MA, HMA, MC, HMC, Series C
M-Frame, LCL

AMTMAALV

AMTMA

AMTRB2

AMTPM

AMTOP

NB, HNB, NC, HNC

AMTNBALV

AMTNB

AMTRB2

AMTPMNB

AMTOP

FB TRI-PAC, FCL

AMTFBALV

AMTFB

AMTRB2

AMTPM

AMTOP

LA TRI-PAC

AMTLAPALV

AMTLAP

AMTRB2

AMTPM

AMTOP

Note: This spacer kit is for up to

NB TRI-PAC

AMTNBPALV

AMTNBP

AMTRB2

AMTPMNB

AMTOP

1.00-inch variation and consists of
multiples of thin spacers to be
used as required. A maximum of
two kits per installation may be
used. Due to the possible variation
in dimensions, hardware is
not supplied. Use standard
1/4–20 bolts.

DS-30, 60, 100 unfused

AMTDSALV

AMTDS100

AMTRB2

AMTPM

AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 6

AMTDSFALV

AMTDS100F

AMTRB2

AMTPM

AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 7

AMTDSF1ALV

AMTDS100F1 AMTRB2

AMTPM

AMTOP

DS-200 unfused

AMTDS2ALV

AMTDS200

AMTRB2

AMTPM

AMTOP

DS-200 fused

AMTDS2FALV

AMTDS200F

AMTRB2

AMTPM

AMTOP

Further Information
Pub. Number Description
IL 14946

AMT Vari-Depth handle
mechanism

Notes
1 Assembled Type AMT for above handle
mounting (breaker not included).
2 Complete assembly not available, order
components parts listed above.
3 Width spacer kit not included.

4

This spacer kit is for up to 1.00-inch
variation and consists of multiples of
thin spacers to be used as required. A
maximum of two kits per installation may
be used. Due to the possible variation in
dimensions, hardware is not supplied.
Use standard 1/4–20 bolts.

5

6

7

Also for use with equivalent
HMCP frame.
For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 600V
NEC Class H, R or J fuses.
For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 600V
NEC Class H or R fuses.

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-105

3
1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Vari-Width Type—Type AMT for Below Handle Mounting

2
3
4
5
6

Complete
Assembly 12
Catalog Number

Breaker or
Switch Type

Backplate and
Yoke Assembly
Catalog Number

Rod and Brace
Assembly
Catalog Number

Flange Mounted Pivot
Mechanism Assembly 34
Catalog Number

External Operating
Handle Assembly
Catalog Number

AMTOP

Below the Handle Mounting with Short Rod and Brace

7

Series C F-Frame 5 EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP (0–4)

AMTFDBSV

AMTFD-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-B

Series C J-Frame 5

AMTJDBSV

AMTJD-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

8

Series C K-Frame 5

AMTKDBSV

AMTKD-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

Series C L-Frame MDL 5

AMTLDBSV

AMTLD-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

9

JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB, DA, MCP (400A)

AMTLBBSV

AMTLB-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-B

AMTOP
AMTOP

10
11
12
13
14

LA, HLA, LC, HLC

AMTLABSV

AMTLA-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-B

MD, MDS, MA, HMA, MC, HMC, Series C M-Frame, LCL

AMTMABSV

AMTMA-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

NB, HNB, NC, HNC

AMTNBBSV

AMTNB-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

FB TRI-PAC, FCL

AMTFBPBSV

AMTFBP-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

LA TRI-PAC

AMTLAPBSV

AMTLAP-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

NB TRI-PAC

AMTNBPBSV

AMTNBP-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 unfused

AMTDSBSV

AMTDS100-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 6

AMTDSFBSV

AMTDS100F-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 7

AMTDSF1BSV

AMTDS100F1-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

DS-200 unfused

AMTDS2BSV

AMTDS200-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

DS-200 fused

AMTDS2FBSV

AMTDS200F-B

AMTRB1

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

AMTOP

Below the Handle Mounting with Long Rod and Brace
Series C F-Frame 5 EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP (0–4)

AMTFDBLV

AMTFD-B

AMTRB2

AMTPM-B

Series C J-Frame 5

AMTJDBLV

AMTJD-B

AMTRB2

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

Series C K-Frame 5

AMTKDBLV

AMTKD-B

AMTRB2

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

Series C L-Frame MDL 5

AMTLDBLV

AMTLD-B

AMTRB2

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB, DA, MCP (400A)

AMTLBBLV

AMTLB-B

AMTRB2

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

17

LA, HLA, LC, HLC

AMTLABLV

AMTLA-B

AMTRB2

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

MD, MDS, MA, HMA, MC, HMC, Series C M-Frame, LCL

AMTMABLV

AMTMA-B

AMTRB2

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

18

NB, HNB, NC, HNC

AMTNBBLV

AMTNB-B

AMTRB2

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

FB TRI-PAC, FCL

AMTFBPBLV

AMTFBP-B

AMTRB2

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

19

LA TRI-PAC

AMTLAPBLV

AMTLAP-B

AMTRB2

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

NB TRI-PAC

AMTNBPBLV

AMTNBP-B

AMTRB2

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

20

DS-30, 60, 100 unfused

AMTDSBLV

AMTDS100-B

AMTRB2

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 6

AMTDSFBLV

AMTDS100F-B

AMTRB2

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

21

DS-30, 60, 100 fused 7

AMTDSF1BLV

AMTDS100F1-B

AMTRB2

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

DS-200 unfused

AMTDS2BLV

AMTDS200-B

AMTRB2

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

DS-200 fused

AMTDS2FBLV

AMTDS200F-B

AMTRB2

AMTPM-B

AMTOP

15
16

22
23
24
25

Notes
1 AMTR is rod only; AMTRI is rod and brace assembly.
2 Complete assembly not available, order components parts listed above.
3 Width spacer kit not included.
4 This spacer kit is for up to 1-inch variation and consists of multiples of thin spacers to be used as required. A maximum of two kits per installation may be used.
Due to the possible variation in dimensions, hardware is not supplied. Use standard 1/4–20 bolts.
5 Also for use with equivalent HMCP Frame.
6 For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 600V NEC Class H, R or J fuses.
7 For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 600V NEC Class H or R fuses.

V12-T3-106

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Accessories
Spacer kit to Vari-Width
(not for use with fixed
mechanisms) catalog
number AMTSK1 for up
to 1.00-inch variation.

Flex Shaft

Note: This spacer kit is for up to
1.00-inch variation and consists of
multiples of thin spacers to be
used as required. A maximum
of two kits per installation may
be used. Due to the possible
variation in dimensions, hardware
is not supplied. Use standard
1/4–20 bolts.

Ordering Information
●
Complete assembly
not available, order
components parts as listed
on Pages V12-T3-104,
V12-T3-105 and
V12-T3-106
●
Order spacer kits or
door hardware adapter
as required
●
Individual component
parts may be ordered by
catalog number

through 10 feet (3m) for use
with various size enclosures.

Flex Shaft

The Flex Shaft is an extra
heavy-duty mechanism that
includes a flexible shaft in
various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m)

a significant time savings
compared to installation of
other types of flange handle
mechanisms. The Flex Shaft
mechanism also takes up less
interior enclosure space than
competitive designs and the
handle fits standard flange
cutouts. Flex Shaft handle
can be remotely mounted
from breaker, where an
operator can use it by
“funneling” the cable
through conduit.

The Flex Shaft handle will
accept up to three padlock
shackles, each with a
maximum diameter of
0.375-inch (9.5 mm). Can be
used with Type 1, 3R and 12
fabricated enclosures. An
optional handle is available
for Flex Shaft that is suitable
for use with Type 4 and 4X
environments. Flex Shaft
comes preset from the
factory, requiring only
minor field adjustments
on installation, which
takes about 10 minutes—

Flex Shaft is UL Listed under
File E64983 and meets
CSA requirements.

Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
3.00 (0.9)

E125

EHMFS03

J250

JHMFS03

G
F
F (Dual)
J

4.00 (1.2)

5.00 (1.5)

6.00 (1.8)

7.00 (2.1)

8.00 (2.4)

9.00 (2.7)

10.00 (3.0)

EHMFS04

EHMFS05

EHMFS06

—

—

—

—

JHMFS04

JHMFS05

JHMFS06

JHMFS07

JHMFS08

JHMFS09

JHMFS10

F0S03C

F0S04C

F0S05C

F0S06C

—

—

—

—

F1S03C

F1S04C

F1S05C

F1S06C

F1S07C

F1S08C

F1S09C

F1S10C

F1S03CD

F1S04CD

F1S05CD

F1S06CD

F1S07CD

F1S08CD

F1S09CD

F1S10CD

F2S03C

F2S04C

F2S05C

F2S06C

F2S07C

F2S08C

F2S09C

F2S10C

K

F3S03C

F3S04C

F3S05C

F3S06C

F3S07C

F3S08C

F3S09C

F3S10C

L and MDL

—

F4S04C

F4S05C

F4S06C

—

—

—

F4S10C

N

—

F5S04C

F5S05C

F5S06C

—

—

—

F5S10C

R

—

F6S04

F6S05

F6S06

—

—

—

—

MD

—

F7S04C

F7S05C

F7S06C

—

—

—

F7S10C

Catalog Number

Flex Shaft Accessories
(F- through R-Frame)
NEMA 12 Safety Door
Hardware for Flex Shaft 4
Handle Length
in Inches (mm)

Catalog
Number 5

4.00 (101.6)

C361KJ4

6.00 (152.4)

C361KJ6

Roller latch 6

C361KR

Notes
1 Type 4/4X handle mechanisms are
available. Add Suffix X to complete
catalog number. Add Suffix I to complete
catalog number for IEC handle. Add
Suffix L (Standard on F, J, K and L) to
complete catalog number for 6.00-inch
(152.4 mm) handle. Original narrow
handle design (no C suffix) is available.
Remove C from catalog number.
2 When selecting the length of shaft,
ensure minimum bending radius of
4.00 inches (101.6 mm) is maintained to
operate properly. The standard method
of shipment includes the mechanism
preset at the factory; however, minor
field adjustments may be required.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Flex Shaft Ordering Information (Three-Pole Only) 123
Breaker
Frame

1

9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Dual breakers operator available
on F-Frame only.
Customer: Consult with box
manufacturer for correct door hardware
and any adapters required for assembly.
The 0.25 inch x 0.50 inch (6.35 x 12.7 mm)
standard mill rectangular locking bar is
not supplied with these kits.
Third roller latch for use with 4.00- or
6.00-inch (101.6 or 152.4 mm) handle
when 3-point latching is required.

16

Refer to handle mechanisms in the moldedcase circuit breaker section of Volume 4—
Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E,
Tab 2.

20

3

4

5

6

17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-107

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

The Type C371 circuit breaker
operating mechanisms are
designed for installation in
control enclosures where
main or branch circuit
protective devices are
required. All circuit breaker
mechanisms are suitable for
right-hand mounting.
Auxiliary contacts are not
available for mounting on
operating mechanisms.
Where required, have them
installed in circuit breaker.
Type C371 is UL Listed under
File E62635.

Type C371 Ordering Information—Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Operating Mechanism With 4.00-Inch Handle
Frame
Size

Variable Depth
Mounting Range
Min./Max. 12

Operating
For Type 1–12
Mechanism Only 3 Enclosure
Catalog Number
Catalog Number

For Type 4
Enclosure
Catalog Number

HMCP and Series C
EHD, FDB, FD, FDC, HFD, ED

150

6.50–160 (165.1–406.4)

C371E

C371E1

C371E2

HMCP and Series C
HJD, JD, JDB, JDC

250

6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4)

C371F

C371F5

C371F6

HMCP and Series C
DK, HKD, KD, KDB

400

6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4)

C371F

C371F5

C371F6

Series C
HLD, LD, LDC

600

8.50–22.00 (215.9–558.8)

C371G

C371G5

C371G6

Series C
MD, MDS

800

8.75–22.00 (222.3–558.8)

C371K

C371K5

C371K6

Series C
HND, ND, NDC

1200

9.75–22.00 (247.7–558.8)

C371K

C371K5

C371K6

Circuit Breaker
or Motor Circuit
Protector

Handle Only—Dimensions in Inches (mm)

8
9

Circuit Breaker Frame Size
(Amperes)

NEMA
Enclosure Type

150

10
11

250–1200

12
13
14

Catalog
Number

1, 3R, 3, 12

4.00 (101.6)

C371H1

4/4X

4.00 (101.6)

C371H2

1, 3R, 3, 12

4.00 (101.6)

C371H3

4/4X

4.00 (101.6)

C371H4

1, 3R, 3, 12

4.00 (101.6)

C371H5

4/4X

4.00 (101.6)

C371H6

1, 3R, 3, 12

4.00 (101.6)

C371H7

4/4X

4.00 (101.6)

C371H8

Channel Support Kit
(Rod Not Supplied) 4

Flange-Mounted
Instruction Leaflets

Catalog Number

Breaker
Frame

C371CS6

15

Operating
Handle Length

Instruction
Leaflet Number

Flex Shaft
E125

IL0510TE0002

Catalog
Number

J250

IL0510TE0005

G

TBD

Disconnect switches
(30, 60, 100, 200A sizes)

C371CS1

F

15609

J

15605

Circuit breakers
(150, 250, 400A sizes)

C371CS1

K

15604

L and M

15606

N

15606

R

15606

Connecting Rods

16

Application

17
18

Circuit breakers
(600, 800, 1200A sizes)

19

5

C371CS2

Notes
1 For increased maximum allowable depth,
see connecting rods table to the left.
2 Dimensions shown are from panel
flange surface.
3 Does not include handle.
4 For use to prevent bending of the
operating handle mounting surface. This
is especially useful when the operating
handle is mounted on a channel in a
multi-door enclosure. Included in
600–1200A.
5 Increase maximum allowable depth
by 5.00 inches (127.0 mm).
Refer to handle mechanisms in the moldedcase circuit breaker section of Volume 4—
Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E,
Tab 2.

20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-108

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Series C Rotary and
Universal Rotary

Series C Rotary Ordering Information

1

Complete
Catalog
Number 1

Separate Catalog Number
Standard
Handle 2

Breaker
Mechanism 3

Shaft 4

IEC IP65 56

IEC IP66 56

2

6.00 (152.4)

HM1R06

6648C22G01

6648C23G11

4217B37G04

WHM1R06

WHM1R06X

12.00 (304.8)

HM1R12

6648C22G01

6648C23G11

4217B37G01

WHM1R12

WHM1R12X

3

16.00 (406.4)

HM1R16

6648C22G01

6648C23G11

4217B37G02

WHM1R16

WHM1R16X

24.00 (609.6)

HM1R24

6648C22G01

6648C23G11

4217B37G03

WHM1R24

WHM1R24X

4

6.00 (152.4)

HM2R06

6648C22G01

6648C23G21

4217B37G04

WHM2R06

WHM2R06X

5

12.00 (304.8)

HM2R12

6648C22G01

6648C23G21

4217B37G01

WHM2R12

WHM2R12X

16.00 (406.4)

HM2R16

6648C22G01

6648C23G21

4217B37G02

WHM2R16

WHM2R16X

24.00 (609.6)

HM2R24

6648C22G01

6648C23G21

4217B37G03

WHM2R24

WHM2R24X

7

6.00 (152.4)

HM3R06

6648C22G01

6648C23G25

4217B37G04

WHM3R06

WHM3R06X

12.00 (304.8)

HM3R12

6648C22G01

6648C23G25

4217B37G01

WHM3R12

WHM3R12X

8

16.00 (406.4)

HM3R16

6648C22G01

6648C23G25

4217B37G02

WHM3R16

WHM3R16X

24.00 (609.6)

HM3R24

6648C22G01

6648C23G25

4217B37G03

WHM3R24

WHM3R24X

9
10

Shaft Length
Inches (mm)

Catalog Number

F-Frame

Series C Rotary

Series C rotary and universal
rotary handle mechanisms
are for use with molded-case
circuit breakers (G, F, J, K, L,
MDL), molded-case switches
and motor circuit protectors.
Series C rotary is suitable
for use with Type 1, 3R, 12
and 4/4X enclosure types.
Type 4/4X application
requires special handle,
see “Ordering Information.”
The universal rotary is suitable
for use with Type 1 and 12
enclosure types. All rotary
handle mechanisms include a
handle “Lock Off,” to prevent
turning the breaker ON while
in the OFF position. All rotary
handles indicate ON/OFF/
Tripped/Reset positions;
however, Universal Rotary
has the added feature of
international markings for
ON (I) and OFF (O). Series C
rotary handle is metal.
Universal rotary is made of
molded material. Series C
rotary handle is black and
universal rotary is available
in black or yellow/red.
Series C rotary handle was
ergonomically designed with
extra clearance for a “gloved
hand” to operate. Handle
has a 45º rotation. Universal
Rotary has a 90º rotation
(“pipe valve” operation)
where ON is vertical and
OFF is horizontal. Shafts
include a support brace to
ensure proper alignment.

J-Frame

K-Frame

L- and MDL-Frame

6

6.00 (152.4)

HM4R06

6648C22G11

6648C23G19

4217B37G04

WHM4R06

WHM4R06X

12.00 (304.8)

HM4R12

6648C22G11

6648C23G19

4217B37G01

WHM4R12

WHM4R12X

16.00 (406.4)

HM4R16

6648C22G11

6648C23G19

4217B37G02

WHM4R16

WHM4R16X

24.00 (609.6)

HM4R24

6648C22G11

6648C23G19

4217B37G03

WHM4R24

WHM4R24X

6.00 (152.4)

HM7R06

6648C22G21

6648C23G17

4217B37G04

—

—

12.00 (304.8)

HM7R12

6648C22G21

6648C23G17

4217B37G01

—

—

16.00 (406.4)

HM7R16

6648C22G21

6648C23G17

4217B37G02

—

—

24.00 (609.6)

HM7R24

6648C22G21

6648C23G17

4217B37G03

—

—

14

6.00 (152.4)

HM5R06

6648C22G21

6648C23G08

4217B37G04

WHM5R06

WHM5R06X

12.00 (304.8)

HM5R12

6648C22G21

6648C23G08

4217B37G01

WHM5R12

WHM5R12X

15

16.00 (406.4)

HM5R16

6648C22G21

6648C23G08

4217B37G02

WHM5R16

WHM5R16X

24.00 (609.6)

HM5R24

6648C22G21

6648C23G08

4217B37G03

WHM5R24

WHM5R24X

11
12

MD/MDS

13

N-Frame

16
17

Notes
1 Complete catalog number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket.
2 Handle is designed suitable for Types 1, 3R and 12 enclosures. Use style number 6648C22G03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X Suffix to
complete catalog number.
3 Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts.
4 Longer shafts,16.00-inch (406.4 mm) and 24.00-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension.
5 IEC handle mechanism supplied with metric thread mounting hardware.
6 Complete catalog number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft.

18

Refer to handle mechanisms in the molded-case circuit breaker section of Volume 4—Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Tab 2.

20

19

In addition, the 16.00-inch
(406.4 mm) and 24.00-inch
(609.6 mm) extra long
shafts include an adjustable
support bracket.

21

Series C rotary and universal
rotary, are UL Listed and
meet CSA requirements.
Universal rotary also meets
IEC947-1/2 for international
compliance. Rotary UL File
Number is E64983.

23

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

22
24
25
V12-T3-109

3
1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Universal Rotary

Universal Rotary Ordering Information
Shaft Length in Inches (mm)

Handle Color

Complete Catalog Number

2

E125 Frame
6.00 (152.4)

Black

EHMVD06B

3

12.00 (304.8)

Black

EHMVD12B

6.00 (152.4)

Red

EHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8)

Red

EHMVD12R

6.00 (152.4)

Black

FJHMVD06B

4

J250 Frame

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

12.00 (304.8)

Black

FJHMVD12B

Universal Rotary

6.00 (152.4)

Red

FJHMVD06R

Type 4/4X handles are similar
to standard handles except
that they include an internal
neoprene gasket. Type 4/4X
handle style number is
6648C22G03. Due to
gasketing effect between
the handle and the housing,
the handle may not indicate
a tripped position.

12.00 (304.8)

Red

FJHMVD12R

6.00 (152.4)

Black

GHMVD06B

12.00 (304.8)

Black

GHMVD12B

6.00 (152.4)

Red

GHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8)

Red

GHMVD12R

6.00 (152.4)

Black

FHMVD06B

Series C Rotary Accessories
As an option, an auxiliary
switch is offered so that the
control panel builder may
electrically indicate the
status of the breaker. This
accessory would be mounted
on the mechanism and
comes with 24.00-inch
(609.6 mm) pigtail leads.

12.00 (304.8)

Black

FHMVD12B

6.00 (152.4)

Red

FHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8)

Red

FHMVD12R

6.00 (152.4)

Black

JHMVD06B

12.00 (304.8)

Black

JHMVD12B

6.00 (152.4)

Red

JHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8)

Red

JHMVD12R

G-Frame

F-Frame

J-Frame

K-Frame

Series C Auxiliary Switch

6.00 (152.4)

Black

KHMVD06B

Catalog Number

12.00 (304.8)

Black

KHMVD12B

5108A61G01

6.00 (152.4)

Red

KHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8)

Red

KHMVD12R

6.00 (152.4)

Black

LHMVD06B

12.00 (304.8)

Black

LHMVD12B

6.00 (152.4)

Red

LHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8)

Red

LHMVD12R

16

L- and MDL-Frames

17
18
19

Through-the-Door Instruction Leaflets Number
Breaker Frame

Series C Rotary

20

E125

—

IL0510TE0001

J250

—

IL0510TE0001

21

G

—

29C250

F

15594

29C250

Universal Rotary

22

J

15599

29C250

K

15600

29C250

23

L and MDL

15601

29C250

N

15602

—

Note: Refer to handle mechanisms in the molded-case circuit breaker section of Volume 4—Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Tab 2.

24
25
V12-T3-110

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Direct (Close-Coupled)
Handle Mechanisms

Universal Direct

Euro IEC Direct

The Universal Direct handle
mechanism is designed
exclusively for the new
Cutler-Hammer E125 and
J250 circuit breakers. It is
available as standard with
a door interlock to prevent
opening the enclosure
while the circuit breaker
is in the ON position. It
is also available without
a door interlock.

Universal Direct Ordering Information

The Euro IEC Direct handle
mechanism can be used on
F- through R-Frames.

Frame

Black Handle
Catalog Number

Red Handle
Catalog Number

F

HMCC1B

HMCC1R

J

HMCC2B

HMCC2R

K

HMCC3B

HMCC3R

L and M

HMCC4B

HMCC4R

N

HMCC5B

HMCC5R

R

HMCC6B

HMCC6R

The G Direct is available with
a black or a yellow handle,
and with or without a shroud.
It is suitable for use with Type
1 enclosures. It is for use only
with the G-Frame (GD, GC,
GHC, GMCP).
An escutcheon ring and an
interlock clip are provided as
standard. The standard design
includes a lock-off feature.

G Direct

Direct (close-coupled) handle
mechanisms mount directly
to the circuit breaker.
They are used in shallow
enclosures where the
standard variable depth
through-the-door type
mechanism is not practical
or cannot be used. They
are typically for applications
where high volume,
standardized enclosures
are being fabricated.

The Universal Direct handle
mechanism is UL 489 Listed,
IEC947-1/2 and meets CSA
requirements. The Euro IEC
Direct handle mechanism
is IEC-240-1. G Direct is
UL Listed and meets
CSA requirements.

1

Universal Direct
Domestic

International

Frame

With Interlock
(White)
Catalog Number

Without Interlock
(White)
Catalog Number

Without Interlock
(Charcoal With Global Label)
Catalog Number

E125

EHMCCBI

EHMCCB

EHMCCR

J250

JHMCCBI

JHMCCB

JHMCCR

2
3
4

Euro IEC Direct Ordering Information

5
6
7
8
9

G Direct Ordering Information 1
Black Handle

Yellow Handle

Frame

With Shroud
Catalog Number

Without Shroud
Catalog Number

GD/GHC

HRGCC1S

HRGCC10

GMCP

HRGMC1S

HRGMC10

Without Shroud
Catalog Number

10

HRGCC3S

HRGCC30

HRGMC3S

HRGMC30

11

With Shroud
Catalog Number

12

Direct (Close-Coupled) Instruction Leaflets
Instruction Leaflet Number
Frame

Universal Direct

Euro IEC Direct

G Direct

E125

29C255

—

—

J250

29C256

—

—

G

—

—

15567

F

—

29C288A

—

J

—

29C288A

—

K

—

29C288A

—

L and MDL

—

29C289

—

N

—

29C290

—

R

—

29C291

—

13
14
15
16
17

Notes
1 Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame.

18

Refer to handle mechanisms in the molded-case circuit breaker section of Volume 4—
Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Tab 2.

19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-111

3
1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Handle Extensions

2
3
4
5
6

Handle Extension

7

Handle extension is not
included with J-, K-, L- and
M-Frame breakers. It must
be purchased separately.

8

Handle Extension

9
10
11

Frame

Style Number

J, K

HEX3

L, M

HEX4

Handle extension is included
with breaker with N- and
R-Frame breakers.

12

Handle Extension
Frame

Style Number

13

N

HEX5

R

HEX6

14

Note: Refer to handle
mechanisms in the moldedcase circuit breaker section of
Volume 4—Circuit Protection
Catalog, CA08100005E, Tab 2.

15
16

Replacement and
Service Capabilities
Breaker Service Center
Factory Service for Mining
and Industrial Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers
Eaton owns and operates
two fully authorized Breaker
Service Centers (BSC)
in Skelton, WV, and
Evansville, IN. They are
available to support all nonwarranty service needs for
Cutler-Hammer industrial
molded-case breakers 600A
and above and all frames of
mining duty breakers.

Custom Service
Replace frame or trip unit,
with or without accessories.

The Breaker Service
Centers, as extensions of
our manufacturing plants,
are the only facilities
authorized to provide breaker
service solutions for Eaton,
Cutler-Hammer and historic
Westinghouse molded-case
circuit breakers. Staff are
dedicated to providing genuine
factory-supported solutions to
our customers.

Facilities
●
Dedicated sites supported
by engineering and
manufacturing
●
Staffed by factory trained
technicians with experience
servicing molded-case
circuit breakers
●
State-of-the-art cleaning
and testing equipment

This is just another example
of how Eaton supports
a complete offering of
solutions for circuit breakers.
See the following for the
benefits of choosing the BSC
and our service offerings.
Offerings
Basic Tune-Up
Clean, test and re-certify.
Basic Modification
Replace accessories and
attachments including
terminals, trip units,
UVRs, shunt trips and
auxiliary switches.

17
18

Basic Service
Replace components
including covers, handles
and stationary contacts.

19
20

Full Service
Replace both frame and
trip unit, with or without
accessories.
Factory Modifications
For new or existing
operational breakers
●
●

●

Trip unit upgrades
Addition of accessories
and attachments
UL modifications to
factory-sealed breakers

The Breaker Service Centers
are open to help you. Give us
a call at 1-877-BRK-SRVC or
contact your local Eaton
authorized distributor or sales
office for more information.
Know What You’re Getting—
Here’s the Reality of
Third-Party Repair
●
Breakers are serviced
using least worn,
counterfeit or reverse
engineered components
●
You get no technical
support from the original
manufacturer
●
There is no option for an
upgrade to new technology
●
You could end up with a
breaker that doesn’t
perform as expected

Reasons to Use Eaton’s Breaker
Service Centers
●
Eaton is a world leader in
circuit breaker technology
and manufacturing
●
The Breaker Service
Centers are staffed by
factory trained technicians
●
One year warranty.
●
Eaton uses only genuine
replacement parts and
components
●
Full engineering
support—original
product specifications
and manufacturing data
●
State-of-the-art cleaning
equipment—uses a
non-destructive cleaning
process while maintaining
integrity of the breaker
●
Modern test equipment—
the breaker service center
uses the same hi-tech
test equipment used by
engineering, development
and manufacturing
facilities. This allows the
breaker service center
to match original test
conditions at the factory
●
Exchange option—
we can upgrade to the
newest technology
●
Competitive price—all the
benefits of third-party prices
For more information on
Eaton products and services,
call 1-877-386-2273. Select
option 1 for technical
support and select option
6 for Eaton’s Electrical
Services & Systems,
or visit our website at
www.eaton.com/electrical.

21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-112

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Cross-Reference

1

Westinghouse and Challenger

2

Cross-Reference for Cutler-Hammer Industrial MCB/MCCBs
Circuit Breaker Brand and Type

Circuit Breaker Brand and Type

Westinghouse

Challenger

Cutler-Hammer

Westinghouse

Challenger

Cutler-Hammer

BAB

CBB

BAB

HMC

CSHM

HMC

BAB-H

CBB-H

BAB-H

HMCC

CSHMC

HMCC

CA

CD

CA

HNB

—

HNB

CAH

CDH

CAH

HNC

CSHN

HNC

CHKD

CKHC

CHKD

HND

CNH

HND

CHLD

CLHC

CHLD

JB, KB

—

JB, KB

CHND

CNHC

CHND

JD

CJ

JD

CKD

CKC

CKD

JDB

CJS

JDB

CKDC

CKVC

CKDC

JDC

CJV

JDC

CLD

CLC

CLD

KD

CK

KD

CLDC

CLVC

CLDC

KDB

CKS

KDB

CND

CNC

CND

KDC

CKV

KDC

CNDC

CNVC

CNDC

LA

—

LA

CRD

CRC

CRD

LA-P

CTL

LA-P

CRDC

CRVC

CRDC

LC

CSL

LC

DK

CDK

DK

LCC

CSLC

LCC

EB

—

EB

LCL

CXL

LCL

ED

CED

ED

LCY

CSLY

LCY

EDC

CEV

EDC

LD

CL

LD

EDH

CEH

EDH

LDB

CK

LDB

EHB

—

EHB

LDC

CLV

LDC

EHD

CE

EHD

MA

—

MA

FB

—

FB

MC

CSM

MC

FB-P

CTB

FB-P

MCC

CSMC

MCC

FCL

CXF

FCL

MCY

CSMY

MCY

FD

CF

FD

MDS

CSMD

MDS

FDB

CFS

FDB

MDSC

CSMDC

MDSC

FDC

CFV

FDC

MDSY

CSMDY

MDSY

GB

CG

GB

NB

—

NB

GC

CGL

GC

NB-P

CTN

NB-P

GDB

CGDB

GDB

NC

CSN

NC

GHB

CH

GHB

NCY

CSNY

NCY

GHBS

CSCB

GHBS

ND

CN

ND

GHC

CHL

GHC

NDC

CNV

NDC

HCA

CDT

HCA

PB-P

CTP

PB-P

HFB

—

HFB

PC

CSP

PC

HFD

CFH

HFD

PCC

CSPC

PCC

HJD

CJH

HJD

QBGF

CBBGF

QBGF

HKB

—

HKB

QBGFEP

CBBGFEP

QBGFEP

HKD

CKH

HKD

QBHGF

CBBHGF

QBHGF

HLA

—

HLA

QBHGFEP

CBBHGFEP

QBHGFEP

HLC

CSHL

HLC

QBHW

CBBH

QBHW

HLCC

CSHLC

HLCC

QBHW-H

CBBH-H

QBHW-H

HLD

CLH

HLD

RD

CR

RD

HMA

—

HMA

RDC

CRV

RDC

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-113

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

1

Westinghouse, Challenger and Bryant

2

Cross-Reference for Cutler-Hammer Residential MCBs

3

Westinghouse

Challenger

Bryant

Cutler-Hammer

BR

C

BR

BR

4

BRD

A

BRD

BRD

BRH

HC

BRH

BRH

5

BRHH

VC

BRHH

BRHH

—

XC

—

BRX

BRO

C

BRO

BRO
GFCB

6
7
8
9
10

Circuit Breaker Brand and Type

GFCB

HAGF

GFCB

GFCBH

HAGFH

GFCBH

GFCBH

GFEP

HAGFEP

GFEP

GFEP

GFEPH

HAGFHEP

GFEPH

GFEPH

—

CM

—

BW

—

CMH

—

BWH

—

CMV

—

BWHH

—

CB

—

CC

WFL

QFL

—

QFL

WFP

QFP

—

QFP

11
12
13

Notes for Replacement Breaker and Mining Breaker
Replacement Tables (Pages V12-T3-113–V12-T3-167)
1. Many of the suggested
6. The HFB two-pole
Series C replacements
breaker is on a three-pole
are electrical
frame. The Series C
replacements only,
replacement is a true
and may have different
two-pole.
dimensions, mountings,
7. Continuous amperes
handle forces and throw
and/or trip range may be
(which would require
a little different on the
a handle mechanism
replacement Series C.
change). The MARK 75
replacement would have
the same dimensions,
mountings, handle forces
and throw. Only threepole MARK 75 available.
2. Replacement breaker
frames, trips, plugs and
some of the terminals and
attachments are not
interchangeable with
the Series C. Obsoleted
frames and trips, etc.,
may require a complete
breaker change.
3. Replacing with a Higher
IC MARK 75 or Series C
breaker does not increase
the IC rating of the
assembly (panelboard,
switchboard, etc.).
4. Saf-T-Vue is no
longer available on the
replacement breaker line.
Eaton Canada does
make the Series C with
Saf-T-Vue and may be
sourced through our
Canadian Distribution
Center at 905-631-4318.

14
15
16

5. Suggested replacements
also apply to breakers
that had suffixes such
as “L,” line and load
terminals, “V” 50C
calibration and “W”
without terminals.

17
18
19

8. Replacement breaker
MARK 75 breakers with
interchangeable trip units
are to be supplied as
frame, trip, terminals and
attachment as separate
items (except when
accessories must be
factory installed). No
single-phase, ambient
compensated, Saf-T-Vue,
reverse-feed, or
SELTRONIC magnetic
only are available on
replacement breakers.
9. JA, DA, KA, HKA, LB,
LBB and HLB breakers
when replaced with a
Series C breaker “K”
frame, when bussed on
the line side such as a
panelboard, requires a
TAD3 spacer kit.
10. Contact the local Eaton
Satellite for complete
panelboard replacement
or new interior
replacement. Use
Panelboard Replacement
Breakers where possible.
MARK 75 and three-pole
only replacements are
available. Contact the
Breaker Service Center
at 1-877-275-7782 for
reconditioned breaker
solutions.
Note: If accessories are to be
factory installed, contact the
factory for pricing.

20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-114

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Cross-Reference

1

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacement Breaker

Replacements

Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

1256C10G03

1256C10G03

O

—

—

LD2300

1–3, 5, 8

1256C10G04

1256C10G04

O

—

—

LD2350

1–3, 5, 8

1256C10G05

1256C10G05

O

—

—

LD2400

1–3, 5, 8

1256C10G12

1256C10G12

A

—

—

KD3250

1–3, 5, 8

1256C10G13

1256C10G13

A

—

—

LD3300

1–3, 5, 8

1256C10G14

1256C10G14

A

—

—

LD3350

1–3, 5, 8

1256C10G15

1256C10G15

A

—

—

LD3400

1–3, 5, 8

1268C14G01

1268C14G01

O

—

—

HMCP050G2C

1–3, 7

1268C14G02

1268C14G02

O

—

—

HMCP050G2C

1–3, 7

1268C14G03

1268C14G03

O

65E4667

65E466

HMCP100L3C

1–3, 7

1268C14G04

1268C14G04

O

65E4667

65E4667

HMCP100L3C

1–3, 7

1268C14G05

1268C14G05

O

—

—

HMCP050G2C

1–3, 7

1268C14G06

1268C14G06

O

—

—

HMCP050G2C

1–3, 7

2603D46G07

2603D46G07

O

—

—

KT2250T

2, 8

2603D46G08

2603D46G08

O

—

—

LT2300T

2, 8

2603D46G09

2603D46G09

O

—

—

LT2350T

2, 8
2, 8

2603D46G10

2603D46G10

O

—

—

LT2400T

2603D46G26

2603D46G26

A

—

—

KT3250T

2, 8

2603D46G27

2603D46G27

A

—

—

LT3300T

2, 8

2603D46G28

2603D46G28

A

—

—

LT3350T

2, 8

2603D46G29

2603D46G29

A

—

—

LT3400T

2, 8

2603D47G07

2603D47G07

O

—

—

—

2, 8

2603D47G08

2603D47G08

O

—

—

—

2, 8

2603D47G10

2603D47G10

O

—

—

—

2, 8

2603D47G26

2603D47G26

A

—

—

—

2, 8

2603D47G27

2603D47G27

A

—

—

—

2, 8

2603D47G29

2603D47G29

A

—

—

—

2, 8

2603D50G01

2603D50G01

O

—

—

KD2250

1–3, 5, 8

2603D50G02

2603D50G02

O

—

—

LD2300

1–3, 5, 8

2603D50G03

2603D50G03

O

—

—

LD2350

1–3, 5, 8

2603D50G04

2603D50G04

O

—

—

LD2400

1–3, 5, 8

2603D50G07

2603D50G07

O

—

—

KD3250

1–3, 5, 8

2603D50G08

2603D50G08

O

1256C10G13

1256C10G13

LD3300

1–3, 5, 8

2603D50G09

2603D50G09

O

1256C10G14

1256C10G14

LD3350

1–3, 5, 8

2603D50G10

2603D50G10

O

1256C10G15

1256C10G15

LD3400

1–3, 5, 8

2603D50G13

2603D50G13

O

—

—

KD2250

1–5, 8

2603D50G14

2603D50G14

O

—

—

LD2300

1–5, 8

2603D50G15

2603D50G15

O

—

—

LD2350

1–5, 8

2603D50G16

2603D50G16

O

—

—

LD2400

1–5, 8

2603D50G19

2603D50G19

O

1256C10G12

1256C10G12

KD3250

1–5, 8

2603D50G20

2603D50G20

O

1256C10G13

1256C10G13

LD3300

1–5, 8

2603D50G21

2603D50G21

O

1256C10G14

1256C10G14

LD3350

1–5, 8

2603D50G22

2603D50G22

O

1256C10G15

1256C10G15

LD3400

1–5, 8

2610D53G12

2610D53G12

O

4994D96G30

4994D96G30

HMCP025D0C

1–3, 7

2610D53G13

2610D53G13

O

4994D96G31

4994D96G31

HMCP070J2C

1–3, 7

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

2

25
V12-T3-115

3
1
2
3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

2610D53G30

2610D53G30

O

4994D96G30

4994D96G30

HMCP025D0C

1–3, 7

2610D53G31

2610D53G31

O

4994D96G31

4994D96G31

HMCP070J2C

1–3, 7

2610D58G31

2610D58G31

O

—

—

—

1–4, 7

373D488G08

373D488G08

O

373D488G09

373D488G09

—

2, 8

4994D96G12

4994D96G12

O

4994D96G30

4994D96G30

HMCP025D0C

1–3, 7

4994D96G13

4994D96G13

O

4994D96G31

4994D96G31

HMCP070J2C

1–3, 7

5

4994D96G30

4994D96G30

A

—

—

HMCP025D0C

1–3, 7

4994D96G31

4994D96G31

A

—

—

HMCP070J2C

1–3, 7

6

4998D89G30

4998D89G30

O

—

—

—

1–4, 7

5683D88G07

5683D88G07

O

—

—

KT2250T

2, 8

4

7

5683D88G08

5683D88G08

O

—

—

LT2300T

2, 8

5683D88G09

5683D88G09

O

—

—

LT2350T

2, 8

8

5683D88G10

5683D88G10

O

—

—

LT2400T

2, 8

5683D88G26

5683D88G26

O

2603D46G26

2603D46G26

KT3250T

2, 8

9

5683D88G27

5683D88G27

O

2603D46G27

2603D46G27

LT3300T

2, 8

5683D88G28

5683D88G28

O

2603D46G28

2603D46G28

LT3350T

2, 8

5683D88G29

5683D88G29

O

2603D46G29

2603D46G29

LT3400T

2, 8

65E4667

65E4667

A

—

—

HMCP100L3C

1–3, 7

11

81E4647

81E4647

O

—

—

—

1–4, 7

DA2250

375D152G11

O

—

—

DK2250

1–3, 5, 8, 9

12

DA2250Y

376D872G11

O

—

—

DK2250Y

1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA2300

375D152G12

O

—

—

DK2300

1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA2300Y

376D872G12

O

—

—

DK2300Y

1–3, 5, 8, 9

10

13
14

DA2350

375D152G13

O

—

—

DK2350

1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA2350Y

376D872G13

O

—

—

DK2350Y

1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA2400

375D152G14

O

—

—

DK2400

1–3, 5, 8, 9

15

DA2400WK

752B050G01

O

—

—

DK2400KW

1–3, 5, 8

DA2400Y

376D872G14

O

—

—

DK2400Y

1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA3250

375D152G26

O

—

—

DK3250

1–3, 5, 8, 9

16

DA3250Y

376D872G26

O

—

—

DK3250Y

1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA3300

375D152G27

O

—

—

DK3300

1–3, 5, 8, 9

17

DA3300Y

376D872G27

O

—

—

DK3300Y

1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA3350

375D152G28

O

—

—

DK3350

1–3, 5, 8, 9

18

DA3350Y

376D872G28

O

—

—

DK3350Y

1–3, 5, 8, 9

DA3400

375D152G29

O

—

—

DK3400

1–3, 5, 8, 9

19

DA3400WK

752B050G06

O

—

—

DK3400KW

1–3, 5, 8

DA3400Y

376D872G29

O

—

—

DK3400Y

1–3, 5, 8, 9

20

EB1015

4990D03G02

O

—

—

EHD1015

1–3, 5

EB1020

4990D03G03

O

—

—

EHD1020

1–3, 5

21

EB1025

4990D03G04

O

—

—

EHD1025

1–3, 5

EB1030

4990D03G05

O

—

—

EHD1030

1–3, 5

EB1035

4990D03G06

O

—

—

EHD1035

1–3, 5

22
23

EB1040

4990D03G07

O

—

—

EHD1040

1–3, 5

EB1045

4990D03G14

O

—

—

EHD1045

1–3, 5

EB1050

4990D03G08

O

—

—

EHD1050

1–3, 5

24

EB1060

4990D03G09

O

—

—

EHD1060

1–3, 5

EB1070

4990D03G10

O

—

—

EHD1070

1–3, 5

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

V12-T3-116

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

EB1080

4990D03G65

O

—

—

EHD1080

1–3, 5

EB1090

4990D03G11

O

—

—

EHD1090

1–3, 5

EB1100

4990D03G12

O

—

—

EHD1100

1–3, 5

EB1100LK

1226C25G01

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

EB2015

4990D03G18

O

—

—

EHD2015

1–3, 5

EB2020

4990D03G19

O

—

—

EHD2020

1–3, 5

EB2025

4990D03G20

O

—

—

EHD2025

1–3, 5

EB2030

4990D03G21

O

—

—

EHD2030

1–3, 5

EB2035

4990D03G22

O

—

—

EHD2035

1–3, 5

EB2040

4990D03G23

O

—

—

EHD2040

1–3, 5

EB2050

4990D03G24

O

—

—

EHD2050

1–3, 5

EB2060

4990D03G25

O

—

—

EHD2060

1–3, 5

EB2070

4990D03G26

O

—

—

EHD2070

1–3, 5

EB2080

4990D03G32

O

—

—

EHD2080

1–3, 5

EB2090

4990D03G27

O

—

—

EHD2090

1–3, 5

EB2100

4990D03G28

O

—

—

EHD2100

1–3, 5

EB2100LK

1226C25G02

O

—

—

EHD2100KL

1–3, 5, 8

EB3015

4990D03G34

O

HFB3015L

4997D19G34

EHD3015

1–3, 5

EB3015S

4991D35G02

O

HFB3015L

4997D19G34

EHD3015

1–5

EB3020

4990D03G35

O

HFB3020L

4997D19G35

EHD3020

1–3, 5

EB3020S

4991D35G03

O

HFB3020L

4997D19G35

EHD3020

1–5

EB3025

4990D03G36

O

HFB3025L

4997D19G36

EHD3025

1–3, 5

EB3025S

4991D35G04

O

HFB3025L

4997D19G36

EHD3025

1–5

EB3030

4990D03G37

O

HFB3030L

4997D19G37

EHD3030

1–3, 5

EB3030S

4991D35G05

O

HFB3030L

4997D19G37

EHD3030

1–5

EB3035

4990D03G38

O

HFB3035L

4997D19G38

EHD3035

1–3, 5

EB3035S

4991D35G06

O

HFB3035L

4997D19G38

EHD3035

1–5

EB3040

4990D03G39

O

HFB3040L

4997D19G39

EHD3040

1–3, 5

EB3040S

4991D35G07

O

HFB3040L

4997D19G39

EHD3040

1–5

EB3045

4990D03G46

O

HFB3045L

4997D19G54

EHD3045

1–3, 5

EB3045S

4990D03G40

O

HFB3045L

4997D19G54

EHD3045

1–5

EB3050

4991D35G08

O

HFB3050L

4997D19G40

EHD3050

1–3, 5

EB3050S

4990D03G41

O

HFB3050L

4997D19G40

EHD3050

1–5

EB3060

4991D35G09

O

HFB3060L

4997D19G41

EHD3060

1–3, 5

EB3060S

4990D03G42

O

HFB3060L

4997D19G41

EHD3060

1–5

EB3070

4991D35G10

O

HFB3070L

4997D19G42

EHD3070

1–3, 5

EB3070S

4990D03G48

O

HFB3070L

4997D19G42

EHD3070

1–5

EB3080

4990D03G43

O

HFB3080L

4997D19G55

EHD3080

1–3, 5

EB3080S

4991D35G11

O

HFB3080L

4997D19G55

EHD3080

1–5

EB3090

4990D03G43

O

HFB3090L

4997D19G43

EHD3090

1–3, 5

EB3090S

4991D35G11

O

HFB3090L

4997D19G43

EHD3090

1–5

EB3100

4990D03G44

O

HFB3100L

4997D19G44

EHD3100

1–3, 5

EB3100LK

1226C25G03

O

—

—

EHD3100KL

1–3, 5, 8

EB3100S

4991D35G12

O

HFB3100L

4997D19G44

EHD3100

1–5

EB3100SLK

1226C25G04

O

—

—

EHD3100KL

1–3, 5, 8

EHB1015

4989D52G02

O

—

—

EHD1015

1–3, 5

EHB1020

4989D52G03

O

—

—

EHD1020

1–3, 5

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-117

3
1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

EHB1025

4989D52G04

O

—

—

EHD1025

1–3, 5

EHB1030

4989D52G05

O

—

—

EHD1030

1–3, 5

EHB1035

4989D52G06

O

—

—

EHD1035

1–3, 5

EHB1040

4989D52G07

O

—

—

EHD1040

1–3, 5

EHB1050

4989D52G08

O

—

—

EHD1050

1–3, 5

EHB1060

4989D52G09

O

—

—

EHD1060

1–3, 5

5

EHB1070

4989D52G10

O

—

—

EHD1070

1–3, 5

EHB1080

4989D52G14

O

—

—

EHD1080

1–3, 5

6

EHB1090

4989D52G11

O

—

—

EHD1090

1–3, 5

EHB1100

4989D52G12

O

—

—

EHD1100

1–3, 5

2
3
4

7

EHB1100LK

1226C25G11

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

EHB2015

4989D52G18

O

—

—

EHD2015

1–3, 5

8

EHB2020

4989D52G19

O

—

—

EHD2020

1–3, 5

EHB2025

4989D52G20

O

—

—

EHD2025

1–3, 5

9

EHB2030

4989D52G21

O

—

—

EHD2030

1–3, 5

EHB2035

4989D52G22

O

—

—

EHD2035

1–3, 5

10

EHB2040

4989D52G23

O

—

—

EHD2040

1–3, 5

EHB2045

4989D52G29

O

—

—

EHD2045

1–3, 5

11

EHB2050

4989D52G24

O

—

—

EHD2050

1–3, 5

EHB2060

4989D52G25

O

—

—

EHD2060

1–3, 5

12

EHB2070

4989D52G26

O

—

—

EHD2070

1–3, 5

EHB2090

4989D52G27

O

—

—

EHD2090

1–3, 5

EHB2100

4989D52G28

O

—

—

EHD2100

1–3, 5

EHB2100LK

1226C25G12

O

—

—

EHD2100KL

1–3, 5, 8

EHB3015

4989D52G34

O

HFB3015L

4997D19G34

EHD3015

1–3, 5

EHB3015S

4991D35G18

O

HFB3015L

4997D19G34

EHD3015

1–5

EHB3020

4989D52G35

O

HFB3020L

4997D19G35

EHD3020

1–3, 5

EHB3020S

4991D35G19

O

HFB3020L

4997D19G35

EHD3020

1–5

EHB3025

4989D52G36

O

HFB3025L

4997D19G36

EHD3025

1–3, 5

13
14
15
16

EHB3025S

4991D35G20

O

HFB3025L

4997D19G36

EHD3025

1–5

EHB3030

4989D52G37

O

HFB3030L

4997D19G37

EHD3030

1–3, 5

17

EHB3030S

4991D35G21

O

HFB3030L

4997D19G37

EHD3030

1–5

EHB3035

4989D52G38

O

HFB3035L

4997D19G38

EHD3035

1–3, 5

18

EHB3035S

4991D35G22

O

HFB3035L

4997D19G38

EHD3035

1–5

EHB3040

4989D52G39

O

HFB3040L

4997D19G39

EHD3040

1–3, 5

19

EHB3040S

4991D35G23

O

HFB3040L

4997D19G39

EHD3040

1–5

EHB3045

4989D52G45

O

HFB3045L

4997D19G54

EHD3045

1–3, 5

20

EHB3045S

NO STYLE

O

HFB3045L

4997D19G54

EHD3045

1–5

EHB3050

4993D67G40

O

HFB3050L

4997D19G40

EHD3050

1–3, 5

21

EHB3050S

4991D35G24

O

HFB3050L

4997D19G40

EHD3050

1–5

EHB3060

4993D67G41

O

HFB3060L

4997D19G41

EHD3060

1–3, 5

22

EHB3060S

4991D35G25

O

HFB3060L

4997D19G41

EHD3060

1–5

EHB3070

4993D67G42

O

HFB3070L

4997D19G42

EHD3070

1–3, 5

23

EHB3070S

4991D35G26

O

HFB3070L

4997D19G42

EHD3070

1–5

EHB3080

4993D67G46

O

HFB3080L

4997D19G55

EHD3080

1–3, 5

24

EHB3080S

NO STYLE

O

HFB3080L

4997D19G55

EHD3080

1–5

EHB3090

4993D67G43

O

HFB3090L

4997D19G43

EHD3090

1–3, 5

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

V12-T3-118

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

EHB3090S

4991D35G27

O

HFB3090L

4997D19G43

EHD3090

1–5

EHB3100

4993D67G44

O

HFB3100L

4997D19G44

EHD3100

1–3, 5

EHB3100LK

1226C25G13

O

—

—

EHD3100KL

1–3, 5, 8

EHB3100S

4991D35G28

O

—

—

EHD3100

1–5

EHB3100SLK

1226C25G14

O

—

—

EHD3100KL

1–3, 5, 8

FB2015

4975D71G18

O

—

—

FD2015

1–3, 5

FB2020

4975D71G19

O

—

—

FD2020

1–3, 5

FB2022MRL

2610D53G03

O

—

—

HMCP003A0C

1–3, 7

FB2025

4975D71G20

O

—

—

FD2025

1–3, 5

FB2030

4975D71G21

O

—

—

FD2030

1–3, 5

FB2035

4975D71G22

O

—

—

FD2035

1–3, 5

FB2040

4975D71G23

O

—

—

FD2040

1–3, 5

FB2045MRL

2610D53G04

O

—

—

HMCP007C0C

1–3, 7

FB2050

4975D71G24

O

—

—

FD2050

1–3, 5

FB2060

4975D71G25

O

—

—

FD2060

1–3, 5

FB2070

4975D71G26

O

—

—

FD2070

1–3, 5

FB2080

4975D71G02

O

—

—

FD2080

1–3, 5

FB2090

4975D71G27

O

—

—

FD2090

1–3, 5

FB2100

4975D71G28

O

—

—

FD2100

1–3, 5

FB2100LK

1226C25G21

O

—

—

FD2100KL

1–3, 5, 8
1–3, 7

FB2110MRL

2610D53G05

O

—

—

HMCP015E0C

FB2150LK

1226C25G22

O

—

—

FD2150KL

1–3, 5, 8

FB21550MRL

2610D53G08

O

—

—

HMCP150T4C

1–3, 7

FB21800MRL

2610D53G11

O

—

—

HMCP150U4C

1–3, 7

FB2190MRL

2610D53G06

O

—

—

HMCP030H1C

1–3, 7

FB2270MRL

2610D53G10

O

—

—

HMCP030H1C

1–3, 7

FB2480MRL

2610D53G07

O

—

—

HMCP050K2C

1–3, 7

FB3015

4975D71G34

O

HFB3015L

4997D19G34

FD3015

1–3, 5

FB3015S

4991D35G34

O

HFB3015L

4997D19G34

FD3015

1–5

FB3020

4975D71G35

O

HFB3020L

4997D19G35

FD3020

1–3, 5

FB3020S

4991D35G35

O

HFB3020L

4997D19G35

FD3020

1–5

FB3022MRL

2606D95G21

O

HFB3022ML

4994D96G21

HMCP003A0C

1–3, 7

FB3022SMRL

2610D58G21

O

HFB3022ML

4994D96G21

HMCP003A0C

1–4, 7

FB3025

4975D71G36

O

HFB3025L

4997D19G36

FD3025

1–3, 5

FB3025S

4991D35G36

O

HFB3025L

4997D19G36

FD3025

1–5

FB3030

4975D71G37

O

HFB3030L

4997D19G37

FD3030

1–3, 5

FB3030S

4991D35G37

O

HFB3030L

4997D19G37

FD3030

1–5

FB3035

4975D71G38

O

HFB3035L

4997D19G38

FD3035

1–3, 5

FB3040

4975D71G39

O

HFB3040L

4997D19G39

FD3040

1–3, 5

FB3040S

4991D35G39

O

HFB3040L

4997D19G39

FD3040

1–5

FB3045L

4975D71G05

O

HFB3045L

4997D19G54

FD3045

1–3, 5

FB3045MRL

2610D53G22

O

HFB3045ML

4994D96G22

HMCP007C0C

1–3, 7

FB3045S

NO STYLE

O

HFB3045L

4997D19G54

FD3045

1–5

FB3045SMRL

2610D58G22

O

HFB3045ML

4994D96G22

HMCP007C0C

1–4, 7

FB3050

4975D71G40

O

HFB3050L

4997D19G40

FD3050

1–3, 5

FB3050S

4991D35G40

O

HFB3050L

4997D19G40

FD3050

1–5

FB3060

4975D71G41

O

HFB3060L

4997D19G41

FD3060

1–3, 5

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-119

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

FB3060S

4991D35G41

O

HFB3060L

4997D19G41

FD3060

1–5

FB3070

4975D71G42

O

HFB3070L

4997D19G42

FD3070

1–3, 5

FB3070S

4991D35G42

O

HFB3070L

4997D19G42

FD3070

1–5

FB3080

4975D71G06

O

HFB3080L

4997D19G55

FD3080

1–3, 5

FB3080S

NO STYLE

O

HFB3080L

4997D19G55

FD3080

1–5

FB3090

4975D71G43

O

HFB3090L

4997D19G43

FD3090

1–3, 5

FB3090S

4991D35G43

O

HFB3090L

4997D19G43

FD3090

1–5

FB3100

4975D71G44

O

HFB3100L

4997D19G44

FD3100

1–3, 5

FB3100LK

1226C25G23

O

—

—

FD3100KL

1–3, 5, 8

FB3100S

4991D35G44

O

HFB3100L

4997D19G44

FD3100

1–5

FB3110

4975D71G07

O

—

—

FD3110

1–3, 5

FB3110MRL

2610D53G23

O

HFB3110ML

4994D96G23

HMCP015E0C

1–3, 7

FB3110S

NO STYLE

O

—

—

FD3110

1–5

FB3110SMRL

2610D58G23

O

—

—

HMCP015E0C

1–4, 7

9

FB3125

4975D71G45

O

—

—

FD3125

1–3, 5

FB3125S

4991D35G45

O

—

—

FD3125

1–4, 5

10

FB3150

4975D71G46

O

—

—

FD3150

1–3, 5

FB3150LK

1226C25G24

O

—

—

FD3150KL

1–3, 5, 8

11

FB3150S

4991D35G46

O

—

—

FD3150

1–5

FB3150SLK

1226C25G25

O

—

—

FD3150KL

1–3, 5, 8

12

FB31550MRL

2610D53G26

O

HFB31550ML

4994D96G26

HMCP150T4C

1–3, 7

13
14
15
16

FB31550SMRL

2610D58G26

O

HFB31550ML

4994D96G26

HMCP150T4C

1–4, 7

FB31800MRL

2610D53G29

O

—

—

HMCP150U4C

1–3, 7

FB31800SMRL

2610D58G29

O

—

—

HMCP150U4C

1–4, 7

FB3190MRL

2610D53G24

O

HFB3190ML

4994D96G24

HMCP030H1C

1–3, 7

FB3190SMRL

2610D58G24

O

HFB3190ML

4994D96G24

HMCP030H1C

1–4, 7

FB3270MRL

2610D53G28

O

HFB3270ML

4994D96G28

HMCP030H1C

1–3, 7

FB3270SMRL

2610D58G28

O

HFB3270ML

4994D96G28

HMCP030H1C

1–4, 7

FB3480MRL

2610D53G25

O

HFB3480ML

4994D96G25

HMCP050K2C

1–3, 7

FB3480SMRL

2610D58G25

O

HFB3480ML

4994D96G25

HMCP050K2C

1–4, 7

FB4015

4975D71G50

O

—

—

FD4015

1–3, 5

17

FB4020

4975D71G51

O

—

—

FD4020

1–3, 5

FB4025

4975D71G52

O

—

—

FD4025

1–3, 5

18

FB4030

4975D71G53

O

—

—

FD4030

1–3, 5

FB4035

4975D71G54

O

—

—

FD4035

1–3, 5

19

FB4040

4975D71G55

O

—

—

FD4040

1–3, 5

FB4045

NO STYLE

O

—

—

FD4045

1–3, 5

20

FB4050

4975D71G56

O

—

—

FD4050

1–3, 5

FB4060

4975D71G57

O

—

—

FD4060

1–3, 5

21

FB4070

4975D71G58

O

—

—

FD4070

1–3, 5

FB4080

NO STYLE

O

—

—

FD4080

1–3, 5

22

FB4090

4975D71G59

O

—

—

FD4090

1–3, 5

FB4100

4975D71G60

O

—

—

FD4100

1–3, 5

23

FB4100LK

1226C25G26

O

—

—

FD4100KL

1–3, 5, 8

FB4150LK

1226C25G27

O

—

—

FD4150KL

1–3, 5, 8

24

HFB1015

4976D04G02

O

—

—

HFD1015

1–3, 5

HFB1020

4976D04G03

O

—

—

HFD1020

1–3, 5

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

V12-T3-120

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

HFB1025

4976D04G04

O

—

—

HFD1025

1–3, 5

HFB1030

4976D04G05

O

—

—

HFD1030

1–3, 5

HFB1035

4976D04G06

O

—

—

HFD1035

1–3, 5

HFB1040

4976D04G07

O

—

—

HFD1040

1–3, 5

HFB1045

4976D04G49

O

—

—

HFD1045

1–3, 5

HFB1050

4976D04G08

O

—

—

HFD1050

1–3, 5

HFB1060

4976D04G09

O

—

—

HFD1060

1–3, 5

HFB1070

4976D04G10

O

—

—

HFD1070

1–3, 5

HFB1080

4976D04G50

O

—

—

HFD1080

1–3, 5

HFB1090

4976D04G11

O

—

—

HFD1090

1–3, 5

HFB1100

4976D04G12

O

—

—

HFD1100

1–3, 5

HFB2015

4976D04G18

O

—

—

FD3015

1–3, 5, 6

HFB2020

4976D04G19

O

—

—

FD3020

1–3, 5, 6

HFB2022ML

2610D57G03

O

—

—

HMCP003A0C

1, 2, 3, 7

HFB2025

4976D04G20

O

—

—

FD3025

1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2030

4976D04G21

O

—

—

FD3030

1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2035

4976D04G22

O

—

—

FD3035

1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2040

4976D04G23

O

—

—

FD3040

1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2045

4976D04G51

O

—

—

FD3045

1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2045ML

2610D57G04

O

—

—

HMCP007COC

1, 2, 3, 7

HFB2050

4976D04G24

O

—

—

FD3050

1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2060

4976D04G25

O

—

—

FD3060

1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2070

4976D04G26

O

—

—

FD3070

1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2080

4976D04G52

O

—

—

FD3080

1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2090

4976D04G27

O

—

—

FD3090

1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2100

4976D04G28

O

—

—

FD3100

1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2125

4976D04G29

O

—

—

FD3125

1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2150

4976D04G30

O

—

—

FD3150

1, 2, 3, 5, 6

HFB2110ML

2610D57G05

O

—

—

HMCP015E0C

1, 2, 3, 7

HFB21550ML

2610D57G08

O

—

—

HMCP150T4C

1, 2, 3, 7

HFB21800ML

2610D57G11

O

—

—

HMCP150U4C

1, 2, 3, 7

HFB2190ML

2610D57G06

O

—

—

HMCP030H1C

1, 2, 3, 7

HFB2270ML

2610D57G10

O

—

—

HMCP030H1C

1, 2, 3, 7

HFB2480ML

2610D57G07

O

—

—

HMCP050K2C

1, 2, 3, 7

HFB3015

4976D04G34

O

HFB3015L

4997D19G34

FD3015

1, 2, 3, 5

HFB3020

4976D04G35

O

HFB3020L

4997D19G35

FD3020

1, 2, 3, 5

HFB3022ML

2610D57G21

A

—

—

HMCP003A0C

1, 2, 3, 7

HFB3025

4976D04G36

O

HFB3025L

4997D19G36

FD3025

1, 2, 3, 5

HFB3030

4976D04G37

O

HFB3030L

4997D19G37

FD3030

1, 2, 3, 5

HFB3035

4976D04G38

O

HFB3035L

4997D19G38

FD3035

1, 2, 3, 5

HFB3040

4976D04G39

O

HFB3040L

4997D19G39

FD3040

1–3, 5

HFB3045

4976D04G54

O

HFB3045L

4997D19G54

FD3045

1–3, 5

HFB3045ML

2610D57G22

A

—

—

HMCP007C0C

1–3, 7

HFB3050

4976D04G40

O

HFB3050L

4997D19G40

FD3050

1–3, 5

HFB3060

4976D04G41

O

HFB3060L

4997D19G41

FD3060

1–3, 5

HFB3070

4976D04G42

O

HFB3070L

4997D19G42

FD3070

1–3, 5

HFB3080

4976D04G55

O

HFB3080L

4997D19G55

FD3080

1–3, 5

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-121

3
1
2
3
4

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

HFB3090

4976D04G43

O

HFB3090L

4997D19G43

FD3090

1–3, 5

HFB3100

4976D04G44

O

HFB3100L

4997D19G44

FD3100

1–3, 5

HFB3110

4976D04G56

O

—

—

FD3110

1–3, 5

HFB3110ML

2610D57G23

A

—

—

HMCP015E0C

1–3, 7

HFB3125

4976D04G45

O

—

—

FD3125

1–3, 5

HFB3150

4976D04G46

O

—

—

FD3150

1–3, 5

5

HFB31550ML

2610D57G26

O

—

—

HMCP150T4C

1–3, 7

HFB31800ML

2610D57G29

O

—

—

HMCP150U4C

1–3, 7

6

HFB3190ML

2610D57G24

A

—

—

HMCP030H1C

1–3, 7

HFB3270ML

2610D57G28

A

—

—

HMCP030H1C

1–3, 7
1–3, 7

7
8
9
10

HFB3480ML

2610D57G25

A

—

—

HMCP050K2C

HKA2070

1255C59G02

O

—

—

JD2070

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA2070T

2602D83G02

O

—

—

—

2, 8
2, 8

HKA2070TA

459D987G02

O

—

—

JT2070T

HKA2090

1255C59G03

O

—

—

JD2090

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA2090T

657D789G03

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HKA2090TA

459D987G03

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HKA2100

1255C59G04

O

—

—

KD2100

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA2100T

2602D83G04

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HKA2100TA

459D987G04

O

—

—

—

2, 8

12

HKA2125

1255C59G05

O

—

—

KD2125

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA21250TM

2602D84G05

O

—

—

—

2, 8

13

HKA2125T

2602D83G05

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HKA2125TA

459D987G05

O

—

—

—

2, 8

14

HKA2150

1255C59G06

O

—

—

KD2150

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA21500TM

2602D84G06

O

—

—

—

2, 8

15

HKA2150T

2602D83G06

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HKA2150TA

459D987G06

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HKA2175

1255C59G07

O

—

—

KD2175

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA21750TM

2602D84G07

O

—

—

—

2, 8

11

16

HKA2175T

2602D83G07

O

—

—

—

2, 8

17

HKA2175TA

459D987G07

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HKA2200

1255C59G08

O

—

—

KD2200

1–3, 5, 8, 9

18

HKA2200T

2602D83G08

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HKA2200TA

459D987G08

O

—

—

—

2, 8

19

HKA2225

1255C59G09

O

—

—

KD2225

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA22250TM

2602D84G09

O

—

—

—

2, 8

20

HKA2225F

2602D86G05

O

—

—

KD2400F

2, 8

HKA2225T

2602D83G09

O

—

—

KT2225T

2, 8

21

HKA2225TA

459D987G09

O

—

—

KT2225T

2, 8

HKA2700TM

2602D84G02

O

—

—

—

2, 8

22

HKA3070

1255C59G17

O

—

—

JD3070

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA3070T

657D788G17

A

—

—

—

2, 5

HKA3070TA

459D987G17

O

HKA3070T

657D789G17

—

2, 8

HKA3090

1255C59G18

O

—

—

JD3090

1–3, 5, 8, 9

24

HKA3090T

2602D83G18

A

—

—

—

2, 5

HKA3090TA

459D987G18

O

HKA3090T

657D789G18

—

2, 8

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

23

V12-T3-122

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

HKA3100

1255C59G19

O

—

—

KD3100

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA3100T

2602D83G19

A

—

—

—

2, 5

HKA3100TA

459D987G19

O

HKA3100T

657D789G19

—

2, 8

HKA3125

1255C59G20

O

—

—

KD3125

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA3125T

2602D83G20

A

—

—

—

2, 5

HKA3125TA

459D987G20

O

HKA3125T

657D789G20

—

2, 8

HKA3150

1255C59G21

O

—

—

KD3150

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA3150T

2602D83G21

A

—

—

—

2, 5

HKA3150TA

459D987G21

O

HKA3150T

657D789G21

—

2, 8

HKA3175

1255C59G22

O

—

—

KD3175

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA3175T

2602D83G22

A

—

—

—

2, 5

HKA3175TA

459D987G22

O

HKA3175T

657D789G22

—

2, 8

HKA3200

1255C59G23

O

—

—

KD3200

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA3200T

2602D83G23

A

—

—

—

2, 5

HKA3200TA

459D987G23

O

HKA3200T

657D789G23

—

2, 8

HKA3225

1255C59G24

O

—

—

KD3225

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HKA3225F

2602D86G06

O

—

—

KD3400F

2, 8

HKA3225T

2602D83G24

A

—

—

—

2, 5

HKA3225TA

459D987G24

O

HKA3225T

657D789G24

—

2, 8

HKB2070

1291C44G01

O

—

—

JD2070

1–3, 5

HKB2070T

1293C31G01

O

—

—

—

2, 5

HKB2090

1291C44G02

O

—

—

JD2090

1–3, 5

HKB2090T

1293C31G02

O

—

—

—

—

HKB2100

1291C44G03

O

—

—

JD2100

1–3, 5

HKB21000TM

1293C35G03

O

—

—

—

—

HKB2100T

1293C31G03

O

—

—

—

—

HKB2125

1291C44G04

O

—

—

JD2125

1–3, 5

HKB21250TM

1293C35G04

O

—

—

—

—

HKB2125T

1293C31G04

O

—

—

—

—

HKB2150

1291C44G05

O

—

—

JD2150

1–3, 5

HKB21500TM

1293C35G05

O

—

—

—

—

HKB2150T

1293C31G05

O

—

—

—

—

HKB2175

1291C44G06

O

—

—

JD2175

1–3, 5

HKB21750TM

1293C35G06

O

—

—

—

—

HKB2175T

1293C31G06

O

—

—

—

—

HKB2200

1291C44G07

O

—

—

JD2200

1–3, 5

HKB2200T

1293C31G07

O

—

—

—

—

HKB2225

1291C44G08

O

—

—

JD2225

1–3, 5

HKB22250TM

1293C35G07

O

—

—

—

—

HKB2225T

1293C31G08

O

—

—

—

—

HKB2250

1291C44G09

O

—

—

JD2250

1–3, 5

HKB22500TM

1293C35G09

O

—

—

—

—

HKB2250F

2601D44G15

O

—

—

JD2250F

—

HKB2250T

4974D52G12

O

—

—

—

—

HKB2700TM

1293C35G01

O

—

—

—

—

HKB3070

1291C44G16

O

—

—

JD3070

1–3, 5

HKB3070T

1293C32G01

O

—

—

—

—

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-123

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

HKB3090

1291C44G17

O

—

—

JD3090

1–3, 5

HKB3090T

1293C32G02

O

—

—

—

—
1–3, 5

HKB3100

1291C44G18

O

—

—

JD3100

HKB31000TM

1293C36G03

O

—

—

—

—

HKB3100T

1293C32G03

O

—

—

—

—

HKB3125

1291C44G19

O

—

—

JD3125

1–3, 5

HKB31250TM

1293C36G04

O

—

—

—

—

HKB3125T

1293C32G04

O

—

—

—

—

HKB3150

1291C44G20

O

—

—

JD3150

1–3, 5

HKB31500TM

1293C36G05

O

—

—

—

—

HKB3150T

1293C32G05

O

—

—

—

—

HKB3175

1291C44G21

O

—

—

JD3175

1–3, 5

8

HKB31750TM

1293C36G06

O

—

—

—

—

HKB3175T

1293C32G06

O

—

—

—

—

9

HKB3200

1291C44G22

O

—

—

JD3200

1–3, 5

HKB3200T

1293C32G06

O

—

—

—

—

10

HKB3225

1291C44G23

O

—

—

JD3225

1–3, 5

HKB32250TM

1293C36G08

O

—

—

—

—

11

HKB3225T

1293C32G07

O

—

—

—

—

HKB3250

1291C44G24

O

—

—

JD3250

1–3, 5

12

HKB32500TM

1293C36G09

O

—

—

—

2, 5

HKB3250F

2601D44G16

O

—

—

JD3250F

—

HKB3250FS

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JD3250F

—

HKB3250T

1293C32G08

O

—

—

—

—

HKB3700TM

1293C36G01

O

—

—

—

—

HLA2070T

2602D98G02

O

—

—

—

2, 8

13
14
15

HLA2070TA

457D581G02

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2090T

2602D98G03

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2090TA

457D581G03

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2100T

2602D98G04

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2100TA

457D581G04

O

—

—

—

2, 8

17

HLA2125

1255C74G05

O

—

—

KD2125

1–3, 5, 8

HLA21250TM

2602D97G03

O

—

—

—

2, 8

18

HLA2125T

2602D98G05

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2125TA

457D581G05

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2150

1255C74G06

O

—

—

KD2150

1–3, 5, 8

HLA21500TM

2602D97G04

O

—

—

—

2, 8

16

19
20

HLA2150T

2602D98G06

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2150TA

457D581G06

O

—

—

—

2, 8

21

HLA2175

1255C74G07

O

—

—

KD2175

1–3, 5, 8

HLA21750TM

2602D97G05

O

—

—

—

2, 8

22

HLA2175T

2602D98G07

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2175TA

457D581G07

O

—

—

—

2, 8

23

HLA2200

1255C74G08

O

—

—

KD2200

1–3, 5, 8

HLA2200T

2602D98G08

O

—

—

—

2, 8

24

HLA2200TA

457D581G08

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2225

1255C74G09

O

—

—

KD2225

1–3, 5, 8

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

V12-T3-124

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

HLA22250TM

2602D97G06

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2225T

2602D98G09

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2225TA

457D581G09

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2250

1255C74G10

O

—

—

KD2250

1–3, 5, 8

HLA2250T

2602D98G10

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2250TA

457D581G10

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2300

1255C74G11

O

—

—

KD2300

1–3, 5, 8

HLA23000TM

2602D97G07

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2300T

2602D98G11

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2300TA

457D581G11

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2350

1255C74G12

O

—

—

KD2350

1–3, 5, 8

HLA2350T

2602D98G12

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2350TA

457D781G12

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2400

1255C74G13

O

—

—

KD2400

1–3, 5, 8

HLA24000TM

2602D97G08

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2400F

673B352G01

O

—

—

KD2400F

1–3, 5, 8

HLA2400T

2602D98G13

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2400TA

457D581G13

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2500

1256C10G10

O

—

—

LD2500

1–3, 5, 8

HLA25000TM

2603D47G12

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2500T

2603D46G12

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2500TA

5683D88G12

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2600

1256C10G07

O

—

—

LD2600

1–3, 5, 8

HLA26000TM

2603D47G13

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2600F

375D400G09

O

—

—

LD2600F

1–3, 5, 8

HLA2600T

2603D46G13

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2600TA

5683D88G13

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA2700TM

2602D97G02

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3070T

2602D98G21

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3070TA

457D581G21

O

HLA3070T

370D749G21

—

2, 8

HLA3090T

2602D98G22

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3090TA

457D581G22

O

HLA3090T

370D749G22

—

2, 8

HLA3100T

2602D98G23

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3100TA

457D581G23

O

HLA3100T

370D749G23

—

2, 8

HLA3125

504C740G20

A

—

—

KD3125

1–3, 5, 8

HLA31250TM

2602D97G25

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3125T

2602D98G24

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3125TA

457D581G24

O

HLA3125T

370D749G24

—

2, 8

HLA3150

504C740G21

A

—

—

KD3150

1–3, 5, 8

HLA31500TM

2602D97G26

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3150T

2602D98G25

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3150TA

457D581G25

O

HLA3150T

370D749G25

—

2, 8

HLA3175

504C740G22

A

—

—

KD3175

1–3, 5, 8

HLA31750TM

2602D97G27

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3175T

2602D98G26

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3175TA

457D581G26

O

HLA3175T

370D749G26

—

2, 8

HLA3200

504C740G23

A

—

—

KD3200

1–3, 5, 8

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-125

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

HLA3200T

2602D98G27

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3200TA

457D581G27

O

HLA3200T

370D749G27

—

2, 8

HLA3225

504C740G24

A

—

—

KD3225

1–3, 5, 8

HLA32250TM

2602D97G28

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3225T

2602D98G28

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3225TA

457D581G28

O

HLA3225T

370D749G28

—

2, 8

HLA3250

504C740G25

A

—

—

KD3250

1–3, 5, 8

HLA3250T

2602D98G29

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3250TA

457D581G29

O

HLA3250T

370D749G29

—

2, 8

HLA3300

504C740G26

A

—

—

KD3300

1–3, 5, 8

HLA33000TM

2602D97G29

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3300T

2602D98G30

A

—

—

—

2, 8
2, 8

HLA3300TA

457D581G30

O

HLA3300T

370D749G30

—

HLA3350T

2602D98G31

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3350TA

457D581G31

O

HLA3350T

370D749G31

—

2, 8

HLA3400

504C740G28

A

—

—

KD3400

1–3, 5, 8

10

HLA34000TM

2602D97G30

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3400F

673B352G02

A

—

—

KD3400F

1–3, 5, 8

11

HLA3400T

2602D98G32

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3400TA

457D581G32

O

HLA3400T

370D749G32

—

2, 8

12

HLA3500

177C429G16

A

—

—

LD3500

1–3, 5, 8

HLA35000TM

2603D47G31

A

—

—

—

2, 8

13

HLA3500T

2603D46G31

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3500TA

5683D88G31

O

HLA3500T

375D259G31

—

2, 8

14

HLA3600

177C429G17

A

—

—

LD3600

1–3, 5, 8

HLA36000TM

2603D47G32

A

—

—

—

2, 8

15

HLA3600F

2603D48G06

A

—

—

LD3600F

1–3, 5, 8

HLA3600T

2603D46G32

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLA3600TA

5683D88G32

O

HLA3600T

375D259G32

—

2, 8

16

HLA3700TM

455D565G24

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2070T

5680D04G07

O

—

—

—

2, 8

17

HLB2070TA

5680D04G31

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2090T

5680D04G08

O

—

—

—

2, 8

18

HLB2090TA

5680D04G32

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2100T

5680D04G09

O

—

—

—

2, 8

19

HLB2100TA

5680D04G33

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2125

179C848G04

O

—

—

KD2125

1–3, 5, 8, 9

20

HLB21250TM

5680D04G56

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2125T

5680D04G10

O

—

—

—

2, 8

21

HLB2125TA

5680D04G34

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2150

179C848G05

O

—

—

KD2150

1–3, 5, 8, 9

22

HLB21500TM

5680D04G57

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2150T

5680D04G11

O

—

—

—

2, 8

23

HLB2150TA

5680D04G35

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2175

179C848G06

O

—

—

KD2175

1–3, 5, 8, 9

24

HLB21750TM

5680D04G58

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2175T

5680D04G12

O

—

—

—

2, 8

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

V12-T3-126

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

HLB2175TA

5680D04G36

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2200

179C848G07

O

—

—

KD2200

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB2200T

5680D04G13

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2200TA

5680D04G37

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2225

179C848G08

O

—

—

KD2225

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB22250TM

5680D04G59

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2225T

5680D04G14

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2225TA

5680D04G38

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2250

179C848G09

O

—

—

KD2250

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB2250T

5680D04G15

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2250TA

5680D04G39

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2300

179C848G10

O

—

—

KD2300

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB23000TM

5680D04G60

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2300T

5680D04G16

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2300TA

5680D04G40

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2350

179C848G11

O

—

—

KD2350

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB2350TA

5680D04G41

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2400

179C848G12

O

—

—

KD2400

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB24000TM

5680D04G61

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2400F

5680D03G09

O

—

—

KD2400F

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB2400T

5680D04G18

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2400TA

5680D04G42

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB2700TM

5680D04G55

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3070T

5680D04G19

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3070TA

5680D04G43

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3090T

5680D04G20

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3090TA

5680D04G44

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3100T

5680D04G21

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3100TA

5680D04G45

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3125

179C848G19

O

—

—

KD3125

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB31250TM

5680D04G63

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3125T

5680D04G22

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3125TA

5680D04G46

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3150

179C848G20

O

—

—

KD3150

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB31500TM

5680D04G64

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3150T

5680D04G23

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3150TA

5680D04G47

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3175

179C848G21

O

—

—

KD3175

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB31750TM

5680D04G65

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3175T

5680D04G24

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3175TA

5680D04G48

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3200

179C848G22

O

—

—

KD3200

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB3200T

5680D04G25

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3200TA

5680D04G49

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3225

179C848G23

O

—

—

KD3225

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB32250TM

5680D04G66

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3225T

5680D04G26

O

—

—

—

2, 8

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-127

3
1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

HLB3225TA

5680D04G50

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3250

179C848G24

O

—

—

KD3250

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB3250T

5680D04G27

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3250TA

5680D04G51

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3300

179C848G25

O

—

—

KD3300

1–3, 5, 8, 9

HLB33000TM

5680D04G67

O

—

—

—

2, 8

5

HLB3300T

5680D04G28

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3300TA

5680D04G52

O

—

—

—

2, 8

6

HLB3350TA

5680D04G53

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3400

179C848G27

O

—

—

KD3400

1–3, 5, 8, 9

7

HLB34000TM

5680D04G68

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3400F

5680D03G10

O

—

—

KD3400F

1–3, 5, 8, 9

8

HLB3400T

5680D04G30

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLB3400TA

5680D04G54

O

—

—

—

2, 8

9

HLB3700TM

5680D04G62

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HLC2150F

1242C92G01

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3150LS

1–3, 5, 8

10

HLC2150FM

1242C92G03

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3150LS

1–3, 5, 8

HLC2300F

1242C92G05

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LS

1–3, 5, 8

11

HLC2300FM

1242C92G07

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LS

1–3, 5, 8

HLC2400F

1242C92G09

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LS

1–3, 5, 8

12

HLC2400FM

1242C92G11

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LS

1–3, 5, 8

HLC2600F

1242C92G13

O

—

—

LD3600F/LES3600LS

1–3, 5, 8

HLC2600FM

1242C92G15

O

—

—

LD3600F/LES3600LS

1–3, 5, 8

HLC3150F

1242C92G02

A

—

—

KD3400F/KES3150LS

1–3, 5, 8

HLC3150FM

1242C92G04

O

HLC3150F

1284C66G02

KD3400F/KES3150LS

1–3, 5, 8

HLC3300F

1242C92G06

A

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LS

1–3, 5, 8
1–3, 5, 8

2
3
4

13
14
15
16

Catalog Number

HLC3300FM

1242C92G08

O

HLC3300F

2612D41G46

KD3400F/KES3400LS

HLC3400F

1242C92G10

A

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LS

1–3, 5, 8

HLC3400FM

1242C92G12

O

HLC3400F

2613D44G08

KD3400F/KES3400LS

1–3, 5, 8

HLC3600F

1242C92G14

A

—

—

LD3600F/LES3600LS

1–3, 5, 8

HLC3600FM

1242C92G16

O

HLC3600F

2612D41G48

LD3600F/LES3600LS

1–3, 5, 8

HLCA2150F

1242C92G23

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3150LSI

1–3, 5, 8

HLCA2300F

1242C92G27

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LSI

1–3, 5, 8

HLCA2400F

1242C92G31

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LSI

1–3, 5, 8

HLCA2600F

1242C92G35

O

—

—

LD3600F/LES3600LSI

1–3, 5, 8

19

HLCA3150F

1242C92G24

A

—

—

KD3400F/KES3150LSI

1–3, 5, 8

HLCA3300F

1242C92G28

A

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LSI

1–3, 5, 8

20

HLCA3400F

1242C92G32

A

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LSI

1–3, 5, 8

HLCA3600F

1284C66G36

A

—

—

LD3600F/LES3600LSI

1–3, 5, 8
1–3, 5, 8

17
18

21
22

HLCC3600F

6590C11G14

A

—

—

CLD3600F/LES3600LS

HLCCA3600F

6590C11G36

A

—

—

CLD3600F/LES3600LSI

1–3, 5, 8

HLCCG3600F

1242C94G04

A

—

—

CLD3600F/LES3600LSG

1–3, 5, 8

HLCCGA3600F

1242C94G12

A

—

—

CLD3600F/LES3600LSIG

1–3, 5, 8

HLCG3150F

1242C89G01

A

—

—

KD3400F/KES3150LSG

1–3, 5, 8

HLCG3300F

1242C89G02

A

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LSG

1–3, 5, 8

24

HLCG3400F

1242C89G03

A

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LSG

1–3, 5, 8

HLCG3600F

1371D17G40

A

—

—

LD3600F/LES3600LS

1–3, 5, 8

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

23

V12-T3-128

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

HLCGA3150F

1242C89G09

A

—

—

KD3400F/KES3150LSIG

1–3, 5, 8

HLCGA3300F

1242C89G10

A

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LSIG

1–3, 5, 8

HLCGA3400F

1242C89G11

A

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LSIG

1–3, 5, 8

HLCGA3600F

1270C61G12

A

—

—

LD3600F/LES3600LSIG

1–3, 5, 8

HMA2125

1252C22G01

O

—

—

KD2125

1–3, 5, 8

HMA21250TM

457D455G07

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2125T

371D371G05

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2125TA

457D458G05

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2150

1252C22G02

O

—

—

KD2150

1–3, 5, 8

HMA2150T

371D371G06

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2150TA

457D458G06

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2175

1252C22G03

O

—

—

KD2175

1–3, 5, 8

HMA2175T

371D371G07

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2175TA

457D458G07

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2200

1252C22G04

O

—

—

KD2200

1–3, 5, 8

HMA22000TM

457D455G08

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2200T

371D371G08

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2200TA

457D458G08

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2225

1252C22G05

O

—

—

KD2225

1–3, 5, 8

HMA2225T

371D371G09

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2225TA

457D458G09

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2250

1252C22G06

O

—

—

KD2250

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA2250T

371D371G10

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2250TA

457D458G10

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2300

1252C22G07

O

—

—

MDL2300

1–3, 5, 8

HMA23000TM

457D455G09

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2300T

371D371G11

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2300TA

457D458G11

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2350

1252C22G08

O

—

—

MDL2350

1–3, 5, 8

HMA2350T

371D371G12

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2350TA

457D458G12

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2400

1252C22G09

O

—

—

MDL2400

1–3, 5, 8

HMA24000TM

457D455G10

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2400T

371D371G13

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2400TA

457D458G13

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2500

1252C22G10

O

—

—

MDL2500

1–3, 5, 8

HMA2500T

371D372G06

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2500TA

457D459G06

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2600

1252C22G11

O

—

—

MDL2600

1–3, 5, 8

HMA2600T

371D372G08

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2600TA

457D459G08

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2700

1252C22G12

O

—

—

MDL2700

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA2700T

371D373G10

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2700TA

457D460G10

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2800

1252C22G13

O

—

—

MDL2800

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA28000TM

457D455G12

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2800F

373B237G03

O

—

—

MDL2800F

—

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-129

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

HMA2800T

371D373G12

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA2800TA

457D460G12

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA3125

1252C22G16

A

—

—

KD3125

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA31250TM

457D455G23

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA3125T

371D371G21

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA3125TA

457D458G21

O

HMA3125T

371D371G21

—

2, 8

HMA3150

1252C22G17

A

—

—

KD3150

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA3150T

371D371G22

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA3150TA

457D458G22

O

HMA3150T

371D371G22

—

2, 8

HMA3175

1252C22G18

A

—

—

KD3175

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA3175T

371D371G23

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA3175TA

457D458G23

O

HMA3175T

371D371G23

—

2, 8

8

HMA3200

1252C22G19

A

—

—

KD3200

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA32000TM

457D455G24

A

—

—

—

2, 8

9

HMA3200T

371D371G24

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA3200TA

457D458G24

O

HMA3200T

371D371G24

—

2, 8

10

HMA3225

1252C22G20

A

—

—

KD3225

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA3225T

371D371G25

A

—

—

—

2, 8

11

HMA3225TA

457D458G25

O

HMA3225T

371D371G25

—

2, 8

HMA3250

1252C22G21

A

—

—

KD3250

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA3250T

371D371G26

A

—

—

—

2, 8
2, 8

12

HMA3250TA

457D458G26

O

HMA3250T

371D371G26

—

13

HMA3300

1252C22G22

A

—

—

MDL3300

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA33000TM

457D455G25

A

—

—

—

2, 8

14

HMA3300T

371D371G27

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA3300TA

457D458G27

O

HMA3300T

371D371G27

—

2, 8

15

HMA3350

1252C22G23

A

—

—

MDL3350

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA3350T

371D371G28

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA3350TA

457D458G28

O

HMA3350T

371D371G28

—

2, 8

16

HMA3400

1252C22G24

A

—

—

MDL3400

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA34000TM

457D455G26

A

—

—

—

2, 8

17
18
19
20
21
22

HMA3400T

371D371G29

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA3400TA

457D458G29

O

HMA3400T

371D371G29

—

2, 8

HMA3500

1252C22G25

A

—

—

MDL3500

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA3500T

371D372G22

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA3500TA

457D459G22

O

HMA3500T

371D372G22

—

2, 8

HMA3600

1252C22G26

A

—

—

MDL3600

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA36000TM

457D455G27

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA3600T

371D372G24

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HMA3600TA

457D459G24

O

HMA3600T

371D372G24

—

2, 8

HMA3700

1252C22G27

A

—

—

MDL3700

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA3700T

371D373G26

A

—

—

—

2, 8
2, 8

HMA3700TA

457D460G26

O

HMA3700T

371D373G26

—

23

HMA3800

1252C22G28

A

—

—

MDL3800

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMA38000TM

457D455G28

A

—

—

—

2, 8

24

HMA3800F

2600D43G10

A

—

—

MDL3800F

2, 8

HMA3800T

371D373G28

A

—

—

—

2, 8

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

V12-T3-130

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

HMA3800TA

457D460G28

O

HMA3800T

371D373G28

—

2, 8

HMC2800F

6590C16G05

O

—

—

MDL3800F/MES3800LS

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMC2800FM

6590C16G07

O

—

—

MDL3800F/MES3800LS

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMC3800F

6590C16G06

A

—

—

MDL3800F/MES3800LS

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMC3800FM

6590C16G08

O

HMC3800F

6590C16G06

MDL3800F/MES3800LS

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMCA2800F

6590C16G17

A

—

—

MDL3800F/MES3800LSI

1, 2, 3, 5, 8

HMCA3800F

6590C16G18

A

—

—

MDL3800F/MES3800LSI

1–3, 5, 8

HMCC3800F

6590C14G06

A

—

—

CMDL3800F/MES3800LS

1–3, 5, 8

HMCCA3800F

6590C14G18

A

—

—

CMDL3800F/MES3800LSI

1–3, 5, 8

HMCCG3800F

1242C62G09

A

—

—

CMDL3800F/MES3800LSG

1–3, 5, 8

HMCCGA3800F

1242C62G11

A

—

—

CMDL3800F/MES3800LSIG

1–3, 5, 8

HMCG3800F

1242C60G09

A

—

—

MDL3800F/MES3800LSG

1–3, 5, 8

HMCGA3800F

1242C60G11

A

—

—

MDL3800F/MES3800LSIG

1–3, 5, 8

HNB21000

1234C26G15

O

—

—

ND212T33W/12NES1000T+

1–3, 5, 8

HNB210000TM

371D590G13

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HNB21000T

371D589G13

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HNB21200

1234C26G17

O

—

—

ND212T33W/12NES1200T+

1–3, 5, 8

HNB212000TM

371D590G14

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HNB21200F

2610D64G19

O

—

—

ND212T33W

1–3, 5, 8

HNB21200T

371D589G15

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HNB26000TM

371D590G11

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HNB2700

1234C26G12

O

—

—

ND2800T33W/8NES700T+

1–3, 5, 8

HNB2700T

371D589G10

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HNB2800

1234C26G13

O

—

—

ND2800T33W/8NES800T+

1–3, 5, 8

HNB28000TM

371D590G12

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HNB2800T

371D589G11

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HNB2900

1234C26G14

O

—

—

ND212T33W/12NES900T+

1–3, 5, 8

HNB2900T

371D589G12

O

—

—

—

2, 8

HNB31000

1234C26G33

A

—

—

ND312T33W/12NES1000T+

1–3, 5, 8

HNB310000TM

371D590G29

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HNB31000T

371D589G29

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HNB31200

1234C26G35

A

—

—

ND312T33W/12NES1200T+

1–3, 5, 8

HNB312000TM

371D590G30

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HNB31200F

625B494G08

A

—

—

ND312T33W

1–3, 5, 8

HNB31200T

371D589G31

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HNB36000TM

371D590G27

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HNB3700

1234C26G30

A

—

—

ND3800T33W/8NES700T+

1–3, 5, 8

HNB3700T

371D589G26

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HNB3800

1234C26G31

A

—

—

ND3800T33W/8NES800T+

1–3, 5, 8

HNB38000TM

371D590G28

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HNB3800T

371D589G27

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HNB3900

1234C26G32

A

—

—

ND312T33W/12NES900T+

1–3, 5, 8

HNB3900T

371D589G28

A

—

—

—

2, 8

HNC21200F

2613D29G06

O

—

—

ND212T33W

1–3, 5, 8

HNC21200FM

2613D29G08

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

HNC31200F

2613D29G05

A

—

—

ND312T33W

1–3, 5, 8

HNC31200FM

2613D29G07

O

HNC31200F

2613D29G05

—

1–3, 5, 8

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-131

3
1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

HNCA21200F

2613D29G18

O

HNCA31200F

2613D29G17

ND212T32W

1–3, 5, 8

HNCA31200F

2613D29G17

A

—

—

ND312T32W

1–3, 5, 8

HNCG31200F

1242C72G04

A

—

—

ND312T35W

1–3, 5, 8

HNCGA31200F

1242C72G12

A

—

—

ND312T36W

1–3, 5, 8

JA2070

371D957G02

O

—

—

JDB2070

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2070A

456D988G80

O

—

—

JDB2070

1–3, 8, 9

5

JA2070S

657D791G46

O

—

—

JDB2070

1–5, 8, 9

JA2070SW

657D791G26

O

—

—

JDB2070W

1–5, 8, 9

6

JA2070W

657D791G02

O

—

—

JDB2070W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2090

371D957G03

O

—

—

JDB2090

1–3, 5, 8, 9

7

JA2090A

456D988G81

O

—

—

JDB2090

1–3, 8, 9

JA2090S

657D791G47

O

—

—

JDB2090

1–5, 8, 9

8

JA2090SW

657D791G27

O

—

—

JDB2090W

1–5, 8, 9

JA2090W

657D791G03

O

—

—

JDB2090W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

9

JA2100

371D957G04

O

—

—

KDB2100

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2100A

456D988G82

O

—

—

KDB2100

1–3, 8, 9

2
3
4

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

10

JA2100S

657D791G48

O

—

—

KDB2100

1–5, 8, 9

JA2100SW

657D791G28

O

—

—

KDB2100W

1–5, 8, 9

11

JA2100W

657D791G04

O

—

—

KDB2100W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2125

371D957G05

O

—

—

KDB2125

1–3, 5, 8, 9

12

JA21250MW

371D957G67

O

—

—

HM2P400F5W

1–3, 8, 9

JA21250SMW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HM2P400F5W

1–4, 8, 9

JA2125A

456D988G83

O

—

—

KDB2125

1–3, 8, 9

13
14

JA2125S

657D791G49

O

—

—

KDB2125

1–5, 8, 9

JA2125SW

657D791G29

O

—

—

KDB2125W

1–5, 8, 9

JA2125W

657D791G05

O

—

—

KDB2125W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

15

JA2150

371D957G06

O

—

—

KDB2150

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA21500MW

371D957G68

O

—

—

HM2P400G5W

1–3, 8, 9

JA21500SMW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HM2P400G5W

1–4, 8, 9

16

JA2150A

456D988G84

O

—

—

KDB2150

1–3, 8, 9

JA2150S

657D791G50

O

—

—

KDB2150

1–5, 8, 9
1–5, 8, 9

17

JA2150SW

657D791G30

O

—

—

KDB2150W

JA2150W

657D791G06

O

—

—

KDB2150W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

18

JA2175

371D957G07

O

—

—

KDB2175

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA21750MW

371D957G69

O

—

—

HM2P400J5W

1–3, 8, 9

JA21750SMW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HM2P400J5W

1–4, 8, 9

JA2175A

456D988G85

O

—

—

KDB2175

1–3, 8, 9

JA2175S

657D791G51

O

—

—

KDB2175

1–5, 8, 9

JA2175SW

657D791G31

O

—

—

KDB2175W

1–5, 8, 9

JA2175W

657D791G07

O

—

—

KDB2175W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2200

371D957G08

O

—

—

KDB2200

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2200A

456D988G86

O

—

—

KDB2200

1–3, 8, 9

JA2200S

657D791G52

O

—

—

KDB2200

1–5, 8, 9

23

JA2200SW

657D791G32

O

—

—

KDB2200W

1–5, 8, 9

JA2200W

657D791G08

O

—

—

KDB2200W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

24

JA2225

371D957G09

O

—

—

KDB2225

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA22250MW

371D957G70

O

—

—

HM2P400L5W

1–3, 8, 9

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

19
20
21
22

V12-T3-132

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

JA22250SMW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HM2P400L5W

1–4, 8, 9

JA2225A

456D988G87

O

—

—

KDB2225

1–3, 8, 9

JA2225S

657D791G53

O

—

—

KDB2225

1–5, 8, 9

JA2225SW

657D791G33

O

—

—

KDB2225W

1–5, 8, 9

JA2225W

657D791G09

O

—

—

KDB2225W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2225WK

752B047G01

O

—

—

KDB2400KW

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2225WSK

752B047G02

O

—

—

KDB2400KW

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2250W

NO STYLE

O

—

—

KDB2250W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA2700MW

371D957G66

O

—

—

HM2P400D5W

1–3, 5, 7, 8, 9

JA2700SMW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HM2P400D5W

1–5, 7–9

JA3070

371D957G12

O

—

—

JDB3070

1–3, 8, 9

JA3070A

456D988G90

O

—

—

JDB3070

1–3, 8, 9

JA3070S

657D791G56

O

—

—

JDB3070

1–5, 8, 9

JA3070SW

657D791G36

O

—

—

JDB3070W

1–5, 8, 9

JA3070W

657D791G12

O

—

—

JDB3070W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3090

371D957G13

O

—

—

JDB3090

1–3, 8, 9

JA3090A

456D988G91

O

—

—

JDB3090

1–3, 8, 9

JA3090S

657D791G57

O

—

—

JDB3090

1–5, 8, 9

JA3090SW

657D791G37

O

—

—

JDB3090W

1–5, 8, 9

JA3090W

657D791G13

O

—

—

JDB3090W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3100

371D957G14

O

—

—

KDB3100

1–3, 8, 9

JA3100A

456D988G92

O

—

—

KDB3100

1–3, 8, 9

JA3100S

657D791G58

O

—

—

KDB3100

1–5, 8, 9

JA3100SW

657D791G38

O

—

—

KDB3100W

1–5, 8, 9

JA3100W

657D791G14

O

—

—

KDB3100W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3125

371D957G15

O

—

—

KDB3125

1–3, 8, 9

JA31250MW

371D957G74

O

—

—

HMCP400F5W

1–3, 8, 9

JA31250SMW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HMCP400F5W

1–4, 8, 9

JA3125A

456D988G93

O

—

—

KDB3125

1–3, 8, 9

JA3125S

657D791G59

O

—

—

KDB3125

1–5, 8, 9

JA3125SW

657D791G39

O

—

—

KDB3125W

1–5, 8, 9

JA3125W

657D791G15

O

—

—

KDB3125W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3150

371D957G16

O

—

—

KDB3150

1–3, 8, 9

JA31500MW

371D957G75

O

—

—

HMCP400G5W

1–3, 8, 9

JA31500SMW

82E2537

O

—

—

HMCP400G5W

1–4, 8, 9

JA3150A

456D988G94

O

—

—

KDB3150

1–3, 8, 9

JA3150S

657D791G60

O

—

—

KDB3150

1–5, 8, 9

JA3150SW

657D791G40

O

—

—

KDB3150W

1–5, 8, 9

JA3150W

657D791G16

O

—

—

KDB3150W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3175

371D957G17

O

—

—

KDB3175

1–3, 8, 9

JA31750MW

371D957G76

O

—

—

HMCP400J5W

1–3, 8, 9

JA31750SMW

82E0668

O

—

—

HMCP400J5W

1–4, 8, 9

JA3175A

456D988G95

O

—

—

KDB3175

1–3, 8, 9

JA3175S

657D791G61

O

—

—

KDB3175

1–5, 8, 9

JA3175SW

657D791G41

O

—

—

KDB3175W

1–5, 8, 9

JA3175W

657D791G17

O

—

—

KDB3175W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3200

371D957G18

O

—

—

KDB3200

1–3, 8, 9

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-133

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

JA3200A

456D988G96

O

—

—

KDB3200

1–3, 8, 9

JA3200S

657D791G62

O

—

—

KDB3200

1–5, 8, 9

JA3200SW

657D791G42

O

—

—

KDB3200W

1–5, 8, 9

JA3200W

657D791G18

O

—

—

KDB3200W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3225

371D957G19

O

—

—

KDB3225

1–3, 8, 9

JA32250MW

371D957G77

O

—

—

HMCP400L5W

1–3, 8, 9

JA32250SMW

82E8642

O

—

—

HMCP400L5W

1–4, 8, 9

JA3225A

456D988G97

O

—

—

KDB3225

1–3, 8, 9

JA3225S

657D791G63

O

—

—

KDB3225

1–5, 8, 9

JA3225SW

657D791G43

O

—

—

KDB3225W

1–5, 8, 9
1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3225W

657D791G19

O

—

—

KDB3225W

JA3225WK

752B047G06

O

—

—

KDB3400KW

1–3, 5, 8, 9

8

JA3225WSK

752B047G07

O

—

—

KDB3400KW

1–3, 5, 8, 9

JA3250W

NO STYLE

O

—

—

KDB3250W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

9

JA3700MW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HMCP400D5W

1–3, 5, 7–9

10
11
12
13
14
15
16

JA3700SMW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HMCP400D5W

1–5, 7–9

JB2070

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2070

1–3, 5

JB2070S

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2070

1–5

JB2070SW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2070W

1–5

JB2070W

752B417G34

O

—

—

JDB2070W

1–3, 5

JB2090

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2090

1–3, 5

JB2090S

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2090

1–5

JB2090SW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2090W

1–5

JB2090W

752B417G35

O

—

—

JDB2090W

1–3, 5

JB2100

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2100

1–3, 5

JB2100S

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2100

1–5

JB2100SW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2100W

1–5

JB2100W

752B417G01

O

—

—

JDB2100W

1–3, 5

JB2125

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2125

1–3, 5

JB21250MW

752B416G02

O

—

—

HM2P250F5W

1–3

JB21250SMW

752B416G14

O

—

—

HM2P250F5W

1–4

17

JB2125S

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2125

1–5

JB2125SW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2125W

1–5

18

JB2125W

752B417G02

O

—

—

JDB2125W

1–3, 5

JB2150

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2150

1–3, 5

19

JB21500MW

752B416G03

O

—

—

HM2P250G5W

1–3

JB21500SMW

752B416G15

O

—

—

HM2P250G5W

1–4

20

JB2150S

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2150

1–5

JB2150SW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2150W

1–5

21

JB2150W

752B417G03

O

—

—

JDB2150W

1–3, 5

JB2175

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2175

1–3, 5

22

JB21750MW

752B416G04

O

—

—

HM2P250J5W

1–3

JB21750SMW

752B416G16

O

—

—

HM2P250J5W

1–4

23

JB2175S

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2175

1–5

JB2175SW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2175W

1–5

24

JB2175W

752B417G04

O

—

—

JDB2175W

1–3, 5

JB2200

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2200

1–3, 5

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

V12-T3-134

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

JB2200S

81E6623

O

—

—

JDB2200

1–5

JB2200SW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2200W

1–5

JB2200W

752B417G05

O

—

—

JDB2200W

1–3, 5

JB2225

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2225

1–3, 5

JB22250MW

752B416G05

O

—

—

HM2P250L5W

1–3

JB22250SMW

752B416G17

O

—

—

HM2P250L5W

1–3, 4

JB2225S

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2225

1–5

JB2225SW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2225W

1–5

JB2225W

752B417G06

O

—

—

JDB2225W

1–3, 5

JB2250

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2250

1–3, 5

JB22500MW

752B416G06

O

—

—

HM2P250W5W

1–3

JB22500SMW

752B416G18

O

—

—

HM2P250W5W

1–3, 4

JB2250S

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2250

1–5

JB2250SW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2250W

1–5

JB2250SWK

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB2250KW

1–3, 5, 8

JB2250W

752B417G07

O

—

—

JDB2250W

1–3, 5

JB2250WK

752B046G01

O

—

—

JDB2250KW

1–3, 5, 8

JB2700MW

752B416G01

O

—

—

HM2P250A5W

1–3

JB2700SMW

752B416G13

O

—

—

HM2P250A5W

1–4

JB3070

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3070

1–3, 5
1–5

JB3070S

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3070

JB3070SW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3070W

1–5

JB3070W

752B417G08

O

—

—

JDB3070W

1–3, 5

JB3090

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3090

1–3, 5

JB3090S

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3090

1–5

JB3090SW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3090W

1–5

JB3090W

752B417G09

O

—

—

JDB3090W

1–3, 5

JB3100

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3100

1–3, 5

JB3100S

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3100

1–5

JB3100SW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3100W

1–5

JB3100W

752B417G10

O

—

—

JDB3100W

1–3, 5

JB3125

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3125

1–3, 5

JB31250MW

752B416G08

O

—

—

HMCP250F5W

1–3

JB3100W

752B417G10

O

—

—

JDB3100W

1–3, 5

JB3125

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3125

1–3, 5

JB31250MW

752B416G08

O

—

—

HMCP250F5W

1–3

JB31250SMW

752B416G20

O

—

—

HMCP250F5W

1–4

JB3125S

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3125

1–5

JB3125SW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3125W

1–5

JB3125W

752B417G11

O

—

—

JDB3125W

1–3, 5

JB3150

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3150

1–3, 5

JB31500MW

752B416G09

O

—

—

HMCP250G5W

1–3

JB31500SMW

752B416G21

O

—

—

HMCP250G5W

1–4

JB3150S

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3150

1–5

JB3150SW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3150W

1–5

JB3150W

752B417G12

O

—

—

JDB3150W

1–3, 5

JB3175

69E1870

O

—

—

JDB3175

1–3, 5

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-135

3
1
2
3
4

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

JB31750MW

752B416G10

O

—

—

HMCP250J5W

1–3

JB31750SMW

752B416G22

O

—

—

HMCP250J5W

1–4

JB3175S

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3175

1–5

JB3175SW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3175W

1–5

JB3175W

752B417G13

O

—

—

JDB3175W

1–3, 5

JB3200

69E9992

O

—

—

JDB3200

1–3, 5

JB3200S

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3200

1–5

JB3200SW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3200W

1–5

6

JB3200W

752B417G14

O

—

—

JDB3200W

1–3, 5

JB3225

80E9836

O

—

—

JDB3225

1–3, 5

7

JB32250MW

752B416G11

O

—

—

HMCP250L5W

1–3

JB32250SMW

752B416G23

O

—

—

HMCP250L5W

1–4

8

JB3225S

63E6442

O

—

—

JDB3225

1–5

JB3225SW

752B417G15

O

—

—

JDB3225W

1–5

JB3225W

80E8211

O

—

—

JDB3225W

1–3, 5

JB3250

752B416G12

O

—

—

JDB3250

1–3, 5

JB32500MW

752B416G24

O

—

—

HMCP250W5W

1–3

JB32500SMW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HMCP250W5W

1–4

11

JB3250S

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3250

1–5

JB3250SW

NO STYLE

O

—

—

JDB3250W

1–5

12

JB3250W

752B417G16

O

—

—

JDB3250W

1–3, 5

5

9
10

13
14

JB3250WK

752B046G06

O

—

—

JDB3250KW

1–3, 5, 8

JB3250WSK

752B046G07

O

—

—

JDB3250KW

1–3, 5, 8

JB3700MW

752B416G07

O

—

—

HMCP250A5W

1–3

JB3700SMW

752B416G19

O

—

—

HMCP250A5W

1–4

KA2070

1255C53G02

O

—

—

JD2070

1–3, 5, 8, 9

15

KA2070S

1255C54G02

O

—

—

JD2070

1–5, 8, 9

KA2090

1255C53G03

O

—

—

JD2090

1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA2090S

1255C54G03

O

—

—

JD2090

1–5, 8, 9

16

KA2100

1255C53G04

O

—

—

KD2100

1–3, 5, 8, 9

17
18
19
20
21

KA2100S

1255C54G04

O

—

—

KD2100

1–5, 8, 9

KA2125

1255C53G05

O

—

—

KD2125

1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA2125S

1255C54G05

O

—

—

KD2125

1–5, 8, 9

KA2150

1255C53G06

O

—

—

KD2150

1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA2175

1255C53G07

O

—

—

KD2175

1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA2175S

1255C54G07

O

—

—

KD2175

1–5, 8, 9

KA2200

1255C53G08

O

—

—

KD2200

1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA2200S

1255C54G08

O

—

—

KD2200

1–5, 8, 9

KA2225

1255C53G09

O

—

—

KD2225

1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA2225F

2602D86G01

O

—

—

KD2400F

2, 8

KA2225FS

2602D86G03

O

—

—

KD2400F

2, 4, 8

KA2225S

1255C54G09

O

—

—

KD2225

1–5, 8, 9

KA2225WK

752B047G03

O

—

—

KD2400KW

1–3, 5, 8, 9

23

KA2225WSK

752B047G04

O

—

—

KD2400KW

1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA2150S

1255C54G06

O

—

—

KD2150

1–5, 8, 9

24

KA3070

1255C53G17

O

—

—

JD3070

1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3070S

1255C54G17

O

—

—

JD3070

1–5, 8, 9

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

22

V12-T3-136

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

KA3090

1255C53G18

O

—

—

JD3090

1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3090S

1255C54G18

O

—

—

JD3090

1–5, 8, 9

KA3100

1255C53G19

O

—

—

KD3100

1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3100S

1255C54G19

O

—

—

KD3100

1–5, 8, 9

KA3125

1255C53G20

O

—

—

KD3125

1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3125S

1255C54G20

O

—

—

KD3125

1–5, 8, 9

KA3150

1255C53G21

O

—

—

KD3150

1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3150S

1255C54G21

O

—

—

KD3150

1–5, 8, 9

KA3175

1255C53G22

O

—

—

KD3175

1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3175S

504C335G22

O

—

—

KD3175

1–5, 8, 9

KA3200

504C335G23

O

—

—

KD3200

1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3200S

504C335G23

O

—

—

KD3200

1–5, 8, 9

KA3225

504C336G24

O

—

—

KD3225

1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3225F

2602D86G02

O

—

—

KD3400F

2, 8

KA3225FS

2602D86G04

O

—

—

KD3400F

2, 4, 8

KA3225S

504C335G24

O

—

—

KD3225

1–5, 8, 9

KA3225WK

752B047G08

O

—

—

KD3400KW

1–3, 5, 8, 9

KA3225WSK

752B047G09

O

—

—

KD3400KW

1–3, 5, 8, 9

KB2070

1291C40G01

O

—

—

JD2070

1–3, 5

KB2090

1291C40G02

O

—

—

JD2090

1–3, 5

KB2100

1291C40G03

O

—

—

JD2100

1–3, 5

KB2125

1291C40G04

O

—

—

JD2125

1–3, 5

KB2150

1291C40G05

O

—

—

JD2150

1–3, 5

KB2175

1291C40G06

O

—

—

JD2175

1–3, 5

KB2200

1291C40G07

O

—

—

JD2200

1–3, 5

KB2225

1291C40G08

O

—

—

JD2225

1–3, 5

KB2250

1291C40G09

O

—

—

JD2250

1–3, 5

KB2250F

2601D44G13

O

—

—

JD2250F

—

KB2250FS

2601D44G17

O

—

—

JD2250F

—

KB2250WK

752B046G03

O

—

—

JD2250KW

1–3, 5, 8

KB2250WSK

752B046G04

O

—

—

JD2250KW

1–3, 5, 8

KB3070

1291C40G16

O

—

—

JD3070

1–3, 5

KB3090

1291C40G17

O

—

—

JD3090

1–3, 5

KB3100

1291C40G18

O

—

—

JD3100

1–3, 5

KB3125

1291C40G19

O

—

—

JD3125

1–3, 5

KB3150

1291C40G20

O

—

—

JD3150

1–3, 5

KB3175

1291C40G21

O

—

—

JD3175

1–3, 5

KB3200

1291C40G22

O

—

—

JD3200

1–3, 5

KB3225

1291C40G23

O

—

—

JD3225

1–3, 5

KB3250

1291C40G24

O

—

—

JD3250

1–3, 5

KB3250F

2601D44G14

O

—

—

JD3250F

—

KB3250WK

752B046G08

O

—

—

JD3250KW

1–3, 5, 8

KB3250WSK

752B046G09

O

—

—

JD3250KW

1–3, 5, 8

LA2070

1255C72G02

O

—

—

KD2070

1–3, 5, 8

LA2070S

1255C73G02

O

—

—

KD2070

1–5, 8

LA2090

1255C72G03

O

—

—

KD2090

1–3, 5, 8

LA2090S

1255C73G03

O

—

—

KD2090

1–5, 8

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-137

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

LA2100

1255C72G04

O

—

—

KD2100

1–3, 5, 8

LA2100S

1255C73G04

O

—

—

KD2100

1–5, 8

LA2125

1255C72G05

O

—

—

KD2125

1–3, 5, 8

LA2125S

1255C73G05

O

—

—

KD2125

1–5, 8

LA2150

1255C72G06

O

—

—

KD2150

1–3, 5, 8

LA2150S

1255C73G06

O

—

—

KD2150

1–5, 8

LA2175

1255C72G07

O

—

—

KD2175

1–3, 5, 8

LA2175S

1255C73G07

O

—

—

KD2175

1–5, 8

LA2200

1255C72G08

O

—

—

KD2200

1–3, 5, 8

LA2200S

1255C73G08

O

—

—

KD2200

1–5, 8
1–3, 5, 8

LA2225

1255C72G09

O

—

—

KD2225

LA2225S

1255C73G09

O

—

—

KD2225

1–5, 8

LA2250

1255C72G10

O

—

—

KD2250

1–3, 5, 8

LA2250S

1255C73G10

O

—

—

KD2250

1–5, 8

LA2300

1255C72G11

O

—

—

KD2300

1–3, 5, 8

LA2300S

1255C73G11

O

—

—

KD2300

1–5, 8

10

LA2350

1255C72G12

O

—

—

KD2350

1–3, 5, 8

LA2350S

1255C73G12

O

—

—

KD2350

1–5, 8

11

LA2400

1255C72G13

O

—

—

KD2400

1–3, 5, 8

LA2400F

2602D99G01

O

—

—

KD2400F

1–3, 5, 8

LA2400FS

2602D99G03

O

—

—

KD2400F

1–5, 8

LA2400S

1255C73G13

O

—

—

KD2400

1–5, 8

13

LA2400WK

752B042G01

O

—

—

KD2400KW

1–3, 5, 8

LA2400WSK

752B042G02

O

—

—

KD2400KW

1–3, 5, 8

14

LA2500

2603D50G05

O

—

—

LD2500

1–3, 5, 8

LA2500S

2603D50G17

O

—

—

LD2500

1–5, 8

15

LA2600

2603D50G06

O

—

—

LD2500

1–3, 5, 8

LA2600F

2603D48G01

O

—

—

LD2600F

1–3, 5, 8

LA2600FS

2603D48G03

O

—

—

LD2600F

1–5, 8

16

LA2600S

2600D50G18

O

—

—

LD2600

1–5, 8

LA2600WK

752B043G01

O

—

—

LD2600KW

1–3, 5, 8

17

LA2600WSK

752B043G02

O

—

—

LD2600KW

1–3, 5, 8

LA3070

1255C72G17

O

HLA3070

504C740G17

KD3070

1–3, 5, 8

18

LA3070S

504C612G17

O

HLA3070

504C740G17

KD3070

1–5, 8

LA3090

1255C72G18

O

HLA3090

504C740G18

KD3090

1–3, 5, 8

19

LA3090S

504C612G18

O

HLA3090

504C740G18

KD3090

1–5, 8

LA3100

1255C72G19

O

HLA3100

504C740G19

KD3100

1–3, 5, 8

20

LA3100S

504C612G19

O

HLA3100

504C740G19

KD3100

1–5, 8

LA3125

1255C72G20

O

HLA3125

504C740G20

KD3125

1–3, 5, 8

21

LA3125S

504C612G20

O

HLA3125

504C740G20

KD3125

1–5, 8

LA3150

1255C72G21

O

HLA3150

504C740G21

KD3150

1–3, 5, 8

22

LA3150S

504C612G21

O

HLA3150

504C740G21

KD3150

1–5, 8

LA3175

1255C72G22

O

HLA3175

504C740G22

KD3175

1–3, 5, 8

23

LA3175S

504C612G22

O

HLA3175

504C740G22

KD3175

1–5, 8

LA3200

1255C72G23

O

HLA3200

504C740G23

KD3200

1–3, 5, 8

24

LA3200S

504C612G23

O

HLA3200

504C740G23

KD3200

1–5, 8

LA3225

1255C72G24

O

HLA3225

504C740G24

KD3225

1–3, 5, 8

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

12

V12-T3-138

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

LA3225S

504C612G24

O

HLA3225

504C740G24

KD3225

1–5, 8

LA3250

1255C72G25

O

HLA3250

504C740G25

KD3250

1–3, 5, 8

LA3250S

504C612G25

O

HLA3250

504C740G25

KD3250

1–5, 8

LA3300

1255C72G26

O

HLA3300

504C740G26

KD3300

1–3, 5, 8

LA3300S

504C612G26

O

HLA3300

504C740G26

KD3300

1–5, 8

LA3350

1255C72G27

O

HLA3350

504C740G27

KD3350

1–3, 5, 8

LA3350S

504C612G27

O

HLA3350

504C740G27

KD3350

1–5, 8

LA3400

1255C72G27

O

HLA3400

504C740G28

KD3400

1–3, 5, 8

LA3400F

2602D99G02

O

HLA3400F

673B352G02

KD3400F

1–3, 5, 8

LA3400FS

673B352G02

O

HLA3400F

673B352G02

KD3400F

1–5, 8

LA3400S

1255C73G28

O

HLA3400

504C740G28

KD3400

1–5, 8

LA3400WK

752B042G06

O

—

—

KD3400KW

1–3, 5, 8

LA3400WSK

752B042G07

O

—

—

KD3400KW

1–3, 5, 8

LA3500

376D551G11

O

HLA3500

177C429G16

LD3500

1–3, 5, 8

LA3500S

376D551G23

O

HLA3500

177C429G16

LD3500

1–5, 8

LA3600

376D551G12

O

HLA3600

177C429G17

LD3600

1–3, 5, 8

LA3600F

375D400G02

O

HLA3600F

375D400G10

LD3600F

1–3, 5, 8

LA3600FS

375D400G04

O

HLA3600F

375D400G10

LD3600F

1–5, 8

LA3600S

376D551G24

O

HLA3600

177C429G17

LD3600

1–5, 8

LA3600WK

752B043G06

O

—

—

LD3600KW

1–3, 5, 8

LA3600WSK

752B043G07

O

—

—

LD3600KW

1–3, 5, 8

LAB2125

372D300G05

O

—

—

KDB2125

1–3, 5, 8

LAB21250MW

371D426G03

O

—

—

HM2P400F5W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB21250SMW

371D426G23

O

—

—

HM2P400F5W

1–5, 8

LAB2125A

372D301G45

O

—

—

KDB2125

1–3, 5, 8

LAB2125S

372D300G37

O

—

—

KDB2125

1–5, 8

LAB2125SW

371D333G37

O

—

—

KDB2125W

1–5, 8

LAB2125W

371D333G05

O

—

—

KDB2125W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB2150

372D300G06

O

—

—

KDB2150

1–3, 5, 8

LAB21500MW

371D426G04

O

—

—

HM2P400G5W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB21500SMW

371D426G24

O

—

—

HM2P400G5W

1–5, 8

LAB2150A

372D301G46

O

—

—

KDB2150

1–3, 5, 8

LAB2150S

372D300G38

O

—

—

KDB2150

1–5, 8

LAB2150SW

371D333G38

O

—

—

KDB2150W

1–5, 8

LAB2150W

371D333G06

O

—

—

KDB2150W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB2175

372D300G07

O

—

—

KDB2175

1–3, 5, 8

LAB21750MW

371D426G05

O

—

—

HM2P400J5W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB21750SMW

371D426G25

O

—

—

HM2P400J5W

1–5, 8

LAB2175A

372D301G47

O

—

—

KDB2175

1–3, 5, 8

LAB2175S

372D300G39

O

—

—

KDB2175

1–5, 8

LAB2175SW

371D333G39

O

—

—

KDB2175W

1–5, 8

LAB2175W

371D333G07

O

—

—

KDB2175W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB2200

372D300G08

O

—

—

KDB2200

1–3, 5, 8

LAB2200A

371D301G48

O

—

—

KDB2200

1–3, 5, 8

LAB2200S

372D300G40

O

—

—

KDB2200

1–5, 8

LAB2200SW

371D333G40

O

—

—

KDB2200W

1–5, 8

LAB2200W

371D333G08

O

—

—

KDB2200W

1–3, 5, 8

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-139

3
1
2
3
4

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

LAB2225

372D300G09

O

—

—

KDB2225

1–3, 5, 8

LAB22250MW

371D426G06

O

—

—

HM2P400L5W

1–3, 5, 8
1–5, 8

LAB22250SMW

371D426G26

O

—

—

HM2P400L5W

LAB2225A

372D301G49

O

—

—

KDB2225

1–3, 5, 8

LAB2225S

372D300G41

O

—

—

KDB2225

1–5, 8

LAB2225SW

371D333G41

O

—

—

KDB2225W

1–5, 8

5

LAB2225W

371D333G09

O

—

—

KDB2225W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB22400A

NO STYLE

O

—

—

KDB2400

1–3, 5, 8

6

LAB2250

372D300G10

O

—

—

KDB2250

1–3, 5, 8

LAB2250A

372D301G50

O

—

—

KDB2250

1–3, 5, 8

7

LAB2250S

372D300G42

O

—

—

KDB2250

1–5, 8

LAB2250SW

371D333G42

O

—

—

KDB2250W

1–5, 8

8

LAB2250W

371D333G10

O

—

—

KDB2250W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB2300

372D300G11

O

—

—

KDB2300

1–3, 5, 8

9

LAB23000MW

371D426G07

O

—

—

HM2P400N5W

1–3, 5, 8
1–5, 8

LAB23000SMW

371D426G27

O

—

—

HM2P400N5W

10

LAB2300A

372D301G51

O

—

—

KDB2300

1–3, 5, 8

LAB2300S

372D300G43

O

—

—

KDB2300

1–5, 8

11

LAB2300SW

371D333G43

O

—

—

KDB2300W

1–5, 8

LAB2300W

371D333G11

O

—

—

KDB2300W

1–3, 5, 8

12

LAB2350

372D300G12

O

—

—

KDB2350

1–3, 5, 8

LAB2350A

372D301G52

O

—

—

KDB2350

1–3, 5, 8

13

LAB2350S

372D300G44

O

—

—

KDB2350

1–5, 8

LAB2350W

371D333G12

O

—

—

KDB2350W

1–3, 5, 8

14

LAB2400

372D300G13

O

—

—

KDB2400

1–3, 5, 8

LAB24000MW

371D426G08

O

—

—

HM2P400X5W

1–3, 5, 8

15

LAB24000SMW

371D426G28

O

—

—

HM2P400X5W

1–5, 8

LAB2400S

372D300G45

O

—

—

KDB2400

1–5, 8

LAB2400SW

371D333G45

O

—

—

KDB2400W

1–5, 8

16

LAB2400W

371D333G13

O

—

—

KDB2400W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB2400WK

752B042G03

O

—

—

KDB2400KW

1–3, 5, 8

17

LAB2400WSK

752B042G04

O

—

—

KDB2400KW

1–3, 5, 8

LAB2700MW

371D426G02

O

—

—

HM2P400D5W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB2700SMW

371D426G22

O

—

—

HM2P400D5W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3125

372D300G20

O

HLA3125

504C740G20

KDB3125

1–3, 5, 8

19

LAB31250MW

371D426G13

O

HLA31250MW

—

HMCP400F5W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB31250SMW

371D426G33

O

HLA31250MW

—

HMCP400F5W

1–5, 8

20

LAB3125A

372D301G60

O

HLA3125

504C740G20

KDB3125

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3125S

372D300G52

O

HLA3125

504C740G20

KDB3125

1–5, 8

21

LAB3125SW

371D333G52

O

HLA3125W

—

KDB3125W

1–5, 8

LAB3125W

371D333G20

O

HLA3125W

—

KDB3125W

1–3, 5, 8

22

LAB3150

372D300G21

O

HLA3150

504C740G21

KDB3150

1–3, 5, 8

LAB31500MW

371D426G14

O

HLA31500MW

—

HMCP400G5W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB31500SMW

371D426G34

O

HLA31500MW

—

HMCP400G5W

1–5, 8

LAB3150A

372D301G61

O

HLA3150

504C740G21

KDB3150

1–3, 5, 8

24

LAB3150S

372D300G53

O

HLA3150

504C740G21

KDB3150

1–5, 8

LAB3150SW

371D333G53

O

HLA3150W

—

KDB3150W

1–5, 8

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

18

23

V12-T3-140

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

LAB3150W

371D333G21

O

HLA3150W

—

KDB3150W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3175

372D300G22

O

HLA3175

504C740G22

KDB3175

1–3, 5, 8

LAB31750MW

371D426G15

O

HLA31750MW

—

HMCP400J5W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB31750SMW

371D426G35

O

HLA31750MW

—

HMCP400J5W

1–5, 8

LAB3175A

372D301G62

O

HLA3175

504C740G22

KDB3175

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3175S

372D300G54

O

HLA3175

504C740G22

KDB3175

1–5, 8

LAB3175SW

371D333G54

O

HLA3175W

—

KDB3175W

1–5, 8

LAB3175W

371D333G22

O

HLA3175W

—

KDB3175W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3200

372D300G23

O

HLA3200

504C740G23

KDB3200

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3200A

372D301G63

O

HLA3200

504C740G23

KDB3200

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3200S

372D300G55

O

HLA3200

504C740G23

KDB3200

1–5, 8

LAB3200SW

371D333G55

O

HLA3200W

—

KDB3200W

1–5, 8

LAB3200W

371D333G23

O

HLA3200W

—

KDB3200W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3225

372D300G24

O

HLA3225

504C740G24

KDB3225

1–3, 5, 8

LAB32250MW

371D426G16

O

HLA32250MW

—

HMCP400L5W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB32250SMW

371D426G36

O

HLA32250MW

—

HMCP400L5W

1–5, 8

LAB3225A

372D301G64

O

HLA3225

504C740G24

KDB3225

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3225S

372D300G56

O

HLA3225

504C740G24

KDB3225

1–5, 8

LAB3225SW

371D333G56

O

HLA3225W

—

KDB3225W

1–5, 8

LAB3225W

371D333G24

O

HLA3225W

—

KDB3225W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3250

372D300G25

O

HLA3250

504C740G25

KDB3250

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3250A

372D301G65

O

HLA3250

504C740G25

KDB3250

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3250S

372D300G57

O

HLA3250

504C740G25

KDB3250

1–5, 8

LAB3250SW

371D333G57

O

HLA3250W

—

KDB3250W

1–5, 8

LAB3250W

371D333G25

O

HLA3250W

—

KDB3250W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3300

372D300G26

O

HLA3300

504C740G26

KDB3300

1–3, 5, 8

LAB33000MW

371D426G17

O

HLA33000MW

—

HMCP400N5W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB33000SMW

371D426G37

O

HLA33000MW

—

HMCP400N5W

1–5, 8

LAB3300A

372D301G66

O

HLA3300

504C740G26

KDB3300

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3300S

372D300G58

O

HLA3300

504C740G26

KDB3300

1–5, 8

LAB3300SW

371D333G58

O

HLA3300W

—

KDB3300W

1–, 5, 8

LAB3300W

371D333G26

O

HLA3300W

—

KDB3300W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3350A

372D301G67

O

HLA3350

504C740G27

KDB3350

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3350S

372D300G59

O

HLA3350

504C740G27

KDB3350

1–5, 8

LAB3350SW

371D333G59

O

HLA3350W

—

KDB3350W

1–5, 8

LAB3400

372D300G28

O

HLA3400

504C740G28

KDB3400

1–3, 5, 8

LAB34000MW

371D426G18

O

HLA34000MW

—

HMCP400X5W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB34000SMW

371D426G38

O

HLA34000MW

—

HMCP400X5W

1–5, 8

LAB3400A

372D301G68

O

HLA3400

504C740G28

KDB3400

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3400S

372D300G60

O

HLA3400

504C740G28

KDB3400

1–5, 8

LAB3400SW

371D333G60

O

HLA3400W

—

KDB3400W

1–5, 8

LAB3400W

371D333G28

O

HLA3400W

—

KDB3400W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3400WK

752B042G08

O

—

—

KDB3400KW

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3400WSK

752B042G09

O

—

—

KDB3400KW

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3700MW

371D426G12

O

HLA3700MW

—

HMCP400D5W

1–3, 5, 8

LAB3700SMW

371D426G32

O

HLA3700MW

—

HMCP400D5W

1–5, 8

LAY3250

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HKD3250

—

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-141

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

LAY3300

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HLD3300

—

LAY3350

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HLD3350

—

LAY3400

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HLD3400

—

LAY3500

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HLD3500

—

LAY3600

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HLD3600

—
—

LAY3600F

1240C53G01

O

—

—

HLD3600F

LB2070

179C800G01

O

—

—

KD2070

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2070S

179C803G01

O

—

—

KD2070

1–5, 8, 9

LB2090

179C800G02

O

—

—

KD2090

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2090S

179C803G02

O

—

—

KD2090

1–5, 8, 9

LB2100

179C800G03

O

—

—

KD2100

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2100S

179C803G03

O

—

—

KD2100

1–5, 8, 9

8

LB2125

179C800G04

O

—

—

KD2125

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2125S

179C803G04

O

—

—

KD2125

1–5, 8, 9

9

LB2150

179C800G05

O

—

—

KD2150

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2150S

179C803G05

O

—

—

KD2150

1–5, 8, 9

10

LB2175

179C800G06

O

—

—

KD2175

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2175S

179C803G06

O

—

—

KD2175

1–5, 8, 9

11

LB2200

179C800G07

O

—

—

KD2200

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2200S

179C803G07

O

—

—

KD2200

1–5, 8, 9

12

LB2225

179C800G08

O

—

—

KD2225

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2225S

179C803G08

O

—

—

KD2225

1–5, 8, 9

13

LB2250

179C800G09

O

—

—

KD2250

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2250S

179C803G09

O

—

—

KD2250

1–5, 8, 9

14

LB2300

179C800G10

O

—

—

KD2300

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2300S

179C803G10

O

—

—

KD2300

1–5, 8, 9

15

LB2350

179C800G11

O

—

—

KD2350

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2400

179C800G12

O

—

—

KD2400

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2400F

5680D03G07

O

—

—

KD2400F

1–3, 5, 8, 9

16

LB2400FS

5680D03G11

O

—

—

KD2400F

1–5, 8, 9
1–5, 8, 9

17
18

LB2400S

179C803G12

O

—

—

KD2400

LB2400WK

752B048G02

O

—

—

KD2400KW

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB2400WSK

752B048G04

O

—

—

KD2400KW

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3070

179C800G16

O

—

—

KD3070

1–3, 5, 8, 9
1–5, 8, 9

LB3070S

179C803G16

O

—

—

KD3070

19

LB3090

179C800G17

O

—

—

KD3090

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3090S

179C803G17

O

—

—

KD3090

1–5, 8, 9

20

LB3100

179C800G18

O

—

—

KD3100

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3100S

179C803G18

O

—

—

KD3100

1–5, 8, 9

21

LB3125

179C800G19

O

—

—

KD3125

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3125S

179C803G19

O

—

—

KD3125

1–5, 8, 9

LB3150

179C800G20

O

—

—

KD3150

1–3, 5, 8, 9
1–5, 8, 9

22

LB3150S

179C803G20

O

—

—

KD3150

23

LB3175

179C800G21

O

—

—

KD3175

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3175S

179C803G21

O

—

—

KD3175

1–5, 8, 9

24

LB3200

179C800G22

O

—

—

KD3200

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3200S

179C803G22

O

—

—

KD3200

1–5, 8, 9

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

V12-T3-142

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

LB3225

179C800G23

O

—

—

KD3225

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3225S

179C803G23

O

—

—

KD3225

1–5, 8, 9

LB3250

179C800G24

O

—

—

KD3250

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3250S

179C803G24

O

—

—

KD3250

1–5, 8, 9

LB3300

179C800G25

O

—

—

KD3300

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3300S

179C803G25

O

—

—

KD3300

1–5, 8, 9

LB3350

179C800G26

O

—

—

KD3350

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3400

179C800G27

O

—

—

KD3400

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3400F

5680D03G08

O

—

—

KD3400F

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3400FS

5680D03G12

O

—

—

KD3400F

1–5, 8, 9

LB3400S

179C803G27

O

—

—

KD3400

1–5, 8, 9

LB3400WK

752B048G07

O

—

—

KD3400KW

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LB3400WSK

752B048G09

O

—

—

KD3400KW

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2125

179C806G04

O

—

—

KDB2125

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB21250MW

179C811G02

O

—

—

HM2P400F5W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB21250SMW

179C832G02

O

—

—

HM2P400F5W

1–5, 8.9

LBB2125A

179C807G04

O

—

—

KDB2125

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2125S

179C827G04

O

—

—

KDB2125

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2125SA

179C828G04

O

—

—

KDB2125

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2125SW

179C830G04

O

—

—

KDB2125W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2125W

179C809G04

O

—

—

KDB2125W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2150

179C806G05

O

—

—

KDB2150

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB21500MW

179C811G03

O

—

—

HM2P400G5W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB21500SMW

179C832G03

O

—

—

HM2P400G5W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2150A

179C807G05

O

—

—

KDB2150

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2150S

179C827G05

O

—

—

KDB2150

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2150SA

179C828G05

O

—

—

KDB2150

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2150SW

179C830G05

O

—

—

KDB2150W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2150W

179C809G05

O

—

—

KDB2150W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2175

179C806G06

O

—

—

KDB2175

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB21750MW

179C811G04

O

—

—

HM2P400J5W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB21750SMW

179C832G04

O

—

—

HM2P400J5W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2175A

179C807G06

O

—

—

KDB2175

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2175S

179C827G06

O

—

—

KDB2175

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2175SA

179C828G06

O

—

—

KDB2175

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2175SW

179C830G06

O

—

—

KDB2175W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2175W

179C809G06

O

—

—

KDB2175W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2200

179C806G07

O

—

—

KDB2200

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2200A

179C807G07

O

—

—

KDB2200

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2200S

179C827G07

O

—

—

KDB2200

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2200SA

179C828G07

O

—

—

KDB2200

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2200SW

179C830G07

O

—

—

KDB2200W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2200W

179C809G07

O

—

—

KDB2200W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2225

179C806G08

O

—

—

KDB2225

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB22250MW

179C811G05

O

—

—

HM2P400L5W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB22250SMW

179C832G05

O

—

—

HM2P400L5W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2225A

179C807G08

O

—

—

KDB2225

1–3, 5, 8, 9

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-143

3
1
2
3
4
5

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

LBB2225S

179C827G08

O

—

—

KDB2225

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2225SA

179C828G08

O

—

—

KDB2225

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2225SW

179C830G08

O

—

—

KDB2225W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2225S

179C827G08

O

—

—

KDB2225

1–5, 8, 9

Catalog Number

LBB2225SA

179C828G08

O

—

—

KDB2225

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2225SW

179C830G08

O

—

—

KDB2225W

1–5, 8, 9
1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2225W

179C809G08

O

—

—

KDB2225W

LBB2250

179C806G09

O

—

—

KDB2250

1–3, 5, 8, 9

6

LBB2250A

179C807G09

O

—

—

KDB2250

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2250S

179C827G09

O

—

—

KDB2250

1–5, 8, 9

7

LBB2250SA

179C828G09

O

—

—

KDB2250

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2250SW

179C830G09

O

—

—

KDB2250W

1–5, 8, 9
1–3, 5, 8, 9

8
9

LBB2250W

179C809G09

O

—

—

KDB2250W

LBB2300

179C806G10

O

—

—

KDB2300

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB23000MW

179C811G06

O

—

—

HM2P400N5W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB23000SMW

179C832G06

O

—

—

HM2P400N5W

1–5, 8, 9

10

LBB2300A

179C807G10

O

—

—

KDB2300

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2300S

179C827G10

O

—

—

KDB2300

1–5, 8, 9

11

LBB2300SA

179C828G10

O

—

—

KDB2300

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2300SW

179C830G10

O

—

—

KDB2300W

1–5, 8, 9
1–3, 5, 8, 9

12
13
14
15

LBB2300W

179C809G10

O

—

—

KDB2300W

LBB2350

179C806G11

O

—

—

KDB2350

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2350A

179C807G11

O

—

—

KDB2350

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2350SA

179C828G11

O

—

—

KDB2350

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2350SW

179C830G11

O

—

—

KDB2350W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2350W

179C809G11

O

—

—

KDB2350W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2400

179C806G12

O

—

—

KDB2400

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB24000MW

179C811G07

O

—

—

HM2P400X5W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB24000SMW

179C832G07

O

—

—

HM2P400X5W

1–5, 8, 9

16

LBB2400A

179C807G12

O

—

—

KDB2400

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2400S

179C827G12

O

—

—

KDB2400

1–5, 8, 9

17

LBB2400SA

179C828G12

O

—

—

KDB2400

1–5, 8, 9

LBB2400SW

179C830G12

O

—

—

KDB2400W

1–5, 8, 9

18

LBB2400W

179C809G12

O

—

—

KDB2400W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2400WK

752B048G01

O

—

—

KDB2400KW

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2400WSK

752B048G03

O

—

—

KDB2400KW

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB2700MW

179C811G01

O

—

—

HM2P400D5W

1–3, 5, 7–9

LBB2700SMW

179C832G01

O

—

—

HM2P400D5W

1–5, 7–9

LBB3125

179C806G19

O

—

—

KDB3125

1–3, 5, 8, 9

21

LBB31250MW

179C811G17

O

—

—

HMCP400F5W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB31250SMW

179C832G17

O

—

—

HMCP400F5W

1–5, 8, 9

22

LBB3125A

179C807G19

O

—

—

KDB3125

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3125S

179C827G19

O

—

—

KDB3125

1–5, 8, 9

23

LBB3125SA

179C828G19

O

—

—

KDB3125

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3125SW

179C830G19

O

—

—

KDB3125W

1–5, 8, 9

19
20

24

LBB3125W

179C809G19

O

—

—

KDB3125W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3150

179C806G20

O

—

—

KDB3150

1–3, 5, 8, 9

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

V12-T3-144

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

LBB31500MW

179C811G18

O

—

—

HMCP400G5W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB31500SMW

179C832G18

O

—

—

HMCP400G5W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3150A

179C807G20

O

—

—

KDB3150

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3150S

179C827G20

O

—

—

KDB3150

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3150SA

179C828G20

O

—

—

KDB3150

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3150SW

179C830G20

O

—

—

KDB3150W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3150W

179C809G20

O

—

—

KDB3150W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3175

179C806G21

O

—

—

KDB3175

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB31750MW

179C811G19

O

—

—

HMCP400J5W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB31750SMW

179C832G19

O

—

—

HMCP400J5W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3175A

179C807G21

O

—

—

KDB3175

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3175S

179C827G21

O

—

—

KDB3175

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3175SA

179C828G21

O

—

—

KDB3175

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3175SW

179C830G21

O

—

—

KDB3175W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3175W

179C809G21

O

—

—

KDB3175W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3200

179C806G22

O

—

—

KDB3200

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3200A

179C807G22

O

—

—

KDB3200

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3200S

179C827G22

O

—

—

KDB3200

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3200SA

179C828G22

O

—

—

KDB3200

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3200SW

179C830G22

O

—

—

KDB3200W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3200W

179C809G22

O

—

—

KDB3200W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3225

179C806G23

O

—

—

KDB3225

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB32250MW

179C811G20

O

—

—

HMCP400L5W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB32250SMW

179C832G20

O

—

—

HMCP400L5W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3225S

179C827G23

O

—

—

KDB3225

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3225SA

179C828G23

O

—

—

KDB3225

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3225SW

179C830G23

O

—

—

KDB3225W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3225W

179C809G23

O

—

—

KDB3225W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3250

179C806G24

O

—

—

KDB3250

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3250A

179C807G24

O

—

—

KDB3250

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3250S

179C827G24

O

—

—

KDB3250

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3250SA

179C828G24

O

—

—

KDB3250

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3250SW

179C830G24

O

—

—

KDB3250W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3250W

179C809G24

O

—

—

KDB3250W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3300

179C806G25

O

—

—

KDB3300

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB33000MW

179C811G21

O

—

—

HMCP400N5W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB33000SMW

179C832G21

O

—

—

HMCP400N5W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3300A

179C807G25

O

—

—

KDB3300

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3300S

179C827G25

O

—

—

KDB3300

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3300SA

179C828G25

O

—

—

KDB3300

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3300SW

179C830G25

O

—

—

KDB3300W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3300W

179C809G25

O

—

—

KDB3300W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3350

179C806G26

O

—

—

KDB3350

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3350A

179C807G26

O

—

—

KDB3350

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3350SA

179C828G26

O

—

—

KDB3350

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3350W

179C809G26

O

—

—

KDB3350W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3400

179C806G27

O

—

—

KDB3400

1–3, 5, 8, 9

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-145

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

LBB34000MW

179C811G22

O

—

—

HMCP400X5W

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB34000SMW

179C832G22

O

—

—

HMCP400X5W

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3400A

179C807G27

O

—

—

KDB3400

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3400S

179C827G27

O

—

—

KDB3400

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3400SA

179C828G27

O

—

—

KDB3400

1–5, 8, 9

LBB3400SW

179C830G27

O

—

—

KDB3400W

1–5, 8, 9
1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3400W

179C809G27

O

—

—

KDB3400W

LBB3400WK

752B048G06

O

—

—

KDB3400KW

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3400WSK

752B048G08

O

—

—

KDB3400KW

1–3, 5, 8, 9

LBB3700MW

179C811G16

O

—

—

HMCP400D5W

1–3, 5, 7–9
1–5, 7–9

LBB3700SMW

179C832G16

O

—

—

HMCP400D5W

LC2150F

1242C91G01

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3150LS

1–3, 5, 8

LC2150FM

1242C91G03

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3150LS

1–3, 5, 8

LC2300F

1242C91G05

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LS

1–3, 5, 8

9

LC2300FM

1242C91G07

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LS

1–3, 5, 8

LC2400F

1242C91G09

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LS

1–3, 5, 8

10

LC2400FM

1242C91G11

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LS

1–3, 5, 8

LC2600F

1242C91G13

O

—

—

LD3600F/LES3600LS

1–3, 5, 8

11

LC2600FM

1242C91G15

O

—

—

LD3600F/LES3600LS

1–3, 5, 8

LC2600WK

752B043G03

O

—

—

LD2600WK

1–3, 5, 8

LC3150F

1242C91G02

O

HLC3150F

1284C66G02

KD3400F/KES3150LS

1–3, 5, 8

LC3150FM

1242C91G04

O

HLC3150F

1284C66G02

KD3400F/KES3150LS

1–3, 5, 8

12
13

LC3300F

1242C91G06

O

HLC3300F

2612D41G46

KD3400F/KES3400LS

1–3, 5, 8

LC3300FM

1242C91G08

O

HLC3300F

2612D41G46

KD3400F/KES3400LS

1–3, 5, 8

14

LC3400F

1242C91G10

O

HLC3400F

2613D44G08

KD3400F/KES3400LS

1–3, 5, 8

LC3400FM

1242C91G12

O

HLC3400F

2613D44G08

KD3400F/KES3400LS

1–3, 5, 8

15

LC3600F

1242C91G14

O

HLC3600F

2612D41G48

LD3600F/LES3600LS

1–3, 5, 8

LC3600FM

1242C91G16

O

HLC3600F

2612D41G48

LD3600F/LES3600LS

1–3, 5, 8

LC3600WK

752B043G08

O

—

—

LD3600WK

1–3, 5, 8

16

LCA2150F

1242C91G23

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3150LSI

1–3, 5, 8

LCA2150FM

1242C91G25

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3150LSI

1–3, 5, 8

17

LCA2300F

1242C91G27

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LSI

1–3, 5, 8

LCA2300FM

1242C91G29

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LSI

1–3, 5, 8

18

LCA2400F

1242C91G31

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LSI

1–3, 5, 8

LCA2400FM

1242C91G33

O

—

—

KD3400F/KES3400LSI

1–3, 5, 8

19

LCA2600F

1242C91G35

O

—

—

LD3600F/LES3600LSI

1–3, 5, 8

LCA2600FM

1242C91G37

O

—

—

LD3600F/LES3600LSI

1–3, 5, 8

20

LCA3150F

1242C91G24

O

HLCA3150F

1242C92G24

KD3400F/KES3150LSI

1–3, 5, 8

LCA3150FM

1242C91G26

O

HLCA3150F

1242C92G24

KD3400F/KES3150LSI

1–3, 5, 8

21

LCA3300F

1242C91G28

O

HLCA3300F

1242C92G28

KD3400F/KES3400LSI

1–3, 5, 8

LCA3300FM

1242C91G30

O

HLCA3300F

1242C92G28

KD3400F/KES3400LSI

1–3, 5, 8

22

LCA3400F

1242C91G32

O

HLCA3400F

1242C92G32

KD3400F/KES3400LSI

1–3, 5, 8

LCA3400FM

1242C91G34

O

HLCA3400F

1242C92G34

KD3400F/KES3400LSI

1–3, 5, 8

23

LCA3600F

1242C91G36

O

HLCA3600F

1284C66G36

LD3600F/LES3600LSI

1–3, 5, 8

LCA3600FM

1242C91G38

O

HLCA3600F

1284C66G36

LD3600F/LES3600LSI

1–3, 5, 8

24

LCC2600WK

NO STYLE

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

LCC3600F

6590C10G14

O

HLCC3600F

6590C11G14

CLD3600F/LES3600LS

1–3, 5, 8

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

V12-T3-146

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

LCC3600WK

NO STYLE

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

LCCA3600F

6590C10G36

O

HLCCA3600F

6590C11G36

CLD3600F/LES3600LSI

1–3, 5, 8

LCCG3600F

1242C93G04

O

HLCCG3600F

1242C94G04

CLD3600F/LES3600LSG

1–3, 5, 8

LCCGA3600F

1242C93G12

O

HLCCGA3600F

1242C94G12

CLD3600F/LES3600LSIG

1–3, 5, 8

LCG3150F

1242C88G01

O

HLCG3150F

1242C89G01

KD3400F/KES3150LSG

1–3, 5, 8

LCG3300F

1242C88G02

O

HLCG3300F

1242C89G02

KD3400F/KES3400LS

1–3, 5, 8

LCG3400F

1242C88G03

O

HLCG3400F

1242C89G03

KD3400F/KES3400LSG

1–3, 5, 8

LCG3600F

1242C88G04

O

HLCG3600F

1371D17G40

LD3600F/LES3600LSG

1–3, 5, 8

LCGA3150F

1242C88G09

O

HLCGA3150F

1242C89G09

KD3400F/KES3150LSIG

1–3, 5, 8

LCGA3300F

1242C88G10

O

HLCGA3300F

1242C89G10

KD3400F/KES3400LSIG

1–3, 5, 8

LCGA3400F

1242C88G11

O

HLCGA3400F

1242C89G11

KD3400F/KES3400LSIG

1–3, 5, 8

LCGA3600F

1242C88G12

O

HLCGA3600F

1270C61G12

LD3600F/LES3600LSIG

1–3, 5, 8

LCY3600F

6590C12G04

O

—

—

HLD3600F/LES3600LS

1–3, 5, 8

LCYA3600F

6590C12G08

O

—

—

HLD3600F/LES3600LSI

1–3, 5, 8

LCYG3600F

1242C95G04

O

—

—

HLD3600F/LES3600LSG

1–3, 5, 8

LCYGA3600F

1242C95G08

O

—

—

HLD3600F/LES3600LSIG

1–3, 5, 8

MA2125

1252C17G01

O

—

—

KD2125

1–3, 5, 8

MA2125S

1252C21G01

O

—

—

KD2125

1–5, 8

MA2150

1252C17G02

O

—

—

KD2150

1–3, 5, 8

MA2150S

1252C21G02

O

—

—

KD2150

1–5, 8

MA2175

1252C17G03

O

—

—

KD2175

1–3, 5, 8

MA2175S

1252C21G03

O

—

—

KD2175

1–5, 8

MA2200

1252C17G04

O

—

—

KD2200

1–3, 5, 8

MA2200S

1252C21G04

O

—

—

KD2200

1–5, 8

MA2225

1252C17G05

O

—

—

KD2225

1–3, 5, 8

MA2225S

1252C21G05

O

—

—

KD2225

1–5, 8

MA2250

1252C17G06

O

—

—

KD2250

1–3, 5, 8

MA2250S

1252C21G06

O

—

—

KD2250

1–5, 8

MA2300

1252C17G07

O

—

—

MDL2300

1–3, 5, 8

MA2300S

1252C21G07

O

—

—

MDL2300

1–5, 8

MA2350

1252C17G08

O

—

—

MDL2350

1–3, 5, 8

MA2350S

1252C21G08

O

—

—

MDL2350

1–5, 8

MA2400

1252C17G09

O

—

—

MDL2400

1–3, 5, 8

MA2400S

1252C21G09

O

—

—

MDL2400

1–5, 8

MA2500

1252C17G10

O

—

—

MDL2500

1–3, 5, 8

MA2500S

1252C21G10

O

—

—

MDL2500

1–5, 8

MA2600

1252C17G11

O

—

—

MDL2600

1–3, 5, 8

MA2600S

1252C21G11

O

—

—

MDL2600

1–5, 8

MA2700

1252C17G14

O

—

—

MDL2700

1–3, 5, 8

MA2700S

1252C21G14

O

—

—

MDL2700

1–5, 8

MA2800

1252C17G15

O

—

—

MDL2800

1–3, 5, 8

MA2800F

2600D43G01

O

—

—

MDL2800F

1–3, 5, 8

MA2800FS

2600D43G03

O

—

—

MDL2800F

1–5, 8

MA2800S

1252C21G15

O

—

—

MDL2800

1–5, 8

MA2800WK

752B071G01

O

—

—

MDL2800WK

1–3, 5, 8

MA2800WSK

752B071G02

O

—

—

MDL2800WK

1–3, 5, 8

MA3125

1252C17G16

O

HMA3125

504C741G16

KD3125

1–3, 5, 8

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-147

3
1
2
3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

MA3125S

1252C21G16

O

HMA3125

504C741G16

KD3125

1–5, 8

MA3150

1252C17G17

O

HMA3150

504C741G17

KD3150

1–3, 5, 8

MA3150S

1252C21G17

O

HMA3150

504C741G17

KD3150

1–5, 8

MA3175

1252C17G18

O

HMA3175

504C741G18

KD3175

1–3, 5, 8

MA3175S

1252C21G18

O

HMA3175

504C741G18

KD3175

1–5, 8

MA3200

1252C17G19

O

HMA3200

504C741G19

KD3200

1–3, 5, 8

5

MA3200S

1252C21G19

O

HMA3200

504C741G19

KD3200

1–5, 8

MA3225

1252C17G20

O

HMA3225

504C741G20

KD3225

1–3, 5, 8

6

MA3225S

1252C21G20

O

HMA3225

504C741G20

KD3225

1–5, 8

MA3250

1252C17G21

O

HMA3250

504C741G21

KD3250

1–3, 5, 8

7

MA3250S

1252C21G21

O

HMA3250

504C741G21

KD3250

1–5, 8

MA3300

1252C17G22

O

HMA3300

504C741G22

MDL3300

1–3, 5, 8

8

MA3300S

1252C21G22

O

HMA3300

504C741G22

MDL3300

1–5, 8

MA3350

1252C17G23

O

HMA3350

504C741G23

MDL3350

1–3, 5, 8

9

MA3350S

1252C21G23

O

HMA3350

504C741G23

MDL3350

1–5, 8

MA3400

1252C17G24

O

HMA3400

504C741G24

MDL3400

1–3, 5, 8

10

MA3400S

1252C21G24

O

HMA3400

504C741G24

MDL3400

1–5, 8

MA3500

1252C17G25

O

HMA3500

504C741G25

MDL3500

1–3, 5, 8

11

MA3500S

1252C21G25

O

HMA3500

504C741G25

MDL3500

1–5, 8

MA3600

1252C17G26

O

HMA3600

504C741G26

MDL3600

1–3, 5, 8

12

MA3600S

1252C21G26

O

HMA3600

504C741G26

MDL3600

1–5, 8

MA3700

1252C17G27

O

HMA3700

504C741G27

MDL3700

1–3, 5, 8

MA3700S

1252C21G27

O

HMA3700

504C741G27

MDL3700

1–5, 8

MA3800

1252C17G28

O

HMA3800

504C741G28

MDL3800

1–3, 5, 8

MA3800F

2600D43G02

O

HMA3800F

373B237G04

MDL3800F

—

MA3800FS

2600D43G04

O

HMA3800F

373B237G04

MDL3800F

1–5, 8

MA3800S

1252C21G28

O

HMA3800

504C741G28

MDL3800

1–5, 8

MA3800WK

752B071G06

O

—

—

MDL3800WK

1–3, 5, 8

4

13
14
15

MA3800WSK

752B071G07

O

—

—

MDL3800WK

1–3, 5, 8

16

MAY3600

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HMDL3600

—

MAY3700

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HMDL3700

—

17

MAY3800

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HMDL3800

—

MAY3800F

1240C54G01

O

—

—

HMDL3800F

—

18

MC2800F

6590C16G01

O

—

—

MDL3800F/MES3800LS

1–3, 5, 8

MC2800FM

6590C16G03

O

—

—

MDL3800F/MES3800LS

1–3, 5, 8

19

MC2800WK

752B071G03

O

—

—

MDL2800WK

1–3, 5, 8

MC3800F

6590C16G02

O

HMC3800F

6590C16G06

MDL3800F/MES3800LS

1–3, 5, 8

20

MC3800FM

6590C16G04

O

HMC3800F

6590C16G06

MDL3800F/MES3800LS

1–3, 5, 8

MC3800WK

752B071G08

O

—

—

MDL3800WK

1–3, 5, 8

21

MCA2800F

6590C16G13

O

—

—

MDL3800F/MES3800LSI

1–3, 5, 8

MCA3800F

6590C16G14

O

HMCA3800F

6590C16G18

MDL3800F/MES3800LSI

1–3, 5, 8

22

MCC2800WK

NO STYLE

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

23

MCC3800F

6590C14G02

O

HMCC3800F

6590C14G06

CMDL3800F/MES3800LS

1–3, 5, 8

MCC3800WK

NO STYLE

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

MCCA3800F

6590C14G14

O

HMCCA3800F

6590C14G18

CMDL3800F/MES3800LSI

1–3, 5, 8

24

MCCG3800F

1242C62G01

O

HMCCG3800F

1242C62G09

CMDL3800F/MES3800LSG

1–3, 5, 8

MCCGA3800F

1242C62G03

O

HMCCGA3800F

1242C62G11

CMDL3800F/MES3800LSIG

1–3, 5, 8

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

V12-T3-148

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

MCG3800F

1242C60G01

O

HMCG3800F

2612D86G08

MDL3800F/MES3800LSG

1–3, 5, 8

MCGA3800F

1270C62G03

O

HMCGA3800F

1242C60G11

MDL3800F/MES3800LSIG

1–3, 5, 8

MCP03150CR

2610D55G04

A

—

—

HMCP015E0C

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP03150R

2610D54G24

A

—

—

HMCP015E0

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP0322CR

2610D55G02

A

—

—

HMCP003A0C

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP0322R

2610D54G22

A

—

—

HMCP003A0

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP0358CR

2610D55G03

A

—

—

HMCP007C0C

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP0358R

2610D54G23

A

—

—

HMCP007C0

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP13300CR

2610D55G05

A

—

—

HMCP030H1C

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP13300R

2610D54G25

A

—

—

HMCP030H1

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP23480CR

2610D55G06

A

—

—

HMCP050K2C

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP23480R

2610D54G26

A

—

—

HMCP050K2

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP331000CR

2610D55G07

A

—

—

HMCP100R3C

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP331000R

2610D54G27

A

—

—

HMCP100R3

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP431550CR

2610D55G09

A

—

—

HMCP150T4C

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP431550R

2610D54G28

A

—

—

HMCP150T4

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP431800CR

2610D55G08

A

—

—

HMCP150U4C

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP431800R

2610D54G30

A

—

—

HMCP150U4

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP532500

752B418G21

O

—

—

HMCP250W5

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP532500C

752B418G11

O

—

—

HMCP250W5C

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP534000

673B019G15

O

HLB34000M

179C850G22

HMCP400X5

1–3, 5, 7, 8

MCP534000C

673B019G21

O

HLB34000M

179C850G22

HMCP400X5C

1–3, 5, 7, 8

NB21000

1234C24G15

O

—

—

ND212T33W/12NES1000T+

1–3, 5, 8

NB21000S

1234C25G16

O

—

—

ND212T33W/12NES1000T+

1–5, 8

NB21200

1234C24G17

O

—

—

ND212T33W/12NES1200T+

1–3, 5, 8

NB21200F

2610D64G01

O

—

—

ND212T33W

—

NB21200FS

4997D20G03

O

—

—

ND212T33W/12NES1200T+

1–5, 8

NB21200S

1234C25G18

O

—

—

ND212T33W/12NES1200T+

1–5, 8

NB21200WK

752B682G01

O

—

—

ND312WK

1–3, 5, 8

NB21200WSK

752B682G02

O

—

—

ND312WK

1–3, 5, 8

NB2700

1234C24G12

O

—

—

ND2800T33W/8NES700T+

1–3, 5, 8

NB2700S

1234C25G13

O

—

—

ND2800T33W/8NES700T+

1–5, 8

NB2800

1234C24G13

O

—

—

ND2800T33W/8NES800T+

1–3, 5, 8

NB2800S

1234C25G14

O

—

—

ND2800T33W/8NES800T+

1–5, 8

NB2900

1234C25G14

O

—

—

ND212T33W/12NES900T+

1–3, 5, 8

NB2900S

1234C25G15

O

—

—

ND212T33W/12NES900T+

1–5, 8

NB31000

1234C24G33

O

HNB31000

177C099G33

ND312T33W/12NES1000T+

1–3, 5, 8

NB31000S

1234C25G33

O

HNB31000

177C099G33

ND312T33W/12NES1000T+

1–5, 8

NB31200

1234C24G35

O

HNB31200

177C099G35

ND312T33W/12NES1200T+

1–3, 5, 8

NB31200F

2610D64G02

O

HNB31200F

625B494G08

ND312T33W

—

NB31200FS

2610D64G04

O

HNB31200F

625B494G08

ND312T33W

1–5, 8

NB31200S

1234C25G35

O

HNB31200

177C099G35

ND312T33W/12NES1200T+

1–5, 8

NB31200WK

752B682G06

O

—

—

ND312WK

1–3, 5, 8

NB31200WSK

752B682G07

O

—

—

ND312WK

1–3, 5, 8

NB3700

1234C24G30

O

HNB3700

177C099G30

ND3800T33W/8NES700T+

1–3, 5, 8

NB3700S

1234C25G30

O

HNB3700

177C099G30

ND3800T33W/8NES700T+

1–5, 8

NB3800

1234C24G31

O

HNB3800

177C099G31

ND3800T33W/8NES800T+

1–3, 5, 8

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-149

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

NB3800S

1234C25G31

O

HNB3800

177C099G31

ND3800T33W/8NES800T+

1–5, 8

NB3900

1234C24G32

O

HNB3900

177C099G32

ND312T33W/12NES900T+

1–3, 5, 8

NB3900S

1234C25G32

O

HNB3900

177C099G32

ND312T33W/12NES900T+

1–5, 8

NBY31000

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HND312T33W/12NES1000T+

—
—

NBY31200F

1240C62G01

O

—

—

HND312T33W/12NES1200T+

NBY3700

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HND3800T33W/8NES700T+

—

NBY3800

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HND3800T33W/8NES800T+

—
—

NBY3900

NO STYLE

O

—

—

HND312T33W/12NES900T+

NC21200F

2613D29G10

O

—

—

ND212T33W

1–3, 5, 8

NC21200FM

2613D29G12

O

—

—

ND212T33W

1–3, 5, 8
1–3, 5, 8

NC21200WK

752B682G03

O

—

—

ND312WK

NC31200F

2613D29G09

O

HNC31200F

2613D29G05

ND312T33W

1–3, 5, 8

NC31200FM

2613D29G11

O

HNC31200F

2613D29G05

ND312T33W

1–3, 5, 8

NC31200WK

752B682G08

O

—

—

ND312WK

1–3, 5, 8

NCA21200F

2613D29G22

O

OMIT

OMIT

ND312T32W

1–3, 5, 8

NCA31200F

2613D29G21

O

HNCA31200F

2613D29G17

ND312T32W

1–3, 5, 8

NCG31200F

1242C72G18

O

HNCG31200F

2612D87G07

ND312T35W

1–3, 5, 8

NCGA31200F

1242C72G11

O

HNCGA31200F

1373D87G12

ND312T36W

1–3, 5, 8

11

PB21000

177C181G29

O

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES10T+

1–3, 5, 8

PB210000TM

373D488G04

O

—

—

—

2, 8

12

PB21200

177C181G30

O

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES12T+

1–3, 5, 8

PB212000TM

373D488G06

O

—

—

—

2, 8

PB21400

177C181G31

O

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES14T

1–3, 5, 8

PB21600

177C181G32

O

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES16T

1–3, 5, 8

PB21800

177C181G33

O

—

—

—

—

PB22000

177C181G34

O

—

—

RD320T33W/20RES20T

1–3, 5, 8

10

13
14
15

PB22000WK

752B076G01

O

—

—

RD320WK

1–3, 5, 8

PB22500F

654D456G05

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PB22500WK

752B076G02

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

16

PB25000TM

373D487G02

O

—

—

—

2, 8

PB2600

177C181G25

O

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES08T

1–3, 5, 8

17

PB26000TM

373D487G04

O

—

—

—

2, 8

PB2700

177C181G26

O

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES08T

1–3, 5, 8

18

PB27000TM

373D487G06

O

—

—

—

2, 8

PB2800

177C181G27

O

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES08T

1–3, 5, 8

19

PB28000TM

373D488G02

O

—

—

—

2, 8

PB2900

177C181G28

O

—

—

—

—

20

PB31000

177C181G41

A

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES10T+

1–3, 5, 8

PB31200

177C181G42

A

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES12T+

1–3, 5, 8

21

PB31400

177C181G43

A

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES14T+

1–3, 5, 8

PB31600

177C181G44

A

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES16T+

1–3, 5, 8

22

PB31800

177C181G45

A

—

—

—

—

PB32000

177C181G46

A

—

—

RD320T33W/20RES20T+

1–3, 5, 8

23

PB32000WK

752B076G12

A

—

—

RD320WK

1–3, 5, 8

PB32500F

654D456G06

A

—

—

RD325T33W

1–3, 5, 8

24

PB32500WK

752B076G13

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PB3600

177C181G37

A

—

—

—

—

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

V12-T3-150

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

Catalog Number

Style Number

PB3700

177C181G38

A

—

—

—

—

PB3800

177C181G39

A

—

—

RD316T33W+/16RES08T

1–3, 5, 8

PB3900

177C181G40

A

—

—

—

—

PBF21000

177C771G05

O

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES10T+

1–3, 5, 8

PBF210000TM

506C131G32

O

—

—

—

2, 8

PBF21200

177C771G06

O

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES12T+

1–3, 5, 8

PBF212000TM

506C131G33

O

—

—

—

2, 8

PBF21400

177C771G07

O

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES14T

1–3, 5, 8

PBF21600

177C771G08

O

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES16T

1–3, 5, 8

PBF21800

177C771G09

O

—

—

—

—

PBF22000

177C771G10

O

—

—

RE320T33W/20RES20T

1–3, 5, 8

PBF22000F

5663D38G03

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PBF22000K

PBF22000K

O

—

—

RD320WK

1–3, 5, 8

PBF25000TM

506C131G28

O

—

—

—

2, 8

PBF2600

177C771G01

O

—

—

—

—

PBF26000TM

506C131G29

O

—

—

—

2, 8

PBF2700

177C771G02

O

—

—

—

—

PBF27000TM

506C131G30

O

—

—

—

2, 8

PBF2800

177C771G03

O

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES08T

1–3, 5, 8

PBF28000TM

506C131G31

O

—

—

—

2, 8

PBF2900

177C771G04

O

—

—

—

—

PBF31000

177C771G17

A

—

—

RD316T33W+

1–3, 5, 8

PBF31200

177C771G18

A

—

—

RD316T33W+

1–3, 5, 8

PBF31400

177C771G19

A

—

—

RD316T33W+

1–3, 5, 8

PBF31600

177C771G20

A

—

—

RD316T33W+

1–3, 5, 8

PBF31800

177C771G21

A

—

—

—

—

PBF32000

177C771G22

A

—

—

RD320T33W+

1–3, 5, 8

PBF32000F

5663D38G01

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PBF32000WK

752B076G13

A

—

—

RD320WK

1–3, 5, 8

PBF3600

177C771G13

A

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES08T+

1–3, 5, 8

PBF3700

177C771G14

A

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES08T+

1–3, 5, 8

PBF3800

177C771G15

A

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES08T+

1–3, 5, 8

PBF3900

177C771G16

A

—

—

RD316T33W/16RES10T+

1–3, 5, 8

PC22000F

6590C19G01

O

—

—

RD320T33W

1–3, 5, 8

PC22000FM

6590C19G03

O

—

—

RD320T33W

1–3, 5, 8

PC22000WK

753B081G04

O

—

—

RD320WK

1–3, 5, 8

PC22500F

6590C19G05

O

—

—

RD325T33W

1–3, 5, 8

PC22500FM

6590C19G07

O

—

—

RD325T33W

1–3, 5, 8

PC22500WK

752B076G05

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PC23000F

6590C19G09

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PC23000FM

6590C19G11

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PC23000K

753B081G06

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PC32000F

6590C19G02

A

—

—

RD320T33W

1–3, 5, 8

PC32000FM

6590C19G04

O

PC32000F

6590C19G02

RD320T33W

1–3, 5, 8

PC32000WK

753B081G15

A

—

—

RD320WK

1–3, 5, 8

PC32500F

6590C19G06

A

—

—

RD325T33W

1–3, 5, 8

PC32500FM

6590C19G08

O

PC32500F

6590C19G06

RD325T33W

1–3, 5, 8

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-151

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

PC32500WK

753B081G16

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PC33000F

6590C19G10

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PC33000FM

6590C19G12

O

PC33000F

6590C19G10

—

1–3, 5, 8

PC33000K

753B081G17

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCA22000F

6590C19G17

O

—

—

RD320T32W

1–3, 5, 8

PCA22500F

6590C19G21

O

—

—

RD325T32W

1–3, 5, 8

PCA22500FM

6590C19G07

O

—

—

RD325T32W

1–3, 5, 8

PCA23000F

6590C19G25

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCA32000F

6590C19G18

A

—

—

RD320T32W

1–3, 5, 8

PCA32500F

6590C19G22

A

—

—

RD325T32W

1–3, 5, 8

PCA33000F

6590C19G26

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCC22000F

6590C20G01

O

—

—

CRD320T33W

1–3, 5, 8
1–3, 5, 8

PCC22000FM

6590C20G03

O

—

—

CRD320T33W

PCC22000WK

752B076G09

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCC22500F

6590C20G05

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCC22500FM

6590C20G07

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

10

PCC22500WK

753B081G05

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCC23000F

6590C20G09

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

11

PCC23000FM

6590C20G11

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCC23000K

753B081G11

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

12

PCC32000F

6590C20G02

A

—

—

CRD320T33W

1–3, 5, 8
1–3, 5, 8

9

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

PCC32000FM

6590C20G04

O

PCC32000F

6590C20G02

CRD320T33W

PCC32000WK

753B081G20

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCC32500F

6590C20G06

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCC32500FM

6590C20G08

O

PCC32500F

6590C20G06

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCC32500WK

753B081G21

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCC33000F

6590C20G10

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCC33000FM

6590C20G12

O

PCC33000F

6590C20G10

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCC33000K

753B081G22

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCCA22000F

6590C20G17

O

—

—

CRD320T32W

1–3, 5, 8
1–3, 5, 8

PCCA22500F

6590C20G21

O

—

—

—

PCCA23000F

6590C20G25

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCCA32000F

6590C20G18

A

—

—

CRD320T32W

1–3, 5, 8

PCCA32500F

6590C20G22

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCCA33000F

6590C20G26

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCCF22000F

6590C18G01

O

—

—

CRD320T33W

1–3, 5, 8
1–3, 5, 8

PCCF22000FM

6590C18G03

O

—

—

CRD320T33W

PCCF22500F

6590C18G05

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCCF22500FM

6590C18G07

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCCF32000F

6590C18G02

A

—

—

CRD320T33W

1–3, 5, 8

PCCF32000FM

6590C18G04

O

PCCF32000F

6590C18G02

CRD320T33W

1–3, 5, 8

22

PCCF32500F

6590C18G06

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCCF32500FM

6590C18G08

O

PCCF32500F

6590C18G06

—

1–3, 5, 8

23

PCCFA22000F

1225C07G13

O

—

—

CRD320T32W

1–3, 5, 8

PCCFA22500F

6590C18G17

O

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

24

PCCFA32000F

6590C18G14

A

—

—

CRD320T32W

1–3, 5, 8

PCCFA32500F

6590C18G18

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

21

V12-T3-152

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

PCCFG32000F

1242C76G17

A

—

—

CRD320T35W

1–3, 5, 8

PCCFG32500F

1242C76G18

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCCFGA32000F

1242C78G21

A

—

—

CRD320T36W

1–3, 5, 8

PCCFGA32500F

1242C78G22

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCCG32000F

1242C75G25

A

—

—

CRD320T35W

1–3, 5, 8

PCCG32500F

1242C75G26

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCCG33000F

1242C75G27

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCCGA32000F

1242C75G31

A

—

—

CRD320T36W

1–3, 5, 8

PCCGA32500F

1242C75G32

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCCGA33000F

1242C75G33

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCF22000F

6590C17G01

O

—

—

RD320T33W

1–3, 5, 8

PCF22000FM

6590C17G03

O

—

—

RD320T33W

1–3, 5, 8

PCF22000K

753B081G08

O

—

—

RD320WK

1–3, 5, 8

PCF22500FM

6590C17G07

O

—

—

RD325T33W

1–3, 5, 8

PCF32000F

6590C17G02

A

—

—

RD320T33W

1–3, 5, 8

PCF32000FM

6590C17G04

O

PCF32000F

6590C17G02

RD320T33W

1–3, 5, 8

PCF32000K

753B081G19

A

—

—

RD320WK

1–3, 5, 8

PCF32500F

6590C17G06

A

—

—

RD325T33W

1–3, 5, 8

PCF32500FM

6590C17G08

O

PCF32500F

6590C17G06

RD325T33W

1–3, 5, 8

PCFA22000F

6590C17G13

O

—

—

RD320T32W

1–3, 5, 8

PCFA22500F

6590C17G17

O

—

—

RD325T32W

1–3, 5, 8

PCFA32000F

6590C17G14

A

—

—

RD320T32W

1–3, 5, 8

PCFA32500F

6590C17G18

A

—

—

RD325T32W

1–3, 5, 8

PCFG32000F

1242C76G01

A

—

—

RD320T35W

1–3, 5, 8

PCFG32500F

1242C76G02

A

—

—

RD325T35W

1–3, 5, 8

PCFGA32000F

1242C76G05

A

—

—

RD320T36W

1–3, 5, 8

PCFGA32500F

1242C76G06

A

—

—

RD325T36W

1–3, 5, 8

PCG32000F

1242C75G01

A

—

—

RD320T35W

1–3, 5, 8

PCG32500F

1242C75G02

A

—

—

RD325T35W

1–3, 5, 8

PCG33000F

1242C75G03

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

PCGA32000F

1242C75G07

A

—

—

RD320T36W

1–3, 5, 8

PCGA32500F

1242C75G08

A

—

—

RD325T36W

1–3, 5, 8

PCGA33000F

1242C75G09

A

—

—

—

1–3, 5, 8

RE1010

1375D81G01

O

—

—

—

3, 10

RE1015

1375D81G02

O

—

—

Reconditioned E1015

10

RE1020

1375D81G03

O

—

—

Reconditioned E1020

10

RE1025

1375D81G04

O

—

—

Reconditioned E1025

10

RE1030

1375D81G05

O

—

—

Reconditioned E1030

10

RE1040

1375D81G07

O

—

—

Reconditioned E1040

10

RE1050

1375D81G08

O

—

—

Reconditioned E1050

10

RE1060

1375D81G09

O

—

—

Reconditioned E1060

10

RE1070

1375D81G10

O

—

—

Reconditioned E1070

10

RE1080

1375D81G11

O

—

—

Reconditioned E1080

10

RE1090

1375D81G12

O

—

—

Reconditioned E1090

10

RE1100

1375D81G13

O

—

—

Reconditioned E1100

10

RE2015

1375D81G18

O

—

—

Reconditioned E2015

10

RE2020

1375D81G19

O

—

—

Reconditioned E2020

10

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-153

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

RE2025

1375D81G20

O

—

—

Reconditioned E2025

10

RE2030

1375D81G21

O

—

—

Reconditioned E2030

10

RE2040

1375D81G23

O

—

—

Reconditioned E2040

10

RE2050

1375D81G24

O

—

—

Reconditioned E2050

10

RE2060

1375D81G25

O

—

—

Reconditioned E2060

10

RE2070

1375D81G26

O

—

—

Reconditioned E2070

10

RE2080

1375D81G27

O

—

—

Reconditioned E2080

10

RE2090

1375D81G28

O

—

—

Reconditioned E2090

10

RE2100

1375D81G29

O

—

—

Reconditioned E2100

10

RE3015

1375D81G34

O

—

—

Reconditioned E3015

10
10

RE3020

1375D81G35

O

—

—

Reconditioned E3020

RE3025

1375D81G36

O

—

—

Reconditioned E3025

10

RE3030

1375D81G37

O

—

—

Reconditioned E3030

10

RE3040

1375D81G39

O

—

—

Reconditioned E3040

10

RE3050

1375D81G40

O

—

—

Reconditioned E3050

10
10

RE3060

1375D81G41

O

—

—

Reconditioned E3060

10

RE3070

1375D81G42

O

—

—

Reconditioned E3070

10

RE3080

1375D81G43

O

—

—

Reconditioned E3080

10

11

RE3090

1375D81G44

O

—

—

Reconditioned E3090

10

RE3100

1375D81G45

O

—

—

Reconditioned E3100

10
—

12
13

REA1010

1375D82G01

O

—

—

—

REA1015

1375D82G02

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA1015

10

REA1020

1375D82G03

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA1020

10
10

REA1025

1375D82G04

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA1025

14

REA1030

1375D82G05

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA1030

10

REA1035

1375D82G06

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA1035

10

15

REA1040

1375D82G07

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA1040

10

REA1050

1375D82G08

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA1050

10

REA1060

1375D82G09

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA1060

10

16

REA1070

1375D82G10

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA1070

10
10

17
18

REA1080

1375D82G11

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA1080

REA1090

1375D82G12

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA1090

10

REA1100

1375D82G13

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA1100

10

REA2015

1375D82G18

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA2015

10
10

REA2020

1375D82G19

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA2020

19

REA2025

1375D82G20

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA2025

10

REA2030

1375D82G21

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA2030

10

20

REA2040

1375D82G23

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA2040

10

REA2050

1375D82G24

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA2050

10

21

REA2060

1375D82G25

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA2060

10

REA2070

1375D82G26

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA2070

10

REA2080

1375D82G27

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA2080

10

22

REA2090

1375D82G28

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA2090

10

REA2100

1375D82G29

O

—

—

Reconditioned EA2100

10

REA3015

1375D82G34

O

—

—

Use REH3015

10

24

REA3020

1375D82G35

O

—

—

Use REH3020

10

REA3025

1375D82G36

O

—

—

Use REH3025

10

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

23

V12-T3-154

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

REA3030

1375D82G37

O

—

—

Use REH3030

10

REA3040

1375D82G39

O

—

—

Use REH3040

10

REA3050

1375D82G40

O

—

—

Use REH3050

10

REA3060

1375D82G41

O

—

—

Use REH3060

10

REA3070

1375D82G42

O

—

—

Use REH3070

10

REA3080

1375D82G43

O

—

—

Use REH3080

10

REA3090

1375D82G44

O

—

—

Use REH3090

10

REA3100

1375D82G45

O

—

—

Use REH3100

10

REH1010

1375D83G01

O

—

—

—

3, 10

REH1015

1375D83G02

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH1015

10

REH1020

1375D83G03

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH1020

10

REH1025

1375D83G04

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH1025

10

REH1030

1375D83G05

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH1030

10

REH1040

1375D83G07

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH1040

10

REH1050

1375D83G08

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH1050

10

REH1060

1375D83G09

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH1060

10

REH1070

1375D83G10

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH1070

10

REH1080

1375D83G11

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH1080

10

REH1090

1375D83G12

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH1090

10

REH1100

1375D83G13

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH1100

10

REH2015

1375D83G18

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH2015

10

REH2020

1375D83G19

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH2020

10

REH2025

1375D83G20

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH2025

10

REH2030

1375D83G21

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH2030

10

REH2040

1375D83G23

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH2040

10

REH2050

1375D83G24

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH2050

10

REH2060

1375D83G25

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH2060

10

REH2070

1375D83G26

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH2070

10

REH2080

1375D83G27

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH2080

10

REH2090

1375D83G28

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH2090

10

REH2100

1375D83G29

O

—

—

Reconditioned EH2100

10

REH3015

1375D83G34

A

—

—

—

3, 10

REH3020

1375D83G35

A

—

—

—

3, 10

REH3025

1375D83G36

A

—

—

—

3, 10

REH3030

1375D83G37

A

—

—

—

3, 10

REH3040

1375D83G39

A

—

—

—

3, 10

REH3050

1375D83G40

A

—

—

—

3, 10

REH3060

1375D83G41

A

—

—

—

3, 10

REH3070

1375D83G42

A

—

—

—

3, 10

REH3080

1375D83G43

A

—

—

—

3, 10

REH3090

1375D83G44

A

—

—

—

3, 10

REH3100

1375D83G45

A

—

—

—

3, 10

RF2015

1375D86G02

O

—

—

Reconditioned F2015

3, 10

RF2020

1375D86G03

O

—

—

Reconditioned F2020

3, 10

RF2025

NO STYLE

O

—

—

Reconditioned F2025

3, 10

RF2030

1375D86G05

O

—

—

Reconditioned F2030

3, 10

RF2040

1375D86G07

O

—

—

Reconditioned F2040

3, 10

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-155

3
1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

RF2050

1375D86G08

O

—

—

Reconditioned F2050

3, 10

RF2060

1375D86G09

O

—

—

Reconditioned F2060

3, 10

RF2070

1375D86G10

O

—

—

Reconditioned F2070

3, 10

RF2080

1375D86G11

O

—

—

Reconditioned F2080

3, 10

RF2090

1375D86G12

O

—

—

Reconditioned F2090

3, 10

RF2100

1375D86G13

O

—

—

Reconditioned F2100

3, 10

5

RF3015

1375D86G18

O

RHF3015

1375D87G18

—

3, 10

RF3020

1375D86G19

O

RHF3020

1375D87G19

—

3, 10

6

RF3025

1375D86G20

O

RHF3025

1375D87G20

—

3, 10

RF3030

1375D86G21

O

RHF3030

1375D87G21

—

3, 10

7

RF3040

1375D86G23

O

RHF3040

1375D87G23

—

3, 10

RF3050

1375D86G24

O

RHF3050

1375D87G24

—

3, 10

8

RF3060

1375D86G25

O

RHF3060

1375D87G25

—

3, 10

RF3070

1375D86G26

O

RHF3070

1375D87G26

—

3, 10

9

RF3080

1375D86G27

O

RHF3080

1375D87G27

—

3, 10

RF3090

1375D86G28

O

RHF3090

1375D87G28

—

3, 10

10

RF3100

1375D86G29

O

RHF3100

1375D87G29

—

3, 10

RFA2010

1375D84G01

O

—

—

—

3, 10

11

RFA2015

1375D84G02

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2015

3, 10

RFA2020

1375D84G03

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2020

3, 10

12

RFA2025

1375D84G04

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2025

3, 10

RFA2030

1375D84G05

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2030

3, 10

RFA2040

1375D84G07

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2040

3, 10

RFA2045

1375D84G16

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2045

3, 10

RFA2050

1375D84G08

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2050

3, 10

RFA2060

1375D84G09

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2060

3, 10

RFA2070

1375D84G10

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2070

3, 10

RFA2080

1375D84G11

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2080

3, 10

RFA2090

1375D84G12

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2090

3, 10

RFA2100

1375D84G13

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2100

3, 10

RFA2100K

1375D84G17

O

—

—

—

3, 10

2
3
4

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

RFA3010

1375D84G21

O

RHFA3010

1375D85G21

—

—

RFA3015

1375D84G22

O

RHFA3015

1375D85G22

—

3, 10

RFA3020

1375D84G23

O

RHFA3020

1375D85G23

—

3, 10

RFA3025

1375D84G24

O

RHFA3025

1375D85G24

—

3, 10

RFA3030

1375D84G25

O

RHFA3030

1375D85G25

—

3, 10

RFA3040

1375D84G27

O

RHFA3040

1375D85G27

—

3, 10

RFA3045

1375D84G36

O

RHFA3045

1375D85G36

—

3, 10

RFA3050

1375D84G28

O

RHFA3050

1375D85G28

—

3, 10

RFA3060

1375D84G29

O

RHFA3060

1375D85G29

—

3, 10

RFA3070

1375D84G30

O

RHFA3070

1375D85G30

—

3, 10

RFA3080

1375D84G31

O

RHFA3080

1375D85G31

—

3, 10

RFA3090

1375D84G32

O

RHFA3090

1375D85G32

—

3, 10

RFA3100

1375D84G33

O

RHFA3100

1375D85G33

—

3, 10

RFA3100K

1375D84G37

O

—

—

—

—

24

RHF2015

1375D87G02

O

—

—

Reconditioned HF2015

10

RHF2020

1375D87G03

O

—

—

Reconditioned HF2020

10

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

V12-T3-156

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

RHF2030

1375D87G05

O

—

—

Reconditioned HF2030

10

RHF2040

1375D87G07

O

—

—

Reconditioned HF2040

10

RHF2050

1375D87G08

O

—

—

Reconditioned HF2050

10

RHF2060

1375D87G09

O

—

—

Reconditioned HF2060

10

RHF2070

1375D87G10

O

—

—

Reconditioned HF2070

10

RHF2080

1375D87G11

O

—

—

Reconditioned HF2080

10

RHF2090

1375D87G12

O

—

—

Reconditioned HF2090

10

RHF2100

1375D87G13

O

—

—

Reconditioned HF2100

10

RHF3015

1375D87G18

A

—

—

—

10

RHF3020

1375D87G19

A

—

—

—

10

RHF3025

1375D87G20

A

—

—

—

10

RHF3030

1375D87G21

A

—

—

—

10

RHF3040

1375D87G23

A

—

—

—

10

RHF3050

1375D87G24

A

—

—

—

10

RHF3060

1375D87G25

A

—

—

—

10

RHF3070

1375D87G26

A

—

—

—

10

RHF3080

1375D87G27

A

—

—

—

10

RHF3090

1375D87G28

A

—

—

—

10

RHF3100

1375D87G29

A

—

—

—

10

RHFA2015

1375D85G02

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2015

10
10

RHFA2020

1375D85G03

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2020

RHFA2025

1375D85G04

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2025

10

RHFA2030

1375D85G05

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2030

10

RHFA2040

1375D85G07

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2040

10

RHFA2050

1375D85G08

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2050

10

RHFA2060

1375D85G09

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2060

10

RHFA2070

1375D85G10

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2070

10

RHFA2080

1375D85G11

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2080

10

RHFA2090

1375D85G12

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2090

10

RHFA2100

1375D85G13

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2100

10

RHFA2150

1375D85G15

O

—

—

Reconditioned FA2150

10

RHFA3015

1375D85G22

A

—

—

—

10

RHFA3020

1375D85G23

A

—

—

—

10

RHFA3025

1375D85G24

A

—

—

—

10

RHFA3030

1375D85G25

A

—

—

—

10

RHFA3040

1375D85G27

A

—

—

—

10

RHFA3050

1375D85G28

A

—

—

—

10

RHFA3060

1375D85G29

A

—

—

—

10

RHFA3070

1375D85G30

A

—

—

—

10

RHFA3080

1375D85G31

A

—

—

—

10

RHFA3090

1375D85G32

A

—

—

—

10

RHFA3100

1375D85G33

A

—

—

—

10

RHFA3150

1375D85G35

A

—

—

—

10

RHK2070

1376D14G02

O

—

—

Reconditioned HK2070

10

RHK2090

1376D14G03

O

—

—

Reconditioned HK2090

10

RHK2100

1376D14G04

O

—

—

Reconditioned HK2100

10

RHK2125

1376D14G05

O

—

—

Reconditioned HK2125

10

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-157

3
1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

RHK2150

1376D14G06

O

—

—

Reconditioned HK2150

10

RHK2175

1376D14G07

O

—

—

Reconditioned HK2175

10

RHK2200

1376D14G08

O

—

—

Reconditioned HK2200

10

RHK2225

1376D14G09

O

—

—

Reconditioned HK2225

10

RHK2225K

NO STYLE

O

—

—

—

—

RHK3070

1376D14G22

A

—

—

—

10

5

RHK3090

1376D14G23

A

—

—

—

10

RHK3100

1376D14G24

A

—

—

—

10

6

RHK3125

1376D14G25

A

—

—

—

10

RHK3150

1376D14G26

A

—

—

—

10

7

RHK3175

1376D14G27

A

—

—

—

10

RHK3200

1376D14G28

A

—

—

—

10

8

RHK3225

1376D14G29

A

—

—

—

10

RHK3225K

NO STYLE

O

—

—

—

—

9

RHKL2125

1376D15G05

O

—

—

Reconditioned KL2125

10

RHKL2150

1376D15G06

O

—

—

Reconditioned KL2150

10

10

RHKL2175

1376D15G07

O

—

—

Reconditioned KL2175

10

RHKL2200

1376D15G08

O

—

—

Reconditioned KL2200

10

11

RHKL2225

1376D15G09

O

—

—

Reconditioned KL2225

10

RHKL2250

1376D15G10

O

—

—

Reconditioned KL2250

10

12

RHKL2300

1376D15G12

O

—

—

Reconditioned KL2300

10

RHKL2350

1376D15G14

O

—

—

Reconditioned KL2350

10

RHKL2400

1376D15G15

O

—

—

Reconditioned KL2400

10

RHKL2400K

NO STYLE

O

—

—

—

—

14

RHKL3125

1376D15G25

A

—

—

—

10

RHKL3150

1376D15G26

A

—

—

—

10

15

RHKL3175

1376D15G27

A

—

—

—

10

RHKL3200

1376D15G28

A

—

—

—

10

RHKL3225

1376D15G29

A

—

—

—

10

16

RHKL3250

1376D15G30

A

—

—

—

10

2
3
4

13

RHKL3300

1376D15G32

A

—

—

—

10

RHKL3350

1376D15G34

A

—

—

—

10

RHKL3400

1376D15G35

A

—

—

—

10

18

RHKL3400K

NO STYLE

A

—

—

—

10

RHLM2125

1376D16G05

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2125

10

19

RHLM2150

1376D16G06

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2150

10

RHLM2175

1376D16G07

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2175

10

20

RHLM2200

1376D16G08

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2200

10

RHLM2225

1376D16G09

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2225

10

21

RHLM2250

1376D16G10

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2250

10

RHLM2275

1376D16G11

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2275

10

RHLM2300

1376D16G12

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2300

10
10

17

22

RHLM2350

1376D16G14

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2350

23

RHLM2400

1376D16G15

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2400

10

RHLM2450

1376D16G16

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2450

10

24

RHLM2500

1376D16G17

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2500

10

RHLM2550

1376D16G18

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2550

10

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

V12-T3-158

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

RHLM2600

1376D16G19

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2600

10

RHLM2600K

1376D16G20

O

—

—

—

—

RHLM2700

NO STYLE

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2700

10

RHLM2800

1376D16G22

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2800

10

RHLM3125

1376D16G35

A

—

—

—

10

RHLM3150

1376D16G36

A

—

—

—

10

RHLM3175

1376D16G37

A

—

—

—

10

RHLM3200

1376D16G38

A

—

—

—

10

RHLM3225

1376D16G39

A

—

—

—

10

RHLM3250

1376D16G40

A

—

—

—

10

RHLM3275

1376D16G41

A

—

—

—

10

RHLM3300

1376D16G42

A

—

—

—

10

RHLM3325

1376D16G43

A

—

—

—

10

RHLM3350

1376D16G44

A

—

—

—

10

RHLM3400

1376D16G45

A

—

—

—

10

RHLM3450

1376D16G46

A

—

—

—

10

RHLM3500

1376D16G47

A

—

—

—

10

RHLM3550

1376D16G48

A

—

—

—

10

RHLM3600

1376D16G49

A

—

—

—

10

RHLM3600K

1376D16G50

O

—

—

—

—

RHLM3700

1376D16G51

A

—

—

—

10

RHLM3800

1376D16G52

A

—

—

—

10

RJ2070

1376D10G02

O

—

—

Reconditioned J2070

3, 10

RJ2090

1376D10G03

O

—

—

Reconditioned J2090

3, 10

RJ2100

1376D10G04

O

—

—

Reconditioned J2100

3, 10

RJ2125

1376D10G05

O

—

—

Reconditioned J2125

3, 10

RJ2150

1376D10G06

O

—

—

Reconditioned J2150

3, 10

RJ2175

1376D10G07

O

—

—

Reconditioned J2175

3, 10

RJ2200

1376D10G08

O

—

—

Reconditioned J2200

3, 10

RJ2225

1376D10G09

O

—

—

Reconditioned J2225

3, 10

RJ2225K

NO STYLE

O

—

—

—

—

RJ3070

1376D10G22

A

—

—

—

3, 10

RJ3090

1376D10G23

A

—

—

—

3, 10

RJ3100

1376D10G24

A

—

—

—

3, 10

RJ3125

1376D10G25

A

—

—

—

3, 10

RJ3150

1376D10G26

A

—

—

—

3, 10

RJ3175

1376D10G27

A

—

—

—

3, 10

RJ3200

1376D10G28

A

—

—

—

3, 10

RJ3225

1376D10G29

A

—

—

—

3, 10

RJ3225K

NO STYLE

O

—

—

—

—

RK2070

1376D11G02

O

—

—

Reconditioned K2070

3, 10

RK2090

1376D11G03

O

—

—

Reconditioned K2090

3, 10

RK2100

1376D11G04

O

—

—

Reconditioned K2100

3, 10

RK2125

1376D11G05

O

—

—

Reconditioned K2125

3, 10

RK2150

1376D11G06

O

—

—

Reconditioned K2150

3, 10

RK2175

1376D11G07

O

—

—

Reconditioned K2175

3, 10

RK2200

1376D11G08

O

—

—

Reconditioned K2200

3, 10

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

1

25
V12-T3-159

3
1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

RK2225

1376D11G09

O

—

—

Reconditioned K2225

3, 10

RK2225K

1376D11G10

O

—

—

—

—

RK3070

1376D11G22

O

RHK3070

1376D14G22

—

3, 10

RK3090

1376D11G23

O

RHK3090

1376D14G23

—

3, 10

RK3100

1376D11G24

O

RHK3100

1376D14G24

—

3, 10

RK3125

1376D11G25

O

RHK3125

1376D14G25

—

3, 10

5

RK3150

1376D11G26

O

RHK3150

1376D14G26

—

3, 10

RK3175

1376D11G27

O

RHK3175

1376D14G27

—

3, 10

6

RK3200

1376D11G28

O

RHK3200

1376D14G28

—

3, 10

RK3225

1376D11G29

O

RHK3225

1376D14G29

—

3, 10

7

RK3225K

1376D11G30

O

—

—

—

—

RKL2125

1376D12G05

O

—

—

Reconditioned L2125

3, 10

8

RKL2150

1376D12G06

O

—

—

Reconditioned L2150

3, 10

RKL2175

1376D12G07

O

—

—

Reconditioned L2175

3, 10

9

RKL2200

1376D12G08

O

—

—

Reconditioned L2200

3, 10

RKL2225

1376D12G09

O

—

—

Reconditioned L2225

3, 10

10

RKL2250

1376D12G10

O

—

—

Reconditioned L2250

3, 10

RKL2275

NO STYLE

O

—

—

—

3, 10

11

RKL2300

1376D12G12

O

—

—

Reconditioned L2300

3, 10

RKL2350

1376D12G14

O

—

—

Reconditioned L2350

3, 10

12

RKL2400

1376D12G15

O

—

—

Reconditioned L2400

3, 10

RKL2400K

NO STYLE

O

—

—

—

—

RKL3125

1376D12G25

O

RHKL3125

1376D15G25

—

3, 10

RKL3150

1376D12G26

O

RHKL3150

1376D15G26

—

3, 10

RKL3175

1376D12G27

O

RHKL3175

1376D15G27

—

3, 10

RKL3200

1376D12G28

O

RHKL3200

1376D15G28

—

3, 10

RKL3225

1376D12G29

O

RHKL3225

1376D15G29

—

3, 10

RKL3250

1376D12G30

O

RHKL3250

1376D15G30

—

3, 10

RKL3300

1376D12G32

O

RHKL3300

1376D15G32

—

3, 10

16

RKL3350

1376D12G34

O

RHKL3350

1376D15G34

—

3, 10

RKL3400

1376D12G35

O

RHKL3400

1376D15G35

—

3, 10

17

RLM2125

1376D13G05

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2125

3, 10

RLM2150

1376D13G06

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2150

3, 10

18

RLM2175

1376D13G07

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2175

3, 10

RLM2200

1376D13G08

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2200

3, 10

19

RLM2225

1376D13G09

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2225

3, 10

RLM2250

1376D13G10

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2250

3, 10

20

RLM2275

1376D13G11

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2275

3, 10

RLM2300

1376D13G12

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2300

3, 10

21

RLM2350

1376D13G14

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2350

3, 10

RLM2400

1376D13G15

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2400

3, 10

22

RLM2500

1376D13G17

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2500

3, 10

RLM2600

1376D13G19

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2600

3, 10

23

RLM2600K

1376D13G20

O

—

—

—

—

RLM2700

1376D13G21

O

—

—

Reconditioned LM2700

3, 10

24

RLM3150

1376D13G36

O

RHLM3150

1376D16G36

—

3, 10

RLM3175

1376D13G37

O

RHLM3175

1376D16G37

—

3, 10

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

2
3
4

13
14
15

V12-T3-160

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75 Catalog Number

MARK 75 Style Number

Series C Catalog Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

RLM3200

1376D13G38

O

RHLM3200

1376D16G38

—

3, 10

RLM3225

1376D13G39

O

RHLM3225

1376D16G39

—

3, 10

RLM3250

1376D13G40

O

RHLM3250

1376D16G40

—

3, 10

RLM3275

1376D13G41

O

RHLM3275

1376D16G41

—

3, 10

RLM3300

1376D13G42

O

RHLM3300

1376D16G42

—

3, 10

RLM3350

1376D13G44

O

RHLM3350

1376D16G44

—

3, 10

RLM3400

1376D13G45

O

RHLM3400

1376D16G45

—

3, 10

RLM3500

1376D13G47

O

RHLM3500

1376D16G47

—

3, 10

RLM3600

1376D13G49

O

RHLM3600

1376D16G49

—

3, 10

RLM3600K

1376D13G50

O

—

—

—

—

RLM3700

1376D13G51

O

RHLM3700

1376D16G51

—

3, 10

RLM3800

1376D13G52

O

RHLM3800

1376D16G52

—

3, 10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-161

3
1
2

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference
Replacement Breaker

Replacements

Mining and 1000V
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75
Catalog Number

E2
Style Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

1227C36G09

1227C36G09

O

1227C36G11

E2N312W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

3

1227C36G10

1227C36G10

O

1227C36G12

E2N310W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C36G11

1227C36G11

A

—

E2NM312W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

4

1227C36G12

1227C36G12

A

—

E2NM310W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C36G13

1227C36G13

O

—

E2N310WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5

1227C36G14

1227C36G14

O

—

E2N312WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C36G19

1227C36G19

O

—

E2N312MW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

6

1227C37G15

1227C37G15

O

—

E2N310WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G16

1227C37G16

O

—

E2N312WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G17

1227C37G17

O

1227C36G12

E2N310W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G18

1227C37G18

O

1229C37G19

E2N310WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G19

1227C37G19

O

—

E2N310WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G21

1227C37G21

O

—

E2N312WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G22

1227C37G22

O

1227C36G12

E2N312W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G23

1227C37G23

O

1229C37G20

E2N312WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

1227C37G27

1227C37G27

O

—

E2N312MW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1227C37G28

1227C37G28

O

1229C37G18

E2N312MWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1228C81G01

1228C81G01

A

—

—

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1228C81G02

1228C81G02

A

—

—

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1228C81G03

1228C81G03

A

—

—

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1228C81G04

1228C81G04

A

—

—

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1228C82G01

1228C82G01

A

—

—

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1228C82G02

1228C82G02

A

—

—

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1228C82G03

1228C82G03

A

—

—

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1228C82G04

1228C82G04

A

—

—

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1229C37G13

1229C37G13

O

—

E2N310WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8
1–3, 5, 7, 8

1229C37G14

1229C37G14

O

—

E2N312WU66

1229C37G15

1229C37G15

O

1229C37G19

E2N310WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1229C37G16

1229C37G16

O

—

E2N312WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1229C37G17

1229C37G17

O

1227C37G28

E2N312MWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1229C37G18

1229C37G18

A

—

E2NM312MWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1229C37G19

1229C37G19

A

—

E2NM310WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

18

1229C37G20

1229C37G20

A

—

E2NM312WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1259C52G12

1259C52G12

O

—

E2FM050YM

1–3, 5, 7, 8

19

1259C52G13

1259C52G13

O

—

E2FM050KM

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1259C52G14

1259C52G14

O

—

E2FM100KM

1–3, 5, 7, 8

20

1259C52G15

1259C52G15

O

—

E2FM150TM

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1259C52G16

1259C52G16

O

—

E2FM050YM

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1259C52G17

1259C52G17

O

—

E2FM100KM

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C71G03

1278C71G03

O

5685D48G87

E2KE3225W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

16
17

21
22
23
24
25

1278C71G04

1278C71G04

O

5685D48G86

E2KE3225W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C71G07

1278C71G07

O

—

E2KE3225WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C71G08

1278C71G08

O

—

E2KE3225WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C71G11

1278C71G11

O

—

E2KE3225MW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C71G12

1278C71G12

O

—

E2KE3225MW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C72G02

1278C72G02

O

5685D48G85

E2KE34002W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

V12-T3-162

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference

1

Replacement Breaker

Replacements

Mining and 1000V
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75
Catalog Number

E2
Style Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

1278C72G04

1278C72G04

O

—

E2KE34002WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C72G06

1278C72G06

O

—

E2KE3400M2W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G01

1278C73G01

O

—

E2N3600WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G02

1278C73G02

O

—

E2N3800WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G03

1278C73G03

O

5685D48G84

E2N3600WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G04

1278C73G04

O

2609D60G28

E2N3600WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G05

1278C73G05

O

—

E2N3600WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G07

1278C73G07

O

—

E2N3800WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G08

1278C73G08

O

5685D48G83

E2N3800W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G09

1278C73G09

O

2609D60G29

E2N3800WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G11

1278C73G11

O

—

E2N3800MW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G12

1278C73G12

O

2609D60G57

E2N3800MWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G13

1278C73G13

O

—

E2N3800MW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1278C73G14

1278C73G14

O

2609D60G58

E2N3800MWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G01

1284C67G01

O

1284C68G01

E2KE3150W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G02

1284C67G02

O

1284C68G02

E2KE3150WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G03

1284C67G03

O

1284C68G03

E2KE3150WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G04

1284C67G04

O

1284C68G04

E2KE3150WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G05

1284C67G05

O

1284C68G05

E2LE3300W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G06

1284C67G06

O

1284C68G06

E2LE3300WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G07

1284C67G07

O

1284C68G07

E2LE3300WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G08

1284C67G08

O

1284C68G08

E2LE3300WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G09

1284C67G09

O

1284C68G09

E2LE3600W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G10

1284C67G10

O

1284C68G10

E2LE3600WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G11

1284C67G11

O

1284C68G11

E2LE3600WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C67G12

1284C67G12

O

1284C68G12

E2LE3600WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G01

1284C68G01

A

—

E2KEM3150W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G02

1284C68G02

A

—

E2KEM3150WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G03

1284C68G03

A

—

E2KEM3150WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G04

1284C68G04

A

—

E2KEM3150WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G05

1284C68G05

A

—

E2KEM3400W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G06

1284C68G06

A

—

E2KEM3400WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G07

1284C68G07

A

—

E2KEM3400WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G08

1284C68G08

A

—

E2KEM3400WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G09

1284C68G09

A

—

E2LEM3600W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G10

1284C68G10

A

—

E2LEM3600WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G11

1284C68G11

A

—

E2LEM3600WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C68G12

1284C68G12

A

—

E2LEM3600WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G01

1284C80G01

O

1284C68G01

E2KE3150W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G02

1284C80G02

O

1284C68G02

E2KE3150WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G03

1284C80G03

O

1284C68G03

E2KE3150WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G04

1284C80G04

O

1284C68G04

E2KE3150WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G05

1284C80G05

O

1284C68G05

E2LE3300W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G06

1284C80G06

O

1284C68G06

E2LE3300WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G07

1284C80G07

O

1284C68G07

E2LE3300WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G08

1284C80G08

O

1284C68G08

E2LE3300WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

2

25
V12-T3-163

3
1

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference
Replacement Breaker

Replacements

Mining and 1000V
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75
Catalog Number

E2
Style Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

1284C80G09

1284C80G09

O

1284C68G09

E2LE3600W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

3

1284C80G10

1284C80G10

O

1284C68G10

E2LE3600WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C80G11

1284C80G11

O

1284C68G11

E2LE3600WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

4

1284C80G12

1284C80G12

O

1284C68G12

E2LE3600WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C81G01

1284C81G01

O

1284C83G01

E2N3800W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5

1284C81G02

1284C81G02

O

1284C83G02

E2N3800WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C81G03

1284C81G03

O

1284C83G03

E2N3800WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

6

1284C81G04

1284C81G04

O

1284C83G04

E2N3800WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C82G01

1284C82G01

O

1284C83G01

E2N3800W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C82G02

1284C82G02

O

1284C83G02

E2N3800WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2

7

1284C82G03

1284C82G03

O

1284C83G03

E2N3800WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C82G04

1284C82G04

O

1284C83G04

E2N3800WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C83G01

1284C83G01

A

—

E2NM3800W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C83G02

1284C83G02

A

—

E2NM3800WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C83G03

1284C83G03

A

—

E2NM3800WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1284C83G04

1284C83G04

A

—

E2NM3800WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G01

1291C26G01

O

—

E2K3225AWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G02

1291C26G02

O

—

E2K3225DWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G03

1291C26G03

O

1291C26G12

E2K3225AWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G04

1291C26G04

O

1291C26G13

E2K3225DWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

12

1291C26G05

1291C26G05

O

1291C26G14

E2K3400MAWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G06

1291C26G06

O

1291C26G15

E2K3400MDWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

13

1291C26G07

1291C26G07

O

—

E2K3400MAWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G08

1291C26G08

O

1291C26G16

E2K3400MAWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

14

1291C26G12

1291C26G12

A

—

E2KEM3225WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G13

1291C26G13

A

—

E2KEM3225WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

15

1291C26G14

1291C26G14

A

—

E2KEM3225MWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G15

1291C26G15

A

—

E2KEM3225MWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

16

1291C26G16

1291C26G16

A

—

E2KEM3225MWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G17

1291C26G17

O

—

E2KE3225WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

17

1291C26G18

1291C26G18

O

—

E2KE3225WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G19

1291C26G19

O

1291C26G12

E2KE3225WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

18

1291C26G20

1291C26G20

O

1291C26G13

E2KE3225WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C26G21

1291C26G21

O

—

E2KE3225MWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

19

1291C26G22

1291C26G22

O

1291C26G15

E2KE3225MWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C32G01

1291C32G01

O

—

E2LE3400WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

20

1291C32G02

1291C32G02

O

1291C32G07

E2LE3400WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C32G03

1291C32G03

O

OMIT

E2LE3400WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C32G04

1291C32G04

O

1291C32G09

E2LE3400MWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C32G05

1291C32G05

O

—

E2KE3400WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C32G06

1291C32G06

O

1291C32G07

E2KE34002WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1291C32G07

1291C32G07

A

—

E2KEM34002WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

8
9
10
11

21
22

1291C32G08

1291C32G08

O

1291C32G09

E2KE3400M2WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

23

1291C32G09

1291C32G09

A

—

E2KEM3400M2WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G01

1366D21G01

O

—

E2F030EM

1–3, 5, 7, 8

24

1366D21G02

1366D21G02

O

—

E2F050YM

1–3, 5, 7, 8

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

V12-T3-164

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference

1

Replacement Breaker

Replacements

Mining and 1000V
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75
Catalog Number

E2
Style Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

1366D21G03

1366D21G03

O

—

E2F050YM+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G04

1366D21G04

O

—

E2F100KM

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G05

1366D21G05

O

—

E2F100KMU62+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G06

1366D21G06

O

—

E2F050YM+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G07

1366D21G07

O

—

E2F100KMU62+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G08

1366D21G08

O

—

E2F030EM

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G09

1366D21G09

O

—

E2F030EM+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G10

1366D21G10

O

—

E2F030EMU62+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G11

1366D21G11

O

—

E2F030EMS22+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G12

1366D21G12

O

—

E2F030EMU62

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G13

1366D21G13

O

—

E2F030EM

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G14

1366D21G14

O

—

E2F3030

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G15

1366D21G15

O

—

E2F3030U62

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1366D21G16

1366D21G16

O

—

E2F3030S22

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G17

1366D21G17

O

—

E2F050YM

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G18

1366D21G18

O

—

E2F100KM

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G19

1366D21G19

O

—

E2F100KM+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G20

1366D21G20

O

—

E2F100KMU62+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G22

1366D21G22

O

—

E2F100KMS22+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G23

1366D21G23

A

—

E2F100KM+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G24

1366D21G24

A

—

E2F100KMU62+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

15
16

1366D21G27

1366D21G27

O

—

E2F100KMU62

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G28

1366D21G28

O

—

E2F3100

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G29

1366D21G29

O

—

E2F3100U62

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G30

1366D21G30

A

—

E2F100KM

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G31

1366D21G31

A

—

E2F100KMU62

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G32

1366D21G32

A

—

E2F100KMS22

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G33

1366D21G33

O

—

E2F3100S22

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G34

1366D21G34

O

—

E2F050YMU62

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G35

1366D21G35

O

—

E2F050YM+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G36

1366D21G36

O

—

E2F050YMU62+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G37

1366D21G37

O

—

E2F050YMS22

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G38

1366D21G38

A

—

E2F050YMU62

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G39

1366D21G39

A

—

E2F050YM+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

11
12
13
14

17
18
19
20
21
22
23

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T3-165

3
1
2
3
4
5
6

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference
Replacements

Replacement Breaker
Mining and 1000V
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75
Catalog Number

E2
Style Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

1366D21G40

1366D21G40

A

—

E2F050YMU62+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G41

1366D21G41

A

—

E2F050YMS22

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G42

1366D21G42

A

—

E2F030EMU62+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G43

1366D21G43

O

—

E2F100KMS22+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G44

1366D21G44

A

—

E2F100KMS22+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G45

1366D21G45

O

—

E2F100RMS22

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1366D21G46

1366D21G46

O

—

E2F3015U62

1–3, 5, 7, 8

7

1373D88G13

1373D88G13

O

1373D89G09

E2N312W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D88G14

1373D88G14

O

1373D89G10

E2N312WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

8

1373D88G15

1373D88G15

O

1373D89G11

E2N312WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D88G16

1373D88G16

O

1373D89G12

E2N312WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

9

1373D88G17

1373D88G17

O

1373D89G09

E2N312W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D88G18

1373D88G18

O

1373D89G10

E2N312WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

10

1373D88G19

1373D88G19

O

1373D89G11

E2N312WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D88G20

1373D88G20

O

1373D89G12

E2N312WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

11

1373D89G09

1373D89G09

A

—

E2NM312W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D89G10

1373D89G10

A

—

E2NM312WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

12

1373D89G11

1373D89G11

A

—

E2NM312WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

1373D89G12

1373D89G12

A

—

E2NM312WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

13

2600D43G11

2600D43G11

O

1264C99G03

—

—

2600D43G12

2600D43G12

O

1264C99G03

—

—

14

2600D43G14

2600D43G14

O

1264C99G03

—

—

2602D86G11

2602D86G11

O

1264C99G05

—

—

15

2602D86G12

2602D86G12

O

1264C99G05

—

—

2602D86G13

2602D86G13

O

1264C99G05

—

—

2602D86G14

2602D86G14

O

1264C99G05

—

—

2602D99G05

2602D99G05

O

1264C99G02

—

—

2602D99G06

2602D99G06

O

1264C99G02

—

—

2602D99G07

2602D99G07

O

1264C99G02

—

—

2602D99G08

2602D99G08

O

1264C99G02

—

—

2603D48G07

2603D48G07

O

2603D48G09

—

—

16
17
18

2603D48G08

2603D48G08

O

2603D48G09

—

—

19

2609D60G01

2609D60G01

O

—

E2K3225AWS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G02

2609D60G02

O

—

E2K3225DWS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

20

2609D60G03

2609D60G03

O

—

E2LE3400WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G04

2609D60G04

O

—

E2N3600WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

21

2609D60G05

2609D60G05

O

—

E2N3800WS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G08

2609D60G08

O

—

E2FM100KM

1–3, 5, 7, 8

22

2609D60G09

2609D60G09

O

—

E2FM100KMU13

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G10

2609D60G10

O

—

E2FM050YM

1–3, 5, 7, 8

23

2609D60G17

2609D60G17

O

—

E2N3600WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G18

2609D60G18

O

—

E2N3800WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

24

2609D60G19

2609D60G19

O

—

E2N3600W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G20

2609D60G20

O

2609D60G29

E2N3800WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

25

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.
V12-T3-166

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference

1

Replacement Breaker

Replacements

Mining and 1000V
Catalog Number

Style Number

Status 1

MARK 75
Catalog Number

E2
Style Number

Notes
(See Page V12-T3-114)

2609D60G28

2609D60G28

A

—

E2LEM36002WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G29

2609D60G29

A

—

E2NM3800WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G40

2609D60G40

O

—

E2K3400MAW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G41

2609D60G41

O

—

E2K3400MDW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G44

2609D60G44

O

—

E2LE3400MW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G46

2609D60G46

O

—

E2N3800MW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G47

2609D60G47

O

—

E2N3800MWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G48

2609D60G48

O

—

E2N3800MW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G49

2609D60G49

O

2609D60G58

E2N3800MWU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G57

2609D60G57

A

—

E2NM3800MW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G58

2609D60G58

A

—

E2NM312MW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G61

2609D60G61

O

—

E2LE3400MWS86

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G63

2609D60G63

O

—

E2LE34002WU66

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G64

2609D60G64

O

—

E2K3400MAW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G66

2609D60G66

O

—

E2K3400MAWS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G67

2609D60G67

O

2609D60G70

E2K3400MAW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G69

2609D60G69

O

—

E2K3400MAWS10

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D60G70

2609D60G70

A

—

E2KEM3225MW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2610D64G07

2610D64G07

O

2610D64G13

—

—

2610D64G08

2610D64G08

O

2610D64G13

—

—

2610D64G09

2610D64G09

O

2610D64G13

—

—

2610D64G10

2610D64G10

O

2610D64G13

—

—

5685D48G45

5685D48G45

O

—

E2FM100KMU13+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G71

5685D48G71

O

5685D48G83

E2N3800W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G72

5685D48G72

O

5685D48G84

E2N3600W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G73

5685D48G73

O

5685D48G85

E2LE3400W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G74

5685D48G74

O

5685D48G86

E2K3225DW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G75

5685D48G75

O

1291C26G12

E2K3225AW

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G83

5685D48G83

A

—

E2NM3800W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G84

5685D48G84

A

—

E2LEM36002W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G85

5685D48G85

A

—

E2KEM34002W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G86

5685D48G86

A

—

E2KEM3225W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G87

5685D48G87

A

—

E2KEM3225W

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G88

5685D48G88

O

—

E2FM100KM+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G89

5685D48G89

O

—

E2FM050YM+
625B229G08

1–3, 5, 7, 8

5685D48G90

5685D48G90

O

—

E2FM050YMU13

1–3, 5, 7, 8

2609D99G06

2609D99G06

O

—

—

—

5685D48G42

5685D48G42

O

—

—

—

5685D48G36

5685D48G36

O

—

—

—

5685D48G30

5685D48G30

O

—

—

—

5685D48G24

5685D48G24

O

—

—

—

5685D48G18

5685D48G18

O

—

—

—

5685D48G12

5685D48G12

O

—

—

—

5685D48G06

5685D48G06

O

—

—

—

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Note
1 O = Obsolete, A = Available.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

2

25
V12-T3-167

3

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities

1

Pricing Information

2

Vista/VISTALINE Discount Symbol RCB-2

Price and Availability Digest (PAD)

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-168

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards
Westinghouse PRL3

4

Panelboards
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FDP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PB/PH/PH-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MP40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRL1 and PRL2 Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRL1a and PRL2a Panelboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRL4B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRL4F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surge Protection Device—SPD Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pow-R-Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panelboard Retrofits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pow-R-Line 1R and 2R Renovation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Support Services—Satellite Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V12-T4-2
V12-T4-2
V12-T4-3
V12-T4-4
V12-T4-9
V12-T4-10
V12-T4-11
V12-T4-12
V12-T4-13
V12-T4-14
V12-T4-15
V12-T4-15
V12-T4-16
V12-T4-17
V12-T4-18
V12-T4-19
V12-T4-20
V12-T4-20
V12-T4-20
V12-T4-21
V12-T4-21
V12-T4-22
V12-T4-22
V12-T4-22

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T4-1

4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Panelboards

Product Description
Panelboards and switchboards
are enclosed assemblies for
lighting and distribution that
accept incoming power and
consist of a series of circuit
breakers and/or fusible
switches. These devices
protect each circuit by
providing overcurrent and
short-circuit protection.

Product History
In 1994, Eaton acquired
the Distribution and Control
Business Unit (DCBU) of
Westinghouse and integrated
it with their Cutler-Hammer®
business unit forming a
powerful new combination.
This product history tracks the
evolution of panelboard and
switchboard products for
both manufacturers.
In the 1920s, prior to the
development of circuit
breakers, Westinghouse
sold panelboards designed
for main and branch circuit
fuses. Circuit breakers were
first introduced in 1927 and
put Westinghouse in the
forefront of circuit breaker
technology. A few years later
the first Westinghouse
“NOFUSE” circuit breakers
were introduced. “NOFUSE”
panelboards were initially
available in ratings up to 225A
at 250V. Panelboards were
designed at higher ratings as
circuit breakers’ ratings
became available. By 1958,
panelboards were available at
ratings up to 800A and 600V.
The most significant
panelboard types were the
CDP and FDP panels. For
more than 34 years, these
two types encompassed
most Westinghouse moldedcase circuit breakers and
fusible switches.

22

In 1962, Eaton’s electrical
business entered the
panelboard and switchboard
market with the purchase of
Mullenbach. Soon after the
Mullenbach acquisition,
Cutler-Hammer entered
into an agreement with
Westinghouse to supply
breakers and fusible
devices for panelboards
and switchboards, and Eaton
also began manufacturing
Westinghouse-type
panelboards under the
agreement. This relationship
made in the early 1960s
provided users of both trade
name products access to
aftermarket service for
add-on branch devices and
hardware. Classic CutlerHammer panelboards and
switchboards were designed
and listed for use with
Westinghouse breakers.
In 1988, Westinghouse
redesigned the panelboard
and switchboard line
to incorporate the new
Series C® design breakers.
This new design became
a true family of products.
These new panelboards and
switchboards became today’s
Pow-R-Line® family, which
are manufactured in state-ofthe-art facilities strategically
located throughout the
United States.
Eaton’s unique Satellite
Plants support aftermarket
services for all current
Pow-R-Line panelboard
and switchboard products.
Aftermarket service for outof-production panelboards
and switchboards for both
the classic Westinghouse
and Cutler-Hammer
designs is supported
by the Aftermarket
Center in Sumter, SC,
(see Page V12-T4-22), and
is staffed with experienced
and knowledgeable
representatives.

Cutler-Hammer NFB

Westinghouse FDP

Cutler-Hammer MP40

Westinghouse Pow-R-Line 3

Cutler-Hammer CHB

Westinghouse WEB

Cutler-Hammer EE

Westinghouse CDP

23
24
25
V12-T4-2

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

4

Panelboards

Product History Time Line
Page

Product

V12-T4-7

Westinghouse A2B

1935

1940

1945

1950

1955

1960

1965

1970

1975

1980

1985

1990

1995

2000 Present

1
2

Westinghouse NM/NMM

3

V12-T4-7

Westinghouse NA1B

V12-T4-7

Westinghouse NLAB

V12-T4-7

Westinghouse NAB

V12-T4-7

Westinghouse ABH

V12-T4-7

Westinghouse NDP

V12-T4-4

Cutler-Hammer CDP

V12-T4-7

Westinghouse CDP/FDP

V12-T4-7

Westinghouse NQB/NQC/NQP

V12-T4-7

Westinghouse NEB/NHEB

7

V12-T4-7

Westinghouse WCA/WEB/WEHB/
WFB/WGB/WGHB

8

V12-T4-4

Cutler-Hammer CHP/CHB

V12-T4-4

Cutler-Hammer NFB

V12-T4-5

Cutler-Hammer MP40/MP100

V12-T4-7

Westinghouse B10B/Q10P

V12-T4-5

Cutler-Hammer PB

V12-T4-5

Cutler-Hammer PH

V12-T4-6

Cutler-Hammer EE

V12-T4-7

Westinghouse W10B/W10P

V12-T4-6

Cutler-Hammer EP

V12-T4-8

Westinghouse PRL3

V12-T4-8

Westinghouse PRL1, PRL2

V12-T4-8

Cutler-Hammer PRL1a, 2a

V12-T4-8

Cutler-Hammer PRL3a

V12-T4-8

Westinghouse PRL4B, F

V12-T4-5

Cutler-Hammer PRL5P

4
5
6

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T4-3

4

Panelboards
Replacement Capabilities

1

Replacement
Capabilities

Original Cutler-Hammer Panelboard Breaker Replacement Chart

2

How to Select
Replacement Breakers
A complete line of new,
UL® Listed products,
physically and electrically
interchangeable moldedcase circuit breakers is
offered by Eaton.

Cutler-Hammer
Panelboard Type

Original Branch
Circuit Breaker

New
Panelboard Type

New
Breaker

Panelboard
Replacement Breaker 1

CHP 2
CHB 2
NPLAB 2
NLAB 2
NA1B 2

CH
CHB
P
QL
E
EA
EH
E
EA
EH
EB
EHB
EHC
EC
CA
CC
FB
HFB
FD
FC
FH
FS
HFC
CCH
CHH
E
EA
EH
EB
EHB
F
FA
HF
HFA
FB
HFB
CA
DA
JA
KA
HKA
HK
HKL
LA
HLA
LAB
LM
HLM
MA
HMA
NB
HNB
CC
CCH
CHH

PRL1a
PRL1a
PRL1a
PRL1a
PRL3a
PRL3a
PRL3a
PRL3a
PRL3a
PRL3a
PRL3a or PRL4B
PRL3a or PRL4B
PRL3a or PRL4B
PRL3a or PRL4B
PRL3a or PRL4B
PRL3a or PRL4B
PRL3a or PRL4B
PRL3a or PRL4B
PRL3a or PRL4B
PRL3a or PRL4B
PRL3a or PRL4B
PRL3a or PRL4B
PRL3a or PRL4B
PRL3a or PRL4B
PRL3a or PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B

CH
CHB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
EHD
EHD
FD
EHD
CA
CC
FD
FD
FD
FD
HFD
FD
HFD
—
CHH
—
—
—
EHD
EHD
—
—
—
—
FDB
FD
CA
DK
KDB
KD
HKD
—
—
LD
LD
LDB
—
—
MDL
MDL
ND
ND
CC
—
CHH

—
—
—
—
REH
REH
REH
REH
REH
REH
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
REH
REH
REH
—
—
RHF
RHFA
RHF
RHFA
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
RHK
RHKL
—
—
—
RHLM
RHLM
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Replacement Solutions

To properly select the
breaker for your existing
panelboard:
1. Identify the panel
type and the existing
branch breaker.

NH1B 2
NDP 2
HNDP 2
NFB

2. Select the appropriate
breaker from the direct
replacement solution
column. As shown, three
options are available.
Option 1: Series C
breakers are available as
direct replacement for
installation in CutlerHammer panelboards.
They are available at
your local distributors
and are the most
economical solution.
Option 2: Original,
but still-in-production
breakers, (sometimes
referred to as replacement breakers) are
available from Eaton
national warehouses.
These are identical
to the existing
branch breakers.
Option 3: Panelboard
replacement breakers,
available for out-ofproduction moldedcase breakers, are
physically and electrically
interchangeable with
the existing breaker.
Available in three-pole
only. Refer to Pages
V12-T3-80 through
V12-T3-87 for further
information.
3. For additional information,
contact Avery Creek, NC,
Technical Resource
Center at 1-800-356-1243
or your local Eaton
Satellite plant.

25
V12-T4-4

CDP 3

Notes
1 New breakers that are a direct physical and electrical replacement for out-of-production breakers. Available in three-pole only.
See Pages V12-T3-80 through V12-T3-87 for further information.
2 Connectors not available.
3 Not rated for 100% rated breakers.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

4

Panelboards
Replacement Capabilities

Original Cutler-Hammer Panelboard Breaker
Replacement Chart, continued

1

Replacement Solutions

Replacement Solutions

Cutler-Hammer
Panelboard Type

Original Branch
Circuit Breaker

New
Panelboard Type

New
Breaker

Cutler-Hammer
Panelboard Type

Original Branch
Circuit Breaker

New
Panelboard Type

New
Breaker

MP40 1

CC

PRL4B

ED

MP40 1

LC

PRL4B

LD

CCH

PRL4B

—

LS (A)

PRL4B

LD

CHH

PRL4B

ED

LH (A)

PRL4B

HLD

EB

PRL4B

EHD

MA

PRL4B

MDL

EHB

PRL4B

EHD

HMA

PRL4B

MDL

EC

PRL4B

EHD

MC

PRL4B

MDL

EHC

PRL4B

FD

HMC

PRL4B

MDL

FB

PRL4B

FDB

MS

PRL4B

MDL

HFB

PRL4B

FD

MH

PRL4B

MDL

FC

PRL4B

FDB

NB

PRL4B

ND

HFC

PRL4B

HFD

HNB

PRL4B

ND

FH

PRL4B

HFD

NC

PRL4B

ND

FS

PRL4B

FD

HNC

PRL4B

ND

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

JA

PRL4B

KDB

NS

PRL4B

ND

JB

PRL4B

JB

NH

PRL4B

ND

JS

PRL4B

HJD

MP100

PRL4B

HJD

M50
Fusible switch

PRL4F

JH

M50
Fusible switch

JH

PRL4B

HJD

PH 2

CH

PRL3a

CH

JL

PRL4B

JDC

CHB

PRL3a

CHB

KA

PRL4B

KD

KB

PRL4B

JD

HKB

PRL4B

JD

KS-D

PRL4B

KD

KH-D

PRL4B

KD

DA

PRL4B

DK

LA

PRL4B

LD

HLA

PRL4B

LD

HLA

PRL4B

LD

LAB

PRL4B

LDB

LB

PRL4B

KD

LBB

PRL4B

KDB

HLB

PRL4B

KD

PB 23

CC

PRL3a

CC

CCH

PRL3a

CCH

CHH

PRL3a

CHH

EB

PRL3a

EHD

EHB

PRL3a

EHD

EC

PRL3a

EHD

EC

PRL3a

EHD

EHD

PRL3a

EHD

FC

PRL3a

FD

FS

PRL3a

FD

FH

PRL3a

HFD

FD

PRL3a

FD

CH

PRL1a

CH

CHB

PRL1a

CHB

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Notes
1 See also Page V12-T4-12.
2 See also Page V12-T4-11.
3 Connectors not available.

19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T4-5

4
1
2

Panelboards
Replacement Capabilities

Plug-In Power Panelboards and Switchboards
Replacement Solutions
Cutler-Hammer
Panelboard Type
EE 12

3

Replacement Solutions

Original Branch
Circuit Breaker

New
Panelboard Type

New
Breaker

Cutler-Hammer
Panelboard Type

Original Branch
Circuit Breaker

EP 13

FS

PRL5P

FD

FH

PRL5P

HFD

New
Panelboard Type

New
Breaker

FS

PRL5P

FD

FH

PRL5P

HFD

FL

PRL5P

HDC

FL

PRL5P

FDC

4

JS

PRL5P

JD

JS

PRL5P

JD

JH

PRL5P

HJD

JH

PRL5P

HJD

5

JL

PRL5P

JDC

JL

PRL5P

JDC

KS

PRL5P

KD

KS

PRL5P

KD

KH

PRL5P

HKD

KH

PRL5P

HKD

LS

PRL5P

LD

LS

PRL5P

LD

7

LS(A)

PRL5P

LD

LS(A)

PRL5P

LD

LS(E)

PRL5P

LD

LS(E)

PRL5P

LD

8

LH(B)

PRL5P

HLD

LH(B)

PRL5P

HLD

LH(A)

PRL5P

HLD

LH(A)

PRL5P

HLD

LL(E)

PRL5P

LDC

LL(E)

PRL5P

LDC

LS(B)

PRL5P

LD

LS(B)

PRL5P

LD

LH(E)

PRL5P

HLD

LH(E)

PRL5P

HLD

MS

PRL5P

MDL

MS

PRL5P

MDL

NS

PRL5P

ND

NS

PRL5P

ND

6

9
10
11
12
13

MH

PRL5P

—

MH

PRL5P

—

CC

PRL5P

CC

NH

PRL5P

HND

CCH

PRL5P

—

CC

PRL5P

CC

CHH

PRL5P

CHH

CCH

PRL5P

—

CHH

PRL5P

CHH

Notes
1 Not rated for 100% rated breakers.
2 See also Page V12-T4-13.
3 See also Page V12-T4-14.

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T4-6

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards
Replacement Capabilities

4

Original Westinghouse Panelboard Breaker Replacement Chart
Westinghouse
Panelboard Type

1

Replacement Solutions

Existing Branch
Circuit Breaker

New Panelboard Type

New Breaker

Panelboard Replacement Breaker 1

PRL3a
PRL3a
PRL1a
PRL1aLX
PRL1aLX
PRL1a
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4B
PRL4F
PRL2a
PRL2a
PRL3a
PRL3a
PRL3a
PRL3a
PRL3a
PRL3a
PRL2a
PRL1a
PRL1aLX
PRL3a
PRL3a
PRL1a
PRL1a
PRL1a
PRL1a
PRL1a
PRL1a
PRL1a
PRL1a
PRL2a
PRL1a
PRL1a
PRL1a
PRL1a
PRL3a
PRL3a
PRL3a
PRL3a
PRL2a
PRL2a

—
—
BAB
BAB
BAB
—
—
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC
FB-P TRI-PAC
JDB, JD, HJD, JDC
ED, EDH, EDC

REH
REH
—
—
—
HBAW, HBAX
REH, RHF, RHFA

6

5

DK, KD, HKD, KDC
LD, HLD
LA-P TRI-PAC
LD, HLD, LDC
MDL
LCL
ND, HND
NB-P TRI-PAC
—
HQP
BAB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
HQP
HQP
—
BAB
HQP
HQP
QPHW
QBHW
QHPW
BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
CA
EB, EHD
EHB, EHD
FB, FDB
GB
GHB

5

Panelboards Manufactured Between 1937 and 1988
ABH 2
A2B 2
B10B 2
B10B-LX 2
B10B-LXX 2
B65B 2
CDP/HCDP 23
CDP/HCDP 34

FDP 7
H10P 2
H10B 2
NAB 2
NA1B 2
NDP 2
NEB 2
NHDP 2
NHEB 2
NH1B 2
NLAB 2
NLAB-LX 2
NLAB-AB 2
NLAB-ABH 2
NPLAB 2
NPLAPQ 2
NQC 2
NQB 2
NQP 2
Q10P 2
Q22P 2
Q22B 2
Q65P 2
W10B 2
W10P 2
W22B 2
W22P 2
WCA
WEB
WEHB
WFB
WGB 2
WGHB 2

E
E
BA
BA
BA
HBA
E, EA, EH, F, FA
EB, EHB, EHD, FB, HFB, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC
FB-P TRI-PAC
JB, KB, HKB, JDB, JD, HJD, JDC
CA, CAH, HCA
DA, LB, LBB, HLB 6
JA, KA, HKA, DK, KD, HKD, KDC
LA, LAB, HLA (400A)
LA-P TRI-PAC
LA, LC, HLA (600A)
MA, HMA, MC, HMC
LCL
NB, HNB, NC, HNC
NB-P TRI-PAC®
Fusible switches
HQP
BA
E
E
E, EA, EAH
EA
EH
EH, FA
E-277
QC
QC
QC
QC
QP
QP
QC
BA
QP
QP
QPH
QBH
HP
BA
HQP
QBH
QPH
CA
EB
EHB
FB
GB
GHB

Notes
1 Not rated for 100% rated breakers.
Available in three-pole only. See
Pages V12-T3-80 through V12-T3-87
for further information.
2 Connectors not available.
3 See also Page V12-T4-9.

4

Only breakers of the same frame size
can be installed across from each other
(i.e., in the same horizontal plane).
For other configurations, contact the
Aftermarket Center in Sumter, SC
(see Page V12-T4-22).

5
6

7

2
3
4
5

5
5

6

5
5

7

5

8

5
5
5

9

5
5

10

5

Fusible switches
—
—
REH
REH
REH
REH
REH
REH, RHFA
REH
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office.
KD breakers can be mounted across from
LB breakers if a TAD3 line side adapter
is used. All hardware works with
this configuration.
See also Page V12-T4-10.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

24
25
V12-T4-7

4
1
2
3

Panelboards
Replacement Capabilities

Original Westinghouse Panelboard Breaker Replacement Chart, continued
Westinghouse
Panelboard Type

Original Branch
Circuit Breaker

Replacement Solutions
New Panelboard Type

New Breaker

Panelboard Replacement Breaker

BAB, QBHW

PRL1a 1

BAB, QBHW

—

1

BAB, QBHW

—

Panelboards Manufactured After 1988
PRL1 1

HQP, QPHW

PRL1a

PRL2 1

GB, GHB, GHBS

PRL2a 1

GB, GHB, GHBS-D

—

PRL3 2

BAB, QBH

PRL3a 3

BAB, QBHW

—

GB, GHB, GHBS

PRL3a 3

GB, GHB, GHBS-D

—

5

EHD, FD, FDB, HFD, FDC

PRL3a 3

EHD, FD, FDB, HFD, FDC

—

ED, EDH, EDC

PRL3a 3

ED, EDH, EDC

—

6

CA, HCA, CAH

PRL3a 3

ED

—

EHD, FD, FDB, HFD, FDC

PRL4B

EHD, FD, FDB, HFD, FDC

—

7

ED, EDH, EDC

PRL4B

ED, EDH, EDC

—

CA, CAH, HCA

PRL4B

CA, CAH, HCA

—

8

FCL, FB-P, FDB/LFB

PRL4B

FCL, FB-P, FDB/LFB

—

JD, JDB, HJD, JDC

PRL4B

JD, JDB, HJD, JDC

—

9

DK, KDB, KD, HKD, KDC

PRL4B

DK, KDB, KD, HKD, KDC

—

LCL

PRL4B

LCL

—

10

LA-P TRI-PAC

PRL4B

LA-P TRI-PAC

—

LC, HLC, LA, HLA

PRL4B

LC, HLC, LA, HLA

—

11

LD, HLD, LDC, MD, MDS, ND, HND, NDC

PRL4B

LD, HLD, LDC, MDL, ND, HND, NDC

—

MC, HMC, MA, HMA

PRL4B

MC, HMC, MA, HMA

—

12

NC, HNC, NB, HNB

PRL4B

NC, HNC, NB, HNB

—

NB-P TRI-PAC

PRL4B

NB-P TRI-PAC

—

BAB, QBGF, QBHW, QBHGF, GB, GHB

PRL4B

BAB, QBGF, QBHW, QBHGF, GB, GHB

—

Fusible switches 6

PRL4F

—

Fusible switches

4

13
14
15
16

PRL4B 4

PRL4F 5

Notes
1 See also Page V12-T4-15.
2 See also Page V12-T4-16.
3 See also Page V12-T4-17.
4 See also Page V12-T4-18.
5 See also Page V12-T4-19.
6 400A, 600A, 800A, 1200A, FDP connectors are NOT compatible with FDPW switches.

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T4-8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards
Replacement Capabilities

CDP

4

CDP Panel Layout

1

Originally a
Westinghouse Product

2
7-1/2"

3
5X
7X
9X
13X
13X

Solid Neutral Bar
225A
400A
600A
800A
1200, 1600A

10X
13X
17X

Thru-Feed Lugs
225A
250–400A
600, 800A

13X
15X
17X
19X
21X
23X

12
18
24
30
36
42

4
5
6
7
8

●

●

Determine the amount
of space available in the
panelboard for adding
circuit breakers.
1.38 inches (35.1 mm)
of panel height =
one X space
Determine the type of
breaker needed for the
required ampere rating
and number of poles

Ratings
●
1600A maximum
Replacement Capabilities
Breakers
Refer to renewal parts
data RP01400002E for a
complete list of available
parts including branch device
retrofit kits, which include
the device, as well as, the
bus connectors and the
required mounting hardware.
Contact the Aftermarket
Center in Sumter, SC
(see Page V12-T4-22).

2X

1-Pole EB
EHB, HFB

/

1-Pole EB
EHB, HFB

2-Pole EB
EHB, FB

0

2-Pole EB
EHB, FB

3-Pole EB
EHB, FB

3-Pole
EHB, FB

3X

2- and 3-Pole
HFB

2- and 3-Pole
HFB

2X

2-Pole
CA, CAH

2-Pole
CA, CAH

3X

3-Pole
CA, CAH

3-Pole
CA, CAH

2- or 3-Pole
JB, KB, HKB

2- or 3-Pole
JB, KB, HKB

3X

5"

3X

4X

9"

6X

8"

6X

11"

5X
7X
9X
12X

2- or 3-Pole
DA
LBB, LB
HLB

13

225A
Main Lug
250–400A
Section
600A
800, 1200, 1600A

14

5"

15

9"

2- or 3-Pole
LC, HLC
LA

2- or 3-Pole
MC, HMC
LCL
NC, HNC

11
12

2- or 3-Pole
DA
LBB, LB
HLB

2- or 3-Pole
LC, HLC
LA

10

30" Wide Box

1X

9

16

8"

17
11"

18

48" Wide Box

The panel layouts shown on
this and the following pages
will aid in determining the
space available for the
addition of molded-case
circuit breakers into your
existing CDP panelboards.

48" Wide Box

Westinghouse CDP

30" Wide Box

Total Number of Poles

19
20
21

7-1/2"

22

One X space = 1.38 inches (35.1 mm).
Blank fillers are required for unused X space.

23

Notes
1 When only one EB, EHB or HFB single-pole breaker is required in conjunction with other
frame size breakers, the single-pole breaker space required changes from 1X to 2X.
2 Must use three-pole connector kit.

24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T4-9

4
2

Replacement Capabilities

FDP

FDP Panel Layout

Originally a
Westinghouse Product

7-1/2"

Top Gutter
225A
Solid
400A
Neutral
600A
Bar
800A
1200, 1600A

5X
7X
9X
13X
13X

3
4
5

4X

30A

30A

4X

60A

60A

4X

100A

100A

5X

100A

6

6X

Main or Branch
200A
(Horizontal Mounted)

7

4X

30A

30A

4X

60A

60A

5X

100A

8
10
11
12

The panel layouts shown
on this and the following
pages will aid in determining
the space available for the
addition of fusible switches
into your existing FDP
panelboards.
●

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

2P, 3P
240 Vac
2P
250 Vdc

2P, 3P
240V or
600 Vac
2P
250 Vdc

2P, 3P
600 Vac

100A

Westinghouse FDP

●

Determine the amount
of space available in the
panelboard for adding
fusible switches.
1.38 inches (35.1 mm)
of panel height =
one X space
Determine the type of
fusible switch needed for
the required ampere rating
and number of poles

Ratings
●
1600A maximum

11X

16X

21X

Side Gutters Tables B and C

9

Side Gutters Tables F and G

1

Panelboards

Main or Branch
400 or 600A
(Horizontal Mounted)

Main or Branch
800 or 1200A
(Horizontal Mounted)
Main or Branch
800 or 1200A
(Vertical Mounted)

5X
8X
9X
12X

Main Lug
225A
Section
250–400A
600A
800, 1200, 1600A

7-1/2"

Bottom Gutter

One X space = 1.38 inches (35.1 mm).
Blank fillers are required for unused X space.

FDP and CDP Bus Dimensions

Replacement Capabilities
Fusible Switches
Refer to renewal parts
data RP01400002E for a
complete list of available
parts including branch device
retrofit kits, which include
the device, as well as, the
bus connectors and the
required mounting hardware.
Contact the Aftermarket
Center in Sumter, SC
(see Page V12-T4-22).

Vertical Busbar

1.38" TYP.

3.50"

23

2P, 3P
240 or
600 Vac
2P
250 Vdc

3.50"

24
25

Mounting Rails 19.50"

V12-T4-10

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards
Replacement Capabilities

4

PB/PH/PH-L

1

Originally a
Cutler-Hammer Product

2
3
4
5
6

21 Inches Wide
Cutler-Hammer PH-L

15 or 21 Inches Wide
Cutler-Hammer PB

7

Ratings
●
PB
400A maximum
●
PH
800A main lug only or
600A main breaker
●
PH-L
225A maximum

8
9
10

Replacement Capabilities
Breakers
Refer to renewal parts
data RP01400003E for a
complete list of available
parts including branch device
retrofit kits, which include
the device, as well as, the
bus connectors and the
required mounting hardware.
Contact the Aftermarket
Center in Sumter, SC
(see Page V12-T4-22).

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

21 or 26 Inches Wide
Cutler-Hammer PH

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T4-11

4
MP40

MP40 Panel Layout

Originally a
Cutler-Hammer Product

14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

2P EC
EHC, FC

3X

3P EC, EMC,
FC, 2P or
3P HFB

3P EC, EMC,
FC, 2P or
3P HFB

2X

2P CC
CCH

0

3X

3P CC, CCH,
2P or 3P
JB, KB, HKB

0

●

Determine the amount
of space available in the
panelboard for adding
circuit breakers.
1.38 inches (35.1 mm)
of panel height =
one X space
Determine the type of
breakers needed for the
required ampere rating
and number of poles

Ratings
●
1600A maximum
Replacement Capabilities
Breakers
Refer to renewal parts data
RP01400003E for a complete
list of available parts
including branch device
retrofit kits, which include
the device, as well as, the
bus connectors and the
required mounting hardware.
Contact the Aftermarket
Center in Sumter, SC
(see Page V12-T4-22).

2P or 3P
DA, LBB,
LB, HLB

0

2P or 3P
LA, HLA,
LC, HLC

This space is
not usable
when C.B. to
left is used
as a main0

8-1/2"
6X

6X

5" Side Gutters

2P EC
EHC, FC

26" Wide

1P EB
EHB, HFB

Cutler-Hammer MP40

●

Nameplate/
1P EB
EHB, HFB

4X

The panel layouts shown on
this and the following pages
will aid in determining the
space available for the
addition of molded-case
circuit breakers into your
existing MP40 panelboards.

Neutral

8-1/2"

38" Wide

9

15

1600A

2P or 3P
MC, HMC

2P or 3P
NC, HNC1

6X

3X

225,
600A

4X

800,
1200A

9X

1600A 2

Main
Lugs

Bottom Gutter
6.50" up through 400A
12.0" 600–1600A

30" Wide

8

13

7X

2X

7

12

225–
1200A

1X

6

11

4X

1X

5

10

None

26" Wide

4

0X

5" Side Gutters

3

Top Gutter
6.50" through 400A
12.0" 600–1600A

30" Wide

2

Replacement Capabilities

38" Wide

1

Panelboards

Notes
1 If the panelboard has a main breaker, no neutral, no split bus, or no sub-feed or feed-through
lugs, add 1X to provide space for a nameplate.
2 Breakers of the same frame size, regardless of poles, may be mounted opposite of each other.
3 Only Type NC and HNC breakers require a 11.38-inch (289.1 mm) deep box. Standard box
depth is 10.50 inches (266.7 mm).
4 When 1600A lug mains are for (4)–600 kcmil maximum copper cables per phase, the X unit
space can be reduced to 4X.

24
25
V12-T4-12

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards
Replacement Capabilities

EE

4

EE Panelboard Panel Layout

Originally a
Cutler-Hammer Product

1

48"
42"

2

10" Gutter

7"

7"

3

Neutral—No X Space
(May Be At Bottom)

4

20X
10X

400–600A Main Switch 
400–600A Branch Switch

10X

7X

14X
1200A Lug Unit /
200A Branch Switch
(600V With R Fusing)

7X

10"
10X

Cutler-Hammer EE Panelboard

The panel layouts shown on
this and the following pages
will aid in determining the
space available for the
addition of molded-case
circuit breakers and fusible
switches into your existing
EE panelboards.
●

●

Determine the amount
of space available in the
panelboard for adding
replacement devices.
1.38 inches (35.1 mm)
of panel height =
one X space
Determine the type of
replacement device
needed for the required
ampere rating and number
of poles

Ratings
●
1200A maximum
Replacement Capabilities
Breakers and
Fusible Switches
Refer to renewal parts data
RP01400003E for a complete
list of available parts
including branch device
retrofit kits, which include
the device, as well as, the
bus connectors and the
required mounting hardware.
Contact the Aftermarket
Center in Sumter, SC
(see Page V12-T4-22).

8X

6X

6X

20X
800A Main Switch /
800A Branch Switch

600A 
Branch
Lug Unit

600A 
Branch
Lug Unit

12X
MS, MH Main Breaker /
NS, NH Main Breaker

LS, LH 0
Breaker

LS, LH0
Breaker

7X

200A Branch 0
Switch
240V—R&T Fuse
600V—T-Fuse Only

400A 
Branch
Lug Unit

6X

100A 0
Branch
Switch

30A, 60A
Branch
Switch

10"

7
8

8X

9
6X

10
11

6X

12

8X

13
5X

CC, CCH, CHH 0
FS, FH, JS, JH, JL

CC, CCH, CHH 0
FS, FH, JS, JH, JL

3X

4X

KS, KH0
Breaker

KS, KH 0
Breaker

4X

12X
MS, MH
Main Breaker

6

10X

3X

6X

5

14
15
16

6X

17

10" Gutter

18

Notes
1 Main device must be mounted at neutral end of double-bus panel.
2 May be used in 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) wide single bus interiors.

19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T4-13

4
1
2

Panelboards
Replacement Capabilities

EP

EP Panelboard Panel Layout

Originally a
Cutler-Hammer Product

42"
10"

3

2-Pole FS, FH, FL,
2-Pole FS, FH, FL,
CC, CCH, CHH
CC, CCH, CHH
3-Pole
FS,
FH,
FL,
3-Pole FS, FH, FL,
3X
CC, CCH, CHH
CC, CCH, CHH
2P FS, FH, 2P FS, FH,
Blank Wireway /
2X CC, CCH CC, CCH
2P FS, FH, 2P FS, FH,
Blank Wireway /
2X
CC, CCH CC, CCH
2-Pole
2-Pole
Blank Wireway /
2X
CHH
CHH
3-Pole
3-Pole
3X
Blank Wireway /
CHH
CHH
2X

4
5
6
7

3X

8

11
12
13

●

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

●

Determine the amount
of space available in the
panelboard for adding
circuit breakers.
1.38 inches (35.1 mm)
of panel height =
one X space
Determine the type of
breaker needed for the
required ampere rating
and number of poles

10"

3-Poles
FS, FH,
CC, CHH

3 Poles
JS, JH, JL

3X

Filler Plate

7"
2X
3X
2X
2X
2X
3X

Blank Wireway /

3X

2-3 Pole
LSB, LHB, LLB, LC

6X

6X

12X
800A MS, MH, MC
Main Breaker 1

6X

6X

12X
800A MS, MH, MC, HMC
Branch Breaker

6X

6X

12X
1200A NS, NH, NC, HNC
Branch or Main Breaker 1

6X

Cutler-Hammer EP Panelboard

The panel layouts shown on
this and the following pages
will aid in determining the
space available for the
addition of molded-case
circuit breakers into your
existing EP panelboards.

3-Poles
FS, FH,
CC, CHH

3X

9
10

Neutral—No X Space
Top or Bottom

7"

10"

0

10"

48"

Notes
1 Blank wireway fillers are required opposite any dual breaker unit or adapter.
2 May be used in 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) wide single bus interiors.
3 Main device must be mounted at neutral end of double-bus panel.

Ratings
●
1200A maximum
Replacement Capabilities
Breakers
Refer to renewal parts data
RP01400003E for a complete
list of available parts
including branch device
retrofit kits, which include
the device, as well as, the
bus connectors and the
required mounting hardware.
Contact the Aftermarket
Center in Sumter, SC
(see Page V12-T4-22).

24
25
V12-T4-14

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards
Replacement Capabilities

PRL1 and PRL2 Panelboards
Originally a
Westinghouse Product

4

PRL1a and PRL2a
Panelboards

1

Current Product

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

PRL2 with Trim

Ratings
●
600A maximum
Replacement Capabilities
Breakers
Refer to renewal parts data
RP01400002E for a complete
list of available parts including
branch device bus connectors
mounting hardware. For
further information, contact
the Aftermarket Center
in Sumter, SC. Refer to
Page V12-T4-22.

PRL1a

11

Ratings
●
400A maximum
Replacement Capabilities
Breakers
Refer to renewal parts
data RP01400001E and
RP01414001E for a complete
list of available parts including
branch device bus connectors
and mounting hardware.
Renewal parts are available
from your Eaton Satellite plant.
Refer to Page V12-T4-22.

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T4-15

4
1
2

Panelboards
Replacement Capabilities

PRL3

PRL3 Panel Layout

Originally a
Westinghouse Product

No Neutral

2X 100–600A
2X 100, 225A

Neutral Section

8X 400, 600A

3
Sub Chassis

4

Poles
10X-12
13X-18
15X-24
17X-30
19X-36
21X-42

5
6
8

12

Westinghouse PRL3

The panel layouts shown on
this and the following pages
will aid in determining the
space available for the
addition of molded-case
circuit breakers into your
existing PRL3 panelboards.

13
14
16

●

Determine the amount
of space available in the
panelboard for adding
circuit breakers.
1.38 inches (35.1 mm)
of panel height =
one X space
Determine the type of
breaker needed for the
required ampere rating
and number of poles

17

Ratings
●
600A maximum

18

Replacement Capabilities
Breakers
Refer to renewal parts data
RP01400002E for a complete
list of available parts
including branch device
retrofit kits, which include
the device, as well as, the
bus connectors and the
required mounting hardware.
Contact the Aftermarket
Center in Sumter, SC
(see Page V12-T4-22).

19
20
21
22

1-Pole

2-Pole

2-Pole

2-Pole

●

15

1-Pole

1-Pole

9
11

(100A Max.)

400A Maximum
Bus Rating

7

10

BAB/0
QBH/
GB12
GHB12

23

3-Pole

2- and 3-Pole
Main Lug
Section

Horizontal
Mounting

Main
Breaker
Section

Vertically
Mounted

1X
2X
3X

EHD (100A Max.)
FDB
FD
HFD
FDC

(150A Max.)

3X CA, CAH, HCA 3
(225A Max.)
2X 100, 225A
7X 400, 600A

3X 2P EHD (100A Max.) 4
3X 2P FDB, FD, HFD, FDC 4
(150A Max.)
4X 3P EHD (100A Max.) 4
4X 3P FDB, FD, HFD, FDC
(150A Max.) 4
4X 2P and 3P CA, CAH, HCA 4
(225A Max.)
7X EHD (100A Max.)
7X FDB, FD, HFD, FDC
(150A Max.)
9X CA, CAH
(225A Max.)
9X FCL, FB-P 5
(100A Max.)
14X JD, JDB, HJD, JDC
(250A Max.)
14X DK, KD, KDB, HKD,
KDC (400A Max.)
19X LC, HLC, LA
(600A Max.)
22X LCL 6 , LA-P 7
(400A Max.)

Notes
1 If panel contains only BAB or QBH branch breakers, use a PRL1 panelboard.
2 BAB and QBH breakers with shunt trips require one additional pole space, i.e.; one-pole
is two-pole size, two-pole is three-pole size, and three-pole is four-pole size.
3 GB and GHB breakers cannot be mixed on same subchassis as BAB or QBH.
4 If panel contains only GB or GHB branch breakers, use a PRL2 panelboard.
5 Not recommended for motor loads. Use JD circuit breaker.
6 Horizontally mounted 15–150A main breakers EHD, FDB, FD, HFD and FDC will
be furnished as branch breaker construction. Branch breakers one, two or three poles as
required, may be located opposite these main breakers.
7 FBP and LAP top mounting only.
8 100% rated breaker.
9 LCL main breaker requires 6.50-inch (165.1 mm) deep box.

24
25
V12-T4-16

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards
Replacement Capabilities

PRL3a

PRL3a Panel Layout

Current Product

Main Lugs

4.01"

4.01"

Neutral
2P

10.00"

3.92"

PRL3a

The panel layouts shown on
this and the following pages
will aid in determining the
space available for the
addition of molded-case
circuit breakers into your
existing PRL3a panelboards.
●

●

4

Determine the amount
of space available in the
panelboard for adding
circuit breakers.
1.38 inches (35.1 mm)
of panel height =
one X space
Determine the type of
breaker needed for the
required ampere rating
and number of poles

4.01"

3.92"

5X

100A Oversized #6–350 kcmil
100A Subfeed (2) #14–1/0

5X

250A Std #6–350 kcmil

6X

250A Oversized 4/0–500 kcmil

6X

250A Subfeed (2) #6–350 kcmil

8X

400A Std (2) 4/0–500

10X

400A Oversized (2) 3/0–750 kcmil

8X

600A Std (2) 4/0–500

10X

600A Oversized (2) 3/0–750 kcmil

5X
8X
11X

Same Cable Size as MLO

(1)–1P

1X

(2)–1P

(2)–1P

(3)–1P

(3)–1P

2X

(3)–1P

(1)–3P

3X

(1)–3P

3X

2P

2P

2X

3P

3P

3X
4.01"

QUICKLAG

BAB–5.70"
GHB–5.68"

GHB
Twin
Subfeed
Breaker
Single Subfeed
Breaker
Through Feed
Lugs

X

4
5

ED, EDH, EDC
225A Max.
Note:
Line Side May Be Either Left or
Right. Distance From Load Side of
Breaker To Box Will Always Be 3.92 inches

7

EHD 100A Max.
FD, HFD, FDC, FDB 150A Max.

8
9

Same Cable Size as MLO

12X

Bus Connected

19X
16X

Cable Connected
(Wireout)

3X

6

Ckt.

5X

12

Ckt.

8X

18

Ckt.

24

Ckt.

10X

4.01"

3

6

3X

(1)–1P
(1)–2P

Split Bus
Meter Loop

2

2X

(1)–1P

3.92"

1

2X

3X

GHB–5.68"

4.01"

100A Std #14–1/0

3P

ASCO
920
(Split Bus)
BAB–5.70"

2X

10

ASCO 920 (30–225A)
225A Max.
100A Max.

For Lug Size See Main
Lug Size Chart

BAB, QBGF, QBHW, QBHGF 100A Max.
or
GB, GHB 100A Max.
Note:
May Have Multiple Sections
Per Panel, Max. 24 Ckts. Per
Section.

20X

JD, JDB, HJD, JDC, 250A Max.

X

Size Per Main Breaker Layout

X

Size Per MLO Size Chart
Not Available With Subfeed Breaker

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Ratings
●
600A maximum

18

Replacement Capabilities
Breakers
Refer to renewal parts
data RP01400001E and
RP01414001E for a complete
list of available parts
including branch device
retrofit kits, which include
the device, as well as, the
bus connectors and the
required mounting hardware.
Retrofit kits and renewal
parts are available from
your Eaton Satellite plant.
Refer to Page V12-T4-22.

19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T4-17

4
2

Replacement Capabilities

PRL4B

PRL4B Panel Layout

Current Product (Originally a
Westinghouse Product)

400 A Maximum
Bus Rating
1P
1P
2P
2P
3P

3P

2P

2P

3P

3P

7

PRL4B

15

21
22
23
24

●

Determine the amount
of space available in the
panelboard for adding
circuit breakers.
1.38 inches (35.1 mm)
of panel height =
one X space
Determine the type of
breaker needed for the
required ampere rating
and number of poles

Ratings
●
1200A maximum

36" Wide Box

3X
2X

CA, CAH, HCA 225 A Max.
3X

2 or 3P

4X

DK, KD, KDB
HKD, KDC

6X

LC, LCC, HLC,
HLCC, LCY, LD,
LDB, HLD, LDC, LA

Load
2 or 3P
2 or 3P

2 or 3P

2 or 3P

2 or 3P
44" Wide Box

●

14

20

2 or 3P

The panel layouts shown on
this and the following pages
will aid in determining the
space available for the
addition of molded-case
circuit breakers into your
existing PRL4B panelboards.

EHD 1 100 A Max.
FDB, FD1
HFD, FDC1 225 A Max.

2X

JD, JDB, HJD, JDC 250 A Max.

2 or 3P

10

19

42

100 A Max.

3X

2 or 3P

9

18

20X

QBH
QBHGF
GB0
GHB0

2 or 3P

8

17

30

BAB

1X
24" Wide Box

6

16

16X

36" Wide Box

24" Wide Box

5

13

Poles
18

QBGF

4

12

11X

Sub Panel/

3

11

Breaker To Fusible
Transition, All Widths

1X

Filler

2 or 3P

2 or 3P

44" Wide Box

1

Panelboards

400 A Max.

600 A Max.

3X

FCL, FB-P 100 A Max.

3X

JD, JDB, HJD, JDC 250 A Max.

6X

LCL, LA-P, 400 A Max.
MC, MCC, HMC,
HMCC, MCY, MA
800 A Max.

6X

NC, HNC,
NB, NCY

1200 A Max.

4X

DK, KD, KDB,
HKD, KDC

6X

NB-P 800 A Max.

400 A Max.

One X space = 1.38 inches (35.1 mm).
Blank fillers are required for unused X space.
Notes
1 Maximum amperes connected to any one connector cannot exceed 140A.
2 GB and GHB breakers cannot be mixed on the same subchassis as BAB or QBHW.
3 When only one single-pole breaker of the group is required on either side of chassis, the single-pole breaker
space required changes from 1X to 2X.

Replacement Capabilities
Breakers
Refer to renewal parts
data RP01400001E and
RP01414001E for a complete
list of available parts
including branch device
retrofit kits, which include
the device, as well as, the
bus connectors and the
required mounting hardware.
Retrofit kits and renewal
parts are available from
your Eaton Satellite plant.
Refer to Page V12-T4-22.

25
V12-T4-18

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Panelboards
Replacement Capabilities

PRL4F

4

PRL4F Panel Layout

Current Product (Originally a
Westinghouse Product)

1
2

1X

30A

30A

4X

3

60A

60A

4X

4

100A
250V Max.

100A
250V Max.

4X

5

5X

6

100A

200A
Main or Branch
Switch
100A
600 Vac

36" Wide Box

36" Wide Box

Fusible To Breaker
Transition, All Widths

7

6X

8

100A
600 Vac

5X

9
10

PRL4F

400 or 600A
Branch Switch

The panel layouts shown
on this and the following
pages will aid in determining
the space available for the
addition of fusible switches
into your existing PRL4F
panelboards.

●

12

800 or 1200A
Branch Switch

11X
44" Wide Box

Determine the amount
of space available in the
panelboard for adding
fusible switches.
1.38 inches (35.1 mm)
of panel height =
one X space
Determine the type of
fusible switch needed for
the required ampere rating
and number of poles

11

400 or 600A
Main or Branch Switch
44" Wide Box

●

11X

13
14
15

16X

16
17

Ratings
●
1200A maximum

18

Replacement Capabilities
Fusible Switches
Refer to renewal parts
data RP01400001E and
RP01414001E for a complete
list of available parts
including branch device
retrofit kits, which include
the device, as well as, the
bus connectors and the
required mounting hardware.
Retrofit kits and renewal
parts are available from
your Eaton Satellite plant.
Refer to Page V12-T4-22.

19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T4-19

4
1
2

Panelboards
Technology Upgrades

Technology Upgrades

Pow-R-Command™

Surge Protection Devices—
SPD Series

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

Eaton SPD Series—
Surge Protection Device

The Eaton SPD Series of
surge protection products
ensures that equipment is
protected with the safest,
most reliable and most
advanced UL 1449 3rd
Edition certified surge
protectors. The array of
features, options and
configurations ensures
that there is a unit for
all electrical applications,
including service entrances,
distribution switchboards,
panelboards and point-of-use
applications. Field installation
is required.
Benefits
●
The SPD Series can be
externally mounted to
existing distribution
equipment
●
Surge ratings: 50, 80, 100,
120, 160, 200, 250, 300
and 400 kA
●
Standard NEMA 1
enclosure, optional
NEMA 4 and 4X
●
Surface or flush mounting
●
Full range of diagnostic
and monitoring options
●
Remote mountable
display panel
●
Available with optional
internal disconnect

Pow-R-Command Lighting Control

Eaton’s Pow-R-Command is
a family of microprocessorbased lighting control systems
designed for today’s modern
facilities. They may be used as
a standalone, or networked for
the control of lighting and
other branch circuits.
Existing facilities can be
retrofitted to include various
Pow-R-Command scenarios
allowing customers varying
degrees of control. For more
information on upgrading
your building to include the
energy savings and control
of Pow-R-Command lighting
control systems, contact your
local Eaton Field Sales office.

System Features
Day/Date/Time of Day
scheduling
●
Holiday scheduling—
up to 30 days/year
●
Astronomical time
scheduling
●
Real-time clock
●
Hardware diagnostics
●
Off warning by
blinking lights
●
Manual load override
control
●
Brownout and power
failure recovery
●
Telephone override
of schedules
●
Switch override of
schedules
●
Remote access to system
●
Dimming systems for
fluorescent fixtures
●
Priority load management
●

For more information about
the SPD Series surge
protection, contact your local
Eaton Field Sales office.

24
25
V12-T4-20

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

4

Panelboards
Replacement Capabilities

Panelboard Retrofits

Armed with the necessary
information about the existing
installation and the needed
upgrade, the professional
staff at your local Satellite
plant can offer the assistance
and application support to
ensure an accurate quotation
and on-time delivery of a
quality retrofit product.

Pow-R-Line 1R and 2R
Renovation Panel

Application Description
●

●
●

●

Standards and Certifications
●
●

●

Another Custom-Assembled
Panelboard Capability from
Your Local Eaton Satellite
Save time and money when
upgrading and expanding
existing electrical services
by using existing panelboard
enclosures and conduit runs.
Retrofitting existing
panelboards can be an
effective solution for:

●

●

●

●

●
●

Providing additional circuits
for load growth
Replacing obsolete
equipment
Upgrading protective
device interrupting ratings
Accommodating system
change and additions
Adding ground fault circuit
interrupters
Adding lighting controls
Adding surge protection
devices

The unique capabilities of
the Eaton Satellite plants can
provide special configurations
to meet the special needs
encountered in retrofit
applications.

Renovation Panel

Product Description
●
●

●

●
●

●

●

●

●

●
●

Pow-R-Line 1R and 2R
renovation panelboards,
or custom-built panelboard
interiors and trims can be
provided to retrofit most
any manufacturer’s existing
panelboard enclosure.

UL 67
Federal Specification
W-P-115c
CSA® C22.2 No. 29

The Pow-R-Line 1R and
2R retrofit panelboard is
designed specifically for use
in the renovation of existing
electrical systems. This
innovative solution employs a
chassis design that enables
the use of the existing back
box, conduit and cables. An
exclusive depth-adjusting
mechanism and an integrated
trim assembly provides for
fast, trouble-free mounting of
the new panelboard interior
into any existing enclosure.

Type PRL1a

●

Lighting and appliance
branch panelboards
Fully rated or series rated
Interrupting capacities to
100 kA symmetrical
Suitable for use as service
entrance equipment where
specified on the order

240 and 480 Vac
Single-phase three-wire or
single-phase two-wire
Three-phase three-wire or
three-phase four-wire
225A maximum
100A maximum
branch breakers
Fits existing box depths
from 4.50 to 6.00 inches
(114.3 to 152.4 mm) deep
Integrally mounted
neutral assembly
Ground bar and bonding
conductor included
Neutral and ground
convertible from left-right
Bolt-on branch breakers
Factory assembled—
custom and standard
trims available

Chassis Features
Designed to accommodate
minimal box widths at
14.00 inches (355.6 mm).
Innovative telescoping chassis
accommodates depths from
4.50 to 6.00 inches (114.3 to
152.4 mm) without the need
for box modifications.
Universal mounting locations
allow the neutral and grounds
to be relocated from top to
bottom or left to right side of
back plate.
High quality laser cut trim
with lock.
Trim and door mount directly
to the chassis assembly.
Concealed trim hardware is
not dependent on back box
for mounting.
Refer to publication
CA01417001E for
complete information.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

The panelboard chassis is
designed for the use of main
lugs or a main breaker and
can accommodate 18, 30 or
42 branch circuits.

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Pow-R-Line 1R Retrofit Chassis

23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T4-21

4

Panelboards
Satellite Locations

1

Product Support Services

2

Satellite Locations
Baltimore
7451 Coca Cola Drive
Suite C
Hanover, MD 21076
(410) 796-7777
Fax (410) 796-7755

3
4

Seattle
1604 15th Street SW
Suite 114
Auburn, WA 98001
(253) 833-5021
Fax (253) 833-5058

5
6

Chicago
220 Windy Point Drive
Glendale Heights, IL 60139
(630) 260-6303
Fax (630) 690-7453

New Jersey
96 Stemmers Lane
Westampton, NJ 08060
(609) 835-4230
Fax (609) 835-4777

Hartford
40A International Drive
Windsor, CT 06095
(860) 298-1305
Fax (860) 298-1306

Cleveland
12875 Corporate Drive
Parma, OH 44130
(216) 433-0616
Fax (216) 433-0545

7
8
9
10
11
12

San Francisco
20923 Cabot Boulevard
Hayward, CA 94545
(510) 784-8981
Fax (510) 784-8980

Los Angeles
11120 Philadelphia Street
Mira Loma, CA 91752
(951) 685-5788
Fax (951) 685-3775

13
14
15
16
17

Denver
2450 Airport Boulevard
Unit C, Dock 8
Aurora, CO 80011
(303) 366-2080
Fax (303) 366-9993
Phoenix
921 South Park Lane
Suite 1
Tempe, AZ 85281
(480) 449-4222
Fax (480) 449-4223

The Eaton satellite concept is unique to the industry and
remains the only manufacturer to provide this service. Eaton
manufactures and delivers standard and custom assembled
panelboards and switchboards within days. A phone call is all
that is necessary for immediate order entry.

Further Information

Dallas
631 Westport Parkway
Suite 100
Grapevine, TX 76051
(817) 251-6797
Fax (817) 251-6249
Houston
10810 West Little York
Suite 100
Houston, TX 77041
(713) 939-9696
Fax (713) 939-0427
Main manufacturing plant.

Raleigh
9400 Globe Center Drive
Suite 121
Morrisville, NC 27560
(919) 544-7074
Fax (919) 572-9751
Sumter
(803) 481-6843
Atlanta
7000 Highlands Parkway SE
Suite 102
Smyrna, GA 30082
(678) 309-4260
Fax (770) 433-1863
Orlando
9436 South Ridge Park Court
Suite 100
Orlando, FL 32819
(407) 264-9306
Fax (407) 264-9310

Pricing Information
Price List for MP40 and MP-200—PL01400003E

Publication
Number

Description

RP01400003E

Renewal Parts Data for MP40 and MP-200

RP01400003E

Renewal Parts Data for PB, PH, PH-L, EP and EE

19

RP01400002E

Renewal Parts Data for CDP/HCDP, FDP, PRL1-LX, PRL1, PRL2 and PRL3

RP01400001E

Renewal Parts Data for PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL4B, PRL4F and PRL5P

20

RP01414001E

Panelboard Renewal Parts Supplement

18

St. Louis
56 Soccer Park Road
Fenton, MO 63026
(636) 717-3445
Fax (636) 717-3505

Price List for PB, PH, PH-L, EP and EE—PL01400003E
Price List for CDP/HCDP, FDP, PRL1-LX, PRL1, PRL2 and
PRL3—PL01400002E
Price List for PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL4B, PRL4F and
PRL5P—PL01400001E
Discount Symbol CE9

21
22
23
24
25
V12-T4-22

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Loadcenters
BR Renovation and CH Loadcenters

5

Loadcenters
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type CH Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type BR Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product History Time Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type CH Replacement Parts and Mechanical Interlocks. . . . . . . . .
Type CH Vintage Replacement Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type BR Replacement Parts and Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Classified Replacement Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type CL and CHQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type CHNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type CTL and CHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Renovation Loadcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-On Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrofit Interiors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surge Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V12-T5-2
V12-T5-2
V12-T5-2
V12-T5-2
V12-T5-3
V12-T5-3
V12-T5-4
V12-T5-10
V12-T5-12
V12-T5-20
V12-T5-20
V12-T5-20
V12-T5-20
V12-T5-21
V12-T5-21
V12-T5-22
V12-T5-23
V12-T5-25
V12-T5-26
V12-T5-26

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T5-1

5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Loadcenters

Product Description
Loadcenters are enclosed
assemblies used for power
distribution and circuit
protection in residential,
commercial and light
industrial applications.
The assembly consists
of an enclosure, an interior
assembly and a cover. The
interior assembly consists
of a backpan where the bus
assembly is mounted.
Incoming power is
terminated at main lugs or a
main circuit breaker. Load
circuit protection is provided
by molded-case circuit
breakers that plug onto the

15
16
17
18

Extra 1.50-Inch (38.1 mm)
Knockout for Bundling
Provides for easier installation,
less installation time.
Top or Bottom Feed

■ Straight-in wiring saves labor and material
■ Only one panel for either application—

no modifications necessary

21
22
23

Type CH Family
Eaton’s electrical business
began manufacturing the CH
series of loadcenters and
circuit breakers in 1962.
Changes have occurred over
the years due to code
changes, UL® listed

Type BR Family
With the acquisition of
Westinghouse’s Distribution
and Control Business Unit
(DCBU) in 1994, Eaton
gained the circuit breaker
and loadcenter manufacturing

and marketing operations of
Westinghouse. Prior to 1989,
these products were
manufactured by
Westinghouse’s Bryant
subsidiary in Bridgeport, CT.
The products from this facility
bore the Westinghouse and
Bryant nameplates. In 1988,
Westinghouse purchased
Challenger Electric,
redesigned the product, and
moved all production from
Bridgeport to Jackson, MS.
As Eaton integrated the
product lines in 1995, all
loadcenter production shifted
to the Lincoln, IL, facility.

“Tangential” Center Knockout for
easier installation

Single Keyhole Mounting
Just one keyhole at top and bottom
for easier mounting and leveling.
Unique Sandalwood Finish
Immediately recognizable,
aesthetically appealing, scratchresistant powder coating.

Separately Packaged Covers
Commercial Grade Main Breaker
■ 35 kAIC series rated main breaker in
150 and 200A loadcenters
■ 42 and 100 kAIC series ratings available

Drywall Marking on Enclosure
Indicates proper mounting depth for
flush applications.
One-Piece Silver Flash Plated Copper Bus
Provides superior conductivity throughout the
entire product line.

19
20

Product History

requirements and product
enhancements. Three major
design changes occurred in
1969, 1982 and 1995. The
3/4-inch wide feeder circuit
breakers, silver flash plated
copper bus, sandalwood (tan)
painted box and industryleading warranties have
been the trademarks of this
premium product through
the years.

Type CH Loadcenter

13
14

bus assembly. Loadcenters
are used on services
providing no more than
240 Vac, and are available
with bus rated from 40 to
600A. Loadcenter covers
are available as surface,
flush or combination.

■ Full line of “true” surface and

combination covers

■ Built-in flush leveling feature
■ Choice of circuit identification by

breaker labels or circuit directory

Neutral Design
(for styles as indicated)
■ Bonding strap is easily removable
for sub-panel applications
providing a ground and neutral
■ Factory-bonded for service
entrance applications providing
a split neutral
■ Ample additional 2/0 lugs
provided; no kits necessary
■ 200% size neutral

Steel Backpan

■ Provides positive, reliable breaker mounting
■ One-piece designed for stability

Convertible Styles Available
■ Uses field-installable main breaker or main
lug kits
■ Flexible inventory—same breaker is used in
loadcenter and circuit breaker enclosures

Improved Endwall Knockouts
Larger KOs are balanced to enhance
installed appearance and to ease
use of existing wiring.

24
25
V12-T5-2

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

5

Loadcenters

Product History Time Line

1

Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product—3/4-Inch Non-Interchangeable Product Line

2
Door latch is tan plastic, twin neutrals,
CH8_S or F. (Blank is 1 letter indicating
box size, i.e., B, C, E, J, K.)

3
4

Metal latch, single neutral, CH7_S
or F. (Blank is 2 letters indicating box
size, i.e., BB, CC, JJ, KK.)

5

Cover catalog numbers CH7_S or F.
(Blank is 1 letter indicating box size,
i.e., B, C, D, 3, G, J, K.)

6
7

Originally a Westinghouse Product—1-Inch Interchangeable Product Line

8
9
10
Replacement Capabilities

11

Replacement Capabilities

12

Type

Loadcenter Generations

Part 2

CH

CH1

CH2

BR

BR1

BR2

BR3

Breakers

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Surge arresters

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Covers

■

■

■

■

Deadfronts (NEMA® 3R)

■

■

■

■

Door assemblies (NEMA 3R)

■

■

■

■

MCB kits

■

■

■

■

Neutral bars

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Ground bars

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Breaker accessories

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Labels

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Lugs

■

■

■

■

Door locks

■

■

■

■

Door latches

■

Paint

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Closure plates

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Hubs

■

■

■

■

Spare parts kit

■

Whole house AC surge protection

■

■

■

13
14
15
16
17
18
19

■

20
21

■
■

■

■

■

Notes
1 CH and BR are the current product designations. CH1, CH2, BR1, BR2 and BR3 are used only to identify previous generations of the product described in the replacement capabilities chart above.
These are not actual product designations.
2 Catalog number of loadcenter required to obtain correct part.

22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T5-3

5
1

CHSF2125

Loadcenters
Type CH

Type CH Replacement Parts
Description

Ordering Quantity 1

Catalog Number

2

Subfeed lug blocks—two-pole, 125A, 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) spaces needed

1

CHSF2125

Subfeed lug blocks—three-pole, 125A, 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) spaces needed

1

CHSF3125

3

Neutral/ground lug—add-on neutral or ground lug

1

NL20

1

NL30

1

NL300

Filler plates—3/4-inch (19.1 mm) space circuit breaker space

25

CHFP

CSR main circuit breaker filler plate (with hardware)

1

CSRFP

Door lock—12–42 circuits, and 100–225A

1

TDL

Sandlewood spray paint

1

SPCSW

ANSI-61 light gray touchup paint for outdoor loadcenters

1

SPC61

Isolated neutral assembly (computer circuits)

1

BINA

Circuit directory—adhesive backed

10

TCD

Cover screws

25

LCCS

Cover replacement latch 14-5/16 inch (363.55 mm) wide loadcenters only

1

CHRLS

Circuit marking strip (next to breakers)

10

CHMS

Circuit identification label (preprinted breaker labels next to breakers)

25

CHBL

Series rated caution label

25

SRL

10

Branch circuit numbering strip

20

CHNS

Bonding strap with screw

1

BSSUSE

11

125A retainer bracket for sub-fed devices

1

CH125RB

4

CHSF3125

5
6
7

CHFP

8
9

TDL

BINA

12

Replacement lock 400A devices

1

52-2751

Replacement latch for NEMA 3R—four circuits and above

1

CH3RLATCH

Lock for vintage CH7 cover

1

CH9FL

13
14

CHRLS

15
16

Mechanical Interlocks

17

Fits Loadcenter
Catalog Numbers

Mechanical Interlock Panel Cover Catalog Number

Type

Flush

Surface

A

CH12L125B, CH16L125B, CH12L3125B, CH14B100B

CH8BFM

CH8BSM

CH20L125C, CH24L125C, CH18L3125C, CH24L3125C, CH22B100C, CH22N100C

CH8CFM

CH8CSM

19

CH24L150D, CH32L150D, CH24L3225D, CH30L3150D

CH8DFM

CH8DSM

CH42L225G, CH42L3225G

CH8GFM

CH8GSM

20

Inner cover of Box B raintight

—

CH8BRM
CH8CRM

18

CH8BRM Type A

Inner cover of Box C raintight

—

CH24B150E, CH24B200E

CH8EFM

CH8ESM

CH32B150J, CH32B200J, CH3242B200J, CH32N200J, CH32B225J

CH8JFM

CH8JSM

22

CH42B200K, CH42N200K, CH42B225K

CH8KFM

CH8KSM

CHPC32B150L, CHPC32B200L, CHPC32N200L

CHPC8B32LFM

—

23

CHPC42B150L, CHPC42B200L, CHPC42N200L

CHPC8B42LFM

—

21

CH8EFM Type B

24

B

CH8B150RF, CH8B200RF, CH8N200RF, CH24B150R, CH24B200R

CH3RDF7M

—

CH32B150R, CH32B200R, CH32N200R, CH32B225R

CH3RDF9M

—

CH42B200R, CH42N200R, CH42B225R

CH3RDF10M

—

Note
1 Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated.

25
V12-T5-4

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

5

Loadcenters
Type CH

Replacement Rainproof Conduit Hubs

DS100H1

Conduit Size
Description

Inches (mm)

Ordering
Quantity 1

Catalog
Number

Group 1—for use with 70, 100 and 125A MLO and MCB loadcenters and circuit breaker enclosures,
and the following 150 and 200A panels: CH8B150RF, CH8B200RF

0.75 (19.1)

1

DS075H1

1.00 (25.4)

1

DS100H1

1.25 (31.8)

1

DS125H1

1.50 (38.1)

1

DS150H1

2.00 (50.8)

1

DS200H1

2.00 (50.8)

1

DS200H2

2.50 (63.5)

1

DS250H2

3.00 (76.2)

1

DS300H2

Adapter kit—allows Installing a Group 1 hub on devices arranged for Group 2 hubs

—

1

DS900AP

Group 1—small blank hub closure plate

—

1

DS900CP1

Group 2 —þlarge blank hub closure plate

—

1

DS900CP2

Group 2—for use with 150, 200 and 225A MLO and MCB loadcenters and circuit breaker enclosure
except for the following 150 and 200A panels: CH8B150RF, CH8B200RF

Length
Inches (mm)

Ordering
Quantity 2

Catalog
Number

dssssds

2.54 (64.5)

1

GBK5 2

dssssdsj

3.59 (91.2)

1

GBK520 2

Description (See Legend)

3
4
5
6
7
9
10

2

4.29 (109.0)

1

GBK10

5.34 (135.6)

1

GBK1020 2

1

GBK13 2

f
d
f
f
f
k
f
d
f
k
f
f
f
k
f

dssssdssssss
dssssdssssssj

4.61 (117.1)

dssssdssssssssss

5.69 (144.5)

1

GBK14 2

dssssdssssssssssj

6.74 (171.2)

1

GBK1420 2

dssssdsssssssssssssssss

8.14 (206.8)

1

GBK21 2

dssssdsssssssssssssssssj

9.19 (233.4)

1

GBK2120 2

ssssssssdssssssdsssssss

7.94 (201.7)

1

CH9GP21 34

Ground Bar Legend
s = (3) #14–#10 Cu/Al or (1) #14–#4 Cu/Al
j = (1) #6–2/0 Cu/Al
= (1) 1/0–14 or (3) #10–12 Cu/Al
= (1) #14–1/0 Cu/Al or (3) #14–#10 Cu/Al
d = Mounting hole

11
12
13
14

f k

15
16

Replacement Grounded “B” Phase Adapters

17

Replacement Neutral Bar Accessories

Maximum
Amperes

Three-Phase Loadcenter
Types of Panels

Kit Catalog
Number 5

Description

Catalog
Number 5

125

12–32 circuit main lug

CHGRD1

Split neutral kit for 22 circuit 125A maximum

CHSN125C

225

Main lug and CHH main breaker panels

CHGRD2

Split neutral kit for 32 circuit 200A maximum

CHSN225J

CC main CB panels

CHGRD3

Split neutral kit for 42 circuit 200A maximum

CHSN225K

Replacement neutral for all C type boxes

CHN125C

Replacement neutral for all D type boxes

CHN125D

Replacement neutral for all L type boxes

CHN225L

Isolated Neutral Assembly (computer circuits)

BINA

Replacement Neutral Lugs for Vintage Loadcenters
Catalog
Number

Description

2

8

Replacement Ground Bar Kits

GBK14

1

Vintage 1 (CH1) 125A

CH9CM1

Vintage 1 (CH1) 225A

CH9CM2

Vintage 2 (CH2) 125A

CH9SU3

Vintage 2 (CH2) 225A

CH9SU2

18
19
20
21
22

Notes
1 Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated.
2 Distance between mounting holes is 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).
3 For single- and three-phase 400A loadcenters.
4 Distance between mounting holes is 2-13/32 inches.
5 Cannot be used in Safety Breaker Panels. Classic Plus Panels only.

23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T5-5

5
1

CHHT

Loadcenters
Type CH

Breaker Replacement Accessories
Description

2

Catalog
Number

25

CHHT

Handle Ties 2
Handle tie bar for physically joining the handles of two adjacent single-pole Type CH circuit breakers (molded plastic handle cover)

3

Ordering
Quantity 1

CHPL

Handle Lockoffs 34
Padlockable device for locking the handle of single-, two- or three-pole Type CH circuit breakers (escutcheon mounted) 5

1

CHPL

Padlockable device for locking the handle of a single-, two- or three-pole Type CHGFI circuit breaker (escutcheon mounted) 5

1

CHPLGF

Padlockable device for locking the handle of main circuit breaker Types CC and CCH into the ON or OFF position.(screw mounted) 6

1

CCPL

5

Padlockable device for locking the handle of main breaker Types BW and CSR into the ON or OFF position (escutcheon mounted) 5

1

MCBPL

6

Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for single-pole Type CH circuit breakers (handle mounted) 8

10

CHLO

Hold-down retainer kit for single-, two-, three-pole Type CH circuit breakers. For 6–24 circuit 125A single- and three-phase,
12–42 circuit single-phase 225A and 24–42 circuit three-phase 225A MLO Type CH loadcenters

1

CH125RB

Hold-down retainer kit for single-, two-, three-pole Type CH circuit breakers for 2–4 circuit MLO CH loadcenters.

1

CH125RB24

1

CH9MB270

4

7
8

CHPLGF

Handle Lockdogs

47

Hold-Down Kits 9
MCBPL

Mounting Bases
CHLO

9

Mounting base for two-pole Type CH circuit breaker—70A maximum
Main Breaker Lug Kits
Types CC and CCH main breaker lug kit (2) 300 kcmil

1

CCL300

Type CSR main breaker lug kit (2) 300 kcmil

1

MCBL300

10

CHML

10

CHPLOFF

12

10

CHPLOFFA

10

CHL1P

13

10

CHL2P

10
11

14

CH125RB

Mechanical Interlock
Type CH for two-, three- and four-pole breakers

CH9MB270

15
16
17

CHML

18
19
20

Notes
1 Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated.
2 Handle ties: typically used to join two similar independent single-pole breakers to form a two-pole noncommon trip breaker.
3 Handle lockoffs: devices that use a padlock to lock the circuit breaker’s handle in the ON or OFF position.
4 Requires one additional pole space.
5 Escutcheon mounted: device mounted semipermanently to the face of the circuit breaker and secured by the loadcenter deadfront.
6 Screw mounted: device permanently mounted to the face of the circuit breaker by the use of a non-removable screw.
7 Handle lockdogs: devices that are used to secure a circuit breaker’s handle in the ON or OFF position. Handle lockdogs are not padlockable devices.
8 Handle mounted: device mounted above or below handle using spring pressure.
9 Hold-down kits: devices used to secure the circuit breaker to the loadcenter for back-feed main application. See NEC Article 384.16(g).

21
22
23
24
25
V12-T5-6

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

5

Loadcenters
Type CH

Renewal Parts List for Type CH Loadcenter Covers and Deadfronts

1

Single-Phase with Main Circuit Breaker
Catalog
Number

Combination
Covers

Surface
Covers

NEMA 3R
Covers

NEMA 3R
Deadfronts

Catalog
Number

Combination
Covers

Surface
Covers

NEMA 3R
Covers

NEMA 3R
Deadfronts

CH1420B100B

CH8BF

CH8BS

—

—

CH30B125R

—

—

CH3RDOOR10

CH3RDF6

CH1420B100R

——

—

CH3RDOOR5

CH3RDF4

CH3242B200J

CH8JF

CH8JS

—

—

CH14B100B

CH8BF

CH8BS

—

—

CH3242B200R

—

—

CH3RDOOR12

CH3RDF9

CH14B100R

—

—

CH3RDOOR5

CH3RDF4

CH32B150J

CH8JF

CH8JS

—

—

CH1824B100C

CH8CF

CH8CS

—

—

CH32B150R

—

—

CH3RDOOR12

CH3RDF9

CH1824B100R

—

—

CH3RDOOR8

CH3RDF5

CH32B200J

CH8JF

CH8JS

—

—

CH18B100C

CH8CF

CH8CS

—

—

CH32B200R

—

—

CH3RDOOR12

CH3RDF9

CH18B100R

—

—

CH3RDOOR8

CH3RDF5

CH32B225J

CH8JF

CH8JS

—

—

CH20H100C

CH8CF

CH8CS

—

—

CH32B225R

—

—

CH3RDOOR12

CH3RDF9

CH20H100R

—

—

CH3RDOOR7

CH3RDF5

CH32H150L

CH8LF

CH8LS

—

—

CH22B100C

CH8CF

CH8CS

—

—

CH32H150R

—

—

CH3RDOOR6

CH3RDF10

CH22B100R

—

—

CH3RDOOR7

CH3RDF5

CH32H200L

CH8LF

CH8LS

—

—

CH22B125C

CH8CF

CH8CS

—

—

CH32H200R

—

—

CH3RDOOR6

CH3RDF11

CH22B125R

—

—

CH3RDOOR8

CH3RDF5

CH42B200K

CH8KF

CH8KS

—

—

CH24B150E

CH8EF

CH8ES

—

—

CH42B200R

—

—

CH3RDOOR13

CH3RDF10

CH24B150R

—

—

CH3RDOOR11

CH3RDF7

CH42B225K

CH8KF

CH8KS

—

—

CH24B200E

CH8EF

CH8ES

—

—

CH42B225R

—

—

CH3RDOOR13

CH3RDF10

CH24B200R

—

—

CH3RDOOR11

CH3RDF7

CH42H200L

CH8LF

CH8LS

—

—

CH28H100D

CH8DF

CH8DS

—

—

CH42H200R

—

—

CH3RDOOR6

CH3RDF11

CH28H100R

—

—

CH3RDOOR9

CH3RDF6

CH42H225L

CH8LF

CH8LS

—

—

CH28H125D

CH8DF

CH8DS

—

—

CH42H225R

—

—

CH3RDOOR6

CH3RDF11

CH28H125R

—

—

CH3RDOOR9

CH3RDF6

CH42PM300

CH7PMF (flush)

CH7PMS

—

—

CH30B100D

CH8DF

CH8DS

—

—

CH42PM400

CH7PMF (flush)

CH7PMS

—

—

CH30B100R

—

—

CH3RDOOR10

CH3RDF6

CH8B150RF

—

—

CH3RDOOR11

CH3RDF7

CH30B125D

CH8DF

CH8DS

—

—

CH8B200RF

—

—

CH3RDOOR11

CH3RDF7

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T5-7

5
1

Loadcenters
Type CH

Single-Phase with Main Lugs
Catalog
Number

Combination
Covers

Surface
Covers

NEMA 3R
Covers

NEMA 3R
Deadfronts

Catalog
Number

Combination
Covers

Surface
Covers

NEMA 3R
Covers

NEMA 3R
Deadfronts

CH4L125RP

—

—

CH3RDOOR2

CH3RDF2

CH2L125SP

—

CH82S

—

—

3

CH12L125B

CH8BF

CH8BS

—

—

CH2L40FP

—

—

—

—

CH12L125R

—

—

CH3RDOOR5

CH3RDF4

CH2L40RP

—

—

BKRCVR

—

4

CH12L200D

CH8DF

CH8DS

—

—

CH2L40SP

—

—

—

—

CH12L200R

—

—

CH3RDOOR9

CH4RDF6

CH2L70FP

—

—

—

—

5

CH1624L125B

CH8BF

CH8BS

—

—

CH2L70RP

—

—

BKRCVR

—

CH1624L125R

—

—

CH3RDOOR5

CH3RDF4

CH2L70SP

—

—

—

—

6

CH16L125B

CH8BF

CH8BS

—

—

CH3242L225D

CH8DF

CH8DS

—

—

CH16L125R

—

—

CH3RDOOR5

CH3RDF4

CH3242L225R

—

—

CH3RDOOR11

CH3RDF6

7

CH16L200D

CH8DF

BH8DS

—

—

CH32L150D

CH8DF

CH8DS

—

—

CH16L200R

—

—

CH3RDOOR11

CH3RDF6

CH32L150R

—

—

CH3RDOOR11

CH3RDF6

8

CH20L125C

CH8CF

CH8CS

—

—

CH32L225D

CH8DF

CH8DS

—

—

CH20L125R

—

—

CH3RDOOR8

CH3RDF5

CH32L225R

—

—

CH3RDOOR11

CH3RDF6

CH24L125C

CH8CF

CH8CS

—

—

CH42L225G

CH8GF

CH8GS

—

—

CH24L125R

—

—

CH3RDOOR8

CH3RDF5

CH42L225R

—

—

CH3RDOOR12

CH3RDF8

CH24L150D

CH8DF

CH8DS

—

—

CH42PL400

CH7PF (flush)

CH7PS

—

—

CH24L150R

—

—

CH3RDOOR11

CH3RDF6

CH4L125FP

CH84F (flush)

—

—

—

CH24L225D

CH8DF

CH8DS

—

—

CH4L125SP

—

CH84S

—

—

CH24L225R

—

—

CH3RDOOR11

CH3RDF6

CH8L125FP

CH88F (flush)

—

—

—

CH2L125FP

CH82F (FLUSH)

—

—

—

CH8L125RP

—

—

CH3RDOOR4

CH3RDF3

CH2L125RE2P

—

—

—

—

CH8L125SP

—

CH88S

—

—

CH2L125RP

—

—

CH3RDOOR1

CH3RDF1

2

9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Single-Phase Convertible
Catalog
Number

Combination
Covers

Surface
Covers

NEMA 3R
Covers

NEMA 3R
Deadfronts

CH22N125C

CH8CF

CH8CS

—

—

16

CH22N125R

—

—

—

—

CH32N200J

CH8JF

CH8JS

—

—

17

CH32N200R

—

—

CH3RD00R12

CH3RDF9

CH42N225K

CH8KF

CH8KS

—

—

18

CH42N225R

—

—

—

—

CH8N200RF

—

—

—

CH3RDF7

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T5-8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

5

Loadcenters
Type CH

Three-Phase with Main Circuit Breakers

Three-Phase with Main Lugs

Catalog
Number

Combination
Covers

Surface
Covers

NEMA 3R
Covers

NEMA 3R
Deadfronts

Catalog
Number

Combination
Covers

Surface
Covers

NEMA 3R
Covers

NEMA 3R
Deadfronts

CH30B3150L

CH8LF

CH8LS

—

—

CH12L3125B

CH8BF

CH8BS

—

—

CH30B3150R

—

—

CH3RDOOR6

CH3RDF11

CH12L3125R

—

—

CH3RDOOR5

CH3RDF4

CH30B3200L

CH8LF

CH8LS

—

—

CH18L3125C

CH8CF

CH8CS

—

—

CH30B3200R

—

—

CH3RDOOR6

CH3RDF11

CH18L3125R

—

—

CH3RDOOR8

CH3RDF5

CH30B3225L

CH8LF

CH8LS

—

—

CH24L3125C

CH8CF

CH8CS

—

—

CH30B3225R

—

—

CH3RDOOR6

CH3RDF11

CH24L3125R

—

—

CH3RDOOR8

CH3RDF5

CH30H3200L

CH8LF

CH8LS

—

—

CH24L3225D

CH8DF

CH8DS

—

—

CH30H3200R

—

—

CH3RDOOR6

CH3RDF11

CH24L3225R

—

—

CH3RDOOR11

CH3RDF6

CH424PM300

CH7PMF (flush)

CH7PMS

—

—

CH30L3150D

CH8DF

CH8DS

—

—

CH424PM400

CH7PMF (flush)

CH7PMS

—

—

CH30L3150R

—

—

CH3RDOOR11

CH3RDF6

CH42B3200L

CH8LF

CH8LS

—

—

CH30L3225D

CH8DF

CH8DS

—

—

CH42B3200R

—

—

CH3RDOOR6

CH3RDF11

CH30L3225R

—

—

CH3RDOOR11

CH3RDF6

CH42B3225L

CH8LF

CH8LS

—

—

CH424PL400

CH7PF (flush)

CH7PS

—

—

CH42B3225R

—

—

CH3RDOOR6

CH3RDF11

CH42L3225R

—

—

CH3RDOOR12

CH3RDF8

CH42H3200L

CH8LF

CH8LS

—

—

CH42L3225G

CH8GF

CH8GS

—

—

CH42H3200R

—

—

CH3RDOOR6

CH3RDF11

CH6L3125FP

CH86F (flush)

—

—

—

CH42H3225L

CH8LF

CH8LS

—

—

CH6L3125RP

—

—

CH3RDOOR3

CH3RDF3

CH42H3225R

—

—

CH3RDOOR6

CH3RDF11

CH6L3125SP

—

CH86F

—

—

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T5-9

5
1
2

Loadcenters
Type CH

Renewal Parts List for Vintage Type CH Loadcenter Covers and Deadfronts
Single-Phase with Main Circuit Breaker

Single-Phase with Main Lugs

Flush
Covers

Surface Covers Flush Covers
w/ Mechanical w/ Mechanical
Interlock
Interlock

Catalog
Number

Surface
Covers

Flush
Covers

Surface Covers Flush Covers
w/ Mechanical w/ Mechanical
Interlock
Interlock

Catalog
Number

Surface
Covers

CH22CCM100N

CH7CCS

CH7CCF

CH7CCSM

CH7CCFM

CH2S

—

—

—

—

CH30JJM150N

CH7JJS

CH7JJF

—

—

CH2F

—

—

—

—

4

CH30JJM200N

CH7JJS

CH7JJF

—

—

CH2R

—

—

—

—

CH40KKM200N

CH7KKS

CH7KKF

—

—

CH2AS

—

—

—

—

5

CH14BBM100

CH7BBS

CH7BBF

CH7BBSM

CH7BBFM

CH2AF

—

—

—

—

CH14BBM100R

—

—

—

—

CH2AR

—

—

—

—

CH18CCM100

CH7CCS

CH7CCF

—

—

CH2BS

—

—

—

—

6

CH18CCM100R

—

—

—

—

CH2BF

—

—

—

—

CH22CCM125

CH7CCS

CH7CCF

—

—

CH2BR

—

—

—

—

7

CH22CCM125R

—

—

—

—

CH4S

—

—

—

—

CH20JJM150

CH7JJS

CH7JJF

—

—

CH4F

—

—

—

—

CH20JJM150R

—

—

—

—

CH4R

—

—

—

—

8

CH20JJM200

CH7JJS

CH7JJF

—

—

CH8S

—

—

—

—

CH20JJM200R

—

—

—

—

CH8F

—

—

—

—

9

CH24JJM150

CH7JJS

CH7JJF

—

—

CH8R

—

—

—

—

CH24JJM150R

—

—

—

—

CH12BB

CH7BBS

CH7BBF

CH7BBSM

CH7BBFM
—

3

CH24JJM200

CH7JJS

CH7JJF

—

—

CH12BBR

—

—

—

10

CH24JJM200R

—

—

—

—

CH12EE200

CH7EES

CH7EEF

—

—

CH30JJM150

CH7JJS

CH7JJF

—

—

CH12EE200R

—

—

—

—

11

CH30JJM150R

—

—

—

—

CH16BB

CH7BBS

CH7BBF

CH7BBSM

CH7BBFM

CH30JJM200

CH7JJS

CH7JJF

—

—

CH16BBR

—

—

—

—

CH30JJM200R

—

—

—

—

CH16EE200

CH7EES

CH7EEF

—

—

12

CH30KKM225

CH7KKS

CH7KKF

—

—

CH16EE200R

—

—

—

—

CH30KKM225R

—

—

—

—

CH20CC

CH7CCS

CH7CCF

CH7CCSM

CH7CCFM

13

CH40KKM200

CH7KKS

CH7KKF

—

—

CH20CCR

—

—

—

—

CH40KKM200R

—

—

—

—

CH24CC

CH7CCS

CH7CCF

CH7CCSM

CH7CCFM

CH42KKM225

CH7KKS

CH7KKF

—

—

CH24CCR

—

—

—

—

CH42KKM225R

—

—

—

—

CH24EE150

CH7EES

CH7EEF

CH7EESM

CH7EEFM

CH42PM300

CH7PMS

CH7PMF

—

—

CH24EE150R

—

—

—

—

CH42PM400

CH7PMS

CH7PMF

—

—

CH24EE225

CH7EES

CH7EEF

—

—

CH20CCM100H2

CH7CCS

CH7CCF

—

—

CH24EE225R

—

—

—

—

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

CH20CCM100H2R —

—

—

—

CH30EE

CH7EES

CH7EEF

CH7EESM

CH7EEFM

CH26EEM125H2

CH7EES

CH7EEF

—

—

CH30EER

—

—

—

—

CH26EEM125H2R

—

—

—

—

CH30EE225

CH7EES

CH7EEF

—

—

CH20CCM100H4

CH7CCS

CH7CCF

—

—

CH30EE225R

—

—

—

—

CH20CCM100H4R —

—

—

—

CH42GG

CH7GGS

CH7GGF

CH7GGSM

CH7GGFM

CH26EEM100H4

CH7EES

CH7EEF

—

—

CH42GGR

—

—

—

—

CH26EEM100H4R

—

—

—

—

CH42PL400

CH7PS

CH7PF

—

—

CH26EEM125H4

CH7EES

CH7EEF

—

—

CH48S

—

—

—

—

CH26EEM125H4R

—

—

—

—

CH48F

—

—

—

—

CH30JJM150H

CH7JJS

CH7JJF

—

—

CH48R

—

—

—

—

CH30JJM150HR

—

—

—

—

CH816S

—

—

—

—

CH30JJM200H

CH7JJS

CH7JJF

—

—

CH816F

—

—

—

—

CH30JJM200HR

—

—

—

—

CH816R

—

—

—

—

CH40KKM200H

CH7KKS
—

CH7KKF
—

—
—

—
—

CH1624BB

CH7BBS
—

CH7BBF
—

—
—

—
—

CH7EES

CH7EEF

—

—

—

—

—

—

CH40KKM200HR
CH42KKM225H

CH7KKS

CH7KKF

—

—

CH1624BBR
CH3042EE225

CH42KKM225HR

—

—

—

—

CH3042EE225R

CH1420BBM100

CH7BBS

CH7BBF

—

—

CH1420BBM100R

—

—

—

—

CH1824CCM100

CH7CCS

CH7CCF

—

—

CH1824CCM100R

—

—

—

—

CH3040JJM200

CH7JJS

CH7JJF

—

—

CH3040JJM200

—

—

—

—

25
V12-T5-10

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

5

Loadcenters
Type CH

Three-Phase with Main Lugs

Three-Phase with Main Circuit Breaker

Catalog
Number

Surface
Covers

Flush
Covers

Surface Covers Flush Covers
w/ Mechanical w/ Mechanical
Interlock
Interlock

CH64S

—

—

—

—

CH304JJM150

CH7JJS

CH7JJF

—

—

CH64R

—

—

—

—

CH304JJM150R

—

—

—

—

CH124BB

CH7BBS

CH7BBF

CH7BBSM

CH7BBFM

CH304JJM200

CH7JJS

CH7JJF

—

—

CH124BBR

—

—

—

—

CH304JJM200R

—

—

—

—

CH184CC

CH7CCS

CH7CCF

CH7CCSM

CH7CCFM

CH304LLM225

CH7LLS

CH7LLF

—

—

CH184CCR

—

—

—

—

CH424KKM200

CH7KKS

CH7KKF

—

—

CH244CC

CH7CCS

CH7CCF

CH7CCSM

CH7CCFM

CH424KKM200R

—

—

—

—

CH244CCR

—

—

—

—

CH424LLM225

CH7LLS

CH7LLF

—

—

CH244EE225

CH7EES

CH7EEF

CH7EESM

CH7EEFM

CH424PM300

CH7PMS

CH7PMF

—

—

CH244EE225R

—

—

—

—

CH424PM400

CH7PMS

CH7PMF

—

—

CH304EE

CH7EES

CH7EEF

CH7EESM

CH7EEFM

CH304JJM200H

CH7JJS

CH7JJF

—

—

CH304EER

—

—

—

—

CH304JJM200HR

—

—

—

—

CH304EE225

CH7EES

CH7EEF

—

—

CH424KKM200H

CH7KKS

CH7KKF

—

—

CH304EE225R

—

—

—

—

CH424KKM200HR

—

—

—

—

CH424GG225

CH7GGS

CH7GGF

CH7GGSM

CH7GGFM

CH424LLM225H

CH7LLS

CH7LLF

—

—

CH424GG225R

—

—

—

—

CH424PL400

CH7PS

CH7PF

—

—

Catalog
Number

Surface
Covers

Flush
Covers

Surface Covers Flush Covers
w/ Mechanical w/ Mechanical
Interlock
Interlock

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Type CH Loadcenter Interior Assemblies
Catalog
Number

Ampere
Rating

Maximum Number 1.00-Inch (25.4 mm)
Spaces

Single-Pole

UL File
Reference

Main Terminal Wire Size Range
(per phase) Cu/Al 60ºC or 75ºC

Standard
Package Quantity

Single-Phase, Single-Row Breaker Mounting—Copper Bus 120/24 Vac, Three-Wire

12
13

CH9MB270

70

2

2

E8741

(1) #8–#2 AWG Cu/Al

1

CH2L125INT

125

2

2

E8741

(1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al

20

14
15

Single-Phase, Double-Row Breaker Mounting—Copper Bus 120/240 Vac, Three-Wire
CH4L125INT

125

4

4

E8741

(1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al

20

CH8L125INT

125

8

8

E8741

(1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al

20

CH12L125INT

125

12

12

E8741

(1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al

20

CH16L125INT

125

16

16

E8741

(1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al

20

CH12L200INT

200

12

12

E8741

(1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al

20

CH16L200INT

200

16

16

E8741

(1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al

10

CH24L225INT

225

24

24

E8741

(1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al

10

CH32L225INT

225

32

32

E8741

(1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al

10

CH42L225INT

225

42

42

E8741

(1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al

10

16
17
18
19

Three-Phase, Double-Row Breaker Mounting—Copper Bus 208Y/120 Vac, Four-Wire—240 Vac, Three-Wire—120/240 Vac, Four-Wire Delta
CH12L3125INT

125

12

12

E8741

(1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al

10

CH18L3125INT

125

18

18

E8741

(1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al

10

CH24L3125INT

125

24

24

E8741

(1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al

10

CH24L3225INT

225

24

24

E8741

(1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al

10

CH30L3225INT

225

30

30

E8741

(1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al

10

CH42L3225INT

225

42

42

E8741

(1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al

10

20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T5-11

5
1

BRSF125

Loadcenters
Type BR

Type BR Replacement Parts and Covers
Number
of Poles

2
3BRS225

4

3

5

Main Lugs

6

Number of 1.00-Inch (25.4 mm)
Spaces Needed

Wire Size Range
Cu/Al 60°C or 75°C

Ordering
Quantity 2

Catalog
Number

125

2

#8–2/0

1

BRSF125

150

2

#8–2/0

1

BRSF150 2

Main and Subfeed Lug Blocks
2

3

Ampere
Rating

BRL200

225

4

#2–300 kcmil

1

BRS225

150

3

#8–2/0

1

3BRSF150 2

225

6

#2–300 kcmil

1

3BRS225

Two-pole, 200A stud mounted (includes deadfront filler plate)

#1–300 kcmil

1

BRL200

Neutral/ground lug
Add-on neutral or ground lug

#2/0 maximum

1

NL20

#3/0 maximum

1

NL30

300 kcmil maximum

1

NL300

7

Filler Plates

8

1.00-inch (25.4 mm) circuit breaker space

25

BRFP

BW main circuit breaker space (with hardware)

1

BWFP

Door lock —12–42 circuits, and 100–225A

1

TDL

9

TDL

10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Door lock—4–8 circuits, 125A

1

CH9FL

ANSI-61 light gray touchup paint for current loadcenters

1

SPC61

Isolated neutral assembly (computer circuits)

1

BINA

Circuit directory—adhesive backed

10

TCD

Cover screws

25

LCCS

Cover replacement latch (gray) 14-5/16 (363.5 mm) wide loadcenters only

1

BRRL

Circuit marking strip (next to breaker)

10

BRMS

Circuit identification label (preprinted breaker labels)

25

CHBL

Series rated caution label

25

SRL

Bonding strip with screw

1

BSSUSE

Mechanical Interlock Cover
Covers mechanically interlock two breakers—Type BW
or BWH main breaker with a Type BR branch breaker.
BR4040B200

17
18
19
20

Mechanical Interlock Covers
Fits Loadcenter
Catalog Number

Mechanical Interlock Panel Cover
Catalog Number

BR816B200RF

BR3RDF5M

BR2040B200R

BR3RDF11M

BR3040B200R

BR3RDF12M

BR4040B200R

BR3RDF13M

BR2040B200

BRCOV20D1FM

BR3040B200

BRCOV30G1FM

BR4040B200

BRCOV40L1FM

Notes
1 Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated.
2 #8–2/0 wire size range is 75°C rated only.

21
22
23
24
25
V12-T5-12

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

5

Loadcenters
Type BR

DS300H2

Replacement Rainproof Conduit Hubs
Conduit Size
Inches (mm)

Description
Group 1—for use with 70, 100 and 125A MLO and MCB loadcenters and circuit breaker
enclosures and the following 150 and 200A panels: BR48B200RF

Group 2—for use with 150, 200 and 225A MLO and MCB loadcenters and circuit breaker enclosures
except for the following 200A loadcenters: BR48B200RF. Also for use with 400 and 600A loadcenters
and New York City loadcenters manufactured after November 1, 2005
Type H conduit hubs for loadcenters PL0724R and S3100RN

GBK14

Ordering
Quantity 1

Catalog
Number

0.75 (19.1)

1

DS075H1

1.00 (25.4)

1

DS100H1

1.25 (31.8)

1

DS125H1

1.50 (38.1)

1

DS150H1

2.00 (50.8)

1

DS200H1

2.00 (50.8)

1

DS200H2

2.50 (63.5)

1

DS250H2

3.00 (76.2)

1

DS300H2

0.75 (19.1)

1

RH75P

1.00 (25.4)

1

RH100P

1.25 (31.8)

1

RH125P

1.50 (38.1)

1

RH150P

Adapter kit—Allows Installing a Group 1 hub on devices arranged for Group 2 hubs

—

1

DS900AP

Group 1 small blank hub plate with bump

—

1

DS900CP1

Group 2 Large blank hub plate with bump

—

1

DS900CP2

Length
Inches (mm)

Ordering
Quantity 1

Catalog
Number

dssssds

2.54 (64.5)

1

GBK5 2

dssssdsj

Replacement Ground Bar Kits

3.59 (91.2)

1

GBK520 2

dssssdssssss

4.29 (109.0)

1

GBK10 2

dssssdssssssj

5.34 (135.6)

1

GBK1020 2

4.61 (117.1)

1

GBK13 2
2

dssssdssssssssss

5.69 (144.5)

1

GBK14

dssssdssssssssssj

6.74 (171.2)

1

GBK1420 2

dssssdsssssssssssssssss

8.14 (206.8)

1

GBK21 2

dssssdsssssssssssssssssj

9.19 (233.4)

1

GBK2120 2

f
k
f
d
f
k
f
f
f
k
f
d
f
k
f
f
f
k
f

BRGBK39512

f
d
f
f
f
k
f
d
f
k
f
f
f

Description
(See Legend)

5.78 (146.8)

1

BRGBK39512 34

1.84 (46.7)

1

GB4NM 5

sssss

Ground Bar Legend

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

s (3) #14–10 Cu/Al or (1) #14–4 Cu/Al
j (1) #6–2/0 Cu/Al
(1) #14–1/0 Cu/Al or (3) #14–10 Cu/Al
(1) #14–6 Cu/Al or (2) #14–12 Cu/Al
d Mounting Hole

fk

18
19

Notes
1 Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated.
2 Distance between mounting holes is 1.75 inches (44.5 mm).
3 For single- and three-phase 400 and 600A applications.
4 Distance between mounting holes is 2.34 inches (59.5 mm).
5 For non-metallic enclosures. Snaps into molded base.

20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T5-13

5
1

THS1

Loadcenters
Type BR

Replacement Breaker Accessories
Ordering
Quantity 1

Catalog
Number

Handle tie bar for physically joining the handles of two adjacent single-pole Type BR circuit breakers (metal cylinder pin type)

10

BHT

Handle tie bar for joining two independent outside poles of Types BQ and BQC Quadplex and outside poles of two Type BD
duplex circuit breakers

10

THOW

Description

2
3

Handle Ties 2

BHLW2

Handle tie bar for joining two adjacent outside poles of Types BQ and BQC Quadplex and outside poles of two Type BD duplex circuit breakers 10

4
5

BRQLW

6
7

THS1

Handle Lockoffs 3
Padlockable device for locking the handle of single-, two- or three-pole Type BR Circuit Breakers and single-pole of a Type BD Duplex
or one independent outside pole of a Type BQ or BQC Quadplex circuit breakers (escutcheon mounted) 5

10

BRLW

Padlockable device for locking the handle of a single-pole Type BR circuit breaker.(handle mounted) 5

10

BRLW1

Padlockable device for locking the handle of a two- and three-pole Type BR circuit breaker (handle mounted)

MCBPL (Installed)

5

10

BRLW2

Padlockable device for locking the handle of a single-pole Type BD Duplex, BQ or BQC Quadplex breaker (handle mounted) 5

10

BRDL1

Padlockable device for locking the handle of the two center poles and the two outer poles of a two-pole Types BQ and BQC quadplex
circuit breakers (escutcheon mounted) 4

10

BRQLW

8

Padlockable device for locking the handle of main circuit breaker Types CC and CHH into the ON or OFF position (screw mounted) 6

1

CCPL

Padlockable device for locking the handle of main breaker Types BW and BWH into the ON or OFF position (escutcheon mounted) 4

1

MCBPL

9

Handle Lockdog 7
Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for single-, two- or three-pole Type BR circuit breakers and single-pole of Type BD
duplex and one independent outside pole of Type BQ or BQC Quadplex circuit breakers (escutcheon mounted) 5

10

BHLW

Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for single-pole Type BR circuit breakers (handle mounted) 5

10

BHLW1

10
11
12

Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for two- and three-pole Type BR circuit breakers (handle mounted)
BHLW

14
BREQS125

BHLW2

10

BHGW

Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for one independent outside pole of Types BQ and BQC Quadplex or single-pole
Type BD duplex circuit breakers (handle mounted) 5

10

HLW1

Hold-down retainer kit for three-pole Type BR circuit breakers in S3100 and 3100R loadcenters only

1

BRHDB

Hold-down screw kit for two-pole Type BR circuit breakers in single-phase MLO loadcenters through 125A

1

BREQS125

Hold-down screw kit for two-pole Type BR circuit breakers in MLO loadcenters 150–225A (single-phase only)

1

BRHDK125

Hold-down screw kit for two-pole Types BJ and BJH circuit breakers in MLO loadcenters 125–225A

1

BJHDS

Hold-down screw kit for three-pole Types BJ and BJH circuit breakers in MLO loadcenters 125–225A

1

BJHDS3P

Types CC and CHH main breaker lug kit (2) 300 kcmil

1

CCL300

Types BW/BWH main breaker lug kit (2) 300 kcmil

1

MCBL300

10

BRML

Main Breaker Lug Kits

16
17

10

Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for single-pole Type GFCB ground fault circuit breakers (handle mounted) 5

Hold-Down Kits 8
BRLW2

13
15

5

Mechanical Interlock
BRHDK125

Types BR for two-, three- and four-pole breakers

18
19

Notes
1 Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated.
2 Handle ties: typically used to join two similar independent single-pole breakers to form a two-pole noncommon trip breaker.
3 Handle lockoffs: devices that use a padlock to lock the circuit breaker’s handle in the ON or OFF position.
4 Escutcheon mounted: device mounted semipermanently to the face of the circuit breaker and secured by the loadcenter deadfront.
5 Handle mounted: device mounted directly to the handle by the use of a set screw.
6 Screw mounted: device permanently mounted to the face of the circuit breaker by the use of a non-removable screw.
7 Handle lockdogs: devices that are used to secure a circuit breaker’s handle in the ON or OFF position. Handle Lockdogs are not padlockable devices.
8 Hold-down kits: devices used to secure the circuit breaker to the loadcenter for back-feed main application. See NEC Article 384.16(g).

20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T5-14

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

5

Loadcenters
Type BR

Renewal Parts for Type BR Loadcenter Covers and Deadfronts

1

Single-Phase with Main Circuit Breakers
Catalog
Number

Combination
Covers

Surface
Covers

NEMA 3R
Covers

NEMA 3R
Deadfronts

Catalog
Number

Combination
Covers

Surface
Covers

NEMA 3R
Covers

NEMA 3R
Deadfronts

B4242DFN

315-003-28

—

—

—

BR2040B150R

—

—

BR3RDOOR8

BR3RDF11

B4242DR1N

—

—

Not available

—

BR2040B200

BRCOVC35

—

—

—

B4242DSN

—

315-003-27

—

—

BR2040B200R

—

—

BR3RDOOR9

BR3RDF11

B4242EFN

315-003-28

—

—

—

BR2040H200

BRCOVC35

—

—

—

B4242ESN

—

315-003-27

—

—

BR2430B150

BRCOVC40

—

—

—

BR1020B100RF

—

—

BR3RDOOR2

BR3RDF1

BR2440B200

BRCOVC41

—

—

—

—

—

—

BR1212B100

BRCOVC12

—

—

—

BR3030BC100

BRCOVC59

BR1220B100

BRCOVC12

—

—

—

BR3030B150

BRCOVC40

—

BR3RDOOR2

BR1224B100R
BR1224B100SFG 47-37466

BR3030B150R

—

—

BR3RDOOR10

BR3RDF12

BR3030BC150

BRCOVC40

—

—

—

BRCOVC16

—

—

—

BR3040B150

BRCOVC40

—

—

—

BR1620B100

BRCOVC16

—

—

—

BR3040B200

BRCOVC41

—

—

—

BR1624B100

BRCOVC16

—

—

—

BR3040B200R

—

—

BR3RDOOR11

BR3RDF12

BR1624B100R

—

—

BR3RDOOR3

BR3RDF2

BR3040H200

BRCOVC41

—

—

—

BRCOVC17

—

—

—

BR304242F

315-003-28

—

—

—

—

—

—

BR304242S

—

315-003-27

—

—

BR1632B200

BRCOVC31

—

—

—

BR4040B200

BRCOVC44

—

—

—

BR2020B100

BRCOVC22

—

—

—

BR4040BC200

BRCOVC44

—

—

—

7
8

BR1616B100

BRCOVC29

4
6

BR3RDF1

BR1624B125

3
5

47-37469

BR1630B150

2

9
10
11

BR2024B100R

—

—

BR3RDOOR4

BR3RDF4

BR4040B200R

—

—

BR3RDOOR12

BR3RDF13

BR2024B125

BRCOVC23

—

—

—

BR4040H200

BRCOVC44

—

—

—

BR2024B125R

—

—

BR3RDOOR4

BR3RDF4

BR4242B225

BRCOVC53 (2)

—

—

—

BR2024H100

BRCOVC22

—

—

—

BR4242B225R

—

—

BR3RDOOR13

BR3RDF15

BR2030B150

BRCOVC32

—

—

—

BR48B200RF

—

—

BR3RDOOR15

BR3RDF14

BR2030B150R

—

—

BR3RDOOR8

BR3RDF11

BR816B100

BRCOVC10

—

—

—

BR2030H150

BRCOVC32

—

—

—

BR816B150RF

—

—

BR3RDOOR5

BR3RDF5

BR2040B150

BRCOVC40

—

—

—

BR816B200RF

—

—

BR3RDOOR6

BR3RDF5

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T5-15

5
1
2
3
4
5

Loadcenters
Type BR

Convertible
Catalog
Number

Combination
Covers

Surface
Covers

NEMA 3R
Covers

NEMA 3R
Deadfronts

3BR1224N125

BRCOVC20

—

—

—

3BR1224N125R

—

—

BR3RDOOR29

BR3RDF2

3BR1224N125S
3BR3030N100

—

BRCOVS20

BRCOVC37

—

—
—

—
—

3BR3030N100R

—

—

BR3RDOOR30

—

3BR3030N100S

—

BRCOVS37

—

—

BR1224N125
BR1224N125R

BRCOVC13
—

—
—

—
BR3RDOOR2

—
BR3RDF1

6

BR1224NC125R
BR1224N200

BRCOVC30

—

—

—

7

BR1224N200R

—

—

BR3RDOOR6

BR3RDF5

8
9
10
11
12
13
14

BR1624N125
BR1624N125R
BR1632N200

BR3RDOOR2

BRCOVC17
—

—
—

BRCOVC31

—

BR1632N200SFG
BR2024N125
BR2024N125R
BR2040N200
BR2040N200R
BR2440N200

BRCOVC23
—

—
—

BRCOVC35
—

—
—

BRCOVC41

—

—
BR3RDOOR3
—

—
BR3RDF2
—

47-37460

47-37375

—

—

BR3RDOOR4
—
BR3RDOOR9
—

BR3RDF4
—
BR3RDF11
—

BR3040N200

BRCOVC41

—

—

—

BR3040N200R

—

—

BR3RDOOR11

BR3RDF12

BR4040N200

BRCOVC44

—

—

—

BR4040N200R

—

—

BR3RDOOR12

BR3RDF13

BR816N200RF

—

—

BR4040NL200G BRCOVC44 + BWFP —

BR3RDOOR6
—

BR3RDF5
—

Manufactured Housing Loadcenters
Single-Phase with Main Circuit Breaker
Catalog
Number

Cover
Number

BR1020B100GK

MBCOVC10

BR1020B100PK

MBCOVC10

BR1220B100GK

MBCOVC11

BR1220B100PK

MBCOVC11

BR1224B100PK

MBCOVC24

BR1224B100GK

MBCOVC24

BR1224B100GK

MBCOVC25 1

BR1224B150GK

MBCOVC12

BR1224B150PK

MBCOVC12

BR1630B150GK

MBCOVC13

BR1630B150PK

MBCOVC13

BR1224B200GK

MBCOVC14

BR1224B200PK

MBCOVC14

BR1632B200GK

MBCOVC15

BR1632B200PK

MBCOVC15

BR2040B200GK

MBCOVC16

BR2040B200PK

MBCOVC16

BR1020B100PKW

MBCOVC17 1

BR1220B100PKW

MBCOVC18 1

BR1224B100PKW

MBCOVC25 1

BR1224B150PKW

MBCOVC19 1

BR1630B150PKW

MBCOVC20 1

BR1224B200PKW

MBCOVC21 1

BR1632B200PKW

MBCOVC22 1

BR2040B200PKW

MBCOVC23 1

Note
1 These covers are painted white (standard color is gray).

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T5-16

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

5

Loadcenters
Type BR

Single-Phase with Main Lugs
Catalog
Number

Combination
Covers

Surface
Covers

NEMA 3R
Covers

NEMA 3R
Deadfronts

Catalog
Number

Combination
Covers

1224DRIN

—

—

1224DSN

—

Not available

2442DSN

—

2460FGNM

—

2460FNM
2460RNM

Surface
Covers

NEMA 3R
Covers

NEMA 3R
Deadfronts

Not available

—

BR24L70RP

—

—

BR24L70SGP

—

—

Not available

—

—

Not available

—

—

Not available

—

—

—

—

—

BR24L70SP

—

Not available

—

—

BR1224L125RIS

BRCOVC66

—

—

—

—

BR1224L125RISBP BRCOVC66

—

—

—

—

BR2024L125RIS

BRCOVC66

2460SGNM

—

—

—

—

BR3040L200

BRCOVC36

—

—

—

2460SNM

—

—

—

—

BR3040L200G

BRCOVC36

—

—

—

4242DFN

315-003-06

—

—

—

BR3040L200R

—

—

BR3RDOOR9

BR3RDF8

4242DRIN

—

Not available

—

—

BR4040L200

BRCOVC42

—

—

—

4242DSN

—

315-003-05

—

—

BR4040L200R

—

—

BR3RDOOR11

BR3RDF9

4242ESN

—

315-003-05

—

—

BR4242L225

BRCOVC45

—

—

—

BR1212L125

BRCOVC11

—

—

—

BR4242L225R

—

—

BR3RDOOR14

BR3RDF10

BR1224L125

BRCOVC11

—

—

—

BR48L125FDP

BRCOVC62 (flush)

—

—

—

2
3
4
5

BR1224L125DG

BRCOVC11

—

—

—

BR48L125FGP

BRCOVC63 (flush)

—

—

—

BR1224L125G

BRCOVC11

—

—

—

BR48L125FP

BRCOVC61 (flush)

—

—

—

BR1224L125R

—

—

BR3RDOOR1

BR3RDF3

BR48L125RP

—

—

BR3RDOOR26

BR3RDF22

BR1224L200

BRCOVC15

—

—

—

BR48L125SGP

—

BRCOVS60

—

—

BR1224L200R

—

—

BR3RDOOR7

BR3RDF6

BR48L125SP

—

BRCOVS59

—

—

BR1616L125

BRCOVC14

—

—

—

BR612L125FDGP

BRCOVC08

—

—

—

BR1624L125

BRCOVC14

—

—

—

BR612L125FDP

BRCOVC08

—

—

—

—

—

—

BR612L125FGP

BRCOVC63

—

—

—

—

BR3RDOOR2

BR3RDF1

BR612L125FP

BRCOVC08

—

—

—

BR1630L150

BRCOVC25

—

—

—

BR612L125RP

—

—

BR3RDOOR27

BR3RDF23

BR2020L125

BRCOVC18

—

—

—

BR612L125SDGP

—

BRCOVS08

—

—

BRCOVC18

—

—

—

BR612L125SDP

—

BRCOVS08

—

—

BRCOVC18

—

—

—

BR612L125SGP

—

BRCOVS60

—

—

BR2024L125R

—

—

BR3RDOOR3

BR3RDF2

BR612L125SP

—

BRCOVS59

—

—

BR2030L150

BRCOVC25

—

—

—

BR816L125FDGP

BRCOVC64 (flush)

—

—

—

16

BRCOVC25

—

—

—

BR816L125FDP

BRCOVC64 (flush)

—

—

—

BRCOVC25

—

—

—

BR816L125FGP

BRCOVC09

—

—

—

BR2040L200R

—

—

BR3RDOOR6

BR3RDF7

BR816L125FP

BRCOVC09

—

—

—

BR2424L125

BRCOVC24

—

—

—

BR816L125RP

BR3RDOOR28

BR3RDF23

BRCOVC24

—

—

—

BR816L125SDGP

—

—

—

BR816L125SDP

—

BRCOVS61

—

—

BRCOVS61

—

—

13
15

BR2040L200

BRCOVC33

10

14

BR2040L200G

BR2424L125G

8

12

BRCOVC14
—

BR2024L125

7

11

BR1624L125G

BR2024L125G

6

9

BR1624L125R

BR2440L200

1

17
18

BR24L125FP

BRCOVC60 (FLUSH) —

—

—

BR816L125SGP

BRCOVS09

—

—

BR24L125RP

—

—

BR3RDOOR25

BR3RDF21

BR816L125SP

BRCOVS09

—

—

BR24L125RSE2P

—

—

—

BR3RDF21

BR816L200RF

—

—

BR3RDOOR7

BR3RDF6

BR24L125RSEP

—

—

—

BR3RDF21

BR816LC125FDP

BRCOVC64 (flush)

—

—

—

BR24L125SP

—

BRCOVS62

—

—

TT120FLGNM

—

—

—

—

BR24L70FGP

Not available

—

—

—

TT120SLGNM

—

—

—

—

19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T5-17

5
1

Loadcenters
Type BR

Three-Phase with Main Lugs

Three-Phase with Main Circuit Breaker

Catalog
Number

Combination
Covers

Surface
Covers

NEMA 3R
Covers

NEMA 3R
Deadfronts

Catalog
Number

Combination
Covers

Surface
Covers

NEMA 3R
Covers

31836DFN

Not available

—

—

—

3B4242DFN

315-003-28

—

—

—

31836DR1N

—

—

Not available

—

3B4242DR1N

—

—

Not available

—

3

31836DSN

—

Not available

—

—

3B4242DSN

—

315-003-27

—

—

32442DSN

—

Not available

—

—

3B4242EFN

315-003-28

—

—

—

4

34242DFN

315-003-06

—

—

—

3B4242ESN

—

315-003-27

—

—

34242DR1N

—

—

Not available

—

3BR1224B100

BRCOVC19

—

—

—

5

34242DSN

—

315-003-05

—

—

3BR1224B100R

—

—

BR3RDOOR29

BR3RDF2

34242EFN

315-003-06

—

—

—

3BR1224B100S

—

BRCOVS19

—

—

6

34242ESN

—

315-003-05

—

—

3BR1224H100

BRCOVC19

—

—

—

3BR1224L125

BRCOVC21

—

—

—

3BR1224H100S

—

BRCOVS19

—

—

7

3BR1224L125R

—

—

BR3RDOOR29

BR3RDF2

3BR3042B125

BRCOVC54

—

—

—

3BR1224L125S

—

BRCOVS21

—

—

3BR3042B125S

—

BRCOVS54

—

—

8

3BR1224L200

BRCOVC34

—

—

—

3BR3042B150

BRCOVC55

—

—

—

3BR1224L200R

—

—

BR3RDOOR16

BR3RDF7

3BR3042B150R

—

—

BR3RDOOR20

BR3RDF17

9

3BR1224L200S

—

BRCOVS34

—

—

3BR3042B150S

—

BRCOVS55

—

—

3BR1836L150

BRCOVC27

—

—

—

3BR3042B200

BRCOVC56

—

—

—

10

3BR1836L150R

—

—

BR3RDOOR17

BR3RDF7

3BR3042B200R

—

—

BR3RDOOR21

BR3RDF17

3BR1836L150S

—

BRCOVS27

—

—

3BR3042B200S

—

BRCOVS56

—

—

11

3BR1836L200

BRCOVC34

—

—

—

3BR3042H150

BRCOVC55

—

—

—

3BR1836L200R

—

—

BR3RDOOR16

BR3RDF7

3BR3042H150S

—

BRCOVS55

—

—

12

3BR1836L200S

—

BRCOVS34

—

—

3BR3042H200

BRCOVC56

—

—

—

3BR2442L150

BRCOVC39

—

—

—

3BR3042H200S

—

BRCOVS56

—

—

13

3BR2442L150R

—

—

BR3RDOO18

BR3RDF16

3BR4242B200

BRCOVC57

—

—

—

3BR2442L150S

—

BRCOVS39

—

—

3BR4242B200R

—

—

BR3RDOOR22

BR3RDF19

14

3BR2442L200

BRCOVC43

—

—

—

3BR4242B200S

—

BRCOVS57

—

—

3BR2442L200S

—-

BRCOVS43

—

—

3BR4242B225

BRCOVC58

—

—

—

15

3BR3042L200

BRCOVC43

—

—

—

3BR4242B225R

—

—

BR3RDOOR23

BR3RDF19

3BR3042L200R

—

—

BR3RDOO19

BR3RDF18

3BR4242B225S

—

BRCOVS58

—

—

2

16
17
18
19

NEMA 3R
Deadfronts

3BR3042L200S

—

BRCOVS43

—

—

3BR4242H200

BRCOVC57

—

—

—

3BR4242L200

BRCOVC48

—

—

—

3BR4242H200S

—

BRCOVS57

—

—

3BR4242L200R

—

—

BR3RDOOR21

BR3RDF20

3BR4242L200S

—

BRCOVS48

—

—

3BR4242L225

BRCOVC49

—

—

—

3BR4242L225R

—

—

BR3RDOOR24

BR3RDF20

3BR4242L225S

—

BRCOVS49

—

—

20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T5-18

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

5

Loadcenters
Type BR

Replacement Interior Assembly
BR Loadcenter
Interior Assembly

1

Type BR Loadcenter Interior Assemblies
Ampere
Rating

Maximum Number 1.00-Inch (25.4 mm)
Spaces

Single Poles

UL File
Reference

Main Terminal Size
(Per Phase)

Standard
Package Quantity

Catalog
Number

Single-Phase Single Row Breaker Mounting—Aluminum Bus—120/240 Vac, Three-Wire

2
3

70

2

4

—

(1) #8–#2 AWG Cu/Al

20

24INT70B

125

2

4

E8741

(1) 1/0–#14 AWG Cu
2/0–12 AWG All

20

24INT125B

4

125

6

12

E52977

(1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al

20

612INT125SRB

5
6

Single-Phase Double Row Breaker Mounting—Aluminum Bus—120/240 Vac, Three-Wire
125

4

8

E8741

(1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al

20

48INT125B

125

6

12

E8741

(1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al

20

612INT125B

125

8

16

E8741

(1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al

20

816INT125B

125

12

12

E52977

(1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al

20

1212INT125B

125

12

24

E52977

(1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al

20

1224INT125B

125

16

24

E52977

(1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al

20

1624INT125B

125

20

24

E52977

(1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al

10

2024INT125B

125

24

24

E52977

(1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al

10

2424INT125B

200

8

16

E52977

(1) 300 kcmil–#1 AWG Cu/Al

20

816INT200B

200

12

24

E52977

(1) 300 kcmil–#1 AWG Cu/Al

20

1224INT200B

200

30

40

E52977

(1) 300 kcmil–#1 AWG Cu/Al

10

3040INT200B

200

42

42

E52977

(1) 300 kcmil–#1 AWG Cu/Al

10

4242INT225B

11
12

Single-Phase Double Row Breaker Mounting—Copper Bus—120/240 Vac, Three-Wire
125

8

16

E5297

(1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al

20

816INT125BC

125

12

12

E5297

(1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al

20

1212INT125BC

200

12

24

E5297

(1) 300 kcmil–#1 AWG Cu/Al

20

1224INT200BC

Three-Phase Double Row Breaker Mounting—Aluminum Bus—208Y/120 Vac, Four-Wire—240 Vac, Three-Wire—
120/240 Vac, Four-Wire Delta
125

12

34

E52977

(1) 2/0–#8 AWG Cu/Al

10

1224INT3125B

150

18

36

E52977

(1) 300 kcmil–#2 AWG Cu/Al

10

1836INT3150B

150

24

42

E52977

(1) 300 kcmil–#2 AWG Cu/Al

10

2442INT3150B

200

30

42

E52977

(1) 300 kcmil–#2 AWG Cu/Al

10

3042INT3200B

225

42

42

E52977

(1) 300 kcmil–#2 AWG Cu/Al

10

4242INT3225B

Three-Phase Double Row Breaker Mounting—Copper Bus—208Y/120 Vac, Four-Wire—240 Vac, Three-Wire—
120/240 Vac, Four-Wire Delta
125

12

24

E52977

(1) 2/0–#8 AWG Cu/Al

10

1224INT3125BC

200

12

24

E52977

(1) 300 kcmil–#2 AWG Cu/Al

10

1224INT3200BC

7
8
9
10

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T5-19

5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Loadcenters
Replacement Breakers

Product Description
Eaton UL classified
replacement circuit breakers
are available in both 3/4-inch
Type CHQ and 1.00-inch
Type CL, single- and two-pole
configurations. These
breakers are classified as
direct replacements by
Underwriters Laboratories.
In addition to a UL listing,
they also come with a
15-year warranty.

Specified vs. UL Classified
Specified breakers are listed
by the manufacturer of the
panelboard for use in a
particular panel. This doesn’t
mean that the panelboard
manufacturer produced the
specified breaker; it merely
means that the panelboard
manufacturer has tested the
breaker in the panel. In fact,
through the years, Eaton has
manufactured thousands of
breakers for other panelboard
manufacturers.

UL classified breakers
are produced by one
manufacturer for use in
place of the breakers
specified on the panelboard.
Like specified breakers, UL
classified breakers have been
tested in the panels for which
they are approved.

Testing
Classified breakers are tested
extensively in numerous
General Electric®, Siemens®,
Murray®, Thomas & Betts®,
Square D® and CrouseHinds® panels. The tests
are conducted with
witnesses from Underwriters
Laboratories and involve
short circuit, temperature
and insertion/withdrawal
applications. This level of
testing ensures that the
breakers meet identified
standards and have been
found suitable by UL for
the specified purpose.

Listed Breaker—The listing
of a circuit breaker is by an
independent third party. Eaton
classified breakers are listed
by UL.
Labeled Breaker—A breaker
with a label affixed by an
independent third party.

Single-Pole Requires
One 3/4-Inch (19.1 mm) Space
10 per Shelf Carton
Catalog Number

16
17

20

Classified Circuit Breaker—
A breaker that is considered
suitable, by a qualified thirdparty organization, for use
in another manufacturer’s
panelboard.

3/4-Inch (19.1 mm) per Pole 120 Vac, Non-CTL 10 kAIC

15

19

Definitions
Specified Circuit Breaker—
Each manufacturer lists the
brands of circuit breakers
that can be used in their
panelboards. Often,
manufacturers will not list
competitors as specified,
even though they are
suitable replacements.

Non-CTL Plug-On Replacement Circuit Breakers, Type CHNT 10 kAIC, 120/240 Vac
For use as replacement in loadcenters built prior to 1968 and within the current style
loadcenters as indicated in the loadcenter section.

14

18

Understanding Classified
Breaker Terminology

Ampere
Rating

Wire Size Range
Cu/Al 60ºC or 75°C

15–15

#14–8

CHNT1515 12

15–20

#14–8

CHNT1520 12

20–20

#14–8

CHNT2020 12

120/240 Vac
120/240 Vac

CTL Plug-On Circuit Breakers, Type CHT Twin 10 kAIC, 120/240 Vac
All circuit breakers have rejection feature. Use only with loadcenters marked for use with CHT breakers.
Type CH and CHT
Circuit Breakers
Mounted in Twin
Breaker Panel

Twin (CTL) 3/4-Inch (19.1 mm) per Pole 120 Vac Class CTL 10 kAIC
Single-Pole Requires
One 3/4-Inch (19.1 mm) Space
10 per Shelf Carton
Catalog Number

21

Ampere
Rating

Wire Size Range
Cu/Al 60ºC or 75°C

15–15

#14–8

CHT1515 12

23

15–20

#14–8

CHT1520 12

20–20

#14–8

CHT2020 12

24

Notes
1 Switching duty rated.
2 HACR rated.

22

120/240 Vac
120/240 Vac

25
V12-T5-20

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

5

Loadcenters
Type CH

Type CH Renovation
Loadcenter

Product Selection

1

Single-Phase—Main Circuit Breaker Loadcenters 35 kAIC 1

Product Description
Eaton’s Renovation
Loadcenter is designed
for the service contractor.
With the addition of a fivecircuit terminal block factory
mounted in the top left
corner of the loadcenter, the
service contractor can
terminate short-circuit wires
instead of having to use
expensive wire nuts. Also,
the Renovation Loadcenter
incorporates a twin-stacked
neutral design that places the
neutral and ground
terminations higher in the
loadcenter. Both of these
features were added without
increasing any size from a
standard loadcenter. These
features will eliminate the
need for wire nuts and make
for a much neater installation.
There is a provision to field
mount a second five-circuit
terminal block (RN5TB) in
the top right corner of the
loadcenter. Choose amongst
Eaton’s Type CH breaker
family for use in the
Renovation Panel.

Renovation Panel

2

Single-Phase, Three-Wire—120/240 Vac—Factory-Bonded Stacked
Split Neutral
Cover
Catalog Number 2

3

Combination Surface

4

Max.
Number
Main
Main
3/4-Inch
Breaker Ampere (19.1 mm) Enclosure Box
Type
Rating of Poles Type
Size

Wire Size
Range Cu/Al
60 or 70ºC for
Main Breakers

Loadcenter
Catalog
Number

CH

100

20

Indoor

C

#6–1/0

CH22B100CRN CH8CFF

CH8CS

CSH

150

32

Indoor

J

#2–300 kcmil

CH32B150JRN CH8JF

CH8JS

CSH

200

32

Indoor

J

#2–300 kcmil

CH32B200JRN CH8J

CH8JS

CSH

200

42

Indoor

K

#2–300 kcmil

CH42B200KRN CH8KF

CH8KS

5
6
7

Branch Circuit Breakers (CH)
See Volume 1—Residential and Light Commercial, CA08100002E, Tab 1.

8
9

Renovation Loadcenter
Description

Catalog Number

Five-circuit terminal block kit
Ground bar kits (two maximum per panel)

RN5TB
(See Page V12-T5-5)

10
11

Notes
1 100A main breaker is rated 10 kAIC.
2 Combination style covers may be used in surface or flush applications.

12

All main circuit breaker loadcenters are listed for use as service entrance equipment.
Loadcenters are factory-bonded for service entrance applications. Remove bonding strap
for separate neutral and ground bars for sub-feed applications.

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T5-21

5

Loadcenters
Type CH

1

Plug-On Neutral
Loadcenter

2

Product Description

3
4
5
6
7

Features and Benefits
●

●

Code changes and higher
safety standards are leading
to more arc fault and ground
fault circuit interrupter
installations. Eaton offers a
unique product solution that
enables a direct connection of
the breaker to the neutral bar,
eliminating the need for
wiring a pigtail.

●
●

●

Time savings up to 25%
per AFCI/GFCI installation
Eliminates nuisance
tripping due to loose pigtail
connections
Clean gutter space
Easier troubleshooting
due to less wiring
Backed by a limited
lifetime warranty

Product Selection
Plug-On Neutral
Loadcenter

8
9

Main Breaker Plug-On Neutral Loadcenters
Main
Breaker
Type

Main
Ampere
Rating

Max.
Number
3/4-Inch
Circuits

Max.
Number
of Poles

Enclosure
Type

Box
Size

Wire Size
Range Cu/Al

Catalog
Number

Combination

Surface

CSH 35
kAIC

100

24

24

Indoor

E

#2–300 kcmil

CH24BPN100E

CH8EF

CH8ES

200

32

32

Indoor

J

#2–300 kcmil

CH32BPN200J

CH8JF

CH8JS

200

42

42

Indoor

K

#2–300 kcmil

CH42BPN200K

CH8KF

CH8KS

200

60

120 1

Indoor

N

#2–300 kcmil

CH60BPN200N

CH8NF

—

10

Cover
Catalog Number

11
12
13

Main Lug Only/Convertible Plug-On Neutral Loadcenters—With Factory Installed Main Lugs

15

Max.
Ampere
Rating

Max.
Number
3/4-Inch
Poles

Enclosure
Type

Box
Size

125

24

Indoor

16

225

32

Indoor

14

Main
Breaker
Kit

Wire Size
Range
For Main
Breaker

Cover
Catalog Number

Catalog
Number

Wire Size
Range for
Main Lug

Combination

Surface

E

CH24NLPN125E

#6–300 kcmil

CSH2100N

#2–300 kcmil

CH8NLEF

CH8NLES

J

CH32NLPN225J

#6–300 kcmil

#2–300 kcmil

CH8NLJF

CH8NLJS

#2–300 kcmil

CH8NLKF

CH8NLKS

CSH2125N
CSH2125N
CSH2200N

17

CSH2100N
225

42

Indoor

18

K

CH42NLPN225K

#6–300 kcmil

CSH2125N
CSH2150N
CSH2200N

19

Note
1 Requires the use of type CHNT breakers.

20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T5-22

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Loadcenters
Type CH

Type CH Retrofit
Interior Kits

Type CH Retrofit Adjustable Interior

Type CH Retrofit Interior Collar
and Assembly with Trim

Product Description
Replacing existing
loadcenters and panelboards
can be a time consuming
and expensive job. CH retrofit
kits can be the solution to
save time and money. The
kit consists of a standard trim
to fit the interior, a picture
frame trim to fit the existing
box, and a field-adjustable
interior assembly that
includes neutral and ground
bars. These are especially
applicable when the existing
box is flush mounted in
drywall, plaster or block
wall. The existing box, and
many times existing wiring,
can remain.

Features and Benefits

Standards and Certifications

Upgrading Existing Electrical
Infrastructure is Simple
●
Replaces vintage brands
that have hard to find,
expensive replacement
breakers
●
Allows safety upgrade
to arc fault and ground
fault breakers
●
Maximizes number of
circuits available with
compact design
●
Meets 2008 NEC wire
bending requirements
●
Eco-friendly in asbestosfilled environments
●
Exclusive design

Interiors are UL Recognized
under UL 67, Panelboard
standard.

Save Time and Money
Throughout the Installation
●
Uses existing panel
box and wires
●
Eliminates expensive
drywall/paint repair
●
Saves 2–3 hours compared
to a complete panel
changeout—get off the
job faster
●
Eliminates precise
measurements with
field-adjustable kit

Product Selection
To select the retrofit kit:
1. From the existing box
size determine which
retrofit groups are
suitable (may be more
than one).
2. Use type of interior,
number of phases, and
type of main to find the
selection chart.

5

3. Select part number from
chart (if main breaker,
replace XXX with specific
amp rating).
4. Note that the overlap
of the existing wall is
the retro cover size
minus the existing
box size. If specific
measurements are
needed, communicate
that you need a custom
trim size.
5. Contact the Lincoln Flex
Center at 800-330-6479
for pricing, lead-times
and order entry
instructions.

●

●

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Retro Size Groups

9
10
11
12
13

Detailed Product Guide
All standard retrofit kits are
suitable for a range of
existing box sizes:
●

1

14
15

Box width ranging from
14.50 to 22.00 inches
(368.3 to 558.8 mm)
Box depth ranging from
4.25 inches (108.0 mm)
for CH to 6.00 inches
(152.4 mm)
Box height ranging from
21.00 to 45.00 inches
(533.4 to 1143.0 mm)

16
17
18
19

For box dimensions outside
of these ranges, contact
the Lincoln Flex Center at
800-330-6479. Be sure to
provide the existing incoming
line wire size.

20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T5-23

5
1
2
3

Loadcenters
Type CH

Retrofit Stocking Kits (BR and CH Kits Available) 12
Five recommended groups: existing box height determines retro group size.
Retrofit
Kit Interior
Catalog Number

Description

Collar
Catalog
Number

Cover
Catalog
Number

Existing Enclosure Parameters—Inches (mm)
Height

Width

Depth

Existing Box Height
Determines Retro
Size Group—Inches (mm)

BR-Aluminum Bus/CH-Copper Bus
BR 125A MLO 12/24 circuit retro kit

RAABR12L125

Included

Included

14.00–18.00
(355.6–457.2)

10.50–12.50
(266.7–317.5)

3.50–5.25
(88.9–133.35)

Retro size AA/size
14.00–21.00 (355.6–533.4)

BR 100A MCB 10/20 circuit retro kit

RAABR10B100

Included

Included

14.00–18.00
(355.6–457.2)

10.50–12.50
(266.7–317.5)

3.50–5.25
(88.9–133.35)

Retro size AA/size
14.00–21.00 (355.6–533.4)

BR 125A MLO 12/24 circuit retro kit

RAABR12L125A

Included

Included

14.00–21.00
(355.6–533.4)

10.50–15.50
(266.7–393.7)

3.50–5.25
(88.9–133.35)

Retro size AA/size
14.00–21.00 (355.6–533.4)

BR 100A MCB 10/20 circuit retro kit

RAABR10B100A

Included

Included

14.00–21.00
(355.6–533.4)

10.50–15.50
(266.7–393.7)

3.50–5.25
(88.9–133.35)

Retro size AA/size
14.00–21.00 (355.6–533.4)

CH interior 125A MCB 22 circuits

RACH22B125I

RACHFRAME

CH8CF

21.00–30.00
(533.4–762.0)

13.00–22.00
(330.2–558.8)

4.25–6.00
(108.0–152.4)

Retro size A/size
21.00–30.00 (533.4–762.0)

CH interior 125A MLO 24 circuits

RACH24L125I

RACHFRAME

CH8CF

21.00–30.00
(533.4–762.0)

13.00–22.00
(330.2–558.8)

4.25–6.00
(108.0–152.4)

Retro size A/size
21.00–30.00 (533.4–762.0)

CH interior 150A MCB 24 circuits

RBCH24B150I

RACHFRAME

CH8EF

29.00–36.00
(736.6–914.4)

13.00–22.00
(330.2–558.8)

4.25–6.00
(108.0–152.4)

Retro size B/size
29.00–36.00 (736.6–914.4)

9

CH interior 225A MLO 32 circuits

RBCH32L225I

RACHFRAME

CH8DF

29.00–36.00
(736.6–914.4)

13.00–22.00
(330.2–558.8)

4.25–6.00
(108.0–152.4)

Retro size B/size
29.00–36.00 (736.6–914.4)

10

CH interior 200A MCB 32 circuits

RCCH32B200I

RCCHFRAME

CH8JF

34.00–41.00
(863.3–1041.4)

13.00–22.00
(330.2–558.8)

4.25–6.00
(108.0–152.4)

Retro size C/size
34.00– 41.00 (863.3–1041.4)

CH interior 225A MLO 42 circuits

RCCH42L225I

RCCHFRAME

CH8GF

34.00–41.00
(863.3–1041.4)

13.00–22.00
(330.2–558.8)

4.25–6.00
(108.0–152.4)

Retro size C/size
34.00– 41.00 (863.3–1041.4)

CH interior 200A MCB 42 circuits

RDCH42B200I

RDCHFRAME

CH8KF

37.00–45.00
(939.8–1143.0)

13.00–22.00
(330.2–558.8)

4.25–6.00
(108.0–152.4)

Retro size D/size
37.00–45.00 (939.8–1143.0)

CH interior 225A MLO 42 circuits

RDCH42L225I

RDCHFRAME

CH8KF

37.00–45.00
(939.8–1143.0)

13.00–22.00
(330.0–558.8)

4.25–6.00
(108.0–152.4)

Retro size D/size
37.00–45.00 (939.8–1143.0)

4
5
6
7
8

11
12
13
14

Notes
1 Other options are available.
2 CH retrofit interiors and collar cartons are color coded to ensure accuracy of kit.

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T5-24

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Loadcenters
Type CH

Surge Panel

Surge Panel

Replacement Covers for Surge Panels

Product Description

Catalog Number

Cover Number

Replacement Module

Eaton’s Type CH Surge
Loadcenter includes a
factory-mounted and wired
surge suppressor device.
There is a knockout in the
cover that allows the user
to view the status indication
lights on the surge
suppressor. The CH Surge
Loadcenter reduces the
surge current, helping to
protect sensitive home
electronic equipment.

CHSUR22B100D

CHPC8DF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHSUR24L125D

CHPC8DF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC22B100D

CHPC8DF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC24L125D

CHPC8DF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC12L125C

CHPC8CF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC30B100J

CHPC8JF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC32L150J

CHPC8JF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHSUR32B150L

CHPC8B32LF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHSUR32B200L

CHPC8B32LF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHSUR32L225L

CHPC8B32LF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC32B125L

CHPC8B32LF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC32B150L

CHPC8B32LF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC32B200L

CHPC8B32LF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC32N200L

CHPC8B32LF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHSUR42B200L

CHPC8B42LF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC42B150L

CHPC8B42LF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC42B200L

CHPC8B42LF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC42N200L

CHPC8B42LF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHSUR42L225L

CHPC8L42LF

CHSPT2ULTRA

CHPC42L225L

CHPC8L42LF

CHSPT2ULTRA

Save labor
by installing
a factorymounted surge
protective
device.
Factory-Installed
Surge Protection
●
Includes a CHSPULTRA
and a two-pole 15A
circuit breaker
●
Increases the
effectiveness of
surge protection due
to reduced lead length
●
A modified deadfront
allows for easy viewing
of indicating lights

5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Surge Ready
●
Provides a mounting
provision for CHSPULTRA
●
A modified deadfront
allows for easy viewing
of indicating lights

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T5-25

5
1
2
3
4
5

Loadcenters
Type CH

Further Information
Publication
Number

Description

CA08100002E

Volume 1—Residential and Light Commercial Catalog, Tab 1

CA08100011E

Volume 9—OEM Product Guide

Pricing Information
Price and Availability Digest (PAD)
Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount Symbol 22CD

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T5-26

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Meter Centers
Group Metering Lineup

6

Meter Centers
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meter Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Residential Meter Stacks—Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Residential Meter Stacks—Ringless. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commercial Meter Stacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V12-T6-2
V12-T6-2
V12-T6-2
V12-T6-3
V12-T6-4
V12-T6-7
V12-T6-8
V12-T6-8
V12-T6-9
V12-T6-9
V12-T6-9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T6-1

6
1

Meter Centers

Meter Centers

Product History

Product Description

2
3

In the beginning, all multiple
metering applications were
assembled at the job site using
wire troughs, individual meter
sockets and enclosed circuit
breakers.

6

In the early 1960s, factoryassembled meter packs
began to be made on a jobby-job basis. Soon after,
modular metering was
introduced for single-phase
200A maximum ring-style
applications.

7

Product History Time Line

4
5

8
9
10
11
12

In 1981, a few utilities began
to require ringless meter
covers and, in 1983, the first
three-phase commercial meter
modules with lever type
bypass were introduced.
The Westinghouse Meter
Center designs, Type WM
and/or WP, and facilities were
sold to Thomas & Betts in
1994. Today, wall-hung
multiple metering is used in
virtually all areas of the
country for both residential
and commercial applications.

Product
WCG3 Meter Center

Cutler-Hammer® Meter
Centers from Eaton’s
electrical business are
designed for use where
an individually metered
distribution center is
required. Meter centers
house meter sockets that
measure power consumption
at service entrances.
Metering is designed for use
with multi-family dwelling
units, commercial units and
light industrial applications.

Main ratings range from 250
to 2000A, and 125, 200 and
320A sockets are available in
both single-phase and threephase versions.

1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present

Westinghouse QS, QP
Cutler-Hammer CG2, 4
Cutler-Hammer CG3, 5, 7, 9, 11
Westinghouse WM, WP
Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse WCG3, 5, 7, 9, 11
Cutler-Hammer 1MM, 3MM, 35MM, 37MM, 35SS, 37SS

Replacement Capabilities
Type

Accessories

Covers

Jaws

Bussed
End Caps

CG3

■

■

■

■

CG5

■

■

■

CG7

■

■

■

■

■

■

CG9

■

■

■

■

■

■

CG11

■

■

■

■

■

16

WCG3

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

WCG5

■

■

■

■

■

■

17

WCG7

■

■

■

■

■

■

WCG9

■

■

■

■

■

■

18

WCG11

■

■

■

■

■

1MM

■

■

■

■

■

■

19

3MM

■

■

■

■

■

■

35MM

■

■

■

■

■

■

20

37MM

■

■

■

■

■

■

35SS

■

■

■

■

■

■

21

37SS

■

■

■

■

■

■

13
14
15

Tenant Breaker
Hinged Cover

Drip
Hoods

Socket
Replacement

■

■

■

■

22
23
24
25
V12-T6-2

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

6

Meter Centers

Meter Packs

1
Wireway Cover

2

Utility Pull Section Cover

3
Meter Socket Assembly

4

Tenant Breaker Cover

5
6
7
8

Meter Cover

9
10

Endwall
Meter Pack

11

Meter Packs

12

Catalog Number
Meter
Pack

Utility
Pull Section
Cover

1MP2122R

Wireway
Cover

Meter
Socket
Assembly

Tenant
Breaker
Cover

MP2122UCVR

MPCCVR01

1MMMS

1MP3124R

MP1234UCVR

MPCCVR04

1MP4124R

MP1234UCVR

MPCCVR05

1MP5126R

MP1256UCVR

1MP6126R

MP1256UCVR

1MP2204R
1MP3206R

Meter
Cover

Endwall
(with
Knockouts)

Endwall
(without
Knockouts)

Vertical
Busbars

1MMBC1

1MMCP1 1

MP122NWLK

MP122NWL

MM1223VBUS

1MMMS

1MMBC1

1MMCP1

MP1234NWLK

MP1234NWL

MM1223VBUS

1MMMS

1MMBC1

1MMCP1

MP1234NWLK

MP1234NWL

MM1224VBUS

MPCCVR02 2

1MMMS

1MMBC1

1MMCP1 3

MP1256NWLK

MP1256NWL

MM1223VBUS

MPCCVR03 2

1MMMS

1MMBC1

1MMCP1 3

MP1256NWLK

MP1256NWL

MM1223VBUS

MP202UCVR

MPCCVR06

1MMMS

1MMBC2

1MMCP2

MP2024NWLK

MP2024NWL

MM202VBUS

MP2034UCVR

MPCCVR09

1MMMS

1MMBC2

1MMCP2

MP2024NWLK

MP2024NWL

MM2023VBUS

1MP4206R

MP2034UCVR

MPCCVR10

1MMMS

1MMBC2

1MMCP2

MP2024NWLK

MP2024NWL

MM204VBUS

1MP5206R

MP2056UCVR

MPCCVR07 4

1MMMS

1MMBC2

1MMCP2

MP2056NWLK

MP2056NWL

MM2023VBUS

1MP6206R

MP2056UCVR

MPCCVR08 4

1MMMS

1MMBC2

1MMCP2

MP2056NWLK

MP2056NWL

MM2023VBUS

1MP2122RRL 5

MP2122LUCVR

MPCCVR01

1MMMS 6

1MMBC1

1MMRC125 7

MP122NWLK

MP122NWL

MM1223VBUS

1MP3124RRL 5

MP1234UCVR

MPCCVR04

1MMMS 6

1MMBC1

1MMRC125 7

MP1234NWLK

MP1234NWL

MM1223VBUS

6

MM124VBUS

13

5

MP1234UCVR

MPCCVR05

1MMMS

1MMBC1

1MMRC125

MP1234NWLK

MP1234NWL

1MP5126RRL 5

MP1256UCVR

MPCCVR02

1MMMS 6

1MMBC1

1MMRC125 7

MP1256NWLK

MP1256NWL

MM1223VBUS

1MP6126RRL 5

MP1256UCVR

MPCCVR03

1MMMS 6

1MMBC1

1MMRC125 7

MP1256NWLK

MP1256NW

MM1223VBUS

1MP2204RRL 5

MP202UCVR

MPCCVR06

1MMMS 6

1MMBC2

1MMRC200 7

MP2024NWLK

MP2024NWL

MM202VBUS

1MP3206RRL 5

MP2034UCVR

MPCCVR09

1MMMS 6

1MMBC2

1MMRC200

MP2024NWLK

MP2024NWL

MM2023VBUS

1MP4206RRL 5

MP2034UCVR

MPCCVR10

1MMMS 6

1MMBC2

1MMRC200

MP2024NWLK

MP2024NWL

MM204VBUS

5

MP2056UCVR

MPCCVR07

1MMMS 6

1MMBC2

1MMRC200

MP2056NWLK

MP2056NWL

MM2023VBUS

1MP6206RRL 5

MP2056UCVR

MPCCVR08

1MMMS 6

1MMBC2

1MMRC200

MP2056NWLK

MP2056NWL

MM2023VBUS

1MP4124RRL

1MP5206RRL

Notes
1 For top position, use meter socket cover 1MMCP1T.
2 For center wireway cover, order MPCENCVR1.
3 For top position, use meter socket cover 1MMCP1T.
4 For center wireway cover, order MPCENCVR2.
5 For catalog numbers with a “B” suffix (ringless with horn bypass), all replacement parts are the same with the exception of the meter socket assembly.
Refer to Footnote 6 for correct catalog number.
6 For ringless style meter packs with horn bypass, order 1MMMSB.
7 For top position, use meter socket cover 1MMRC200T.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

V12-T6-3

6
1
2

Meter Centers

Main Devices
Drip Hood
Front Cover

3
4
End Caps

5
6
7
8
9
10
Endwall

11
12

Meter Main Device

End Caps

13

Description

Catalog
Number

Right side (bumped)

47-28172-2A

14

Left side (flat)

47-24139A

15
16

Terminal Box
Catalog Number
Terminal
Box

Front
Cover

Drip
Hood

Endwall
(with Knockouts)

Endwall
(without Knockouts)

1MTB800R

MMFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

17

1MTB1200R

MMFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

3MTB400R

MTBFCVR1

MMDH4

MTBEW1

MTBEWNK01

18

3MTB600R

MTBFCVR1

MMDH4

MTBEW1

MTBEWNK01

3MTB800R

MMFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

19

3MBT1200R

MMFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T6-4

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

6

Meter Centers

Main Circuit Breaker

1

Catalog Number
Circuit
Breaker

Front
Cover

Drip
Hood

Endwall
(with Knockouts)

Endwall
(without Knockouts)

Main
Breaker Cover

1MCB250R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MHCB250R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MCB300R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MHCB300R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MCB350R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MHCB350R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MCB400R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MHCB400R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MCB500R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MHCB500R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MCB600R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MHCB600R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MCB700R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MHCB700R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MCB800R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MHCB800R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MCB900R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MHCB900R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MCB1000R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MHCB1000R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MCB1200R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MHCB1200R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

1MCB1400RB

MCBFCVR3

MCBDH1

—

MMEWNK03

49-7060

1MCB1400RT

MCBFCVR3

MCBDH1

—

MMEWNK03

49-7060

1MCB1600RB

MCBFCVR3

MCBDH1

—

MMEWNK03

49-7060

1MCB1600RT

MCBFCVR3

MCBDH1

—

MMEWNK03

49-7060

1MCB2000RB

MCBFCVR3

MCBDH1

—

MMEWNK03

49-7060

1MCB2000RT

MCBFCVR3

MCBDH1

—

MMEWNK03

49-7060

3MCB250R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MHCB250R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MCB300R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MHCB300R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MCB350R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MHCB350R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MCB400R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MHCB400R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MCB500R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MHCB500R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MCB600R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MHCB600R

MCBFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MCB700R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MHCB700R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MCB800R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MHCB800R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MCB900R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MHCB900R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MCB1000R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MHCB1000R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MCB1200R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MHCB1200R

MCBFCVR2

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

49-7060

3MCB1400RB

MCBFCVR3

MCBDH1

—

MMEWNK03

—

3MCB1400RT

MCBFCVR3

MCBDH1

—

MMEWNK03

—

3MCB1600RB

MCBFCVR3

MCBDH1

—

MMEWNK03

—

3MCB1600RT

MCBFCVR3

MCBDH1

—

MMEWNK03

—

3MCB2000RB

MCBFCVR3

MCBDH1

—

MMEWNK03

—

3MCB2000RT

MCBFCVR3

MCBDH1

—

MMEWNK03

—

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T6-5

6
1
2

Meter Centers

Main Fusible Switch
Catalog Number
Fusible
Switch

Front
Cover

Drip
Hood

Endwall
(with Knockouts)

Endwall
(without Knockouts)
MMEWNKO1

1MFS400RB

MMFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

3

1MFS400RT

MFSFCVR1

MMDH1

—

MMEWNKO1

1MFS600RB

MMFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNKO1

4

1MFS600RT

MFSFCVR1

MMDH1

—

MMEWNKO1

1MFS800RB

MMFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNKO1

1MFS800RT

MFSFCVR1

MMDH1

—

MMEWNKO1

1MFS1200RB

MFSFCVR2

MMDH2

MMEW2

MMEWNKO2
MMEWNKO1

5

3MFS400RB

MMFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

6

3MFS400RT

MFSFCVR1

MMDH1

—

MMEWNKO1

3MFS600RB

MMFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNKO1

7

3MFS600RT

MFSFCVR1

MMDH1

—

MMEWNKO1

3MFS800RB

MMFCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNKO1

8
9
10
11

3MFS800RT

MFSFCVR1

MMDH1

—

MMEWNKO1

3MFS1200RB

MFSFCVR2

MMDH2

MMEW2

MMWENKO2

Drip
Hood

Endwall
(with Knockouts)

Endwall
(without Knockouts)

Main Bolted Pressure Contact Switch
Catalog Number
Bolted Pressure
Contact Switch

Front
Cover

1BPS1200RB

No replacement parts available at this time.

1BPS1200RT
3BPS1200RB

12

3BPS1200RT

13

3BPS1600RT

14

3BPS1600RB

No replacement parts available at this time.

3BPS2000RB
3BPS2000RT

Main Fusible Switch with Pullbox

15

Catalog Number

16

Fusible Switch
with Pullbox

Front
Cover

Pullbox
Cover

Drip
Hood

Endwall
(with Knockouts)

Endwall
(without Knockouts)

1MFS400RUG

MFPFCVR1

MFPBCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

1MFS600RUG

MFPFCVR1

MFPBCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

1MFS800RUG

MFPFCVR1

MFPBCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

1MFS1200RUG

MFPFCVR2

MFPBCVR2

MMDH2

MMEW2

MMEWNK02

18

3MFS400RUG

MFPFCVR1

MFPBCVR1

MMDH1

MMEW1

MMEWNK01

3MFS600RUG

MFPFCVR3

MFPBCVR3

MMDH5

MMEW4

MMEWNK04

19

3MFS800RUG

MFPFCVR3

MFPBCVR3

MMDH5

MMEW4

MMEWNK04

3MFS1200RUG

MFPFCVR2

MFPBCVR2

MMDH2

MMEW2

MMEWNK02

17

20
21
22
23
24

Pullbox
Catalog Number
Pullbox

Front Cover
Pullbox Cover

Drip
Hood

Endwall
(with Knockouts)

Endwall
(without Knockouts)

1UGPB400R

PBFCVR1

PBDH1

PBEW1

PBEWNK01

1UGPB800R

PBFCVR2

PBDH2

PBEW2

PBEWNK02

1UGPB1200R

PBFCVR3

PBDH3

PBEW3

PBEWNK03

3UGPB400R

PBFCVR1

PBDH1

PBEW1

PBEWNK01

3UGPB800R

PBFCVR2

PBDH2

PBEW2

PBEWNK02

3UGPB1200R

PBFCVR3

PBDH3

PBEW3

PBEWNK03

25
V12-T6-6

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

6

Meter Centers

Residential Meter Stacks—Ring

1

Drip Hood

2
3

Wireway Cover

4

Meter Socket Assembly

5
6
7

Tenant Breaker Cover

8

Meter Cover
Endwall

9

Ring Style Meter Stack

10

Residential Meter Stacks—Ring
Catalog Number
Meter
Stack

Wireway
Cover

Meter
Socket
Assembly

Tenant
Breaker
Cover

Meter
Cover

Endwall
(with
Knockouts)

Endwall
(without
Knockouts)

Drip
Hood

Vertical
Busbar

11

3MM212

MMCCVR2123

—

1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM1223VBUS

3MM212R

MMCCVR2123R

1MMMS

1MMBC1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM1223VBUS

1MM312

MMCCVR3121

1MMMS

1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM1223VBUS

1MM312R

MMCCVR3121R

1MMMS

1MMBC1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM1223VBUS

3MM312

MMCCVR3123

1MMMS

1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM1223VBUS

3MM312R

MMCCVR3123R

1MMMS

1MMBC1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM1223VBUS

1MM412

MMCCVR4121

1MMMS

1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM124VBUS

1MM412R

MMCCVR4121R

1MMMS

1MMBC1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM124VBUS

3MM412

MMCCVR4123

1MMMS

1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM124VBUS

3MM412R

MMCCVR4123R

1MMMS

1MMBC1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM124VBUS

1MM512

MMCCVR5121

1MMMS

1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM125VBUS

1MM512R

MMCCVR5121R

1MMMS

1MMBC1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM125VBUS

3MM512

MMCCVR5123

1MMMS

1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM125VBUS

3MM512R

MMCCVR5123R

1MMMS

1MMBC1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM125VBUS

1MM612

MMCCVR6121

1MMMS

1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM126VBUS

1MM612R

MMCCVR6121R

1MMMS

1MMBC1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM126VBUS

3MM612

MMCCVR6123

1MMMS

1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM126VBUS

3MM612R

MMCCVR6123R

1MMMS

1MMBC1

1MMCP1 2

MM12N1WLK

MM12N1WL

MMDH3

MM126VBUS

3MM220

MMCCVR2203

1MMMS

1

1MMCP2 3

MM20N1WLK

MM20N1WL

MMDH4

MM2023VBUS

3MM220R

MMCCVR2203R

1MMMS

1MMBC2

1MMCP2 3

MM20N1WLK

MM20N1WL

MMDH4

MM2023VBUS

1MM320

MMCCVR3201

1MMMS

1

1MMCP2 3

MM20N1WLK

MM20N1WL

MMDH4

MM2023VBUS

1MM320R

MMCCVR3201R

1MMMS

1MMBC2

1MMCP2 3

MM20N1WLK

MM20N1WL

MMDH4

MM2023VBUS

3MM320

MMCCVR3203

1MMMS

1

1MMCP2 3

MM20N1WLK

MM20N1WL

MMDH4

MM2023VBUS

3MM320R

MMCCVR3203R

1MMMS

1MMBC2

1MMCP2 3

MM20N1WLK

MM20N1WL

MMDH4

MM2023VBUS

1MM420

MMCCVR4201

1MMMS

1

1MMCP2 3

MM20N1WLK

MM20N1WL

MMDH4

MM204VBUS

1MM420R

MMCCVR4201R

1MMMS

1MMBC2

1MMCP2 3

MM20N1WLK

MM20N1WL

MMDH4

MM204VBUS

3MM420

MMCCVR4203

1MMMS

1

1MMCP2 3

MM20N1WLK

MM20N1WL

MMDH4

MM204VBUS

3MM420R

MMCCVR4203R

1MMMS

1MMBC2

1MMCP2 3

MM20N1WLK

MM20N1WL

MMDH4

MM204VBUS

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Notes
1 Type 1 meter stacks do not come with breaker covers.
2 For top position, order meter cover 1MMCP1T.
3 For top position, order meter cover 1MMCP2T.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

12

25
V12-T6-7

6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Meter Centers

Residential Meter Stacks—Ringless
Residential Meter Stacks—Ringless
Catalog Number
Meter
Stack

Wireway
Cover

Meter
Socket
Assembly

Tenant
Breaker
Cover

Meter
Cover

Endwall
(with
Knockouts)

Endwall
(without
Knockouts)

Drip
Hood

Vertical
Busbar

3MM212RRL 1
1MM312RRL 1
3MM312RRL 1
1MM412RRL 1
3MM412RRL 1
1MM512RRL 1
3MM512RRL 1
1MM612RRL 1
3MM612RRL 1
3MM220RRL 1
1MM320RRL 1
3MM320RRL 1
1MM420RRL 1
3MM420RRL 1

MMCCVR2123R
MMCCVR3121R
MMCCVR3123R
MMCCVR3121R
MMCCVR4123R
MMCCVR5121R
MMCCVR5123R
MMCCVR6121R
MMCCVR6123R
MMCCVR2203R
MMCCVR3201R
MMCCVR3203R
MMCCVR4201R
MMCCVR4203R

1MMMS 2
1MMMS 2
1MMMS 2
1MMMS 2
1MMMS 2
1MMMS 2
1MMMS 2
1MMMS 2
1MMMS 2
1MMMS 2
1MMMS 2
1MMMS 2
1MMMS 2
1MMMS 2

1MMBC1
1MMBC1
1MMBC1
1MMBC1
1MMBC1
1MMBC1
1MMBC1
1MMBC1
1MMBC1
1MMBC2
1MMBC2
1MMBC2
1MMBC2
1MMBC2

1MMRC125 3
1MMRC125 3
1MMRC125 3
1MMRC125
1MMRC125
1MMRC125
1MMRC125
1MMRC125
1MMRC125
1MMRC200
1MMRC200
1MMRC200
1MMRC200
1MMRC200

MM12NWLK
MM12NWLK
MM12NWLK
MM12NWLK
MM12NWLK
MM12NWLK
MM12NWLK
MM12NWLK
MM12NWLK
MM20NWLK
MM20NWLK
MM20NWLK
MM20NWLK
MM20NWLK

MM12NWL
MM12NWL
MM12NWL
MM12NWL
MM12NWL
MM12NWL
MM12NWL
MM12NWL
MM12NWL
MM20NWL
MM20NWL
MM20NWL
MM20NWL
MM20NWL

MMDH3
MMDH3
MMDH3
MMDH3
MMDH3
MMDH3
MMDH3
MMDH3
MMDH3
MMDH4
MMDH4
MMDH4
MMDH4
MMDH4

MM1223VBUS
MM1223VBUS
MM1223VBUS
MM124VBUS
MM124VBUS
MM125VBUS
MM125VBUS
MM126VBUS
MM126VBUS
MM2023VBUS
MM2023VBUS
MM2023VBUS
MM204VBUS
MM204VBUS

Commercial Meter Stacks
Commercial Meter Stacks (Lever Bypass)
Catalog Number
Meter
Stack

Wireway
Cover

35MM120R12
35MM220R12
35MM320R12
35MM420R12
37MM140R12
37MM120R12
37MM220R12
37MM320R12
37MM420R12

MSLWCVR1
MSLWCVR2
MSLWCVR3
MSLWCVR4 4
MSLWCVR9 4
MSLWCVR5 4
MSLWCVR6 4
MSLWCVR7 4
MSLWCVR8 4

—
—
—
MSLWCVR13 5
MSLWCVR14 5
MSLWCVR15 5
MSLWCVR16 5
MSLWCVR17 5
MSLWCVR18 5

Meter
Socket
Assembly

Tenant
Breaker
Cover

Meter
Cover

MSLMSA1
MSLMSA1
MSLMSA1
MSLMSA1
MSLMSA2
MSLMSA2
MSLMSA2
MSLMSA2
MSLMSA2

MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1

MSLMCVR1 4
MSLMCVR1 4
MSLMCVR1 4
MSLMCVR1 4
MSLMCVR1 4
MSLMCVR1 4
MSLMCVR1 4
MSLMCVR1 4
MSLMCVR1 4

37MMSK1 5
37MMSK1 5
37MMSK1 5
37MMSK1 5
37MMSK1 5
37MMSK1 5
37MMSK1 5
37MMSK1 5
37MMSK1 5

Endwall
(with
Knockouts)

Endwall
(without
Knockouts)

Drip
Hood

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

MSLEW1
MSLEW1
MSLEW1
MSLEW2
MSLEW1
MSLEW1
MSLEW1
MSLEW1
MSLEW2

MSLDH1
MSLDH1
MSLDH1
MSLDH2
MSLDH1
MSLDH1
MSLDH1
MSLDH1
MSLDH2

Commercial Meter Stack (Test Bypass)
Catalog Number

Meter Stack

Wireway
Cover

Meter
Socket
Assembly

Tenant
Breaker
Cover

Meter
Cover

Endwall
(with
Knockouts)

Endwall
(without
Knockouts)

Drip
Hood

35SS120RAB
35SS120RAC
35SS120RBC
35SS220RAB
35SS220RAC
35SS220RBC
35SS320RAB
35SS320RAC
35SS320RBC
37SS120R
37SS220R
37SS320R

MSTWCVR1
MSTWCVR2
MSTWCVR3
MSTWCVR4
MSTWCVR5
MSTWCVR6
MSTWCVR7
MSTWCVR8
MSTWCVR9
MSTWCVR10
MSTWCVR11
MSTWCVR12

MSTMSA1
MSTMSA1
MSTMSA1
MSTMSA1
MSTMSA1
MSTMSA1
MSTMSA1
MSTMSA1
MSTMSA1
MSTMSA2
MSTMSA2
MSTMSA2

MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1
MSBCVR1

MSTMCVR1
MSTMCVR1
MSTMCVR1
MSTMCVR1
MSTMCVR1
MSTMCVR1
MSTMCVR1
MSTMCVR1
MSTMCVR1
MSTMCVR1
MSTMCVR1
MSTMCVR1

MSTEW1
MSTEW1
MSTEW1
MSTEW2
MSTEW2
MSTEW2
MSTEW2
MSTEW2
MSTEW2
MSTEW1
MSTEW2
MSTEW2

MSTEWNK01
MSTEWNK01
MSTEWNK01
MSTEWNK02
MSTEWNK02
MSTEWNK02
MSTEWNK02
MSTEWNK02
MSTEWNK02
MSTEWNK01
MSTEWNK02
MSTEWNK02

MSTDH1
MSTDH1
MSTDH1
MSTDH1
MSTDH1
MSTDH1
MSTDH1
MSTDH1
MSTDH1
MSTDH1
MSTDH1
MSTDH1

Notes
1 For catalog numbers with a “B” suffix (ringless with horn bypass), all replacement parts are the same with the exception of the meter socket assembly.
Refer to Footnote 2 for correct catalog number.
2 For ringless style meter stacks with horn bypass, order 1MMMSB meter socket assembly.
3 For top position, use meter socket cover 1MMRC125T.
4 Used for product built October 2002 and prior.
5 Used for product built after October 2002.

V12-T6-8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Meter Centers

6

Miscellaneous Parts

1

Miscellaneous Parts
Description

Part
Number

Phase balancing kit, single-phase commercial metering

99-4177-3

A and C phase balancing kit (3MM)

99-4184

Breaker mounting kit, commercial metering (one three-pole breaker per kit)

99-4176-2

Breaker mounting kit, 1MM/1MP, 200A, (one two-pole breaker per kit)

99-4176

Mounting kit, meter center

99-4172

Mounting kit, meter pack

99-4173

Bonding strap kit, all meter packs (except CECHA three and four socket)

99-4174

Bonding strap kit, CHECA three and four socket meter packs

99-2379

Sealing screw kit, ringless devices (six screws)

99-4175

Sealing screw kit, three and four meter sockets, ringless devices (four screws)

99-2589

Padlock bracket

99-2512-5

Mounting bracket kit—all breaker and fusible mains

99-4183

Mounting bracket kit—400 and 600A 3MTB

99-4183-3

Exterior breaker cover

49-6070

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Further Information
Publication
Number

Description

RP32A01BTE

Renewal parts data for new 1MM, 3MM, 35MM, 37MM, 35SS and 37SS

RP00501001E

Renewal parts data for multiple metering

11
12

Pricing Information

13

Price and Availability Digest (PAD)
Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount Symbol 22-CD

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T6-9

Safety Switches
Safety Switch Product Family

7

Safety Switches
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V12-T7-2
V12-T7-2
V12-T7-2
V12-T7-2
V12-T7-2
V12-T7-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08105001E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T7-1

7
1

Safety Switches

Safety Switches

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Safety Switch Product Family

The Westinghouse safety
switch design and facilities
were sold to Thomas & Betts
in 1994. Prior to this, there
were various design and code
changes that caused changes
in catalog numbering and
utilization of the switches. In
1984, an “N” was added to

the middle of the catalog
numbers to signify the
new National Electrical
Code® (NEC®) regulations.
During this time period,
Westinghouse’s safety
switches were manufactured
in Beaver, PA. In 1989, the
manufacture of the switches

was moved to Vidalia, GA.
There was then another
code change in 1992 that
necessitated another change
in catalog numbering. The
previous “N” in the middle
of the catalog number was
deleted for the 400 to
1200A units.

Product History Time Line

Product Description
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer®
series of safety switches
have a number of applications
from service entrance to
branch circuit protection. They
are also horsepower rated for
use as motor circuit switches.
Non-fusible safety switches
provide a means to manually
connect or disconnect the
load from the source. Fusible
safety switches provide a
means to manually open and
close a circuit and overcurrent
protection by means of
installed fuses. Safety
switches offer a wide variety
of switching capabilities with
general-duty, heavy-duty and
double-throw switches.

Product

1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010 Present

Cutler-Hammer 4103
Cutler-Hammer 4105
Cutler-Hammer K-Series
Westinghouse HFN365N
(Bacalyte Base)
Westinghouse HFN365N
Westinghouse HF365N
(Red Base, 400–1200A)
Eaton R-Series
Rotary Disconnects
Cutler-Hammer C362/C363
Rotary Disconnects
Eaton’s Pringle® Bolted
Pressure Switches

Replacement Capabilities

Product History
Eaton began manufacturing
safety switches with the
4103 line in 1957. In 1977,
the new 4105 line was
moved from the New York
plant to the manufacturing
facility in Lincoln, IL. The last
design change came in 1983,
where the manufacture of
the new K-Series switch was
moved to Eaton’s Cleveland,
TN, facility. The K-Series
design represents our
current product offering and
is still manufactured at the
Cleveland plant.

Type

Operating
Handle

Ground

Neutral

Fuse
Base

Fuse
Block

Line
Shield

Operating
Mechanism

Switching
Base

K-Series

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Note: Specific applicable renewal parts for safety switches are identified on the inside door label of the product.

Further Information
Publication Number

Description

RP00801001E

Safety Switch Renewal Parts

CA08100003E

Commercial Distribution Catalog, Volume 2, Tab 1 (Switching Devices)

CA08104001E

Consulting Application Guide

CA08100006E

Motor Control & Protection Catalog, Volume 5, Tab 8 (Rotary Disconnects)

PG00802002E

Rotary Disconnect Product Guide

Pricing Information

20

Price and Availability Digest
(PAD)

21

Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount
Symbol SWD-1, SWD-2,
SWD-3 for Safety Switches

22
23
24
25
V12-T7-2

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08105001E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Dry-Type Distribution Transformers
Family of Dry-Type
Distribution Transformers

8

Dry-Type Distribution Transformers
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V12-T8-2
V12-T8-2
V12-T8-2
V12-T8-3
V12-T8-4
V12-T8-4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T8-1

8
1

Dry-Type Distribution Transformers

Dry-Type Distribution
Transformers

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Family of Dry-Type
Distribution Transformers

Product History

manufactured numerous
varieties of transformers
for countless applications
worldwide.

Originally a
Westinghouse Product
The first transformer
built in the United States
was manufactured by
Westinghouse Electric in
1892. It was a 2 kVA drytype transformer. For over
a century, Westinghouse

The Westinghouse design
transformer is now available
through Eaton. Dry-type
transformers, the workhorse
of modern industry, are the
foundation of modern AC
power distribution. It is a

transformer that solves the
problems of maintenance,
installation, safety and
efficiency by using air to cool
the coils instead of liquids.
Many older transformers,
which in some cases pre-date
the product families listed
above, can be updated to the
modern designs currently
manufactured by Eaton.

Product History Time Line

Product Description
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer®
series of dry-type distribution
transformers are electrical
devices that transfer energy
by magnetic induction from
one circuit to another. They
are typically used to change
the voltage in an electric
power system from its
distribution level to the
proper level for practical
and safe use.
Typical loads for dry-type
distribution transformers
include lighting, heating,
air conditioning, fans and
machine tools. Such loads
are found in commercial,
institutional, industrial and
residential structures.

Type

1955

1960

1965

1970

1975

1980

1985

1990

1995

2000

2005

DS-3
DT-3
MTA
MTC
EP
EPT
MPC
MD
KT
NEMA TP-1
HMT
CSL3
NEMA Premium

Different types of dry-type
distribution transformers
are used for various
applications throughout
facilities. Therefore, dry-type
distribution transformers are
classified in distinct product
groups as follows: general
purpose—sand and resin
encapsulated (EP and EPT);
general purpose—ventilated
(DS-3, DT-3, CSL3-2007,
NEMA® Premium®); energy
efficient (NEMA TP-1);
shielded isolation; motor
drive isolation (MD);
nonlinear (KT); mini–power
center (MPC); hazardous
location, Buck-Boost and
industrial control (MTA
and MTC).

22
23
24
25
V12-T8-2

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

2010 Present

8

Dry-Type Distribution Transformers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Capabilities

1

Replacement Parts

2

Terminal Lug Kits for Type DT-3 Transformers 1
Typical Sizing

Terminal Lugs
Cable Range

Terminal Lugs
Quantity

Hardware
Bolt Size

Hardware
Quantity

15–37.5 kVA single-phase
15–45 kVA three-phase

#14–#2
#6–250 kcmil

8
4

1/4–20 x 3/4

8

LKS1

50–75 kVA single-phase
75–112.5 kVA three-phase

#6–250 kcmil

12

1/4–20 x 3/4
1/4–20 x 1-3/4

8
8

LKS2

100–167 kVA single-phase
150–300 kVA three-phase

#6–250 kcmil
#2–600 kcmil

3
22

1/4–20 x 3/4
3/8–16 x 2

3
16

LKS3

5

500 kVA three-phase

#2–600 kcmil

29

3/8–16 x 2

18

LKS4

6

Rodent Screens

Rodent screens are used to discourage
entry by birds or rodents.

3
4

Replacement Parts for Mini–Power Centers
Frame
Size(s) 2

Description

Catalog
Number

908, 909

RS01

910A, 911, 912

RS02

913B, 914B, 915B

RS03

916

Frame

Deadfront Cover
(Breaker Cover)
Part Number

Front Cover
Part Number

283

47-37503

7074C98H04

284

47-37503-2

7074C98H01

285

47-37503-3

7074C98H02

286

47-37503-4

7074C98H02

287

47-37503-5

7074C98H03

289

47-37459

7074C44H01

290

47-37459-2

7074C44H02

291

47-37459-3

7074C44H03

289A

47-42072-1

7074C44H01

290A

47-42072-2

7074C44H02

291A

47-42072-3

7074C44H03

Catalog
Number

RS04

917, 918, 918A

RS05

919, 920

RS06

916A, 916B

RS07

922

RS08

923

RS09

814, 821

RS11

815

RS12

816

RS13

817, 818

RS14

819, 820

RS15

912B

RS16

914D, 915D

RS17

924

RS18

928

RS19

929

RS20

7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Notes
1 Lugs are rated Al/Cu and are suitable for use with either aluminum or copper conductors.
2 Effective June 1, 2001, frame numbers have a prefix of FR, i.e., FR819. Dimensions, accessories,
etc. are still applicable as if the FR did not exist.

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T8-3

8
1

Dry-Type Distribution Transformers
Replacement Capabilities

Replacement Parts
Case Parts for Ventilated Transformers

2

Panels
Front or Back
Part Number

Side (Two Required Per Transformer)
Part Number

Bottom
Part Number

Top Cover
Part Number

3

Frame(s) 1

4

908, 909

7073C37P01

1714C44P03

7073C20P05

1714C45P01

910, 911, 912

1714C46P01

1714C44P01

7073C20P01

1714C45P01

5
6
7
8
9
10

Three-Phase, 600V Class

913A, 914A, 915A

1714C47P03

1714C44P07

7073C20P02

1714C45P02

916

1714C60P01

1714C56P01

7073C20P03

1714C58P01

917, 918

1714C65P01

1714C64P01

7073C20P04

1714C67P01

918A

47-41801

47-41800

47-41799

47-41802

919, 920

2D46331P03 (upper panel)
2D46331P04 (lower panel)

2D46332P01
2D46331P01 (cutout cover plate)

—
—

2D46331P02

922

2D46391H03 (back upper panel)
2D46391H06 (front upper panel)
2D46391H08 (lower panel)

2D46392H01

—
—
—

2D46391H02

923

47-45927-1

47-45925-1

47-45759-1

47-45926-1

910A, 911A, 912A

47-40592

47-40591

47-40589

1714C45P01

913B, 914B, 915B

47-40580

47-40578
47-41789

47-41792

1714C45P02

916A

47-41790

47-41789

47-41788

47-41791

FR916B

47-47351-1

47-47350-1

47-47-347-1

47-41791

912B

47-49323-1

47-49321-1

47-51964-1

47-49322-1

914D, 915D

47-49317-1

47-49315-1

47-51965-1

47-49316-1

924

47-53089-2 (upper panel)
47-53089-1 (lower panel)

47-53088-1

47-53087-1

47-53089-1

13

928

47-53777-1

47-53779-1

47-53778-1

1714C67H15

929

47-53786-1

47-53788-1

47-53787-1

47-41802-3

14

Single-Phase, 600V Class
809

7073C16P03

7073C18P04

7073C14P03

7073C17P01

15

810, 811, 835

7073C16P01

7073C18P01

7073C14P01

7073C17P01

812, 813, 836, 837, 838

7073C16P02

7073C18P02

7073C14P02

7073C17P02

16

814

7073C54P01

7073C18P05

7073C14P04

7073C17P03

815

47-39433

47-39430

47-39429

47-39431

17

816

47-40452

47-40451

47-40449

47-40453

817, 818

47-40457

47-40456

47-40454

47-40458

18

819, 820

47-40574

47-40573

47-40459

47-40575

11
12

Further Information

Pricing Information

Publication
Number

Price and Availability Digest (PAD)
Description

20

B.36B.01.S.E

K-Factor Dry-Type Distribution Transformer Brochure

CA08100003E

Commercial Distribution Catalog, Volume 2, Tab 2

21

CA08104001E

Consulting Application Guide

B1228A

Industrial Control Transformer Binder

22

B.36F.01.S.E

Mini–Power Center Brochure

B.36D.01.S.E

Class 1, Division 2, Hazardous Location Transformer Brochure

19

Vista/VISTALINE™ (Discount Symbol DT-1)
Notes
1 Effective June 1, 2001 frame numbers have a prefix of FR, i.e., FR819.
Dimensions, accessories, etc. are still applicable as if the FR did not exist.
Parts listed are for standard catalog listed transformers. Units with modifications may require
different parts. (Frame No. from transformer nameplate required.) Transformer nameplate and
UL® label are not field replaceable.

23
24
25
V12-T8-4

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Busway (Low Voltage)
Circuit Breaker Enclosure

9

Busway (Low Voltage)
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product History Time Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vintage Busway Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100 Ampere Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Plug-In Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard and Low Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick-Assembled Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP2, CP3 or CP4 SAFETYBUS Busway Plug-In Units . . . . . . . . . .
Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clipper Power Systems, Busway TVSS Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ Energy Sentinel for Bus Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V12-T9-2
V12-T9-2
V12-T9-3
V12-T9-4
V12-T9-4
V12-T9-4
V12-T9-6
V12-T9-7
V12-T9-8
V12-T9-10
V12-T9-11
V12-T9-14
V12-T9-14
V12-T9-15
V12-T9-15
V12-T9-15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T9-1

9
1

Busway (Low Voltage)

Busway (Low Voltage)

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Standard Plug-In

Product Description
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer®
low voltage busway consists
of aluminum or copper bars
inside a metal housing
used for power distribution.
Busway is available in
ampere ratings of 100–5000A.
Busway is available as feeder
(indoor or outdoor) and plug-in.
Feeder busway routes power
from point-to-point, whereas
plug-in busway allows for
power to be tapped off
along a run as needed.
Busway is typically used in
manufacturing buildings and
high-rise office buildings.

Product History
Westinghouse began
marketing low voltage
busway in 1938. The first
product offering was power
distribution busway, using a
multiple bolt joint that later
evolved into standard plug-in
busway. Victory bus duct was
developed during the Second
World War to comply with
federal limitations placed on
usage of materials such as
steel and copper, which were
critical to the war effort. In
1947, Westinghouse began
manufacturing busway at
the newly acquired facility in
Beaver, PA, with standard

plug-in and feeder bus in
ratings up to 1500A. All of
these early designs used
separated, uninsulated
busbars inside a totally
enclosed or perforated
steel housing.
In 1951, low impedance
feeder busway was
introduced as the first
design to use heat-shrinkable
tubing for insulation on the
busbars and a ventilated steel
housing. An internal ground
bus was not available with
this product line, but
provisions were made for
mounting an external ground
bus directly to the busway
housing. Low impedance
feeder and standard plug-in
busway accounted for the
majority of busway business
written by Westinghouse
through the 1950s and into
the 1960s. Low impedance
plug-in busway was
introduced in 1961. With
this design, the product
offering was expanded to
a maximum of 5000A for
feeder and 4000A for plug-in.
During the 1950s, various
other designs were introduced
to meet specific customer
needs. Westinghouse Lifeline
Unibus, rolled out in 1955,
provided low impedance
characteristics with plug-in
openings and incorporated
flexible armored cable
into the design for use as
elbows, offsets and flat to
edgewise adapters.

Westinghouse high frequency
busway was introduced in
1958 to address the inherent
problems of transmitting
power at frequencies from
180 to 20,000 Hz. CutlerHammer high frequency BV
(balanced voltage) busway
was also marketed during
the late 1950s and early
1960s. Westinghouse high
frequency busway and
Cutler-Hammer BV busway
both found success in
aircraft manufacturing plants,
industrial induction heating
systems, military missiles
and radar bases.
Electric utility busway
was also introduced by
Westinghouse in 1958 and
was designed to conduct
direct current with low
voltage drop. By 1963,
electric utility busway had
been expanded to meet the
growing industrial market
for direct current power and
was marketed simply as DC
busway. This product line
was applied to feeding
plating processes, welding
installations, mill drives
and motors.
In 1958, Westinghouse sold
the rights to the Life Line
Unibus product line to EDP
of Allentown, PA, which
marketed EDP Unibus until
1962 when EDP became
a wholly owned subsidiary
of Eaton. Eaton successfully
marketed Unibus until
the product line was
discontinued in 1974.

In 1966, Westinghouse
introduced its first true
sandwich bus design with
H5000 feeder busway.
H5000 was also the first
single bolt joint design
offered by Westinghouse and
it initially used a PVC shrink
tubing and later a Mylar®
wrap for busbar insulation.
A combination of steel and
aluminum channels were
used to form a lightweight
non-magnetic housing. The
grounding method for H5000
was similar to low impedance
busway and an external
ground bus mounted onto
the housing was the only
offering. H5000 plug-in
busway rolled out in 1968
as a non-sandwich design
with separated and
uninsulated busbars.
In 1970, the Eaton’s CutlerHammer Bethlehem, PA,
plant introduced CP2
SAFETYBUS that used an
innovative single bolt, bridge
joint design with a steel
housing for plug-in, and a
combination of steel and
aluminum channels for the
feeder housing. CP2 used
a Mylar wrap for busbar
insulation and an Alstan®
process for plating. The
feeder busway was a
sandwich design while the
plug-in design used separated
busbars that were braced and
supported by corrugations
formed in the housing sides.

18
19

Standard Plug-In

H5000 Feeder

Low Impedance Feeder

High Frequency

Electric Utility (DC)

Low Impedance Plug-In

20
21

H5000 Plug-In 225–1000A

Current Limiting

22
23

Typical Pow-R-Way Plug-In Straight Length

Typical Pow-R-Way II Plug-In Straight Length

24
25
V12-T9-2

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Busway (Low Voltage)

Westinghouse introduced
the Pow-R-Way product
line in 1971. Pow-R-Way
employed the sandwich
design in both feeder and
plug-in. At that time, Pow-RWay used a combination of
PVC, applied by the fluidized
bed process, and Mylar
sheeting for busbar insulation
that achieved a Class A,
105°C rating. Silver-plating of
all joint and contact surfaces
was applied by a Zincate
process. Pow-R-Way is a
bolt-end/slot-end design with
a single bolt connection at
the joint and is rated from
600 to 5000A. Pow-R-Way II
was rolled out in 1975 with
ratings of 225A and 400A in
feeder and plug-in. Pow-RWay II is a single, captive
bolt per bar design for indoor,
horizontal applications only.
During 1980, the CutlerHammer busway design was
upgraded and they began
marketing CP3 SAFETYBUS.
CP3 featured an improved
bridge joint package and a
polyethylene terephthalate
wrap for busbar insulation.
CP3 maintained the CP2
housing design with busbar
separation in the plug-in
product configuration.

Cutler-Hammer CP4
SAFETYBUS was introduced
in 1985 and incorporated
the sandwich design into the
plug-in busway. CP4 featured
a UL® recognized case ground
path rating and 130°C Mylar
busbar insulation. CP4 used
the CP3 bridge joint package
and accepted CP2 and CP3
bus plugs. The CP4 product
line was successful in both
the commercial and industrial
markets until it was
discontinued in 1994.

In 1988, Westinghouse
moved the busway product
line to the Greenwood, SC,
manufacturing facility.
At that time, an improved
Alstan plating process was
implemented for silverplating the joint and contact
surfaces. In 1993, the
automated fluidized bed
process was changed to
Class B, 130°C, epoxy
insulation.

9

Cutler-Hammer Pow-RWay III® was introduced in
1997. As in the past, specific
customer needs have driven
the design of this product
line. High short-circuit ratings,
finger-safe protection at the
plug-in openings, integral
housing ground path, twopiece extruded aluminum
housing and an optional
200% neutral are just some
of the features with this
product line.

2
3
4
5
6
7

Product History Time Line
Product

1

8

1935 1940 1945 1950 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present

Power distribution bus

9

Victory bus duct
Standard plug-in

10

Low impedance bus
Life line Unibus

11

High frequency bus
Cutler-Hammer BV bus

12

Current limiting bus

13

Electric utility bus
DC busway

14

100 ampere busway
Low impedance plug-in

15

Cutler-Hammer Unibus
H5000 feeder

16

H5000 plug-in
Cutler-Hammer CP2

17

Pow-R-Way

18

Pow-R-Way II
Cutler-Hammer CP3

19

Cutler-Hammer CP4
Pow-R-Way III

20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T9-3

9
1
2

Busway (Low Voltage)
Replacement Capabilities—Plug-In Units

Replacement Capabilities

Vintage Busway Products

Plug-In Units

●

Replacement Capabilities
Busway Types

Bus

Adapter 1

Plugs

Power distribution bus

No

No

No

Victory bus duct

No

No

No

4

Standard plug-in

Yes

No

Yes

Low impedance bus

No

Yes

—

5

Life line Unibus

No

No

No

High frequency bus

No

No

No

6

Cutler-Hammer BV bus

No

No

No

Current limiting bus

No

Yes

—

3

7

Electric utility bus

No

No

No

DC busway

No

No

No

8

100 ampere busway

Yes

No

Yes

Low impedance plug-in

No

Yes

Yes

Cutler-Hammer Unibus

No

No

No

H5000 feeder

No

No

—

10

H5000 plug-in

No

No

Yes

Cutler-Hammer CP2

No

Yes

Yes 2

11

Pow-R-Way

Yes

No

Yes

Pow-R-Way II

Yes

No

Yes

Cutler-Hammer CP3

No

Yes

Yes 2

Cutler-Hammer CP4

No

Yes

Yes 2

Pow-R-Way III

Yes

—

Yes

9

12
13
14

Notes
1 Busway adapter (transposition) available from old line to Pow-R-Way III only.
2 Fusible units only. No breaker units available.

●

●

Replacement pieces or
additions to vintage CutlerHammer bus (CP2, CP3,
CP4) are being handled
whenever possible by
making transition to
Eaton’s current design
Pow-R-Way III bus
Obtain style number
and complete nameplate
information from existing
busway and contact your
local Eaton Field Sales
office for pricing and
availability
Plugs for vintage
Cutler-Hammer bus,
Pow-R-Way bus, and
Pow-R-Way III bus are
not interchangeable

Pow-R-Way Plug-In Unit
Stab base assembly for
breaker and fusible types.

Vintage Busway Plug-In Unit
Stab base assembly for
breaker and fusible types.

Top View

Bottom View

Fuse Base Assembly
For all busway.

30A Maximum
Top View

15

200A Maximum

16
17

Bottom View

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T9-4

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

9

Busway (Low Voltage)
Replacement Capabilities—Plug-In Units

Originally a Westinghouse Product
Breaker Plug-In Units
Reference Catalog Number for
Existing Complete Plug-In Unit 1

Replacement Stab
Base Assembly

Pow-R-Way
IBPFB

1

Fusible Plug-In Units
Reference Catalog Number
for Existing Complete Plug-In Unit 1

Replacement Stab
Base Assembly

Replacement
Fuse Base

2
3

Pow-R-Way
2528D04G01

ITAP321

2528D04G02

5009D52G01

IBPFBP

2528D04G01

ITAP361

2528D04G02

5009D52G13

IBPFCL

2528D04G01

ITAP322

2528D04G02

5009D52G03

IBPFD

2528D04G01

ITAP362

2528D04G02

5009D52G04

IBPJD

2528D04G12

ITAP323

2528D04G02

5009D52G05

IBPKB

2528D04G07

ITAP363

2528D04G02

5009D52G05

IBPKD

2554D03G06

ITAP324

767A373G02

2532D78G01

IBPLAP

2532D45G06

ITAP364

767A373G02

2532D78G01

IBPLB

2554D03G05

ITAP325

2554D03G03

627B426G02

IBPLCL

2554D03G03

ITAP365

2554D03G03

627B426G02

IBPMC

2537D17G03

ITAP326

2554D03G02

627B426G04

IBPNBP

2537D17G07

ITAP366

2554D03G02

627B426G04

4
5
6
7
8
9

Standard Plug-In and Low Impedance Busway 2

ITAP367

2554D03G01

2553D93G02

BPFB

2528D03G01

ITAP361H

2528D04G02

2535D92G09

BPFBP

2528D03G01

ITAP362H

2528D04G02

2535D92G10

BPFCL

2528D03G01

ITAP363H

2528D04G02

2535D92G11

BPFD

2528D03G01

ITAP364H

2568D13G09

2532D78G02

BPJD

2528D03G10

ITAP365H

2554D03G03

1205C02G02

BPKB

2528D03G07

ITAP366H

2554D03G02

2599D97G02

BPKD

2537D20G06

Standard Plug-In and Low Impedance Busway 2

12

BPLB

2537D20G05

TAP321

2528D03G02

5009D52G01

BPLCL

2537D20G01

TAP361

2528D03G02

5009D52G13

13

BPMC

374D017G03

TAP322

2528D03G02

5009D52G03

TAP362

2528D03G02

5009D52G04

TAP323

2528D03G02

5009D52G05

TAP363

2528D03G02

5009D52G05

TAP324

767A373G01

2532D78G01

TAP364

767A373G01

2532D78G01

TAP325

2537D20G04

627B426G02

TAP365

2537D20G04

627B426G02

TAP326

2584D73G01

627B426G04

TAP366

2584D73G01

627B426G02

TAP361H

2528D03G02

2535D92G09

TAP362H

2528D03G02

2535D92G10

TAP363H

2528D03G02

2535D92G11

TAP364H

767A373G01

2532D78G02

TAP365H

2537D20G04

1448D09G05

TAP366H

374D017G03

373D043G06

Notes
1 Check Vista for pricing and minimum order quantities.
2 Replacement stab base assembly and fuse base style numbers specified correspond to the
most recent design of the reference catalog number for the complete plug-in unit. For
verification that this style number is the correct replacement for your existing plug-in unit,
contact your local Eaton Field Sales office.

10
11

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T9-5

9
1

Busway (Low Voltage)
Replacement Capabilities—100 Ampere Busway

100 Ampere Busway

Fusible Plug-In Units
Voltage
Rating

Ampere
Rating

Fusible Enclosure
Catalog Number

Ground (If Required)
Catalog Number

240

30

FAN321

PIGS100

240

60

FAN322

PIGS100

3

240

100

FAN323

PIGS100

600

30

FAN361

PIGS100

4

600

60

FAN362

PIGS100

600

100

FAN363

PIGS100

2

5
Circuit Breaker Plug-In Units

6
7
8
9
10
11

Elbow, Busway and Cable Tap Box

100 Ampere Busway—Copper
(Includes 50% Internal Ground Bar)
Three-Phase,
Four-Wire FN
277/480V
Catalog Number

Single-Phase,
Three-Wire
120/240V
Catalog Number

10 ft (3048 mm)

CST13G

CST14G

CST13NG

5 ft (1524 mm)

CST135G

CST145G

CST13N5G

3 ft (914.4 mm)

CST133G

CST143G

CST13N3G

Description
Straight Lengths

2 ft (609.6 mm)

12

1 ft (304.8 mm)

CST132G
CST131G

CST142G

CST13N2G

CST141G

CST13N1G

Elbows

13

Forward

CFE13G

Rearward

CRE13G

CRE14G

CRE13NG

14

Upward

CUE13G

CUE14G

CUE13NG

Downward

CDE13G

CDE14G

CDE13NG

15

Tees
Forward

CFT13G

16

Rearward

CRT13G

CRT14G

CRT13NG

Upward

CUT13G

CUT14G

CUT13NG

17

Downward

CDT13G

CDT14G

CDT13NG

18

Ampere
Rating

QUICKLAG HQP

15–50

PINQP

LCNQP

PIGS100

HMQP

ED, EHD, FDB

15–100

PINFD

LCNFD

PIGS100

HMFD

Voltage
Rating

Three-Phase,
Three-Wire
600V Maximum
Catalog Number

CFE14G

CFE13NG

Ground
(If Required)
Catalog
Number

External Handle
(Required for
Hook-Stick
Operation)
Catalog
Number

Circuit
Breaker
Enclosure
Catalog
Number

Receptacle
Enclosure
Catalog
Number

Accessories
Item

Catalog Number

End closer

EC1

Outlet cover

OC1

Edgwise hanger

EH1

“C” clamp hanger

FH1

Slip-on wall flange

WF1

End Closers—EC1

Replacement Outlet
Cover—OC1

CL Joint

CFT14G

Outlet Cover

CFT13NG
4.00
(101.6)

Cable Tap Boxes

19

Description

Three-Wire or Four-Wire
Catalog Number

Ground (If Required)
Catalog Number

Plug-in

PIB14

PIGS100

20

End

EB14

GL100

Center

CBIB14G

(Included)

21
22
23
24
25
V12-T9-6

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

9

Busway (Low Voltage)
Replacement Capabilities—Standard Plug-In Busway

Standard Plug-In Busway

1

Originally a Westinghouse Product

2
3
4

Typical Standard Plug-In Straight Length

5

Catalog Numbers
Duct Only Includes One Hanger
per 10 Feet of Busway 1

Catalog Number
for 10-Feet Lengths 2

Ampere
Rating

Aluminum
Catalog Number

Fittings
(Price of Footage Through Each Fitting Must be Added)
Copper
Catalog Number

Universal Cable Tap
Box (Lugs Included) 3
Catalog Number

End Closer
Aluminum
Catalog Number

Copper
Catalog Number

6
7

Three-Phase, Three-Wire, 600V with 50% Ground Bus
225

AST302G

ST302G

UCTB302G

UEC10

UEC10

400

AST304G

ST304G

UCTB304G

UEC20

UEC15

600

AST306G

ST306G

UCTB306G

UEC35

UEC20

800

AST308G

ST308G

UCTB308G

UEC50

UEC30

1000

AST310G

ST310G

UCTB310G

UEC60

UEC40

8
9
10

Three-Phase, Four-Wire, Full Neutral, 277/480V with 50% Ground Bus
225

AST502G

ST502G

UCTB402G

UEC10

UEC10

400

AST504G

ST504G

UCTB404G

UEC20

UEC15

600

AST506G

ST506G

UCTB406G

UEC35

UEC20

800

AST508G

ST508G

UCTB408G

UEC50

UEC30

1000

AST510G

ST510G

UCTB410G

UEC60

UEC40

11
12
13

Cantilever Hangers
Ampere
Rating

Miscellaneous Accessories
Aluminum
Catalog Number

Copper
Catalog Number

Three-Phase, Three-Wire, 600V

14

Description
Wall/floor flange

15

Extra cantilever hangers

225

CLH10

CLH10

400

CLH20

CLH15

600

CLH35

CLH20

800

CLH50

CLH30

1000

CLH60

CLH40

Hookstick kit (8–14 feet)

HS8-14 4

16

Renewal Parts
Joint hardware–EXWK10

17

Access covers (two)
Splice plates (two)

Three-Phase, Four-Wire, Full Neutral, 277/480V
225

CLH10

CLH10

400

CLH20

CLH15

600

CLH35

CLH20

800

CLH50

CLH30

1000

CLH60

CLH40

Notes
1 When ordering from stock, all hangers must be shown as a separate item marked included
in price.
2 Suitable for horizontal mounting only. Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office for pricing
and lead times.
3 If UCTB is used on end of run, an end closer must also be used for that end.
4 Normally available from stock.

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T9-7

9
1
2

Busway (Low Voltage)
Replacement Capabilities—Standard and Low Impedance

Standard and Low Impedance

Circuit Breaker Selection and Interrupting Ratings

Originally a Westinghouse Product
Circuit Breaker Plug-In Units

Breaker
Frame

Ampere
Rating

Symmetrical Amperes
240 Vac

480 Vac

EHD

15–60

18,000

14,000

—

70–100

18,000

14,000

—

The enclosure, circuit
breaker, neutral and
ground are ordered and
shipped assembled.

3

Note: Breaker and fusible
plugs must be ordered as
assembled units. See V12-T9-10
for instructions on how to build
the assembled catalog numbers.

4
5
6

Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit (Closed)

7

Note: For units mounting at the
joint and feeder type ducts, see
bolt-on units—standard plug-in,
low impedance and H5000.

FDB

FD

HFD

FDC

8
9
10
11

JDB
Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit (Open)

JD

HJD

Catalog Numbers
Neutral (If Required) 1

12

Breaker
Frame

13

EHD, FDB,
FD, HFD, FDC
(15–150A)

Enclosure
Catalog
Standard Plug-In
Number
Catalog Number
BPFD 3

Low Impedance
Catalog Number

N110 (15–110A) 3
ZN110 (15–110A) 3
N250KB (125–150A) 3 ZN250KB (125–150A)

Ground
(If Required) 2
Catalog
Number

JDC

GS104 3

14

JDB, JD, HJD, BPJD 3
JDC (70–250A)

N250KB (125–250A) 3 ZN250KB (125–250A) 3 GS104 3

15

KDB, KD,
HKD, KDC
(125–400A)

N400 (250–400A) 3

BPKD

4

ZN400 (250–400A) 3

4

GS104 3

4

16

LDB, LD,
HLD, LDC
(300–600A)

BPLD

17

MC, HMC
(500–800A)

BPMD

N/A

4

4

NC, HNC
(900–1200A)

BPND

4

4

4

18
19
20

FB (TRI-PAC®) BPFBP
(15–100A)
LA (TRI-PAC)
(125–400A)
NB (TRI-PAC)
(500–800A)

21

N110 (15–100A) 3

ZN110 (15–100A)

GS104 3

BPLAP 5

N400 (125–400A) 3

ZN400 (125–400A) 3

GS104 3

BPNBP

4

4

GS104 3

600 Vac

15–60

18,000

14,000

14,000

70–100

18,000

14,000

14,000

110–150

18,000

14,000

14,000

15–60

65,000

25,000

18,000

70–100

65,000

25,000

18,000

110–150

65,000

25,000

18,000

15–60

100,000

65,000

25,000

70–100

100,000

65,000

25,000
25,000

110–150

100,000

65,000

15–60

200,000

100,000

50,000

70–100

200,000

100,000

50,000
50,000

110–150

200,000

100,000

70–225

65,000

25,000

18,000

250

65,000

25,000

18,000

70–225

65,000

25,000

18,000

250

65,000

25,000

18,000

70–225

100,000

65,000

25,000

250

100,000

65,000

25,000

70–225

200,000

100,000

50,000

250

200,000

100,000

50,000

KDB

250–400

65,000

35,000

25,000

KD

250–400

65,000

35,000

25,000

HKD

250–400

100,000

65,000

35,000

KDC

250–400

200,000

100,000

50,000

LDB

300–600

65,000

45,000

25,000

LD

300–600

65,000

45,000

25,000

HLD

300–600

100,000

65,000

35,000
50,000

LDC

300–600

200,000

100,000

MDL

400–800

65,000

50,000

25,000

HMDL

400–800

100,000

65,000

35,000

NP

400–1200

65,000

50,000

25,000

HND

400–1200

100,000

65,000

35,000

FB (TRI-PAC)

15–100

200,000

200,000

200,000

LA (TRI-PAC)

70–400

200,000

200,000

200,000

70–400

200,000

200,000

200,000

600–800

200,000

200,000

200,000

600–800

200,000

150,000

200,000

NB (TRI-PAC)

Notes
1 Full neutral. For half neutral, contact your local Eaton Field Sales office.
2 Not available for low impedance bus duct.
3 Normally available from stock.
4 Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office for delivery. Order by description on suffix BUS.
5 Obsolete; no longer available.

22
23
24
25
V12-T9-8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

9

Busway (Low Voltage)
Replacement Capabilities—Standard and Low Impedance

Originally a
Westinghouse Product
Fusible Plug-In Units
●
For standard plug-in and
low impedance plug-in
busway (not for use on
Pow-R-Way busway.
Not available for low
impedance bus duct)
●
Fuses not included
●
Mechanical lugs only
●
Plug-in unit, neutral and
ground can be ordered
separately and shipped
unassembled

Fusible Switch Horsepower Ratings
240V

480V

NEC®
Standard

Time
Delay

NEC
Standard

Time
Delay

NEC
Standard

Time
Delay

30

3

7-1/2

5

15

7-1/2

20

60

7-1/2

15

15

30

15

50

100

15

30

25

60

30

75

200

25

60

50

125

60

150

400

50

100

100

250

125

350

600

75

100

200

400

200

500

Special Industry Fusible
Plug-In Units
●
Special industry plugs
are I2t rated
●
Knockouts are not provided
●
Grounding lug included
on 200A and above
●
Lugs ordered and
shipped separately
●
Fuses are not included
●
If neutral or ground
assembly is required,
contact your local Eaton
Field Sales office

2
3
4
5
6

Fusible Plug-In Units 1
Neutral (If Required)

Fusible TAP

1

600V

Ampere
Rating

Ampere
Rating

600V
Catalog
Number

240V
Catalog
Number

Standard Plug-In
Catalog
Number

Low Impedance
Catalog
Number

Ground
(If Required)
Catalog
Number

30

TAP361 2

TAP321 2

N110 2

ZN110 2

60

TAP362 2

TAP322 2

N110 2

100

TAP363 2

TAP323 2

N110 2

200

TAP364 2

TAP324 2

N250KB 2

400

2

Class R Fuse Clips
(If Required)
600V
Catalog
Number

240V
Catalog
Number

GS104 12

RFK161 2

RFK121 2

ZN110 2

GS104 12

RFK262 2

RFK222 2

ZN110 2

GS104 12

RFK464 2

RFK464 2

ZN250KB

GS104 12

RFK464 2

RFK464 2

12

2

RFK666 2

2

GS104

TAP365

TAP325

N400

RFK666

600

TAP366

TAP326

N400 23

ZN400 2

4

RFK666 2

RFK666 2

800

5

5

—

4

—

—

—

If Required

8
9
10
11
12

Special Industry Fusible Plug-In Units
Three-Wire, 600V
Plug-In Unit

7

13

Terminal Kits for Industry Fusible Plug-In Units
Mechanical Lugs 2

Compression Lugs 2

Ampere
Rating

Catalog
Number

Neutral
Catalog
Number

Ground
Catalog
Number

Catalog
Number

Lugs Per
Phase

Wire
Size

Catalog
Number

Lugs Per
Phase

Wire
Size

30

TAP361H

6

6

MTK30SC

1

#14–#4

CTK30SC

1

#12–#10

60

TAP362H

6

6

MTK160SC

1

#14–1/0

CTK60SC

1

#8

100

TAP363H

6

6

MTK160SC

1

#14–1/0

CTK100SC

1

#4

200

TAP364H

6

6

MTK200SC

1

#6–350 kcmil

CTK200BSC

1

2/0

400

TAP365H

6

6

MTK400DPW

2

#2–4/0

CTK400SPW

1

750 kcmil

600

TAP366H

6

6

MTK600DFW

2

500 kcmil

CTK600DPM

2

500 kcmil

Catalog Number

600

GND36

15
16
17
18

Three-Wire—Ground Detector and Neutralizer Plug
Maximum Volts

14

19
20

Notes
1 Not available for low impedance bus duct.
2 Normally available from stock.
3 Only half neutral available. For full neutral, use a TAP366BO or TAP326BO unit.
4 Must be factory assembled. Order by description on suffix BUS.
5 Plug-in unit not available. Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office for bolt-on type.
6 Must be factory assembled. Order by description.

21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T9-9

9
1
2
3
4
5
6

Busway (Low Voltage)
Replacement Capabilities—Quick-Assembled Plugs

Quick-Assembled Plugs
The Mod Center in
Spartanburg, SC, will perform
the assembly of the bus
plugs in 3 days or less for
most orders. Bid Manager™
enables you to “build” the
appropriate catalog number.
When the order is entered
in Bid Manager, it will
automatically transfer the
order to suffix “QAP.”
Please see the following
rules for building the
assembled catalog number.

Catalog Numbering Selection
Quick-Assembled Plugs—Breaker Unit 12

P3B HFD 3 015 G N
Bus Style
P3B = PRWIII
IBP = PRW
BP = Old-line

Breaker Frame
(Example FD,
JDC, KDB)

Three-Pole
Only

Trip Rating
(Example 015,
060, 150, 400)

Ground Option
G = 50% internal
I = Isolated ground
(PRWIII only)

Neutral Options
N = 100% neutral
N2 = 200% neutral
(PRW III only)
ZN = Low Z
(old line only)

Quick-Assembled Plugs—Fusible Unit 234

7

P3F 3 6 4 R G N

8

Bus Style
P3F = PRWIII
ITAP = PRW
TAP = Old-line

9
10

Three-Pole Only

11
12

Voltage
6 = 600V
2 = 240V

Ampere
1 = 30
5 = 400
2 = 60
6 = 600
3 = 100
7 = 800
4 = 200

Fuse Clips
R or J ≤ 600A
T or L for 800A

Neutral Options
N = 100% neutral
N2 = 200% neutral
(PRW III only)
ZN = Low Z
(old line only)
Ground Options
G = 50%
I = Isolated (PRW III only)

Notes
1 Do not leave space between characters. Example: P3BHFD3015GN.
2 Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office for help in assigning a catalog number for a specific application.
3 Do not leave space between characters. Example: P3F264RGN.
4 “H” clips are standard for Pow-R-Way and vintage busway products unless specified by adding “R” or “J” in the catalog number.
Example: P3F264RGN, ITAP361JGN.

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T9-10

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

9

Busway (Low Voltage)
Replacement Capabilities—CP2, CP3 or CP4 SAFETYBUS Busway Plug-In Units

CP2, CP3 or CP4 SAFETYBUS Busway Plug-In Units

Circuit Breaker Selection and Interrupting Ratings 6

Originally a Westinghouse Product

Breaker
Frame

Ampere
Rating

Symmetrical Amperes

EHD

15–60

18,000

14,000

—

70–100

18,000

14,000

—

15–60

18,000

14,000

14,000

70–100

18,000

14,000

14,000

110–150

18,000

14,000

14,000

15–60

65,000

25,000

18,000

Bolt-On Units 1

Breaker
Frame

Ampere
Rating

Enclosure
Catalog
Number

Neutral 2
(If Required)
Catalog
Number

Ground 3
(If Required)
Catalog
Number

FDB

Circuit Breaker Bolt-On Units (Breaker Not Included)

240 Vac

480 Vac

EHD, FDB, FD
HFD, FDC

15–150

BPFDBO

4

4

JDB, JD, HJD,
JDC

125–250

BPJDBO

4

4

KDB, KD, HKD,
KDC

250–400

LDB, LD, HLD
LDC

300–600

BPLDBO

4

4

MDL, HMDL

400–800

BPMDBO

4

4

FB (TRI-PAC)

15–100

BPFBPBO

4

4

70–100

200,000

100,000

50,000

4

110–150

200,000

100,000

50,000

4

BPKDBO

4

LA (TRI-PAC)

125–400

BPLAPBO

4

NB (TRI-PAC)

500–800

BPNBPBO

4

4

FD

HFD

FDC

JDB

Fusible Bolt-On Units 5
240V

30

4

4

60

TAP322BO

4

4

100

TAP323BO

4

4

200

TAP324BO

4

4

400

TAP325BO

4

4

TAP326BO

4

4

600

600V

TAP321BO

JD

HJD

JDC

1

600 Vac

70–100

65,000

25,000

18,000

110–150

65,000

25,000

18,000

15–60

100,000

65,000

25,000

70–100

100,000

65,000

25,000

110–150

100,000

65,000

25,000

15–60

200,000

100,000

50,000

70–225

65,000

25,000

18,000

250

65,000

25,000

18,000

70–225

65,000

25,000

18,000

250

65,000

25,000

18,000

70–225

100,000

65,000

25,000

250

100,000

65,000

25,000

70–225

200,000

100,000

50,000

250

200,000

100,000

50,000

250–400

65,000

35,000

25,000

800

TAP327BO

4

4

KDB

30

TAP361BO

4

4

KD

250–400

65,000

35,000

25,000

250–400

100,000

65,000

35,000

60

TAP362BO

4

4

HKD

100

TAP363BO

4

4

KDC

250–400

200,000

100,000

50,000

4

LDB

300–600

65,000

45,000

25,000

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

200

TAP364BO

4

400

TAP365BO

4

4

LD

300–600

65,000

45,000

25,000

600

TAP366BO

4

4

HLD

300–600

100,000

65,000

35,000

800

TAP367BO

4

4

LDC

300–600

200,000

100,000

50,000

MDL

400–800

65,000

50,000

25,000

HMDL

400–800

100,000

65,000

35,000

NP

400–1200

65,000

50,000

25,000

HND

400–1200

100,000

65,000

35,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

FB (TRI-PAC) 15–100

2

15
16
17

LA (TRI-PAC) 70–400

200,000

200,000

200,000

70–400

200,000

200,000

200,000

NB (TRI-PAC) 600–800

200,000

200,000

200,000

600–800

200,000

150,000

200,000

Notes
1 Factory assembled. Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office for delivery and order entry
information. When ordering, you must specify:
1. Load left or load right.
2. Front or rear mounting.
3. Type of busway to which unit is to be mounted.
2 Full neutral. For half neutral, contact your local Eaton Field Sales office.
3 Not available for low impedance bus duct.
4 Order by description with bolt-on unit.
5 These bolt-on units include an adapter for mounting at the joint. They do not require a power
take-off unit.
6 Refer to the current Price and Availability Digest (PAD) for breaker list prices.

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T9-11

9
1

Busway (Low Voltage)
Replacement Capabilities—CP2, CP3 or CP4 SAFETYBUS Busway Plug-In Units

Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product
Fusible Switch Plug-In Units

2

Class R Fuse Clip Included

3

240V, Three-Phase, Three-Wire
30

7-1/2

CP4HD321

5

CP4HD421

4

60

15

CP4HD322

10

CP4HD422

100

30

CP4HD323

25

CP4HD423

5

200

60

CP4HD324

60

CP4HD424

400

100

CP4HD325

250

CP4HD425

6

600 4

100

CP4HD326

400

CP4HD426

Maximum hp Rating 1

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Maximum hp Rating 12

Catalog Number 3

120–208V, Three-Phase, Four-Wire

600V, Three-Phase, Three-Wire

277–480V, Three-Phase, Four-Wire

7

30

20

CP4HD361

15

CP4HD461

60

50

CP4HD362

30

CP4HD462

8

100

75

CP4HD363

60

CP4HD463

200

100

CP4HD364

100

CP4HD464

400

350

CP4HD365

250

CP4HD465

600 4

500

CP4HD366

400

CP4HD466

9
10

Plug-In Cable Tap Boxes—Plug Into CP2, CP3 or CP4 Busway 5—600A and 800A Sizes Also Have Bolt-On Clips

11
12

Approximate Dimensions in Inches
Volts
Three-phase, three-wire
600V maximum

13
14
15
16
17
18

Three-phase, four-wire
120/208V or 277/480V
100% neutral

Mounting Clearance

Ampere
Rating

Wide

High

Deep

Top

Front

Conduit
Sizes

Load Lugs
Each Phase

Catalog
Number

225

15.50

8.10

6.90

6.30

10.50

1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3

(1) #6–300 kcmil Al/Cu

CP2SB34

400

22.30

8.10

7.90

7.00

11.30

1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3

(1) #1/0–750 kcmil Al/Cu 6

CP2SB35

600

37.20

15.80

11.70

12.50

16.80

1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3

(2) #2–600 kcmil Al/Cu

CP2SB36 4

800

37.20

15.80

11.70

12.50

16.80

1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3

(3) #2–600 kcmil Al/Cu

CP2SB37 4

225

15.50

8.10

6.90

6.30

10.50

1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3

(1) #6–300 kcmil Al/Cu

CP2SB44
6

400

22.30

8.10

7.90

7.00

11.30

1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3

(1) #1/0–750 kcmil Al/Cu

600

37.20

15.80

11.70

12.50

16.80

1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3

(2) #2–600 kcmil Al/Cu

CP2SB46 4

800

37.20

15.80

11.70

12.50

16.80

1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3

(3) #2–600 kcmil Al/Cu

CP2SB47 4

CP2SB45

Notes
1 Maximum hp ratings apply when time delay fuses are used.
2 120–208V hp ratings are based on 200V motor usage.
3 All units ship as three-phase, four-wire plugs.
4 Requires two adjacent plug-in outlets that do not span a busway joint.
5 For ground stab to engage internal ground bus, add suffix “G” to catalog number.
6 Also accepts (2) #1–300 kcmil Al/Cu.

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T9-12

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

9

Busway (Low Voltage)
Replacement Capabilities—CP2, CP3 or CP4 SAFETYBUS Busway Plug-In Units

Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product
Approximate Dimensions

1

Required Mounting Clearances

2

Typical Side and Front

E

Edge of
Busway

44° Ref.

C

.34

3

A

4

ON

5
B

6

OFF

7

Plug-in
Busway

8

D

F

9

Plug-In Units—May be Used with Either CP2, CP3 or CP4 Plug-In Busway Sections—Fusible Switch Type
Frame
or Type

Maximum
Ampere
Rating

A

B

C

D

E

F

Conduit Sizes
Top, Bottom and Side

Wire Size Range
Al/Cu

CP4HD

30

19.30

11.50

8.80

5.20

7.00

9.00

1/2, 3/4, 1, 1-1/4, 1-1/2, 2

(1) #14–2

60

19.30

11.50

8.80

5.20

7.00

9.00

1/2, 3/4, 1, 1-1/4, 1-1/2, 2

(1) #14–2

100

19.30

11.50

8.80

5.20

7.00

9.00

1/2, 3/4, 1, 1-1/4, 1-1/2, 2

(1) #14–1/0

200

23.00

16.50

9.20

6.00

7.50

13.30

1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3

(1) #6–300 kcmil

CP4HD

Dimensions in Inches

10
11
12

12

45.60

24.30

15.80

13.10

14.00

20.50

1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3

(1) #1/0–300 kcmil or (1) 750 kcmil

600 12

45.60

24.30

15.80

13.10

14.00

20.50

1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3

(2) #2–600 kcmil

400

13
14

Notes
1 Provided with busway bolt-on clip and straps for 0.50-inch hanger rods.
2 Unit extends 10.50 inches below busway.

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T9-13

9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Busway (Low Voltage)
Technology Upgrades—Clipper Power Systems (TVSS)

Technology Upgrades
Clipper Power Systems,
Busway TVSS Protection
The low voltage busway
aftermarket product offering
includes transient voltage
surge suppression (TVSS),
which is ideal for busway fed
distribution systems. Eaton
has developed the Clipper
Power System (CPS) family
of products to ensure that
the quality power required
to maximize productivity
in today’s competitive
environment is supplied
to commercial, industrial,
medical and institutional
facilities. Without power

protection devices,
microprocessors and
electronic-based loads are
not provided with the noise
and disturbance-free power
that they require. Because
microprocessor-based loads
are now common in every
facility, engineers must
ensure the AC power supply
is properly filtered. The CPS
busway family of products
consists of TVSS and filter
components (TVSS filter)
integrated into a bus plug
with a fusible disconnect.
TVSS bus plugs are available
for the following types of
plug-in busway:

12
13

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Westinghouse
standard plug-in
Westinghouse low
impedance plug-in
Westinghouse
H5000 plug-in
Cutler-Hammer
CP2 plug-in
Cutler-Hammer
CP3 plug-in
Cutler-Hammer
CP4 plug-in
Westinghouse
Pow-R-Way
Westinghouse
Pow-R-Way II
Cutler-Hammer
Pow-R-Way III

Significant performance
advantages are achieved
by integrating TVSS filters
into busway systems.
Because the TVSS unit is
directly connected to the
busway, the CPS minimizes
let-through voltage. This is a
significant performance
advantage compared to
cable-connected TVSS
solutions. Due to the
integrated design, the
CPS bus plug also saves
the user wall space and
greatly reduces the installed
project cost.

Catalog Numbering Selection
Visor Series Bus Plug

10
11

●

P3BCPS 250 480Y S A
Bus Style
P3BCPS = Pow-R-Way
TAPCPS = Std. plug-in
ZTAPCPS = Low impedance
HTAPCPS = H5000
CP4CPS = CP2/CP3/CP4
ITAPCPS = Pow-R-Way

14
15

Surge Rating
(kA/Phase)
100 = 100
120 = 120
160 = 160
200 = 200
250 = 250
300 = 300
400 = 400
500 = 500

Voltage
Code
Three-phase
wye (4W+G)
Three-phase
delta (4W+G)

Voltage Requirements
120/208 230/400 277/480 347/600
240V
400V
480V
600V
208Y
400Y
480Y
600Y
240D

—

480D

600D

Diagnostics Package
A = AdVisor complete with status indicator lights on each
phase. Form C. Audible Alarm—Enable/Disable
S = SuperVisor complete with status indicator lights
on each phase, 1-Form C. Audible Alarm—
Enable/Disable, Transient Counter, Push-to-Teat.
PQ Meter (no date stamp)
N = NetVisor complete with status indicator lights on
each phase. Form C. Audible Alarm—Enable/Disable,
Transient Counter, Push to Test, PQ Meter (no date
stamp). Modbus® and Ethernet Communications
Port, % Life Remaining, % Voltage THD

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T9-14

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

9

Busway (Low Voltage)
Technology Upgrades—Submetering—IQ Energy Sentinel

IQ Energy Sentinel
for Bus Plugs

Bus Plug with Energy Sentinel

Customer Required Information
If Originally a
Westinghouse Product
1. Style number or shop
order number from
existing busway
nameplate and complete
nameplate information.
2. Height and width
dimensions of housing
from existing busway.
3. Order by style number
on suffix Q77.
If Originally a
Cutler-Hammer Product
1. Check Vista for pricing.
2. Order by catalog number
on suffix Q73.
The Cutler-Hammer IQ Energy
Sentinel™ was designed
as part of the PowerNet™
system and is a highly
accurate, microprocessorbased submeter that monitors
power and energy. It offers
a centralized alternative
to individually mounted
wattmeters, watthour meters
and watt demand meters.

Key advantages include
unmatched savings in space,
lower installation costs, and
the capability to communicate
data readings in a variety of
ways. IQ Energy Sentinels
with built-in current
transformers (CTs) and
communications have the
added benefit of overall
system accuracy. The IQ
Energy Sentinel mounts on
the load side of CutlerHammer F, J and K breakers
within the bus-plug enclosure.

Further Information

The IQ Energy Sentinel is
also available with a universal
mounting that uses external
CTs and is offered for fusible
bus plug applications.
Sub-metering application
examples for the IQ Energy
Sentinel include energy
monitoring and demand
management, energy cost
analysis/allocation, and
tenant or interdepartmental
billing. To accomplish the
communications system,
the customer must provide
a twisted pair communication
cable in 1/2-inch conduit
between the IQ Energy
Sentinel bus plug and a
Cutler-Hammer Central
Energy Display, or customer
computer to display the
information. IQ Energy
Sentinel bus plugs are
available for Pow-R-Way,
Pow-R-Way II and
Pow-R-Way III busway.

Note: Additional information may be required for manufacturing.

Publication
Number

Description

AD 30-560

Application Data for Pow-R-Way

AD 30-560

Application Data for Pow-R-Way II

TD01701001E

Technical Data for Pow-R-Way III

TD01701002E

Technical Data for 100 Ampere Busway

1
2
3
4

Pricing Information

5

Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount Symbols CE3 and CE4
Note: Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office.

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T9-15

IQ Products
Power Management Products

10 IQ Products
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information
Metering Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protective Relay Selection Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technology Upgrades
Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Xpert 2000 Series Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ 250/260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ 130/140/150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ 150S/250S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Products
IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ DP-4000/4100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ Energy Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MP-3000 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FP-5000 Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digitrip 3000 (DT-3000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories
IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ 250-PMAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ Floor-Mounted Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Addressable Relay II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement
IQ 2000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ Analyzer 6000/6200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RTD Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ 1000 and IQ 1000 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ Data Plus and IQ Data Plus II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ 210/220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ 110/115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ Power Sentinel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V12-T10-2
V12-T10-3

1

V12-T10-3

2

V12-T10-4

3

V12-T10-12

4

V12-T10-15

5

V12-T10-17
V12-T10-18
V12-T10-19
V12-T10-20
V12-T10-21
V12-T10-22

6
7

V12-T10-23

8

V12-T10-24

9

V12-T10-25
V12-T10-26
V12-T10-27
V12-T10-28
V12-T10-29

10
11

V12-T10-30

12

V12-T10-31

13

V12-T10-31
V12-T10-31
V12-T10-31
V12-T10-31
V12-T10-32
V12-T10-32

14
15
16

V12-T10-33

17

V12-T10-36

18

V12-T10-36
V12-T10-36
V12-T10-37
V12-T10-37
V12-T10-37
V12-T10-38
V12-T10-38
V12-T10-39
V12-T10-40
V12-T10-41
V12-T10-42
V12-T10-43
V12-T10-43

19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-1

10
1

IQ Products

Electronic Metering and Protection
Product Description

2

Eaton’s electrical business IQ Metering and Protection group
of Cutler-Hammer® series products are multifunctional
communicating products based on microprocessor technology.
They are designed to replace existing electromechanical devices
and can be applied at low, medium and high voltage points in
the electrical distribution system. These devices offer
communications capabilities to link electrical distribution
equipment to Eaton’s PowerNet™ Power Management
Software.

3
4
5
6

Power Management Products

7
8

These products generally surpass capabilities available with
older analog/electromechanical technologies. Depending on
the features available from each device, information from these
devices may be used to record and analyze power system and
power quality events or problems and may improve power
systems protection and coordination. With communications,
these devices may be used for energy monitoring and
management with trended data for use in future power
system planning.

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T10-2

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

10

IQ Products

Product History
Originally a
Westinghouse Product
In the early 1980s, power
metering and protective
relaying functions were
performed by electromechanical devices. Analog
meters and induction disk
protective relays were found
on virtually every switchgear
lineup manufactured up to
that time. With the maturing
of solid-state electronics,
microprocessor-based
replacements for the electromechanical devices became
available. These new devices
provided increased
functionality and flexibility,
in a smaller space, for less
cost. Westinghouse led the
movement toward electronic
metering and protection
devices with the introduction
of the IQ 2000 motor
protection and control
relay. In 1987, the IQ 2000
functions were split and
two new products were
introduced—the IQ 1000
and the IQ Data Plus. The
IQ 1000 provided all current
monitoring and motor
protection functions and
was developed for use on
AMPGARD® medium voltage
starters and low voltage motor
control assemblies. The IQ
Data Plus provided complete
electrical metering and
system voltage protection,
and was developed for use
on low and medium voltage
switchgear, as well as
AMPGARD and low voltage
motor control assemblies.

The latest next generation
addition to metering is the
Power Xpert® Meter product
series. The Power Xpert
Meter power quality
instrument monitors critical
aspects of an electrical
distribution system. This
premier power quality
metering instrument uses the
latest in advanced technology
to make it simple to use,
powerful, scalable and highly
flexible. Power Xpert Meters
offer a new level of intuitive
user interface design,
presenting critical electrical
distribution system information
in a simple-to-navigate
and easy-to-understand
information architecture.
The Power Xpert Meter’s
4000/6000/8000 graphic
display visualizes the
information from up to 16
Power Xpert PQ instruments.
The embedded Web server
displays complex power
quality data using standard
Internet browsers and allows
for device configuration from
the browser. Both the local
graphic display and the
embedded Web server
present real time, historical
and event information in a
browser-style graphical format
to help the user interpret key
circuit information such as
current loading, voltage and
power levels, power factor,
energy usage, I/O status and
power quality measurements,
as well as harmonic plots,
disturbance and transient
waveforms, and an ITIC
disturbance summary screen.
The Power Xpert 2000 Series
Meter offers the same level
of intuitive user interface
design as the Power Xpert
4000/6000/8000 Meter with
its embedded Web server
to provide data logging and
e-mail and the ability to
visualize steady-state harmonic
content as well as waveform
recording that is critical for
power quality analysis.
Since then, the IQ Metering
and Protection product
family has grown to include
additional products for both
metering and protective
functions.

The IQ 250 and IQ 260
meters provide revenue
grade accuracy with standard
Modbus® communications
and optional I/O capability.
The IQ 130/140/150 meters
provide basic monitoring and
energy metering for feeder
applications and optional
Modbus communications.

The IQ DP-4000 and the IQ
AnaIyzer provide advanced
metering functions including
the ability to monitor power
quality parameters. IQ Energy
Sentinels provide a low cost
method to monitor energy
usage for individual feeders
or loads.
The Power Xpert Multi-Point
Meter provides cost-effective
and space-saving energy
submetering for a wide
variety of applications.

The IQ 35M provides energy
monitoring at the panelboard
level as well as retrofit
applications.

The MP-3000 added
increased motor protection
capability. The FP-5000,
introduced in 2001, provides
overcurrent protection for
distribution feeders.

The IQ 150S/250S provides
wireless energy metering.
The enclosed metering
offering adds flexibility in
monitoring with Eaton’s
latest line of meters where
metering is needed.

Product

V12-T10-36

IQ 2000 Model (A)

V12-T10-36

IQ 2000 Model (B)

V12-T10-37

IQ 1000

V12-T10-37

IQ 1000 II

V12-T10-28

MP-3000

V12-T10-37

IQ Data Plus

V12-T10-37

IQ Data Plus II

V12-T10-25

1980

1990

1995

2000

2005

2010

IQ Generator

IQ Energy Sentinel
(Breaker Mount)
IQ Energy Sentinel
(Universal Mount)

15
16

Digitrip MV
V12-T10-30

17

DT-3000
CED
CED II

V12-T10-24

IQ Analyzer

V12-T10-36

IQ Analyzer 6000/6200

V12-T10-24

IQ Analyzer 6400/6600

V12-T10-15

Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000

V12-T10-17

Power Xpert 2000

V12-T10-29

FP-5000

V12-T10-19

IQ 250/260

V12-T10-27

IQ 230

V12-T10-38

IQ 300

18
19
20
21

IQ Multipoint Energy
Submeter
V12-T10-42

IQ Multipoint Energy
Submeter II

V12-T10-40

IQ 110/115

V12-T10-41

IQ Power Sentinel

V12-T10-39

IQ 210/220

V12-T10-20

IQ 130/140/150

V12-T10-21

IQ 150S/250S

V12-T10-22

IQ 35M

V12-T10-23

Enclosed Meters

8

14

AR (Addressable Relay)

V12-T10-26

7

13

IQ Data

V12-T10-26

6

12

IQ 500

ARII (Addressable Relay II)

5

11

IQ DP-4000

V12-T10-32

4

Present

AEM II

V12-T10-38

3

10
1985

AEM

V12-T10-37

2

9

Product History Time Line
Page

1

22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-3

10
1
2

IQ Products
General Information

Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Device Name
Accessories
See Page V12-T10-31

Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series

Power Xpert 2000

IQ 250/260 Series

Section Page Number

V12-T10-15

V12-T10-17

V12-T10-19

3
4
5

Electrical Parameters
Volts

0.1% of RV + 0.02% FS

0.1% of RV

0.1% of RV

6

Amperes

0.05% of RV + 0.01% FS

0.1% of RV

0.1% of RV

Current range (% of nominal)

0.005–20A (400%)

0.1–200%

0.1–200%

7

Watts

0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS

0.2% of RV

0.2% of RV

VARs

0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS

0.2% of RV

0.2% of RV

8

VA

0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS

0.2% of RV

0.2% of RV

PF-apparent

0.1%

0.2% of RV

0.2% of RV

9

PF-displacement

0.1%

—

—

Frequency

±0.01 Hz

±0.03 Hz

10
11
12
13

THD-voltage

127th

THD-current

127th

40th

2345

±0.03 Hz
40th 6
40th 6

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class

1

VAR-hours

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class

1

VA-hours

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1

Ampere-demand

0.05% of RV + 0.01% FS

±0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class

±0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class

Watt-demand

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1

VAR-demand

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1

1

1

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1

Watthours

VA-demand

14

40th

2345

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class

Class 1

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class

1

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class

1

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1
±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class

Revenue accuracy

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2

ANSI C12.20 (0.2%)

ANSI C12.20 (0.2%)

Individual ampere harmonics

85th 7

40th 345

—

15

Individual voltage harmonics

85th 7

40th 345

—

Interharmonics

Yes

—

—

16

Minimum and/or Maximum Values
Volts

L-L, L-N, N-G, VAUX L-L

L-L, L-N

L-L, L-N

17

Current

A, B, C, N, G

A, B, C, N

A, B, C

Power

Watt, VAR, VA

Watt, VAR, VA

Watt, VAR, VA

18

Power Factor

Apparent/displacement

Apparent

Apparent

Frequency

Hertz

Hertz

Hertz

19

THD

Amperes/volts (L-L, L-N, AUX L-L)

Amperes/volts 2345

Amperes/volts 6

Demand values

kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes

kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes

kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes

20

Trend analysis

2 / 4 8 / 8 9 GB

256 / 512 2 / 768 345 MB

128 KB j

21
22
23
24

Event logging

2 / 4 8 / 8 9 GB

100,000 alarms/events with timestamp

k

Disturbance recording

2 / 4 8 / 8 9 GB
60 cycles per event

768 MB 45
up to 64 cycles per event 45

—

Notes
1 Under typical operating conditions.
2 PXM 2260 only.
3 PXM 2270 only.
4 PXM 2280 only.
5 PXM 2290 only.
6 IQ 260 only.

7

8
9
j
k

Individual values reported to 85th
harmonic; anti-alias filtering prevents
higher frequencies from distorting
readings (see IEC 61000-4-7).
PMX 6000 only.
PXM 8000 only.
Optional.
At computer only.

Legend: PG = Programmable
FS
= Full scale
RV
= Read value
Auxiliary voltage
(optional)
= Provides three additional voltage inputs to the
meter: Va2, Vb2, Vc2.
Interharmonics = Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000 supported.

25
V12-T10-4

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products
General Information

10

Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm), continued
Device Name
Accessories
See Page V12-T10-31

Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series

Power Xpert 2000

1

IQ 250/260 Series

2
3

Section Page Number

4

V12-T10-15

V12-T10-17

V12-T10-19

Storage

2 / 4 1 / 8 2 GB

256 / 512 3 / 768 4 MB Standard

128 KB for logging, up to 8 parameters every 15
minutes for 30 days

PG output relays

5 maximum

Optional (2) Form C, 5A or (4) Form A, 120 mA

Optional (2) Form C, 5A or (4) Form A, 120 mA

Other Features

PG analog outputs

—

Optional (4) 4–20 mA or (4) 0–1 mA

Optional (4) 4–20 mA or (4) 0–1 mA

Discrete contact inputs

8

Optional (2) or (4)

Optional (2) or (4)

Analog inputs

—

—

—

Synch-input kW utility

Via status input

Via end of interval pulse with optional digital inputs

Via end of interval pulse with optional digital
inputs

Auxiliary voltage 5

Yes

—

—

kWh pulse initiator

Yes

Yes

Yes

Waveform display

Local/computer

6

—

Waveform capture, samples/cycle

Yes, 512 (4096 oversampling)

Yes, up to 64 7, up to 512 8

—

Frequency distribution display

—

—

—

Display type

LCD 9

Red LED

Red LED

5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Display lines/character

Graphic (320 x 240 pixels)

3 lines, 4 characters

3 lines, 4 characters

Display character height

5.5 mm H x 4 mm W

0.56 (14.2) H

0.56 (14.2) H

Communications

Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII
Network: Modbus TCP, Ethernet TCP/IP,
HTTP, SNMP, SMTP, FTP, DNP 3.0 9

Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0
Network: Modbus TCP, BACnet/IP, Ethernet TCP/IP,
HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, SMTP

Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0
Network: Modbus TCP via Power Xpert Gateway

13
14

Setup configuration

Via Web browser/display

Via Web browser/display

Via configuration software/display

Dimensions

Refer to TD02601007E

Refer to TD02601017E

Refer to TD02601016E

Operating temperature range

–20° to 60°C display unit
–20° to 70°C meter base unit

–20° to 70°C

–20° to 70°C

Reference literature

TD02601007E

TD02601017E

TD02601016E

Notes
1 PXM 6000 only.
2 PXM 8000 only.
3 PXM 2260 only.
4 PXM 2270 only.
5 The auxiliary voltage option adds three additional voltage
input channels to Power Xpert Meters.
6 At computer only.
7 PXM 2280 only.
8 PXM 2290 only.
9 Optional.

12

15

Legend: PG = Programmable
FS
= Full scale
RV
= Read value
Auxiliary voltage
(optional)
= Provides three additional voltage inputs to the
meter: Va2, Vb2, Vc2.
Interharmonics = Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000 supported.

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-5

10
1
2

IQ Products
General Information

Metering Selection Chart, continued
Device Name
Accessories
See Page V12-T10-31

IQ 130/140/150 Series

IQ 150S/250S Series

IQ 35M Series

Section Page Number

V12-T10-20

V12-T10-21

V12-T10-22

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Electrical Parameters
Volts

±0.25% of RV

0.1% of RV

0.4% +0.015% per °C deviation from 25°C

Amperes

±0.25% of RV

0.1% of RV

0.4% (5–100%), 0.8% (1–5%) +0.015% per °C from 25°C

Current range (% of nominal)

0.1–200%

0.1–200%

1–120%

Watts

0.5% of RV 1

0.2% of RV

0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S

VARs

0.5% of RV 1

0.2% of RV

2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2

VA

0.5% of RV 1

0.2% of RV

Calculated: vector sum of watts and VARs

PF-apparent

0.5% of RV 1

0.2% of RV

Calculated: Watts / VAs

PF-displacement

—

—

—

Frequency

±0.03% Hz 1

±0.03 Hz

±0.02 Hz

THD-voltage

—

—

—

THD-current

—

—

—

Watthours

±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class

0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S

2

11

Varhours

±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class

±2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2

VA-hours

±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class

—

12

Ampere-demand

±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2

±0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class

—

Watt-demand

±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class

0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22
Class 0.5S

VAR-demand

±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class

2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2

VA-demand

±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2

±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class

Calculated: vector sum of watts and VARs

Revenue accuracy

ANSI C12.20 (0.5%)

ANSI C12.20 (0.2%)

0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S

Individual ampere harmonics

—

—

—

Individual voltage harmonics

—

—

—

Interharmonics

—

—

—

13
14
15
16

Minimum and/or Maximum Values
Volts

L-L, L-N

L-L, L-N

—

17

Current

A, B, C

A, B, C

—

Power

Watt, VAR, VA

Watt, VAR, VA

—

18

Power factor

Apparent 1

Apparent

Apparent (low alert)

Frequency

Hertz 1

Hertz

Hertz (out of range alert)

19

THD

Ampere/Volts

—

—

Demand values

kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes 1

kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes

kW, kVAR, kVA; Maximum kW, kVAR, kVA

20

Trend analysis

3

2 MB 5

—

Event logging

3

2 MB 5

Logging on demand interval or Modbus command 4

Disturbance recording

—

—

—

21
22
23

Notes
1 IQ 140 and IQ 150.
2 IQ 150 only.
3 At computer only.
4 Optional.
5 IQ 250S only.

Legend: PG
FS
RV

= Programmable
= Full scale
= Read value

24
25
V12-T10-6

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products
General Information

10

Metering Selection Chart, continued
Device Name
Accessories
See Page V12-T10-31

IQ 130/140/150 Series

IQ 150S/250S Series

1

IQ 35M Series

2
3
V12-T10-20

V12-T10-21

V12-T10-22

4

Storage

—

2 MB 2

10 registers (16 bit) by 5760 entries each (115 KB) 1

5

PG output relays

—

—

—

PG analog outputs

—

—

—

Discrete contact inputs

—

—

2 pulse inputs with BACnet

Analog inputs

—

—

—

Synch-input kW Utility

—

—

Optional demand synchronization via Modbus

Auxiliary voltage 3

—

—

—

kWh pulse initiator

1

Yes

Yes

Section Page Number
Other Features

Waveform display

—

—

—

Waveform capture

—

—

—

Frequency distribution display

—

—

—

Display type

Red LED

Red LED

Backlit LCD

6
7
9
10

Display lines/character

3 lines, 4 characters

3 lines, 4 characters

2 lines by 5 characters each (full alphanumeric top row)

Display character height

0.56 (14.2) H

0.56 (14.2) H

7.5 mm

Communications

Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII 1
Network: Modbus TCP 1

Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0
Network: Modbus TCP, wired or wireless

Serial: Modbus RTU 1, BACnet MS/TP 1
Network: Modbus TCP via Power Xpert Gateway

Setup configuration

Via configuration software/display

Via configuration software/display

Via display/configuration software

Dimensions

4.85 (123.2) H x 4.85 (123.2) W x 4.97 (126.2) D

7.90 (200.7) H x 7.50 (190.5) W x 3.10 (78.7) D

3.60 (91.4) H x 4.20 (106.7) W x 2.30 (58.4) D

Operating temperature range

–20 to 70°C

–20 to 70°C

–20 to 70°C

Reference literature

TD02601015E

TD02601019E

TD02601015E

Notes
1 Optional.
2 IQ 250S only.
3 The auxiliary voltage option adds three additional voltage input channels to
Power Xpert Meters.

Legend: PG
FS
RV

8

11
12
13
14

= Programmable
= Full scale
= Read value

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-7

10
1
2

IQ Products
General Information

Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm), continued
Device Name
Accessories
See Page V12-T10-31

IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Series

IQ DP-4000 Series

IQ 230 Series

Section Page Number

V12-T10-24

V12-T10-25

V12-T10-27

3
4
5

Electrical Parameters
Volts

±0.2% FS 1

±0.3% FS

±0.5% FS

6

Amperes

±0.2% FS 1

±0.3% FS

±0.5% FS

Current range (% of nominal)

3–800%

10–250%

1–200%

7

Watts

0.4% FS, 6 RV 2

±0.6% FS

±1.0% FS

VARs

0.4% FS, 6 RV 3

±0.6% FS

±1.0% FS

8

VA

0.4% FS, 6 RV 2

±0.6% FS

±1.0% FS

PF-apparent

0.8% FS 1

±1.0% FS

±2.0% FS

9

PF-displacement

0.8% FS 1

±1.0% FS

±2.0% FS

±0.17% FS

±0.1% Hz

10
11
12
13
14
15
16

1

Frequency

0.04%

THD-voltage

50th

31st

—

THD-current

50th

31st

—

Watthours

0.5% RV 2

±0.6% FS

±1.0% per ANSI C12

Varhours

1% RV 3

±0.6% FS

±1.0% per ANSI C12

VA-hours

0.5% RV 2

±0.6% FS

±1.0% per ANSI C12

Ampere-demand

±0.2% FS 1

±0.3%

±0.5% per ANSI C12

Watt-demand

±0.4% FS 1

±0.6%

±1.0% per ANSI C12

VAR-demand

±0.4% FS

1

±0.6%

±1.0% per ANSI C12

VA-demand

±0.4% FS 1

±0.6%

±1.0% per ANSI C12

Revenue accuracy

ANSI C12.20 (0.5%)

—

ANSI C12.1 (1%)

Individual ampere harmonics

50th

—

—

Individual voltage harmonics

50th

—

—

Interharmonics

—

—

—

L-L, L-N

L-L, L-N

or 0.01 Hz

Minimum and/or Maximum Values
Volts

L-L, L-N

17

Current

A, B, C, N, G

A, B, C

A, B, C

Power

Watt, VAR, VA

Watt, VAR, VA

Watt, VAR, VA

18

Power factor

Apparent/displacement

Apparent/displacement

Apparent/displacement

Frequency

Hertz

Hertz

Hertz

19

THD

Amperes/volts

Amperes/volts

—

Demand values

All

All

All

20

Trend analysis

Time/date

2 alarms

4

Event logging

504 events w/timestamp

4

4

21

Disturbance recording

10 waveform events

—

22
23

Notes
1 From 3–300% of FS.
2 At unity power factory and 5–300% of FS.
3 At a power factor <±0.5 and 5–300% of FS.
4 At computer only.

—

Legend: PG
FS
RV

= Programmable
= Full scale
= Read value

24
25
V12-T10-8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products
General Information

10

Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm), continued
Device Name
Accessories
See Page V12-T10-31

IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Series

IQ DP-4000 Series

1

IQ 230 Series

2
3

Section Page Number

V12-T10-24

V12-T10-25

V12-T10-27

Storage

90 KB

15 parameters

—

PG output relays

(4) 10A Form C 1

(3) 10A Form C 2

(2) 100 mA Form A

PG analog outputs

(4) 0–10/4–20 mA

—

—

Discrete contact inputs

(3) + 30 Vdc differential

(1) kW Demand 2

(2) +30 Vdc differential

Analog inputs

(1) 0–20/4–20 mA

—

(1) 4–20 mA

4
5

Other Features

Synch-input kW Utility

At device or via communications

At device or via communications 2

Via communications only

Auxiliary voltage

—

—

—

kWh pulse initiator

Yes

Yes 2

Yes

—

—

Waveform display

Local

2/computer

6
7
8
9

Waveform capture, samples/cycle

Yes, 128

—

—

Frequency distribution display

Local 2/computer

—

—

Display type

Graphic LCD with LED backlight

7 Segment LED

Backlit LCD

Display lines/character

7 lines, 147 characters

1 line, 7 characters

4 lines, 20 characters

Display character height

Up to 7 lines

1 line

1.60 (40.6) H x.09 (2.3) W

Communications

Serial: INCOM 3
Network: via Power Xpert Gateway 3

Serial: INCOM 3
Network: via Power Xpert Gateway 3

Serial: INCOM, Modbus RTU 4
Network: via Power Xpert Gateway

Setup configuration

Via configuration software/display

Via configuration software/display

Via configuration software/display

Dimensions

Refer to TD1702BTE

Refer to TD1703ATE

Refer to TD1706ATE

Operating temperature range

–20° to 70°C

–20° to 70°C

0° to 50°C

Reference literature

TD1702BTE

TD1703ATE

TD1706ATE

Notes
1 Relays programmable to operate on any measured function.
2 Optional.
3 An IPONI is required.
4 IQ 230M only.

Legend: PG
FS
RV

10
11
12
13
14
15

= Programmable
= Full scale
= Read value

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-9

10
1
2

IQ Products
General Information

Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm), continued
Device Name
Accessories
See Page V12-T10-31

Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter

IQ Energy Sentinel

Section Page Number

V12-T10-18

V12-T10-26

3
4
5

Electrical Parameters
Volts

±0.2% RV

—

6

Amperes

±0.2% RV

—

Current range (% of nominal)

—

—

7

Watts

±0.5% RV

±1.0% FS

VARs

±0.5% RV

—

8

VA

±0.5% RV

—

9
10
11

PF-apparent

±0.5% RV

—

PF-displacement

—

—

Frequency

±0.1 Hz

—

THD-voltage

—

—

THD-current

—

—

Watthours

±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class

±1.0% FS

VAR-hours

±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class

—

VA-hours

±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class

—

12

Ampere-demand

—

—

Watt-demand

±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class

±1.0% FS

13

VAR-demand

±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class

—

VA-demand

±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class

—

14

Revenue accuracy

ANSI C12.20 (0.5%)

—

Individual ampere harmonics

—

—

15

Individual voltage harmonics

—

—

Interharmonics

—

—

16

Minimum and/or Maximum Values
Volts

L-L, L-N

—

17

Current

A, B, C

—

Power

Watts, VAR, VA

—

18

Power factor

Apparent

—

Frequency

Hertz

—

19

THD

—

—

Demand values

Watts (Delivered & Received), Watts (Q1–Q4), VA —
(Q1, Q4), VA (Q2, Q3)

20

Trend analysis

Interval data

1

Event logging

20 latest events and historical

1

21

Disturbance recording

—

—

22

Note
1 At computer only.

Legend: PG
FS
RV

= Programmable
= Full scale
= Read value

23
24
25
V12-T10-10

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products
General Information

10

Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm), continued
Device Name
Accessories
See Page V12-T10-31

Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter

1

IQ Energy Sentinel

2
3
V12-T10-18

V12-T10-26

4

Storage

256 MB standard, 2 GB optional

—

5

PG output relays

1 standard, 8 each module 1

—

Discrete contact inputs

3 standard, 8 each module 1

—

Analog inputs

—

—

Synch-input kW utility

Via communications and digital input

Via communications only

Auxiliary voltage

—

—

kWh pulse initiator

Aggregate or main-digital output, LED output on
meter modules (accuracy check)

—

Waveform display

—

—

Waveform capture

—

—

Frequency distribution display

—

—

Display type

LCD color touchscreen

—

Display lines/character

6-inch diagonal

—

Display character height

Graphics

—

Communications

Serial: INCOM
Serial: Modbus RTU
1 Network: Modbus TCP, BACnet/IP, Ethernet TCP/ Network: via Power Xpert Gateway
IP, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, SMTP, SFTP

Section Page Number
Other Features

Setup configuration

Via PXMP configuration software

Via configuration software

Dimensions

Refer to TD150006EN

Refer to TD1707TE

Operating temperature range

–20° to 70°C

–25° to 70°C

Reference literature

TD150006EN

TD1707TE

Note
1 Optional.

Legend

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

PG = Programmable
FS = Full Scale
RV = Read Value

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-11

10
1

IQ Products
General Information

Protective Relay Selection Chart
DT-3000

FP-5000

MP-3000

TD.17.10.T.E

TD02602003E

TD.17.11.T.E

2
3
4

For Further Details and Information,
See TD02600001TE.

Device Name

Technical Data Number

IEEE Device Number

5

Protection Functions
Directional power

32

■

6

Phase directional

67

■

Ground directional

67N

7

Phase inst. OC

50

■

■

■

Phase TOC

51

■

■

■

Calc. residual ground IOC

50G

8
9
10

■

■
■

Calc. residual ground TOC

51G

Ground inst. OC (measured)

50G (N)

■

Ground TOC (measured)

51G (N)

■

Phase voltage restrained OC

51VR

No. of curves (ANSI/IEC/thermal)

■
■

11

10

Negative sequence OC (unbalance)

46

■

Negative sequence voltage

47

■

12

Overvoltage

59

■

Undervoltage

27

■

Underfrequency

81U

■

Overfrequency

81O

■

Breaker failure

50BF

■

14
15

1

■

TOC time reset

11
13

■

■

■

Zone interlocking

■

■

Thermal overload

49

■

Locked rotor

49S/51

■

Jam/stall

51R

16

Cold load pickup

17

Power factor

■
■
■

Loss of load
■

55

Control Functions
■

18

Synchronization check
Remote open/close

■

■

Trip only

19

Programmable I/O

■

■

■

20
21
22

25

Programmable logic

■

Multiple setting groups

■

Number of starts limit

■

Starts per hour

■

Time between starts

■

Emergency restart

■
■

Reduced voltage starting
Trip lockout

■

■

■

23
24
25
V12-T10-12

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products
General Information

10

Protective Relay Selection Chart, continued
DT-3000

FP-5000

1

MP-3000

2
3
For Further Details and Information,
See TD02600001TE.

Device Name

Technical Data Number

IEEE Device Number

TD.17.10.T.E

TD02602003E

TD.17.11.T.E

4

Amperes

■

■

■

5

Ampere demand

■

■

Metering Functions

Volts

■

Phase angle current voltage

■

Positive, negative and zero sequence

■

Watts

■

Watt demand

■

Watthour

■

VARs

■

VAR-demand

■

VAR-hour

■

VA

■

VA-demand

■

VA-hour

■

Frequency

■

Trending (load profile)

■

Minimum/maximum recording

■

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Monitoring Functions
Trip circuit monitor

■

Breaker wear

■

Failure to close

■

Oscillography

■

Sequence of events
■

Trip target data
Clock

14
15

■

■

■

■

■

■

Number of starts

■

Acceleration time

■

RTD temperature

■

Hottest RTD

■

16
17
18
19

Communications
■

Local HMI

■

Local communication port RS-232

■

Local communication port RS-485

■

■

20
21

Remote communication port

■

■

■

FSK

■

■

Optional

Addressable

■

■

■

22

■

■

■

23

Protocols
INCOM™
Modbus

■

24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-13

10
1

IQ Products
General Information

Protective Relay Selection Chart, continued)
DT-3000

FP-5000

MP-3000

TD.17.10.T.E

TD.17.30.T.E

TD.17.11.T.E

■

2
3
4

For Further Details and Information,
See TD02600001TE.

Device Name

Technical Data Number

IEEE Device Number

5

Construction
Panel-mount case

■

■

6

Drawout

Optional

■

Optional

Operating temperature range

–30°C to +55°C

–40°C to +60°C

–20°C to +60°C

7

Power supply options

120–240 Vac

48–125 Vac/Vdc

120–240 Vac

24–250 Vdc

100–240 Vac/Vdc

8

Dual source power supply

Optional

AC current inputs

■

9

AC voltage inputs

10

■

■

■
■

Wye PTs

■

Delta/open delta PTs
Binary inputs

1

8

2

11

Alarm outputs

2 Form C

2 Form C

3

Trip outputs

2

12

Analog outputs
Local display

13

LEDs (local targets)

14
15
16

5

1

Optional

1

■

■

■

■

■

■

ANSI

■

■

■

IEC

■

■

■

UL®

■

■

■

CE

DT-3030 only

■

CSA®

■

■

Standards

■

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T10-14

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products
Technology Upgrades

Power Xpert 4000/6000/
8000 Series Meters

The Power Xpert Meter 4000/
6000/8000 graphic display
uses a simple “twist and
click” navigation control dial
to easily navigate the menus
and drill down into increasing
levels of important detail.
A “back” key enhances the
browser-like navigation of the
graphic display.

The Web server provides the
energy and demand readings
required to help manage
the cost of energy. It also
provides critical information
regarding power quality,
such as harmonic distortion,
flicker, crest factor, K-factor
and more.

10

Note: Features and functionality
may vary depending on the meter
model and options being used.
Review the Features and Benefits
chart on Page V12-T10-16 for
details.

4

The Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000 Series
monitors the critical aspects
of an electrical distribution
system. This premier power
quality metering instrument
is simple to use, powerful,
scalable and highly flexible.
The Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000 offers a new
level of intuitive user
interface design, presenting
critical electrical distribution
system information in
simple-to-navigate and easyto-understand information
architecture. The Power
Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
graphic display visualizes
the information from up
to 16 meter modules. The
embedded Web server
displays complex power
quality data using standard
Internet browsers and allows
for device configuration from
the browser.
Both the local graphic display
and the embedded Web
server present real time,
historical and event
information in a browserstyle graphical format to help
the user interpret key circuit
information, such as:
●
●
●
●
●
●

●
●

●

Current loading
Voltage and power levels
Power factor
Energy usage
I/O status
Power quality
measurements
Harmonic plots
Disturbance and transient
waveforms
ITIC disturbance summary
screen

5

Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Meter

6

PXM 8 0 5 1 A 1 B B

General Description

2
3

Catalog Number Selection
Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series
Display and Meter

1

7
8
Model Series
4 = 4000 (Standard power quality, 2 GB)
6 = 6000 (Enhanced power quality, 4 GB)
8 = 8000 (Premium PQ with transient
capture, 8 GB)
Voltage Input Configuration
0 = Standard (V1, V2, V3, V4)
2 = Standard plus auxiliary (V6, V7, V8)
Power Supply Configuration
1 = Standard 100–240 Vac or
110–250 Vdc power supply
4 = 24–48 Vdc option (future option)

9

Card Slot 3 Configuration
A = No card option
B = I/O option card (8 digital inputs,
2 solid-state outputs, 3 relay outputs)

10

Card Slot 2 Configuration
A = No card option
B = Communication expansion card for
LAN/WAN Ethernet networking with
10/100Base-T, 100F, RS-485, RS-232 ports

11
12

Card Slot 1 Configuration
1 = Standard Communications Module with RS-485

13
14

Example 1: PXM8251A1BB (PXM 8000 meter, w/ VAUX, std. pwr., com. exp. and I/O cards)
Example 2: PXM6251A1BA (PXM 6000 meter, w/ VAUX, std. pwr., com. exp.card)

15

Accessories

16

Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
Description

Catalog
Number

Graphic display module

PXD-MMG

Communication expansion card for LAN/WAN Ethernet networking: 100FX fiber-optic, 10/100T, RS-485, RS-232

PXMCE-B 1

Digital I/O card: eight digital input, two solid-state output, three relay output

PXMIO-B 1

Panel mounting bracket assembly for back-to-back meter to graphic display mounting

PX-PMBA

Panel mounting bracket assembly for retrofitting a graphic display to an IQ Analyzer cutout

PX-PMBB

Panel mounting bracket assembly for reduced graphic display rear clearance

PX-PMBC

Power Xpert Meter 4000 to 6000 license upgrade key

PXM-4KUPG

18
19
20
21

Notes
1 These items can be ordered separately or preinstalled in the meter by selecting option B in the model number.
Communication cable (standard Modbus RTU) is not included in the package for meter module connection.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

17

22
23
24
25
V12-T10-15

10
1
2

IQ Products
Technology Upgrades

Features and Benefits
Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Meters
Power Xpert
Feature

4000

6000

8000

Benefit

3

General
Embedded Web server

■

■

■

Use a standard Web browser to monitor and manage the meter over the network, Internet

4

TOU metering support

■

■

■

Time of usage can be set up to support 4 different schedules

Firmware flash update support

■

■

■

Enables you to flash the meter with the latest firmware updates

5

Self-learning capability (characterizes “normal” per circuit)

■

■

■

The meter can automatically adjust to the environment and alarm only when
“real” events occur

Voltage, current: per phase minimum, maximum, average, trend graph
analysis, export, print

■

■

■

Review voltage and current trends, export, print and analyze parameters right on the meter or external
software

7

Energy and demand plot comparisons month-to-month, week-to-week

■

■

■

Plot two months or two weeks for vivid energy or demand comparison

Power: power factor, apparent, real, reactive, frequency

■

■

■

Review power usage and power factor and avoid potential PF penalties

8

Energy, demand: forward, reverse, net, sum, tou, profile, previous month
comparison, graph analysis, export, print

■

■

■

Keep track of your energy usage, compare time of usage and usage against previous month, identify
peaks to conserve energy usage

Statistical analysis (min., max., average)

■

■

■

Review statistical trends, identify past and future problem areas

Sag and swell monitoring, management and recording

■

■

■

Capture electrical sags and swells and analyze the waveforms

Symmetrical Components: Zero, Negative, Positive

■

■

■

Analyze possibly unbalanced three-phase power systems

Low frequency transient detection and capture

■

■

■

Capture lower frequency transient waveforms for retrospective analysis or e-mailing

Sampling rate, maximum samples/cycle

4096 1 4096 1 100,000 Extremely high sampling rate will effectively capture impulsive transients

“Number of Nines” uptime data (e.g., 6 nines = 99.9999%)

■

■

■

Review uptime availability per cent

12

K-factor

■

■

■

Review the ratio of eddy current losses, e.g., when driving nonlinear and linear loads

Crest factor

■

■

■

Review the peak-to-average ratio of the waveform

13

Security
■

■

■

Define appropriate security access level per user

14

Communications and I/O
Modbus TCP

■

■

■

Easy integration with standard protocol to power management and other software

15

Modbus RTU

■

■

■

Integrate meters to existing Modbus networks, daisy chain several (1–16) meters together

HTML

■

■

■

Communicate to the meter over the Internet via standard Web browser

16

SNMP (simple network management protocol)

■

■

■

Communicate with the meter via Simple Network Protocol; hook to existing NMS system

SMTP (simple mail transfer protocol)

■

■

■

Send e-mail messages via standard Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

17

FTP (file transfer protocol)

■

■

■

Access, copy, paste, cut waveform capture files on the meter with an FTP Client

NTP (network time protocol)

■

■

■

Network Time Protocol support enables the meter to synchronize time over the network up to the 1
millisecond resolution

COMTRADE, open IEEE Standard file format for
Waveform capture export

■

■

■

Import waveform captures in standard IEEE (C37.111-1999) COMTRADE file format to third-party
software

DNP 3.0 over Ethernet (Distributed Network Protocol)

■

■

■

Communicate with the meter via DNP 3.0 over Ethernet; hook to existing utility systems

Trend measurements CSV file export

■

■

■

Easily export trend measurements to third-party applications, e.g., Microsoft Excel in standard
CSV file format

I/O (8 digital inputs, 3 relay outputs, 2 solid-state KYZ outputs)

■

■

■

The Power Xpert I/O Card is extremely flexible and can be used in a large variety of different
applications. Digital inputs and relay outputs can be programmed to interact during various
conditions defined by the user. Various third-party devices, such as alarm, pulse meters, trip units,
sensors can be easily integrated to the Power Xpert Meter. Triggers and events can be tied to the
meters standard functions such as e-mail, logs and trends

6

9
10
11

18
19
20

Power, Energy and Demand

Power Quality Analysis

Secure 5 level user access privileges

21
22
23

Notes
1 Delta-Sigma A/D oversampling rate.
These specifications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality
may vary depending on selected options, firmware version and product model. Please refer to the technical data sheet and User Manual for detailed specifications.

24
25
V12-T10-16

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products
Technology Upgrades

Power Xpert 2000 Series
Meters

information in a browser-style
graphical format to help the
user interpret information
such as current loading,
voltage and power levels,
power factor, energy usage,
I/O status, power quality
measurements, as well as
harmonic plots. The embedded
Web server also allows for
waveform capture and for
visualizing steady-state
harmonic content that is critical
for power quality analysis.

10

The Web server provides the
energy and demand readings
required to help manage the
cost of energy.

1
2
3
4
5

Catalog Number Selection

6

Power Xpert 2000 Meter

7

PXM 2250 M A 6 5 1 0 5
Model Series
2250 = Energy meter
2260 = Power quality meter
2270 = Power quality plus meter
2280 = Power quality plus with up to 64 samples/
cycle waveform recording meter
2290 = Power quality plus with up to 512 samples/
cycle recording meter
Meter Type
M = Meter (with integral display)
T = Transducer only (no display)
Power Xpert 2000 Series

Frequency
5 = 50 Hz system
6 = 60 Hz system

General Description
The Power Xpert Meter
2000 Series power quality
instrument monitors the
most critical aspects of an
electrical distribution system.
This premier power quality
metering instrument uses
the latest in advanced
technology to make it simple
to use, powerful, scalable
and highly flexible. The
Power Xpert Meter 2000
offers the same level of
intuitive user interface design
as the Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000, presenting
critical electrical distribution
system information in a
simple to navigate and
easy-to-understand
information architecture.
The embedded Web server
displays comprehensive
power quality data using
standard Internet browsers
and allows for device
configuration from the
browser. The embedded
Web server presents real
time, historical and event

8
9

I/O Slot 2
5 = Gateway card

10

I/O Slot 1
0 = None
1 = 2 Relay outputs/2 status inputs
2 = 4 KYZ pulses/4 status inputs
3 = 4 Analog outputs: 0–1 mA
4 = 4 Analog outputs: 4–20 mA

11
12

Power Supply
1 = 90–265 Vac/Vdc
4 = 24–60 Vdc

13
14

Current Input
1 = 1 Amp secondary
5 = 5 Amp secondary

15

Example 1: PXM2270MA65145 (PXM 2270 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5A, 90–265 Vac/Vdc W/4AO)
Example 2: PXM2250MA65105 (PXM 2250 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5A, 90–265 Vac/Vdc)

Accessories

16

Power Xpert 2000 Meter

17

Description

Catalog
Number

Panel-mounting bracket assembly for retrofitting a PXM 2000 to an
IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data cutout

IQ250-PMAK

PXM 2000 Gateway Card kit to upgrade an IQ 250/260 to a PXM 2000

PXM2000-GCK

18
19
20

Power Xpert Meter 2000 I/O Cards
Description

Catalog
Number

PXM 2000 I/O card—2 relay outputs/2 status inputs

IQ250/260-IO1

PXM 2000 I/O card—4 KYZ Pulses/4 status inputs

IQ250/260-IO2

PXM 2000 I/O card—4 analog outputs—0–1 mA

IQ250/260-IO3

PXM 2000 I/O card—4 analog outputs—4–20 mA

IQ250/260-IO4

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

21
22
23
24
25
V12-T10-17

10
1

IQ Products
Technology Upgrades

Power Xpert™
Multi-Point Meter

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter

General Description
Eaton’s Power Xpert Multi-Point
Meter is an ANSI C12.20
revenue class Web enabled
electronic submetering device
that can be mounted in
panelboards, switchboards or
enclosures. When mounted in
a panelboard or a switchboard,
the Power Xpert Multi-Point
Meter provides customers
with an integrated power
distribution and energy
metering solution that saves
space, reduces installation
labor and lowers total cost.
The Eaton Power Xpert MultiPoint Meter (PXMP Meter)
offers a highly modular
approach to high-density
metering applications in
electrical power distribution
systems. The PXMP Meter is
compatible with most threephase industrial, commercial
and single-phase residential
low voltage electrical power
systems. The PXMP is
equipped with two Modbus
RTU communication ports
for local display and remote
serial communications.
The PXMP also has optional
pulse input and digital output
modules along with one
standard digital output and
three digital inputs. The
PXMP Energy Portal Module
is Web enabled, making it
suitable for use with Ethernet
networks and modems.
The Power Xpert Multi-Point
Meter can measure up to any
of the following number of
circuits:
●

●

●

Sixty single-phase,
two-wire (single-pole)
Thirty single-phase,
three-wire (two-pole)
Twenty three-phase,
four-wire (three-pole)

V12-T10-18

The circuits listed above
can be mixed provided that
the total number of current
sensors does not exceed 60.

Product Selection

The Power Xpert Multi-Point
Meter can be used with three
different ratings of current
sensors: 100 mA, 10 mA
or 333 mV. Switchboard/
panelboard applications
will use the 100 mA current
sensors, which are highly
accurate, self-protecting in
the event of an open circuit
condition under load and
are supplied with an integral
plug-in connector. The PXMP
automatically detects the rating
of the current sensor that is
connected. The PXMP can also
use 10 mA current sensors
that were previously installed
for IQMESII retrofit applications.
Additionally the PXMP can
use 333 mV split core current
sensors for retrofit applications
where metering has not
previously existed. The 10 mA
and 333 mV current sensors
are also self-protecting in
the event of an open circuit
condition under load.

Description

Application Description

KIT, PXMP CS125 sensor, quantity of 3

PXMP-CS125-3

The Power Xpert Multi-Point
Meter is ideally suited to
handle submetering in low
voltage power distribution
equipment applications with
the use of voltage and current
transformers.

KIT, PXMP CS250 sensor, quantity of 3

PXMP-CS250-3

KIT, PXMP CS400 sensor, quantity of 3

PXMP-CS400-3

The Power Xpert Multi-Point
Meter provides a cost-effective
solution for residential or
commercial metering
installations, including:
●
●
●

●
●
●

●
●
●
●

High-rise buildings
Government institutions
K–12, universities and
campuses
Office buildings
Medical facilities
Apartment and
condominium complexes
Airports
Shopping malls
Industrial sites
Mixed-use facilities

Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter Products
Catalog
Number

Meter Bases and Meter Modules with ABCN Voltage Inputs
PXMP meter base—three-phase with ABCN voltage inputs

PXMP-MB

PXMP meter module with six 100 mA inputs for use with PXMP
current sensors

PXMP-MM100MA

PXMP meter module with six 10 mA inputs for use with IQMESII
current sensors

PXMP-MM10MA

PXMP meter module with six 333 mV inputs for use with 333 mV
current sensors

PXMP-MM333MV

Meter Bases and Meter Modules with ABN Voltage Inputs
PXMP meter base—single-phase, three-wire with ABN
voltage inputs

PXMP-MB-AB

PXMP meter module with six 100 mA inputs for use with PXMP
current sensors

PXMP-MM100MA-AB

PXMP meter module with six 10 mA inputs for use with IQMESII
current sensors

PXMP-MM10MA-AB

PXMP meter module with six 333 mV inputs for use with 333 mV
current sensors

PXMP-MM333MV-AB

IO Modules
PXMP meter pulse input module with eight inputs

PXMP-PIM

PXMP meter digital output module with eight outputs

PXMP-DOM

Communication Module
PXMP meter energy portal module

PXMP-EPM

Current Sensor Kits

Current Sensor Cable Kits
KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 4 ft (1.2m), quantity of 3

PXMP-SC4-3

KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 6 ft (1.8m), quantity of 3

PXMP-SC6-3

KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 8 ft (2.4m), quantity of 3

PXMP-SC8-3

KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 12 ft (3.7m), quantity of 3

PXMP-SC12-3

Current Sensor Extension Cable Kits
KIT, PXMP sensor extension cable, 8 ft (2.4m), quantity of 3

PXMP-SCE-8-3

KIT, PXMP sensor extension cable, 16 ft (4.9m), quantity of 3

PXMP-SCE-16-3

Interface Modules
PXMP current sensor interface module for 333 mV, kit X 3

PXMP-IM333MV-3

Note
Total sensor lead length must not exceed 28 ft (8.5m).

Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter Support Products
Description

Catalog
Number

Communication cable, 1000 ft (305m), 600V insulation

IMPCABLE

PXMP meter display—6-inch color touchscreen (with cable)

PXMP-DISP-6

Power supply—single-phase 90–264 Vac, 24 Vdc at 2.5A

PSG60E

Power supply—three-phase 360–575 Vac, 24 Vdc at 2.5A

PSG60F

Power supply—three-phase 600 Vac, 24 Vdc

PSS55D

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products
Technology Upgrades

IQ 250/260 Electronic
Power Meters

10

Catalog Number Selection

1

IQ 250/260 Meter

2

IQ 250 M A 6 5 1 1 0
Model Series
250 = Power
260 = Power quality
Meter Type
M = Meter (with integral display)
T = Transducer only (no display)

The IQ 250 and IQ 260
Meters provide capabilities
you would not normally
expect in affordable, ultracompact meters, such as fast
sampling rate and accurate
metering for a full range of
power attributes. Providing
the first line of defense
against costly power
problems, Eaton’s IQ 250
and IQ 260 electronic power
meters can perform the work
of an entire wall of legacy
metering equipment using
today’s technology.
When space is at a premium,
yet you need ANSI C12.20
accuracy, the IQ 250/ 260
series fit the bill. These
meters are ideal for electrical
equipment assemblies,
machine control panels,
such as panelboard and
switchboard mains and
feeders, low voltage metalenclosed switchgear feeders
and motor control centers.
Requiring far less space than
other meters with similar
functionality, IQ 250/260
series fit into a standard
ANSI or IEC cutout on a
panelboard or other electrical
equipment, and therefore fit
easily into retrofit applications.

0 = None
1 = Two relay outputs/two status inputs
2 = Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs
3 = Four analog outputs: 0–1 mA
4 = Four analog outputs: 4–20 mA

Frequency
5 = 50 Hz system
6 = 60 Hz system

IQ 250/260 Electronic Power Meter
Data Logging
A = None
L = Data logging

General Description

3

I/O Slot 2

Current Input
1 = 1A secondary
5 = 5A secondary
Power Supply
1 = 90–265 Vac/Vdc
4 = 24–48 Vdc

4
5

I/O Slot 1
0 = None
1 = Two relay outputs/two status inputs
2 = Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs
3 = Four analog outputs: 0–1 mA
4 = Four analog outputs: 4–20 mA

6
7
8

Accessories

9

IQ 250/260 Meter
Catalog
Number

10

Panel-mounting adapter for retrofitting an IQ 250/260 to an
IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data cutout

IQ250-PMAK

11

PXM 2000 Gateway Card kit to upgrade an IQ 250/260 to a PXM 2000

PXM2000-GCK

Description

12

IQ 250/260 Meter I/O Cards
Description

Catalog
Number

13

IQ 250/260 I/O card—2 relay outputs/2 status inputs

IQ250/260-IO1

IQ 250/260 I/O card—4 KYZ pulses/4 status inputs

IQ250/260-IO2

14

IQ 250/260 I/O card—4 analog outputs—0–1 mA

IQ250/260-IO3

IQ 250/260 I/O card—4 analog outputs—4–20 mA

IQ250/260-IO4

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-19

10
1

IQ Products
Technology Upgrades

IQ 130/140/150 Series
Electronic Power Meters

IQ 130/140/150 Meters

2

IQ 150 M A 6 5 1 1

3

Model Series
130 = Volts/amps
140 = Power
150 = Energy

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Catalog Number Selection

IQ 100 Electronic Power Meter

General Description
The IQ 100 Meter family
provides capabilities you
would not normally expect in
affordable, compact meters,
such as fast sampling rate
and accurate metering for a
full range of power attributes.
Providing the first line of
defense against costly power
problems, Eaton’s IQ 100
series electronic power
meters can perform the work
of an entire wall of legacy
metering equipment utilizing
today’s technology.

Meter Type
M = Meter (with integral display)
T = Transducer only (no display)

Frequency
5 = 50 Hz system
6 = 60 Hz system
Current Input
1 = 1A secondary
5 = 5A secondary

Communications
0 = None
1 = Modbus RTU and KYZ pulse
2 = Modbus TCP and KYZ output (RJ45)
Power Supply
1 = 90–265 Vac/Vdc
4 = 24–48 Vdc

Accessories
IQ 130/140/150 Meters
Description
Panel Mounting Adapter for retrofitting an IQ 100 to an
IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data Cutout

Catalog
Number
IQ250-PMAK

When space is at a premium,
yet you need ANSI C12.20
accuracy, the IQ 100 series
fit the bill. These meters are
ideal for electrical equipment
assemblies, machine control
panels, such as panelboard
and switchboard mains and
feeders, low voltage metalenclosed switchgear feeders
and motor control centers.
Requiring far less space than
other meters with similar
functionality, IQ 100 series fit
into a standard ANSI or IEC
cutout on a panelboard or
other electrical equipment,
and therefore fit easily into
retrofit applications.

20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T10-20

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products
Technology Upgrades

IQ 150S/250S SelfEnclosed Electronic
Meters

10

Catalog Number Selection

1

IQ 150S/250S Meter

2

IQ 150 S A 6 5 1 1
Model Series
150 = Energy
250 = Energy plus
Meter Type
S = Self-enclosed meter

Frequency
5 = 50 Hz system
6 = 60 Hz system
Current Input
1 = 1A secondary
5 = 5A secondary

3

Communications
1 = Modbus RTU (RS-485)
2 = Modbus RTU (RS-485)
or TCP—(RJ45)
or 802.11b (Wi-Fi)

4
5

Power Supply
1 = 90–400 Vac/Vdc

6
7
8

IQ 150S/250S Self-Enclosed
Electronic Meters

General Description

9

With energy costs
skyrocketing, you need the
ability to verify the accuracy
of utility billing and allocation
of energy costs among
business units, different
manufacturing areas or
facilities, and tenants.
Production equipment and
IT systems are vulnerable to
power anomalies; therefore,
you must ensure that power
is always up to specifications.
If your infrastructure is an
established facility, you may
not currently have metering
or may have addressed these
concerns by deploying a
variety of analog gauges
and meters—one for volts,
one for amperes and so on,
with separate meters for
each measurement.

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

If you’re planning an upgrade
or a new power infrastructure,
no doubt you would like
to capitalize on the latest
technology to improve upon
that cumbersome architecture
and its patchwork view.

19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-21

10
1

IQ Products
Technology Upgrades

Catalog Number Selection

IQ 35M

IQ 35M Meter

2

IQ35M A 1 1

3

Model Series

4

Enclosure Type
1 = Standard energy
2 = Four quadrant energy

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Accessories

IQ 35M

General Description
The Eaton IQ 35M Meter is a
DIN rail meter that combines
exceptional performance and
easy installation to deliver
a cost-effective solution for
energy and power monitoring
applications, as well as submetering applications. Most
models include pulse output,
alarm contact and phase
alarms for true versatility.
The BACnet version offers
two digital inputs for
accumulating other meter
pulses in place of the digital
output and alarm contact.
The Modbus output options
offer added flexibility for
configuration and data analysis.
The IQ 35M allows you to:
●
●

●

●
●

Output Option
1 = Pulse output only
2 = Pulse output + Modbus
3 = Pulse output + Modbus + data logging
5 = Pulse inputs + BACnet + data logging

Verify energy bills
Make informed load
shifting and shedding
decisions
Fairly and accurately
allocate energy costs to
users
Identify wasteful practices
Decrease unnecessary
usage
Produce an energy profile
Secure the optimum utility
rate structure

IQ 35M Accessories
Description

Catalog
Number

IQ35M enclosure, NEMA 4X

IQ35M-ENC

IQ35M fuse pack, single, 1/2A slow-blow

IQ35M-FP1

IQ35M fuse pack, double, 1/2A slow-blow

IQ35M-FP2

IQ35M fuse pack, triple, 1/2A slow-blow

IQ35M-FP3

IQ35M replacement mounting clips

IQ35M-RMC

IQ35M DIN rail

IQ35M-DR

IQ35M DIN rail stop clips (10 pack)

IQ35M-DRSC

IQ 35M Current Transformers
Description

Catalog
Number

Solid Core
IQ35M CT, solid core, 5A:0.33 Vac, 0.30 inch

IQ35M-SO-030-5

IQ35M CT, solid core, 20A:0.33 Vac, 0.30 inch

IQ35M-SO-030-20

IQ35M CT, solid core, 50A:0.33 Vac, 0.50 inch

IQ35M-SO-050-50

IQ35M CT, solid core, 50A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch

IQ35M-SO-075-50

IQ35M CT, solid core, 100A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch

IQ35M-SO-125-100

IQ35M CT, solid core, 200A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch

IQ35M-SO-125-200

IQ35M CT, solid core, 250A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch

IQ35M-SO-125-250

IQ35M CT, solid core, 300A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch

IQ35M-SO-125-300

IQ35M CT, solid core, 400A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch

IQ35M-SO-125-400

Split Core
IQ35M CT, split core, 5A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch

IQ35M-SP-075-5

IQ35M CT, split core, 30A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch

IQ35M-SP-075-30

IQ35M CT, split core, 50A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch

IQ35M-SP-075-50

IQ35M CT, split core, 100A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch

IQ35M-SP-075-100

20

IQ35M CT, split core, 200A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch

IQ35M-SP-075-200

IQ35M CT, split core, 250A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch

IQ35M-SP-125-250

21

IQ35M CT, split core, 300A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch

IQ35M-SP-125-300

IQ35M CT, split core, 400A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch

IQ35M-SP-125-400

22

IQ35M CT, split core, 600A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch

IQ35M-SP-125-600

IQ35M CT, split core, 800A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch

IQ35M-SP-253-800

23

IQ35M CT, split core, 1000A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch

IQ35M-SP-255-1000

IQ35M CT, split core, 1200A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch

IQ35M-SP-255-1200

24

IQ35M CT, split core, 1600A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch

IQ35M-SP-255-1600

IQ35M CT, split core, 2000A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch

IQ35M-SP-255-2000

25

IQ35M CT, split core, 2400A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch

IQ35M-SP-255-2400

19

●
●

V12-T10-22

Note: Specifications are subject
to change without notice and
represent the maximum
capabilities of the product with all
options installed. This is not a
complete feature list. Features
and functionality may vary
depending on selected options,
firmware version and product
model. Please refer to User
Manual for detailed
specifications.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products
Technology Upgrades

Enclosed Meters

multi-unit enclosed meter
solution helps meet any
measurement and verification
requirement to show energy
efficiency improvements and

10

results. In addition to the
standard offering, Eaton can
also provide an enclosed
metering solution tailored
around your project needs.

1
2

Catalog Number Selection

3

Single Unit Enclosed Meter

4

NEMA 12 Single- and Multi-Unit
Enclosed Meters

PXM2250MA65105 - 2 B

5

General Description
The Eaton enclosed meter
line provides a complete
energy metering and data
acquisition solution in a
single enclosure. Designed
for Eaton’s IQ 35M, IQ 150,
IQ 250/260, and Power Xpert®
2000/4000/6000/8000 and
Multi-Point Meters, Eaton’s
enclosed meter line offers
mounting and installation
flexibility, especially in retrofit
applications where no
metering compartment or
mounting space is available
in the existing electrical
distribution equipment or
where installation time is a
premium. Factory designed
and wired, Eaton’s enclosed
meter line offers savings in
labor and installation costs
because input current and
voltage wiring as well as I/O
wiring is prewired to terminal
blocks inside the enclosure.
The enclosed meter line has
two standard offerings:
single-, prewired unit
(specific IQ 150, IQ 250/260,
PXM 2000, PXM 4000/6000/
8000 or PXMP) and a multiunit (specific IQ 150, IQ 250/
260 or IQ 35M models).
Because the multi-unit
automatically includes Eaton’s
Power Xpert Gateway 200E,
it facilitates measurement
and verification of the energy
usage on processes and in
buildings. This provides a
convenient way to monitor
energy usage from multiple
points, collect and log specific
energy use parameters, and
display and generate logs
for historical energy usage
reports. Simply put, Eaton’s

Meter Type
PXM4051A1BA
PXM2270MA65105
PXM4051A1BB
PXM2270MA65115
PXM6051A1BA
PXM2270MA65145
PXM6051A1BB
IQ250MA65100
PXM8051A1BA
IQ250MA65110
PXM8051A1BB
IQ250MA65114
PXM2250MA65105 IQ260MA65100
PXM2250MA65115 IQ260MA65110
PXM2250MA65145 IQ260MA65114
PXM2260MA65105 IQ150MA6511
PXM2260MA65115 IQ150MA6512
PXM2260MA65145

NEMA Rating
2 = NEMA 12
3 = NEMA 3R
4 = NEMA 4X

CPT Option
A = 120/240 Vac (no CPT)
B = 480 Vac (CPT)

6
7
8
9
10

Enclosed PXMP Meter

11

PXMP - 2 B D
Meter Type
PXMP-MB
PXMP-MB-AB

NEMA Rating
2 = NEMA 12
3 = NEMA 3R
4 = NEMA 4X

12

Display
A = None
D = 6-inch color
touchscreen

CPT Option
A = None
B = 120/240 Vac
C = 480 Vac
D = 600 Vac

13
14

Multi Unit Enclosed Meter

15

IQ150MA6511 - 2 B 4 C
Meter Type
IQ35MA12
IQ150MA6511
IQ250MA65100
IQ260MA65100

NEMA Rating
2 = NEMA 12 1
3 = NEMA 3R
4 = NEMA 4X

16

Communications
C = Includes PXG-200E
CPT Option
A = 120/240 Vac No CPT
B = 480 Vac CPT 1

17

Number of Meters
4 = 4 meters

18

Accessories

19

Meter Subpanel Assembly
Catalog
Number

20

Meter subpanel assembly for PXM 2000
and IQ 150/250/260 Meters

PXM2K-MSPA-A

21

Meter subpanel assembly with CPT for PXM 2000
and IQ 150/250/260 Meters

PXM2K-MSPA-B

Description

22

Notes
1 Not available with IQ 35M.

23

Other meter models available upon request in single- and multi-unit enclosed versions.

24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-23

10
1

IQ Products
Current Products

IQ Analyzer 6400/6600

●

2

●

3

●

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Features and Benefits

●

IQ Analyzer 6400/6600

General Description
Eaton’s IQ Analyzer 6400/
6600 is a complete solution
for users who want to
monitor all aspects of their
electrical distribution system.
It provides extensive
metering, power quality
analysis, remote input
monitoring, control relaying,
analog input/outputs and
communications capability.
All programming can be done
through the faceplate or
through the communications
option. Its online Help
pushbutton feature displays
information on device
operation, programming and
troubleshooting.

14

All information is
accessible through the
communications port
Quality true rms readings
through 50th harmonic
Meets ANSI C12.16
Class 10 revenue metering
specifications
Accurate readings for nonsinusoidal waveforms with
up to 3.0 crest factor

●

●
●

●

Screens display auto
ranging units, kilo units and
mega units as needed
10-digit energy readings
Displays multiple
parameters at the
same time
Programmable custom
screens

The new IQ Analyzer Model
6600 with waveform display
at the device and sub-cycle

voltage disturbance capture
provides the capability to
monitor a wide range of
harmonic parameters. These
include harmonic voltage,
current magnitudes and
phase angles as well as
system disturbances such
as transient voltage
disturbances and sub-cycle
voltage interruptions.

Product Selection
IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Ordering Information
Description

Catalog
Number

IQ Analyzer, separate source power module

IQA6410

IQ Analyzer, 24–48 Vdc power module

IQA6420

IQ Analyzer, three-phase power module

IQA6430

IQ Analyzer, separate source power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage distribution capture

IQA6610

IQ Analyzer, 24–48 Vdc power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage distribution capture

IQA6620

IQ Analyzer, three-phase power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage distribution capture

IQA6630

IQ Flange, to provide extra clearance when mounting

IQFLANGE

45.00-inch (114.3 mm) extension cable for remote mounting of power module

IQA45CABLE

24–48 Vdc separate source power module

IQMDCPM

100–240 Vac and 100–250 Vdc separate source power module

IQMSSPM

Three-phase, self-powered power module

IQM3PPM

INCOM communication module

IPONI

RS-485 communication module with Modbus protocol

MPONI

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T10-24

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products
Current Products

IQ DP-4000/4100

Features and Benefits
●

●

●

●
●

IQ DP-4000/4100

General Description
Eaton’s IQ DP-4000 is a
microprocessor-based meter
providing complete electrical
metering and system voltage
protection. In one compact,
standard package the IQ
DP-4000 provides an
alternative to individually
mounted and wired
conventional meters and
switches. The IQ DP-4000
also monitors apparent power
(VA), reactive energy (VARhours), apparent energy (VAhours), and % total harmonic
distortion (THD) to provide the
user with basic power quality
information. The IQ DP-4000
meets and surpasses
UL/CSA/CE standards.

●

●

●

●

Space savings in
structure—replaces
conventional individual
metering devices
Standardization of
design—one doormounted device
Direct voltage input up
to 600V
New DIP switch design
Standardization of CT and
PT connections
With additional PTs and set
points the device can be
used in HV setting
Relaying included in I/O
module (Model 4100)
Optional interface capability
to computer network for
data collection, storage and/
or printout via PowerNet—
Eaton leading power
distribution monitoring
network
Retains present
parameters through power
failure with non-volatile
memory

10

Product Selection

1

IQ DP-4000/4100 Ordering Information
Description

Catalog
Number

Separate source without I/O capability

IQDP4010

Separate source control power without I/O, DC supply

IQDP4020

Three-phase without I/O capability

IQDP4030

Separate source with I/O capability

IQDP4110

Separate source control power with three Form C relay output contacts
and one sync pulse input, DC supply

IQDP4120

Three-phase with I/O capability

IQDP4130

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-25

10
1

IQ Products
Current Products

IQ Energy Sentinels™

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

IQ Energy Sentinels

Eaton’s IQ Energy Sentinel
is a highly accurate,
microprocessor-based
submeter designed to monitor
power and energy readings.
It represents an alternative to
installing separate wattmeters,
watthour meters and wattdemand meters.
Key advantages include
unmatched savings in
space, lower installation
costs, and the capability to
communicate data readings
in a variety of ways.
IQ Energy Sentinels
with built-in CTs and
communications have the
added benefit of greater
overall system accuracy.
Conventional metering often
is less accurate because
external CTs and separate
transducers may each have
inaccuracies of 1% or more.
The IQ Energy Sentinel
provides a unique and
cost-effective method to
implement energy
submetering at lower
levels in the distribution
system economically.

Submetering application
examples for the IQ Energy
Sentinel include energy
monitoring and demand
management, product cost
analysis, process/machine
tool efficiency and
productivity improvement.
Additional applications
include energy cost allocation
of tenant billing for
commercial, industrial,
recreational and residential
facilities.
Retrofitting
The space-saving design
characteristics of the breaker
mount IQ Energy Sentinels
allow them to be added to
existing Series C® circuit
breakers at any time—often
with no additional space or
modifications required. Or,
they may be installed when
upgrading to Series C from
older circuit breakers—often
with no additional space or
modifications required.

Product Selection
IQ Energy Sentinels Ordering Information
Description

Catalog
Number

For F-Frame breakers

IQESF_ _ _ 1

For J-Frame breakers

IQESJ_ _ _ 1

For K-Frame breakers

IQESK_ _ _ 1

Universal with internal CTs

IQESUI_ _ _ 1

Universal for external CTs

IQESUE_ _ _ 1

Note
1 Final three characters of catalog number are for voltage rating,i.e., 2 0 8 for 120/240, 240,
208Y/120 systems.

The Universal Mount IQ
Energy Sentinel with internal
CTs may be used wherever
breaker mounting is not
feasible or possible.
The Universal Mount
IQ Energy Sentinel for
external CTs may be used for
monitoring loads larger than
400A or for when the use of
existing CTs is desired.

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T10-26

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products
Current Products

IQ 230

IQ 230

General Description
Eaton’s IQ 230 compact
size and flexible mounting
capabilities make it perfectly
suited for machine control
panels such as panelboard
and switchboard mains and
feeders, low voltage metalenclosed switchgear feeders,
motor control centers, and
especially for individual load
monitoring. The base module
can be display mounted, panel
mounted, DIN rail mounted or
side mounted. The display fits
into a standard 1/4 DIN cutout,
and for retrofit applications, a
100 mm ANSI collar is available.
One IQ 230 provides an
alternative to an assortment
of individually wired and
mounted ammeters,
voltmeters, ammeter and
voltmeter switches,
wattmeters, VAR-meters,
power factor meters,
frequency meters, watthour
and demand meters.

10

ANSI C12 Class 10 revenue
metering accuracy makes the
IQ 230 an ideal choice for
submetering and subbilling applications.

Product Selection

The IQ 230 can be easily
programmed and monitored
from the faceplate keypad
that features a 4 line x 20
character LED backlit LCD
display. Opting for the
compatible PowerNet system
allows the user to program and
monitor the meter remotely
from a PC.

IQ 230 complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch
IQ230
(355.6 mm) cable—with INCOM communications, pulse output,
two contact outputs, two digital inputs, one analog input and anti-tamper seal

3

IQ 230M complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch
IQ230M
(355.6 mm) cable—with RS-485 Modbus communications, pulse output, two
contact outputs, two digital inputs, one analog input and anti-tamper seal

4

1

IQ 230 Ordering Information
Description

Catalog
Number

3 foot (0.9m) Category 5 cable

IQ23CABLE

6 foot (2.0m) Category 5 cable

IQ26CABLE

10 foot (3.0m) Category 5 cable

IQ210CABLE

Retrofit Opportunities
Retrofit of existing electrical
distribution systems with
the IQ 230 for load and
energy monitoring
●
Five mounting options
makes installation easier

2

5
6
7

●

8
9

Ratings
●
Application to 200 kV,
no PTs to 600V
●
CT ratios selectable 5 to
8000A
●
Single-phase two- or
three-wire; three-phase
three- or four-wire

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-27

10
1

IQ Products
Current Products

MP-3000 Motor
Protection

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

MP-3000 Motor Protection

General Description
Eaton’s MP-3000 motor
protection relay is a
multi-functional
microprocessor-based
protective relay for the
protection of three-phase
AC motors. Though it may
be applied to any size motor
at any voltage level, it is most
commonly applied on medium
voltage or larger motors. The
MP-3000 relay is a current
only device that provides
complete and reliable motor
protection, monitoring and
starting control functions.
The MP-3000 motor
protection relay is available in
either a fixed mount, semiflush case or in a semi-flush
quick release drawout case.
Both housings are compact
and fit a standard IQ cutout.
The optional quick release
drawout case features twostage contact disconnects
and self-shorting CT circuit
terminal blocks. A spare
self-shorting terminal pair
is available for use as relay
removal alarm or for continuous
motor operation (non-failsafe
mode) on relay removal.
The optional communication
module is externally mounted
on the fixed mount case and
internally mounted in the
drawout case.

The MP-3000 motor protection
relay has three phase and one
ground current inputs. Both a
5A and 1A version are available.
The ground protection and
metering functions can be used
with either a zero sequence
ground CT or from the residual
connection of the phase CTs.
The zero sequence ground CT
provides greater ground fault
sensitivity than the residual
connection. The unit is userprogrammable for 60 Hz or
50 Hz operation.
The MP-3000 motor protection
relay provides adaptive
overload trip characteristics
based on motor temperature
when motor RTDs are
connected through an optional
URTD module. Metering
of RTD inputs (individual
winding, motor bearing, load
and auxiliary temperatures)
is also provided.
The MP-3000 motor
protection relay has two
discrete inputs, four Form C
(1NO and 1NC) contacts and
one 4 to 20 mA analog
output. The relay provides
maximum user flexibility to
configure the I/O. All inputs
and outputs (except for the
trip output) are userprogrammable. In addition,
the relay has 10 LEDs for the
indication of protection on,
program mode, monitor
mode, view setting mode,
history mode, log mode, trip,
alarm, auxiliary 1 and auxiliary
2 operation. A test page in
the program mode provides
display indication of the
discrete input states and
testing of the output
relays, target LEDs and
analog circuit.

A user-friendly operator
interface and display provides
quick access to the settings,
monitored values, motor
history and operational logs.
Large LED alphanumeric
character display provides
easy viewing from any angle
in any light. Simple keypad
operation provides quick and
easy navigation through all
settings and stored data.
The program mode and
emergency override buttons
are access restricted via
sealing provisions and latched
cover. An integrated help
function provides an online
description display of
functions, abbreviations
and operations.

Optimum Motor Protection
The MP-3000 motor protection
relay has been designed for
maximum motor operation
and protection. It permits
running the motor as close
to its design limits while
protecting it against excessive
heating and damaging overload
conditions. The MP-3000
field-proven protection
algorithms were developed
based on motor designs
and operating parameters
for optimum operation and
protection while minimizing
nuisance tripping.
The MP-3000 motor protection
relay uses a protection
algorithm and measurement
technique based on proven
positive and negative
(unbalance) sequence
current sampling and true
rms calculations.

Product Selection
MP-3000 Motor Protection Ordering Information
Description

Catalog
Number

Motor protection in fixed case, 5A CT, communication capable with PONI

MP-3000

Motor protection in drawout case, 5A CT, no communication

MP-3001

Motor protection in drawout case, 5A CT, with INCOM PONI

MP-3002

Motor protection in fixed case, 1A CT, communication capable with PONI

MP-3100

Motor protection in drawout case, 1A CT, no communication

MP-3101

Motor protection in drawout case, 1A CT, with INCOM PONI

MP-3102

Motor protection drawout case inner chassis, 5A, CT, no communication

MP3001-IC

Motor protection drawout case inner chassis, 5A, CT, with INCOM PONI

MP3002-IC

Motor protection drawout case inner chassis, 1A, CT, no communication

MP-3101-IC

Motor protection drawout case inner chassis, 1A, CT, with INCOM PONI

MP3102-IC

Motor protection drawout case outer chassis

MP3-OC

Motor protection, 5A, URTD, INCOM PONI, fiber optic link

MP3000VPI

Motor protection, 1A, URTD, INCOM PONI, fiber optic link

MP3100VPI

16-foot (5m) fiber optic cable for MP-3000/URTD communication

MPFO-5

Universal RTD module

URTP

22
23
24
25
V12-T10-28

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products
Current Products

FP-5000 Feeder
Protection

Feeder Protection FP-5000

General Description
●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
●

Microprocessor-based
protection with monitoring
and control for medium
voltage main and feeder
applications
Current, voltage,
frequency and power
protection for electric
power distribution
systems
Complete metering of
voltage, currents, power,
energy, minimum/
maximum and demand
functions
Programmable logic
control functions for maintie-main transfer schemes
Trip logs, event logs and
waveform capture for
better fault analysis and
system restoration
Data Logger to provide
energy usage profiles for
better planning, utilization
and energy usage
Compact, drawout case
design
Meets ANSI, UL and cUL®
standards
Multiple setting groups
ANSI, IEC and thermal
protection curves for
greater flexibility

Application Description
Eaton’s FP-5000 feeder
protection relay provides
complete three-phase and
ground overcurrent and
voltage protection plus
metering in a single, compact
drawout case. It may be used
as primary protection on
feeders, mains and tie circuit
breaker applications, and as
backup protection for
transformers, high voltage
lines and differential
protection. The relay is
most commonly used on
medium voltage switchgear
applications.
The FP-5000 takes full
advantage of its
microprocessor technology
providing the user new
freedoms and a wealth of datagathering features. The relay
performs self-checking of all
major hardware and firmware
protection elements to ensure
their operation in the event of a
system or component electrical
failure or fault. Protection
functions are well suited for
main and distribution feeder
circuit applications.
Programmable logic control
functions make the FP-5000
relay ideally suited for main-tiemain and main 1/main 2
transfer schemes.

The multiple settings groups
can be used for arc flash
mitigation when an alternative
setting group, set to have
instantaneous elements only
is activated using a selector
switch and the programmable
I/O in the FP-5000.

When an electrical fault
or disturbance occurs, the
FP-5000 begins to store the
following in non-volatile
memory:
●

●

Features and Benefits
The zone interlocking feature
can be used for bus
protection instead of an
expensive and complicated
bus differential (87B)
scheme. The FP-5000 works
directly with the Eaton Digitrip
3000 and Digitrip MV relays.
Breaker failure logic provides
faster remote backup clearing
times for stuck breaker
operation.
The FP-5000 provides trip and
close circuit monitoring and
alarming features. It
continually monitors the
complete trip and close
circuits for continuity and
readiness to trip. Open and
close pushbuttons are
conveniently located on the
front of the relay for local
breaker operation.

10

●

Voltage and current
sampled data
Calculated values
Status of internal protection
functions, logic, contact
inputs and outputs

Retrieval and viewing of the
data is easy, aiding in the quick
analysis and restoration of
your electric power system.
When the FP-5000 isn’t
responding to disturbances
in the power system, it’s
providing valuable metering
information at the relay and
remotely. It provides energy
usage and demand reading,
and can alarm when usage
reaches a set value. Power
factor measurements can
be used for capacitor bank
switching to control cover
demand. Inboard data
trending can provide load
profiles for up to 40 days.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16

FP-5000 Feeder Protection

17

FP5 2 00 - 0 1
Control Voltage
0 = 48 – 125 Vac/Vdc
1 = 100 – 240 Vac/Vdc

2

13

Loss-of-vacuum monitoring is
activated when the breaker is
open. Residual current is
monitored and alarmed if
detected.

Catalog Number Selection

Current Range
2 = 5 Amperes
3 = 1 Ampere

1

18

Communications Protocol
0 = INCOM
1 = Modbus

19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-29

10
1

IQ Products
Accessories

Digitrip 3000 (DT-3000)

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

DT-3000

General Description
●

●

●

●

●

Microprocessor-based,
three-phase and ground
overcurrent relay
Independent phase and
ground measuring circuits
and operation
ANSI, IEC and thermal
protection curves
Fixed mount or
drawout design
Dual-source power supply
option for AC control
power applications

Eaton’s Digitrip 3000 trip unit
(DT-3000) is a multifunction,
microprocessor-based
overcurrent trip unit designed
for both ANSI and IEC
applications. The DT-3000
design provides true rms
sensing design of each
phase and ground current.

It can be power from either
AC or DC control power. The
DT-3000 can be used for
any application where
instantaneous and/or time
overcurrent protection
is required.
The DT-3000 may be applied
as the transformer primary
protection or as backup to the
differential protection. The
DT-3000 also has zone
selective interlocking to
minimize equipment damage
resulting from a phase or
ground fault in an area where
long time and/or short time
delay is in use.

The integral Dual-Source
Power Supply allows
the DT-3000 to operate
solely from the main CTs
during a fault if the
normally connected
AC voltage is not available,
i.e., an electromechanical
or electronic “self
powered” relay.
Electrical Power System
Protection
The DT-3000 provides phase
and ground protection for
most types of medium
voltage electrical power
distribution systems.

Protection curves are similar
to those on low voltage
power circuit breaker trip
units, and provide close
coordination with
downstream devices, as well
as upstream fuse and/or
electromagnetic relays. Just
one DT-3000 replaces the
normal complement of three
or four conventional
electromagnetic overcurrent
relays, an ammeter, a
demand ammeter, an
ammeter switch and, in some
situations, a lockout relay
switch (device 86).

Product Selection
DT-3000 Ordering Information
Description

Catalog
Number

DT-3000 protective relay

DT3000

DT-3000 protective relay Chicago version

DT3100

DT-3030 protective relay (24–48 Vdc CE Mark version)

DT3030

DT-3000 drawout case protective relay

DT3001

DT-3000 Chicago version drawout case protective relay

DT3101

DT-3030 drawout case protective relay (24–48 Vdc CE Mark version)

DT3031

DT-3000 protective relay with 120 Vac dual-source power supply

DT3010

DT-3000 protective relay with 240 Vac dual-source power supply

DT3020

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T10-30

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

10

IQ Products
Accessories

IQ Flange

Panel Mounting Adapter
Kit for IQ 100/200 Series
and PXM 2000 Meters

IQ DC Power Supply

IQ Cable

1
2
3
4
5
IQ Cable

IQ Flange

For applications where extra
door-mounting space is
required, a flange-mounting
unit is available. Eaton’s IQ
Flange provides an extra 2.50
inches (63.5 mm) of clearance
for the device.

Product Selection
IQ Flange
Description

Catalog
Number

IQ Flange option, to provide IQFLANGE
extra clearance when mounting

IQ DC Power Supply
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit

The flange adapter plate can
be installed as follows:
1. Remove the old meter
from the panel or door.
Many IQ metering
products use the typical
IQ drilling pattern shown
in for mounting.
2. Install the flange adapter
plate. Mount it from the
rear using the six screws
provided in the kit.
The flange adapter
plate screw hole pattern
should match the typical
IQ drilling pattern. If not,
perform the next step.
3. Drill six holes in the panel
or the door to mount
the flange adapter plate.
Follow the typical IQ
drilling pattern. You need
only the top, center and
bottom sets of holes.

The IQ DC Power Supply is a
DC to AC inverter module
intended for use where DC
power is available, but some
AC is required. The unit will
operate an MP-3000 or other
AC powered IQ devices
requiring no more than 75 VA
of power at any power factor.

For applications where
remote mounting of the
power supply is required, an
extension cable is available.
Two types of cable are
available. The first (catalog
number IQCABLE) is for the
obsolete IQ Data, Generator,
and Data Plus II. The
second (catalog number
IQA45CABLE) is for the
IQ Analyzer and IQ DP-4000.

Product Selection

Product Selection

IQ Cable
IQ DC Power Supply
Description

Catalog
Number

IQ DC power supply

IQDCPS

Description

Catalog
Number

36.00-inch (914.4 mm)
extension cable
IQ Data, Generator,
Data Plus II

IQCABLE

45.00-inch (1143.0 mm)
extension cable
IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000

IQA45CABLE

9
10
11
12
13
15
17
18
19
20
21
22

Ordering Information
Catalog
Number

23

IQ250-PMAK

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

8

16

Product Selection

Panel mounting adapter kit
IQ 100/200 and PXM 2000
Series adapter kit to
IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/
IQ Data

7

14

4. Install the new IQ 100/
200 Series or PXM 2000
meter in the flange
adapter plate. Secure it
from behind with four flat
washers, lock washers
and nuts provided with
the meter.

Description

6

24
25
V12-T10-31

10
1

IQ Products
Accessories

IQ Floor-Mounted
Enclosure

Addressable Relay II

Eaton and Westinghouse
have produced a number of
different meters dating back
to the 1980s. Many of these
meters used and continue to
use power modules to
provide voltage sensing
isolation and control power
to the meter.

2
3
4
5
Addressable Relay II

The Addressable Relay II has
two status inputs and a Form C
contact output.

7

●

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Power modules are available
to power the meter directly
from the voltage source being
sensed or for separate control
power input. Renewal part
power modules are available
for the meters shown in the
table below.

Product Selection

6
8

Power Modules

Two 10-Inch Wide Enclosures (Shown
with Optional 10-Inch High Bus
Compartment)

Type 1
Standard AMPGARD
structure construction,
painted ASA-61. To be used
as a lineup extension for
mounting IQ products. Each
10.00-inch (254.0 mm) wide
section comes with (two)
doors with “works-in-adrawer” drawout panel. Each
door has three standard IQ
cutouts with device panels,
and can be supplied with or
without IQ devices.

●

Input rating: 48–120 Vac,
48–125 Vdc
Output contact rating: 10A
at 277 Vac, 10A at 30 Vdc

Features include a
communications watchdog
and relay pulse. Baud rate
is selectable.

Product Selection
Addressable Relay II
Description

Catalog
Number

Addressable Relay II

ARII

Power Modules
Description

Used with Meter
Style Number

Power Module
Catalog Number

Old IQ DP-4000 and IQ Analyzer self-powered
three-phase power module

2D82302GXX 1
4D13110GXX 1

IQA3PPM

Old IQ DP-4000 and IQ Analyzer
separate source 110 to 240 Vac or 110 to 250 Vdc
power module

2D82302GXX 1
4D13110GXX 1

IQASSPM

New IQ DP-4000 and IQ Analyzer
self-powered three-phase
power module

66D2045GXX 1
66D2040GXX 1

IQM3PPM

New IQ DP-4000 and IQ Analyzer
24/48 Vdc power module

66D2045GXX 1
66D2040GXX 1

IQMDCPM

New IQ DP-4000 and IQ Analyzer
separate source 110 to 240 Vac or 110 to 250 Vdc
power module

66D2045GXX 1
66D2040GXX 1

IQMSSPM

Note
1 The adjacent power modules will work with each basic meter style, regardless of the last
two digits of the meter style number.

Product Selection
IQ Floor-Mounted Enclosure
Description

Style
Number

10.00-inch W x 30.00-inch D 2147A95G35
x 90.00-inch H
(254.0 mm W x 762.0 mm D
x 2286.0 mm H)
Bus compartment optional

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T10-32

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

10

IQ Products
Accessories

Current Transformers
(CTs)

Product Selection

1

Solid Core ANSI Metering Accuracy
Primary
Current
Rating

ANSI B0.1
Metering Class at 60 Hz
(Accuracy in %)

Window Size
in Inches (mm)
Diameter

Catalog
Number

Mounting Bracket
Catalog
Number

1.25 (31.8) Window

Current Transformers (CTs)

General Description

50

1.2

1.25 (31.8)

S060-500

1

100

0.6

1.25 (31.8)

S060-101

1

150

0.3

1.25 (31.8)

S060-151

1

200

0.3

1.25 (31.8)

S060-201

1

300

0.3

1.56 (39.6)

S050-301

S050BRAC

400

0.3

1.56 (39.6)

S050-401

S050BRAC

500

0.3

1.56 (39.6)

S050-501

S050BRAC

600

0.3

1.56 (39.6)

S050-601

S050BRAC

750

0.3

1.56 (39.6)

S050-751

S050BRAC

800

0.3

1.56 (39.6)

S050-801

S050BRAC

1000

0.3

1.56 (39.6)

S050-102

S050BRAC

1200

0.3

1.56 (39.6)

S050-122

S050BRAC

Split core CTs are specifically
designed to be installed
around primary conductors
without disconnecting wires
or breaking the circuit to be
monitored. These current
transformers are perfect
solutions for energy
management applications
and are manufactured for
installation ease.

4.25 (108.0) Window

3
4
5

1.56 (39.6) Window

Eaton’s low voltage current
transformers are available in
both solid core and split core
designs. Engineered for
electronic metering
applications, all solid core
designs and selected split
core designs offer ANSI
metering quality accuracy.
The solid core designs also
meet ANSI C57.13 relay
accuracy requirements
including over-ranging
capabilities. The current
transformer offering has a
5 ampere secondary at the
rated primary current.

2

6
7
8
9

3.25 (82.6) Window
400

0.3

3.25 (82.6)

S080-401

S080BRAC

500

0.3

3.25 (82.6)

S080-501

S080BRAC

600

0.3

3.25 (82.6)

S080-601

S080BRAC

750

0.3

3.25 (82.6)

S080-751

S080BRAC

800

0.3

3.25 (82.6)

S080-801

S080BRAC

1000

0.3

3.25 (82.6)

S080-102

S080BRAC

1200

0.3

3.25 (82.6)

S080-122

S080BRAC

12
13

500

0.3

4.25 (108.0)

S090-501

S090BRAC

600

0.3

4.25 (108.0)

S090-601

S090BRAC

750

0.3

4.25 (108.0)

S090-751

S090BRAC

800

0.3

4.25 (108.0)

S090-801

S090BRAC

1000

0.3

4.25 (108.0)

S090-102

S090BRAC

1200

0.3

4.25 (108.0)

S090-122

S090BRAC

1500

0.3

4.25 (108.0)

S090-152

S090BRAC

1600

0.3

4.25 (108.0)

S090-162

S090BRAC

2000

0.3

4.25 (108.0)

S090-202

S090BRAC

2500

0.3

4.25 (108.0)

S090-252

S090BRAC

3000

0.3

4.25 (108.0)

S090-302

S090BRAC

10
11

14
15
16
17

6.31 (160.3) Window
600

0.3

6.31 (160.3)

S025-601

S025BRAC

750

0.3

6.31 (160.3)

S025-751

S025BRAC

800

0.3

6.31 (160.3)

S025-801

S025BRAC

1000

0.3

6.31 (160.3)

S025-102

S025BRAC

1200

0.3

6.31 (160.3)

S025-122

S025BRAC

1500

0.3

6.31 (160.3)

S025-152

S025BRAC

1600

0.3

6.31 (160.3)

S025-162

S025BRAC

2000

0.3

6.31 (160.3)

S025-202

S025BRAC

2500

0.3

6.31 (160.3)

S025-252

S025BRAC

3000

0.3

6.31 (160.3)

S025-302

S025BRAC

3500

0.3

6.31 (160.3)

S025-352

S025BRAC

4000

0.3

6.31 (160.3)

S025-402

S025BRAC

18
19
20
21
22
23

Note
1 Contact Eaton for further information.

24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-33

10
1
2

IQ Products
Accessories

Split Core ANSI Metering Accuracy

Split Core Current Transformers

Primary
Current
Rating

Primary
Current
Rating

ANSI B0.1
Metering Class at 60 Hz
(Accuracy in %)

Window Size
in Inches (mm)

Catalog
Number

Accuracy
at 60 Hz (in %)

Window Size
in Inches (mm)

Catalog
Number

0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5)

2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7)

3

400

2.4

2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7)

M000-401

100

5.0

0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5)

M030-101

500

2.4

2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7)

M000-501

150

5.0

0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5)

M030-151

4

600

2.4

2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7)

M000-601

200

4.0

0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5)

M030-201

800

1.2

2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7)

M000-801

300

2.0

0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5)

M030-301

5

1000

1.2

2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7)

M000-102

400

2.0

0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5)

M030-401

1200

0.6

2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7)

M000-122

1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9)

6

1500

0.6

2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7)

M000-152

100

5.0

1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9)

M040-101

1600

0.6

2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7)

M000-162

150

4.0

1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9)

M040-151

2000

0.6

2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7)

M000-202

200

1.5

1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9)

M040-201

300

1.5

1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9)

M040-301

1.5

1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9)

M040-401

7

4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3)

8

600

4.8

4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3)

M050-601

400

750

4.8

4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3)

M050-751

2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9)

9

800

2.4

4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3)

M050-801

200

1.0

2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9)

M060-201

1000

2.4

4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3)

M050-102

300

1.0

2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9)

M060-301

1200

1.2

4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3)

M050-122

400

1.0

2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9)

M060-401

10

1500

1.2

4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3)

M050-152

500

1.0

2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9)

M060-501

2000

0.6

4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3)

M050-202

600

1.0

2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9)

M060-601

2500

0.6

4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3)

M050-252

750

1.0

2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9)

M060-751

3000

0.6

4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3)

M050-302

800

1.0

2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9)

M060-801

3500

0.6

4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3)

M050-352

1000

1.0

2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9)

M060-102

4000

0.3

4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3)

M050-402

1200

1.0

2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9)

M060-122

11
12
13

2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8)
500

1.0

2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8)

M080-501

14

600

1.0

2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8)

M080-601

800

1.0

2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8)

M080-801

15

1000

1.0

2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8)

M080-102

1200

1.0

2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8)

M080-122

16

1500

1.0

2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8)

M080-152

1600

1.0

2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8)

M080-162

17

2000

1.0

2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8)

M080-202

2500

1.0

2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8)

M080-252

3000

1.0

2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8)

M080-302

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T10-34

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products
Accessories

Clamp-On Current
Transformers

10

Product Selection

1

Ordering Information
Description

Catalog
Number

150–300–600A

IQAPORT0600CT

500–1000–1500A

IQAPORT1500CT

2
3
4
5

IQ Accessories—Clamp-On CTs

6

General Description
Eaton’s optional Clamp-on
Current Transformers (CTs)
are designed to be used in
cases where there are no
existing CTs or the existing
CTs cannot be accessed,
these clamp-on CTs can
be used.

7

These clamp-on CTs are
packaged individually. Most
applications will require at
least three clamp-on CTs,
one for each phase.

10

8
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-35

10
1
2

■

IQ Products
Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.

IQ 2000

IQ Analyzer 6000/6200

●

3

●

4

●

5

●

6
7

●

IQ 2000 Model A

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Features and Benefits

IQ 2000 Model B

Recommended Replacement
Production of IQ 2000
devices has been
discontinued. The IQ 2000
can be replaced with the
MP-3000 electronic motor
protective relay and the
IQ DP-4000 electronic meter.
The MP-3000 provides motor
current protective relaying,
while the IQ DP-4000
provides complete electrical
metering and voltage
protective alarming
functions. For specific
application consideration,
contact your local Eaton
Field Sales office.

IQ Analyzer 6000/6200

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer
IQ Analyzer 6000/6200 is a
complete solution for users
who want to monitor all
aspects of their electrical
distribution system.
It provides extensive
metering, power quality
analysis, remote input
monitoring, control relaying,
analog input/outputs and
communications capability.
All programming can be done
through the faceplate or
through the communications
option. Its online Help
Pushbutton feature displays
information on device
operation, programming
and troubleshooting.

●
●

●

All information accessible
through communications
port
Quality true rms readings
through 50th harmonic
Meets ANSI C12.16 Class
10 revenue metering spec
Accurate readings for nonsinusoidal waveforms with
up to 3.0 crest factor
Screens display auto
ranging units, kilo units,
mega units as needed
10-digit energy readings
Displays multiple
parameters at the
same time
Programmable custom
screens.The IQ Analyzer
Model 6200 with waveform
display at the device
and sub-cycle voltage
disturbance capture
provides the capability to
monitor a wide range of
harmonic parameters.
These include harmonic
voltage, current magnitudes
and phase angles, as well
as system disturbances
such as transient voltage
disturbances and sub-cycle
voltage interruptions. This
unit is also available in a
portable version.

RTD Modules

Universal RTD Module

Recommended Replacement
The RTD Modules for
the IQ 2000 have been
discontinued. Now available
is the new Universal RTD
Module that replaces all of
the RTD modules for the
Model A and B IQ 2000
units, as well as the IQ 1000,
IQ 1000 II and all current
IQ metering and protection
products.

Product Selection
Universal RTD
Description

Catalog
Number

Universal module

URTD

Recommended Replacement
Eaton’s IQ Analyzer 6400/
6600

20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T10-36

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products
Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement

■

10

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.

IQ Data Plus and
IQ Data Plus II

IQ 1000 and IQ 1000 II

1

IQ Data

●

IQ 1000 II

IQ Data

IQ Data Plus II

Recommended Replacement

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ
Data Plus was discontinued
in 1989 and was replaced by
the IQ Data Plus II. The
IQ Data Plus II was
discontinued in 1998.

Both the IQ 1000 and the
IQ 1000 II have been discontinued and replaced by
the MP-3000 for complete
motor protection. A detailed
application note
(MP3K01R4.PDF) describing
replacement of the IQ 1000 II
with an MP-3000 is available
at www.eaton.com.

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ
Data provides simultaneous
current and voltage metering.
In one compact, standard
package, this device provides
an alternative to individually
mounted and wired ammeters,
voltmeters, and ammeter
and voltmeter switches.

Recommended Replacement
IQ DP-4000

Retains preset parameters
through power failure with
use of field-settable DIP
switches (no batteries)

Product Selection

3

IQ Data

4

Description

Catalog
Number

Basic metering

IQDATA

●

●

●

●

●
●

●

●

5

Basic metering with
IQDATAPM
three-phase power module

6

Recommended Replacement

7

IQ DP-4000

8
9
10

Features and Benefits
●

2

11

Space savings in
structure—replaces
ammeter, voltmeter,
selector switches
and frequency meter
(IQ Generator)
Standardization of
design—one doormounted device
Direct voltage input up
to 600V—no additional
potential transformers
(PTs) required
User-friendly—fieldsettable DIP switches
Standard model derives
power from separate
source 120/240 Vac supply
Only two style numbers
No need to stock multiple
units for different current
transformers (CT)
and PT ratios
Interface capability to
computer network for data
collection, storage and/or
printout via IMPACC
Membrane faceplate,
designed and tested
to perform in a harsh
industrial environment
(Type 3R, 12)

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-37

10
1
2

■

IQ Products
Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.

IQ Generator

●

4
5

9
10
11
12

Features and Benefits
●

●

●

●

●
●

●

21
●

23
●

24
25

●

●

IQ 300

20
22

IQGENPM

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ
300’s thin display and flexible
mounting capabilities make it
perfectly suited for any
application where an
accurate, multifunction meter
is desired, such as
panelboard and switchboard
mains and feeders, motor
control centers, and both low
voltage and high voltage
metal-enclosed switchgear.

15

19

IQGEN

Basic metering with
three-phase power module

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer
IQ Generator provides
simultaneous current and
voltage metering. In addition,
the IQ Generator monitors
frequency. This device
provides an alternative to
individually mounted and
wired ammeters, voltmeters,
ammeter and voltmeter
switches, and frequency
meters.

●

18

Basic metering

IQ Generator

14

17

Catalog
Number

IQ DP-4000

13

16

Description

Recommended Replacement

6
8

Features and Benefits

IQ Generator

3

7

IQ 300

Product Selection

Space savings in
structure—replaces
ammeter, voltmeter,
selector switches
and frequency meter
(IQ Generator)
Standardization of
design—one doormounted device
Direct voltage input up
to 600V—no additional
PTs required
User-friendly—fieldsettable DIP switches
Standard model derives
power from separate
source 120/240 Vac supply
Only two style numbers
No need to stock multiple
units for different CT and
PT ratios
Interface capability to
computer network for data
collection, storage and/or
printout via IMPACC
Membrane faceplate,
designed and tested to
perform in harsh industrial
environment (Type 3R, 12)
Retains preset parameters
through power failure with
use of field-settable DIP
switches (no batteries)

V12-T10-38

Bright display with eight
large numeric digits along
with a 10-character
description of the
measured value makes the
IQ 300 ideal for switchgear
mounting
Base unit can be display
mounted for simple, onehole installation
Base unit can be mounted
up to 10 feet (3m) away
from display and has three
mounting options

Product Selection
IQ 300
Description

Catalog
Number

IQ 310 complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch
(355.6 mm) cable—no communications, no pulse output

IQ310

IQ 320 complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch
(355.6 mm) cable—with INCOM communications and pulse output

IQ320

IQ 330 complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch
(355.6 mm) cable—with INCOM communications, pulse output, two contact
outputs, two digital inputs, one analog input and anti-tamper seal

IQ330

IQ 330M complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch
IQ330M
(355.6 mm) cable—with RS-485 Modbus communications, pulse output, two
contact outputs, two digital inputs, one analog input and anti-tamper seal
IQ 300D display module only

Recommended Replacement
IQ DP-4000/4100

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ300D

IQ Products
Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement

■

10

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.

IQ 210/220

IQ 210/220

General Description
Eaton’s IQ 210/220 compact
size and flexible mounting
capabilities make it perfectly
suited for machine control
panels such as panelboard
and switchboard mains and
feeders, low voltage metalenclosed switchgear feeders,
motor control centers, and
especially for individual load
monitoring. The base module
can be display mounted,
panel mounted, DIN rail
mounted or side mounted.
The display fits into a
standard 1/4 DIN cutout,
and for retrofit applications,
a 100 mm ANSI collar
is available.
One IQ 210/220 provides an
alternative to an assortment of
individually wired and mounted
ammeters, voltmeters,
ammeter and voltmeter
switches, wattmeters,
VAR-meters, power factor
meters, frequency meters,
watthour and demand meters.

1

ANSI C12 Class 10 revenue
metering accuracy makes
the IQ 200 an ideal choice
for submetering and subbilling applications.

Product Selection

Description

Catalog
Number

3

The IQ 200 can be easily
programmed and monitored
from the faceplate keypad
that features a 4 line x 20
character LED backlit LCD
display. Opting for the
compatible PowerNet
system allows the user to
program and monitor the
meter remotely from a PC.

IQ 210 complete meter — includes base, display and 14.00-inch (355.6 mm) cable

IQ210

IQ 220 complete meter — includes base display module and 14.00-inch
(355.6 mm) cable with INCOM communications and KYZ output

IQ220

4

IQ 220 transducer base only with INCOM communications and KYZ output

IQ220TRAN

IQ 200D IQ 210/220 display module

IQ200D

3 foot (0.9m) Category 5 cable

IQ23CABLE

6 foot (2.0m) Category 5 cable

IQ26CABLE

10 foot (3.0m) Category 5 cable

IQ210CABLE

Retrofit Opportunities
●
Retrofit of existing
electrical distribution
systems with the IQ 210/
220 for load and energy
monitoring
●
Five mounting options
makes installation easier

Recommended Replacement

2

IQ 210/220 Ordering Information

5
6
7
8

IQ 230

9
10

Ratings
●
Application to 200 kV,
no PTs to 600V
●
CT ratios selectable
5 to 8000A
●
Single-phase two- or
three-wire; three-phase
three- or four-wire

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-39

10
1
2

■

IQ Products
Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.

IQ 110/115 Electronic
Power Meters

Features and Benefits
●

3
4

●

5

●

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

●

IQ 110 Electronic Power Meter

General Description
The IQ 100 Meter family
provides capabilities you
would not normally expect in
affordable, compact meters,
such as fast sampling rate
and accurate metering for a
full range of power
attributes. Providing the first
line of defense against costly
power problems, Eaton’s IQ
100 series electronic power
meters can perform the work
of an entire wall of legacy
metering equipment utilizing
today’s technology.

●

●

●

Measure and display realtime information about
critical power parameters
with a sampling rate of
400 samples per cycle
Monitor power utilization
and quality with ANSI
C12.20 accuracy (0.5%)
Verify meter accuracy with
KYZ test pulse selfcertification capabilities
Optional Modbus RTU
communications
Available as transducer
only or with display
Designed to
accommodate upgrades
Integrate into Eaton’s
Power Xpert Architecture
for a holistic systemlevel view

Product Selection
IQ 110/115 Ordering Information
Description

Catalog
Number

Measures voltage and current

IQ 110

Measures voltage, current and frequency

IQ 115

Recommended Replacement
IQ 130/140

When space is at a premium,
yet you need ANSI C12.20
accuracy, the IQ 100 series
fit the bill. These meters are
ideal for electrical equipment
assemblies, machine control
panels, such as panelboard
and switchboard mains and
feeders, low voltage metalenclosed switchgear feeders
and motor control centers.
Requiring far less space than
other meters with similar
functionality, IQ 100 series fit
into a standard ANSI or IEC
cutout on a panelboard or
other electrical equipment,
and therefore fit easily into
retrofit applications.

21
22
23
24
25
V12-T10-40

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products
Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement

■

10

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.

IQ Power Sentinel

●

●
●

●

IQ Power Sentinal

General Description
Like the IQ Energy Sentinel,
the IQ Power Sentinel
is a highly accurate
microprocessor-based
submeter designed to monitor
power and energy. In addition
to watts, watthour and wattdemand, the IQ power
sentinel monitors current,
voltage, reactive power
(VARs), apparent power (VA),
power factor and frequency.
The IQ Power Sentinel offers
an accurate and economic
alternative to separate
meters and transducers.
The IQ Power Sentinel is
only available in the universal
mount with internal CTs up to
400 amperes.

Features and Benefits
Features
●
Monitors (accuracy stated
full scale)
●
AC line current (each
phase) ±0.5%
●
AC line-to-line voltage
±0.5%
●
AC line-to-neutral
voltages ±0.5%
●
Watts (each phase and
total) ±1.0%
●
VARs (each phase and
total) ±1.0%
●
VA (each phase and
total) ±1.0%
●
Apparent Power Factor
(each phase and total)
±0.5%
●
Displacement Power
Factor (each phase and
total) ±0.5%
●
Demand (total watts)
±1.0%
●
Frequency ±0.5%
●
Watthours ±1.0%

●

●
●

Built-in CTs version up to
400 amperes
Panel or DIN rail mounted
Powered directly off
the line
Built-in communication
capability
●
Address set by
DIP switches
●
Communication at
9600 baud
●
Noise immune
INCOM protocol
Choice of operator
interfaces
●
Subnetwork Master
Local Display
●
Breaker Interface
Module
●
Power Management
Energy Billing software
●
Power Management
Software
UL and CSA listed
CE mark

1

Product Selection

2

IQ Power Sentinal Ordering Information
Description

Catalog
Number

3

Universal with internal CTs, 120/240, 240, 208Y/120

IQPSUI208

Universal with internal CTs, 220/380, 230/400, 240/415

IQPSUI400

4

Universal with internal CTs, 480, 480Y/277

IQPSUI480

Universal with internal CTs, 600, 600Y/347

IQPSUI600

Recommended Replacement

6

PM3

7
8
9
10
11
12

Benefits
●
One device replaces
multiple meters
and/or transducers
●

Improved system accuracy

●

Savings in product cost

●

Savings in space

●

Savings in installation cost

●

No external power source
is needed

●

Permits remote
monitoring and
interconnection with
programmable logic
controllers and building
management systems.
For further information
see section on Power
Management Software
Systems

5

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

●

Designed to interface
directly with Power
Management Software
Energy Billing software

●

Flexibility—displays what
is needed where it is
needed

23

Power Management
Software

24

●

22

25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-41

10
1
2

■

IQ Products
Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement

Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.

IQ Multipoint Energy
Submeter II

●

●

3
4

●

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

●

IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II

General Description
Eaton’s IQ Multipoint Energy
Submeter II is a revenue
class electronic submetering
device that can be mounted in
panelboards or switchboards.
When mounted in a
panelboard or switchboard,
the IQ Multipoint Energy
Submeter II provides
customers with an integrated
power distribution and energy
metering solution that saves
space, reduces installation
labor and lowers total cost.

●

●

●

●

●

Features and Benefits
The IQ Multipoint Energy
Submeter II offers low-cost
metering of kW and kWh
for multiple tenants of
residential and commercial
office buildings for one- to
three-phase voltage loads
not exceeding 347/600 volts.
The IQ Multipoint Energy
Submeter II contains INCOM
networking to chain together
multiple meters in locations
throughout the facility. See
above for a typical apartment
building layout.
●

●

●
●

●

●

Flexible metering
configuration
Monitors single-phase and
three-phase loads from
120 Vac to 600 Vac in
three voltage ranges
Monitors power in watts
and energy in watthours
for up to 16 Current
Sensors
Very low profile design,
less than 1.50 inches
(38.1 mm) in height
Energy values stored in
non-volatile memory
Stores extensive energy
profile data for each
metering point. Can
be used to identify
coincidental peak
demand contribution
Space-saving stacking
design allows two units
to be mounted together
Supports Time-of-Use
energy monitoring
Demand interval adjustable
from 5 to 60 minutes
Measures bus voltage
Front panel LEDs provide
status of unit and
communication activity
Meets rigid ANSI C12.1
and IEC 61036 accuracy
specifications for revenue
meters
Can be directly mounted in
a UL-approved panelboard
or switchboard

Product Selection
IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II Ordering Information
Description

Catalog
Number

IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II 120V with INCOM

IQMESIIN1

IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II 277V with INCOM

IQMESIIN2

IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II 347V with INCOM

IQMESIIN3

Current Sensors—5 amperes, Qty. 3

CS005 1

Current Sensors—50 amperes, Qty. 6

CS050

Current Sensors—70 amperes, Qty. 6

CS070

Current Sensors—125 amperes, Qty. 3

CS125

Current Sensors—200 amperes, Qty. 3

CS200

Current Sensors—400 amperes, Qty. 3

CS400

Current Sensor Extensions—4 feet (1.2m), Qty. 6

CSET04

Current Sensor Extensions—8 feet (2.4m), Qty. 3

CSET08

Current Sensor Extensions—16 feet (4.9m), Qty. 3

CSET16

1

CS005 is not discontinued and is still being used.

Recommended Replacement
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter

Multipoint electrical
energy metering
Built-in communication
interface

20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T10-42

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

IQ Products
Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement

10

Further Information
Publication Number

1

Description

2

Metering Devices
TD02600001E
TD02601007E
TD02601017E
TD150006EN
TD02601016E
TD02601015E
TD02601019E
TD02601018E
TD.17.02B.T.E
TD.17.03A.T.E

Selection Chart
Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000
Power Xpert 2000
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter
IQ 250/260
IQ 130/140/150
IQ 150S/250S
IQ 35M
IQ Analyzer
IQ DP-4000

TD.17.31.T.E
TD.17.06A.T.E
TD02601003E
TD.17.07.T.E

IQ 300
IQ 200
IQ 110/115
IQ Sentinels

TD17C02TE
TD17C01TE
TD17C03TE

IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II
Portable IQ Analyzer
Optional Clamp-on CTs

TD.17.08A.T.E
TD.17.08A.T.E
TD02601002E

IQ DP-4000 I/O Module
IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000 Auxiliary Power Supply
Current Transformers

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Protective Relays
TD02600001E
TD.17.10.T.E
TD.17.11.T.E

Selection Chart
Digitrip 3000 Overcurrent Relay
MP-3000 Motor Protection Relay

10

TD.17.30.T.E
TD.17.12.T.E
TD.17.13.T.E

FP-5000 Feeder Relay
Dual-Source Power Supply
Digitrip 3000 Optional Drawout Case

11

TD.17.14.T.E
TD.17.08A.T.E

Universal RTD Module
IQ DC Power Supply

12
13

Pricing Information
IQ/PXM Products

14

Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount
Symbol C10-S24.

15

DT-3000
Vista/VISTALINE Discount
Symbol MV-3.

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T10-43

Communication Systems
Monitoring Software
and Communications

11

Communication Systems
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PowerNet Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eaton’s Electrical Services & Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Xpert Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Xpert Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mMINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Xpert Gateway 200E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PONI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPONI/MPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MINT II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Addressable Relay II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IMPCABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V12-T11-2
V12-T11-2
V12-T11-3
V12-T11-4
V12-T11-6
V12-T11-8
V12-T11-12
V12-T11-12
V12-T11-13
V12-T11-16
V12-T11-25
V12-T11-25
V12-T11-25
V12-T11-25
V12-T11-26
V12-T11-26
V12-T11-26

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T11-1

11

Communication Systems
Product Description

1

PowerNet Software

2

PowerNet™ (available on the
Power Xpert® Software DVD).
Updates to the PowerNet
system are available;
however, the recommended
update path is to upgrade to
Power Xpert Software. See
Page V12-T11-4 for details
on Power Xpert Software.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Integrated PowerNet Support

General Description
The features of Eaton’s
PowerNet software suite
are available as a standard
part of Power Xpert Software.
PowerNet is a family of
software applications, client/
server configuration, that help
provide a window into an
electrical distribution system.
Existing PowerNet systems
can be easily integrated with
Power Xpert Software.

PowerNet Features
●

Connectivity bundle
●
Communication to 1000
INCOM™ devices
●
Auto learn of all INCOM
connected devices for
maximum usability
●
Security configuration
●
Trending/logging
configurations
●
Device set point editing/
printing/viewing
●
MSDE/SQL data storage
●
Dynamic Data Exchange
(DDE) server
●
OLE for Process Control
(OPC) server
●
Modbus RTU Gateway
to data from Eaton
INCOM communicating
devices

●

Power quality bundle
●
Viewing of captured
waveforms
●
Up to eight cycles of
actual waveform
●
Zoomed-in view of
high-speed waveform
samples
●
Spectrum chart showing
frequency content and
magnitude (Fourier
analysis)
●
CBEMA/ITIC
representation of events
●
Top down access to
specific Waveform
events from event lists
and CBEMA/ITIC curves
●
Trip curve display for
coordination and
selectivity needs
●
Log-log coordination
curve plotted on-screen
for trip units and motor
protective relays with
the click of a button

●

●

●

●

●
●

Online modification of
trip curve pickups and
time delays; instant
verification of
coordination with an
updated trip curve
Automatic scale
adjustment based on
device pickup level
Addition or removal of
trip curves directly from
the display screen
Color-coded curves tied
to the device description
for added clarity
Overlay multiple curves
View motor start profiles
next to motor protection
relay trip curve

11
12

PowerNet Digitrip Screen Viewed
in Power Xpert Software

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T11-2

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems
Product Description

Eaton’s Electrical
Services & Systems

monitoring of the plant with
industry experts in energy and
power quality are all services
provided by our local field
representatives. These
services will ensure that you
get maximum return on all of
your system investments.

PowerNet Software

Supplementing the hardware
and software, Eaton’s
Electrical Services & Systems
can provide local startup
and integration services to
customize the PowerNet
system to your specific
business needs. Basic
field startup, integration of
PowerNet into other plant
systems, and remote

Note: PowerNet systems do
not consist of exclusively CutlerHammer® (Eaton) products.
Hundreds of drivers exist to
communicate with many thirdparty meters, protective relays
and PLCs.

Flexible Network
Architecture
A PowerNet network
can be built in a variety of
configurations. Systems can
be built using existing Ethernet
networks as the backbone,
as well as on a dedicated

twisted shielded pair running
throughout a facility.
Telephone, radio and fiber
modems can be used to
create networks where it
is cost prohibitive to run
dedicated cables. The most
flexible, highest performance
network architecture includes
a dedicated twisted shielded
pair network within the
switchboard or equipment
room connecting into a high
speed Ethernet backbone.
For a layout of a typical facility
network, refer to the 15th
Edition of the Consulting
Application Guide.

Ethernet Backbone
TCP/IP Ethernet networks
have become the worldwide
standard for moving
information. Industry has
recognized Ethernet as a high

11

speed, flexible, low-cost
network that is not vendor
dependent. The PowerNet
network uses a standard
TCP/IP Ethernet as the high
speed backbone for carrying
information to clients across
the plant or across the world.

1

Dedicated Twisted
Shielded Pair

4

Customers who desire to run
a dedicated network for the
power monitoring network
have a choice between a
dedicated Ethernet network
or running a twisted shielded
pair. A network of 1000
devices running up to
10,000 feet can be
networked through one
twisted shielded pair of wire.

5

2
3

6
7
8
9
10

Eaton PowerNet System

Load Interrupter
Switchgear

Medium Voltage
Unit Substation

Medium Voltage
Starter

Transformer

Personal Computer
with Eaton
PowerNet Software

■ Power quality
■ Metering data
■ Energy information
■ Switch/breaker starter status/control
■ Time stamped events
■ Breaker operations
■ Motor runtime
■ Motor winding/bearing temperature
■ Trip curve monitoring/configuration
■ Transformer data

11
12
13
14

Load Interrupter
Switchgear

■ Power quality
■ Metering data
■ Energy information
■ Starter/breaker status/control
■ Time stamped events
■ Breaker operations
■ Trip curve monitoring/configuration

Low Voltage
Secondary Unit
Substation
Transformer

Low Voltage
Switchboard

Lighting
Control
Panelboard

Motor
Control
Center

Adjustable
Frequency
Control

■ Power quality
■ Metering data
■ Energy information
■ Starter/breaker status/control
■ Time stamped events
■ Breaker operations
■ Motor operations runtime
■ Trip curve monitoring/configuration
■ Drive status
■ Drive metering data
■ Drive speed adjustment/control

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T11-3

11

Communication Systems
Product Description

1

Power Xpert Software

Product Selection Guide

Key Features

General Description

●

2

Power Xpert Software
aggregates the information
arriving from different types
of device families via various
communication methods. Its
unique Web-based design,
alarm bubble-up and
advanced trend and
waveform analysis tools
help you to quickly turn
your attention to the most
important events and to
identify reliability issues
and cost-saving opportunities.
The standard custom
graphic package, the
Layout Manager, with an
icon library and standard
vertical templates, allows
you to import and mimic
your physical environment
and gauges. Open protocol
support makes Power Xpert
Software compatible with
most newer generation
third-party equipment. Older
legacy, proprietary protocols
are supported by Power
Xpert Gateways (see
Page V12-T11-13), and
custom software drop-in
drivers made available by
Eaton. Power Xpert Software
is the first power system
software of this caliber
to put all these powerful
features at your fingertips.

Power Xpert Software
Professional Edition
●
Geared toward end users,
with built-in support for
Eaton power distribution
products such as
switchgear, UPSs,
breakers, PDUs, RPPs,
meters, relays, VFDs and
MCCs, among others
●
Eaton products connect
with the software directly
via an Ethernet connection,
while legacy devices use
a Power Xpert Gateway
to Web-enable their
communications
●
A subset of third-party
meters and devices are
supported as standard via
the gateway connection
Power Xpert Software
Enterprise Edition
●
Geared toward advanced
power users, system
integrators and enterprises
with heterogeneous
device spectrum and
system developers who
can take advantage of
the included SNMP and
Modbus integration
development utilities
●
Extensive support for
third-party devices via
standard SNMP and
Modbus TCP protocols
●
Large variety of ready
made, optional third-party
drop in drivers available

●

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

●

●

●

●

●

Connects to your existing
network
Data trending and graphing
for detailed information
for troubleshooting,
problem prevention
and costs savings
Web-based views that
allow access to critical
information from any
location via a Web browser
A modular, scalable
architecture that allows the
addition of capabilities and
devices as the power
system expands
Alarm conditions bubble
up through the system to
allow personnel to identify
which device is in alarm
and where it is located
All the functionality of
Eaton’s PowerNet
software suite
Connectivity to a wide
range of Eaton and thirdparty devices. For a full
list of compatible devices,
refer to the hardware
compatibility list found
at www.eaton.com/pxs

Power Xpert Software Layout Manager

The Power Xpert Software
Layout Manager module
provides the user a library
of powerful design tools and
standard templates for the
creation of custom Human–
Machine Interface (HMI)
graphical layouts. Objects can
be easily animated, various
gauges can be selected,
and custom bitmaps can be
imported with little effort.

Power Xpert Software Edition Features

Feature Sets

Power Xpert
Software
Professional
Edition

Power Xpert
Software
Enterprise
Edition

Server module

■

■

Trend viewer module

■

■

Layout manager module

■

■

Quality manager module

■

■

Eaton device support (switchgear, UPSs, breakers,
ePDUs, meters, relays, VDFs, MCCs, etc.)

■

■

18

Power Xpert Gateway third-party device support

■

SNMP connector

■

19

Modbus connector

■

Optional third-party driver support

■

20

Custom third-party device driver support

■

16
17

■

Note: For a full list of supported devices, see the Hardware Compatibility
List at www.eaton.com/pxs.

21

For detailed information regarding Power Xpert Software
modules, system requirements, supported devices and more,
please see www.eaton.com/pxs or the Consulting Application
Guide, CA08104001E, Tab 2.

22
23
24
25
V12-T11-4

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems
Product Description

11

Power Xpert Software General Features

1

Features

Features

General

UPS Shutdown

Web browser user interface

File saving during shutdown

Web-based monitoring capabilities

Automatic, orderly and sequential shutdown

Downloadable software version updates

Parallel redundant UPS shutdown capability

Event Notification

Security and Administration

Event notification via e-mail notification

Windows authentication security

Event notification via pagers, text message or third-party interfaces

Two tier secure system access support

Alarm state management

SSL

Event indicator displayed without Web page active

Secure Web browser access (support for HTTPS)

Alarm/event searching and filtering

Trend object support

Waveform attached to applicable power event

Time Synchronization

Web browser based waveform viewing

Time synchronization support for connected devices with 1 millisecond time resolution

Alarm capabilities based on device driven events

Export and Integration

Analysis and Trending

Extended Excel® spreadsheet support

Graphic trend viewer

SQL database query support

Chart or data option selection

Logs

Multiple trends display

System log

Multiple axis support

Error log

View multiple variables (i.e., Ia, Ib, Ic, Vab, Vbc, etc.) for a single waveform

Service

Standard COMTRADE file format support

Eaton help desk services (1-877-ETN-CARE)

Customizable trend viewer look and feel

Turnkey startup service

Fixed or custom time frames

System Backup

Trend analysis capabilities

Power Xpert Software system backup

Data export

Documentation and Training Videos

Custom Graphics and Layouts

System Administrator’s Guide

Custom graphics development via Web browser

Power Xpert Software User’s Guide

Four user view example templates included as standard

Layout Manager Guide

iFrame capability

Quick Start Guide

Browser portal widget support

Power Xpert Software introduction and training video

Streaming media support

Power Xpert Reporting introduction and training video

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Graphic object library included as standard
ISO standard electrical picture objects available

17

Graphic files import capability
Graphic object animation capability

18

Gauge object library support
External Web Links support

19

Alarm bubble-up support through several page layers

20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T11-5

11
1
2

Foreseer
Software
(one or more
instances)

4CR Data
Acquisition
Engine

6

10
11
12

Greenhouse Gas Report:
Captures the six offensive
greenhouse gasses:
carbon dioxide, sulfur
dioxide, nitrogen oxide,
mercury, methane and
nitrous oxide broken
down by selected locations
within a facility

●

Utilities Report: Captures
consumption of water, air,
gas, electricity and steam
(WAGES)

Power Xpert Reporting

5

9

●

Power Xpert Reporting
Architectural Overview

4

8

Product Description

Power Xpert Reporting

3

7

Communication Systems

Power Xpert
Software
(one or more
instances)

Device
Aggregators
(PowerNet,
Gateways)

●

Capacity Summary
Report: The summary of
top- and bottom-loaded
circuits, as well as loading
details for each circuit
according to user-defined
date/time range and facility
hierarchy location

●

Branch Circuit Monitoring
Report: Determine branch
circuit loading levels at a
glance with color-coded
graphics indicating loading
status against capacity.
Redundant sources can be
reviewed, as well as single
source loads

Power Xpert
Devices
(Meters,
Gateways,
Other)

Third-Party Devices, Non-Power Xpert Devices

Power Xpert Reporting
brings the power system
information together to
compare and contrast.
Power Xpert Reporting
provides a standard set
of reports, including:
●

Greenhouse Gas Report

Data Center Efficiency
Report: A summary of
data center infrastructure
efficiency and power usage
effectiveness, including
such information as
temperature and humidity,
and energy consumption

13
14

Capacity Summary Report
Branch Circuit Monitoring Report

15

Utilities Report

16
17
18

Data Center Efficiency Report

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T11-6

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

11

Communication Systems
Product Description

●

Energy Summary
Report: The summary of
consumption (kWh) and
demand (kW) for a userdefined date/time range and
facility hierarchy location

●

Power Quality Report:
The distribution and trend
for amps, volts and THD
according to user-defined
date/time ranges and
facility hierarchy location

Joint Commission
Report: Standard Joint
Commission Compliant
Report supports hospital
power test requirements.
It checks events, key
metrics of generators and
automatic transfer switches
(ATS) during generator
testing at user-defined
date/time ranges and
facility hierarchy location

Startup Service Packs Include
the Following Services
●
Startup Scope
Determination: Eaton
services will help you
to evaluate your service
needs and check that the
service pack you have
selected has appropriate
coverage for your
circumstances
●
Pre-Installation Checkup:
Eaton services will contact
you to go through the preinstallation checklist, which
ensures efficient, prime
quality installation and
configuration services
●
Installation and
Configuration: Eaton
services will install Power
Xpert Software and
configure it for operation
with your equipment
according to startup
scope determination.
Configuration may also
include creating custom
graphic layouts if necessary
and if required
●
System Test: Eaton
services will test the
Power Xpert Software
for operability and will
validate communications
with key components
●
Optional Hands-On
Training: If required,
Eaton services can provide
hands-on training for Power
Xpert Software, using the
software on-site or using
simulated demo systems

Joint Commission Report

Energy Summary Report
●

●

Energy Cost Allocation
Report: The total energy
bill dollar value or a cost
per kWh across a facility
hierarchy for a user-defined
date/time range

Service Offerings

Power Quality Report
●

Event Summary Report:
Provides a Pareto chart of
events according to userdefined date/time ranges
and facility hierarchy
location

Energy Cost Allocation Report

Available Power Xpert Startup
Service Packs
At Eaton, we want to make
it as easy and non-disruptive
as possible to implement
our Power Xpert products.
Eaton offers several startup
service packs from partial
help to full turnkey solution
implementation.
All services are performed
by authorized Eaton’s
Electrical Services &
Systems group personnel.

Power Xpert 1 Day
Power Xpert 2 Day
Power Xpert 5 Day

15–30 2

31–75 2

>75 2

Non-Eaton
Devices 3

■

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

19
20

■
■

Customer Fixed Price Quote 4
Event Summary Report

3

18

Number of Eaton Devices to be Integrated
<15 2

2

17

Selecting the Appropriate Service Pack 1

Startup Service Product

1

■

■

Notes
1 Available and valid in continental United States only.
2 Typical number of Eaton devices that can be configured in the Power Xpert Software during
the course of the selected Startup Service Pack.
3 We strongly recommend a review of the latest Hardware Capability List at www.eaton.com/pxs.
4 Please call the Technical Resource Center for custom Startup Service at 800-809-2772,
option 4, 1, for a price quote.
The number of devices that can be configured during the course of a selected Start Pack can vary
depending on the devices’ installation readiness levels. Maximum numbers indicated require full
configuration readiness levels defined in the Power Xpert Startup Services Checklist document
in the service’s brochure at www.eaton.com/pxs.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T11-7

21
22
23
24
25

11
1
2
3

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Technology Upgrades

Technology Upgrades
The INCOM network consists
of a twisted shielded pair
of conductors that interface
to one of the following
hardware devices:
●

4
5

Communication Systems

●

Master INCOM Network
Translator II (MINT II)
attached to the COM
port of computer
Power Xpert Gateway
(PXG 200E, PXG 400E,
PXG 600E, PXG 800E)

When updating the software
at an existing installation,
careful consideration should
be administered and all new
PowerNet interface hardware
options considered when
constructing the update bill
of material.
In some instances, the
computer running the
Series III software is an
industrial computer that
has no monitor, keyboard
or mouse, and is installed
as a part of a larger system
solution. This device is
referred to as the Power
Xpert Gateway, catalog
numbers PXG 200E,
PXG 400E, PXG 600E
and PXG 800E. In these
situations, there is, typically,
a main system computer
that uses additional software
solutions to integrate the
system. The Power Xpert
Gateway is used as a way
of using the infrastructure of
the currently installed Local
Area Network (LAN) as a
means of collecting data
from remote substations.
This is not the only item that
will require updating if existing
in the system.

20

Series III system solutions, in
some cases, incorporated a lot
of non-standard equipment
to meet various connectivity
needs. In some instances,
where multiple COM ports
are required, port splitters
were used to expand one
COM port into 8, or even
16, equivalent COM ports
for communications with
remote or local MINT II
devices (DIGIBOARD). These
various system configuration
requirements will have to be
ascertained and accounted
for before updating.

Inventory Existing
Series III Software
Series III software consists
of the main Series III package
that includes the engine
communicating to the
devices through the MINT II
hardware. Series III came in
various packages supporting
20, 200 and/or 1000 devices.
The Series III software
included most functionality in
a single operator interface. It
included, but was not limited
to, the following features:
●

Update Path
Note: When updating the
computer for the new system
software, ISA slots may not be
available. In these instances,
PXG-E products are typically
employed.
●

●

●

MINT II devices are
compatible with PowerNet
and will not require
updating
NetLink products should
be replaced with PXG 600E
or PXG 800E hardware
mMINT

For those unique applications
that may have Ethernet
and Modbus® on the same
gateway node. For Ethernet,
use the correct PXG-E model,
and for Modbus serial, use
the mMINT.

●

●

●

●

Monitoring of all real-time
parameters from the
configured devices
Access to change or to
view the set points of
those devices that
support this functionality
Logging of selected
parameters to ASCII
Comma Separated Variable
(CSV) files
Device Alarming
notification and
confirmation viewable
via user interface and
historically captured in
ASCII CSV files
Built-in Dynamic Data
Exchange (DDE) server
capabilities

In addition to the basic
Series III software package,
add-on applications were
available that expanded
the basic functionality of
the monitoring software
including, but not limited
to, the following features:
●

●
●
●

Energy billing and cost
allocation
Waveform display
Trip curve display
Modbus Gateway
capabilities

Master PC Requirements
When planning to update
a Series III system,
replacement of the personal
computer will be required.
Due to the operating
system as well as memory
requirements, the Series III
computer will not meet
the requirements for a
PowerNet computer.
Update Path
The PC requirements may
change with later versions
of the PowerNet software
applications. Please refer
to the Eaton website for
updated information
on PC requirements:
www.eaton.com.

In all other instances where
custom third-party equipment
was used to achieve
connectivity solutions, thirdparty vendors should be
consulted for appropriate
update paths and careful
consideration of compatibility
with the new PowerNet
software to ensure a smooth
update path.

21
22
23
24
25
V12-T11-8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

11

Communication Systems
Technology Upgrades

Series III and Old NetPower Codes with PowerNet Product Codes

1
NPBILLDDE

NPBILLTRACK

NPBILL1000

NPBILL200

NPBILL20

NPCOREMOD

NPMODBUS

NPDDE

NPOPC

NPETREND

Energy Billing

NPSETPOINT

NPWAVEFORM

NPEVENT

NPMONITOR

NPCORE1000

NPCORE200

NPCORE100

Add-on Mods

NPCORE20

ETRACK

ETREND

EBILLUL

EBILL200

EBILL20

ELOG3

TRIPDPS3

MODGATE3

WDISP3

S31000

Energy Billing

NPCORE2

Core

Add-on Mods

S30200

New PowerNet
v. 3.3x Product Codes

PowerNet v.3.22 and Older Product Codes

Core

S3020

Description

IMPACC Series III Product Codes

Connectivity Bundles Device Support
5-device

PNCONNECT5

10-device

PNCONNECT10

32-device

PNCONNECT34

100-device

PNCONNECT100

200-device

PNCONNECT200

500-device

PNCONNECT500

1000-device

PNCONNECT1000

5

■
■
■

6

■

■

7

■

PowerNet Bundles
Standard client

PNSTD

Power quality

PNPQ

■
■

■

■

■

8

■
■

■

9

Integrator Package
Includes OPC,
PNINTEGRATOR
DDE, and Modbus
Gateway

Identify Graphics
Interface Used
The IMPACC Series III
software was sold with an
option for an Enhanced
Graphics application, a
Wonderware InTouch
software HMI solution.
The screens were typically
developed by Eaton as a
turnkey solution, but this
software could be purchased
separately with development
performed by the customer,
or by independent local
integrators.
The graphics application
could be located on the
local Series III computer
or on remote networked
computers. It is important
to identify all computers in
the system that have the
Enhanced Graphics
application installed.

■

Update Path
PowerNet is compatible
with Wonderware InTouch
version 7.1 and above. All
HMI software locations will
require updating to the latest
version via the following
catalog numbers:
Note: When updating the
graphics application to interface
with the PowerNet DDE Server,
due to DDE Tag changes, a review
of the Tags displayed and used for
control will be required for proper
modification. Development time
must be allocated for this update.

For those computers
networked and running
Wonderware InTouch
runtime or view-only nodes,
PowerNet DDE can be
removed and local DDE
Server client applications
installed for more reliable
and quality local DDE
communications.

3
4

■

■

2

■

Identify Connectivity
Solutions Employed
Communication system
solutions will, in some cases,
implement software and/or
hardware equipment to share
the information gathered
from installed meters, relays
and I/O devices with other
software and/or systems
including Distributed Control
Systems (DCS), Building
Management Systems
(BMS) or Programmable
Logic Controllers (PLC).

■

■

■

10

When reviewing an
installation, this fact may
not be readily discernible
and some investigation may
be necessary.

11
12

Update Path
When updating the Series III
software in the section
above, DDE comes as a
part of the update path.

13

Note: For remote nodes running
Wonderware or any other
HMI software application, the
following catalog number can
be purchased and installed on
the remote PC, eliminating the
need for implementation of the
Microsoft® NETDDE solution.

15

Dynamic Data
Exchange (DDE)

NPDDE PowerNet DDE Server
client application software.

18

Used in conjunction with
Human Machine Interface
(HMI) software applications
such as Wonderware and
Intellusion. These applications
could also be installed on
remote computers when
PowerNet DDE is used
to share information over
a network.

Locate this software on the same
computer as the HMI software.

19

Connectivity with the Series III
system solutions included the
following methods:

14
16
17

20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T11-9

11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Communication Systems
Technology Upgrades

Modbus (Series III Computer
as Modbus Gateway)

Modbus (Industrial PC
as Modbus Gateway)

RS-232 (MINT II with Custom
Driver in Master System)

Used in conjunction with
Building Management
Systems, Distributed Control
Systems, or even PLCs
where the Modbus master
equipment is connected to
the communication serial port
of the Series III computer.
The Modbus add-on to
Series III enables the COM
port of the computer to be
configured as a Modbus
slave, providing the customer
the ability to configure input
and holding registers.

Used in conjunction with
Building Management
Systems, Distributed Control
Systems or even PLCs where
the Modbus master
equipment is connected to
the communication serial port
of the Series III computer.
Available for sale was an
industrial computer (no
monitor, keyboard or mouse)
with a Modbus server
software application installed.
The functionality of the
software installed on the
industrial PC focuses
on Modbus register
configuration and availability.
Other monitor, DDE and
trending features common to
Series III are not available.

Used in conjunction with
Building Management
Systems, Distributed Control
Systems or even PLCs. In
this case, the customer has
written or contracted to have
written a custom driver that
communicates directly to the
installed INCOM devices via
the MINT II RS-232 interface.

Update Path
NPMODBUS: Client
application that turns the
COM port of the computer
into a Modbus server
application. Client can be
located on any computer with
appropriate operating system
and on the same network as
the rest of the PowerNet
system software.
NPCOREMOD: Turns the
COM port of the computer
running the PowerNet
software core into a Modbus
server. This can only be
located where the Core
software application is located.

15

Update Path
Power Xpert Gateway

Update Path
Series III software is not a
part of this configuration.
There is no update path;
the MINT II is still a viable
solution. For those
applications that connect
with the Johnson Controls®
Metasys® System via the
MINT II and Metasys
Integrator, the JMI should
be used.

RS-232 (Series III PC COM
Port Gateway, Custom Driver
in Master System)
Used in conjunction with
Building Management
Systems, Distributed Control
Systems or even PLCs. Most
common applications include
BMS software such as
Johnson Controls Metasys
System integration. Where
customers implemented this
solution, the need for the
functionality of the Series III
is apparent but the sharing
of data is required. When
updating to PowerNet,
customers must pay close
attention to this need.
Update Path
Series III had the ability to
configure the COM port of
the computer into a gateway,
which made the COM port
look like a MINT II to the
master communicating
software application. This
functionality is not included in
the PowerNet software suite
of applications. Connectivity is
left to DDE, OPC or Modbus
communications. Before
updating, the master software
suite vendor should be
consulted as to which of the
above protocols is supported
and the appropriate steps for
integration taken.

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T11-10

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

11

Communication Systems
Technology Upgrades

PowerNet Device Selection Chart

■

■

■

Current phases

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Current ground

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

2
Quad XYZ

■

■

Power Manager

■

■

Addressable Relay II

■

■

IQ Transfer Switch

■

■

Advantage

FP-5000

■

■

RTD Module

Network Protector
Relays

■

■

IQ 500

Digitrip RMS 910

■

■

MP-3000

Digitrip 1150

■

■

Digitrip 3000

Power Sentinel

■

Voltage (phase-neutral)

Digitrip RMS 810

IQ 200/IQ 300

Voltage (phase-phase)

Energy Sentinel

Communicating Device
Function Selection Chart

■

1

Miscellaneous Devices

IQ DP-4000/
IQ DP-4100

Digitrip OPTIM 750

Protective Relays
Digitrip OPTIM 1050

LV Breaker Trip Units

IQ Analyzer

Metering Devices

4
5

■

6

Power
kW

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

kWh

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

kVA

■

■

■

■

kVAh

■

■

■

VARs

■

■

■

VARh

■

■

■

PF

■

■

■

■

kW demand

■

■

■

■

■

■

kVA demand

■

■

■

■

■

■

Ampere demand

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

kVAR demand

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

11

THD

50

31

■

12

Current THD

■

■

Voltage THD

■

■

CBEMA/crest factor

■

Frequency

■

Current waveform

■

Voltage waveform

■

■

■

3

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

7
8

■
■

■

■

■

■

■

■

9

■

Demand
■

■

10
■

Power Quality

■

31
■

■

■

31

■

■

■

■

■
■

13
14

■
■

■
■

15

Other Features
■

■

Operations count

■

■

■

■

■

High load

■

■

■

■

■

Trip target data

■

■

■

■

■

Remote open/close

■

■

■

■

■

Downloadable set points

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

16
17

■
■

■

■

18

■

Start profile
Auxiliaries
Input/Output
Digital input

3

1
3

Digital output

4(3)

Analog input

1

Analog output

4

8

1

2

5

4

2

4

1

20

11
1

21

Communication Modules
IPONI

≥1.06

INCOM communications std.
BIM

■

■
■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

19

■

■

■

22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T11-11

11

Communication Systems
Communication Hardware

1

Communications
Hardware

2

mMINT

3

Features

Simplified Wiring Rules

The mMINT module is a
slave device on the Modbus
network and as such requires
a master that will exchange
register objects with the
mMINT module.

INCOM Network
The following simplified
rules apply to a given system
consisting of a single daisychained main cable link
between master and
slave devices (see figure
below). For more complex
considerations including
star configurations, please
refer to the IMPACC wiring
specification T.D. 17513.

●

4

●

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

mMINT Module

Product Description
The mMINT (Modbus Master
INCOM Network Translator)
Module is an Eaton accessory
product that will provide
communication between
a Modbus RTU network
and an INCOM (INdustrial
COMmunications) network
(see the mMINT in a
Communications Network
figure). This module is
transparent to the Modbus
network. It communicates
to a master on the Modbus
network using the Modbus
RTU (Remote Terminal Unit)
protocol. It communicates to
slave devices on the INCOM
network using the IMPACC
(Integrated Monitoring,
Protection, and Control
Communication) protocol.
The catalog number of this
product is mMINT.

17

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Handles generic passthrough commands
(Modbus/INCOM/Modbus)
Capable of passing
Modbus register objects
from Eaton’s existing
products and newer PnP
(Plug-‘n-Play) products to a
Modbus RTU master
Data in IEEE® Floating
Point format and fixed
point
Modbus RTU
communications data
transfer rates of 1200,
9600 or 19,200 baud with
one start bit, eight data
bits, no parity, and either
one or two stop bits
Up to 32 products
connected to INCOM
network port (246 unique
addresses maximum)
Flashing Status LED to
indicate an active module
LED indicators for INCOM
transmit and receive
communications
exchanges
LED indicators for Modbus
RS-485 transmit and
receive communications
exchanges
Input power for the module
from either 120 Vac or
24–125 Vdc
DIN rail mount package
0° to 60°C ambient
operation

18

●

19

Module Mounting
When mounting the mMINT,
verify that an 11 mm H x 28 mm
W DIN rail is used and that it is
within an enclosed space.

20
21

Modbus RS-485 Network
The following simplified
rules apply to a given system
consisting of a cable link
between master and slave
devices (see figure below). For
more complex configurations,
please refer to standard
Modbus RTU wiring
specification rules for
the RS-485 network.
●

mMINT in a
Communications Network
Modbus RTU Serial Network

●

(Slave)
Modbus
mMINT

Modbus
Master

(Master)
INCOM Network

INCOM
Slaves
●

●

●

●

Recommended INCOM
cable styles are Belden
9463 or C-H style
2A957805G01
The maximum system
capacity is 10,000 feet of
communications cable and
32 slave devices on the
INCOM network under
the mMINT
Non-terminated taps, up to
200 feet in length, off the
main link are permitted,
but add to the total cable
length
Make sure that there
is twisted-pair wire that
is recommended for
IMPACC network use.
Use shielded twisted-pair
wire to connect each slave
to the INCOM network,
daisy-chain style. The
polarity of the twisted
pair is not important

●

The recommended
Modbus cable has twistedpair wires (24 AWG
stranded 7x32 conductors
with PVC insulation) having
an aluminum/mylar foil
shield with drain wire
The maximum system
capacity is 4000 feet of
communications cable
and 247 devices on the
Modbus RTU network
Make sure that there is
twisted-pair wire that is
recommended for Modbus
RTU network use. Use
shielded twisted-pair wire
to connect each slave to
the Modbus RTU network,
daisy-chain style. The
polarity of the twisted pair
is critically important

mMINT Module
Dimensions
RS-485
Modbus
A B COM SHD

J3

4.25
(108.0)

J2

J1

24–125 Vdc
120 Vac

Shield INCOM
3.54
(89.9)

Burden
●
24 Vac/Vdc, 3 VA
Safety Standards
●
UL®
●
CSA®
●
CE mark

22
23

Communications Speed
●
INCOM: 1200, 9600 baud
●
N2 bus: 9600 baud

24
25
V12-T11-12

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems
Communication Hardware

Power Xpert
Gateway 200E

Fixed list of supported
devices (no ability to add
new product support via
EDS upload); however,
new supported devices will
be added during firmware
updates.

Power Xpert Gateway 200E
●

Product Description
The Power Xpert Gateway
200E (PXG 200E) is designed
to provide a Web-enabled
gateway to serially
communicating energy
meters via a standard Web
browser. These can be new
or existing meters. The PXG
200E supports revenue grade
single and multipoint energy
meters via Modbus RTU and
INCOM. This product provides
a cost-effective, retrofit
hardware solution for better
energy management without
the need for software.
The PXG 200E allows you to:
●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Monitor energy usage
patterns and reveal
opportunities for efficiency
improvements using
existing communicating
meters
Remotely monitor real-time
conditions and profile
5-minute interval trend
logs, and export data in
csv, without a software
implementation
Allocate energy costs to
departments or processes
Reduce peak demand
surcharges
Reduce power factor
penalties
Identify billing
discrepancies
Allows user to daisy-chain
multiple Ethernet
compatible downstream
devices via RJ-45 port
(for specifics, see
Page V12-T11-15, PXG-E
Daisy Chain Application)
Connect to downstream
devices via a Web browser,
Modbus master or
SNMP client separately
or concurrently

●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●

IQ 35M
IQ Energy Sentinel
IQ 130
IQ 140
IQ 150
IQ 220/230
IQ 220M/230M
IQ 250
IQ 260
IQ MESII
DIM KYZ (WAGES)
EI NEXUS 1200 Series
PM710

11

Technical Data and Specifications

1

PXG 200E Part Numbers

2

Style
Number

Catalog
Number

Power Xpert Gateway 200E

103008420-5591

PXG200E

Power supply—24 Vdc

ELC-PS02

ELC-PS02

Mounting bracket kit

66B2146G01

PXGACC01

Description

Features

Features

PXG 200E

Total number of supported devices

64

Maximum number of INCOM devices supported

64

Maximum number of Modbus devices supported

32

Protocols supported on downstream devices: (INCOM and Modbus RTU)

Yes

Number of downstream communication ports

2
2

For detailed technical
specifications, please
reference the Technical
Data Sheet for this product
at www.eaton.com/pxg, then
the Power Xpert Gateway
200E link.

USB port for configuration

Yes

Power Xpert Gateway
Screenshots

Home Page

Bus Page

Two RJ-45 Ethernet ports—10/100Base-T

Yes

Modbus TCP/IP protocols supported

Yes

SNMP client access v.1

Yes

INCOM slave action commands supported

Yes

INCOM date and time settings supported

Yes

Modbus write commands supported from Modbus master

Yes

Device summary screens per main, bus and device

Yes

Event notification via the Web interface

Yes

Secure Ethernet communications—SSL encryption

Yes

Secure communication ports via access control/trusted host list

Yes

IPv4 support

Yes

Save and restore configuration file

Yes

Interval logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel

Yes

Ability to upload additional or modified EDS files

No

Device waveform access and storage—COMTRADE file format

No

Set user-defined events

No

Trend graph displayed

Yes

Data logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel

No

Event logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel

No

E-mail notification on events and threshold alarms

No

Custom summary Web page creation

No

Ability to create custom events

No

Supports SAM3Z energy meters

No

BACnet/IP support

1

4
5

PXG 200E Features

Number of downstream protocols supported simultaneously

●

3

Yes

Note
1 Expected availability 2Q12.

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Device Page

25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T11-13

11
1
2
3

Communication Systems
Communication Hardware

Supported Devices
Supported Devices

Web
Services

INCOM
Pass-Thru

File
Export csv

Modbus
Pass-Thru

Protocol

Device Type

Device Name

INCOM

I/O

DIM KYZ (WAGES)

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

INCOM

Meter

IQ MESII

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

IQ 220/230

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

INCOM

Meter

HTTP

MB TCP

SNMP

BACnet/IP

INCOM

Meter

IQ Energy Sentinel

■

■

■

■

■

Modbus

Meter

IQ 130

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Modbus

Meter

IQ 140

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

5

Modbus

Meter

IQ 150

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Modbus

Meter

IQ 220M/230M

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

6

Modbus

Meter

IQ 250

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Modbus

Meter

IQ 260

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

4

7
8
9
10
11
12

Modbus

Meter

EI NEXUS 1200 Series

■

Modbus

Meter

IQ 35M

■

The Eaton Power Xpert
Gateway 200E Includes:
●

●

●

The Power Xpert
Gateway module
Mounting provisions and
required hardware for panel
and DIN rail mounting
CD-ROM: contains the
user manual, Modbus
register maps, USB driver
and other associated files

■

Power Xpert Gateway
with DIN Rail Mounting
(Brackets Included)

13

Power Xpert Gateway—Dimensions in Inches (mm)

14

Power Xpert Gateway 200E

15
16
17
18
19
20

24 Vdc
Input Power

COM 1 Port:
RS-485 Connection
for up to 32 Modbus
RTU Devices

INCOM Port:
RS-485 Connection
for up to 64 INCOM
Devices

RJ-45
Connection
to the LAN

RJ-45 Connection
to the Other
Ethernet Devices

USB Connection for
Local Configuration
Capability

Power and Traffic
Indicator Lights

21
22
23
24
25
V12-T11-14

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems
Communication Hardware

11

Power Xpert Gateway 200E with Standard Panel Mounting (Brackets Included)
Ø 0.19 (6)
(4.8)

1

10.75
(273.1)

10.25
(260.4)

2
3

0.56
(14.2) 1.60
(40.6)

2.00 1.12
(50.8) (28.5) 0.56
(14.2)

4
0.24
(6.1)

8.75
(222.3)

5

0.25
(6.4)

Front

6

Power Xpert Gateway 200E

7

8.75
(222.3)

8
9
10
11

4.30
(109.2)

12
13
14
0.60
(15.2)

15

PXG-E Daisy Chain Application
The PXG-E allows for units to
be connected together
through two RJ-45 10/100
connectors on the front of
the PXG-E series of products.
This arrangement is a
pass-through of Ethernet
communications allowing
a single network drop to

16

connect up to five Ethernet
communicating devices. The
maximum length of a copper
cable run should not exceed
295 ft (90m) total.

17
18

Note: In this configuration, if any
of the PXG-E units go offline or
lose power, the communication to
the downstream Ethernet devices
will lose connection to the LAN.

19
20

PXG-E Daisy Chain Application

21

Ethernet LAN

22

LAN Connection

23

Cat-5 Patch Cables

24
295 ft (90m)

25

PXM2000

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T11-15

11
1

Communication Systems
Communication Hardware

Power Xpert Gateway
400E/600E/800E

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Power Xpert Gateways 400E,
600E and 800E

Power Xpert Gateways 400E,
600E and 800E are typically
installed in an electrical
assembly—a motor control
center, low/medium voltage
switchgear or switchboard
to consolidate data available
from components such as
trip units, meters, motor
controllers and protective
relays. It can be installed
later to provide the same
valuable information.

Product Description
Power Xpert Gateways 400E,
600E and 800E (PXG 400E/
600E/800E) provide a costeffective method to easily
Web-enable Eaton and thirdparty products.
The PXG 400E/600E/800E
series offers improved
performance over the
previously offered series,
including logging in the
PXG 600E/800E, daisy
chaining capabilities
(Page V12-T11-19,
Figure PXG-E Daisy Chain
Application) and design
enhancements including a
new processor and additional
RAM and Flash memory.
The gateway consists of an
embedded Web server that
allows the user to connect to
installed Eaton products such
as breakers, meters and relays
found in MCCs, LV and MV
switchgear and switchboards
—to name a few—that
communicate via Eaton
protocols INCOM and QCPort,
in addition to third-party
products that communicate
via Modbus RTU. The
Gateway provides the central
connection point for the
power metering/monitoring/
protective devices, allowing
their parameters to be
monitored via the Web.

V12-T11-16

The PXG 400E/600E/800E
provide data communications
to Eaton’s Power Xpert
Software and other thirdparty systems to facilitate
centralizing and gathering
data for long-term data
archival, analysis and
trending features.
The PXG 400E/600E/800E
are compatible with and
facilitate integration with
many third-party building
and factory automation
systems via Modbus TCP
and Web services.

In the PXG 400E/600E/800E,
information is presented in
organized, user-friendly Web
pages and includes, but is not
limited to, the following:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●

Note: Enclosed solution available.
Contact your Eaton sales office
for more details.

The PXG 600E/800E allow
you to enable pre-selected
parameters to be trended
for each supported device.
Selecting the trend symbol
will generate a real-time
graph for that parameter
and can be viewed for the
past 24 hours, seven days,
30 days or all past history.
The PXG 600E/800E
also offer direct e-mail
notifications to up to 10
users. Select from event
notifications, data logs,
interval log, event logs
and heartbeat e-mails.
The PXG 800E brings this
communication hardwareonly solution closer to those
requirements that have
previously only been met
by a software package. The
PXG 800E includes all the
functionality of the PXG 600E.
Additional features include:
●

●

●

Creation of custom
summary Web pages
on the user interface
Ability to create custom
events from existing
device parameters or
events
Ability to communicate
wirelessly with the SAM3Z
submetering system

Device status
Comm status
Voltage
Current
Power
Power factor
Energy
Power quality
Temperature
I/O states

Power Xpert Gateway
Screenshots
Downstream devices on the
Power Xpert Gateways often
report key operating status
information that warrants
immediate attention. The
PXG identifies a set of key
status values for each device
and generates “Events” in
response to changes in these
status values. An example of a
device event is an overcurrent
trip on a circuit breaker.
In addition to displaying
events on its home page,
the PXG reports events to
monitoring software such as
Power Xpert Software. These
events will then be integrated
with those from across the
power system, providing
unified enterprise level
event management.

Home Page

Bus Page

Device Page

Trending Page (PXG 600E/800E Only)

For detailed technical
specifications, please
reference the Technical Data
Sheet for this product series
at www.eaton.com/pxg, then
the Power Xpert Gateway
400E/600E/800E link.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

11

Communication Systems
Communication Hardware

Features of the PXG-E Product Offering
Features

PXG 400E

PXG 600E

PXG 800E

Total number of supported devices

64

96

96

Maximum number of INCOM devices supported

64

64

64

Protocols supported on downstream devices: (INCOM, Modbus RTU and QCPort)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Number of downstream communication ports

2

3

3

Number of downstream protocols supported simultaneously

2

3

3

USB port for configuration

Yes

Yes

Yes

Two RJ-45 Ethernet ports—10/100Base-T

Yes

Yes

Yes

Modbus TCP/IP protocols supported

Yes

Yes

Yes

SNMP client access v.1

Yes

Yes

Yes

INCOM slave action commands supported

Yes

Yes

Yes

INCOM date and time settings supported

Yes

Yes

Yes

Modbus write commands supported from Modbus master

Yes

Yes

Yes

Device summary screens per main, bus and device

Yes

Yes

Yes

Event notification via the Web interface

Yes

Yes

Yes

Secure Ethernet communications—SSL encryption

Yes

Yes

Yes

Secure communication ports via access control/trusted host list

Yes

Yes

Yes

IPv4 support

Yes

Yes

Yes

Ability to upload additional or modified EDS files

Yes

Yes

Yes

Save and restore configuration file

Yes

Yes

Yes

Device waveform access and storage—COMTRADE file format

No

Yes

Yes

Set user-defined events

No

Yes

Yes

Trend graph displayed

No

Yes

Yes

Data logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel

No

Yes

Yes

Interval logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel

No

Yes

Yes

Event logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel

No

Yes

Yes

E-mail notification on events and threshold alarms

No

Yes

Yes

Custom summary Web page creation

No

No

Yes

Ability to create custom events

No

No

Yes

Supports SAM3Z energy meters

No

No

Yes

BACnet/IP protocol supported 1

—

—

—

The Eaton Power Xpert
Gateway includes:
●

●

●

The Power Xpert
Gateway module
Mounting provisions
and required hardware
for panel and DIN rail
mounting
CD-ROM: contains the
user manual, Modbus
register maps, USB driver
and other associated files

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Power Xpert Gateway
with DIN Rail Mounting
(Brackets Included)

17
18
19
20
21

Note
1 Expected availability 2Q12.

22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T11-17

11
1

Communication Systems
Communication Hardware

Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E

2
3
4
5
6

24 Vdc
Input Power

COM 1 Port:
RS-485 Connection for
up to Either (32) QCPort
or Modbus RTU Devices

INCOM Port:
RS-485 Connection
for up to 64 INCOM
Devices

RJ-45
Connection
to the LAN

RJ-45
Connection
to the Other
Ethernet Devices

USB Connection
for Local
Configuration
Capability

7

Data and Link
Indicator Lights:
Available Only
with 800E

8
9
10

COM 2 Port: Either
RS-485
or RS-232
Connection
for up to Either (32)
QCPort or Modbus
RTU Devices

11

Power and Traffic
Indicator Lights

Wireless antenna available only with
800E for communication to SAM3Z device

PXG 600E or 800E

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T11-18

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Communication Systems
Communication Hardware

PXG-E Daisy Chain Application
The PXG-E allows for units
to be connected together
through two RJ-45 10/100
connectors on the front of the
PXG-E series of products. This
arrangement is a pass-through

of Ethernet communications
allowing a single network drop
to connect up to five Ethernet
communicating devices. The
maximum length of a copper
cable run should not exceed
295 ft (90m) total.

11

Note: In this configuration, if any
of the PXG-E units go offline or
lose power, the communication to
the downstream Ethernet devices
will lose connection to the LAN.

1
2
3
4

PXG-E Daisy Chain Application
Ethernet LAN

5
LAN Connection

6
7

Cat-5 Patch Cables

8

295 ft (90m)

9

PXM2000

Technical Data and Specifications

10

PXG Part Numbers
Description

Style
Number

Catalog
Number

11

Power Xpert Gateway 400E

103008421-5591

PXG400E

Power Xpert Gateway 600E

103008422-5591

PXG600E

12

Power Xpert Gateway 800E

103008423-5591

PXG800E

Wireless energy meter for PXG 800E

P-103000007-591

SAM3Z

Wireless repeater module for SAM3Z

P-103000008-591

EZR

Power supply—24 Vdc

ELC-PS02

ELC-PS02

Mounting bracket kit

66B2146G01

PXGACC01

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T11-19

11
1

Communication Systems
Communication Hardware

Data Acquisition and Integration Table for Supported Devices
Supported Devices

2
PXG 400E/600E/800E
Modbus TCP
(BMS and
SCADA)

Pass-through
INCOM
(PowerNet)

SNMP
(NMS)

BACnet/IP

SMTP
(E-mail
Client)

File Export
(Data File
Format)

Accutrol 400

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Drive

AF97

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

I/O

Universal RTD

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

I/O

DIM

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

I/O

DIM KYZ

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

IQ DP-4000 1

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

IQ Energy Sentinel

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

IQ 220/IQ 320

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

IQ 230/IQ 330

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

9

Meter

IQ Analyzer (6000/6200) 1

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

IQ Analyzer (6400/6600) 1

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

10

Meter

IQ Data 1

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

IQ Data Plus 1

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

IQ Data Plus II 1

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

Power Manager

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

IQ Power Sentinel

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

12

Meter point

IQ MES II

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

Digitrip 3000

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

13

Protective

Digitrip 3200

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

FP-6000

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

FP-5000

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

FP-4000

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

MP-3000 1

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

5
6
7
8

11

14

Device Type

Device Name

INCOM

15

Protective

MP-4000 1

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

Digitrip 520MC

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

16

Protective

NRX520

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

IQ 500

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

MPCV Relay

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

Digitrip 1150/DT1150V

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

Digitrip 810

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

Digitrip 910

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

Digitrip MV

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

Digitrip OPTIM 1050

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

Digitrip OPTIM 550

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

Digitrip OPTIM 750

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

20

Starter

Advantage 2

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Starter

Advantage ACM 2

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

21

Subnetwork master

AEM II 1

■

■

■

■

■

■

Subnetwork master

BIM II 1

■

■

■

■

■

■

Subnetwork master

CMU 2

■

■

■

■

■

■

Subnetwork master

IQ CED II 1

■

■

■

■

■

■

Subnetwork master

IQ MES II

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

23

Transfer switch

ATC-400 1

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Transfer switch

ATC-600 1

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

24

Transfer Switch

ATC-800 1

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

17
18
19

22

25

File Export
(Waveform
File Export)

Web Services
(Power Xpert
Software)

Drive

4

Pass-through
QCPort
(CHStudio)

HTTP (Web
Browser)

3

PXG 600E/800E Only

Notes
1 Required IPONI for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway.
2 Required a WPONI for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway.

V12-T11-20

■

■

Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com/pxg for latest up-to-date
details on connectivity.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

11

Communication Systems
Technology Upgrades Communication Hardware

Data Acquisition and Integration Table for Supported Devices (continued)

1

Supported Devices

2
BACnet/IP

SMTP
(E-mail
Client)

File Export
(Data File
Format)

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

SVX9000

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Insulation monitor

InsulGard

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

IQ 130

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

IQ 140

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

IQ 150

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

IQ 220M/230M

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

IQ 250

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

IQ 260

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

IQ 35M

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

Nexus 1262

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

SQD CM3000 Series

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

SQD CM4000 Series

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

SQD PM710

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

SQD PM850

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

PML 7350

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

PML 7550

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

PML 7650

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Meter

PM3

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

GE 369 Motor Relay

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

GE 469 Motor Relay

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

FP-4000/FP-5000

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Protective

FP-6000

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Overload relay

C441

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Temp monitor

Qualitrol 118

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Temp monitor

TC-50

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Temp monitor

TC-100

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Transformer differential relay

ABB TPU 2000

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

18

I/O

D77A-AI16

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

D77A-AI8

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

19

I/O
I/O

D77A-DI16

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

I/O

D77A-DI8

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Starter

IT. S811 (MV811)

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

File Export
(Waveform
File Export)

SNMP
(NMS)

MVX9000

Drive

Device Name

Pass-through
QCPort
(CHStudio)

Drive

Device Type

Pass-through
INCOM
(PowerNet)

Modbus TCP
(BMS and
SCADA)

3

Web Services
(Power Xpert
Software)

PXG 600E/800E Only

HTTP (Web
Browser)

PXG 400E/600E/800E

Modbus

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

QCPort

1

Starter

IT. Starter

Starter

IT. Starter QSNAP 1

4

20
21
22

Notes
1 Requires a QSNAP for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway.

23

Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com/pxg for latest up-to-date details on connectivity.
Additional supported devices will be available via firmware updates. Contact your local Eaton sales office for help with devices not currently listed in table above.

24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T11-21

11

Communication Systems
Technology Upgrades Communication Hardware

1

The table below represents many of the parameters displayed on the Web page for a given device; however, it is not exhaustive.
For the complete list of parameters display, per device, refer to the Device Data Map file at http://www.eaton.com/pxg.

2

Web UI Device Parameters Displayed via Power Xpert Gateway

6

■ ■

■

Average

V

Voltage (line-line)

V

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Voltage (line-neutral)

V

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

7

Average

A

8

Phase

A

Ground

A

■ ■

Neutral

A

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Peak

A

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■

Demand

A

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■

■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■

■

■ ■

■

■ ■

■

■ ■ ■

■

■

■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■

■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■

■

■

■ ■ ■

■ ■

■

■

Apparent

VA

■ ■

■ ■ ■

■

■ ■

■

11

Reactive

VAR

■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■

■

■ ■ ■

■

Real

W

■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■

■

Apparent

PF

■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■

■

■ ■

■

Displacement

PF

■

■ ■

■
■

Power Factor
■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

13

Energy
Real

Wh

14

Forward

Wh

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Reverse

Wh

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Apparent

Vah

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■

Reactive

VARh

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■

Leading

VARh

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■

■ ■

Lagging

VARh

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■

■ ■

THD

%

■ ■ ■

■

Current THD

%

■ ■ ■

■

Voltage THD

%

■ ■ ■

■

18

Frequency

Hz

Waveform capture

N/A

19

Temperature

15
16
17

■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■

■ ■ ■

■ ■

■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■
■

■ ■ ■

■ ■

■ ■

■

■ ■ ■

■ ■

■

■ ■

■

■ ■

Power Quality

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■

■
■

■

■

■ ■

■

■ ■

■ ■ ■

■ ■
■

■

■ ■

Ambient

C°

Auxiliary

C°

■ ■

Load bearing

C°

■ ■

Motor bearing

C°

■ ■

21

Winding

C°

■ ■

Phase (L, C, R)

C°

22

Terminal block

C°

20

Input Status
Number of inputs

23
24
25

EDR-3000

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

10

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Power

12

FP-6000

MP-4000

MP-3000

FP-5000

FP-4000

MPVCV Relay

IQ 500

Digitrip 3200

Digitrip 3000

Digitrip MV

Digitrip OPTIM 750

Digitrip OPTIM 550

Digitrip OPTIM 1050

Digitrip RMS 810

Digitrip RMS 910

Digitrip 520MC

Digitrip 1150

Power Manager

Protective Relays

Voltage

Current

9

IQ 35M

IQ 150

IQ 140

IQ 130

IQ MESII

IQ Energy Sentinel

IQ Power Sentinel

IQ 260

IQ 250

IQ 230/330M

IQ 230/330

IQ 220/320

IQ DP-4000

IQ Analyzer 6400/6600

Units

Circuit Breaker Trip Units
IQ Analyzer 6000/6200

5

IQ Data

4

IQ Data Plus

3

IQ Data Plus II

IQ Meters

Status/cause of trip

■ ■

■ ■ ■

2

2

Thermal memory
Pole temperature
Winding temp.
Fan status
■

Alarm/trip relay

V12-T11-22

■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

11

Communication Systems
Communication Hardware

Web UI Device Parameters Displayed via Power Xpert Gateway (Continued)

TC-100

TC-50

2
PM3

Nexus 1262/1272

Qualitrol 118

ABB TPU 2000

GE 469 Motor Relay

GE 369 Motor Relay

PML 7650

PML 7550

PML 7350

SQD PM 850

SQD PM 710

SQD CM 4000 Series

SQD CM 3000 Series

Universal RTD

D77A-DI8
DIM KYZ

D77A-DI16

■

D77A-AI8

ACT-800

■

1

Third-Party Devices

D77A-AI16

ACT-600

■

I/O
Digital Input Module

ATC-400

SVX & MVX Drives

C441 Overload Relay

Transfer
Switches
IT. Starters/QSNAP

IT. S811

Advantage Starters

AF97

Accutrol 400

Units

InsulGard

Insulation Motor Starters
Monitor
and VFDs

Voltage
Average

V

Voltage (line-line)

V

Voltage (line-neutral)

V

■

■ ■
■

■

■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■
■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■

6

Current
■

■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■

■ ■

■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■

■ ■

■ ■

■ ■

Average

A

Phase

A

Ground

A

Neutral

A

■ ■ ■

Peak

A

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Demand

A

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■

■◗

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■

■ ■

■ ■ ■
■

■ ■ ■

7

■

8

■

9

Power
■

4
5

■ ■
■

3

Apparent

VA

Reactive

VAR

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■

■ ■

Real

W

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■

■ ■

10

Apparent

PF

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■

■ ■

Displacement

PF

■ ■ ■

11

■ ■ ■

■ ■

■

■ ■

Power Factor

12

Energy
■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Real

Wh

Forward

Wh

■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■

Reverse

Wh

■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■

Apparent

Vah

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■

Reactive

VARh

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Leading

VARh

■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■

VARh

■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■

Lagging

13
14

■

15

Power Quality
■

THD

%

Current THD

%

■

Voltage THD

%

■ ■

Frequency

Hz

Waveform capture

N/A

■

■

■ ■

■

■

■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■

16

■

17

Temperature
■

■

■

Ambient

C°

Auxiliary

C°

■

Load bearing

C°

■

■ ■

Motor bearing

C°

■

■ ■

Winding

C°

■

■ ■

Phase (L, C, R)

C°

■

Terminal block

C°

■

■ ■

19
■ ■

Input Status
Number of inputs

■ ■

■

Status/cause of trip

■ ■ ■ ■

Thermal memory

■ ■ ■ ■

Pole temperature

■ ■

8

16

8 16 8

4

8

2

■ ■

Winding temp.

■ ■

■ ■

Fan status

■ ■

■ ■

■ ■

■ ■

Partial discharge intensity (PDI)

■

21
23
24
25

Note: Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com for latest information.

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

20
22

■

Alarm/trip relay

18

V12-T11-23

11

Communication Systems
Communication Hardware

1

Power Xpert Gateway—Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E with Standard Panel Mounting (Brackets Included)

3
4
5

Ø 0.19 (6)
(4.8)

0.56
(14.2) 1.60
(40.6)

2.00 1.12
(50.8) (28.5) 0.56
(14.2)

6

0.24
(6.1)

8.75
(222.3)

7
8

10.75
(273.1)

10.25
(260.4)

0.25
(6.4)

Front

Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E
8.75
(222.3)

9
10
11
12

4.30
(109.2)

13
14
15
16

0.60
(15.2)

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T11-24

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

11

Communication Systems
Communication Hardware

Product Operated
Network Interface
(PONI) Devices

PONI Family

The Product Operated
Network Interface (PONI)
cards attach to CutlerHammer/Eaton devices to
enable communications.
These cards serve various
functions from Ethernet-type
applications, to non-Ethernettype applications, ultimately
playing a key role in facilitating
the access to information that
each of the Cutler-Hammer/
Eaton devices offer.
The IPONI enables
communications over a
twisted shielded pair INCOM
device network. Each PONI
attaches to its associated
product. The PONI modules
obtain power from the host
product. PONI modules can
be used as solutions for
various applications.
The non-Ethernet product
offerings include the IPONI
and the MPONI. These
devices are typically applied
where there are more than
one device connected in
a network of devices by
a dedicated twisted
shielded pair of conductors
(Ref. IMPCABLE).

The communications
medium is formatted to
enable clean noise-immune
communications even when
routed around areas of high
noise and typical electrical
communication disrupting
equipment. The IPONI and
MPONI daisy chain are in the
same format as that used
in devices that have built-in
communications such as the
Digitrip trip units and can be
used in series with these
communication network
wiring. To Ethernet enable
IPONI and MPONI products,
use the PXG-E series Power
Xpert Gateways.
The PXG-E with IPONI or
MPONI product offering puts
a Cutler-Hammer/Eaton
metering product on the Web.
No other software is required
when specifying a PXG-E. All
software needed to enable
any internet browser program
such as Microsoft Internet
Explorer or Mozilla Firefox is
packed into the PXG-E. The
data can then be viewed
directly in any Internet
Web browser window.
The WEBPONI provides live
updating data for the meter
being monitored, as well as
waveform display capabilities
and e-mail direct from the
device to defined key e-mail
addresses that need to know
when an event occurs.

IPONI/MPONI
With the addition of the
IPONI or the MPONI card,
a Cutler-Hammer/Eaton
device or series of devices
can communicate with the
PowerNet software via a
master unit such as a MINT II
and the PXG-E. The PONIs
can be easily mounted to
the appropriate CutlerHammer/Eaton device
and daisy chain together to
form a robust deterministic
communication network
of devices in a system
solution. Systems employing
the IPONI/MPONI type
communications medium
provide deterministic
communication performance
relied on by those critical
solution applications,
where this is of the
utmost importance.

The MINT II can be used to
interface multiple IMPACC
devices to Broadband LANs,
telephone modem or short
haul modem. It can also be
used to allow additional
branches of the INCOM data
line (five additional branches
per MINT II). The MINT II
can be either table or panel
mounted and requires a
120 Vac, 60 Hz supply.
Selectable communication
rate of 1200 or 9600 baud is
available. The burden for the
MINT II is 7 VA.

Addressable Relay II (ARII)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

MINT II

11
Master INCOM Network Translator
(MINT) II

The MINT II interfaces the
IMPACC network to a master
control unit with an RS-232
port, such as a personal
computer serial port, a
programmable controller
RS-232 “smart card,”
building management system
interface card, etc. (Some
software will have to be
written in the master control
unit to request and receive
messages. The MINT II
protocol is 10-character,
ASCII coded hex.)

12
Addressable Relay II

The Addressable Relay II
is designed for use where
information or control of
non-communicating devices
is required remotely. The
relays communicate on the
PowerNet system. Devices
are assigned a three-digit
address to uniquely identify
them on the daisy-chained
twisted shielded pair network.
The ARII has a Form C relay
on board with two status
indicating circuit inputs. The
output relay can be activated
and monitored remotely.
Input status 1 and 2 can
be monitored remotely.

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T11-25

11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Communication Systems
Communication Hardware

IMPCABLE

IMPCABLE

The IMPCABLE was
designed to be run in
switchgear where codes
require a 600V insulation
rating. Typical “blue hose”
cables are rated at 300V. The
IMPCABLE is an 18 AWG
cable with a 100 ohm
impedance at 100 kHz tuned
to work optimally with the
FSK signal from CutlerHammer/Eaton devices.
The cable has been designed
with characteristics that
allow up to 1000 devices or
distances up to 10,000 feet
from the master.

Polyethylene
Filler

Aluminum
Shield

PVC
Outer
Jacket

Tinned
Copper
Braid

Publication
Number

Description

TD.17.15.T.E

PowerNet

10

PowerPort

TD02603010E

Power Xpert Gateway 200E

11

TB02603002E

Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E

TB02603002E

mMINT

12

TD.17.19.T.E

MINT II RS-232 Converter

TD.17.20.T.E

PONI Communication Modules

13

TB02603002E

MPONI

TD.17.22.T.E

Addressable Relay II

14

TD.17.24.T.E

Breaker Interface Module (BIM)

TD.17.26.T.E

Advantage Central Monitoring Unit (CMU)

TD.17.28.T.E

IMPCABLE

16
17

Polyethylene
Insulator

Further Information

TD17B.01.T.E

15

Drain
Wire

Conductors

Pricing Information
Price and Availability Digest (PAD)
Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount Symbol C10-S25

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T11-26

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Programmable Logic Controllers
Programmable Logic Controllers

12

Programmable Logic Controllers
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D32LT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discontinued Products—Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100/110 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
300 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
400 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D120 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC1 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D500 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V12-T12-2
V12-T12-2
V12-T12-2
V12-T12-2
V12-T12-3
V12-T12-3
V12-T12-3
V12-T12-3
V12-T12-4
V12-T12-4
V12-T12-4
V12-T12-4
V12-T12-4
V12-T12-4
V12-T12-4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T12-1

12

Programmable Logic Controllers

1

Programmable
Logic Controllers

2

Product Description
D32LT

3

6
7
8
9
10
11
12

The company has offered
programmable controller
products since the
early 1970s.
These products have been
marketed under several trade
names such as Numa-Logic
and model names such
as D100.

4
5

Product History

D32LT

Cutler-Hammer® D32LT from
Eaton’s electrical business
handles applications that are
too large for a D50 but don’t
quite need the power and
performance of the D320.
The D32LT is expandable up
to 256 I/O points, capable of
handling analog, digital, high
speed inputs and outputs
making the D32LT one of the
more versatile PLCs on the
market. With access to the
real-time clock, 8 PID loops
and two communication ports
allow you to interface with
multiple networks including
Modbus® RTU, ASCII, binary,
or interface to a RS-232 to
Ethernet adapter.

Westinghouse entered the
solid-state logic and control
business with the NumaLogic 300 series products.
The 300 series was a set of
hardwired logic components
that could be custom wired
to perform the desired
logic functions.
Westinghouse NL-500
The Numa-Logic 500 was
a remote I/O system that
consisted of a “master”
chassis and a “slave” chassis
connected by a single twisted
pair cable. Signals entered
into one chassis would be
repeated over the twisted
pair and made available as a
signal at the opposite chassis.

14

Chronology
1975 through 1980 (largely
superseded by remote
I/O capabilities of PC700
and PC900).

15

Replacement
D320 Remote I/O PLC.

13

16
17
18
19
20
21
22

D320

D320

The D320 PLC delivers
superior processing power,
modular flexibility, enhanced
scan speed, and advanced
functions and communications
capabilities with a combination
of 2K program memory, up to
2048 I/O expansion points,
real-time clock functionality
and PID loop control capability.
I/O modules cover all standard
control voltages and current
ranges for both digital and
analog signals. Special
function modules provide an
array of specific-purpose
solutions, such as networking
and remote I/O applications.

Note: NL-500 is different than
PC-500.

Westinghouse PC-900
The PC-900 programmable
controller supported up to
128 digital and 16 analog I/O,
either local or remote with up
to 3.5K of memory.
Chronology
1981 through 1998.
Replacement
D32LT PLC.
Westinghouse PC-1100/1200/1250
This family of programmable
controllers featured built
in LAN, PID functions and
supported up to 16K memory.
Chronology
1982 through 1998.
Replacement
Direct replacement
unavailable, best replacement
D32LT or D320 PLC.
Westinghouse I/O Plus
Operator interface that was
originally manufactured by
Cincinnati Electrosystems
and brand-labeled with the
Westinghouse logo for
Westinghouse.
Chronology
1989 through 1992.
Replacement
No direct replacement
available, but the PanelMate
product family provides far
more functionality.

Westinghouse PC-700
The PC-700 was a
programmable controller
that supported up to 256
digital and 32 analog I/O,
either local or remote with
up 8K of memory.

Westinghouse PC50/55
Programmable controller
manufactured by Siemens®
(S5-90, S5-95 for PC50 and
PC55, respectively) and
brand-labeled with
Westinghouse logo for
Westinghouse.

Chronology
1980 through 1998.

Chronology
1992 through 1994.

Replacement
D32LT PLC.

Replacement
Siemens still offers
replacement parts for
this system.

Westinghouse PC-500
Programmable controller
manufactured by Siemens
(S5-100U, S5-102U, S5-103
for PC500, PC502 and PC503
respectively) and brandlabeled with Westinghouse
logo for Westinghouse.
Chronology
1988 through 1997.
Replacement
Siemens still offers
replacement parts for this
system.
Westinghouse PC-2000
Programmable controller
manufactured by Siemens
(S5-115U) and brand-labeled
with Westinghouse logo for
Westinghouse.
Chronology
1988 through 1997.
Replacement
Siemens still offers
replacement parts for
this system.
Eaton entered the market
with its first programmable
control in 1977. The unit was
called the D120 and was a
true programmable control
with no hardwiring required.
Many models have been
introduced since then.
Today, three PLC product
families are available: D50,
D32LT and D320. One
software package can
program each of these
platforms. Contact your
local Eaton salesperson or
distributor for more details.

23
24
25
V12-T12-2

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Programmable Logic Controllers

12

Product History Time Line
Page

Product

1965

1970

1975

1980

1985

1990

1995

1

2000 Present

2

Westinghouse PC50/55
V12-T12-3

Westinghouse NL100/110

V12-T12-3

Westinghouse NL300

V12-T12-4

Westinghouse PC400

V12-T12-2

Westinghouse NL500

3
4

Westinghouse PC700

5

Westinghouse PC900
Westinghouse PC1100

6

Westinghouse PC1200/1250
Westinghouse PC1500/1700

7

Westinghouse PC500
Westinghouse PC2000

8

Westinghouse I/O Plus
V12-T12-4

Cutler-Hammer D120

V12-T12-4

Cutler-Hammer MPC1

9

Cutler-Hammer D100
V12-T12-4

10

Cutler-Hammer D500
Cutler-Hammer D200

11

Cutler-Hammer D50
Cutler-Hammer D300
V12-T12-2

Cutler-Hammer D320

V12-T12-2

Cutler-Hammer D32LT

Replacement Capabilities
Discontinued Products
100/110 Series

100/110 Series

The Numa-Logic 100/110
Series, known as “the Pico,”
consisted of the PC-100
and PC-110 models. Both
products were “brick” style
PLCs and provided a small
number of digital inputs and
outputs mounted in the same
enclosure as the processor.

Various styles offered the
ability to select the type and
amount of l/O required. I/O
expanders were available to
expand the l/O capacity.

12
13
All 300 Series components
can be identified by catalog
numbers of NL-3XX.

300 Series

Chronology
The 100/110 Series PLCs
were offered as current
product from 1981 until
1989. In 1989 the product
was discontinued.
Replacement
No direct replacement
available, contact a local
Eaton salesperson or
distributor about upgrading to
a D50, D32LT or D320 PLC.

300 Series

The Numa-Logic 300 Series
was Westinghouse’s original
solid-state controls offering.
The 300 Series consisted
of printed circuit boards
(modules) that performed
specific logic functions
(AND, OR, NOT, etc.).
These modules could then
be custom wired by the user
to perform the required
control functions.

Chronology
The Numa-Logic 300 Series
products were manufactured
by Westinghouse beginning
in the early 1970s and
continuing until 1988.
Replacement products are
currently available from
Instrument Specialties, Inc.
Replacement
For replacement of the
300 Series, contact:
Instrument Specialties, Inc.
248-542-5640

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T12-3

12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Programmable Logic Controllers

400 Series
The Numa-Logic 400 Series
was Westinghouse’s first
PLC offering. After being
manufactured for twoyears,
the 400 Series was replaced
by the 700 Series of
products. Few, if any,
400 Series systems remain
in service today.
Chronology
The 400 Series was
manufactured by
Westinghouse in Madison
Heights, Ml from 1975 until
1978. The product was
no longer manufactured
after 1979.

12
13
14
16
17
18
19

ATS Inc.
Peoria, lL
1-800-328-7287
MPC1 Series

D120 Series

D500 Series

The D500 family of PLCs
consisted of several l/O
cards and the racks used to
mount them. The D500 was
a full function programmable
logic controller offering all
of the capabilities of larger
frame PLCs in a compact,
economical, space-saving
design.

Product Support Services
Technical Application
Assistance
Eaton can provide technical
application assistance via the
Technical Resource Center.
Available by telephone, Eaton
personnel quickly respond to
customer needs, including
troubleshooting, analyzing
system operation, and
coordinating component repair
or replacement. The Technical
Resource Center can be
reached at: 1-800-356-1243

Further Information
Publication
Number
CA08100011E

Chronology
The Cutler-Hammer D500
products were offered from
1985 through 1994.
MPC1 Series

D120 Series

D500 Series

Replacement
For replacements of the D120
products, contact:

Replacement
No direct replacement
available, contact a local
Eaton salesperson or
distributor about upgrading to
a D50, D32LT or D320 PLC.

11

15

Chronology
The Cutler-Hammer D120
products were offered from
1976 through 1983.

The MPC1 was a complete
PLC system for applications
up to 128 I/O. Programmed in
easily understood relay ladder
logic with digital and analog
capabilities. Analog processor
has the same functions as
the discrete version and
supports “intelligent” analog
input and output modules.

The D120 family of PLCs
consisted of several l/O
cards and the racks used
to mount them.

Chronology
The Cutler-Hammer MPC1
products were offered from
1983 through 1993.

The self-contained
troubleshooting was identical
in concept to the buzzer and
jumpers common to relay
controls. The D120 requires
no new language. It utilizes
decimal numbering and
memory size is determined
simply by adding all elements
on the ladder diagram.

Replacement
For replacements of the
MPC1 products, contact:

Replacement or parts
are no longer available
for D500 products.

Description
Volume 9—OEM
Product Guide

Pricing Information
Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount
Symbol 2CD-3.

ICS Inc.
Decatur, lL
217-422-6700

20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T12-4

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control
Motor Control

13

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjustable Frequency AC Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starters (Medium Voltage). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V12-T13-2
V12-T13-69
V12-T13-73
V12-T13-84

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T13-1

13

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

1

Contents

2

Pre 3-Star
Product History Time Line, Replacement
Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-4
3-Star
Product History Time Line, Replacement
Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-5
Citation
Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-6
Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-7
Type N
Product History Time Line, Replacement
Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-22
A200
Product History Time Line, Replacement
Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-23
Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-26
A202
Product History Time Line, Replacement
Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-33
V201 and V200
Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-36
Freedom
Product Description, Product History Time Line . . . V12-T13-37
Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-38
Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-46
IT. Electromechanical NEMA
Product Description, Product History Time Line,
Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . V12-T13-47
IT. Electromechanical IEC
Product Description, Product History Time Line,
Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . V12-T13-48
XT IEC Power Control
Product Description, Product History Time Line,
Replacement Capabilities, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-49
Advantage
Product Description, Product History Time Line,
Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . V12-T13-51
Definite Purpose
Product History Time Line, Replacement
Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-52
JF Autostarter
Product History Time Line, Replacement
Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-53
ME and MD dc Contactors
Product Description, Product History,
Product History Time Line, Replacement
Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-54
Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-57
C80 Mill Type dc Contactors
Product Description, Product History Time Line,
Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . V12-T13-58

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

Description

24

Page

Description

Page

511 AC and DC Brakes
Product Description, Product History Time Line,
Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . .V12-T13-61
DPM-Contactor
Product Description, Product History Time Line,
Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . .V12-T13-62
AVD-Contactor
Product Description, Product History,
Product History Time Line,
Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . .V12-T13-63
D-Contactor
Product Description, Product History,
Product History Time Line, Replacement
Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V12-T13-64
Reversing/Assignment Contactors
Product Description, Product History,
Product History Time Line, Replacement
Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V12-T13-65
P- & S-Contactors
Product Description, Product History,
Product History Time Line, Replacement
Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V12-T13-66

Overview

Type N Contactor

Citation Starter

Product Description
Cutler-Hammer® Starters and Contactors from Eaton’s electrical
business were and are designed to control functions of a
connected motor by starting, stopping, reversing, regulating and
protecting. When functions do not include speed regulation, this
device is known as a starter rather than a controller.
Applications for starter functions are fans, pumps, constant
horsepower, constant or variable torque machine tools, constant
torque metalworking machinery, variable torque and horsepower
fans and blowers, constant power heating, lighting, pumps and
motors for all types of applications.

25
V12-T13-2

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

13

Product History

Freedom

IT.

The Cutler-Hammer line of
contactors and starters dates
back to the early 1920s in
Milwaukee, WI. Changes
in coil construction, making
the first moisture-proof
vacuum with impregnated
coils, were innovations
in this line of contactors and
starters manufactured before
the 3-Star line (now known as
the Pre 3-Star). Eutectic alloy
overloads were used later in
this design with the design
change to the 3-Star line. A
few of the new features of
the 3-Star line of contactors
and starters were the first
standard three-coil overload
relays, new molding
compounds, new metals
and cast resin coils.

The Type F magnetic
contactor is the first
magnetically controlled
contactor in our
Westinghouse® records.
It was open in design,
simple in construction and
was state-of-the-art due to
its magnetically controlled
armature. The Type F
contactor was replaced by
the DE-ION® contactor, which
featured the Westinghouse
trademark DE-ION arc
quenching. The DE-ION was
followed by the Type DN,
Type N and the Type A, today
known as the A200. The Type
B was developed in the late
1970s and was obsoleted
two or three years later. The
A200 open control is still a
current offering. Prior to
1985, some of the larger
sizes (5–9) were known as
GCA and GCD.

1

The Citation line of contactors
and starters was introduced
in 1968 with many new
features: the new CI nonwearing totally enclosed
permanent air gap magnet
structure; dual wound
magnet coil with plug-in
feature; color coded, twin
break dust-safe contacts;
and straight-through wiring.
Although the Citation line
was obsoleted in 1997,
replacement contact kits,
magnet coils and heater coils
will continue to be available.

2
3
4
5
6
7

Today, the Freedom™
contactor, launched in 1986,
coexists with the solid-state
heaterless IT. contactor, a
microprocessor-controlled
magnetic contactor
introduced in 2002.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T13-3

13
1
2

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Pre 3-Star

Product History Time Line for Pre 3-Star, Bulletin 9586 1

Originally a Cutler-Hammer
Product

1920

1940

1960

1980

2000

Sizes 00 – 5

3
4
5

Size

Size 1 Contactor

6

Replacement Capabilities

Technology Upgrades

There are no replacement
parts available. Replace with
new contactor or starter.

Size 00–3—Freedom or IT.
Sizes 4–5—Freedom,
Vacuum or IT.
Note
1 For all NEMA® rated starters, please
contact Standard Open Control
Aftermarket at 1-800-535-8992.

7
8
9
10

Size 2 Contactor

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Size 5 Contactor

Parts are no longer available
for Pre-3 Star.

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T13-4

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Present

13

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

3-Star
Originally a Cutler-Hammer
Product

Product History Time Line for 3-Star, Bulletin 9560, 9586, 9589, 9591, 9556, 9658,
9736 and 9739 1
Size

1950

1955

1960

1965

1970

1975

1985

2000

1
Present

2

Size 0

3

Size 1
Size 2

4

Size 3
Size 4

5

Size 5

Typical Size 0—Starter

Replacement Capabilities

Technology Upgrades

There are no replacement
parts available. Replace with
new contactor or starter.

Sizes 00–3—Freedom or IT.
Sizes 4–5—Freedom,
Vacuum or IT.

6
7
8

Note
1 For all NEMA rated Bulletin 9586
starters, please contact Standard
Open Control Aftermarket
at 1-800-535-8992.

9
10
11

Typical Size 1—Contactor

12
13
14
15
16
Typical Size 5—Starter

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T13-5

13
1

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Citation
Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Catalog
Number

9
10
11
12

Coil 1

Series

Product History Time Line for Citation A10, A11, A13, A30, A31, A40, A41, A50, A51, A70, A71, A80, A81, B10, B11, B50, B51,
B52, C10, C30 and C50
NEMA Size Series
Size 00

1965

1970

1975

1980

1985

1990

1995

2000

A1
B1
C1
D1

14

Size 0

A1

Size 1

A1

15

Size 2

A1

16

Size 3

A1

17

Size 4

A1

18

Size 5

A1

Size 6

A1

B1
B1
B1

B1

19

C1
Size 7

A1

Size 8

A1

B1

21
22

Contact
Kit

Citation Starter and Nameplate

13

20

Parts
Publication

B1
Note
1 Although the number “9” is not imprinted on the coil, it must be used when ordering. For example, the proper ordering number for a 120V, 60 Hz,
AC magnet coil would be 9-1887-1 (refer to the style numbers on Page V12-T13-7).

23
24
25
V12-T13-6

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Present

13

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Replacement Capabilities

1

Replacement Capabilities—Contacts and Coils
Style and Part Numbers
Coil
Suffix

Size 00

Size 00

Size 00

Size 00

Series A1 1

Series B1

Series C1

Series D1

—

6-21

2

2

2

6-22

Three-pole without interlock

—

6-21-2

2

2

2

6-22-2

6-23-2

6-24-2

6-34-2

6-25-2

6-35-2

Three-pole with interlock

—

6-21-3

2

2

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Description

Size 0

Size 1

Size 2

Size 2

Size 3

Size 3

Series A1

Series B1

Series A1

Series B1

6-24

6-34

6-25

6-35

Contact Kits

3
4

Part number on contactor or
starter nameplate
Two-pole without interlock

2

6-23

5

Four-pole without interlock

—

—

—

—

—

6-22-3

6-23-3

—

6-34-3

—

—

Five-pole without interlock

—

—

—

—

—

6-22-4

6-23-4

—

6-34-4

—

—

6

120V, 60 Hz or 110V, 50 Hz

A

9-1945-1

9-2183-1

9-2650-1

9-2823-1

9-1887-1

9-1887-1

9-1889-1

9-2526-1

9-1891-1

9-1889-1

7

240V, 60 Hz or 220V, 50 Hz

B

9-1945-2

9-2183-2

9-2650-2

9-2823-2

9-1887-2

9-1887-2

9-1889-2

9-2526-2

9-1891-2

9-1889-2

480V, 60 Hz or 440V, 50 Hz

C

9-1945-3

9-2183-5

9-2650-3

9-2823-3

9-1887-3

9-1887-3

9-1889-3

9-2526-3

9-1891-3

9-1889-3

600V, 60 Hz or 550V, 50 Hz

D

9-1945-4

9-2183-19

9-2650-4

9-2823-4

9-1887-4

9-1887-4

9-1889-4

9-2526-4

9-1891-4

9-1889-4

208V, 60 Hz

E

9-1945-5

9-2183-17

9-2650-5

9-2823-5

9-1887-5

9-1887-5

9-1889-13

9-2526-5

9-1891-13

9-1889-13

24V, 60 Hz

T

9-1945-8

9-2183-16

9-2650-7

9-2823-18

9-1887-7

9-1887-7

9-1889-20

9-2526-6

9-1891-15

9-1889-20

Magnet Coils

380V, 50 Hz

L

9-1945-6

9-2183-3

9-2650-6

9-2421-18 3

9-1887-8

9-1887-8

9-1889-14

9-2526-7

9-1891-14

9-1889-14

277V, 60 Hz

H

9-1945-16

9-2183-18

9-2650-13

9-2823-12

9-1887-16

9-1887-16

9-1889-31

9-2526-15

9-1891-26

9-1889-31

120 Vdc 4

A1

—

—

—

—

9-2024-2

9-2024-2

9-2025-2

9-2626-2

9-2026-2

9-2025-2

240 Vdc 4

B1

—

—

—

—

9-2024-1

9-2024-1

9-2025-1

9-2626-1

9-2026-1

9-2025-1

24 Vdc 4

T1

—

—

—

—

9-2024-4

9-2024-4

9-2025-4

9-2626-4

9-2026-4

9-2025-4

48 Vdc 4

W1

—

—

—

—

9-2024-3

9-2024-3

9-2025-3

9-2626-3

9-2026-3

9-2025-3

9-2823-17

Style and Part Numbers
Description

Size 4

Size 4

Series A1

Series B1

Size 5

9
10
11
12
13

Replacement Capabilities—Contacts and Coils, continued
Coil
Suffix

8

Size 6

Size 6

Size 6

Size 7

Size 7

Size 8

Size 8

Series A1

Series B1

Series C1

Series A1

Series B1

Series A1

Series B1

14
15

Contact Kits
Part number on contactor or
starter nameplate
Two-pole

—

6-26

6-36-3

6-27

6-28

—

6-601-2

6-28

—

—

—

Three-pole

—

6-26-2

6-36-4

6-27-2

6-28-2

6-570

6-601

6-28-2

6-570

646C829G05

6-571

120V, 60 Hz or 110V, 50 Hz

A

9-1891-1

9-1891-1

9-1891-1

9-1875-1

9-2651

9-2698

9-1875-1

9-2651

438C805G12

9-2654

240V, 60 Hz or 220V, 50 Hz

B

9-1891-2

9-1891-2

9-1891-2

9-1875-2

9-2651-2

9-2698-2

9-1875-2

9-2651-2

438C805G11

9-2654-2

480V, 60 Hz or 440V, 50 Hz

C

9-1891-3

9-1891-3

9-1891-3

9-1875-3

9-2651-3

9-2698-3

9-1875-3

9-2651-3

438C805G10

9-2654-3

600V, 60 Hz or 550V, 50 Hz

D

9-1891-4

9-1891-4

9-1891-4

9-1875-4

9-2651-4

9-2698-4

9-1875-4

9-2651-4

—

9-2654-4

208V, 60 Hz

E

9-1891-13

9-1891-13

9-1891-13

9-1875-14

9-2651-6

9-2698-5

9-1875-14

9-2651-6

438C805G11

9-2654-6

24V, 60 Hz

T

9-1891-15

9-1891-15

9-1891-15

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

380V, 50 Hz

L

9-1891-14

9-1891-14

9-1891-14

—

9-2651-5

9-2698-6

—

9-2651-5

438C805G15

9-2654-5

277V, 60 Hz

H

9-1891-26

9-1891-26

9-1891-26

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

120 Vdc 4

A1

9-2026-2

9-2026-2

9-2026-2

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

240 Vdc 4

B1

9-2026-1

9-2026-1

9-2026-1

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

24 Vdc 4

T1

9-2026-4

9-2026-4

9-2026-4

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

48 Vdc 4

W1

9-2026-3

9-2026-3

9-2026-3

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Magnet Coils

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

Notes
1 Citation overload relays are no longer available. A Freedom overload may be an option. Contact Control Aftermarket at 1-800-535-8992.
2 Replace complete contactor.
3 Non-encapsulated coil.
4 For use in existing DC operated devices. Not for conversion of existing AC operated devices to DC.

24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T13-7

13

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

1
2
3
4
5

Three-Pole Contact Kit, Size 3, Series B1

Magnet Coil, 120V/60 Hz for Size 3,
Series A1

Three-Pole Contact Kit, Size 5

Replacement Capabilities—Overload Relays
Style and Part Numbers

6
7
8
9
10

Size 00

Size 00

Size 00

Size 00

Series A1

Series B1

Series C1

Series D1

Standard trip (Class 20)
Eutectic —
1 Element
3 Element
3 Element with
alarm circuit

1

1

1

1

1

Slow trip (Class 30)
Eutectic —
1 Element
3 Element

1

1

1

1

Description

Size 0

Size 1

Size 2

Size 2

Size 3

Size 3

Series A1

Series B1

Series A1

Series B1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Overload Relays
Without mounting plates—
for replacement on existing starters

11

Replacement Thermal Elements
Standard trip eutectic

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

12

Slow trip eutectic

10-5018 3

10-5018 3

10-5018 3

10-5018 3

10-5018 3

10-5018 3

10-5018 3

10-5018 3

10-5018 3

10-5018 3

13

Replacement Capabilities—Overload Relays, continued
Style and Part Numbers

14

Description

15

Without mounting plates—
for replacement on existing starters

16
17

Size 4

Size 4

Series A1

Series B1

1

1

Standard trip (Class 20)
Eutectic —
1 Element
3 Element
3 Element with
alarm circuit

2

Slow trip eutectic

10-5018

19

—

23
24

1

2

Current transformer

22

Size 6

Size 6

Size 7

Size 7

Size 8

Size 8

Series A1

Series B1

Series C1

Series A1

Series B1

Series A1

Series B1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

42-3418-3 4

42-3418-3 4

—

—

—

—

Replacement Thermal Elements
Standard trip eutectic

21

Size 6

Overload Relays

18
20

Size 5

Technology Upgrades
Sizes 00–3—Freedom or IT.
Sizes 4–6—Freedom, Vacuum
or IT.
Sizes 7–8—Freedom

Adapter Plates
The adapter plates make it
possible to replace a Citation
starter with a Freedom or
Advantage starter and the
same mounting holes can
be used.

3

10-5018
—

2
3

10-5018
—

3

Notes
1 Citation overload relays are no longer
available. Replace with up-to-date
starter, or contact Standard Open Control
Aftermarket at 1-800-535-8992
to determine Freedom overload relay
compatibility.
2 No longer available. Replace with up-todate overload relay or starter.
3 Will no longer be available once stock
is depleted. If stock is out, replace with
up-to-date overload relay or starter.
4 On Vista; no price.

Adapter Plates Ordering Information
NEMA
Size

Adapter Plate Catalog Number
Freedom

Advantage

00, 0

C321CMP0

—

1

C321CMP1

WBASE12

2

C321CMP2

WBASE 12

3

C321CMP3

WBASE 34

4

C321CMP4

WBASE 34

5

C321CMP5

—

25
V12-T13-8

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

13

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Heaters

Heater Selection Index

Overload relays do not include
heaters. Please see table for
heater element index.

Note: Use this index to cross-reference tables on Pages V12-T13-9 through V12-T13-21.

1

Index of Overload Relay Heater Selection Tables

2

Heater Selection
For Replacement in Existing
Applications Only
Heaters are rated to protect
40°C rise of motors; and,
open and drip-proof motors
having a service factor of
1.15 where the motor and
the controller are at the same
ambient temperature.

Starter
Type
Catalog
Prefix

Type

A10

Open

ST-1

ST-3

ST-5

ST-7

ST-16

ST-10

ST-11

ST-12

Enclosed

ST-2

ST-4

ST-6

ST-7

ST-16

ST-10

ST-11

ST-12

A11

A13

For other conditions:
1. For 50°C, 55°C and 75°C
(122°F, 131°F and 167°F)
rise motors and
enclosed motors having
a service factor of 1.0,
select one size smaller.
2. Ambient temperature of
the starter lower than
the motor by 26°C
(79°F), use one size
smaller.
3. Ambient temperature of
the starter higher than
the motor by 26°C
(79°F), use one size
larger.
Ultimate tripping current of
heaters is approximately 1.25
times the minimum current
rating listed in the tables.

Heater Selection Table Number

3

NEMA Size of Starter
00-0-1
(1-1/2)

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Open

BNC-1

BNC-3

BNC-5

BNC-7

BNC-9

—

—

—

Enclosed

BNC-2

BNC-4

BNC-6

BNC-7

BNC-9

—

—

—

Open

LT-2

LT-4

LT-6

LT-7

LT-8

—

—

—

Enclosed

LT-1

LT-3

LT-5

LT-7

LT-8

—

—

—

A30 and A40

Enclosed

ST-9

ST-3

ST-6

ST-7

ST-16

ST-10

ST-11

ST-12

A31 and A41

Enclosed

BNC-8

BNC-3

BNC-6

BNC-7

BNC-9

—

—

—

A50

Open

ST-1

ST-3

ST-5

ST-7

ST-16

ST-10

ST-11

ST-12

Enclosed

ST-2

ST-4

ST-6

ST-7

ST-16

ST-10

ST-11

ST-12

A51

Open

BNC-1

BNC-3

BNC-5

BNC-7

BNC-9

—

—

—

Enclosed

BNC-2

BNC-4

BNC-6

BNC-7

BNC-9

—

—

—

A70 and A80

Enclosed

ST-9

ST-3

ST-6

ST-7

ST-16

ST-10

ST-11

ST-12

A71 and A81

Enclosed

BNC-8

BNC-3

BNC-5

BNC-7

BNC-9

—

—

—

A400-A420

Enclosed

—

—

ST-14

ST-15

ST-16

ST-10

ST-11

ST-12

A460 1

Enclosed

ST-2 1

ST-4 1

ST-6 1

ST-7 1

ST-16 1

ST-10 1

ST-11 1

ST-12 1

A490 2

Enclosed

ST-2 2

ST-4 2

ST-6 2

ST-7 2

ST-16 2

ST-10 2

ST-11 2

ST-12 2

A700

Open

ST-1

ST-3

ST-5

ST-7

ST-16

—

—

—

Enclosed

ST-2

ST-4

ST-6

ST-7

ST-16

ST-10

—

—

A800-A803

Enclosed

ST-9

ST-3

ST-5

ST-7

ST-16

ST-10

ST-11

—

A804-A806

Enclosed

ST-9

ST-3

ST-5

—

—

—

—

—

A808-A809

Enclosed

—

ST-13

ST-5

ST-5

—

—

—

—

B10 and B50

Enclosed

ST-1

ST-3

ST-5

ST-7

—

—

—

—

B11 and B51

Open

BNC-1

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Enclosed

BNC-2

BNC-3

BNC-5

—

—

—

—

—

C300

Open and
enclosed

ST-1

ST-3

ST-5

ST-7

—

—

—

—

C301

Open and
enclosed

BNC-1

BNC-4

BNC-5

BNC-7

—

—

—

—

C303

Open and
enclosed

LT-2

LT-4

LT-6

LT-7

—

—

—

—

Notes
1 Select heaters for 50% of rated full load current.
2 Select heaters for 68% of rated full load current.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T13-9

13
1
2
3
4
5

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Overload Relay Heater Selection Tables
Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy
For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.
Table ST-1

Table ST-2

Table ST-3

Table ST-4

Table ST-5

NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2

NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2

NEMA Size 2

NEMA Size 2

NEMA Size 3

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50,
A460 1, A490 2, A700

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50,
A700, B10, C300
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix B10, C300, A30,
A40, A70, A80, A800-A803

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50,
A460 1, A490 2, A700

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50,
A700, B10, C300
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A70, A80,
A800-A803, A808-A809, B10

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50,
A700, B10, B50, C300
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix B10,
B50, C300
Heater Ampere Range

Heater
Catalog
Number

6

0.167–0.187

0.155–0.173

—

—

—

H1101

0.188–0.210

0.174–0.195

—

—

—

H1102

7

0.211–0.237

0.196–0.220

—

—

—

H1103

0.238–0.266

0.221–0.247

—

—

—

H1104

0.267–0.298

0.248–0.278

—

—

—

H1105

0.299–0.334

0.279–0.310

—

—

—

H1106

0.335–0.376

0.311–0.349

—

—

—

H1107

0.377–0.422

0.350–0.391

—

—

—

H1108

0.423–0.474

0.392–0.441

—

—

—

H1109

10

0.475–0.532

0.442–0.495

—

—

—

H1110

0.533–0.598

0.496–0.555

—

—

—

H1111

11

0.599–0.672

0.556–0.624

—

—

—

H1112

0.673–0.757

0.625–0.703

—

—

—

H1113

12

0.758–0.855

0.704–0.795

—

—

—

H1114

0.865–0.959

0.796–0.895

—

—

—

H1115

13

0.960–1.07

0.896–0.999

—

—

—

H1116

1.08–1.21

1.00–1.12

—

—

—

H1117

14

1.22–1.35

1.13–1.25

—

—

—

H1018

1.36–1.52

1.26–1.41

—

—

—

H1019

1.53–1.70

1.42–1.58

—

—

—

H1020

1.71–1.90

1.59–1.77

—

—

—

H1021

1.91–2.10

1.78–1.96

—

—

—

H1022

2.11–2.33

1.97–2.17

—

—

—

H1023

2.34–2.62

2.18–2.44

—

—

—

H1024

17

2.63–2.93

2.45–2.72

—

—

—

H1025

2.94–3.27

2.73–3.04

—

—

—

H1026

18

3.28–3.64

3.05–3.38

—

—

—

H1066

8
9

15
16

3.65–4.06

3.39–3.73

3.72–4.10

—

—

H1027

19

4.07–4.55

3.74–4.18

4.11–4.59

3.86–4.31

—

H1028

4.56–5.03

4.19–4.63

4.60–5.07

4.32–4.77

—

H1029

20

Notes
1 For A460 controllers, select heaters at 50% of rated full load current.
2 For A490 controllers, select heaters at 58% of rated full load current.

21

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

22
23
24
25
V12-T13-10

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

13

Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued
For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.
Table ST-1

Table ST-2

NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2

1

Table ST-3

Table ST-4

Table ST-5

NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2

NEMA Size 2

NEMA Size 2

NEMA Size 3

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50,
A460 1, A490 2, A700

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50,
A700, B10, C300
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix B10, C300, A30,
A40, A70, A80, A800-A803

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50,
A460 1, A490 2, A700

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50,
A700, B10, C300
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A70, A80,
A800-A803, A808-A809, B10

5.04–5.59

4.64–5.15

5.08–5.65

4.78–5.31

5.60–6.25

5.16–5.68

5.66–6.29

6.26–6.92

5.69–6.30

6.93–7.75

6.31–7.05

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50,
A700, B10, B50, C300
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix B10,
B50, C300

2
3
Heater
Catalog
Number

4

—

H1030

5.32–5.90

—

H1031

5

6.30–7.00

5.91–6.55

—

H1032

7.01–7.82

6.56–7.33

—

H1033

Heater Ampere Range

7.76–8.63

7.06–7.76

7.83–8.79

7.34–8.15

8.32–9.27

H1034

8.64–9.59

7.77–8.63

8.80–9.67

8.16–9.03

9.28–10.1

H1035

9.60–10.6

8.64–9.51

9.68–10.8

9.04–10.1

10.2–11.4

H1036

10.7–11.9

9.52–10.5

10.9–12.0

10.2–11.2

11.5–12.8

H1037

12.0–13.3

10.6–11.8

12.1–13.4

11.3–12.5

12.9–14.3

H1038

13.4–14.7

11.9–13.1

13.5–14.9

12.6–13.9

14.4–16.0

H1039

14.8–16.6

13.2–14.8

15.0–17.6

14.0–15.7

16.1–17.8

H1040

16.7–18.8

14.9–16.7

17.7–19.0

15.8–17.5

17.9–20.3

H1041

18.9–21.2

16.8–18.9

19.1–21.5

17.6–19.8

20.4–22.9

H1042

21.3–23.9

19.0–21.3

21.6–24.5

19.9–22.3

23.0–26.0

H1043

24.0–27.0

21.4–24.1

24.6–27.9

22.4–25.4

26.1–29.5

H1044

—

24.2–27.0

28.0–32.0

25.5–28.7

29.6–33.5

H1045

—

—

32.1–36.6

28.8–32.5

33.6–37.8

H1046

—

—

36.7–41.8

32.6–36.6

37.9–42.8

H1047

—

—

41.9–45.0

36.7–41.0

42.9–48.5

H1048

—

—

—

41.1–45.0

48.6–55.1

H1049

—

—

—

—

55.2–62.3

H1050

—

—

—

—

62.4–69.5

H1051

—

—

—

—

69.6–79.1

H1052

—

—

—

—

79.2–90.0

H1054

—

—

—

—

—

H1055

—

—

—

—

—

H1056

—

—

—

—

—

H1057

—

—

—

—

—

H1058

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Notes
1 For A460 controllers, select heaters at 50% of rated full load current.
2 For A490 controllers, select heaters at 58% of rated full load current.

19

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T13-11

13

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

1

Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued
For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.

2

Table ST-6

Table ST-7

Table ST-8

Table ST-9

Table ST-10

NEMA Size 3

NEMA Size 4

NEMA Size 5

NEMA Size 0 and 1

NEMA Size 6

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A30,
A40, A50, A460 1, A490 2,
A700

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50, C300
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A30,
A40, A50, A70, A80, A460 1,
A490 2, A700, A800-A803

For Open and Enclosed
Catalog Prefix A10, A50,
A30-40, A70, A80, A400,
A410, A420, A460, A490,
A800-A801

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A30, A40,
A70, A80, A800-A803

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50,
A700
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A30,
A40, A50, A70, A80, A400,
A460 1, A490 2, A700

—

—

—

0.164–0.183

—

H1101

—

—

—

0.184–0.205

—

H1102

—

—

—

0.206–0.232

—

H1103

—

—

—

0.233–0.260

—

H1104

—

—

—

0.261–0.293

—

H1105

—

—

—

0.294–0.328

—

H1106

8

—

—

—

0.329–0.369

—

H1107

—

—

—

0.370–0.414

—

H1108

9

—

—

—

0.415–0.465

—

H1109

—

—

—

0.466–0.522

—

H1110

10

—

—

—

0.523–0.586

—

H1111

—

—

—

0.587–0.659

—

H1112

—

—

—

0.660–0.743

—

H1113

—

—

—

0.744–0.839

—

H1114

—

—

—

0.840–0.943

—

H1115

—

—

—

0.944–1.05

—

H1116

—

—

—

1.06–1.17

—

H1117

13

—

—

—

1.18–1.31

—

H1018

—

—

—

1.32–1.47

154–171

H1019

14

—

—

92–101

1.48–1.66

172–192

H1020

—

—

102–113

1.67–1.85

193–215

H1021

—

—

114–125

1.86–2.04

216–237

H1022

—

—

126–139

2.05–2.26

238–263

H1023

—

—

140–157

2.27–2.54

264–295

H1024

—

—

158–175

2.55–2.85

296–330

H1025

—

—

176–196

2.86–3.18

331–369

H1026

17

—

—

197–218

3.19–3.53

370–410

H1066

—

—

219–243

3.54–3.95

411–458

H1027

18

—

—

244–270

3.96–4.41

459–512

H1028

—

—

—

4.42–4.88

513–574

H1029

19

Notes
1 For A460 controllers, select heaters for 50% of rated full load current.
2 For A490 controllers, select heaters for 58% of rated full load current.

20

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

3
4
5
6
7

11
12

15
16

Heater Ampere Range

21
22
23
24
25
V12-T13-12

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Heater
Catalog
Number

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

13

Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued
For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.

1

Table ST-6

Table ST-7

Table ST-8

Table ST-9

Table ST-10

NEMA Size 3

NEMA Size 4

NEMA Size 5

NEMA Size 0 and 1

NEMA Size 6

2

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50, C300
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A30,
A40, A50, A70, A80, A460 1,
A490 2, A700, A800-A803

For Open and Enclosed
Catalog Prefix A10, A50,
A30-40, A70, A80, A400,
A410, A420, A460, A490,
A800-A801

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A30, A40,
A70, A80, A800-A803

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50,
A700
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A30,
A40, A50, A70, A80, A400,
A460 1, A490 2, A700

—

—

—

4.89–5.42

—

H1030

—

—

—

4.89–5.42

—

H1031

—

—

—

6.08–6.64

—

H1032

—

—

—

6.65–7.43

—

H1033

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A30,
A40, A50, A460 1, A490 2,
A700
Heater Ampere Range

3
Heater
Catalog
Number

8.24–9.19

—

—

7.44–8.23

—

H1034

9.20–10.1

—

—

8.24–9.19

—

H1035

10.2–11.3

—

—

9.20–10.1

—

H1036

11.4–12.7

—

—

10.2–11.3

—

H1037

12.8–14.1

—

—

11.4–12.6

—

H1038

14.2–15.8

—

—

12.7–14.0

—

H1039

15.9–17.7

—

—

14.1–15.7

—

H1040

17.8–20.1

—

—

15.8–17.7

—

H1041

20.2–22.7

20.6–23.3

—

17.8–19.8

—

H1042

22.8–25.5

23.4–26.3

—

19.9–22.0

—

H1043

25.6–28.9

26.4–30.8

—

22.1–24.9

—

H1044

29.0–32.5

30.9–34.0

—

25.0–27.0

—

H1045

32.6–36.7

34.1–38.3

—

—

—

H1046

36.8–41.0

38.4–43.4

—

—

—

H1047

41.1–46.0

43.5–49.3

—

—

—

H1048

46.1–51.8

49.4–55.8

—

—

—

H1049

51.9–58.6

55.9–63.1

—

—

—

H1050

58.7–64.6

63.2–70.4

—

—

—

H1051

64.7–72.7

70.5–79.9

—

—

—

H1052

72.8–83.1

80.0–92.7

—

—

—

H1054

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Notes
1 For A460 controllers, select heaters for 50% of rated full load current.
2 For A490 controllers, select heaters for 58% of rated full load current.

17

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T13-13

13

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

1

Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued
For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.

2

Table ST-11

Table ST-12

Table ST-13

Table ST-14

Table ST-15

NEMA Size 7

NEMA Size 8

NEMA Size 2

NEMA Size 3

NEMA Size 4

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A30,
A40, A50, A70, A80, A400,
A460 1, A490 2, A700

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A30,
A40, A50, A70, A80, A400,
A460 1, A490 2, A700

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A808, A809

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A400

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A400

Heater
Catalog
Number

3
4

Heater Ampere Range

5

—

—

—

—

—

H1101

—

—

—

—

—

H1102

6

—

—

—

—

—

H1103

—

—

—

—

—

H1104

7

—

—

—

—

—

H1105

—

—

—

—

—

H1106

—

—

—

—

—

H1107

—

—

—

—

—

H1108

—

—

—

—

—

H1109

—

—

—

—

—

H1110

—

—

—

—

—

H1111

10

—

—

—

—

—

H1112

—

—

—

—

—

H1113

11

—

—

—

—

—

H1114

—

—

—

—

—

H1115

—

—

—

—

—

H1116

—

—

—

—

—

H1117

229–255

—

—

—

—

H1018

256–287

384–429

—

—

—

H1019

288–321

430–482

—

—

—

H1020

14

322–359

483–538

—

—

—

H1021

360–397

539–595

—

—

—

H1022

15

398–439

596–657

—

—

—

H1023

440–492

658–741

—

—

—

H1024

16

493–551

742–827

—

—

—

H1025

552–615

828–924

—

—

—

H1026

17

616–685

925–1027

—

—

—

H1066

1028–1147

—

—

—

H1027

18

764–855

1148–1285

3.89–4.35

—

—

H1028

—

—

4.36–4.81

—

—

H1029

19

Notes
1 For A460 controllers, select heaters for 50% of rated full load current.
2 For A490 controllers, select heaters for 58% of rated full load current.

8
9

12
13

20

686–763

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

21
22
23
24
25
V12-T13-14

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

13

Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued
For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.
Table ST-11

1

Table ST-12

Table ST-13

Table ST-14

Table ST-15

NEMA Size 7

NEMA Size 8

NEMA Size 2

NEMA Size 3

NEMA Size 4

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A30,
A40, A50, A70, A80, A400,
A460 1, A490 2, A700

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A10, A30,
A40, A50, A70, A80, A400,
A460 1, A490 2, A700

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A808, A809

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A400

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A400

Heater
Catalog
Number

4

—

—

4.82–5.35

—

—

H1030

—

—

5.36–5.96

—

—

H1031

5

—

—

5.97–6.63

—

—

H1032

—

—

6.64–7.41

—

—

H1033

—

—

7.42–8.23

7.84–8.71

—

H1034

—

—

8.24–9.19

8.72–9.67

—

H1035

—

—

9.20–10.2

9.68–10.8

—

H1036

—

—

10.3–11.4

10.9–12.0

—

H1037

—

—

11.5–12.8

12.1–13.5

—

H1038

—

—

12.9–14.1

13.6–15.0

—

H1039

—

—

14.2–15.9

15.1–16.8

—

H1040

2
3

Heater Ampere Range

—

—

16.0–18.1

16.9–19.1

—

H1041

—

—

18.2–20.4

19.2–21.6

19.5–21.9

H1042

—

—

20.5–23.3

21.7–24.5

22.0–24.7

H1043

—

—

23.4–26.5

24.6–27.8

24.8–29.0

H1044

—

—

26.6–30.3

27.9–31.5

29.1–31.9

H1045

—

—

30.4–34.7

31.6–35.5

32.0–36.1

H1046

—

—

34.8–39.6

35.6–40.3

36.2–40.7

H1047

—

—

39.7–45.0

40.4–45.6

40.8–46.2

H1048

—

—

—

45.7–51.8

46.3–52.4

H1049

—

—

—

51.9–58.6

52.5–59.2

H1050

—

—

—

58.7–65.2

59.3–66.3

H1051

—

—

—

65.3–74.3

66.4–75.1

H1052

—

—

—

74.4–86.3

75.2–87.1

H1054

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Notes
1 For A460 controllers, select heaters for 50% of rated full load current.
2 For A490 controllers, select heaters for 58% of rated full load current.

16

Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T13-15

13
1
2
3

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type BNC Bimetal
For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.
Table BNC-1

Table BNC-2

Table BNC-3

Table BNC-4

NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2

NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2

NEMA Size 2

NEMA Size 2

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, B51

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, C301
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A31, A41, A71, A81, B11

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A11, A51, C301

Heater
Catalog
Number

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, B51, C301
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix C301

4

Heater Ampere Range
0.180–0.201

0.167–0.187

—

—

H1101

5

0.202–0.226

0.188–0.210

—

—

H1102

0.227–0.254

0.211–0.236

—

—

H1103

6

0.255–0.285

0.237–0.266

—

—

H1104

0.286–0.320

0.267–0.297

—

—

H1105

7

0.321–0.357

0.298–0.332

—

—

H1106

0.358–0.402

0.333–0.373

—

—

H1107

0.403–0.451

0.374–0.419

—

—

H1108

0.452–0.506

0.420–0.470

—

—

H1109

0.507–0.568

0.471–0.528

—

—

H1110

0.569–0.638

0.529–0.592

—

—

H1111

0.639–0.716

0.593–0.663

—

—

H1112

0.717–0.799

0.664–0.743

—

—

H1113

0.800–0.911

0.744–0.847

—

—

H1114

11

0.912–1.01

0.848–0.951

—

—

H1115

1.02–1.14

0.952–1.06

—

—

H1116

12

1.15–1.29

1.07–1.20

—

—

H1117

1.30–1.44

1.21–1.33

—

—

H1018

13

1.45–1.61

1.34–1.49

—

—

H1019

1.62–1.80

1.50–1.67

—

—

H1020

14

1.81–2.03

1.68–1.89

—

—

H1021

2.04–2.25

1.90–2.09

—

—

H1022

15

2.26–2.49

2.10–2.32

—

—

H1023

2.50–2.76

2.33–2.57

—

—

H1024

16

2.77–3.05

2.58–2.83

—

—

H1025

3.06–3.39

2.84–3.15

—

—

H1026

17

3.40–3.83

3.16–3.51

3.87–4.18

—

H1066

3.84–4.22

3.52–3.87

4.19–4.60

3.94–4.33

H1027

18

4.23–4.63

3.88–4.25

4.61–5.10

4.34–4.78

H1028

4.64–5.19

4.26–4.76

5.11–5.60

4.79–5.27

H1029

19

Note
Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

8
9
10

20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T13-16

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

13

Type BNC Bimetal
For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.
Table BNC-1

Table BNC-2

NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2

1

Table BNC-3

Table BNC-4

NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2

NEMA Size 2

NEMA Size 2

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, B51

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, C301
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A31, A41, A71, A81,
B11

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A11, A51, C301

Heater
Catalog
Number

5.20–5.73

4.77–5.27

5.61–6.20

5.28–5.83

H1030

5.74–6.49

5.28–5.90

6.21–6.92

5.84–6.51

H1031

6.50–7.32

5.91–6.63

6.93–7.76

6.52–7.29

H1032

7.33–8.07

6.64–7.35

7.77–8.63

7.30–8.07

H1033

8.08–9.03

7.36–8.15

8.64–9.67

8.08–9.03

H1034

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, B51,
C301
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix C301
Heater Ampere Range

2

9.04–9.99

8.16–8.87

9.68–10.5

9.04–9.99

H1035

10.0–11.1

8.88–9.99

10.6–11.8

10.0–11.1

H1036

11.2–12.5

10.0–11.1

11.9–13.2

11.2–12.3

H1037

12.6–14.1

11.2–12.5

13.3–15.0

12.4–14.1

H1038

14.2–15.9

12.6–14.1

15.1–17.2

14.2–16.1

H1039

16.0–18.0

14.2–16.1

17.3–19.1

16.2–17.8

H1040

18.1–19.8

16.2–17.7

19.2–21.5

17.9–19.9

H1041

19.9–22.2

17.8–19.8

21.6–23.6

20.0–21.9

H1042

22.3–25.0

19.9–22.2

23.7–27.0

22.0–24.7

H1043

25.1–27.0

22.3–25.0

27.1–30.6

24.8–27.9

H1044

—

25.1–27.0

30.7–35.1

28.0–31.6

H1045

—

—

35.2–39.8

31.7–35.3

H1046

—

—

39.9–45.0

35.4–39.4

H1047

—

—

—

39.5–44.4

H1048

—

—

—

44.5–45.0

H1049

—

—

—

—

H1050

—

—

—

—

H1051

—

—

—

—

H1052

—

—

—

—

H1054

—

—

—

—

H1055

—

—

—

—

H1056

—

—

—

—

H1057

—

—

—

—

H1058

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Note
Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T13-17

13
1
2
3

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type BNC Bimetal, continued
For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.
Table BNC-5

Table BNC-6

Table BNC-7

Table BNC-8

Table BNC-9

NEMA Size 3

NEMA Size 3

NEMA Size 4

NEMA Sizes 0 and 1

NEMA Size 5

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A11, A51, C301
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A11, A31, A41,
A51, A71, A81

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A31, A41,
A71, A81

For Open and
Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A11,
A31-41, A51, A71, A81

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A11, B11, A51, C301 For Enclosed Type
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A11, A31,
Catalog Prefix B11, A71, A81
A41, A51

Heater
Catalog
Number

4

Heater Ampere Range

5

—

—

—

0.176–0.198

—

H1101

—

—

—

0.199–0.221

—

H1102

6

—

—

—

0.222–0.249

—

H1103

—

—

—

0.250–0.279

—

H1104

—

—

—

0.280–0.313

—

H1105

7

—

—

—

0.314–0.350

—

H1106

8
9
10

—

—

—

0.351–0.395

—

H1107

—

—

—

0.396–0.442

—

H1108

—

—

—

0.443–0.497

—

H1109

—

—

—

0.498–0.556

—

H1110

—

—

—

0.557–0.626

—

H1111

—

—

—

0.627–0.703

—

H1112
H1113

—

—

—

0.704–0.783

—

—

—

—

0.784–0.895

—

H1114

—

—

—

0.896–0.999

—

H1115

12

—

—

—

1.00–1.12

—

H1116

—

—

—

1.13–1.25

—

H1117

13

—

—

—

1.26–1.40

—

H1018

—

—

—

1.41–1.56

—

H1019

14

—

—

—

1.57–1.74

96.8–108

H1020

—

—

—

1.75–1.97

109–121

H1021

15

—

—

—

1.98–2.19

122–135

H1022

—

—

—

2.20–2.42

136–149

H1023

—

—

—

2.43–2.68

150–166

H1024

—

—

—

2.69–2.95

167–182

H1025

—

—

—

2.96–3.29

183–203

H1026

—

—

—

3.30–3.72

204–229

H1066

—

—

—

3.73–4.10

230–253

H1027

—

—

—

4.11–4.49

254–283

H1028

—

—

—

4.50–5.04

—

H1029

11

16
17
18
19

Note
Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T13-18

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

13

Type BNC Bimetal, continued
For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.

1

Table BNC-5

Table BNC-6

Table BNC-7

Table BNC-8

Table BNC-9

NEMA Size 3

NEMA Size 3

NEMA Size 4

NEMA Sizes 0 and 1

NEMA Size 5

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A11, A51, C301
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A11, A31, A41,
A51, A71, A81

For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A31, A41,
A71, A81

For Open and
Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A11,
A31-41, A51, A71, A81

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A11, B11, A51, C301 For Enclosed Type
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A11, A31,
Catalog Prefix B11, A71, A81
A41, A51
Heater Ampere Range

2
Heater
Catalog
Number

—

—

—

5.05–5.56

—

H1030

—

—

—

5.57–6.23

—

H1031

—

—

—

6.24–7.03

—

H1032

7.57–8.47

7.57–8.39

—

7.04–7.75

—

H1033

8.48–9.35

8.40–9.27

—

7.76–8.71

—

H1034

9.36–10.1

9.28–10.1

—

8.72–9.59

—

H1035

10.2–11.2

10.2–11.1

—

9.60–10.5

—

H1036

11.3–12.2

11.2–12.1

—

10.6–11.8

—

H1037

12.3–13.7

12.2–13.6

—

11.9–13.3

—

H1038

13.8–15.7

13.7–15.5

—

13.4–14.9

—

H1039

15.8–17.3

15.6–17.2

—

15.0–16.9

—

H1040

17.4–19.9

17.3–19.8

—

17.0–18.5

—

H1041

20.0–22.9

19.9–22.7

20.0–22.9

18.6–20.7

—

H1042

23.0–26.4

22.8–26.0

23.0–26.4

20.8–23.0

—

H1043

26.5–30.6

26.1–30.0

26.5–30.6

23.1–25.7

—

H1044

30.7–35.5

30.1–34.4

30.7–35.5

25.8–27.0

—

H1045

35.6–41.2

34.5–39.5

35.6–41.2

—

—

H1046

41.3–46.5

39.6–44.3

41.3–46.5

—

—

H1047

46.6–52.4

44.4–49.9

46.6–52.4

—

—

H1048

52.5–57.8

50.0–54.3

52.5–57.8

—

—

H1049

57.9–63.6

54.4–59.8

57.9–63.6

—

—

H1050

63.7–69.9

59.9–65.1

63.7–69.9

—

—

H1051

70.0–79.5

65.2–73.1

70.0–79.5

—

—

H1052

79.6–90.0

73.2–83.9

79.6–92.0

—

—

H1054

Note
Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T13-19

13
1
2
3
4

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type 8LT Slow Trip Eutectic Alloy
For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.
Table LT-1

Table LT-2

NEMA Size 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2
For Enclosed
Type
Catalog Prefix
A13

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A13,
C303
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix C303

Table LT-3

Table LT-4

Table LT-5

Table LT-6

Table LT-7

Table LT-8

NEMA Size 2

NEMA Size 2

NEMA Size 3

NEMA Size 3

NEMA Size 4

NEMA Size 5

For Enclosed
Type
Catalog Prefix
A13

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A13,
C303
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix C303

For Enclosed
Type
Catalog Prefix
A13

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix
A13, C303

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A13,
C303
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A13

Heater Ampere Range

For Open and
Enclosed Type
Heater
Catalog Prefix A13 Catalog
Number

0.167–0.186

0.167–0.186

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1001

0.187–0.209

0.187–0.209

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1002

0.210–0.233

0.210–0.233

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1003

0.234–0.260

0.234–0.260

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1004

0.261–0.293

0.261–0.293

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1005

7

0.294–0.329

0.294–0.329

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1006

0.330–0.373

0.330–0.373

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1007

8

0.374–0.417

0.374–0.417

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1008

0.418–0.471

0.418–0.471

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1009

9

0.472–0.531

0.472–0.531

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1010

0.532–0.591

0.532–0.591

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1011

10

0.592–0.660

0.592–0.660

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1012

0.661–0.739

0.661–0.739

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1013

11

0.740–0.823

0.740–0.823

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1014

0.824–0.919

0.824–0.919

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1015

12

0.920–1.01

0.920–1.01

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1016

1.02–1.14

1.02–1.14

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1017

13

1.15–1.27

1.15–1.27

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1018

1.28–1.41

1.28–1.41

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1019

14

1.42–1.61

1.42–1.61

—

—

—

—

—

—

H1020

1.62–1.86

1.62–1.86

—

—

—

—

—

96.8–111

H1021

1.87–2.01

1.87–2.01

—

—

—

—

—

112–120

H1022

2.02–2.27

2.02–2.27

—

—

—

—

—

121–136

H1023

2.28–2.51

2.28–2.51

—

—

—

—

—

137–150

H1024

2.52–2.80

2.52–2.80

—

—

—

—

—

151–168

H1025

2.81–3.21

2.81–3.21

—

—

—

—

—

169–192

H1026

3.22–3.51

3.22–3.51

—

—

—

—

—

193–210

H1066

3.52–3.86

3.52–3.86

3.67–3.99

3.67–3.99

—

—

—

211–231

H1027

3.87–4.36

3.87–4.36

4.00–4.51

4.00–4.51

—

—

—

232–261

H1028

4.37–4.78

4.37–4.83

4.52–5.03

4.52–5.03

—

—

—

262–293

H1029

5
6

15
16
17
18
19
20

Notes
Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.
Individually boxed heater coils master packed 10 per carton.

21
22
23
24
25
V12-T13-20

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

13

Type LT Slow Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued
For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor.
Table LT-1

Table LT-2

NEMA Size 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2
For Enclosed
Type
Catalog Prefix
A13

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A13,
C303
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix C303

Table LT-3

1

Table LT-4

Table LT-5

Table LT-6

Table LT-7

Table LT-8

NEMA Size 2

NEMA Size 2

NEMA Size 3

NEMA Size 3

NEMA Size 4

NEMA Size 5

For Enclosed
Type
Catalog Prefix
A13

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A13,
C303
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix C303

For Enclosed
Type
Catalog Prefix
A13

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix
A13, C303

For Open Type
Catalog Prefix A13,
C303
For Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A13

Heater
For Open and
Catalog
Enclosed Type
Catalog Prefix A13 Number

2

Heater Ampere Range
4.79–5.35

4.84–5.41

5.04–5.59

5.04–5.59

—

—

—

—

H1030

5.36–6.00

5.42–6.07

5.60–6.20

5.60–6.20

—

—

—

—

H1031

6.01–6.59

6.08–6.66

6.21–6.88

6.21–6.88

—

—

—

—

H1032

6.60–7.35

6.67–7.51

6.89–7.80

6.89–7.80

—

—

—

—

H1033

7.36–8.14

7.52–8.31

7.81–8.71

7.81–8.71

8.16–9.11

8.24–9.19

—

—

H1034

8.15–9.11

8.32–9.27

8.72–9.59

8.72–9.59

9.12–9.99

9.20–10.0

—

—

H1035

9.12–10.0

9.28–10.3

9.60–10.5

9.60–10.7

10.0–11.2

10.1–11.3

—

—

H1036

10.1–11.3

10.4–11.7

10.6–11.8

10.8–12.0

11.3–12.3

11.4–12.5

—

—

H1037

11.4–12.5

11.8–13.0

11.9–13.3

12.1–13.4

12.4–13.9

12.6–14.1

—

—

H1038

12.6–13.9

13.1–14.5

13.4–14.8

13.5–14.9

14.0–15.5

14.2–15.7

—

—

H1039

14.0–15.5

14.6–16.3

14.9–16.6

15.0–16.8

15.6–17.4

15.8–17.6

—

—

H1040

15.6–17.0

16.4–18.1

16.7–18.5

16.9–18.8

17.5–19.6

17.7–19.8

—

—

H1041

17.1–18.9

18.2–20.3

18.6–20.7

18.9–21.1

19.7–21.9

19.9–22.1

20.0–22.3

—

H1042

19.0–21.2

20.4–23.0

20.8–23.3

21.2–24.1

22.0–24.7

22.2–25.2

22.4–25.5

—

H1043

21.3–23.3

23.1–25.9

23.4–26.5

24.2–27.3

24.8–28.1

25.3–28.7

25.6–28.9

—

H1044

23.4–26.1

26.0–27.0

26.6–30.0

27.4–31.3

28.2–31.8

28.8–32.7

29.0–33.7

—

H1045

26.2–27.0

—

30.1–33.7

31.4–35.5

31.9–36.1

32.8–37.3

33.8–37.5

—

H1046

—

—

33.8–37.5

35.6–40.3

36.2–40.7

37.4–42.3

37.6–42.6

—

H1047

—

—

37.6–41.9

40.4–45.0

40.8–45.5

42.4–47.9

42.7–48.2

—

H1048

—

—

42.0–45.0

—

45.6–52.0

48.0–55.4

48.3–55.9

—

H1049

—

—

—

—

52.1–58.2

55.5–61.9

56.0–62.3

—

H1050

—

—

—

—

58.3–63.2

62.0–67.9

62.4–68.4

—

H1051

—

—

—

—

63.3–68.3

68.0–73.3

68.5–73.7

—

H1052

—

—

—

—

68.4–79.9

73.4–87.9

73.8–88.7

—

H1054

Notes
Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton.
Individually boxed heater coils master packed 10 per carton.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T13-21

13
1
2

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type N

Product History Time Line for Type N

Originally a Westinghouse
Product

Size

1940

1950

1960

1970

1980

1990

2000

Present

0–4

3

Replacement Capabilities

4

Contact Kits
NEMA
Size

Poles

Style
Number

0

3

1605226

6

1

3

1605212

2

3

1605202

7

3

3

1625563

4

3

1625564

5

8

AC Coils
Type N Contactor

9

Part Number
Two-, Three-Pole
Voltage

Hz

Original

Four-, Five-Pole
New

Original

New

9969D90G18

10

Sizes 0, 1
220/380/440

25/50/60

1470243

9969D90G03

1470263

11

550

60

1470244

9969D90G04

N/A

N/A

120

60

1605268

9969D90G09

N/A

N/A

12

115/208/230

60/60/60

1605513

9969D90G15

N/A

N/A

600

60

1470245

9969D90G20

N/A

N/A

9969D93G02

13

Size 2
110/208/220

25/60/60

1470202

9969D92G02

1470222

14

220/380/440/480

25/50/60/60

1470203

9969D92G03

N/A

N/A

600

60

1470205

9969D92G08

1470225

9969D93G08

15

120/110

60/50

1605478

9969D92G10

N/A

N/A

Size 3

16

110/208/220

25/60/60

1490646

9969D96G05

1490646

9969D96G05

220/380/400/440

25/50/50/60

1490647

9969D96G06

1490647

9969D96G06

120/110

60/50

1600770

9969D96G09

1600770

9969D96G09

600/500

60/50

1490649

9969D96G21

1490649

9969D96G21

17

Size 4

18
19
20

110/208/220

25/60/60

1490658

9969D96G11

1597724

9969D96G02

600/500

60/50

1596635

9969D96G16

1490649

9969D96G21

440

60

1490659

9969D96G12

N/A

N/A

120/110

60/50

1600771

9969D96G20

N/A

N/A

Technology Upgrades

21

Sizes 00–3—Freedom or IT.
Sizes 4–5—Freedom,
Vacuum or IT.

22
23
24
25
V12-T13-22

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

13

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

A200
Originally a Westinghouse
Product

Product History Time Line for A200, A201, A203, A204, A206, A210, A211, A213, A214, A216,
A220, A223, A224, A226, A250, A251, A600, A603, A604, A606, A700, A703, A704, A706, A800,
A804 and A806
Size

Model

00–3

J

4

J

4

K

5–6

Electrically held

5–6

Mechanically held

1960

1965

1970

1975

1980

1985

1990

1995 2000 Present

4
5
6

9

7

Replacement Capabilities

Contact Kit for A200 Model J,
Size Two-, Three-Pole

8

Kits for Model J, Sizes 00, 0, 1 and 2 1
Description

Poles

Size 00

Size 0

Size 1

Size 2

Contact kit

2

373B331G17

373B331G02

373B331G07

373B331G11

3

373B331G18

373B331G04

373B331G09

373B331G12

4

373B331G18

373B331G04

373B331G09

373B331G13 2

5

373B331G19

373B331G05

373B331G10

373B331G14 3

2–4

6714C74G01

6714C74G02

6714C74G03

6714C74G07 (two-, three-pole)

5

6714C74G04

6714C74G05

6714C74G06

6714C74G08 (four-, five-pole)

Arc box 4

Cross bar

A200 AC Coil, 120/110V, 60/50 Hz,
Two-, Three-, Four-Pole, Sizes 00, 0 and 1

2–3

N/A

N/A

N/A

672B788G32

4–5

N/A

N/A

N/A

672B788G34

Upper base (for single rated coils only)

2–3

N/A

N/A

N/A

672B788G33

4–5

N/A

N/A

N/A

672B788G35

Lower base

2–3

N/A

N/A

N/A

1250C33G09

4–5

N/A

N/A

N/A

1250C33G05

KO spring (pk. of 10)

All

N/A

N/A

N/A

503C796G01

Terminal line/load (pk. of 3)

All

N/A

N/A

N/A

371B870G03

9
10

Sizes 00, 0 and 1

Size 2

11
12
13
14
15
16

AC Coils
Voltage

Hz

Two-, Three-, Four-Pole Five-Pole

Two-, Three-Pole

Four-, Five-Pole

120/110

60/50

505C806G01

505C808G01

505C806G01

505C818G01

208

60

505C806G02

505C808G02

505C806G02

505C818G02

600/550

60/50

505C806G05

505C808G05

505C806G05

505C818G05

380

50

505C806G07

505C808G07

505C806G07

505C818G07

240/220

60/50

505C806G12

505C808G12

505C806G12

505C818G12

480/440

60/50

505C806G13

505C808G13

505C806G13

505C818G13

24

60

505C806G16

N/A

505C806G16

505C818G15

277

60

505C806G18

505C808G16

505C806G18

505C818G16

240/480 5

60/60

505C806G03

505C808G03

505C806G03

505C818G03

5

60/60

505C806G10

505C808G10

505C806G10

505C818G10

120/240

2
3

7–8

A200 Size 1 Starter

1

Notes
1 Model C contact kits and coils 00–4, two-, three-, four- and five-pole contactors are same as Model J.
All other parts are unavailable.
2 Use quantity two—373B331G11 (two-pole kit).
3 Use one each of 373B331G11 (two-pole kit) and 373B331G12 (three-pole kit).
4 Mounting hardware included.
5 Dual voltage coils. Use only on contactors or starters originally supplied with a dual voltage coil.

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T13-23

13

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

DC Coils 1

1

Size 0

Size 1

Size 2

Voltage

Single-, Two-, Three-, Four-Pole

Single-, Two-, Three-, Four-Pole

Single-, Two-, Three-, Four-Pole

12

1268C86G07

1268C86G07

1268C86G07

24

1268C86G04

1268C86G04

1268C86G04

48

1268C86G05

1268C86G05

1268C86G05

125

1268C86G02

1268C86G02

1268C86G02

4

250

1268C86G01

1268C86G01

1268C86G01

125/250 2

1268C86G03

1268C86G03

1268C86G03

5

Kits for Model J–K, Sizes 3 and 4 3

2
3

A200 AC Coil, 110/120V, 60 Hz, Size 6

Description
Contact kit

6
7

A200 AC Coil, 120/110V, 60/50 Hz,
Two-, Three-Pole, Sizes 3 and 4, Model J

Arc box

8

Cross bar

9

Upper base
Lower base

10
11

Poles

Size 3—Model J

Size 4—Model J

Size 4—Model K 4
5250C81G16

2

626B187G12

626B187G16

3

626B187G13

626B187G17

5250C81G17

4

626B187G14 5

626B187G18 7

5250C81G18

5

626B187G15 6

626B187G19 8

5250C81G19

2–3

6714C74G09

6714C74G11

6714C74G11

4–5

6714C74G10

6714C74G12

6714C74G12

2–3

672B788G36

672B788G36

672B788G40

4–5

672B788G38

672B788G38

—

2–3

672B788G37

672B788G37

672B788G52

4–5

672B788G39

672B788G39

—
1250C33G10

2–3

1250C33G03

1250C33G03

4–5

1250C33G06

1250C33G06

—

KO spring (pk. of 10)

All

503C796G02

503C796G02

672B788G50

Terminals line/load (pk. of 3)

All

372B357G12

372B357G13

372B357G13

AC Coils

12

Model K, Size 4 9

Model J, Sizes 3–4

13
14
15
16
17

Voltage

Hz

Two-, Three-Pole

Four-, Five-Pole

Two-, Three-Pole

120/110

60/50

505C633G01

505C635G01

5250C79G01

Four-, Five-Pole
5250C80G01

208

60

505C633G02

505C635G02

5250C79G02

5250C80G02

600/550

60/50

505C633G05

505C635G05

5250C79G05

5250C80G05

380

50

505C633G07

505C635G07

5250C79G07

5250C80G07
5250C80G12

240/220

60/50

505C633G12

505C635G12

5250C79G12

480/440

60/50

505C633G13

505C635G13

5250C79G13

5250C80G13

24

60

505C633G34

N/A

5250C79G34

N/A

277

60

505C633G14

N/A

5250C79G14

N/A

240/480 j

60/60

505C633G03

505C635G03

5250C79G03

5250C80G03

120/240 j

60/60

505C633G10

505C635G10

5250C79G10

5250C80G10

DC Coils k
Model J, Sizes 3–4

18

Voltage

Two-, Three-Pole

24

1255C68G04

48

1255C68G05

125

1255C68G01

20

250

1255C68G02

125/250

1255C68G03

21

Notes
1 Use only on contactors originally supplied with a DC coil.
2 Dual voltage coils. Use only on contactors or starters originally supplied with a dual voltage coil.
3 Model C contact kits and coils 00–4, two-, three-, four- and five-pole contactors are same as Model J.
All other parts are unavailable.
4 Model K replaces Model J.
5 Use quantity two–626B187G12 (two-pole kits).
6 Use one of each of 626B187G12 (two-pole kit) and 626B187G13 (three-pole kit).
7 Use quantity two–626B187G16 (two-pole kit).
8 Use one each of 626B187G16 (two-pole kit) and 626B187G17 (three-pole kit).
9 Model K replaces Model J.
j Dual voltage coils. Use only on contactors or starters originally supplied with a dual voltage coil.
k Use only on units originally supplied with DC coil.

19

22
23
24
25
V12-T13-24

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

13

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Kits for GCA 530/630, Sizes 5–9—and GPD Sizes 7–9 1
Kit

Size 5
2

Size 6

Size 7

Size 8

Size 9

1

2066A10G11

461A757G17

646C829G05

5264C42G01 (rear connected)

—

—

—

—

5264C42G02 (front connected)

Arc box

2050A15G45

2066A10G45

831D580G01

831D580G01

9917D69G02

Magnet assembly

2050A15G46

2050A15G46

N/A

N/A

N/A

Magnet spacing kit

2050A15G47

2050A15G47

N/A

N/A

N/A

Arc cup kit

2050A15G48

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Load connection kit

2050A15G49

2066A10G49

N/A

N/A

N/A

Line connection kit

2050A15G50

2066A10G50

N/A

N/A

N/A

KO spring-6

2050A15G51

2066A10G46

N/A

N/A

N/A

CT 300/5

655C285H03

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

CT 400/5

655C285H04

—

—

—

—

CT 600/5

N/A

2066A10G18 3

N/A

N/A

N/A

CT 800/5

N/A

2066A10G19 3

N/A

N/A

N/A

Contact kit (one per pole)

477B477G05

3
4
5
6
7

Phase barrier

N/A

N/A

640C441G01

640C441G01

5264C35G03 (rear connected)

Cross bar

2050A15G12

2066A10G15

N/A

N/A

N/A

Shunt

N/A

2066A10G48

650C129G01

646C831G02 (set of three)

5264C39G02 (set of four)

Coils
Voltage

2

8
9

Coils
Hz

Size 5

Size 6

Line Voltage

Sizes 7–8

Required

Size 9

110/120

60

2050A14G05

2050A12G05

115 Vdc

438C805G01

2

110/120

50

2050A14G06

2050A12G06

125 Vdc

438C805G04

2

100 Vdc
5264C34G01
(contains coil
and resistor)

200/208

50

2050A14G07

2050A12G07

230 Vdc

438C805G02

2

220/240

50

2050A14G08

2050A12G08

250 Vdc

438C805G03

2

200/208

60

2050A14G09

2050A12G09

110/120 Vac 47

438C805G12

2

220/240

60

2050A14G10

2050A12G10

220/240 Vac 57

438C805G11

2

277/303

60

2050A14G12

2050A12G12

380 Vac 67

438C805G15

2

380/415

50

2050A14G14

2050A12G14

440/480 Vac 67

438C805G10

2

67

438C805G13

2

2050A12G15

550/575 Vac

440/480

50

2050A14G16

2050A12G16

550/600

60

2050A14G17

2050A12G17

Notes
1 Catalog No. A201/A200 Series replaces GCA/GPD Series. Renewal parts are the same.
2 Use 477B477G06 for Silver Tungsten applications.
3 CT Kit replaces the single molded one CT assembly used on the old Size 6 airbrake. The kit
includes a single molded three CT assembly, two busbars and hardware. This CT Kit also
replaces the single molded three CT assembly used on the present Size 6 airbrake and Size 6
vacuum contactor.
4 Rectifier 125V 2018A40G01 (one required).
5 Rectifier 250V 2018A40G02 (one required).
6 Rectifier 600V 2018A40G03 (one required).
7 These coils require an external rectifier. If the rectifier needs to be replaced, order by the
appropriate style number.

550/600

50

2050A14G18

2050A12G18

60

2050A14G19

2050A12G19

120/240

60

2050A14G20

2050A12G20

24 DC

—

2050A14G21

2050A12G21

48 DC

—

2050A14G22

2050A12G22

125 DC

—

2050A14G25

2050A12G25

250 DC

—

2050A14G27

2050A12G27

12
14

2050A14G15

380/415

11
13

60

440/480

10

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T13-25

13

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Accessories for Size 5–9 AC Contactors—Coils

1

AC Contactors

2
3
4
5

Size 5
DC Coil Conversion Kit—
Style Number 7864A29G01

A rectifier circuit converts the
AC supply to DC supply. This
conversion provides quiet
operation and improves
pickup and dropout
characteristics. All necessary
parts are included in the kit.

Size 6

Voltage

AC/DC Coil
Conversion Kit

Replacement
Coil

120 Vac

7864A28G01

7856A15G05

240 Vac

7864A28G02

7856A15G10

480 Vac

7864A28G03

7856A15G15

120 Vac

7864A29G01

7856A16G05

240 Vac

7864A29G02

7856A16G10

480 Vac

7864A29G03

7856A16G15

Accessories for Size 5–9 AC Contactors—Auxiliary Electrical Interlock

Contactor Size

Catalog
Number
(Obsolete)

Style Number
(Obsolete)

Circuits

Catalog
Number
(Current)

Style
Number
(Current)

00–6

(L-56)

(2609D01G01)

1NO and 1NC

J11

9084A17G01

(L-56D)

8

(L-56E)

(2609D01G02)

2NO

J20

9084A17G02

(2609D01G03)

1NO and 1NC

J11

9084A17G01

(L-56B)

(2609D01G04)

2NO

J20

9084A17G02

9

(L-56H)

(2609D01G05)

2NO

J20

9084A17G02

(L-56J)

(2609D01G06)

1NO and 1NC DB

J1C

N/A

10

(T-56A)

(2609D01G07)

N/A

N/A

N/A

6
7

L63—Style Number 578D461G01

(T-56A)

(2609D01G07)

N/A

N/A

N/A

11

(T-56B)

(2609D01G08)

N/A

N/A

N/A

(L-56F)

(2609D01G09)

N/A

N/A

N/A

12

(L-56G)

(2609D01G10)

1NO and 1NC DB

J1C

9084A17G04
9084A17G03

(L-56C)

(2609D01G11)

2NC

J02

(L-56M)

(2609D01G12)

N/A

N/A

N/A

(L-56P)

(2609D01G17)

1NO and 1NC

J11

9084A17G01

(L-56R)

(2609D01G18)

2NC

J02

9084A17G03

(L-56S)

(2609D01G19)

1NO and 1NC

J11

9084A17G01

7–8

L63

—

NO

—

578D461G01

L63

—

NC

—

578D461G03

9

L64

—

NO/NC

—

843D943G04

L64

—

2NO

—

843D943G05

L64

—

2NC

—

843D943G06

13
14

L64—Style Number 843D943G04

15
16
17

Technology Upgrades
Sizes 00–3—Freedom or IT.
Sizes 4–6—Freedom, Vacuum or IT.
Sizes 7–8—Freedom
Size 9—No upgrade available

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T13-26

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

13

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Manual Reset, Class 20,
Thermal Type B Overload
Relay

Type B Overload Relay, Panel Mounted

Operation

Ambient Compensation

Design Standards

The Type B overload relay is a
bimetallic actuated device. The
bimetal elements are operated
by precisely calibrated heaters.
The heater elements connect
either directly in the circuit to
be measured, or through
current transformers on
applications NEMA Size 5
and larger.

The Type B ambient
compensated design is
supplied as standard on all
A200 starters. This design
uses a second compensating
bimetal responsive to
ambient air temperature in
the surrounding enclosure.
This feature reduces
nuisance tripping in
applications using compact
control panels and motor
control centers where
internal temperature rise is
significant compared to
motor ambient temperature.
The compensating
characteristic is maintained in
ambient temperatures from
40°C to 77°C.

UL® 508, CSA®, ANSI/NEMA
ICS 2-222.

As the bimetals are heated by
motor current flow, a
deflection force is produced.
Upon a sustained level of
abnormal current flow, the
deflection becomes great
enough to open the snap
action output contact.

4
5
6
7
8
9

Starter Mounted Catalog Number

Field-Mountable Alarm Contact

Note: Alarm contact available as
factory modification of field
mountable. For factory
modification, add suffix B.

Panel Mounted
Catalog Number

Replacement for Type B
Overload Relays

Replacement for Type A Overload
Relays in Manual Reset Mode
(Three-Pole Only) 1

Ambient
Comp.

Non-Comp.

Ambient
Comp.

Non-Comp.

Ambient
Comp.

Non-Comp.

Single-Pole (One NC Contact)
0.25–26.2

BA11JP

BN11JP

BA11A

BN11A

—

—

26.3–45.0

BA21JP

BN21JP

BA21A

BN21A

—

—

19.0–90.0
19.0–135.0

The Type B overload relay is
designed to protect industrial
motors against overload
conditions. Using modern
block-type, bimetallic design,
this relay will provide Class 20
operation in either singlephase or three-phase
applications.

Three-Pole (One NC Contact)

Features
●

●

●
●
●

●

●

Ambient compensation
standard
Alarm contact field
mountable
Class 20—600V design
Inverse time delay trip
Test trip device for weld
check
High visibility up-front trip
indication
Trip-free reset mechanism

10
11
12
13

Use three-pole design, wire three-poles in series

Application Description

2
3

Overload Relay Selection Table
For replacement in existing applications only.

Motor Full
Load
Amperes

1

14

0.25–26.2

BA13JP

BN13JP

BA13A 2

BN13A 2

BA13J

BN13J

26.3–45.0

BA23JP

BN23JP

BA23A

BN23A

BA23J

BN23J

19.0–90.0

BA33P

BN33P

BA33A

BN33A

BA33A

BN33A

19.0–135.0

BA43P

BN43P

BA43A

BN43A

BA43A

BN43A

Alarm Contact Kit Selection

Heaters

Type B Overload
Relay Size

Catalog
Number

1, 2
3, 4

B3NO-2
B3NO-4

Price of overload relay does
not include heaters. Select
from the tables on Pages
V12-T13-30 to V12-T13-32.

15
16
17
18
19

Notes
1 Includes contactor mounting bracket,
overload relay and connection straps
to contactor.
2 For replacement on B200 sizes 00, 0
and 1, use BA23A instead of BA13A
and use BN23A instead of BN13A.

20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T13-27

13
1
2

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Auto/Manual Reset,
Class 20, Thermal Type A
Overload Relay

3
4
5
6
Three-Pole Panel Mounted

7
8

Operation

Automatic Reset

Design Standards

The Type A overload relay is a
bimetallic actuated device. The
bimetal elements are operated
by precisely calibrated heaters.
The heater elements
connected either directly in the
circuit to be measured, or
through current transformers
on applications NEMA Size 5
and larger.

The Type A overload relay can
be supplied as an option on all
A200 starters to provide
automatic reset operation.
The overload relay is always
shipped in the non-automatic
mode. To set up auto
operation, reposition the
reset rod by loosening and retightening a hold-down clamp
at the base of overload relay.

UL 508, CSA, ANSI/NEMA
ICS 2-222.

As the bimetals are heated by
motor current flow, a
deflection force is produced.
Upon a sustained level of
abnormal current flow, the
deflection becomes great
enough to open the snap
action output contact.

Overload Relay Selection Table
For replacement in existing applications only.

9

Motor Full
Load Amperes

Panel Mounted Catalog Number

Starter Mounted Catalog Number

Ambient Comp.

Ambient Comp.

Non-Comp.

AN11A

Non-Comp.

10

Single-Pole (One NC Contact)

11

0.25–26.2

AA11P

AN11P

AA11A

26.3–45.0

AA21P

AN21P

AA21A

AN21A

19.0–90.0

AA31P

AN31P

AA31A

AN31A

19.0–135.0

AA41P

AN41P

AA41A

AN41A

AA13P

AN13P

AA13A

AN13A

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Single-Pole Panel Mounted

Application Description
The Type A overload relay is
designed to protect industrial
motors against overload
conditions. Using modern
block-type, bimetallic design,
this relay will provide Class 20
operation in either singlephase or three-phase
applications.

Features
●

●

●
●
●

●

Field selectable manual/
auto reset
Alarm contact factory
available
Class 20—600V design
Inverse time delay trip
Adjustable trip rating
±15%
Color-coded reset rod:
Compensated (gray)
Non-compensated (red)

Three-Pole (One NC Contact) 1
0.25–26.2
26.3–45.0

AA23P

AN23P

AA23A

AN23A

19.0–90.0

AA33P

AN33P

AA33A

AN33A

19.0–135.0

AA43P

AN43P

AA43A

AN43A

Heaters
Price of overload relay does
not include heaters. Select
from the tables on Pages
V12-T13-30 to V12-T13-32.

Notes
1 Three-pole Type B Overload Relay is a
suitable alternative to a three-pole Type
A Overload Relay in Manual Reset Mode.
For example, use BA13JP for AA13P
and BN23J for AN23A, etc. (See
Page V12-T13-27.)
Alarm contact available only as factory
modification on Type A relay.

21
22
23
24
25
V12-T13-28

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

13

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Type FT Fast Trip,
Class 10 Overload Relay

Single-Pole Fast Trip, Panel Mounted

Operation
The Type FT overload relay is
a bimetallic actuated device.
The bimetal elements are
operated directly from line
current, thus separate
calibrating heater elements
are not used. The overload
relay may be wired directly in
the motor circuit, or through
current transformers on
applications larger than 150A.

1

As the bimetals are heated
by motor current flow, a
deflection is produced. Upon
a sustained level of abnormal
current flow, the deflection
becomes great enough to
open the snap action output
contact.

2
3
4
5

Overload Relay Selection Table
For replacement in existing applications only.
Motor Full Load
Amperes

6

Panel Mounted Catalog Number

Starter Mounted Catalog Number 1

Single-Pole 1

NEMA Size

Three-Pole 2

Single-Pole

7
8

Single-Pole (One NC Contact); Three-Phase (Three NC Contacts in Series)

Three-Pole Fast Trip, Panel Mounted

Application Description
The Type FT overload relay is
designed to protect special
purpose motors having
restricted thermal and locked
rotor capabilities. Using
modern block-type, bimetallic
design, this relay will provide
Class 10 operation in singlephase or three-phase
applications.

Features
●
●
●

●

●

●

●

Class 10—600V design
Inverse time delay trip
Color-coded reset rod—
green
Alarm contact factory
available
Field selectable manual/
auto reset
Adjustable trip rating
±20%
Ambient compensation
included

0.76–1.1

FT11P-1.1

FT13P-1.1

—

FT11A-1.1

1.1–1.6

FT11P-1.6

FT13P-1.6

—

FT11A-1.6

1.6–2.4

FT11P-2.4

FT13P-2.4

0, 1

FT11A-2.4

2.4–3.6

FT11P-3.6

FT13P-3.6

0, 1

FT11A-3.6

3.6–5.4

FT11P-5.4

FT13P-5.4

0, 1

FT11A-5.4

5.4–8.0

FT11P-8

FT13P-8

0, 1

FT11A-8

8.0–12

FT11P-12

FT13P-12

0, 1

FT11A-12

12–18

FT11P-18

FT13P-18

1

FT11A-18

16–24

FT11P-24

FT13P-24

1

FT11A-24

22–32

FT11P-32

FT13P-32

0, 1

FT11A-32

24–36

FT21P-36

FT23P-36

2

FT21A-36

36–54

FT21P-54

FT23P-54

2

FT21A-54

22–32

FT31P-32

FT33P-32

3

FT31A-32

32–48

FT31P-48

FT33P-48

3

FT31A-48

48–72

FT31P-72

FT33P-72

3

FT31A-72

72–110

FT41P-110

FT43P-110

4

FT41A-110

100–150

FT41P-150

FT43P-150

4

FT41A-150

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Notes
1 Single-pole (one NO–NC contact): Add suffix B.
2 Three-pole (three NO–NC contacts): Add suffix B. Example: FT13PB-12.

17

Alarm contact available only as factory modification on FT relay.

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T13-29

13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Heaters for Thermal
Types A and B Overload
Relays
Product Description

Heater Selection for Types A and B Overload Relays, Sizes 00, 0, 1 and 2 Starters
Non-Compensated Open Starters and
Ambient Compensated Open and Enclosed Starters

Non-Compensated
Enclosed Starters

Block-Type Overload
Using Three Heaters

Block-Type Overload
Using Three Heaters

Single-Pole
Type Overload

Heater
Catalog
Number

Single-Pole
Type Overload

Each heater is identified by
a catalog number stamped
on one terminal. The heater
application table indicates
the range of full load motor
current to which a given
heater may be applied.

Full Load Current of Motor (Amperes)

Heaters should be selected
on the basis of the actual
full load current and service
factor as shown on the
motor nameplate or in the
manufacturer’s published
literature.
When motor and overload
relay are in the same ambient
and the service factor of the
motor is 1.15 to 1.25, select
heaters from the heater
application table. If the service
factor of the motor is 1.0, or
there is no service factor
shown, or a maximum of
115% protection is desired,
select one size smaller
heater than indicated.
When motor and overload
relay are in different
ambients and when using
non-compensated overload
relays, select heaters from
the tables on Pages
V12-T13-30 through
V12-T13-32 using adjusted
motor currents as follows:
decrease rated motor current
1% for each °C motor
ambient exceeds controller
ambient. Increase rated
motor current 1% for each °C
controller ambient exceeds
motor ambient.
For temperature
compensated overload
relays, select heaters
according to the tables on
Pages V12-T13-30 through
V12-T13-32 and selection
information above regardless
of ambient.

12

For Sizes 0, 1 and 2 Starters
0.25–0.27

0.29–0.31

0.24–0.25

0.28–0.30

FH03

0.28–0.31

0.32–0.35

0.26–0.28

0.31–0.34

FH04

0.32–0.34

0.36–0.39

0.29–0.31

0.35–0.37

FH05

0.35–0.38

0.40–0.43

0.32–0.35

0.38–0.42

FH06

0.39–0.42

0.44–0.48

0.36–0.39

0.43–0.47

FH07

0.43–0.46

0.49–0.53

0.40–0.43

0.48–0.52

FH08

0.47–0.50

0.54–0.58

0.44–0.47

0.53–0.56

FH09

0.51–0.55

0.59–0.64

0.48–0.51

0.57–0.63

FH10

0.56–0.62

0.65–0.71

0.52–0.57

0.64–0.70

FH11

0.63–0.68

0.72–0.79

0.58–0.63

0.71–0.77

FH12

0.69–0.75

0.80–0.87

0.64–0.70

0.78–0.85

FH13

0.76–0.83

0.88–0.96

0.71–0.77

0.86–0.94

FH14

0.84–0.91

0.97–1.06

0.78–0.85

0.95–1.03

FH15

0.92–1.00

1.07–1.16

0.86–0.93

1.04–1.13

FH16

1.01–1.11

1.17–1.28

0.94–1.03

1.14–1.25

FH17

1.12–1.22

1.29–1.41

1.04–1.13

1.26–1.38

FH18

1.23–1.34

1.42–1.55

1.14–1.25

1.39–1.52

FH19

1.35–1.47

1.56–1.71

1.26–1.37

1.53–1.67

FH20

1.48–1.62

1.72–1.87

1.38–1.51

1.68–1.83

FH21

1.63–1.78

1.88–2.06

1.52–1.65

1.84–2.01

FH22

1.79–1.95

2.07–2.26

1.66–1.81

2.02–2.21

FH23

1.96–2.15

2.27–2.48

1.82–1.99

2.22–2.43

FH24

2.16–2.35

2.49–2.72

2.00–2.19

2.44–2.66

FH25

2.36–2.58

2.73–2.99

2.20–2.39

2.67–2.92

FH26

2.59–2.83

3.00–3.28

2.40–2.63

2.93–3.21

FH27

2.84–3.11

3.29–3.60

2.64–2.89

3.22–3.53

FH28

3.12–3.42

3.61–3.95

2.90–3.17

3.54–3.87

FH29

3.43–3.73

3.96–4.31

3.18–3.47

3.88–4.22

FH30

3.74–4.07

4.32–4.71

3.48–3.79

4.23–4.61

FH31

4.08–4.39

4.72–5.14

3.80–4.11

4.62–4.9

FH32

4.40–4.87

5.15–5.6

4.12–4.55

5.0–5.5

FH33

4.88–5.3

5.7–6.2

4.56–5.0

5.6–6.0

FH34

Notes
1 Based on 60°C and 75°C wire for 30A or less.
2 Based on 60°C wire for 31 to 95A.
Heaters are packaged in strips of six. Minimum ordering quantity is 12.

Protect the starter against
short circuits by providing
branch circuit protection
per National Electrical
Code® (NEC®).

24
25
V12-T13-30

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

13

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Heater Selection for Types A and B Overload Relays, Sizes 00, 0, 1 and 2 Starters, continued

1

Non-Compensated Open Starters and
Ambient Compensated Open and Enclosed Starters

Non-Compensated
Enclosed Starters

Block-Type Overload
Using Three Heaters

Single-Pole
Type Overload

Block-Type Overload
Using Three Heaters

Single-Pole
Type Overload

Heater
Catalog
Number

5.4–5.9

6.3–6.8

5.1–5.5

6.1–6.6

FH35

6.0–6.4

6.9–7.5

5.6–5.9

6.7–7.3

FH36

6.5–7.1

7.6–8.2

6.0–6.6

7.4–8.0

FH37

7.2–7.8

8.3–9.0

6.7–7.2

8.1–8.7

FH38

7.9–8.5

9.1–9.9

7.3–7.9

8.8–9.7

FH39

Full Load Current of Motor (Amperes) 12
For Sizes 0, 1 and 2 Starters

8.6–9.4

10.0–10.8

8.0–8.7

9.8–10.5

FH40

9.5–10.3

10.9–11.9

8.8–9.5

10.6–11.7

FH41

10.4–11.3

12.0–13.1

9.6–10.5

11.8–12.7

FH42

11.4–12.4

13.2–14.3

10.6–11.5

12.8–14.0

FH43

12.5–13.5

14.4–15.7

11.6–12.6

14.1–15.3

FH44

13.6–14.9

15.8–17.2

12.7–13.8

15.4–16.6

FH45

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

15.0–16.3

—

13.9–15.1

—

FH46

16.4–18.0

—

15.2–16.7

—

FH47

9

17.3–18.9

—

16.7–18.3

FH46

10

For Sizes 1 and 2 Starters
—
—

19.0–20.8

—

18.4–20.0

FH47

18.1–19.8

20.9–22.9

16.8–18.3

20.1–21.9

FH48

19.9–21.7

23.0–25.2

18.4–20.2

22.0–23.9

FH49

21.8–23.9

25.3–27.6

20.3–22.2

24.0–26.2

FH50

24.0–26.2

—

22.3–24.3

—

FH51

—

—

24.4–26.6

—

FH52

13
14

11
12

For Size 2 Starters
—

27.7–30.3

—

26.3–28.8

FH51

26.3–28.7

30.4–33.3

—

28.9–31.4

FH52

28.8–31.4

33.4–36.4

26.7–29.1

31.5–34.5

FH53

31.5–34.0

36.5–39.9

29.2–32.0

34.6–37.9

FH54

34.6–37.9

42.0–43.9

32.1–35.2

38.0–41.9

FH55

38.0–41.5

—

35.3–38.5

42.0–45.0

FH56

41.6–45.0

—

38.6–42.3

—

FH57

15
16
17

Notes
1 Based on 60°C and 75°C wire for 30A or less.
2 Based on 60°C wire for 31 to 95A.

18

Heaters are packaged in strips of six. Minimum ordering quantity is 12.

19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T13-31

13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

Heater Selection for Types A and B Overload Relays,
Sizes 3 and 4 Starters 123

Heater Selection for Types A and B Overload Relays,
Sizes 5 and 6 Starters 4

Ambient
Compensated
Enclosed Starters

Compensated Overload Relay
Non-Compensated
Enclosed Starters

All Applications
Full Load Current of Motor (Amperes)

1

Open Starter
Heater
Catalog
Number

For Sizes 3 and 4 Starters

Enclosed Starter

Full Load Current of Motor (Amperes)

Heater
Catalog
Number

Size 5 (With 300/5 Current Transformers)
—

—

FH23

118–129

118–129

FH24

12.8–14.1

11.9–13.0

FH68

14.2–15.5

13.1–14.3

FH69

130–141

130–141

FH25

FH70

142–155

142–155

FH26

156–170

156–170

FH27

FH72

171–187

171–187

FH28

FH73

188–205

188–205

FH29

206–224

206–224

FH30

FH75

225–244

225–244

FH31

245–263

245–263

FH32

264–292

264–292

FH33

FH78

293–300

—

FH34

Size 6 (With 600/5 Current Transformers)

15.6–17.1
17.2–18.9
19.0–20.8
20.9–22.9
23.0–25.2
25.3–27.8

14.4–15.9
16.0–17.4
17.5–19.1
19.2–21.1
21.2–23.2
23.3–25.6

FH71

FH74

27.9–30.6

25.7–28.1

FH76

30.7–33.5

28.2–30.8

FH77

33.6–37.5

30.9–34.5

37.6–41.5

34.6–38.2

FH79

41.6–46.3

38.3–42.6

FH80

46.4–50
51–55
56–61

42.7–46
47–51
52–56

—

—

FH23

FH81

236–259

236–259

FH24

FH82

260–283

260–283

FH25

284–310

284–310

FH26

311–340

FH27

FH83

62–66

57–61

FH84

311–340

67–73

62–67

FH85

341–374

341–374

FH28

375–411

375–411

FH29

FH87

412–448

412–448

FH30

FH88

449–489

449–489

FH31

490–527

490–527

FH32

For Size 4 Starters

528–585

528–540

FH33

15

93–101

586–600

—

FH34

102–110

92–99

FH90

16

111–122

100–110

FH91

123–129

111–122

FH92

17

130–133

123–128

FH93

—

129–133

FH94

12
13

74–78
79–84
85–92

14

—

18

68–72
73–77
78–84
85–91

—

FH86

FH89

FH89

Size 7 and Larger
Advise full load current
Notes
1 Based on 60°C and 75°C wire for 30A or less.
2 Based on 60°C wire for 31 to 95A.
3 Based on 75°C wire for greater than 95A.
4 Based on 75°C wire.
Heaters are packaged in strips of six. Minimum ordering quantity is 12.

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T13-32

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

13

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

A202 Lighting Contactor
(Electrically Held/
Magnetically Latched)
Originally a Westinghouse
Product

Product History Time Line for A202 Lighting Contactor
(Electrically Held/Magnetically Latched)
Size

Amperes Model

Size 1

30

Size 2

60

Size 3

100

Size 4

200

J

Size 4

200

K

1965

1970

1975

1980

1
1985

1990

1995

2000 Present

2
3
4

Replacement Capabilities

5

A202 Kits for 30 to 200A

6

Description

Poles

30A

60A

100A

200A—
Model J 1

200A—
Model K 2

Contact kit

2

373B331G07

373B331G11

626B187G12

626B187G16

5250C81G16

3

373B331G09

373B331G12

626B187G13

626B187G17

5250C81G17

4

373B331G09

3

5

7

5250C81G18

5

373B331G10

4

6

8

5250C81G19

2, 3, 4

6714C74G03

6714C74G07

6714C74G09

6714C74G11

6714C74G11

30A, Four-Pole Magnetically Latched

Arc box

7
8
9
10

5

6714C74G06

6714C74G08

6714C74G10

6714C74G12

6714C74G12

Cross bar

2–3

—

672B788G32

672B788G36

672B788G36

672B788G40

4–5

—

672B788G34

672B788G38

672B788G38

—

Upper base
(for single rated
coils only)

2–3

—

672B788G33

672B788G37

672B788G37

672B788G52

4–5

—

672B788G35

672B788G39

672B788G39

—

Lower base

2–3

—

1250C33G09

1250C33G03

1250C33G03

1250C33G10

4–5

—

1250C33G05

1250C33G06

1250C33G06

—

13
14

Electrically Held Only
KO spring
(pack of 10)

All

—

503C796G01

503C796G02

503C796G02

672B788G50

Terminal line/load
(pack of 3)

All

—

371B870G03

372B357G12

372B357G13

372B357G13

Notes
1 For 200A A202 Magnetically Latched Lighting Contactors, order three-pole contact kit style 672B788G07.
2 Model K replaces Model J, offering superior design and life characteristics. Renewal parts are different.
Use parts for proper model only.
3 Use quantity two–373B331G11 (two-pole kit).
4 Use one each of 373B331G11 (two-pole kit) and 373B331G12 (three-pole kit).
5 Use quantity two–626B187G12 (two-pole kit).
6 Use one each of 626B187G12 (two-pole kit) and 626B187G13 (three-pole kit).
7 Use quantity two–626B187G16 (two-pole kit).
8 Use one each of 626B187G16 (two-pole kit) and 626B187G17 (three-pole kit).

11
12

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

V12-T13-33

13
1

120V Coil for
Electrically Held
Lighting Contactor—
Style Number
505C633G01

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

AC Coils Electrically Held
30A

60A

Voltage

Hz

Two-, Three-, Four-Pole

Five-Pole

Two-, Three-Pole

Four-, Five-Pole

120/110

60/50

505C806G01

505C808G01

505C806G01

505C818G01

208

60

505C806G02

505C808G02

505C806G02

505C818G02

600/550

60/50

505C806G05

505C808G05

505C806G05

505C818G05

380

50

505C806G07

505C808G07

505C806G07

505C818G07

240/220

60/50

505C806G12

505C808G12

505C806G12

505C818G12

480/440

60/50

505C806G13

505C808G13

505C806G13

505C818G13

5

24

60

505C806G16

N/A

505C806G16

505C818G15

227

60

505C806G18

505C808G16

505C806G18

505C818G16

6

240/480 1

60/60

505C806G03

505C808G03

505C806G03

505C818G03

120/240 1

60/60

505C806G10

505C808G10

505C806G10

505C818G10

Four-, Five-Pole

Two-, Three-Pole

2
3
4

7
AC Coils Electrically Held, continued

8

200A—Model K 2

100 and 200A—Model J
Voltage

Hz

Two-, Three-Pole

120/110

60/50

505C633G01

505C635G01

52050C79G01

5250C80G01

208

60

505C633G02

505C635G02

52050C79G02

5250C80G02

600/550

60/50

505C633G05

505C635G05

52050C79G05

5250C80G05

380

50

505C633G07

505C635G07

52050C79G07

5250C80G07

11

240/220

60/50

505C633G12

505C635G12

52050C79G12

5250C80G12

480/440

60/50

505C633G13

505C635G13

52050C79G13

5250C80G13

12

24

60

505C633G34

N/A

52050C79G34

N/A

9
10

13
14

Four-, Five-Pole

227

60

505C633G14

N/A

52050C79G14

N/A

240/480 1

60/60

505C633G03

505C635G03

52050C79G03

5250C80G03

120/244 1

60/60

505C633G10

505C635G10

52050C79G10

5250C80G10

Notes
1 Dual voltage coils. Use only on contactors or starters originally supplied with a dual voltage coil.
2 Model K replaces Model J. Renewal parts are different. Use parts for proper model only.

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T13-34

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com

13

Motor Control
Contactors, Starters and Brakes

AC Coils Magnetically Latched
Hz

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

Five-Pole

1

110/120

50/60

7874A93G01

7874A93G01

7874A93G01

7874A89G01

2

208/240

50/60

7874A93G02

7874A93G02

7874A93G02

7874A89G02

277

50/60

7874A93G03

7874A93G03

7874A93G03

7874A89G03

440/480

50/60

7874A93G04

7874A93G04

7874A93G04

7874A89G04

575

50/60

7874A93G05

7874A93G05

7874A93G05

7874A89G05

4

110/120

50/60

7874A93G01

7874A93G01

7874A87G01

7874A87G01

5

208/240

50/60

7874A93G02

7874A93G02

7874A87G02

7874A87G02

277

50/60

7874A93G03

7874A93G03

7874A87G03

7874A87G03

440/480

50/60

7874A93G04

7874A93G04

7874A87G04

7874A87G04

110/120

50/60

7874A93G01

7874A93G01

7874A87G01

7874A87G05

7

110/120

50/60

7874A85G01

7874A85G01

7874A83G01

7874A83G01

208/240

50/60

7874A85G02

7874A85G02

7874A83G02

7874A83G02

8

277

50/60

7874A85G03

7874A85G03

7874A83G03

7874A83G03

440/480

50/60

7874A85G04

7874A85G04

7874A83G04

7874A83G04

550/575

50/60

7874A85G05

7874A85G05

7874A83G05

7874A83G05

Voltage
30A

3

60A

6

100 and 200A

9
10

Terminals (Line and Load)

11

Size

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

Five-Pole

30A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

60A

179C755G17

179C755G16

179C755G17 1

179C755G16 + G17 2

100A

179C755G19

179C755G18

179C755G19 1

179C755G18 + G19 2

200A

Model K

Model J

Model K

Model J

Model K

Model J

Model K

Model J

179C755G28

179C755G31

179C755G27

179C755G30

179C755G28 1

179C755G3 1

179C755G27 + G28 2

179C755G30 + G3 2

12
13

Other Accessories
Size

Control Module (Rectifier)